JP6226210B2 - Amusement stand - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a game table represented by a ball game machine (pachinko machine) and a spinning machine (slot machine).

  Game consoles such as pachinko machines are equipped with obstacles that change the direction of the fall of the game ball in the game area of the game board, a winning opening, a starting opening, a variable winning opening, etc. where the game ball can win. It is common. When a game ball wins a prize, a privilege is given to the player such as paying out the prize ball (for example, see Patent Document 1).

  In addition, such game machines are known that have display means.

JP 2008-200302 A

  However, in the conventional game machine, there is room for improvement in the display means.

  In view of the above circumstances, an object of the present invention is to provide a game machine having a feature in display means.

The game stand of the present invention that solves the above-described object is as follows.
Operation means provided at a position where the player can operate;
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect display;
A game machine equipped with
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
One of the plurality of types of effect display is a first effect display,
One of the plurality of types of effect display is a second effect display,
The first effect display is an effect display related to the decorative symbol variation display,
The second effect display is a mini game effect display,
The first effect display is an effect display including a first operation promotion display,
The second effect display is an effect display including a second operation promotion display,
The first operation promotion display is a display prompting the operation of the operation means,
The second operation promotion display is a display prompting the operation of the operation means,
The first operation promotion display and the second operation promotion display are different operation promotion displays,
The first effect display is demonstration display that may jackpot notice is executed,
The second effect display is an effect display in which a second notice may be executed ,
If the previous SL first operation promoting display is displayed, the big hit notice in response to said operation means is operated (hereinafter, referred to as "first notice".) Is displayed,
When the second operation promotion display is displayed, the second notice is displayed in response to the operation means being operated,
The first notice is a notice that can be displayed in a plurality of modes (hereinafter referred to as “a plurality of first notice modes”),
One of the plurality of first notice modes is a first mode,
One of the plurality of first notice modes is a second mode,
The second notice is a notice that can be displayed in a plurality of modes (hereinafter referred to as “a plurality of second notice modes”),
One of the plurality of second notice modes is a third mode,
One of the plurality of second notice modes is a fourth mode,
The second notice of the fourth aspect is a notice suggesting that the aspect of the first notice changes,
In some cases, both the first operation promotion display and the second operation promotion display are displayed (hereinafter referred to as “first state”).
When the operation means is operated in the first state, at least one of the first notice and the second notice is executed,
In the first state, depending on the operation means being operated, the first state may be changed to the second state,
The second state is a state in which the first operation promotion display is displayed and the second notice is displayed in the fourth mode.
In the second state, depending on the operation means being operated, the second state may be changed to the third state,
The third state is a state in which the second notice of the fourth aspect is displayed and the first notice is displayed in the first aspect.
In the third state, the first notice of the first aspect changes to the second aspect in connection with the second notice of the fourth aspect being displayed.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to realize a gaming machine characterized by display means.

It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 concerning the 1st form of this embodiment from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the back side. 1 is a schematic front view of a game board 200 of a pachinko machine 100 viewed from the front. 3 is a circuit block diagram of a control unit of the pachinko machine 100. FIG. It is an example of the display pattern of the pachinko machine 100, (a) shows an example of the stop display design of Special Figure 1, (b) shows an example of the stop display design of Special Figure 2, (c) is a decorative design (D) is a figure which shows an example of a usual stop display symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part main process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a special figure prefetch process. It is a figure which shows an example of the prefetch result memory | storage part for special figures 1 and 2 for special figures. It is a figure explaining the content of the determination table. It is a figure explaining the content of the special figure determination table. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100, (a) is a flowchart of a 1st sub control part main process, (b) is a 1st sub control part command reception interruption. 4 is a flowchart of the process, (c) is a flowchart of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, and (d) is a flowchart of the first sub control unit image control process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 2nd sub control part 500 of the pachinko machine 100, (a) is a flowchart of a 2nd sub control part main process, (b) is a 2nd sub control part command reception interruption. It is a flowchart of a process, (c) is a flowchart of a 2nd sub control part timer interruption process. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 of the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 14 in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect in another case following FIG.15 (q) in steps. (A) is a figure explaining the example of a display of a notice icon, (b) is a figure explaining the notice icon display area information storage area memorize | stored in RAM408, (c) is a figure of a notice icon. It is a figure explaining an example of a digestion timing, (d) is a figure explaining an example of the increase timing of a notice icon. (A) is a figure explaining an example of the notice icon before a change, (b) is a figure explaining an example of the notice icon after a change. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 19 in steps. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 20 in steps. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 21 in steps. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 22 in steps. It is a figure which shows the other example effects of the increase effect of a notice icon in steps. It is a figure which shows the other example effects of the increase effect of a notice icon in steps. It is a figure which shows the other example effects of the increase effect of a notice icon in steps. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other examples of the notice icon digest effect. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other examples of the notice icon digest effect. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other examples of the notice icon digest effect. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other examples of the notice icon digest effect. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 31 in steps. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 32 in steps. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 33 in steps. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 34 in steps. It is a figure which shows the other example effects of the increase effect of a notice icon in steps. It is a figure which shows the other example effects of the increase effect of a notice icon in steps. It is a figure which shows the other example effects of the increase effect of a notice icon in steps. It is a figure which shows the production example in which a notice icon changes in steps. It is a figure which shows the example of a display at the time of a power failure and a power recovery during the display of a notice icon in steps. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other example effects of the notice icon increase effect and digestion effect. It is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the production shown in FIG. 41 in steps. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other examples of the notice icon digest effect. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other examples of the notice icon digest effect. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other example effects of the notice icon increase effect and digestion effect. It is a figure which shows the modification example of the increase effect of a notice icon applicable to this embodiment, and the digestion effect in steps. 47 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows another modification of the increase effect of a notice icon applicable to this embodiment, and a digestion effect in steps. It is a figure which shows another modification of the increase effect of a notice icon applicable to this embodiment, and a digestion effect in steps. It is a figure which shows another modification of the digestion effect of the notice icon applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows another modification of the increase effect of a notice icon applicable to this embodiment, and a digestion effect in steps. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other examples of the notice icon digest effect. It is a figure shown in steps about the example of production using the movable means applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other examples of the notice icon increase effect. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other examples of the notice icon increase effect. It is a figure which shows another modification of the increase effect of the notice icon applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other examples of the notice icon increase effect. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other example effects of the notice icon increase effect and digestion effect. It is a figure which shows another modification of the increase effect of a notice icon applicable to this embodiment, and a digestion effect in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the production | presentation which can be performed in the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of this embodiment in steps. It is a figure explaining the lottery table regarding notice item. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other examples of notice icon increase effect and digestion effect applicable to this embodiment. FIG. 63 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 62 in stages. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other examples of notice icon increase effect and digestion effect applicable to this embodiment. FIG. 65 is a diagram showing a continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 64 in stages. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other examples of the notice icon increase effect applicable to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other examples of the notice icon increase effect applicable to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other examples of the notice icon increase effect applicable to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other examples of the notice icon increase effect applicable to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows the other example of effects which concerns on this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other examples of the notice icon increase effect applicable to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other examples of the notice icon increase effect applicable to the present embodiment. It is a figure explaining the relationship between a notice icon and a tutorial display. It is a figure which shows in step-by-step other examples of the notice icon increase effect applicable to the present embodiment. It is a schematic explanatory diagram showing an example of the structure of the effect device 206 in the game board 200 applicable in the present embodiment. It is a figure shown in steps about an example of the hold change notice effect as a prefetch notice effect by the hold icon applicable to the embodiment. FIG. 77 is a diagram showing the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 76 in stages. It is a figure shown in steps about other examples of a reservation change notice effect. FIG. 78 is a diagram showing a modification of the effect shown in FIG. 77. FIG. 78 is a diagram showing another modification of the effect shown in FIG. 77. It is a figure shown in steps about an example of the super reach production applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure shown in steps about other examples of a reservation change notice effect. It is a figure shown in steps about other examples of a reservation change notice effect. It is a figure shown in steps about other examples of a reservation change notice effect. It is a figure shown in steps about other examples of a reservation change notice effect. It is a figure shown in steps about other examples of a reservation change notice effect. It is a figure shown in steps about other examples of a reservation change notice effect. It is a figure shown in steps about other examples of a reservation change notice effect. It is a figure shown in steps about other examples of a reservation change notice effect. It is a figure shown in steps about an example of the symbol fluctuation display applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure shown in steps about another example of the expansion effect of a hold display frame. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect of the pachinko machine 100 by Example 1 of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect of the pachinko machine 100 by Example 2 of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect of the pachinko machine 100 by Example 3 of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect of the pachinko machine 100 by Example 4 of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect of the pachinko machine 100 by Example 5 of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect of the pachinko machine 100 by Examples 5-9 of this embodiment. It is a figure shown in steps about an example of the effect of the mini game applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure shown in steps about another example of the effect of a mini game. It is a figure shown in steps about another example of the effect of a mini game. It is a figure shown in steps about another example of the effect of a mini game. It is a figure shown in steps about another example of the effect of a mini game. It is a figure shown in steps about another example of the effect of a mini game. It is a figure shown in steps about another example of the effect of a mini game. It is a figure shown in steps about another example of the effect of a mini game. It is a figure shown in steps about another example of the effect of a mini game. It is a figure shown in steps about another example of the effect of a mini game. It is a figure shown in steps about another example of the effect of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. 109 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. 108. FIG. It is a figure shown in steps about another example of the effect of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown in steps about another example of the effect of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown in steps about another example of the effect of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown in steps about another example of the effect of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown in steps about another example of the effect of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown in steps about another example of the effect of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown in steps about another example of the effect of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown in steps about another example of the effect of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown in steps about another example of the effect of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown in steps about another example of the effect of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown in steps about another example of the effect of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown in steps about another example of the effect of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown in steps about another example of the effect of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown in steps about another example of the effect of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown in steps about another example of the effect of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown in steps about another example of the effect of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown in steps about another example of the effect of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown in steps about another example of the effect of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown in steps about another example of the effect of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown in steps about another example of the effect of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown in steps about another example of the effect of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown in steps about another example of the effect of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown in steps about another example of the effect of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown in steps about another example of the effect of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown in steps about another example of the effect of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown in steps about another example of the effect of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown in steps about another example of the effect of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is a figure shown in steps about another example of the effect of the mini game performed in the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment. It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 concerning the 2nd form of this embodiment from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back side. It is the schematic front view which looked at the game board from the front. The circuit block diagram of a control part is shown. (A) An example of the stop symbol form of the special figure is shown. (B) An example of a stop symbol form of a decorative symbol is shown. (C) An example of a usual stop display symbol is shown. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part main process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a main control part timer interruption process. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process which CPU of a 1st sub control part performs. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interruption process of a 1st sub control part. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interruption process of a 1st sub control part. (C) It is a flowchart of the image control process of a 1st sub control part. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process which CPU504 of the 2nd sub control part 500 performs. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interruption process of the 2nd sub control part 500. FIG. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interruption process of the 2nd sub control part 500. FIG. (A) is a figure which shows the operation key unit 137 shown in FIG. 1, (b) is a figure which shows the operation key unit 137 typically. It is a figure which shows the example of a display in a menu screen. FIG. 157 is a diagram showing a continuation of the display example on the menu screen shown in FIG. 148. It is a figure explaining an example of a pseudo-continuous production. It is a figure explaining an example of a chance eye effect. It is a figure explaining an example of a cut-in effect. It is a figure explaining an example of a cut-in effect. It is a figure explaining an example of a reservation change notice. It is a figure explaining an example of the production using the production movable body. It is a figure explaining an example of the production | presentation by single operation of a production | presentation button. It is a figure explaining an example of the production | presentation by single operation of a production | presentation button. It is a figure explaining an example of the production | presentation by single operation of a production | presentation button. It is a figure explaining an example of the production | presentation by the continuous hit operation of a production | presentation button. It is a figure which shows a mode that the long press automatic continuous hit is performed in the production | presentation by the continuous strike operation of a production | presentation button. It is a figure which shows a mode that the long press automatic continuous hit is performed in the production | presentation by the continuous strike operation of a production | presentation button. It is a figure explaining an example of the production | presentation by the continuous hit operation of a production | presentation button. It is a figure which shows a mode that the pending | holding change notice is performed during the production | presentation by the continuous hit operation of the production | presentation button. It is a figure explaining an example of the production by long press operation of a production button. It is a figure explaining an example of the production by long press operation of a production button. It is a figure which shows a mode that the continuous striking operation is performed in the production | presentation by long press operation of a production | presentation button. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific effect example in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific effect example in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific effect example in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure shown about an example of the production which operates a production button according to a rhythm. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific effect example in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific effect example using two effect buttons. It is a figure explaining an example of a character selection production. It is a figure explaining an example of a character selection production. It is a figure explaining an example of a character selection production. It is a figure explaining an example of a character selection production. It is a figure which shows an example of the selection effect performed during a symbol fluctuation display. It is a figure explaining an example of the production | presentation by the continuous hit operation of a production | presentation button. It is a figure explaining an example of a back button effect. It is a figure explaining an example of the production by long press operation of a production button. It is a figure which shows an example of the specific effect example in the pachinko machine of this embodiment. It is a figure explaining an example of a chance eye effect. It is a figure explaining the other example of a display of a menu screen. It is a figure which shows a mode that the initial setting of a production | presentation movable body is performed. 1 is a front view of a sealed pachinko machine to which the present invention is applicable. It is the schematic front view which looked at the slot machine 1000 as a game stand by the modification of this invention from the front. It is a figure which shows the game stand by the modification of this invention, (a) shows the casino machine 2000, (b) shows the mobile telephone 3000 provided with the memory | storage part which memorize | stores the electronic data which implement | achieves this invention, (C) shows a portable game machine 4000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention, and (d) shows a home television set having a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention. The game machine 5000 is shown, (e) has shown the data server 6000 which memorize | stored the electronic data which implement | achieves this invention.

  Hereinafter, a gaming machine (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine 100 or a spinning machine such as a slot machine) according to the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side).

  The pachinko machine 100 is a game machine that allows a player to obtain profits when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a ball storage door 108, and a launcher. The apparatus 110 and the game board 200 are provided on the front surface (player side).

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation sales shop.

  The main body 104 is a door member that is provided inside the outer frame 102, has a locking function, and serves as a longitudinal rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. . The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space 114 inside. A store clerk at the store (amusement store) in which the pachinko machine 100 is installed can open and close the main body 104 and is provided with a main body opening sensor 1041 for detecting that the main body 104 is opened.

  The front frame door 106 has a locking function and is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 via a hinge portion 112 so as to be openable and closable. Is a door member having an opening 116. A shop clerk can also open and close the front frame door 106 and is provided with a front frame door sensor for detecting that the front frame door 106 is opened. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A space in which the game area 124 is provided is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. In the present embodiment, an LED having a light source is also referred to as a lamp.

  The door 108 with a ball storage tray is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a locking function and be openable and closable. The door 108 with a ball storage tray is opened by pressing a release lever (not shown) that can be operated with the front frame door 106 opened. In addition, you may provide the door sensor with a ball storage tray which detects that the door 108 with a ball storage tray opened. The ball storage tray-equipped door 108 is capable of storing a plurality of game balls (hereinafter simply referred to as “balls”), and an upper plate 126 provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. A lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the player's operation, A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to a game ball collection container (common name, dollar box) by operation, and a game ball guided to the launching device 110 by operation of the player The ball launching handle 134 for launching into the game area 124, the effect button 136 for changing the effect mode of the various effect devices 206 (see FIG. 3) by the player's operation, and the effect button 136 are incorporated in the effect button 136. Chance button lamp 138 for causing button 136 to emit light, ball lending operation button 140 for giving a ball lending instruction to a card unit (CR unit) installed in a game store, and a return instruction for a player's balance to the card unit And a ball lending display unit (not shown) for displaying the player's balance and card unit status. Further, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is provided with a lower pan full tank detection sensor (not shown) for detecting that the lower pan 128 is filled with game balls. Further, an operation key unit 137 is also provided.

  The launching device 110 is attached to the lower side of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. . While the ball launching handle 134 is continuously being fired by the player, the launching device 110 sends the game ball to the game area 124 of the game board every time a predetermined firing period (for example, 0.6 seconds) elapses. This is an example of a launching means. It is also possible to provide a right-handed button that can maximize the firing intensity by being pressed while the ball launching handle 134 is being manipulated.

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104. In FIG. 1, the specific configuration of the game area 124 is not shown, and the specific configuration is shown in FIG.

  FIG. 2 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 1 viewed from the back side.

  The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a lower part of the ball tank 150 that is positioned below the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding a ball passing through the formed communication hole and dropping to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side in the rear view.

  The payout device 152 is formed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside. The payout device 152 is detachable, and is connected to the downstream end of the tank rail 154 when mounted at a predetermined position.

  The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor. The sprocket passes through the tank rail 154 and temporarily flows into the payout device 152, and temporarily rotates by a predetermined angle by driving the payout motor. Thus, the temporarily accumulated game balls are sent one by one downward to the payout device 152. In other words, the payout device 152 is a kind of a ball feeding device that applies a driving force to a game ball and conveys the game ball.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket. When the game ball is passing, either a high signal or a low signal is passed. Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the dispensing control unit 600. The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor passes through a ball rail (not shown) and reaches the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100. The pachinko machine 100 is provided with a predetermined grant. Based on the establishment of the condition, the player is given (paid out) with an amount of game value (game ball) corresponding to the grant condition.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control section 300 (see FIG. 4) that performs overall game control processing, and processing information generated by the main control section 300 are displayed. Based on the processing information generated by the first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 (see FIG. 4) that performs control processing related to the production, and the first sub-control unit 400. The second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the second sub-control unit 500 (see FIG. 4) that performs control processing related to effects, and the payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to game ball payout ( 4) and a payout board case 172 for storing a payout board 170 having an error release switch 168 for releasing an error by the operation of a game clerk. A launch board case 176 that houses a launch board 174 that constitutes a launch controller 630 (see FIG. 4) that performs control processing, and a power source controller 660 (see FIG. 4) that supplies power to various electrical gaming machines are configured. A power supply board case 184 that houses a power supply board 182 that includes a power switch 178 that turns the power on and off by an operation of a game store clerk and a RAM clear switch 180 that is operated when the power is turned on and outputs a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300; In addition, a CR interface unit 186 for transmitting and receiving signals between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit is provided.

  FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front.

  In the game board 200, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined.

  An effect device 206 is disposed in the approximate center of the game area 124. The effect device 206 is provided with a decorative symbol display device 208 substantially in the center, and around the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, and the ordinary device. A symbol holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high-probability medium lamp 222 are provided. Hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as “general symbol”, and one or more of the special symbol, the first special symbol, and the second special symbol may be referred to as “special symbol”.

  The effect device 206 performs the effect by operating the effect movable body 224, and details thereof will be described later.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects. In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 is constituted by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas, a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a and the middle symbol display area 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Furthermore, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, although the liquid crystal display device is employ | adopted as the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, it is not a liquid crystal display device, What is necessary is just the structure which can display various effects and various game information, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be employed.

  The general map display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general map, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in this embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying special figures, and in the present embodiment, are constituted by 7 segment LEDs. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are predetermined symbol display means. The decorative symbol displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is a symbol that represents the symbol displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 or the second special symbol display device 214 in an enhanced form. The display device 208 may also be a predetermined symbol display means.

  The universal figure hold lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of predetermined first variable games (detailed universal figure variable games to be described later) that are held, and in this embodiment, a predetermined number of common figure variable games are displayed. It is possible to hold up to (for example, four).

  The first special figure hold lamp 218 and the second special figure hold lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of predetermined second variable games (a special figure variable game to be described later in detail) that are being held. In the embodiment, it is possible to hold a special figure variable game up to a predetermined number (for example, four, eight for the first special figure and the second special figure). The term “hold” as used herein means that the start of various determination processes (such as lottery processes) based on start-up information described later is put on hold.

  The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp (notification means) for performing notification indicating the current symbol control state. This high-probability lamp 222 is configured so as to give a notification indicating the current symbol control state from the time the power is turned on until the start of the big hit game, and thereafter does not notify the current symbol control state. Yes. In the symbol control state, when the power is turned on again, the symbol control state immediately before the power is turned off is restored. This symbol control state will be described later, but the symbol control state here may be any one of a normal state, a short-time state (electric support state), and a probability variation state. It is good also as one state in the state without special figure certain change.

  In the present specification, the term “control state” will be used to describe the state inside the gaming machine (pachinko machine 100). The term “control state” includes the concept of a so-called gaming state.

  In addition, a general prize opening 226, a general figure starting opening 228, a first special figure starting opening 230, a second special figure starting opening 232, and a variable winning opening 234 are provided around the effect device 206. ing.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning holes 226 are arranged on the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning holes 226 (in the general winning holes 226). In the case of winning), the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 2 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10) of balls are discharged as prize balls to the upper plate 126 shown in FIG. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the upper plate 126. With these configurations, the player can pay out the winning balls to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. In this embodiment, a ball to be paid out to a player as a consideration for winning may be referred to as a “prize ball”, and a ball lent to a player may be referred to as a “lending ball”. They are called “balls (game balls)”.

  The normal start port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124. In this embodiment, the left side of the game board 200 is used. One is arranged. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the usual starting port 228 is not discharged to the amusement island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has passed through the general map starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a general map variable game by the general map display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one first special figure starting port 230 is disposed at the center of the game board 200. The first special figure starting port 230 is a first starting region where the size of the entrance through which the game ball enters does not change. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, the payout device 152 shown in FIG. 2 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls is used as a prize ball. At the same time, the special figure changing game is started by the first special figure display device 212. The ball that has entered the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. The first special figure starting port 230 is one of the starting regions, and corresponds to an example of a fixed starting region in which the size of the first special diagram starting port 230 does not change.

  In the present embodiment, only one second special figure start port 232 is disposed below the general view start port 228. That is, the second special figure starting port 232 is provided on the right side of the game board 200. In the vicinity of the second special figure starting port 232, a pair of blade members 2321 that can be opened and closed by a solenoid are provided. A combination of the pair of blade members 2321 and the second special figure starting port 232 is provided. It corresponds to a variable starting means and is generally called an electric tulip (electric chew). The pair of blade members 2321 are members that change the difficulty level of winning a prize to the second special figure starting port 232. That is, when the pair of blade members 2321 is closed, it is impossible to enter the second special figure starting port 232, and the mode in which the pair of blade members 2321 is closed is an open / close mode in which winning is difficult. On the other hand, when the universal figure change game is won and the universal figure display device 210 stops and displays the symbol, the pair of blade members 2321 are opened and closed at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times, and the second special figure starting port 232 is opened. The ball can be entered (easy winning state), and the open state in which the pair of blade members 2321 are open is an easy winning state. In other words, the second special figure starting port 232 has either a small size (corresponding to the first size) or a large size (corresponding to the second size) of the entrance (game ball entrance). A variable starting area in which the ease of entering a game ball, which changes from one size to the other, is equivalent to an example of a second starting area. The size of the large size is larger than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230. In the state where the pair of blade members 2321 are opened, out of the game balls that have entered the game area 124, the second special feature that is the variable start area is more than the game ball that has entered the first special figure start opening 230 that is the fixed start area. There are more game balls entering the starting port 232 in the figure. On the other hand, the size of the small size is smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special figure starting port 230 or smaller than the size of the entrance of the first special diagram starting port 230. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  In the present embodiment, only one variable winning port 234 is disposed below the center of the game board 200. The variable prize opening 234 includes a variable prize opening and a door member 2341 that can be opened and closed by a solenoid. The variable winning opening may be referred to as a big winning opening, and the variable winning opening 234 may be referred to as an attacker. The door member 2341 changes its state from any one of a predetermined closed state and an open state in which a game ball can easily enter the variable winning opening more than the closed state. Both the closed state and the open state are stationary states, and the closed state is a predetermined first stationary state. The closed state at the variable winning opening 234 of this embodiment is that the door member 2341 is on the player side of the game board 200. It is in a stationary state that matches the surface. On the other hand, the open state is a predetermined second stationary state, and the open state in the variable winning opening 234 of the present embodiment is rotated to the player side until the door member 2341 is substantially perpendicular to the game board 200. It is stationary. The variable winning opening 234 is kept closed until a jackpot game to be described later is started, and when the jackpot game is started, the state change is repeated between the open state and the closed state. Note that the closed state may be a state where the game ball is slightly opened to the extent that it is substantially impossible to enter, in addition to a completely closed state. Further, the variable winning opening is not limited to the one shown in FIG. 3 as long as it becomes a winning of the game ball by passing or entering the game ball. When the special figure variable game is won and the first special figure display device 212 or the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the big hit symbol, the door member 2341 opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball that entered the variable winning opening 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  Further, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and start openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won a prize or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

  The sphere accommodated in the upper plate 126 is supplied to the firing position of the firing rail. In this pachinko machine 100, the launch motor is driven with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the player's ball launch handle 134, and the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the launcher 146 and the launcher 148 into the game area 124. Launch. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the advancing direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and a winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234) or start opening (Outside the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232), winning out any winning port or starting port, or just passing through the normal start port 228, the out port 240 To reach.

<Directing device 206>
Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  On the front side of the effect device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are arranged in an area where the game ball can roll, and an effect movable body 224 is arranged in an area where the game ball cannot roll. . In addition, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door) are disposed on the back side of the effect device 206. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are positioned behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the effect movable body 224.

  The warp device 242 discharges the game balls that have entered the warp inlet 242a provided at the upper left of the effect device 206 to the stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b.

  The stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b or a ball naild by the game nail 238, etc., and the passed ball enters the first special figure starting port 230 at the center of the stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate the ball.

  In this embodiment, the effect movable body 224 includes an upper arm 224a and a forearm 224b imitating the upper arm and forearm of a human right arm, and an upper arm motor and an elbow (not shown) that rotate the upper arm 224a to the position of the shoulder. A forearm motor (not shown) that rotates the forearm 224b at a position is provided. The effect movable body 224 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

  The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-like left door 246a and right door 246b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right as the belt driven by the motor through the pulley moves. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding device 246 covers the inner end portions of the shielding device 246 so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, each inner end portion slightly overlaps the outer end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, respectively, for example, only a part of the decorative design so that the player can identify which decorative design the displayed decorative design is. Can be shielded. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b may be configured so that a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 behind the lattice hole can be visually recognized, or the shoji part of the lattice hole is closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be made vaguely visible to the player, or the shoji part of the holes in the lattice is completely blocked (shielded), and the decorative symbol display device 208 behind is made completely invisible. Also good.

  The decoration lamps such as the speaker 120 and the frame lamp 122 shown in FIG. 1, the decoration symbol display device 208, the effect movable body 224, and the shielding device 246 shown in FIG. 3 correspond to effect means, and among these, the decoration symbol display device 208 Corresponds to an example of a decorative symbol display means.

  Further, on the game board 200, a spec sticker 290 representing the specifications of the game table is pasted at a position where it can be seen by the player.

  Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. The first sub-control unit 400 that performs control, the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and the main control unit 300 according to the command transmitted by the main control unit 300 Are provided with a payout control unit 600 for performing control relating to payout of game balls, a launch control unit 630 for performing launch control of game balls, and a power supply control unit 660 for controlling the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. Yes.

  First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, a time And a timer circuit 312 for measuring the number of times and a WDT 314 for monitoring an abnormality in the program processing. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  The basic circuit 302 has a random value generation circuit (counter circuit) 318 (a counter circuit) 318 (used as a hardware random number counter that changes a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 every time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received. This circuit includes two counters) and a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball passing through each start port, winning port, variable winning port, or opening the front frame door A sensor circuit for receiving signals output from various sensors 320 including a sensor, an inner frame opening sensor, and a lower plate full sensor, and outputting an amplification result and a comparison result with a reference voltage to the random value generation circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302 322, a predetermined symbol display device, for example, a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214, and a predetermined A drive circuit 326 for performing display control of a symbol display device, for example, the general symbol display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example, a general symbol hold lamp 216, a special figure 1 hold lamp 218, a special figure 2 hold lamp 220, A drive circuit 330 for performing display control of the high-accuracy lamp 222 and the like, and various movable members such as a blade member 2321 of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 and a door member 2341 of the variable winning port 234 and the like. A drive circuit 334 for controlling the solenoid 332 is connected. In this example, the crystal oscillator 316a and the random value generation circuit 318 are provided separately, but the crystal oscillator 316a may be included in the random value generation circuit 318.

  When the sphere detection sensor 320 detects that a sphere is won at the special figure 1 starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the sphere has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318. Upon receiving this signal, the random value generation circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special figure 1 starting port 230, and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value corresponding to the special figure 1 starting port 230. Store in the register. Similarly, when the random value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the ball has won the special figure 2 starting port 232, the random number generation circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232. The latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 passes through this information output circuit 336, an external terminal board 349, and an external hall computer (not shown). The game information (for example, game state) of the pachinko machine 100 is output to the information input circuit 350 included in.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 is a voltage value of the power source. Is lower than a predetermined value (9 V in this example), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When the activation signal is input, game control is started (main control unit main processing described later is started).

  The main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. Communication with the 1 sub control part 400 and the payout control part 600 is enabled. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication. The main control unit 300 sends commands and the like to the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. The first sub-control unit 400 is configured not to transmit a signal such as a command to the main control unit 300. However, the information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 may be performed by bidirectional communication. The payout control unit 600 is configured to transmit a signal such as a command to the main control unit 300, but is configured not to transmit a signal such as a command from the payout control unit 600 to the main control unit 300. Also good.

  Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based mainly on commands transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time and frequency. It is installed. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The basic circuit 402 is provided with a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effect data. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs.

  The basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC (S-ROM) 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier) and a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138). A driving circuit 432 for controlling the driving of the shielding device 246, a shielding device sensor 430 for detecting the current position of the shielding device 246, a chance button sensor 426 for detecting the pressing of the chance button 136, and an output from the speaker 120. A volume adjustment switch (not shown) for adjusting the volume to be operated, an operation unit sensor (not shown) for detecting pressing of each button of the setting operation unit 137, and a detection signal from these sensors is output to the basic circuit 402. Based on the signals from the sensor circuit 428 and the CPU 404, the image data stored in the ROM 406 is read out. A VDP (Video Display Processor) 434 which generates display image using a work area of VRAM436 displaying an image on a decorative symbol display device 208, is connected to.

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. ing. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 512 for measuring time, the number of times, and the like. doing. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The basic circuit 502 is provided with a ROM 506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, and the like are stored.

  The basic circuit 502 includes a drive circuit 516 for controlling the drive of the effect movable body 224, an effect movable body sensor 424 that detects the current position of the effect movable body 224, and a detection signal from the effect movable body sensor 424. Is output to the basic circuit 502, a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532, and a game table frame lamp drive for controlling the game table frame lamp 542 The circuit 540 is connected to a serial communication control circuit 520 that performs lighting control by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game stand frame lamp drive circuit 540.

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 mainly based on a command signal or the like transmitted from the main control unit 300, and wins or rents a ball based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604. It is detected whether or not the payout has been completed. Further, the payout control unit 600 communicates with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606. In addition, the payout control unit 600 has received a prize ball information indicating that a predetermined number (for example, 10) of prize balls has been paid out, or has paid out a predetermined number (for example, 25) of rental balls. The ball rental information indicating this is output to the information input circuit 350 via the external terminal board 349. A frame sensor 605 is connected to the payout control unit 600. The frame sensor 605 detects when the front frame door 106 is opened, and outputs an open signal. When the dispensing control unit 600 outputs the opening signal from the frame sensor 605, the dispensing control unit 600 outputs door opening information to the main control unit 300.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 to permit or stop the launch, or a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134 to operate the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Control of the launch motor 632 that drives the launcher 146 and launcher 148, and control of the ball feeder 634 that supplies the launcher 110 with a ball from the upper plate 126 based on a control signal that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount. I do.

  The power control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a DC voltage, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the payout device 152, etc. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, a power supply circuit) for supplying power to a predetermined part (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, a power supply of a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the second sub control unit 500, and the launch are supplied from the payout control unit 600. Although a power source having a predetermined voltage is supplied to the control unit 630, a power source having a predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit or each device through another power source path.

  Next, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the universal figure display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed using FIGS. The types of special maps and general maps to be described will be described.

  The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor, which is a ball detection sensor, detects that a ball has entered the special view 1 start port 230, and the ball enters the special view 2 start port 232 The special figure 2 variable game is started on condition that the second starting port sensor which is a ball detection sensor detects that the ball has been balled. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special figure display device 212 repeats the lighting of all the seven segments and the lighting of the central one segment “variable display of special figure 1” (special figure). (Floating game). When the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special figure display device 214 repeats the lighting of all the seven segments and the lighting of the central one segment “variable display of special figure 2” ( (Special map variable game). Then, when the variation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 elapses, the first special figure display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 1, and the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation of the special figure 2 When elapses, the second special figure display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 2. Hereinafter, the fluctuation display from the start of “fluctuation display of special figure 1 or 2” to the stop display of the special symbol form of special figure 1 or 2 may be referred to as special figure fluctuation display. This special figure variation display may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

  Fig.5 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 1. FIG. FIG. 5 (a) shows nine types of special drawings from “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure I”. In FIG. 5A, the white portions in the figure indicate the segment locations where the light is turned off, and the black portions indicate the location where the segments are turned on.

  In the present embodiment, seven types of jackpot symbols ("Special Figure A" to "Special Figure G") are prepared as the stop pattern form of the special figure. “Special Figure A” is a 15-round (R) jackpot design, which is a 15R probable big hit design that can be expected to win in all of the 15 rounds, and “Special Figure B” is a 15R jackpot design. There are 5 rounds out of 15 rounds, and you can expect to get a lottery, but in the remaining rounds, you ca n’t expect to get a lottery. The special figure C is a 15R jackpot design. The 15R-Rank Up Bonus (RUB) symbol that can be expected to win in all of the 15 rounds, and “Special Figure D” is a 15R jackpot symbol, 8 of 15 rounds. It is a real 8R-RUB that cannot be expected in the remaining rounds, while it can be expected in one round, and “Special E” is a 15R jackpot symbol. It is a real 4R-RUB that cannot be expected in the remaining rounds, while it can be expected in 4 rounds of the und, and “Special Figure F” is a 5R regular jackpot symbol. “G” is a 2R jackpot symbol, and is a 2R probability jackpot symbol referred to as a latent probability variation or a hidden probability variation that cannot be expected in any round. Here, the rank-up bonus is, for example, a big hit that directs the player in a manner that makes it difficult for the player to specify how long a round that can be expected to be obtained at the start of the big hit will continue. (9th or 9th round), it is a big hit that directs the player whether or not the round in which the player can expect to win the ball will continue.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, determination of whether or not a big hit in the special figure variable game is made by lottery of hardware random numbers, and determination of whether or not a special big hit is made by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the normal jackpot and the probable bonus jackpot is the difference in whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (probability jackpot) or low (normal jackpot) in the next special figure variation game. Hereinafter, a state with a high probability of winning the jackpot is referred to as a special figure high probability state (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “special figure certain change” or simply “probable change”), and a state with a low probability is specially designated. This is called a low probability state. Moreover, after the big hit game is over, there is a case where the state shifts to a short time state (electric support state). Here, the electric support state is a predetermined value in which the player's advantage is higher than the non-electric support state by shortening the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variable game to the start of the next big hit. It means a state. Although the short time will be described in detail later, the short time state is referred to as a normal high probability state (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “general probability change”), and the non-short time state is referred to as a general low probability state. In this way, the electric support state (short time state) is started on condition that the big hit game ends. Strictly speaking, the “electric support state” is a state related to a general plan, and the “short-time state” is a state related to a special figure or a state related to a general figure and a special figure. A short time flag is prepared in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, and when the short time flag is set to ON, it is in the electric support state and is usually in a high probability state. In the normal figure high probability state, compared to the normal figure low probability state, it becomes easier to win the common figure variable game (general figure certain change). For example, the winning probability of the usual figure floating game is 1/100 in the usual figure low probability state (non-electric support state), but increases to 99/100 in the usual figure high probability state (electric support state). In addition, in the electric support state, the fluctuation time of the general figure change game is shorter than that in the non-electric support state (the general figure change short). For example, in the non-electric support state, the variation time of the usual variable game of 10 seconds is shortened to 2 seconds in the electric support state. Further, in the electric support state, compared to the non-electric support state, the opening time in one opening of the blade member 2321 of the special figure 2 starting port 232 tends to be long (extension of the electric chew opening period). For example, in the non-electric support state, the electric chew release period of 0.5 seconds is extended to 2 seconds in the electric support state. Further, the blade member 2321 is more likely to open in the electric support state than in the non-electric support state (increase in the number of times the electric chew is released). For example, the blade member 2321 that opens only once in the non-electric support state per opening to the normal start port 228 opens twice in the electric support state (opens for 2 seconds, closes for 1 second, and then closes for 2 seconds) Open). The probability of entering the special figure 2 starting port 232 increases due to the extension of the electric chew release period and the increase in the number of electric chew release times. Note that the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game. Therefore, the non-electric support state is maintained during the big hit game. This is because, especially in a big hit game, a game ball is picked up by an electric Chu with a small number of winning balls, and if the winning of a game ball to the variable winning opening (attacker) 234 decreases, there may be a disadvantage to the player. Because there is. In the present embodiment, in the electric support state (short-time state), all of the normal figure change, the universal figure change, the electric chew release period extension, and the electric chew release frequency increase are performed. If any one is performed, a player's advantage will be in a high state and it may be in an electric support state (short time state). Alternatively, if either one of the extension of the electric chew release period or the increase in the number of electric chew releases is performed, the electric support state (short time state) may be set. In the non-electric support state, the game ball is less likely to enter the special figure 2 starting port 232 than in the electric support state. As described above, the special figure 2 starting port 232 changes between a difficult-to-win state in which a game ball is difficult to enter and an easy-to-win state in which a game ball is easy to enter. The special figure 2 starting port 232 is in an easy-to-win state in the electric support state for a longer period than in the non-electric support state. In the present embodiment, when “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure E” are stopped and displayed, the electric support state (ordinary figure high probability state) until the next big hit game is started after the subsequent big hit game is finished. ) Is maintained and “Special Figure F” is stopped and displayed, the electric support state is maintained during the special figure variable game 100 times after the subsequent big hit game is completed, Transition to support state (ordinary low probability state). On the other hand, when a big hit without power support ("Special Figure G") is won, the game does not enter the power support state after the big hit game ends.

  Thus, in the present embodiment, when “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure E” are stopped and displayed, the control state becomes the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state after the jackpot game ends. When “Special Figure F” is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state after the big hit game is ended. Further, when “Special Figure G” is stopped and displayed, the control state becomes a special figure high probability normal figure low probability state after the jackpot game ends.

  In the present embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a small hit symbol in addition to the big hit symbol. In the small hit game, the door member 2341 of the variable prize opening 234 is operated a predetermined number of times (for example, twice), and the door member 2341 maintains the open state for a maximum of 0.1 second per operation. In the case of opening the door member 2341 at a small hit, for example, when a game ball enters a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) in the first opening, or a predetermined amount of game value (a predetermined number of balls) is acquired. If it does, the second and subsequent releases will not be performed. During the small hit game, it shifts to the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. The small hit is a hit where the control state does not change before and after the small hit game, and after the small hit game is finished, the control state returns to the control state before the start of the small hit game. “Special figure H” shown in FIG. 5A is a small hit symbol. In the present embodiment, the opening / closing mode (opening / closing frequency and opening time) of the variable prize opening 234 in the small hit game, and the opening / closing mode (opening) of the variable winning opening 234 in the big hit game to which the “Special Figure G” is stopped and displayed. The number of times and the opening time are substantially the same, but may be different, for example, at least one of the number of times of opening and the opening time may be different.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a lost symbol. “Special Figure I” is a lost symbol.

  FIG.5 (b) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of the special figure 2. FIG. In FIG. 5 (b), six types of special charts “Special Figure a” to “Special Figure f” are shown. Of these, five types of special charts are jackpot symbols (“Special Figure a” to “Special Figure f”). Fig. E "). “Special Figure a” is a 15R jackpot symbol, which is a 15R probable big hit symbol that can be expected to win in all of the 15 rounds, and “Special Figure b” is a 15R jackpot symbol, 15R-RUB symbol that can be expected to win in all of the rounds, and “Special Figure c” is a 15R jackpot symbol, and expects to win in 8 of the 15 rounds. On the other hand, it is a real 8R-RUB that cannot be expected in the remaining rounds, and "Special Figure d" is a 15R jackpot symbol, and it can be expected that 4 of the 15 rounds will have a ball. On the other hand, in the remaining rounds, it is a real 4R-RUB that cannot be expected to win a game, and “Special Figure e” is a 2R normal jackpot symbol.

  Furthermore, in this embodiment, one type of stop symbol is prepared as a lost symbol. "Special figure f" is a lost symbol.

  FIG. 5 (c) shows an example of a decorative design. There are 10 types of decoration patterns of the present embodiment: “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 10”. The first start port sensor detects that a ball has won the special figure 1 starting port 230 or the special figure 2 starting port 232, that is, the ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230, or the special figure 2 Each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided on the condition that the second start port sensor detects that a ball has entered the start port 232. In the symbol display area, “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... “Decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →. “Change design of symbols”. That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 variably displays the decorative symbols separately from the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214. And the stop symbol mode which is a combination of a decoration symbol is stopped and displayed.

  When notifying 5R probability big hit ("Special Figure B"), 5R normal big hit ("Special Figure F"), and 2R normal big hit ("Special Figure e"), the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are displayed with "Decoration". A combination of three decorative symbols having the same numbers other than “3-decoration 3-decoration 3” and “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” (for example, “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1” or “decoration 1” Decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4 "etc.) is stopped and displayed. Further, in the case of notifying the 15R probability variation big hit (“special drawing A” and “special drawing a”), “decoration 3-decoration 3-decoration 3” or “decoration 7-decoration 7” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. -Decoration 7 "is stopped and displayed. Furthermore, in the case of reporting 15R-RUB, real 8R-RUB, and real 4R-RUB, the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c have the same number of decorative symbols, and the middle symbol display area 208b A combination of decorative symbols that are decorative symbols (for example, “decoration 1-donor-decoration 1”, “decoration 4-donor-decoration-4”, etc.) is stopped and displayed. Further, when notifying the hidden probability change ("Special Figure G") or the small hit ("Special Figure H") that is a big hit of 2R, "Decoration 1-Decoration 2-Decoration" is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The combination of decorative symbols such as “3” is stopped and displayed. A combination of decorative patterns such as “decoration 1-decoration 2—decoration 3” may be referred to as a chance eye. In addition, when notifying the special symbol I or the special symbol f, the symbol display areas 208a to 208c may be combined with a combination of decorative symbols other than the combination of the decorative symbols described so far (for example, a variety of symbols). Eye) is stopped.

  Hereinafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the display from the start of the “decorative symbol variable display” to the stop symbol display of the decorative symbol may be referred to as a decorative symbol variable display. The variation display of the decorative symbols is performed under the control of the first sub-control unit 400.

  FIG.5 (d) shows an example of the usual stop pattern aspect. In the present embodiment, there are two types of stoppage display modes of “normal map A”, which is a winning symbol, and “general symbol B”, which is a missed symbol. Based on the fact that the gate sensor, which is a sphere detection sensor, detects that the sphere has passed through the general start port 228, the general display display device 210 illuminates all seven segments and the central one segment. Repeat the lighting and perform “variable display of ordinary figure” (ordinary figure fluctuation game). Then, after the fluctuation time elapses, one of the symbols of the “normal figure B” that is a symbol that is different from the “normal figure A” that is the winning symbol is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 5D, the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.

  Hereinafter, the display from the start of the “variable display of the normal figure” to the stop display of the stop pattern of the normal figure may be referred to as a normal variable display.

<Main control unit main processing>
Next, the main control unit main process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit.

  A special figure random number value, a special figure round decision random value, a special figure electricity support decision random value, and a special symbol decision random number are stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. The RAM 308 is provided with a random number counter for generating these various random number values. Further, the RAM 308 stores the number of special figure hold, a special figure winning random value, various determination (lottery) results, and the like. Hereinafter, the area for storing the number of reserved special figures in the RAM 308 may be referred to as a special figure reserved number storage area. Furthermore, the RAM 308 is provided with a special information start information storage section divided into a maximum number of areas (four in this example) that can hold the start of the determination (lottery). A random number storage area is also provided for ordinary use. As will be described later, the special information start information storage unit stores a plurality of types of start information as one set and stores each start information in a winning order (holding order) for each area.

  As described above, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 includes the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal has been input performs reset start by a reset interrupt, and executes main control unit main processing shown in FIG. 6 in accordance with a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

  In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, setting of a stack initial value (temporary setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of an interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, to the WDT 314 The operation is permitted and the initial value is set. In the present embodiment, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in WDT 314 as an initial value.

  In step S103, the value of the counter of WDT 314 is cleared and time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted.

  In step S105, whether or not the low voltage signal is ON, that is, the voltage value of the power supply that the voltage monitoring circuit 338 supplies to the main control unit 300 via the second sub control unit 500 by the power supply control unit 660. Is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power supply is cut off), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect that the power supply is cut off), The process proceeds to S107. Even when the predetermined value (9 V) is not yet reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process for setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the timer circuit 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, A process of outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub control unit 400, a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  In step S109, it is determined whether or not the state before the power interruption (before power interruption) is restored, and the state before the power interruption is not restored (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is set to the initial state). ) Proceeds to an initialization process (step S113).

  Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when a store clerk or the like of a game store operates the RAM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board 182 shown in FIG. 2 (indicating that there has been an operation). If the RAM clear signal is ON (RAM clear is necessary), the process goes to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. move on. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is OFF (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the power status information is information indicating suspend. It is determined whether or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to an initial state. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is set. A checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum results in a specific value (for example, 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal). When the checksum result is a specific value (eg, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power interruption, and the checksum result is a specific value. If the value is other than 0 (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process proceeds to step S113.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read out and reset to the stack pointer (this setting). In addition, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. That is, the processing is resumed from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. In addition, a transmission information storage area is provided in the RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been restored to the state at the time of power-off, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 described later.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting to the stack pointer (this setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and in the same way as the power recovery command, in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 is transmitted to the sub-control unit 400.

  In step S115, after setting for prohibition of interruption, a basic random number initial value update process is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, two initial value generation random number counters for generating the initial values of the normal winning random number counter and the special figure random value counter are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a random number value for a normal winning number is 0 to 20, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a random number value for a normal winning symbol provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 21, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are similarly updated. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during a timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  The main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 includes a timer circuit 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, about once every 4 ms), and the main control is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The part timer interrupt process is started at a predetermined cycle.

  In step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving each register value of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

  In step S203, the WDT 314 is periodically changed to the initial value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) so that no WDT interruption occurs (so as not to detect a processing abnormality). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every about 2 ms, which is the period of the main control unit timer interrupt.

  In step S205, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of the various sensors 320 shown in FIG. The data is stored in a signal state storage area provided for each sensor 320. If the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor is described as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and stored in the RAM 308 in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each sphere detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) ) Is read from the current detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area described above. To remember. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in step S205, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly started at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes one ball detection sensor is started several times. For this reason, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed through the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before, a previous detection signal, and a current detection signal. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the sphere detection sensor and noise, it is determined that there is a prize when the detection signal is stored twice continuously after no detection signal. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4 stores winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous detection signal, that there is a previous detection signal, and that there is a current detection signal). In this step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal, current detection signal present). In the case of the general winning port 226, the variable winning port 234, the first special figure starting port 230, and the second special figure starting port 232, or the ordinary drawing starting port 228. Is determined to have passed. That is, it is determined that a prize has been received at these winning openings 234 and 226 and these starting openings 230, 232 and 228. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times coincides with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the first start opening sensor that detects a ball entering the first special view start opening 230, the first special view It is determined that a winning has been made at the starting port 230, that is, a game medium passing through a predetermined area has been detected, and processing associated with the subsequent winning at the first special figure starting port 230 is performed. If the presence / absence information does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with the winning to the first special figure starting port 230 thereafter. Note that the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there has been a single win, it is not determined that there has been a win until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the winning determination clear pattern information in each ball detection sensor, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In step S207 and step S209, basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S115 is updated, and then the normal winning random number value used in the main control unit 300 and The random number counter for generating each special figure random value is updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a random number value for a normal winning number is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has made one round as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a regular winning random number that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and a result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal number, The initial value set this time is stored in the above-described initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating the winning random number value has made one round next time, in addition to setting it in the random number counter for generating the winning random value Keep it. Further, apart from the above-described initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal signal has made one round next, it is determined that the random number counter for generating the special figure random number has made one round. An initial value storage area is provided in the RAM 308.

  In step S211, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number update process, a random number counter for generating an effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step S213, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, symbols are displayed on the normal symbol display symbol update timer, the first special symbol display device 212, and the second special symbol display device 214 for timing the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped on the normal symbol display device 210. Various types, including a special figure display symbol update timer for timing the time to fluctuate / stop display, a timer for timing a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time, a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, etc. Update the timer.

  In step S215, winning prize counter update processing is performed. In this winning prize counter updating process, when winning prizes 234, 226 and starting holes 230, 232 are won, the value of the number of prize balls stored in the RAM 308 for each winning slot or each starting slot is stored. Read and add 1 and set to the original prize ball number storage area.

  In step S217, a winning acceptance process is performed. In the winning acceptance process, a plurality of types of start information are acquired if predetermined conditions are satisfied. The plurality of types of start information acquired here are stored as one set of start information in a vacant area corresponding to the winning order (holding order) in the start information storage unit provided in the RAM 308.

  In step S219, which is executed subsequent to step S217, a payout request number transmission process is performed. The output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 shown in FIG. 4 are composed of 1 byte, strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bit 6 Power-on information (if turned on, indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4-5 indicate the current processing type for encryption (0-3), and bits 0-3 indicate encryption The number of payout requests after the conversion processing is indicated.

  In step S221, a normal state update process is performed. This normal state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal state. For example, in the normal state update process in the middle of the normal symbol display (the above-described general symbol display symbol update timer value is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off drive control. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a usual fluctuation display (ordinary figure fluctuation game).

  Also, in the normal state update process at the timing when the normal symbol change display time has elapsed (the timing at which the value of the general symbol display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), if the hit flag is on, the hit symbol is displayed. The normal symbol display device 210 is controlled so that the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is turned on / off, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to display the lost symbol display mode. 7 segment LED on / off drive control is performed. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the normal state update process. Here, the above-described lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines the symbol of either the winning symbol (general symbol A shown in FIG. 5C) or the lost symbol (general symbol B shown in FIG. 5C). Display. Thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec). With this setting, the symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the normal game.

  Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is a hit, the usual figure hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the usual figure hit flag is on, in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the usual figure stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), The normal operation is set in the setting area, and the blade member 2321 is opened to a solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). And a signal indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  In the usual state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the blade member has a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 milliseconds). A signal for holding the blade member 2321 in the closed state is output to the open / close drive solenoid (332) of 2321, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the normal state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the non-operating state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is lost, the usual figure lose flag is turned on as will be described later. When the usual figure loss flag is on, even in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (when the value of the usual figure stop time management timer changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal operation inactive is set. In the general state update process in the case where the general map is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S223.

  In step S223, a general drawing related lottery process is performed. In this general map-related lottery process, the open / close control of the general map variable game and the second special map start port 232 is not performed (the state of the general map is not in operation), and the pending general map variable game is not held. When the number is 1 or more, it is decided whether to win or not to win the result of the variable figure game by random lottery based on the random number value stored in the random number value storage area. When the winning judgment is made and the winning is made, the winning flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. If unsuccessful, turn off the winning flag. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, the value of a predetermined random number counter is acquired as a general-purpose timer random number value, and the general-purpose display random number is transmitted to the general-purpose display display device 210 from a plurality of fluctuation times based on the acquired general-purpose timer random number value. One time for variably displaying the figure is selected, and this variably displayed time is stored as a variably displayed time in a variably variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308. In addition, the number of pending general figure variable games is stored in the usual figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending custom figure variable games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in the usual figure reservation number storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  Subsequently, special figure prefetching processing (step S224) is executed. Details of the special figure prefetching process will be described later. Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (the special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In the special figure 2 state update process, one of the following processes is performed according to the state of the special figure 2.

  For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is turned on and off. Repeatedly turn on / off drive control. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs the special figure 2 variable display (special figure 2 variable game). In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the process ends.

  Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as a 15R big hit flag, a 5R big hit flag, a 2R big hit flag, a small hit flag, a break flag, a special figure probability fluctuation flag, and a normal figure probability fluctuation flag. . These flags are set to ON or OFF based on the stop symbol determined in the special figure 2 related lottery process described later. In the special figure 2 state update process starting at the timing when the special figure 2 variable display time has elapsed (the timing when the special figure 2 display symbol update timer value has changed from 1 to 0), for example, the 15R jackpot flag is turned on. When the probability fluctuation flag is also on and the ordinary figure probability fluctuation flag is on, any of the special figure a, special figure b, special figure c, and special figure d shown in FIG. The special figure 2 display device 214 is configured so that the figure probability variation flag is turned off, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is turned on, and the special figure e is formed when the loss flag is turned on. 7 segment LED lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and setting indicating that the special figure 2 stop display is being performed is performed in the setting area of the RAM 308. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 can display the 15R special jackpot symbol (special figure a, special figure b, special figure c, special figure d), 2R normal jackpot symbol (special figure e), and lose symbol ( A fixed display of any one of the special figures f) is performed.

  Thereafter, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. With this setting, the specially displayed special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. In addition, if the time reduction number stored in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the time reduction number, and if the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0, the special figure probability is changing. If not, turn off the time flag. Further, the hourly flag is also turned off during the big hit game (in the special game state).

  Further, the special transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the design for stopping the variable display is shown in FIG. The special figure 2 identification information indicating the presence is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data, which will be described later, and the processing is terminated.

  Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on. When the big hit flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the setting of the RAM 308 is set. In order to set a special figure 2 in operation in the area and wait for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image for notifying the player that a big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started is displayed. In addition, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined release period (for example, 29 seconds) Or, until a winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected at the variable winning opening 234, the door member is connected to a solenoid for opening / closing the door member of the variable winning opening 234 (a part of various solenoids 332). A signal for maintaining the open state is output, and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the door open time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening release setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member in a closed state is output to a solenoid for opening and closing the door member of the variable prize opening 234 (a part of various solenoids 332), and a storage area of a door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308 The information indicating the closing period is set in. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the opening / closing control of the door member is repeated a predetermined number of times (in this example, 15 rounds, 5 rounds, or 2 rounds), a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, the storage area of the production waiting time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to set so as to wait for a period during which an image notifying the player that the jackpot by the decorative symbol display device 208 is to be ended is displayed. Information indicating the production standby period is set in Also, if the normal probability change flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of the big hit game, the hour / hour number (for example, 100 times) is set in the hour / hour number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 and provided in the RAM 308. Turn on the short time flag. Note that if the usual time probability variation flag is set to OFF, the number of time reductions is not set in the time reduction number storage unit, and the time reduction flag is not turned on.

  The short time here means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variable game to the start of the next big hit. When the time reduction flag is set to ON, the normal figure high probability state (normal figure certain change) is established. There is a higher probability of hitting in the general-game variable game in the high-probability state than in the normal-game low-probability state. In addition, in the normal figure high probability state, the fluctuation time of the general figure variable game is shorter than the normal figure low probability state (normal figure variable short). Furthermore, in the normal high probability state, compared to the normal low probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 2321 of the special figure 2 starting port 232 is likely to be longer (electric chew extension). In addition, the pair of blade members 2321 are more likely to open in the normal high probability state than in the normal low probability state. The state in which any one of these ordinary figure change, universal figure change, and electric Chu extension is set is referred to as an electric support (starting prize winning support by electric tulip) state.

  In addition, as described above, the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Therefore, the normal low probability state is maintained during the big hit game. This is because, if the game is in a high probability state during a big hit game, a large number of game balls will be placed in the special figure 2 starting port 232 until a predetermined number of game balls enter the variable prize opening 234 during the big hit game. In order to solve this, there is a problem that the number of game balls that can be acquired during the big hit increases and the number of game balls that can be acquired during the big hit increases.

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (when the production standby time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not activated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set medium.

  Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of order, the out-of-game flag is turned on. In the case where the miss flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 inactive is set. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S227.

  Subsequently, special figure state update processing (special figure 1 state update process) for special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In the special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of the special figure 1. Each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, a special figure related lottery process for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed. Also here, first, a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 2 (a special drawing 2 related lottery process) is performed (step S229), and then a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 1 (a special drawing 1 related lottery process). ) Is performed (step S231). In the special drawing 2 related lottery process, the floating game of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 is not performed, and the state of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 are both inactive and is held. The game is executed using the first special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random number value in the special figure 2 random value storage area, starting from the fact that the number of variable games is 1 or more. The special figure 1 related lottery process does not perform the floating game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the state of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are both inactive, and is suspended. The game is executed using the first special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random number value in the special figure 1 random value storage area as a starting condition that the number of variable games is 1 or more.

  Also for these special drawing related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the special figure 2 variable game start condition and the special figure 1 fluctuation Even if the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, since the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. In addition, when the number of reserved special figure 2 variable games is 1 or more, the lottery process and the variable game related to the special figure 1 variable game hold are not performed. In addition, the notification of the result of the special symbol variable game success / failure determination by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the special symbol 2 starting port 232 is notified. Priority is given to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning in the special figure 1 starting port 230. In the present exemplary embodiment, a special figure variable game with a high advantage (in this example, special figure 2 variable game) is performed in preference to a special figure variable game with a low advantage (in this example, special figure 1 variable game). For this reason, it may be easy to give a difference in the advantage of the gaming state.

  In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process in step S229, the main control unit 300 starts the special figure 2 start information (special) from the earliest (most previously stored) holding position in the special figure 2 random value storage area. 2), and based on the special figure 2 winning random number value in the obtained special figure 2 start information, the value of the special figure probability variation flag in the RAM 308, and the like. Is determined (whether or not) whether to make a big hit, a small hit or a loss. Next, the main control unit 300 uses the special figure determination table stored in the ROM 306 on the basis of the special figure 2 random number value in the acquired special figure 2 start information and the determined success / failure determination result. The symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped after the change display is determined. Next, the main control unit 300 is stored in the ROM 306 based on, for example, the determined success / failure determination result, the stop symbol, the special figure 2 holding number at the time of the determination, the acquired special figure variation time determination random number value, and the like. The variable display time (timer number) in FIG. 2 is determined using various tables.

  The main control unit 300 extracts the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, erases the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, 2 is subtracted from the special figure 2 hold number in the hold number storage area. At this time, the special figure 2 start information extracted from the special figure 2 random value storage area is stored in the temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above-described determination is performed based on the special figure 2 start information stored in the temporary area. You may do it.

  After the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) as described above, the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) is performed in the same manner. The order of the special figure 1 related lottery process and the special figure 2 related lottery process may be reversed.

  In the above description, the special figure 2 variable game having a high advantage is started in preference to the special figure 1 variable game having a low advantage, and the special figure 2 hold is prioritized over the special figure 1 hold. Special figure 2 priority fluctuation is given as an example, but special figure 1 variable game with low advantage is started over special figure 2 variable game with high advantage, and special figure 1 suspension is The special figure 1 priority fluctuation | variation digested preferentially over hold may be sufficient. In addition, priority is not given to special figure 2 variable game with high advantage and special figure 1 variable game with low advantage. The start opening winning order variation may be started in order. In the starting order winning order variation, the upper limit number of holds is 8 regardless of the special figures 1 and 2, and compared with the priority fluctuation in which the upper limit number of holds is 4 in each of the special figures 1 and 2 In some cases, the upper limit of the number of holds can be increased.

  In the above description, it is assumed that the lottery process and the variable game relating to the holding of the other special figure are not performed according to the state of the special figure, but the invention is not limited to this, and the special figure state update described above is not performed. The process and the special figure related lottery process may be performed independently in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, respectively, so that a plurality of special figures may be changed simultaneously. In addition, when a plurality of special figures are changed at the same time, a plurality of areas for displaying the lottery results of each special figure are provided on the decorative symbol display device 208 or the lottery results of each special figure are displayed. A plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided, and each lottery result may be displayed separately, or one display may be configured to display lottery results of a plurality of special drawings. In addition, when changes related to a plurality of special figures are performed simultaneously, the lottery result of the special figure that stopped the fluctuation may affect the lottery result of the special figure that stops the fluctuation later.

  In step S233 following step S231, command setting transmission processing is performed. In this command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, for example, bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bits 11 to 14 are Command type (in this example, basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, prefetch result information command, etc. Information that can specify the type of command), bits 0 to 10 are constituted by command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off by the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start (rotation start) command, the command data includes various big hit flags, small hit flags, a break flag, special figure probability fluctuation flag values, and a timer selected by special drawing related lottery processing. In the case of a symbol variation stop (rotation stop) command including information indicating a number, etc., including a value of various big hit flags, a small hit flag, a loss flag, a special figure probability variation flag, etc., and a winning effect start command and an end In the case of the production start command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag is included, and in the case of the big hit round number designation command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the big hit number of rounds, and the like are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, device information in the command data, presence / absence of winning in the special figure 1 starting port 230, presence / absence of winning in the special figure 2 starting port 232, winning in the variable winning ports 234 and 235 Includes presence or absence. In the case of a prefetch result information command, information such as the types of special figure 1 and special figure 2, the number of prefetches stored in a prefetch number storage area, which will be described later, and a stop symbol stored in the prefetch result storage unit are used as command data. Including.

  In the rotation start setting transmission process described above, the command data is stored in the RAM 308 as various big hit flags, small hit flags, off-set flags, special figure probability variation flag values, special figure related lottery processes, and special figures. 2) Information indicating the timer number selected in the related lottery process, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game, etc., which are held is set. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating values of various big hit flags, small hit flags, loss flags, special figure probability variation flags, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data.

  In the winning effect setting transmission process described above, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described special winning opening release setting transmission process, the command data includes the number of big hits stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game held. Set the information that indicates. In the above-mentioned special winning opening closing setting transmission process, the command data includes the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game held. Set the information that indicates.

  In step S233, general command special figure hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase process, special figure identification information (information showing special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, command notice information (preliminary notice information, false) Set either advance notice information or no advance notice information).

  In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the production control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and it is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined.

  In step S235 following step S233, external output signal setting processing is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a bottom pan full error is monitored. . When a front frame door open error or a lower pan full error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating whether there is a front frame door open error or a lower pan full error. Set. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening / closing of the special figure 2 starting port 232 and the variable prize opening 234, and the general diagram display device 210 and the special diagram 1 display device 212 via the drive circuits 324, 326, 330. The display data to be output to the special figure 2 display device 214, various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port of the I / O 310.

  In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is ON. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when power supply cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, etc., and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. Return to. On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 as return data, and power-off processing such as initialization of input / output ports is performed. After that, it becomes a HALT state.

  FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the special figure prefetch process (step S224) of the main control unit timer interrupt process. In the special figure prefetching process, the main control unit 300 prefetches the start information increased in each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, predetermines the stop symbol before the success / failure judgment process, and obtains a predetermination result (special The figure prefetching result) is stored in the prefetching result storage unit in the RAM 308 (see FIGS. 9A to 9C).

  Here, in the RAM 308, the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit for storing the special figure 1 prefetch result and the number of special figure 1 prefetch results stored in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit are specially displayed. There is provided a special figure 1 prefetch number storage area for storing as one prefetch number. The prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 can store up to four prefetch results in this example. In the special figure 1 prefetching result storage unit, every time the number of special figure 1 prefetching decreases by one, the data of the special figure 1 prefetching result with the highest rank (first) is erased and the remaining special figure 1 prefetching result Are processed so that the rank of the data is incremented by one. Each time the special figure 1 prefetch number increases by one, new special figure 1 prefetch result data is written in the next rank of the special figure 1 prefetch result data of the lowest rank (last).

  Also, in the RAM 308, the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit for storing the special figure 2 prefetch result and the number of special figure 2 prefetch results stored in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit are stored in the special figure 2 prefetch. A special figure 2 pre-reading number storage area for storing numbers is provided. The prefetch result storage unit for special figure 2 can store up to four prefetch results in this example. In the special figure 2 prefetching result storage unit, every time the number of special figure 2 prefetching decreases by one, the data of the special figure 2 prefetching result having the highest rank is deleted and the order of the remaining special figure 2 prefetching result data Are processed so that they are incremented by one. Each time the special figure 2 prefetch number increases by one, new special figure 2 prefetch result data is written in the next rank of the special figure 2 prefetch data having the lowest rank.

  In the special figure prefetching process, first, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the startup information of the special figure 2 has increased (step S301). The determination as to whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 has increased is stored in, for example, the special figure 2 hold number stored in the special figure 2 hold number storage area and the special figure 2 prefetch number storage area. Special figure 2 Compared with the number of pre-reads. The main control unit 300 determines that the start information of the special figure 2 has increased when the special figure 2 hold number is larger than the special figure 2 prefetch number, and the special figure 2 hold number is the special figure 2 prefetch number. If they are equal, it is determined that the starting information in FIG. 2 has not increased. If it is determined that the starting information of FIG. 2 has increased, the process proceeds to step S303, and if it is determined that the starting information of FIG. 2 has not increased, the process proceeds to step S307.

  In step S303, the increased special figure 2 starting information (a special figure 2 winning random value and a set of special figure 2 random values) is processed before the success / failure determination process in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229). FIG. 2 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, using the pre-read special figure 2 start information and the determination table for special determination 2 and the special figure determination table used at the time of determination, for example, the special figure 2 variable game stop symbol related to the start information is selected. Prior determination is made before the success / failure determination process in the process (step S229). Note that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of determination.

  In step S 305 subsequent to step S 303, the stop symbol information as the special figure 2 prefetch result obtained in the pre-determination is stored in the earliest free area of the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S307.

  In step S307, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the start information in FIG. 1 has increased. Whether or not the starting information of the special figure 1 has increased is determined by, for example, the special figure 1 holding number stored in the special figure 1 holding number storage area and the special figure 1 pre-reading number storage as in the special figure 2. The comparison is made with the special figure 1 prefetch number stored in the area. If it is determined that the start information of FIG. 1 has increased, the process proceeds to step S309, and if it is determined that the start information of FIG. Return to timer interrupt processing.

  In step S309, it is determined based on various flags in the RAM 308 whether or not non-electric support is in progress. If it is determined that the non-electric support is being performed, the process proceeds to step S311. If it is determined that the non-electric support is not being performed (the electric support is being performed (normal high probability state)), the process proceeds to step S315. In this example, it is determined whether or not non-electric support is being performed, but it may be determined whether or not the execution condition of the special figure 1 prefetch notice is satisfied. For example, the execution conditions of the special figure 1 pre-reading notice include conditions such as not being in a big hit game other than being in non-electric support.

  In step S311, the increased special figure 1 start information (a special figure 1 winning random value and a pair of special figure 1 random value) is processed before the success determination process in the special figure 1 lottery process (step S231). FIG. 1 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, using the pre-read special figure 1 start information and the determination table for special determination and the special figure determination table used at the time of determination, for example, the special figure 1 variable game stop symbol related to the start information is selected as the special figure 1 related lottery. Prior determination is made before the success / failure determination process in the process (step S231). Note that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of determination.

  In step S313 following step S311, the stop symbol information as the special figure 1 prefetching result obtained in the prior determination is stored in the earliest free area of the special figure 1 prefetching result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the special figure prefetch process is terminated and the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  In step S315, the pre-read result for pre-Fig. 1 is stored in the RAM 308 in place of the stop symbol information, instead of pre-reading the start-up information without pre-reading the increased special Fig. 1 start information. Stored in the earliest free area of the copy. Thereafter, the special figure prefetch process is terminated and the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  In the present embodiment, only the increased start information is pre-read and pre-determined. However, all start information may be pre-read and pre-determined. Further, in the above-described command setting transmission process (step S233), only the pre-read result of the starting information for the increase may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, or the pre-read result storage for special figure 1 and special figure 2 All the prefetching results in the section may be transmitted to the first sub-control section 400.

  Further, in the flowchart shown in FIG. 8, pre-reading is always executed for the increased start information of Special Figure 2, and pre-read is always executed for the increased start information of Special Figure 1 except during the electric support. However, it may be determined by lottery whether or not to pre-read the increased starting information of FIG. 1 and FIG. Alternatively, in the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the prefetch result from the main control unit 300, for example, it may be determined by lottery whether to perform prefetch notification for each hold. Regardless of the gaming state (for example, whether or not non-electric support is in progress), when the start information increases, prefetching is always executed and the prefetching result is stored in the prefetching result storage unit. The result may be configured to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 may be configured to determine whether or not to perform lottery and presentation using the pre-read result.

  FIG. 9 illustrates a state in which prefetch result information and the like are stored in the prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. FIG. 9A shows an example of a state in which the special figure 1 prefetch result information is stored in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 9 (a), the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in this embodiment) of storage areas as the special figure 1 variable game holdable number. . Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 1 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, the stop symbol information of Special Figure 1 is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 9A, the storage area “hold 1” stores “special symbol I” (out of line) as stop symbol information, and the storage area “hold 2” stores “special symbol I” as stop symbol information. "(Out of line)" is stored, "Special Figure A" (15R probability variable big hit) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "Hold 3", and "Special Figure I" is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "Hold 4". "(Out of line) is stored.

  FIG. 9B shows an example of a state in which the special figure 2 prefetch result information is stored in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 9B, the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number (4 in the present embodiment) of storage areas as the number of special figure variable games that can be held. . Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 2 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, the stop symbol information of the special figure 2 is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 9B, the storage area “hold 1” stores “special drawing f” (out of line) as stop symbol information, and the storage areas “hold 2” to “hold 4” have stop symbols. Information is not stored. In FIG. 9B, a state where the stop symbol information is not stored in the storage area is described as “none”.

  FIG. 9 (c) shows an example of the prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 during the electric support. As shown in FIG. 9C, “undecided” information is stored in the storage area “hold 1” instead of the stopped symbol information. In the storage areas “hold 2” to “hold 4”, neither stop symbol information nor “undecided” information is stored.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to the stop symbol information described above, whether or not to determine the result, the variable timer number (variable time), a timer group to be described later, and the like are preliminarily determined, and the information is stored in the prefetch result storage unit and the prefetch result Information can be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

  Next, refer to FIG. 10 for a table for determining whether or not there is a special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) and a special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) in the main control unit timer interruption process shown in FIG. While explaining. Here, FIG. 10A is a diagram illustrating an example of the high / bad determination probability table, and FIG. 10B is a diagram illustrating an example of the low probability determination table. When determining whether or not the special figure 1 is true, if the special figure high probability state, refer to the high probability table for validity determination shown in FIG. 10A, and if the special figure low probability state, Reference is made to the success / failure determination low probability table shown in FIG. Then, based on the numerical value range indicated by the referenced success / failure determination table and the acquired random number value, the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is determined. In the present embodiment, in the case of the special figure 1 variable game, a big hit, a small hit or a loss is selected as the determination result.

  Similarly, in the case of performing the success / failure determination in FIG. 2, if it is in the special figure high probability state, it is in the special figure low probability state by referring to the high / failure determination table shown in FIG. 10 (a). In this case, refer to the low / probability determination table shown in FIG. Then, based on the numerical range indicated by the referenced determination table and the obtained random number value, the determination result of the special figure 2 variable game is selected. In the present embodiment, in the case of the special figure 2 variable game, the big hit or the loss is selected as the determination result.

  FIG. 10C shows an example of the small hit determination table. When the big hit determination result is out of place, the table for determining small hits shown in FIG. 10C is referred to, and based on the numerical range indicated by the referenced small hit determining table and the acquired random number value. Then, the determination result of the special figure small hit lottery is selected. In the present embodiment, when the determination result of lottery per special figure (lottery result) is special figure 1, a small hit is selected with a probability of 2000/65536 as the result of determination of lottery, and a loss is obtained with a probability of 63536/65536. Although selected, if the determination result of lottery per special figure (lottery result) is special figure 2, the small win is not selected.

  Next, the stop that is performed based on the determination result or the like determined in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) and the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) in the main control unit timer interruption process shown in FIG. A special figure determination table used for determining symbols will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 11A is a diagram showing an example of the special figure 1 symbol determination table, and FIG. 11B is a diagram showing an example of the special symbol 2 symbol determination table. When determining the stop symbol of special figure 1, refer to the special figure 1 table determination table shown in FIG. 11 (a), and based on the result of special figure 1 and the numerical range of random numbers, Select 1 stop symbol. In this embodiment, when the success / failure result of special figure 1 is a big hit, any one is selected from special figures A to G, and when the success / failure determination result of special figure 1 is a small hit, When the special figure H is selected and the result of the special figure 1 is lost, the special figure I is selected.

  In addition, when determining the stop symbol of the special figure 2, referring to the special figure 2 symbol determination table shown in FIG. 11B, based on the result of special figure 2 and the numerical range of the random number value, The stop symbol of Special Figure 2 is drawn by lottery. In the present embodiment, when the result of special figure 2 is a big hit, any one of special figures a to e is selected, and when the result of special figure 2 is lost, a special figure is selected. f is selected. After the symbol to be stopped and displayed is determined, symbol data to be stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device is set.

  Next, processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described. FIG. 12A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. First, in step S401 in FIG. 12A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S401. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S403 following step S401, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S405. . In step S405, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

  In step S407 following step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S409 following step S407, an effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S407, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when it is necessary to update the effect data, the effect data is updated. The effect control process will be described later.

  In step S411 following step S409, a chance button control process is performed. In the chance button control process, when the press of the effect button 136 is detected, the effect data updated in step S409 is changed to the effect data corresponding to the press of the effect button 136.

  In step S413 subsequent to step S411, image control processing is performed. In the image control process, when there is a command to the VDP 434 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the VDP 434 (details will be described later).

  In step S415 following step S413, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control process, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step S417 following step S415, lamp control processing is performed. In the lamp control process, if there is a command to various lamps 418 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step S419 following step S417, shutter control processing is performed. In the shutter control process, if there is a command to the shielding device 246 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the drive circuit 432.

  In step S421 following step S419, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission process, when there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S409, a setting is made to output this control command. Thereafter, the process returns to step S403.

  FIG. 12B is a flowchart of the first sub control unit command reception interrupt process (strobe interrupt process) executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S501 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408 as an unprocessed command.

  FIG. 12C is a flowchart of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms), and the timer interrupt process is performed by using the timer interrupt as a trigger. Execute in the cycle. In step S601 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S403 of the first sub control unit main process, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. To do. Therefore, in step S403, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step S603 subsequent to step S601, transmission of a control command to the second sub-control unit 500 set in the information transmission process (step S421) of the first sub-control unit main process, and other processing random number update processing Etc.

  FIG. 12D is a flowchart of the image control process in step S413 of the first sub control unit main process. In step S701, an instruction to transfer image data (movie data or texture data described later) is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the drawing areas of the frame buffer 1 and the frame buffer 2 of the VRAM 436. As a result, an image of one frame stored in the frame buffer not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative design display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436) and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table and the like, and then the image from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the command set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 434 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S703 following step S701, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 is input. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input (step S703: Yes), the process proceeds to step S705. Otherwise (step S703: No), it waits for the transfer end interrupt signal to be input.

  In step S705, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table and attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the frame buffer 1 or 2 of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S701, the CPU 404 has information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axes and image sizes of the VRAM 436). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) are instructed to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 performs parameter setting according to the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step S707 following step S705, a drawing instruction is performed. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer in accordance with an instruction from the CPU 404.

  In step S709 subsequent to step S707, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 based on the end of image drawing is input. If a generation end interrupt signal is input (step S709: Yes), The process proceeds to step S711, and if not (step S709: No), it waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input.

  In step S711, a scene display counter which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many scene images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

  Next, the process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described. FIG. 13A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. First, in step S801 in FIG. 13A, various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S801. In this initialization processing, initial setting of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

  In step S803 following step S801, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S805. . In step S805, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

  In step S807 following step S805, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S809 following step S807, effect control processing is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S807, processing such as reading the effect data (effect data by the effect movable body 224 or effect data by the lamp) corresponding to the command from the ROM 506 is performed, and the effect data is updated. If necessary, the effect data is updated.

  In step S811 following step S809, lamp control processing is performed. For example, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game table frame lamp 542, this command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520.

  In step S813 following step S811, a movable body control process is performed. For example, when there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the effect movable body 224, this command is output to the drive circuit 516. Thereafter, the process returns to step S803.

  FIG. 13B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub control unit 500 detects a strobe signal from the first sub control unit 400. In step S901 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the first sub control unit 400 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508 as an unprocessed command.

  FIG. 13C is a flowchart of a timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined by using the timer interrupt as a trigger. Execute in the cycle. In step S1001 of the timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S803 of the second sub-control unit main process, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S803, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S1003 following step S1001, an effect random number update process or the like is performed.

  Next, a specific example of effects executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 14 is a diagram showing, in a stepwise manner, an example of an effect centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment.

  FIG. 14 includes a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol display device 210, a special symbol 1 holding lamp 218, a special symbol 2 holding lamp 220, and an ordinary figure. A hold lamp 216 is shown.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 14A, the combination of decorative symbols “decoration 4-decoration 1-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed. Although the background here is not displayed, a default background image described later is displayed. Also in the following description, when the background is not displayed, a default background image is displayed unless otherwise specified. Various background images different from the default background image (for example, a background image corresponding to a mode) may be displayed.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a fourth symbol display area 284 in the upper right corner. The fourth symbol display area 284 is an area for notifying whether the symbol is changing (or stopping the symbol). From the top, the normal symbol changing notification region, and the special symbol changing notification region of Special Figure 1 from above. , It becomes a notification area during the symbol variation of Special Figure 2. While a regular symbol is stopped, a square figure is lit and displayed. When a regular symbol is changed, the square figure is blinked or extinguished. While the symbol of special figure 1 is stopped, the circular figure is lit and displayed. However, when the symbol of special figure 1 is changing, the circular figure is blinked or turned off. While the symbol of the special figure 2 is stopped, the triangular figure is lit up and displayed. However, while the symbol of the special figure 2 is changing, the triangular figure is blinked or turned off. In this way, the 4th symbol not only has a different display position but also a different display mode (in this case, a shape), so that the player can make a determination at first glance. Note that the pre-reading notice may be performed by changing the display mode, lighting mode, and flashing mode of the fourth symbol.

  In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided with a variable icon display area 280 at the lower center of the effect display area 208d.

  Furthermore, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 14 is a non-electric support state (non-time reduction state). The decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state is provided with a hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 on the left side of the variable icon display area 280. In addition, a hold icon display area 282 of special figure 2 is provided at the right end of the decorative symbol display device 208 in the non-electric support state.

  The hold icon indicating the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and the hold icon indicating the hold of the special figure 2 is displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2. . The number of holdings in the special figure 1 is represented not only by the number of lighting of the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 but also by the number of the holding icons in the special figure 1, and the number of holdings in the special figure 2 is the number of lighting of the special figure 2 holding lamp 220. In addition to this, it is also represented by the number of reserved icons in FIG. That is, the hold icon corresponds to the start information stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. Hereinafter, the hold icon corresponding to the oldest start information (oldest winning prize) may be referred to as a first hold icon, and the hold icon corresponding to the second oldest start information may be referred to as a second hold icon. In the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1, the hold icons are displayed side by side, and the hold icon on the right side becomes an old hold icon, and the hold icon display area 282 of FIG. 2 displays the hold icons vertically. The lower the hold icon, the older the win icon becomes.

  In FIG. 14A, two hold icons h11 and h12 of FIG. 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1, and both of these two hold icons h11 and h12 of FIG. The default display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode) is displayed. That is, the default hold icon in FIG. 1 is a round hold icon. In FIG. 14A, in order to make it easy to understand that the four hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, the hold icons that are not actually displayed are also indicated by dotted lines. .

  On the other hand, no hold icon is displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of FIG. This is because, as described above, the control state (game state) shown in FIG. 14 is a non-electric support state (non-time-short state), so that it is difficult for the electric chew to open and it is difficult to win the special figure 2 starting port 232. This is because. Note that the reserved icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, that is, the reserved icon display area provided at the right end of the decorative symbol display device 208 does not actually display a line demarcating the area, but in FIG. Is indicated by a dotted line for easy understanding. Note that a line demarcating the area may be provided, or a line demarcating the area may be displayed when the hold icon is displayed. Further, in order to make it easy to understand that the four hold icons are displayed in the hold icon display area 282 of the special figure 2, the hold icons that are not actually displayed are also indicated by dotted lines.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, depending on the control state (game state), the hold icon display area of the special figure that is easier to win in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is located on the left side of the variable icon display area 280 ( It is displayed in the effect display area 208d), and the other special figure hold icon display area is displayed at the right end. That is, when the control state is the non-electric support state, as shown in FIG. 14A, the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1 is displayed in the effect display area 208d, and the hold icon display of FIG. A region 282 is displayed at the right end. On the contrary, when the control state is the electric support state, the hold icon display area 282 of FIG. 2 is displayed in the effect display area 208d, and the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1 is displayed at the right end.

  Although not shown here, the default display mode of the hold icon in the special figure 2 is a square, non-patterned and white display form, and the display position is different from the hold icon in the special figure 1 as well as the display position ( Here, the shape) is also different, so that the player can make a determination at first glance. In addition, the default display mode of the hold icon in FIG. 1 and the default display mode of the hold icon in FIG. 2 may be the same.

  In the present embodiment, the special symbol variation display is started in the order of variation start in the special symbol display device → starting blinking or extinguishing of the fourth symbol → starting or deleting the moving animation of the hold icon → decorating decorative symbol variation. However, this order may be reversed.

  In FIG. 14B, the symbol variation display of the special symbol 1 is started, the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and the fourth symbol is turned off. There has been no change in the design.

  In FIG.14 (c), the movement animation of the holding | maintenance icons h11 and h12 of the special figure 1 is started. In this moving animation, the hold icon (target hold icon for the current symbol variation) that was at the display position of the first hold icon h11 starts moving toward the change icon display area 280, and the second hold The hold icon at the display position of the icon h12 starts moving toward the display position of the first hold icon h11 in FIG. At this stage, the decorative symbol variation display has not started.

  In FIG. 14D, the moving animation continues, and in FIG. 14E, the hold icon that was the first hold icon h11 before the start of the change reaches the change icon display area 280 and is displayed as the change icon h0. At the same time, the hold icon which was the second hold icon h12 before the start of the change has reached the display position of the first hold icon h11 and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. The decorative symbol display has not been started. It should be noted that when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, the pending icon that has been the first pending icon h11 so far may be viewed as the varying icon h0, or until then the second pending icon The hold icon that was h12 may be viewed as the first hold icon h11.

  Then, the variation display of the decorative symbol is started in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 14G, an operation promotion notification image 136P that prompts the user to press the effect button 136 within the effective period is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in which the decorative symbol variation display is started. In this operation promotion notification image 136P, an image 136P1 of the effect button 136 and a remaining time display bar 136P2 indicating the remaining time of the effective period are displayed on the right side of the character image of the main character. The variation display of the decorative symbol is hidden by the operation promotion notification image 136P, but the player can recognize that the special symbol is changing by the fourth symbol 284 or the like. Note that the display position of the decorative symbol may be moved to a position that does not overlap the operation promotion notification image 136P so that the decorative symbol is not hidden.

  In the remaining time display bar 136P2 shown in FIG. 14 (h), the valid period is reduced, and in FIG. 14 (i), the player presses the effect button 136. When the effect button 136 is pressed within the effective period, as shown in FIG. 14 (j), a reach state entry notice image 2071 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in place of the operation promotion notification image 136P. . In the reach state entry preview image 2071, a character display “chance is” is displayed on the right side of the character image of the main character.

  In FIG. 14 (k), the reach state entry notice image 2071 disappears, and the decorative symbol change display becomes visible, and thereafter, the reach state is entered as shown in FIG. 14 (l). It should be noted that even if the reach state entry notice image 207 is displayed, the reach state may not be entered, but the entry may always be made.

  As described above, the appearance of the operation promotion notification image 136P corresponds to an effect that triggers a notice regarding the currently displayed symbol variation display.

  In FIG. 14 (m), the background image is switched from the default background image to non-display, and the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 in FIG. 1 disappear. The fourth symbol display area 284 is displayed. In addition, the decorative symbol variation display, which has been performed in the left symbol display area 208a, middle symbol display area 208b, and right symbol display area 208c so far, has been moved to the lower right corner and is displayed in a reduced size in FIG. 14 (n). , Has developed into a super reach (swordsman reach). The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 14 (n) displays a large image of the enemy swordsman, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 14 (o) shows a duel between the protagonist and the enemy swordsman. The scene animation is displayed.

  Note that the reach state entry advance notice image 2071 is not limited to the advance notice of entering the reach state, but may be the advance notice of progress to super reach.

  FIG. 15 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 14 in stages.

  In FIG. 15 (p) continuing from FIG. 14 (o), the animation of the duel scene continues, and this animation continues until FIG. 15 (s). In FIG. 15 (s), the main character, Tono, wins the enemy swordsman, and in FIG. 15 (t), everything is temporarily hidden except for the fourth symbol display area 284. In addition, it may replace with non-display and may display a different background image. Eventually, as shown in FIG. 9 (u), the fluctuation of the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is displayed. The background here may be non-displayed or a different background image. Further, the display of the fluctuation icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1 remains off, and only the fourth symbol display area 284 is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 15 (v), the combination of the decorative symbols determined to be 15R probability variation big hit of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed. Moreover, the 4th design (round figure) of the special figure 1 shown in FIG.15 (v) is lighted. In FIG. 15 (v), the background is not displayed, but actually, a background image different from the default is displayed. Eventually, in FIG. 15 (w), as a big hit game start effect, a character display of “probable big hit” is displayed together with a background image (not shown here) celebrating the big hit.

  On the other hand, when the reach state is reached with a different decorative symbol (a symbol combination having a substantial 5R probability big hit, a 5R normal big hit, and a 2R normal big hit) in FIG. 14 (l), the figure in another case continues from FIG. 15 (t). 15 (u ′), the fluctuation of the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 6—decoration 6—decoration 6” is displayed. In FIG. 15 (v ′) following FIG. 15 (u ′), “decoration 6—decoration”. The combination of jackpot decorative symbols of “6-decoration 6” is stopped and displayed. Then, in FIG. 15 (w ′) following FIG. 15 (v ′), as a big hit game start effect, a “big hit” character is displayed together with a background image (not shown here) celebrating the big hit.

  FIG. 16 is a diagram showing an example of effects in another case following step (q) in a stepwise manner.

  In FIG. 16 (a), the animation of the duel scene started in FIG. 14 (o) continues, and this animation continues until FIG. 16 (b). In FIG. 16B, the protagonist loses to the enemy swordsman, and in FIG. 16C, like the case of FIG. 15T, all remains once except for the fourth symbol display area 284. Eventually, in FIG. 16 (d), the fluctuation of the decorative symbol combination “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7” starts. Here, the display of the fluctuation icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1 is restored, and the change icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 of FIG. 1 are displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 16 (e), the fourth symbol (round shape) of the special symbol 1 is turned on, and the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7” is stopped. It is displayed. Next, during the fixed display period shown in FIG. 1, in the variation icon display area 280, an erase animation of the variation icon h0 is executed. In FIG. 8F, the erasing animation of the variation icon h0 is started. The erasing animation continues in FIG. 10G, and the variation icon h0 is completely disappeared in FIG. Note that the animation for deleting the change icon h0 may be executed before the confirmation display of the special figure 1 is performed.

  Next, the notice icon displayed in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18. Here, FIG. 17A is a diagram for explaining a display example of a notice icon, and FIG. 17B is a diagram for explaining a notice icon display area information storage area stored in the RAM 408. FIG. 8C is a diagram for explaining an example of the digestion timing of the notice icon, and FIG. 10D is a diagram for explaining an example of the increase timing of the notice icon. FIG. 18A is a diagram for explaining an example of the notice icon before the change, and FIG. 18B is a diagram for explaining an example of the notice icon after the change.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 17A, a notice icon display area 285 may be displayed on the upper part of the decorative symbol display device 208. The notice icon display area 285 is divided into, for example, six areas. From the left, the notice icon first display area YA1, the notice icon second display area YA2, the notice icon third display area YA3, and the notice icon fourth display. An area YA4, a notice icon fifth display area YA5, and a notice icon sixth display area YA6 are arranged side by side in the column direction. In the present embodiment, the number of hold icons that can be displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1 is four (or the number of hold icons that can be displayed when the hold icon display area of FIG. 2 is further displayed. Therefore, the number of notice icons that can be displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is different from the number of hold icons that can be displayed in the hold icon display area. The number of displayable notice icons and the number of hold icons may be the same. Further, the number of areas constituting the notice icon display area 285 is not limited to six, and may be one or may be set to an arbitrary number of two or more. Further, the number of areas may be changed according to the progress of the game.

  One notice icon may be displayed for one area in the notice icon display area 285. For example, as shown in FIG. 17A, a hat notice icon I6 made up of a hat symbol is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1, and a carton box is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2. A warning icon I9 of a thousand boxes made of symbols is displayed, a fan warning icon I10 made of a fan symbol is displayed in the warning icon third display area YA3, and a warning icon fourth display area YA4 A shuriken notice icon I7 consisting of a shuriken pattern is displayed. In the notice icon fifth display area YA5, a ribbon notice icon I8 consisting of a ribbon pattern is displayed, and a notice icon sixth display area YA6 is displayed. It is blank. Which notice icon is displayed in each area in the notice icon display area 285 is based on the information stored in the notice icon display area information storage area stored in the RAM 408 shown in FIG. It is determined. In the present embodiment, one notice icon is displayed per area, but two or more notice icons may be displayed per area.

  As shown in FIG. 17A, the notice icons displayed in the areas (YA1 to YA5) of the notice icon display area 285 of the decorative symbol display device 208 are digested at the timing shown in FIG. To be controlled. This control information is stored in, for example, the RAM 408 of the sub-control unit 400 according to the progress of the game, and is read and executed as appropriate. That is, when 8 seconds have elapsed after the decorative symbol variation display (the variation) shown in FIG. 17A is started, the ribbon notice icon I8 is digested, and then the digested ribbon notice icon I8 is displayed. Corresponding effects may be executed. After that, when the change ends, the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 starts to move toward the change icon display area 280, and the decorative symbol change display (the pattern change corresponding to the hold 1) is started. When 12 seconds have elapsed since the start of the symbol variation, the shuriken notice icon I7 may be digested, and then an effect corresponding to the digested shuriken notice icon I7 may be executed. After that, when the symbol variation corresponding to the hold 1 is completed, the hold icon h11 of FIG. 1 (the hold icon h12 moved to the hold icon h11 in FIG. 17A) moves toward the change icon display region 280. When the decorative symbol change display (symbol change corresponding to the hold 2) is started, when 4 seconds have elapsed since the start of the symbol change, the hat notice icon I6 is digested, and then An effect corresponding to the notice icon I6 of the digested hat may be executed. In addition, when 10 seconds have elapsed since the start of the SP reach, the thousand box notice icon I9 is digested, and then an effect corresponding to the digested thousand box notice icon I9 may be executed. Thereafter, when two seconds have elapsed since all the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped, the fan warning icon I10 is digested, and then an effect corresponding to the digested fan warning icon I10 may be executed. . Thus, it can be said that the digestion of the notice icon informs the player in advance that the notice or effect will be executed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 17A, the notice icons displayed in the areas (YA1 to YA5) of the notice icon display area 285 of the decorative symbol display device 208 are, for example, the timing shown in FIG. It is controlled to be increased by. This control information is stored in, for example, the RAM 408 of the sub-control unit 400 according to the progress of the game, and is read and executed as appropriate. That is, when 4 seconds have passed since the decorative symbol variation display (corresponding variation) shown in FIG. 17 (a) is started, a Tonari-like effect that increases the notice icon is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Is done. In this Tono-sama effect, an effect of increasing and displaying the hat notice icon I6, the ribbon notice icon I8, and the shuriken notice icon I7 in the notice icon display area 285 is performed. Thereafter, when the variation ends and the symbol variation corresponding to the hold 1 starts, DJ appears on the decorative symbol display device 208, and a DJ effect is performed to increase the notice icon. In this DJ effect, an effect of increasing the notice icon I9 of the thousand carton box to the notice icon display area 285 and displaying it is performed. Then, after the symbol variation corresponding to the hold 1 is finished and the symbol variation corresponding to the hold 2 is started, when 4 seconds have passed since the start of the second pseudo-continuous effect, the Tono-sama effect is executed, The notice icon I10 is increased and displayed in the notice icon display area 285. Here, the pseudo-continuous effect is a decorative symbol variation display mode in which the decorative symbol variation start and temporary stop display are executed a plurality of times in one special symbol variation display.

  In the present embodiment, the number of notice icons that increase in the symbol variation display that is a big hit may be configured to be larger than the number of notice icons that increase in the symbol variation display that becomes a big hit. For example, the maximum number of notice icons to be increased in the symbol variation display that is out of place may be one, and the number of notice icons to be increased in the symbol variation display that is a big hit may be at least two or more.

  Next, the content of the effect corresponding to the type of the notice icon displayed in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 18 (a), the notice icons include those in which the contents of the corresponding effects are not clear, and those in which the contents of the corresponding effects are clear as shown in FIG. 18 (b).

  For example, as shown in FIG. 18 (a), the notice icon I1 of the first lord and the notice icon I2 of the second lord are shown in the notice icon (preliminary notice icon before change) in which the content of the corresponding effect is not clear. And a third icon notice icon I3 and a first button notice icon I4. The notice icon I1 of the first lord is a notice icon that represents the silhouette of the face of the lord in white, and the reliability of the jackpot is weak. Further, the second icon of the notice of the lord I2 is a notice icon representing the silhouette of the face of the lord in green, and the reliability of the jackpot is medium. Further, the third icon-notice icon I3 is a notice icon that represents the silhouette of the face of the person in red, and the reliability of the jackpot is strong. Further, the first button notice icon I4 is a notice icon imitating the effect button 136, and the reliability of the big hit is any one of weak to strong. When the first lord's notice icon I1, the second lord's notice icon I2, and the third lord's notice icon I3 are at a predetermined change display timing (for example, an increase display timing of the notice icon), FIG. It changes to one of the notice icons after the change shown in 18 (b). Also, the first button notice icon I4 changes to one of the changed notice icons shown in FIG. 18B at the timing when the effect button 136 is operated by the player. Note that the first button notice icon I4 may change to any of the notice icons before the change at the timing when the effect button 136 is operated by the player.

  In this way, the first lord's notice icon I1, the second lord's notice icon I2, the third lord's notice icon I3, and the first button notice icon I4 start changing the symbol that is the object of prefetching. May be displayed before the screen, and may function as a pre-reading notice. In this embodiment, as will be described later, when the notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area 285, a character notation may be displayed along with the notice icon I1 of the first lord. In the case where the second noun notice icon I2 and the third noun notice icon I3 are displayed, a “question mark” may be added and displayed.

  On the other hand, for example, as shown in FIG. 18 (b), the notice icon (6) of the hat, the notice icon I7 of the shuriken, and the ribbon are shown in the notice icon (the notice icon after the change) where the content of the corresponding effect is clear. There are a notice icon I8, a thousand box notice icon I9, a fan notice icon I10, and a second button notice icon I11.

  The hat notice icon I6 is a notice icon imitating a hat worn by the character of the watchmaster, and the reliability of the jackpot is strong or weak. When the notice icon I6 of one hat is digested, there is a case where the pseudo-ream effect is performed only once. Here, the pseudo-continuous effects include a strong pattern, a weak pattern, and a gusset pattern. In the strong pattern pseudo-continuous effect, for example, as will be described later, when a pseudo-continuous effect starts, a long-length character appears, but the display mode of the long-length character is different from normal (for example, the long-length character is aura). In this case, the reliability is strong. In addition, for example, although it is the second pseudo-continuous production, the third pseudo-continuous production may be notified to indicate that the reliability is strong. Further, the pseudo-pattern effect of the weak pattern notifies that the reliability is weak by displaying the appearing long-length character in the normal display mode. In addition, the pseudo-seam effect of the gaze pattern is an effect of performing a disappointing display as if it is a pseudo-continuous effect, as will be described later. Further, in the present embodiment, when the character notation is displayed accompanying the hat notice icon I6, if the reliability is strong, “Continue” is displayed as the A pattern in red or black characters. There is a case. Alternatively, a “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may change to the A pattern additional display. If the reliability is weak, the pattern A may be displayed as “continue” in black letters with “continue” or “question mark”. Alternatively, a “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may change to the A pattern additional display. When the hat notice icon I6 is digested, a pseudo-continuous effect may be performed without fail. In addition, after the additional display of the B pattern is performed, the display may not be changed to the additional display of the A pattern.

  The shuriken notice icon I7 is a notice icon imitating a shuriken thrown by the character of the Oniwaban (Ninja), and the reliability of the jackpot is strong or weak. When the shuriken notice icon I7 is digested, if the reliability of the jackpot is strong, there may be an effect in which the notice effect being executed is switched to a strong notice effect with high reliability through a freeze effect. Yes (freeze notice). On the other hand, if the reliability of the jackpot is weak, a stop symbol notice may be performed in which a part or all of the stop symbol of the decorative symbol is notified in advance. Further, in this embodiment, when the character notation is displayed accompanying the shuriken notice icon I7, if the reliability is strong, “A freeze” may be displayed as the A pattern. Alternatively, a “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may change to the A pattern additional display. If the reliability is weak, “Changing” may be displayed as the A pattern. Alternatively, a “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may change to the A pattern additional display. When the shuriken notice icon I7 is digested, either the freeze notice or the stop symbol notice may be executed without fail. In addition, after the additional display of the B pattern is performed, the display may not be changed to the additional display of the A pattern.

  The ribbon notice icon I8 is a notice icon simulating a ribbon worn by the Princess Chibi character, and the reliability of the jackpot is strong or weak. When the notice icon I8 of one ribbon is digested, if the reliability of the jackpot is strong, there may be an effect that the background shifts to a special stage such as the prefetch mode or the change notice mode (stage change). Strong production). On the other hand, if the jackpot reliability is weak, there may be an effect of changing the displayed background from one of a plurality of types of backgrounds used in the normal gaming state (low stage change). Production). Further, in this embodiment, when the character notation is displayed accompanying the notice icon I8 on the ribbon, “STECHEN” is displayed in red or black as the A pattern if the reliability is strong. There is a case. Alternatively, a “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may change to the A pattern additional display. Also, if the reliability is weak, “STECHEN” may be displayed in black characters as the A pattern. Alternatively, a “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may change to the A pattern additional display. Note that when the ribbon notice icon I8 is consumed, either the strong stage change effect or the weak stage change effect may be executed. In addition, after the additional display of the B pattern is performed, the display may not be changed to the additional display of the A pattern.

  Thousand box notice icon I9 is a notice icon imitating the thousand box thrown by Tono-sama's character toward the peasant, and the reliability of the jackpot is determined to be a jackpot, strong or weak. If one thousand box notice icon I9 is digested and the jackpot reliability is strong, the thousand box notice icon I9 is digested during the execution of the low-reliability weak reach effect, and the reach transition effect is achieved. Later, an effect of shifting (promoting) to a highly reliable strong reach effect is performed (reach shift effect). On the other hand, if the jackpot reliability is weak, the warning icon I9 of the thousand boxes is digested after the execution of the low-reliability weak cut-in notification, and then the high-reliability strong cut-in notification is executed (notification promotion). Production). If the big hit is confirmed, either the reach transition effect or the notice promotion effect is executed. Further, in the present embodiment, when a character notation is displayed accompanying the notice icon I9 of the thousand-car box, if the big hit is confirmed, “large board behavior” may be displayed as the A pattern. Alternatively, a “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may change to the A pattern additional display. In addition, if the reliability is strong, the “A” pattern may be displayed as “elevated” in red or black. Alternatively, a “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may change to the A pattern additional display. Further, if the reliability is weak, “elevated” may be displayed in black letters as the A pattern. Alternatively, a “question mark” may be added and displayed as the B pattern, and thereafter, the display may change to the A pattern additional display. In addition, when the notice icon I9 of the thousand boxes is digested, any one of the confirmed effect, the reach transition effect, and the advance notice effect may be executed. In addition, after the additional display of the B pattern is performed, the display may not be changed to the additional display of the A pattern.

  The fan notice icon I10 is a notice icon imitating a fan worn by a princess character, and the reliability of the jackpot is determined to be a jackpot. When the notice icon I10 of one fan is digested, the appearance of a premier notice that informs in advance that the jackpot is confirmed, or the premier reach where the jackpot is confirmed is executed (premier effect). Alternatively, the fan notice icon I10 is digested after the reach deviation is displayed, and a revival effect that is a big hit is executed (revival effect). In the present embodiment, when a character notation is displayed accompanying the fan warning icon I10, “blessing” may be displayed. When the fan notice icon I10 is consumed, either the premier effect or the revival effect may be executed. Moreover, in this embodiment, although the content to produce produces changes with the timing when the fan notification icon I10 is digested, the digestion timing may be the same.

  The second button notice icon I11 is a notice icon simulating the effect button 136, and the reliability of the big hit is any one of the weakest to the big hit confirmed. When one second button notice icon I11 is digested, a button effect that prompts the player to operate the effect button 136 is performed. At this time, the operation reception period is started, and when the effect button 136 is operated during the operation reception period, the digest indication of the second button notice icon I11 is displayed as the hat notice icon I6, shuriken notice icon I7, ribbon The notice icon I8, the carousel notice icon I8, and the fan notice icon I10 may be changed to the digest display, and a corresponding effect may be executed. Or, there is a case where any notice icon is deleted without being changed.

  In the present embodiment, the change of the notice icon is performed when the notice icon before the change described above is changed to the notice icon after the change, but the notice icon before the change is changed via the notice icon. It is also possible to display to delete the notice icon (the notice icon “none” shown in item 5 of FIG. 18B: erase effect). In this effect, it is informed that the fluctuation is out of place. In other words, it is a gusset notice indicating that the pattern is a deviation confirmation pattern. Of course, the reliability is the weakest. Even if the erasing effect is executed, there may be a big hit.

  Next, a specific example of effects executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 19 is a diagram showing an example of effects centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment.

  19 includes a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special figure display device 212, a second special figure display device 214, a general figure display device 210, a first special figure reservation lamp 218, a second special figure reservation lamp 220, A figure holding lamp 216 and a fourth symbol display device 284a are shown. Here, the 4th symbol display device 284a is a display device having the same function as the display of the 4th symbol display area 284 shown in FIG. 14, and displays the display result of the 4th symbol by the light emission mode of the LED, for example. It is possible to do. The fourth symbol display device 284a may be constituted by an image display device such as an LCD or an EL. For example, the fourth symbol display device 284 a is provided at a predetermined position of the game board 200 and is driven and controlled by the first sub-control unit 400. From the top, the fourth symbol display device 284a becomes a normal symbol changing notification region, a special symbol changing notification region of FIG. 1, and a special symbol changing notification region of FIG. While the regular symbol is stopped, the LED in the area where the quadrangular figure is displayed is lit on, but while the regular symbol is changing, it is displayed blinking or extinguished. While the symbol of the special figure 1 is stopped, the LED in the area where the circular figure is displayed is lit on and off, while the symbol fluctuation of the special figure 1 is blinking or off. While the symbol of the special figure 2 is stopped, the LED in the area where the triangular figure is displayed is lit on, but while the symbol of the special figure 2 is changing, the LED is blinked or turned off. In this way, the 4th symbol not only has a different display position but also a different display mode (in this case, a shape), so that the player can make a determination at first glance. Note that the pre-reading notice may be performed by changing the display mode, lighting mode, and flashing mode of the fourth symbol. Note that the fourth symbol may be lit while the symbol is changing and may be extinguished while the symbol is stopped.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 19A, the above-described notice icon display area 285 is displayed at the top. In FIG. 19A, no notice icon is displayed in any of the notice icon display areas 285. Further, as shown in FIG. 19 (1), the first special symbol display device 212 performs symbol variation display, and in response to this, the ornamental symbol display device 208 performs variation symbol display of the decorative symbol. At the same time, in the fourth symbol display device 284a, the variation display of the fourth symbol corresponding to the special symbol 1 is performed. Note that the notice icon display area 285 may be displayed at all times, or may or may not be displayed as necessary.

  Further, in FIG. 19A, the fluctuation icon h0 is displayed in the fluctuation icon display area 280, and the two hold icons h11 and h12 of FIG. 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. The hold icons h11 and h12 and the fluctuation icon h0 of these two special drawings 1 are all displayed in a default display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode). In this example, the display of the hold icon display area 282 in FIG. 2 is omitted, but the second hold icon display area 282 may be displayed.

  Subsequently, at the timing shown in FIG. 19 (2), when a game ball wins the first special figure starting port 230, the number of lighting in the first special figure holding lamp 218 increases by one to three, and the holding is made. It is shown that the number has become three. In addition, the hold icon h13 of the third special figure 1 is also displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1. The third hold is a hold that is a target of prefetching, and is a hold that triggers whether or not to display a notice icon, as will be described later. For convenience of explanation, the hold icon h13 of the third special figure 1 to be prefetched is hatched, but actually, it is the same as the hold icons h11 and h12 of the other special figures 1 It is a display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode). The same applies to the following description.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 19 (3), the decoration symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decoration symbols “decoration 6-decoration 2—decoration 7”, and the display result of the deviation is determined. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  In FIG. 19 (4), the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started and the fourth symbol is turned off. However, no change has yet occurred in the hold icon or the decorative symbol.

  In FIG. 19 (5), the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 in FIG. 1 are moved and displayed by the moving animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is moved to the variable icon display area 280. The hold icon that was at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 of FIG. 1 and the hold icon that was at the display position of the third hold icon h13 is special. 1 second hold icon h12. After that, the decorative symbol variation display is started.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 19 (6), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the Tono-like character YM appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the Tono-like effect is started. This is an effect executed when it is determined to display the notice icon based on the pre-read result. Here, Tono-sama character YM possesses a hat notice icon I6.

  Then, after the Tono-sama character YM moves and displays to a predetermined throwing position at the timing shown in FIG. 19 (7), the notice icon I6 of the possessed hat is displayed as the notice icon at the timing shown in FIG. 19 (8). An effect display to throw toward the area 285 is performed.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 19 (9), the notice icon I6 of the thrown hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 19 (10), On the decorative symbol display device 208, an effect display is performed in which the Tono-sama character YM successfully displays the notice icon and makes a happy expression. Thereby, the player expects that an effect corresponding to the notice icon I6 of the hat will be executed in the future. That is, it can be said that the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon display area 285, so that the pseudo-continuous effect will be executed in the future.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 19 (11) to (12), a display is performed in which the Tono-like character YM is out of the frame toward the lower side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 19 (13), the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 1 -decoration 4 -decoration 2”, and the display result of the deviation is determined. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  FIG. 20 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 19 in stages.

  In FIG. 20 (14) following FIG. 19 (13), the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started and the fourth symbol is turned off, but there is a change in the hold icon and the decorative symbol. It has not yet occurred.

  In FIG. 20 (15), the hold icons h11 and h12 of FIG. 1 are moved and displayed by moving animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and changes. The hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the icon h0 and becomes the first hold icon h11 in FIG. After that, the decorative symbol variation display is started.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 20 (16), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the Tono-like character YM appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the Tono-like effect is started. This is also an effect that is executed when it is determined to display the notice icon based on the result of prefetching the hold corresponding to the first hold icon h11. Here, Tono-sama character YM possesses a hat notice icon I6, a thousand box notice icon I9, and a fan notice icon I10.

  Then, after the Tono-sama character YM moves and displays to a predetermined throwing position at the timing shown in FIG. 20 (17), the notification icon I6 of the possessed hat and the warning of the thousand boxes at the timing shown in FIG. 20 (18). An effect display in which the icon I9 and the fan notice icon I10 are thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 is performed.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 20 (19), the notice icon I6 of the thrown hat is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285, and the notice icon I9 of the thousand boxes is the notice icon third display area. Displayed in YA3, fan notice icon I10 is displayed in notice icon fourth display area YA4. Thereafter, the same effect display as in FIGS. 19 (10) to (12) is performed.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 20 (20), the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2”, and the display result of the deviation is notified. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  In FIG. 20 (21), the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started and the fourth symbol is turned off, but no change has yet occurred in the hold icon or the decorative symbol.

  In FIG. 20 (22), the hold icon h11 of FIG. 1 is moved and displayed by the moving animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is moved to the change icon display area 280 and changed to the change icon h0. Become. After that, the decorative symbol variation display is started.

  Then, for example, when 4 seconds have elapsed since the start of the decorative symbol change display, as shown in FIG. 20 (23), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the notification symbol in the first display area YA1. The display of digesting the notice icon I6 of the hat is started. That is, a display is performed in which the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 moves from the notice icon first display area YA1 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the present embodiment, the notice icon digestion effect for digesting the notice icon is performed in this way. As shown in FIG. 20 (23), when two or more of the same notice icon are displayed in the notice icon display area 285, such as two hat notice icons I6 are displayed, Although it is set in advance so that the displayed notice icon is preferentially digested, the order of digestion may be determined according to the reliability of the notice icon. Further, which notice icon is to be used may be determined at random, or may be set so that the notice icon displayed on the right side is preferentially digested. That is, the order in which the notice icons are digested can be set as appropriate limited to those described above.

  Then, when the hat notice icon I6 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it is enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 20 (24) and then enlarged as shown in FIG. 20 (25). Below the notice icon I6 for the hat, a text display of “Continue” for notifying that the pseudo-continuous effect will be performed is additionally displayed. This character display may be performed at the same time when the hat notice icon I6 is enlarged, may be performed before the enlarged display, or after the enlarged display is performed. Also good. In addition, when the hat notice icon I6 is displayed in an enlarged manner, for example, the display form of the fluctuation icon h0 may be changed from the default display form to the display form of the prefetching notice. Further, when the hold icon is displayed, the display mode of the hold icon may be changed.

  Thereafter, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, at the timing of FIG. 20 (26), the hat notice icon I6 is erased together with the display of “Continue”, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 20 (27). The left symbol and the right symbol are stopped and displayed. At this time, “decoration 1” is displayed on the left symbol, and “decoration 2” is displayed on the right symbol. That is, it is shown that it is a non-reach state.

  FIG. 21 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 20 in stages.

  In FIG. 21 (28) continuing from FIG. 20 (27), in response to the digestion of the hat notice icon I6, the watchdog character BC appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208 and is stopped and displayed. An effect display that pushes up the symbol is performed to notify the player that there is a possibility that the pseudo-ream effect will be started. In the present embodiment, after the bancho character BC pushes up the right symbol, the same decorative symbol is stopped and displayed again. For example, the right symbol is the same as the left symbol (for example, “ It may be the decoration 1 ”) to form the reach state and start the reach effect.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 21 (29), the decorative symbol display device 208 continues to display the left symbol and the right symbol, and in the middle symbol display area 208b, there is a pseudo-continuous symbol representing the Tono-like character. A display moving at a low speed from above to below is displayed.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b at the timing of FIG. 21 (30), as shown in FIG. A cut-in display consisting of the character display is performed. In the present embodiment, in this way, the pseudo-continuous symbol is executed by notifying that the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed. In addition, when the pseudo-continuous symbol is framed downward without being displayed in a stopped state, the pseudo-continuous symbol is not started, and the combination of the decorative symbols out of place is stopped and displayed. In the present embodiment, the pseudo-continuous effect may be executed even when the hat notice icon I6 is not digested.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 21 (32), the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of decorative symbols in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. At this time, “pseudo × 2” is displayed at the upper left of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, which indicates that the second decorative symbol variation display by the pseudo-continuous effect has been started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 21 (33), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol “decoration 1” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, and a reach state is formed. . At this time, reach production has not started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 21 (34), the display of digesting the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 is started. That is, a display is performed in which the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 moves from the notice icon second display area YA2 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Thereafter, when the hat notice icon I6 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it is enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 21 (35) and then enlarged as shown in FIG. 21 (36). Below the notice icon I6 for the hat, a text display of “Continue” for notifying that the pseudo-continuous effect will be performed is additionally displayed.

  Thereafter, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, at the timing of FIG. 21 (37), the hat notice icon I6 is erased together with the display of “Continue”, and then in FIG. In response to the digestion of the previous notice icon I6, the chief character BC appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the effect display that pushes up the stopped right symbol is performed, and the second pseudo-ream effect Is informed to the player that there is a possibility of starting.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 21 (39), in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the number-length character BC pushes up the right symbol, the decorative symbols displayed in the right symbol display area 208c are changed from “decoration 1” to “decoration”. The decoration is changed to “decoration 2”, a non-reach state is formed, and in the middle symbol display area 208b, a display in which the pseudo-continuous symbols move from the upper side to the lower side at a low speed is performed. At this time, the character information of “pseudo × 2” is deleted while the pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed, but the display may be continued. Further, while the pseudo-continuous symbols are displayed, the “pseudo × 2” character information may be displayed in another area. Further, while the pseudo-continuous symbols are displayed, the display mode of the character information of “pseudo × 2” may be changed. In this effect example, after the chief character BC pushes up the right symbol, the same decorative symbol may be stopped and displayed again, the reach state may be maintained, and the reach effect may be started.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b at the timing of FIG. 21 (40), as shown in FIG. The cut-in display consisting of the character display is performed to notify that the pseudo-ream is executed. In the present embodiment, it is configured so that the larger the notice icon I6 of the hat is, the easier it is to win a big hit in one symbol variation display. That is, in the case where only one hat notification icon I6 is digested and the pseudo-continuous effect is performed only once, and in the case where two hat notification icons I6 are digested and the pseudo-continuous effect is performed twice, the hat It is easier to win if the two notice icons I6 are digested, and only two of the hat notice icons I6 are digested and the pseudo-rendition is performed twice, and three hat notice icons I6 are digested. In the case where the pseudo-rendition effect is performed three times, it can be said that it is easier to win if the three hat notification icons I6 are digested.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 21 (42), the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable symbol display in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. At this time, “pseudo × 3” is displayed on the upper left of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, indicating that the third variation of decorative symbol display by the pseudo-continuous effect has started.

  FIG. 22 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 21 in stages.

  In FIG. 22 (43) following FIG. 21 (42), the decoration symbol “decoration 1” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, and a reach state is formed. Here, reach production is started.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 22 (44), the above-mentioned super reach (swordsman reach) is developed. Note that the variable display of the decorative symbols, which has been performed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c so far, moves to the lower right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 and is reduced. Is displayed. The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22 (44) displays a large image of the enemy swordsman, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 22 (45) shows a duel between the protagonist and the enemy swordsman. The animation display of the scene is started.

  Thereafter, on the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 22 (46), the display in which the notice icon I9 of the thousand boxes displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 is digested is started. In other words, a display is performed in which the thousand thousand box notice icon I9 displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 moves from the notice icon third display area YA3 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Thereafter, when the Senryoku notice icon I9 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it is enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 22 (47), and above the enlarged Senryaku notice icon I9. A character display of “elevation” for notifying the transition to a production with higher reliability is additionally displayed. Note that this character display may be performed at the same time as the advance notice icon I9 of the thousand carton box is enlarged, may be performed before the enlarged display, or after the enlarged display is performed. Also good.

  Thereafter, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, the decorative symbol display device 208 erases the warning icon I9 of the thousand boxes with the character display of “promotion” at the timing of FIG. 22 (48). The reach transition effect described above is started at the timing of 22 (49). When the reach transition effect is started, as shown in FIG. 22 (49), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the reach effect display that has been executed becomes slightly dark, and the Tono-sama character appears in the cut-in display. A display for cutting the reach effect display being executed is performed, and then the background is darkened as shown in FIG.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 22 (51), the decorative symbol display device 208 starts a strong reach effect (button reach effect) with high reliability. When the button reach effect is started, as shown in FIG. 22 (51), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the characters “Is it too hot” on the darkened background, and then FIG. 22 (52). Is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 22 (53), a character display of “one blow” is performed to notify that a button effect is performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 22 (54), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the button image 136a together with the button reception time meter, and notifies the player that the operation of the effect button 136 can be received. The operation of the production button 136 is promoted.

  Then, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player at the timing shown in FIG. 22 (55), as shown in FIG. 22 (56), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the button image 136a is deleted, It shows how the button reach production failed.

  Soon, in FIG. 22 (57), the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c are enlarged and displayed by a combination of the decoration symbols of “decoration 1—decoration 2—decoration 1”.

  FIG. 23 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 22 in stages.

  In FIG. 23 (58) following FIG. 22 (57), everything including the notice icon display area 285 is temporarily hidden. Eventually, in FIG. 23 (59), the fluctuation fluctuation (provisional symbol stop display) of the decoration symbol combination of “decoration 1-decoration 2—decoration 1” is started. At this time, the display of the notice icon display area 285 is also resumed.

  Thereafter, for example, when two seconds have elapsed from the temporary symbol stop display, the display of digesting the fan warning icon I10 displayed in the warning icon fourth display area YA4 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 23 (60). . That is, a display is performed in which the fan warning icon I10 displayed in the warning icon fourth display area YA4 moves from the warning icon fourth display area YA4 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Thereafter, when the fan warning icon I10 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the fan is displayed in an enlarged manner at the timing shown in FIG. At this time, for example, a character display of “Blessing” for notifying that the big hit is fixed may be added below the enlarged fan notice icon I10. When the character display is added, the additional display of the character display may be performed at the same time as the fan preview icon I10 is displayed in an enlarged manner, or may be executed before the enlarged display. It may be performed after the enlarged display.

  Thereafter, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, the decorative symbol display device 208 erases the fan warning icon I10 at the timing of FIG. 23 (62), and the warning icon display area 285 is framed upward. Is displayed. After that, at the timing of FIG. 23 (63), the variation display of the decorative symbols that fluctuated in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c is resumed, and the re-variation effect is started. . At this time, the notice icon display area 285 is completely out of frame. Note that the notice icon display area 285 may be continuously displayed even after the re-variation effect is started.

  In the re-variation effect, as shown in FIG. 23 (64), an effect display in which the princess character dances with a fan is performed. The variation display of the decorative symbol that has been performed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c so far is moved to the lower right corner of the display region of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is reduced and displayed. The

  Eventually, as shown in FIG. 23 (65), the fluctuation of the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1” is displayed.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 23 (66), the combination of the big-decided decorative symbols “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1” is stopped and displayed. At this time, on the first special figure display device 212, “Special figure A”, which is a 15R probability variation big hit, is stopped and displayed, and on the fourth symbol display apparatus 284a, the fourth symbol (round figure) of the special figure 1 is displayed. Is lit. Thereafter, although not shown, the jackpot game is started after the above jackpot game start effect is executed.

  In the present embodiment, the fan notice icon I10 displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is digested, and the re-variation effect is executed, resulting in a big hit. However, the fan notice icon I10 is displayed in the notice icon display area. If not displayed at 285, a re-change effect may not be performed, and an out-of-display result may be derived. In other words, when the reach transition effect that is executed after digesting the thousand-car box notice icon I9 is performed, the reach transition effect can be regarded as a false notice effect. That is, when one of the thousand carousel notice icons I9 is digested, if the reach transition effect is executed as a fake notice corresponding to the digested thousand carousel notice icon I9, the result of the symbol variation display Can be said to be out of place. The same applies to the notice effect corresponding to the hat notice icon I6, the notice effect corresponding to the shuriken notice icon I7, and the notice effect corresponding to the ribbon notice icon I8.

  Thus, in this embodiment, it can be said that a notice effect can be executed according to the number of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285. In other words, it can be said that the notice icon is configured to display a number corresponding to the number of times that the notice may be executed.

  In the present embodiment, the description has been given of the case in which the notice icon is digested only during the execution of the symbol variation display that is the object of the pre-reading notice, and the effect corresponding to the digested notice icon is executed. Also in the symbol variation display executed before the symbol variation display, the notice icon may be digested and the effect corresponding to the notice icon may be executed. In this case, the number of notice icons to be digested in the symbol variation display subject to the pre-reading notice differs from the number of notice icons to be digested in the symbol variation display executed before the symbol variation display to be pre-ready notice. You may make it like, and it may be the same.

  Next, another example of the above-described effect of increasing the notice icon will be described with reference to FIGS. Here, FIGS. 24 to 26 are diagrams showing step-by-step examples of other effects of increasing the notice icon. 24 to 26, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the universal figure hold. The lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown.

  FIGS. 24 (8a) to (10a) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 19 (8) to (10). That is, in FIG. 24 (8 a), an effect display is performed in which the first icon-like notice icon I 1 is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 instead of the hat notice icon I 6.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 24 (9 a-1), the thrown first lord's notice icon I 1 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA 1 of the notice icon display area 285. Then, as shown in FIG. 24 (9a-2), after the first icon of the notice icon I1 displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is displayed to explode, the timing shown in FIG. 24 (10a) is displayed. Thus, the notice icon I1 of the exploded first lord is changed to a hat notice icon I6, and an effect display in which the lord character YM succeeds in increasing the notice icon and makes a happy expression is performed. Also according to this effect example, the player expects that an effect corresponding to the hat notice icon I6 will be executed in the future.

  FIGS. 24 (8b) to (9b) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 19 (8) to (9). That is, in FIG. 24 (8 b), an effect display in which the first button notice icon I 4 is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 instead of the hat notice icon I 6 is performed.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 24 (9b), the thrown first button notice icon I4 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. If the effect button 136 is operated after the first button notice icon I4 is displayed in the notice icon display area 285 until the first button notice icon I4 is consumed, the first button notice icon I4 is displayed. It changes to any one of the notice icon I1, the notice icon I2 of the second lord, and the notice icon I3 of the third lord. Thus, in this effect example, until the effect button 136 is operated, the big hit reliability indicated by the notice icon is difficult to recognize, so the incentive to operate the effect button 136 to know the big hit reliability. May work and enhance the production effect. The period from when the first button notice icon I4 is displayed in the notice icon display area 285 to when it is consumed may be the effective period of the operation of the effect button 136. Here, when the first button notice icon I4 is displayed over a plurality of symbol variation displays, the operation of the effect button 136 may be invalidated during the symbol stop display period. The operation of the effect button 136 may be valid even during the stop display period. Also, if the effect button 136 is not operated until the first button notice icon I4 is digested, the notice icon that was scheduled to be displayed when the effect button 136 was operated during the digest effect of the notice icon is displayed. A corresponding effect display may be performed, or a button effect is performed when the first button notice icon I4 is digested, and the effect button 136 is operated within the operation valid period of the effect button 136. The effect display corresponding to the notice icon that was scheduled to be displayed may be performed, or the notice that was scheduled to be displayed when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 ends without the effect button 136 being operated. An effect display corresponding to the icon may be performed. Further, after the first button notice icon I4 is digested and the button effect is started, the notice icon that is scheduled to be displayed only when the effect button 136 is operated within the operation effective period of the effect button 136. An effect display corresponding to may be performed. Further, when the button effect is performed, the operation valid period of the effect button 136 may not be provided. In this case, an effect display corresponding to the notice icon that is scheduled to be displayed after the button effect is started may be performed. Further, until the first button notice icon I4 is consumed, the first button notice icon may not be changed to another notice icon even if the effect button 136 is operated.

  FIGS. 24 (8c) to (9c) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 19 (8) to (9). That is, in FIG. 24 (8 c), as in FIG. 19 (8), an effect display in which the hat warning icon I 6 is thrown toward the warning icon display area 285 is performed.

  However, in the case of FIG. 24 (9 c), a state is shown in which the hat notice icon I 6 does not reach the notice icon display area 285 and is out of the frame of the display area. That is, in the present embodiment, it is also possible to execute a gaze increase effect that fails to increase the notice icon. Note that a gaze increase effect using a notification icon other than the hat notification icon I6 may be performed. For example, the higher the reliability of the jackpot reliability, the harder the gaze increase effect may be.

  FIGS. 24 (7d) to (9d) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 19 (7) to (9). That is, FIG. 24 (7d) shows a state in which the Tono-like character YM having the hat notice icon I6 is moved and displayed to a predetermined throwing position, as in FIG. 19 (7). Thereafter, in FIG. 24 (8 d), there is an effect display in which not only one hat notice icon I 6 but also three hat notice icons I 6 are simultaneously thrown toward the notice icon display area 285. In addition, it may be an effect display that throws one by one sequentially instead of simultaneously.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 24 (9d), the notice icon I6 of the three thrown hats is the notice icon first display area YA1, notice icon second display area YA2, and notice icon third display in the notice icon display area 285. Each is displayed in the area YA3. Thus, in this effect example, an increase in a plurality of notice icons can be executed in one increase effect. Therefore, when a plurality of notification icons increase at a time, the expectation for the increase in the number of executions of the notification may be improved, and the production effect may be enhanced. For example, as shown in FIG. 24 (9d), the same notice icon (for example, hat notice icon I6) is displayed in a predetermined number (for example, three) or more in the notice icon display area 285, so that Since it is guaranteed that the performance is executed three times, it may be notified that the jackpot is determined. In addition, a high-reliability notice icon is unlikely to be displayed (not easily stocked) in the notice icon display area 285, and a low-reliability notice icon is likely to be displayed (easy to be stocked) in the notice icon display area 285. Or vice versa.

  In this case, as shown in FIG. 24 (9d '), a part or all of the thrown three hat notice icons I6 do not reach the notice icon display area 285, but from the left of the display area. You may make it perform the partial gossip increase production or the full gossip increase production which will be out of a frame.

  FIGS. 24 (7e) to (9e) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 19 (7) to (9). That is, in FIG. 24 (7e), unlike the effect example shown in FIG. 19 (7), the character YM of Tono-sama, which has a warning icon I6 for a single box, a warning icon I9 for a thousand boxes, and a warning icon I10 for a fan. A state in which is moved and displayed up to a predetermined throwing position is shown. At this time, only one or two of the three notice icons may be displayed. Here, only the notice icon with the lowest reliability of the jackpot may be displayed, or only the notice icon with the highest reliability of the jackpot may be displayed, or the notice icon selected at random. May be displayed. Thereafter, in FIG. 24 (8e), an effect display is performed in which the hat notice icon I6, the thousand box notice icon I9, and the fan notice icon I10 are simultaneously thrown toward the notice icon display area 285. In addition, it may be an effect display that throws one by one sequentially instead of simultaneously. Further, as described above, the three notice icons may not be different from each other, and, for example, a plurality of the same notice icons may be included.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 24 (9e), the three thrown notice icons are displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1, the notice icon second display area YA2, and the notice icon third display area YA3 in the notice icon display area 285. Each is displayed. As described above, also in this effect example, an increase in a plurality of types of notice icons can be executed in one increase effect. Therefore, by increasing the number of notice icons at a time, the expectation for the increase in the number of notices executed can be improved, and the expectation for the execution of a plurality of kinds of notices can be enhanced. There is a case.

  Even in this case, as shown in FIG. 24 (9 e ′), some or all of the thrown three notice icons do not reach the notice icon display area 285, and the display of the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed. You may make it perform the partial gossip increase production which frames out from the left of an area | region, or the full gossip increase effect.

  FIG. 24 (12f-1) to FIG. 24 (12f-2) show other examples of effects shown in FIG. 19 (12). That is, in FIG. 24 (12f-1), as in FIG. 19 (12), the decorative symbol variation display is performed in a state in which the hat notice icon I6 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. Has been done. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 24 (12f-2), the decoration symbol of “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, and the reach state is formed, and the reach effect is started. The As described above, in the present embodiment, the reach effect can be executed even in a state where the notice icon is displayed. As a result of this reach production, it may be a big hit. In this case, the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 may be deleted after the big hit.

  FIG. 25 (8g) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 19 (8). That is, in FIG. 25 (8g), when the hold icon h12 is displayed in the display mode of the pre-reading notice (the display form by the Sabohani character), the character YM of Tono-sama displays the notice icon I6 of the hat as the notice icon display area 285. An effect display that is thrown toward the camera is performed. As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to execute an increase effect of the notice icon even during execution of the prefetch notice using the hold icon. It should be noted that the increase effect of the notice icon and the prefetch notice using the hold icon may not be performed at the same time.

  FIG. 25 (8h) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 19 (8). That is, in FIG. 25 (8h), the decorative symbol display device 208 does not display the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and the effect hold lamp 286 is placed at a predetermined position (for example, the game board 200). It may be provided in the vicinity of the decorative symbol display device 208 to display the number of holds. The effect hold lamp 286 includes, for example, a full-color LED, and is driven and controlled by the first sub-control unit 400. For example, in addition to lighting in a default light emission mode (for example, lighting in white), pre-reading notice light emission The drive control by the mode (for example, lighting while switching seven colors) is possible. In FIG. 25 (8h), for convenience of explanation, the holding lamp of the second special figure 1 to be read ahead is hatched, but in actuality, the first special figure 1 is shown. Similarly to the holding lamp in FIG. 2, the second holding lamp in FIG. 1 is lit in the default light emission mode.

  25 (8i) to FIG. 25 (9i-2) show other examples of effects shown in FIG. 19 (8) to FIG. 19 (9). In other words, in FIG. 25 (8i), as in FIG. 19 (8), the effect display in which the hat's notice icon I6 is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 is performed.

  However, in the case of FIG. 25 (9i-1), it is shown that the hat's notice icon I6 does not reach the notice icon display area 285 and falls below the display area. Then, as shown in FIG. 25 (9 i-2), the notice icon of the hat notice I6 acts on the hold icon h 11 of the special figure 1 displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1 to display the prefetching notice display mode. An effect display (holding change effect) is displayed. In other words, in this embodiment, the hat warning icon I6 may not appear as the warning icon in the warning icon display area 285, and may appear as a trigger for starting the prefetching warning with the hold icon. It should be noted that the hold change effect may be performed using a notice icon other than the hat notice icon I6. For example, the hold change effect may be less likely to be executed for a notice icon with a higher reliability of the jackpot.

  As shown in FIG. 26 (9i-2 ′), the decorative symbol display device 208 does not display the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. In the case of displaying the number, after the hat notice icon I6 falls below the display area, the light emission mode of the first holding lamp in FIG. 1 may be changed to the light emission mode of the pre-reading notice.

  25 (8j) to FIG. 25 (9j) show other examples of effects shown in FIG. 19 (8) to FIG. 19 (9). That is, in the production example shown in FIG. 19 (8), Tono-sama character YM appeared and threw a notice icon on the notice icon display area 285, but FIG. 25 (8j) is different from FIG. 19 (8). The DJ character BY with the notice icon appears on the flying carpet and appears from the right side of the display area instead of the Tono-sama character YM (DJ production). In the example shown in FIG. 25 (8j), the DJ character appears with a hat notice icon I6. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 25 (9j), the DJ character BY flies toward the upper left corner, and displays the hat's previous notice icon I6 as the notice icon first display area YA1 in the notice icon display area 285. An effect display is put on. Note that the number of notice icons placed by the DJ character BY in the notice icon display area 285 is not limited to one, but may be two or more. Further, in the effect of increasing the notice icon by one DJ character BY, a plurality of kinds of notice icons may be placed in the notice icon display area 285. In this way, a plurality of types of notification icon increase effects (for example, a first notification icon increase effect by Tono-sama character YM and a second notification icon increase effect by DJ character BY) may be prepared. By configuring, the production may be diversified and the production effect may be enhanced.

  25 (8k) to FIG. 25 (9k) show other examples of effects shown in FIG. 19 (8) to FIG. 19 (9). That is, in the production example shown in FIG. 19 (8), Tono-sama's character YM appeared and threw a notice icon on the notice icon display area 285, but in FIG. 25 (8k), a DJ having a notice icon is further provided. The character BY appears on the flying carpet and appears from the right side of the display area. In the example shown in FIG. 25 (8k), the DJ character appears with a warning icon I9 of a thousand boxes. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 25 (9k), a hat notice icon I6 thrown by Tono-sama character YM is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and the DJ character While flying toward the upper left corner, an effect display is performed in which the notice icon I9 of the 1000-carton box is placed in the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285. The DJ character is arranged in a layer on the front side of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285, and is displayed so as to pass the front side of the notice icon. Here, as shown in FIG. 25 (9k ′), the DJ character passes through the back side of the notice icon by placing it on the layer on the back side of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285. It may be displayed as if Further, as shown in FIG. 25 (9k ″), the DJ character BY is displayed in the carton box so as to be superimposed on the hat notice icon I6 that is thrown by the character YM and displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. An effect display may be performed in which the notice icon I9 is placed in the notice icon first display area YA1. That is, a notice icon overwriting effect may be performed. As described above, the execution times of the increase effects of a plurality of types of notice icons may overlap, which may further enhance the effect.

  FIG. 25 (12l) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 19 (12). That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 25 (121), the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 are displayed with the corresponding character notation. For example, a “continuation” character is added and displayed on the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the first notice icon first display area YA1, and the warning icon I9 for the thousand boxes displayed in the second notice icon display area YA2 is displayed. Is displayed with an additional character “Elevation”, and the fan ’s warning icon I10 displayed in the third notification icon display area YA3 is additionally displayed with “Blessing”. The shuriken notice icon I7 displayed in the area YA4 is indicated by a letter “Chang eyes”, and the ribbon notice icon I8 displayed in the notice icon fifth display area YA5 has “STECHEN” A character is added and displayed, and the notice icon I6 of the hat displayed in the sixth notice area YA6 of the notice icon displays “question” along with “question”. The character of over-click "is displayed note. This may make it easier to understand the content of the notice effect that is scheduled to be executed afterwards.

  As shown in FIG. 25 (12l ′) and FIG. 25 (12l ″), some or all of the characters added to the notice icon are displayed as “question marks” to clearly show the corresponding notice effect. May not be displayed. Thereby, it is possible to give a sense of expectation as to whether or not the notice corresponding to the displayed notice icon is executed, and the interest may be improved.

  Further, it may be notified in advance that an effect display in which a big hit is determined is executed according to a combination of a plurality of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 or the number of displayed notice icons. For example, FIG. As shown in (12l "'), when three hat notification icons I6 with the" continuation "character notation are displayed in the notification icon display area 285, four pseudo-decisions are made to determine the big hit. You may make it notify that an effect display including a continuous effect is performed. In addition, when the character added and displayed on the notice icon does not correspond to the notice icon (for example, when “promotion” is added and displayed on the hat notice icon I6), the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed. It may be a premier notice display for notifying that the result of the symbol variation display when the is digested is a big hit confirmed (or that there is a big hit in the hold).

  In the example of production described above, the notice icon is increased by the appearance of Tono-sama character YM or DJ character BY. However, in the example of production shown in FIG. 26, an effect of increasing the notice icon by displaying a decorative symbol is provided. Is what you do.

  In FIG. 26 (A1), the decoration symbol “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, a reach state is formed, and a reach effect is started. This reach production is, for example, normal reach.

  After the reach effect starts, at the timing shown in FIG. 26 (A2), the notice icon symbol imitating the notice icon is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. In the example shown in FIG. 26 (A2), the hat notice icon symbol imitating the hat notice icon I6 is stopped. In the vicinity of the lower part of the notice icon design of the hat, a character notation “stock” is added, and when the notice icon design is stopped and displayed, the notice icon display area 285 is notified of an increase in the notice icon. doing.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 26 (A3), the notice icon pattern of the hat is changed to the notice icon I6 of the hat, and the display of moving to the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285 is performed. As shown in (A4), the decoration symbol “decoration 5” arranged on the back side of the notice icon symbol is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the display result is out of place. In the present embodiment, an effect of increasing the notice icon in this way may be performed.

  In FIG. 26 (B1), similarly to the effect example shown in FIG. 26 (A1), the decoration symbol “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, and a reach state is formed. Normal reach production begins.

  After the start of the reach effect, at the timing shown in FIG. 26 (B2), in the middle symbol display area 208b, the first lord's notice icon symbol imitating the first lord's notice icon I1 is stopped and displayed. In the production example shown in FIG. 26 (B2), the character notation “stock” is appended to the first icon of the first icon, and the notice icon display area is displayed by stopping the notice icon design. In 285, it is informed that an advance notice icon is displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 26 (B3), the notice icon design of the first lord is changed to the notice icon I1 of the first lord, and the display moves to the notice icon first display area YA1 in the notice icon display area 285. As shown in FIG. 26 (B4), the decorative symbol “decoration 5” arranged on the back side of the notice icon symbol is stopped and displayed, and it is notified that the result is a display error. At this time, the notice icon I1 of the first lord has changed to a hat notice icon I6. Needless to say, the notice icon after the change is not limited to the notice icon I6 for the hat, and may be another kind of notice icon. The timing at which the notice icon changes is not limited to the period in which the symbol variation display is being executed. For example, the notice icon may be changed during the next and subsequent symbol variation display. You may make it not change until the timing which an icon digests. In the present embodiment, an effect of increasing the notice icon in this way may be performed.

  Next, another effect example of the notice icon digest effect described above will be described with reference to FIGS. Here, FIGS. 27-30 is a figure which shows in step-by-step another example of a notice icon digest effect. 27 to 30, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the universal figure hold. The lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown.

  27 (38m) to FIG. 27 (40m-3) show other examples of effects shown in FIG. 21 (38) to FIG. 21 (40). In FIGS. 27 (38m) to (39m), the same effects as in FIGS. 21 (38) to (39) are performed, but in FIG. 27 (40m-1), the middle symbol display area 208b is slow. As shown in FIG. 27 (40m-2), the quasi-continuous pattern appears at a high speed immediately before the pseudo-continuous pattern becomes the stop display position of the decorative pattern, as shown in FIG. 27 (40m-2). Is scrolled down to the lower side of the display area, and as shown in FIG. 27 (40m-3), the combination of the decorations of “decoration 1-decoration 2—decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and the fluctuation is displayed. Then, it is informed that it is a result of the stop display. As described above, in this embodiment, even if the hat notice icon I6 is digested, the pseudo-continuous effect may not be performed.

  27 (23n) to FIG. 27 (24n) show other examples of effects shown in FIG. 20 (23) to FIG. 20 (24). That is, as shown in FIG. 27 (23n), the display of digesting the hat notice icon I6 is started, but as shown in FIG. 27 (24n), the digested hat notice icon I6 is enlarged and displayed. There may be a case where a display that is erased as it is is displayed and a notice that the digested effect is not performed is given.

  FIGS. 27 (23o) to (24o-2) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 20 (23) to (24). That is, as shown in FIG. 27 (23o), the display of digesting the hat notice icon I6 is started, and the hat notice icon I6 is enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 27 (24o-1). The notice icon I6 is deleted, and as shown in FIG. 27 (24o-2), in the combination of the decorative symbols that are out of place without starting the pseudo-continuous effect (FIG. 27 (24o-2), “decoration 1-decoration 2”). -The combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 2”) is displayed with temporary stop and fluctuation fluctuation is displayed, and then the stop display is displayed and it is notified that the result is out of place. As described above, in this embodiment, even if the hat notice icon I6 is digested, the pseudo-continuous effect may not be performed.

  FIGS. 27 (22p) to (23p) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 20 (22) to (23). That is, as shown in FIG. 27 (22p), for example, when 4 seconds have elapsed since the start of the decorative symbol variation display, in FIG. 27 (23p), in the leftmost side of the notice icon display area 285 (the notice icon). There may be an effect in which not the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the first display area YA1) but other notice icons are digested. In the effect example shown in FIG. 27 (23p), the effect that the notice icon I9 of the thousand boxes displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 is digested is performed. Thus, in this embodiment, the notice icon may not be digested in order from the left. In this embodiment, the notice icons are digested in the order displayed in the notice icon display area 285 (in other words, the order in which they are stocked). However, the notice icons that are stocked later are digested first. There may be cases. For example, when a notice icon stocked later is digested first, it may be easy to make a big hit, and conversely, it may be difficult to make a big hit. In addition, the order in which the notice icons are digested may be determined regardless of the order of the stock. In this case, the reliability of the jackpot may not be affected. You may make it do. In addition, a plurality of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 may be digested in a specific order to notify that the jackpot is confirmed. For example, the notice icon I6 for the hat, the shuriken A rule may be set such that a jackpot is determined when digested in the order of a notice icon I7, a hat notice icon I6, a shuriken notice icon I7, a hat notice icon I6, and a shuriken notice icon I7. As a result, the player may have an incentive to find the rule of the digestion order of the notice icon that is a big hit, and may improve the game motivation.

  FIG. 27 (24q-1) to FIG. 27 (24q-2) show other examples of effects shown in FIG. 20 (24). That is, as shown in FIG. 27 (24q-1), the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 in the notice icon display area 285 is digested, and is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. After the vacancy occurs, as shown in FIG. 27 (24q-2), the display positions of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 to the notice icon fourth display area YA4 are moved to the left respectively. It may be. At this time, for example, a moving animation for moving the display position of the notice icon to the left may be performed, or the display position may be changed without performing the animation. The timing for changing the display position of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 may be the same as the start of the digest effect of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. Then, it may be after the digestion effect of the notice icon is started or after the digestion effect of the notice icon is ended.

  28 (Aa) to FIG. 28 (Ae) show an effect example in the case where the notice icon increase effect is performed after the notice icon digestion effect is performed. That is, as shown in FIG. 28 (Aa), after the shuriken notice icon I7 displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 in the notice icon display area 285 is digested, the stop symbol notice is executed. At the timing indicated by 28 (Ab), the display is stopped and displayed with a combination of the decoration symbols of “decoration 1 -decoration 4 -decoration 2”, and it is notified that the display result is a deviation. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 28 (Ac), after the hold is digested and the decorative symbol variation display is started, as shown in FIG. 28 (Ad), an increase effect of the notice icon is performed by Tono-sama character YM. Then, when the warning icon I9 of the thousand box is thrown toward the warning icon display area 285, as shown in FIG. 28 (Ae), the warning icon No. 3 which has become blank due to the digestion of the shuriken warning icon I7. A notice icon I9 for a thousand boxes thrown in the display area YA3 is displayed. In this way, the notice icon that increases in the notice icon display area that has become blank as the notice icon is digested may be displayed.

  FIG. 28B shows an effect example in the case where the number of notice icons is increased after a plurality of blanks are generated in the notice icon display area in accordance with the digestion of a plurality of notice icons. That is, as shown in FIG. 28 (B), in the notice icon display area 285, after the notice icons displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 and the notice icon third display area YA3 are digested, the character YM When the effect of increasing the notice icon is performed and the hat notice icon I6 is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285, the notice icon second display area YA2 and the notice icon third display area YA3 which are blank are displayed. Of these, they are displayed in order from the left. In this way, a display for increasing the notice icon may be performed. In the case where there are a plurality of blanks in the notice icon display area 285, the order of the display areas for displaying the increasing notice icon is not limited to that described above, and may be another order. The first sub-control unit It may be set in advance at 400. In this example, the reliability of the jackpot and the number of the notice icons displayed are not changed depending on the place where the notice icon is displayed. However, depending on the place where the notice icon is displayed, It may be suggested that the reliability and the number of the notice icons displayed are different. For example, when an increasing notice icon is displayed in the rightmost notice icon sixth display area YA6 among the display areas that are blank in the notice icon display area 285, at least six notice icons are displayed as the notice icons. You may make it suggest that it displays on the display area 285, and you may make it suggest that the reliability of jackpot is the highest.

  FIG. 28C shows an effect example in the case where the effect of digesting the notice icon and the effect of increasing the notice icon are executed during the execution of one symbol variation display. That is, as shown in FIG. 28 (C), while the effect of digesting the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 in the notice icon display area 285 is being performed, An increase effect of the notice icon by the character YM is performed, and a state in which the hat notice icon I6, the thousand box notice icon I9, and the fan notice icon I10 are thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 is displayed. Here, the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 is a notice icon increased in the symbol change display executed before the symbol change display is executed. In this manner, the notice icon digestion effect and the notice icon increase effect may be executed during the execution of one symbol variation display. At this time, there may be a case where the period during which the notice icon digestion effect is performed overlaps with the period during which the notice icon increase effect is performed. Further, after the notice icon digestion effect starts, the notice icon increase effect may start, after the notice icon increase effect starts, the notice icon digest effect starts, or the notice icon The digesting effect and the notice icon increasing effect may be started at the same time. Here, the area in which the increasing notice icon is displayed may be an area that is blank at the start of the symbol variation display, or after the symbol variation display is started, the announcement effect of the announcement icon is increased. It may be a region that will be blank before it is started.

  FIG. 28 (59r) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 23 (59). That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 28 (59r), before the notice icon digestion effect is started, an effect is given which indicates whether or not the notice icon is digested. Specifically, for example, among the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285, whether or not the notice icon is digested when the notice icon subject to digestion starts shaking and fluctuating. I try to speak. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 23 (60), the fan notice icon I10 may be digested, or the fan notice icon I10 may not be digested. When not digested, the notice icon may be erased without being digested, or the notice icon may be maintained and the digestion of the notice icon may be suspended. Note that, in the effect example shown in FIG. 28 (59r), when the fan warning icon I10 is deleted without being digested, the display is stopped after the stop with the combination of the decorative symbols out of place. You may alert | report.

  FIGS. 28 (59s) to 60s (60s) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 23 (59) to (60). That is, in FIG. 28 (59 s), the notice icon display area 285 displays two hat notice icons I6, a thousand box notice icon I9, and a fan notice icon I10. Is different from the above, and after the fluctuation variation starts with the combination of the decoration pattern of “decoration 1—decoration 2—decoration 1”, among the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285, the notice icon of the fan When I10 is digested, a notice of a big hit is given, and as shown in FIG. 28 (60s), when other notice icons (for example, a hat notice icon I6) are digested, they are left as they are. You may make it alert | report that it stops and displays by the combination of the decoration pattern of, and it will become off.

  28 (23t) to FIG. 28 (32t) show other examples of effects shown in FIG. 20 (23) to FIG. 21 (32). That is, as shown in FIG. 28 (23t), in this effect example, an in-digest notice icon display area YA0 for displaying the digested notice icon is added in the notice icon display area 285. As shown in FIGS. 28 (23t) to 25 (t), when the digestion effect of the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 is started, the notice icon I6 of the digested hat is started. Is displayed in the digestion advance notice icon display area YA0. As shown in FIG. 28 (28t) to FIG. 32 (32t), the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the digest notice notice icon display area YA0 continues to be displayed after digestion, and the corresponding effect (pseudo-continuous effect). ) Will continue to be displayed. It should be noted that the timing of displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area YA0 during digestion may be after the notice effect of the notice icon has started, or before the notice icon has been digested. Alternatively, it may be simultaneously with the start of the digestion effect of the notice icon. Further, the timing at which the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area YA0 during digestion is erased may be after the digest effect of the notice icon has ended, or before the digest effect of the notice icon has ended. It may be at the same time as the end of the notice icon digestion, after the start of the effect corresponding to the digested notice icon, or after the effect corresponding to the digested notice icon ends. It may be at the same time as the start of the production corresponding to the digested notice icon, or before the production corresponding to the digested notice icon starts. It may be simultaneously with the end of the corresponding production, or may be deleted at the end of the symbol variation when the notice icon is deleted (for example, the symbol stop timing of the special symbol) or being digested The notification icon display area YA0 is erased (for example, the notice icon display area 285 and the digest notice icon display area YA0 are erased in FIG. 22 (44), or only the notice icon display area YA0 during digest is erased). Etc.). When a plurality of notice icons are digested during one symbol variation display, the notice icon a in the digest icon notice area YA0 corresponding to the notice icon A digested first is the digest icon of the notice icon A. It may be erased after or after the presentation is finished, and no notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area YA0 during digestion, or the digest effect of the notice icon B to be digested next is started. May be erased at the same time as or after starting, or erased at the same time or after the notice icon b displayed in the in-digest notice icon display area corresponding to the notice icon B to be digested next is displayed. For example, while the notice icon B is being digested, the notice icon a may be left as a history, or the notice icon A and the notice icon B may be left. At the end of symbol variation that Con B is digested (e.g., symbol stop timing of special symbol) may be deleted at. When the notice icon display area 285 is erased when a specific effect display (for example, during a super reach effect, a big hit effect, or an island simultaneous effect) is performed, only the notice icon display region 285 is erased, and the advance notice is given. The icon display area YA0 may be displayed as it is, or conversely, only the notice icon display area YA0 during digestion may be deleted, and the notice icon display area 285 may be displayed as it is. Both the region 285 and the digesting advance notice icon display region YA0 may be deleted.

  FIGS. 29 (Aa) to 29 (Ae) show an effect example in which a plurality of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area are consumed at the same time. That is, in FIG. 29 (Aa), the hat notice icon I6 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285, and the notice icon third display area YA3. A ribbon notice icon I8 is displayed, and a fan notice icon I10 is displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4. Of these notice icons, the notice icon for the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon I8 on the ribbon displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 are digested respectively. Production begins. Here, the start timing of the digestion effect of each notice icon may be the same or different. In this case, the digestion order of the notice icons may be an order corresponding to the execution order of the effects.

Thereafter, when the hat notice icon I6 and the ribbon notice icon I8 move to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. 29 (Ab), they are enlarged and each character display is additionally displayed. . Specifically, a character display of “continue” is added and displayed near the lower portion of the enlarged hat notice icon I6, and a character display of “stechen” is added near the lower portion of the enlarged notice icon I8 of the ribbon. Is displayed.
Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a stage change effect is started in response to the digestion of the ribbon notice icon I8. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 29 (Ac), after the shoji is closed and Princess Chibi's character CH appears on the front side, the shoji opens as shown in FIG. 29 (Ad). The display of the background (moon background) showing the appearance of the universe from the surface is started. During execution of the stage change effect, the variation display of the decorative symbols displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c is the lower right corner of the display region of the decorative symbol display device 208. Move to, and it will be reduced.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 29 (Ae), the decorative symbol that has been displayed in a reduced size is displayed in an enlarged manner in the center of the display area, and then, in response to the digestion of the hat notice icon I6, the chord character BC Appears from the outside of the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and an effect display that pushes up the stopped right symbol is performed, and then the player is informed that there is a possibility that a pseudo-continuous effect will be executed. .

  In this example, the start timings of the plurality of effects corresponding to the digested notice icons are made different from each other, but they may be started at the same time.

  29 (66u-1) to FIG. 29 (66u-3) show other examples of effects shown in FIG. 23 (66). That is, in FIG. 29 (66u-1), the display is stopped with the combination of the decoration symbols of “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1”, and it is informed that it is a big hit, but the notice icon display area 285 continues to be displayed. In addition, it is shown that there is an undigested notice icon. After that, as shown in FIG. 29 (66u-2), after the big hit start effect is performed, as shown in FIG. 29 (66u-3), after the big hit round game is started, it is still undigested. A notice icon is displayed. In this example, the notice icon display area 285 is displayed below the display area while the big hit game is being executed, but may be displayed above the display area. Further, in this effect example, the undigested notice icon may be used, for example, in a promotion effect during a big hit (for example, an effect informing that the probability change big hit is confirmed). For example, FIG. In the example shown in -3), if the hat notice icon I6 is digested during the jackpot game, a notification is made that the probable big hit is confirmed, and the fan notice icon I10 is digested. May notify that 15R big hit is confirmed. Further, when other notice icons are digested, for example, a meaning that suggests that there is a possibility of promotion may be given. In this way, even if the same notice icon is digested during the execution of the jackpot game, an effect of giving another meaning may be performed. Further, in this effect example, the notice icon displayed during execution of the jackpot game may be different from the notice icon displayed during execution of the symbol variation display. That is, a notice icon unique to the big hit may be prepared. Further, the notice icon displayed during the execution of the jackpot game and the notice icon displayed during the execution of the symbol variation display may be the same, or only some of the notice icons may be used in common. .

  FIG. 29 (Ba) to FIG. 29 (Bc) are display examples before and after the stage change. That is, as shown in FIG. 29 (Ba), the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2”. When the display is started, a stage change effect is started as shown in FIG. 29 (Bb). When the stage change effect is started, the notice icon displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is hidden together with the notice icon display area 285. After that, when the stage change effect ends, as shown in FIG. 29 (Bc), although not shown, the background is changed and the symbol variation display is continuously performed. At this time, the notice icon display area 285 is displayed again, but all the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 may be deleted when a stage change is performed. Note that after a stage change, the notice icon may be deleted, or only a part of the plurality of notice icons may be deleted, or may not be deleted. Good.

  FIGS. 29 (22v-1) to (23v) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 20 (22) to (23). That is, as shown in FIG. 29 (22v-1), when the symbol variation display is started, as shown in FIG. 29 (22v-2), Tono-like character YM2 with a placard appears and is digested. The type of notice icon to be notified is notified in advance. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 29 (23v), the digesting effect of the notice icon is started in which the notice icon of the type notified in advance (the notice icon I6 of the hat) is digested. Even if the advance notification of the type of the notice icon to be digested is performed, the notice icon may not be digested, or a notice icon of a different type from the notice icon notified in advance may be digested. May be. When a notice icon of a different type from the notice icon notified in advance is digested, it may be suggested that the reliability of the jackpot is high.

  FIG. 29 (22w) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 20 (22). That is, as shown in FIG. 29 (22w), after the symbol variation display is started, a notice icon that may be digested is highlighted so that the player pays attention to the digest of the notice icon. Also good.

  In the embodiment described above, for example, when the hat notice icon I6 is digested, the bancho character BC appears and the pseudo-continuous effect is executed, and the other effects are not executed. An effect corresponding to is performed, and the other effects are not performed. For example, even though the hat notice icon I6 is digested, the Bancho character BC does not appear and the princess character appears. In the event that an effect that does not correspond to the digested notice icon is executed (so-called breaking of the law), such as determining the jackpot, the jackpot may be determined.

  In the embodiment described above, the notice icon to be digested is determined and cannot be selected by the player. For example, the notice icon to be digested is operated by operating the effect button 136 or the like. You may make it selectable.

  In addition, if a big hit is made when the notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area 285, it is deleted when the big hit game is started, and the notice icon is carried over when shifting to a probable change state or a short time state. It may be configured not to be performed. In addition, when a big hit is made in the state where the notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area 285, it is once hidden when the big hit game is started, and is returned after the probability change state or the time-short state is finished. It may be configured as follows. Moreover, you may be comprised so that it may not carry over after a probability change state and a time-short state are complete | finished.

  Next, description will be made on an effect example in which the contents of the reach effect to be transferred thereafter are notified depending on the type of the notice icon to be digested.

  As shown in FIG. 30 (Aa), when “decoration 1” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208a, respectively, the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is displayed. May be digested. For example, as shown in FIG. 30 (Ab-1), when the hat notice icon I6 is digested, the enlarged-length character BC2 is displayed as shown in FIG. 30 (Ac-1). Appears, and then shifts to a Bancho Reach corresponding to the character that has appeared. Further, as shown in FIG. 30 (Ab-2), when the Senryoku box notice icon I9 is digested, then, as shown in FIG. 30 (Ac-2), the enlarged Tono-like character YM3 is displayed. Appears and then transitions to the Tono-sama reach corresponding to the character that has appeared. Also, as shown in FIG. 30 (Ab-3), when the fan warning icon I10 is digested, the enlarged princess character HM is then displayed as shown in FIG. 30 (Ac-3). Appears, and then shifts to the princess reach corresponding to the appearing character. In addition, this production example corresponds to the reliability of the jackpot meaning the notice icon, and the reliability of the jackpot of these reach production is configured in the order of Hime Reach> Tonosama Reach> Bancho Reach Yes. In addition, when a character other than the character corresponding to the digested notice icon appears (for example, a Tono-like character enlarged and displayed after the hat notice icon I6 is digested) (so-called collapse of the law occurs). May be configured to determine the jackpot. Alternatively, a combination of a plurality of notice icons may be digested, and a plurality of characters may appear correspondingly, so that the combination notice is executed. In addition, a specific effect for digesting a plurality of notice icons (multiple digest-only effect) may be executed. The reliability may be high.

  Next, the button effect executed after the second button notice icon I11 is digested will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 30 (Ba), the second button notice icon I11 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and after the symbol variation display is started, FIG. At the timing shown in (Bb), the display of digesting the second button notice icon I11 is started. That is, a display is performed in which the second button notice icon I11 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 moves from the notice icon first display area YA1 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Thereafter, when the second button notice icon I11 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a button image 136a is displayed together with a button reception time meter as shown in FIG. Notifying that the operation can be accepted, the player is encouraged to operate the effect button 136.

  Next, another example of the button effect executed after the second button notice icon I11 is digested will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 30 (Ca), a second button notice icon I11 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs the above-described button reach effect, and the button image 136a is displayed together with the button reception time meter to notify that the operation of the effect button 136 can be accepted. Thereafter, at the timing of FIG. 30 (Cb), the display of digesting the second button notice icon I11 is started. That is, a display is performed in which the second button notice icon I11 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 moves from the notice icon first display area YA1 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Thereafter, when the second button notice icon I11 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it overlaps the button image 136a already displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 and is shown in FIG. 30 (Cc). In this way, the project button button 136 changes to a projecting button image 136b. That is, it is shown that the button reach production with higher jackpot reliability has been promoted.

  Next, another specific example of effects executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 31 is a diagram showing an example of an effect centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, and FIG. 32 is a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 33 is a diagram showing step by step the example of the effect shown in FIG. 32, and FIG. 34 is a diagram showing step by step the example of the effect shown in FIG. 35 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 34 step by step.

  In FIG. 31 (1) to FIG. 32 (14), the notice icon used in the increase effect of the notice icon has been changed from the notice icon I6 for the hat to the notice icon I1 for the first lord. Except for this point, it is the same as FIG. 19 (1) to FIG. In addition, as for the effects performed between FIG. 32 (14) and FIG. 32 (20), all the notice icons used in the notice icon increase effect are changed to the first icon notice icon I1. 20 is the same as FIG. 20 (15) to FIG.

  In FIG. 32 (20), the display is stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2”, and the result of the deviation is confirmed and displayed. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  In FIG. 32 (21), the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started and the fourth symbol is turned off. However, no change has yet occurred in the hold icon or the decorative symbol.

  In FIG. 32 (22), the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 is moved and displayed by the moving animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is moved to the change icon display area 280 and changed to the change icon h0. Become. After that, the decorative symbol variation display is started.

  Then, for example, when 4 seconds have elapsed since the start of the decorative symbol variation display, as shown in FIG. 32 (23), the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. The display that the notice icon I1 of the first lord is digested is started. That is, a display is performed in which the first lord-like notice icon I1 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 moves from the notice icon first display area YA1 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. As shown in FIG. 32 (23), when a plurality of the same notice icons are displayed in the notice icon display area 285, such as when four notice icons I1 of the first lord are displayed, for example, Although it is set in advance to preferentially digest the notice icon displayed on the leftmost side, the order of digestion may be determined according to the reliability of the notice icon. Also, which notice icon is used may be determined at random, or the notice icon displayed on the rightmost side may be set to be digested with priority. That is, the order in which the notice icons are digested is not limited to those described above, and can be set as appropriate.

  Thereafter, when the first lord's notice icon I1 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it changes to a hat's notice icon I6 at the timing shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 32 (25), a character display of “Continue” for notifying that the pseudo-continuous effect is to be performed is additionally displayed below the enlarged hat notice icon I6. This character display may be performed at the same time when the hat notice icon I6 is enlarged, may be performed before the enlarged display, or after the enlarged display is performed. Also good.

  Thereafter, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, at the timing shown in FIG. 32 (26), the character display of “continue” attached to the hat notice icon I6 is erased, and the hat notice icon is displayed. After I6 is displayed in a reduced size, the display is moved to the original display position, that is, the advance notice icon first display area YA1 in the advance notice icon display area 285. Thus, in the present embodiment, the digested notice icon may be displayed again at the original position. In addition, when the digested notice icon is redisplayed at the original position, the digested notice icon may be displayed in a recognizable manner. For example, a display area where the digested notice icon is displayed is displayed. Gray-out display may be used, or character information “Done” may be added. Further, the digested notice icon may be deleted after being displayed in the notice icon display area 285.

  32 (27) to 33 (33), the digested hat notice icon I6 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1, and the notice icon second display area YA2 to notice icon. Except that all the notice icons displayed in the fourth display area YA4 are changed to the notice icon I1 of the first lord, this is the same as FIG. 20 (27) to FIG. 21 (33). Description of is omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 33 (34), the display of digesting the notice icon I1 of the first lord displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 is started. That is, a display is performed in which the first lord's notice icon I1 displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 moves from the notice icon second display area YA2 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  After that, when the first lord's notice icon I1 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it changes to the hat's notice icon I6 at the timing shown in FIG. As shown in 33 (36), a character display of “continuation” for notifying that the pseudo-continuous effect is to be performed is additionally displayed below the notice icon I6 of the enlarged hat.

  Thereafter, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, at the timing shown in FIG. 33 (37), the “continuation” character display added to the hat notice icon I6 is erased, and the hat notice icon is displayed. After I6 is displayed in a reduced size, the display is moved to the original display position, that is, the advance notice icon second display area YA2 in the advance notice icon display area 285.

  Thereafter, the contents of the effects shown in FIGS. 33 (38) to (45) are displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon second display area YA2, respectively, and the notice icon I6 of the digested hat is displayed. 21 (38) to FIG. 22 (), except that the notice icons displayed in the icon third display area YA3 and the notice icon fourth display area YA4 are all changed to the notice icon I1 of the first lord. 45), the description here is omitted.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 33 (46), the display of the first icon-like notice icon I1 displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 is started. That is, a display is performed in which the first icon-like notice icon I1 displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 moves from the notice icon third display area YA3 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  After that, when the first lord's notice icon I1 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it changes to a thousand box notice icon I9 at the timing shown in FIG. A character display of “elevation” for notifying the transition to a higher-reliability effect is additionally displayed above the displayed notice icon I9 of the thousand-thousand box. Note that this character display may be performed at the same time as the advance notice icon I9 of the thousand carton box is enlarged, may be performed before the enlarged display, or after the enlarged display is performed. Also good.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the character display of “promotion” attached to the notice icon I9 of the thousand-thousand box is erased and the notice icon I9 of the thousand-thousand box is reduced and displayed as shown in FIG. 33 (48). In addition, the display to move to the original display position, that is, the third icon display area YA3 of the notice icon display area 285 is performed.

  Thereafter, at the timing of FIG. 34 (49), the reach transition effect described above is started. In this production example, when the reach transition production is started, as shown in FIG. 34 (49), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs the production display in which a power failure has occurred, and then the strong reach with high reliability. Production (button reach production) is started. When the button reach production in this production example is started, as shown in FIG. 33 (50-1), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the character display “Is it a chance?” Is displayed on the darkened background. The character “NO” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 34 (50-2). Then, as shown in FIG. 34 (51), after the character display “Is it too hot” is displayed, the character display “No” is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 34 (52). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 34 (53), a character display of “one blow” is performed to notify that a button effect is performed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 34 (54), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the button image 136a together with the button reception time meter and notifies the player that the operation of the effect button 136 can be received. The operation of the production button 136 is promoted.

  When the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 34 (55), as shown in FIG. 34 (56), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the button image 136a is erased, It shows how the button reach production failed.

  Eventually, in FIG. 34 (57), the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c are enlarged and displayed by a combination of the decoration symbols "decoration 1 -decoration 2 -decoration 1".

  In FIG. 34 (58), everything including the notice icon display area 285 is temporarily hidden. Eventually, in FIG. 34 (59), the fluctuation variation (provisional symbol stop display) of the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 1 -decoration 2 -decoration 1” is started. At this time, the display of the notice icon display area 285 is also resumed.

  Thereafter, for example, when 2 seconds have elapsed from the temporary symbol stop display, the display of the first icon of the first icon displayed in the fourth notification icon display area YA4 is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 34 (60). Be started. That is, a display is performed in which the first lord's notice icon I1 displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4 moves from the notice icon fourth display area YA4 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Thereafter, when the first lord's notice icon I1 moves to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it changes to the fan's notice icon I10 at the timing shown in FIG. At this time, for example, a character display of “Blessing” for notifying that the big hit is fixed may be added below the enlarged fan notice icon I10. When the character display is added, the additional display of the character display may be performed at the same time as the fan preview icon I10 is displayed in an enlarged manner, or may be executed before the enlarged display. It may be performed after the enlarged display.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the fan warning icon I10 is reduced and displayed, as shown in FIG. 35 (62), the original display position, that is, the warning icon fourth display area in the warning icon display area 285 is displayed. Display to move to YA4 is performed. After that, at the timing of FIG. 35 (63), the variation display of the decorative symbols that fluctuated in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c is resumed, and the re-variation effect is started. . At this time, the notice icon display area 285 continues to be displayed.

  In the re-variation effect, as shown in FIG. 35 (64), an effect display in which the princess character dances with a fan is performed. The variation display of the decorative symbol that has been performed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c so far is moved to the lower right corner of the display region of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is reduced and displayed. The

  Eventually, as shown in FIG. 35 (65), the fluctuation of the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1” is displayed.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 35 (66), the combination of the decorative symbols for which the big hit is confirmed “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1” is stopped and displayed. At this time, on the first special figure display device 212, “Special figure A”, which is a 15R probability variation big hit, is stopped and displayed, and on the fourth symbol display apparatus 284a, the fourth symbol (round figure) of the special figure 1 is displayed. Is lit. Thereafter, although not shown, the jackpot game is started after the above jackpot game start effect is executed.

  Next, another example of the above-described effect of increasing the notice icon will be described with reference to FIGS. Here, FIG. 36 to FIG. 38 are diagrams showing another example of the effect of increasing the notice icon step by step. 36 to 38, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the universal figure hold. The lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown.

  FIGS. 36 (8a) to (9a) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 31 (8) to (9). That is, in FIG. 36 (8 a), an effect display is performed in which the third lord's notice icon I 3 is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 instead of the first lord's notice icon I 1. The same can be done for the notice icon I2 of the second lord. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 35 (9a), the thrown third lord's notice icon I3 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285.

  FIGS. 36 (8b) to (9b) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 31 (8) to (9). That is, in FIG. 36 (8b), as in FIG. 31 (8), an effect display in which the first lord's notice icon I1 is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 is performed.

  However, in the case of FIG. 36 (9 b), it is shown that the first lord's notice icon I 1 does not reach the notice icon display area 285 and is out of frame from the left of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. ing. In other words, in this embodiment, it is also possible to execute a gaze increase effect using the notice icon of Tonosama.

  FIGS. 36 (8c) to (9c) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 31 (8) to (9). That is, in FIG. 36 (8c), there is an effect display in which not only one first lord notice icon I1 but also three first lord notice icons I1 are simultaneously thrown toward the notice icon display area 285. ing. In addition, it may be an effect display that throws one by one sequentially instead of simultaneously.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 36 (9c), the three first lord's notice icons I1 thrown become notice icon first display area YA1, notice icon second display area YA2 and notice icon in notice icon display area 285. Each is displayed in the third display area YA3. Thus, in this effect example, an increase in a plurality of notice icons can be executed in one increase effect. Therefore, when a plurality of notification icons increase at a time, the expectation for the increase in the number of executions of the notification may be improved, and the production effect may be enhanced. Further, a high-reliability notice icon (for example, the third lord's notice icon I3) is unlikely to be displayed (not stocked) in the notice icon display area 285, and a low-reliability notice icon (for example, the first lord's notice icon). The notice icon I1) may be easily displayed (stocked easily) in the notice icon display area 285, or vice versa. In this production example, the same notice icon (first lord's notice icon I1) is increased by three, but a plurality of kinds of notice icons having different reliability may be increased at the same time, for example, The first lord's notice icon I1 and the third lord's notice icon I3 may be increased simultaneously.

  In this case, as shown in FIG. 36 (9c ′), some or all of the thrown three first lord's notice icons I1 do not reach the notice icon display area 285, and the decorative symbol is displayed. You may make it perform the partial gossip increase effect or all the gossip increase effect which carries out a frame out from the left of the display area of the display apparatus 208. FIG.

  FIG. 36 (8e) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 31 (8). That is, in FIG. 36 (8e), when the hold icon h12 is displayed in the display mode of the pre-reading notice (display mode by the character of Sabohani), the character YM of the character uses the notification icon I1 of the first character as the notification icon. An effect display that is thrown toward the display area 285 is performed. As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to execute an increase effect of the notice icon even during execution of the prefetch notice using the hold icon. It should be noted that the increase effect of the notice icon and the prefetch notice using the hold icon may not be performed at the same time.

  FIG. 36 (8f) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 31 (8). That is, in FIG. 36 (8 f), the decorative symbol display device 208 does not display the variable icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1, and the hold number display is performed by the effect hold lamp 286. In FIG. 36 (8 f), for convenience of explanation, the holding lamp of the second special figure 1 to be read ahead is hatched. However, in actuality, the first special figure 1 is shown. Similarly to the holding lamp in FIG. 2, the second holding lamp in FIG. 1 is lit in the default light emission mode.

  36 (8g) to FIG. 36 (9g-2) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 31 (8) to (9). That is, in FIG. 36 (8g), as in FIG. 31 (8), an effect display in which the first lord's notice icon I1 is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 is performed.

  However, in the case of FIG. 36 (9g-1), it is shown that the notice icon I1 of the first lord does not reach the notice icon display area 285 and falls below the display area. Then, as shown in FIG. 36 (9g-2), the first lord's notice icon I1 acts on the hold icon h11 of the special figure 1 displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1, and the prefetching notice is made. An effect display (holding change effect) that changes to the display mode is performed. In other words, in the present embodiment, the notice icon I1 of the first lord is not displayed as the notice icon in the notice icon display area 285, and may appear as a trigger for starting the prefetch notice using the hold icon. Note that the hold change effect may be performed by using a notice icon other than the first lord's notice icon I1, for example, the notice change icon having a higher reliability of the jackpot may be less likely to be executed. Good.

  FIG. 36 (12h-1) to FIG. 36 (12h-2) show other examples of effects shown in FIG. 31 (12). That is, in FIG. 36 (12h-1), in the same manner as in FIG. 31 (12), the decorative pattern is displayed in a state where the first icon notice icon I1 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. Is displayed. After that, as shown in FIG. 36 (12h-2), the decorative symbol “decoration 6” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, and the reach state is formed, and the reach effect is started. The As described above, in the present embodiment, the reach effect can be executed even in a state where the notice icon is displayed. As a result of this reach production, it may be a big hit. In this case, the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 may be deleted after the big hit.

  FIGS. 37 (8i) to (9i) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 31 (8) to (9). That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 31 (8), Tono-sama character YM appeared and threw a notice icon on notice icon display area 285, but FIG. 37 (8i) is different from FIG. 31 (8). The DJ character BY with the notice icon appears on the flying carpet and appears from the right side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, not the Tono-sama character YM. In the example shown in FIG. 37 (8i), the DJ character BY appears with the first icon-like notice icon I1. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 37 (9i), the DJ character BY flies toward the upper left corner, and the first icon of the first lord is provided with the first notice icon I1 in the notice icon display area 285. An effect display that is placed in the display area YA1 is performed. Note that the number of notice icons placed by the DJ character BY in the notice icon display area 285 is not limited to one, but may be two or more. Further, in the effect of increasing the notice icon by one DJ character BY, a plurality of kinds of notice icons may be placed in the notice icon display area 285. In this way, a plurality of types of notification icon increase effects (for example, a first notification icon increase effect by Tono-sama character YM and a second notification icon increase effect by DJ character BY) may be prepared. By configuring, the production may be diversified and the production effect may be enhanced.

  FIGS. 37 (8j) to (9j) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 31 (8) to (9). That is, in the production example shown in FIG. 31 (8), Tono-sama character YM appeared and threw a notice icon on the notice icon display area 285, but in FIG. 37 (8j), a DJ having a notice icon is further provided. The character BY appears on the flying carpet and appears from the right side of the display area. In the example shown in FIG. 37 (8j), the DJ character BY appears with the first icon-like notice icon I1. After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 37 (9j), the first icon notification icon I1 thrown by the character YM is displayed in the notification icon first display area YA1 of the notification icon display area 285, and the DJ's While the character BY flies toward the upper left corner, an effect display is performed in which the notice icon I1 of the first lord is held in the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285. Note that the DJ character BY is arranged in a layer on the front side of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 and is displayed so as to pass through the front side of the notice icon. Here, as shown in FIG. 37 (9j ′), the DJ character BY is placed on the layer on the back side of the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285, so that the back side of the notice icon is displayed. It may be displayed as if passing.

  FIGS. 37 (8k) to (9k) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 31 (8) to (9). That is, in the production example shown in FIG. 31 (8), Tono-sama character YM appeared and threw a notice icon on the notice icon display area 285, but in FIG. 37 (8k), a DJ having a notice icon is further provided. The character BY appears on the flying carpet and appears from the right side of the display area. In the example shown in FIG. 37 (8k), the DJ character BY appears with the third icon-like notice icon I3. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 37 (9k), after the first lord's notice icon I1 thrown by the lord's character YM is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 in the notice icon display area 285, the DJ's While the character BY is flying toward the upper left corner, the first lord of the third lord's notice icon I3 is thrown by the lord's character YM and displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. An effect display is performed in which the DJ character BY puts the third lord's notice icon I3 in the notice icon first display area YA1 so as to be superimposed on the notice icon I1. In other words, a promotion effect may be performed by overwriting a warning icon with low jackpot reliability with a warning icon with high jackpot reliability. As described above, the execution times of the increase effects of a plurality of types of notice icons may overlap, which may further enhance the effect. This promotion effect may be performed during execution of the same symbol variation display, or may be performed by a plurality of symbol variation displays. Further, the promotion effect may be executed every time the pseudo-continuous effect is performed.

  FIG. 37 (121) shows another example of the effect shown in FIG. 31 (12). That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 37 (12l), the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is displayed with the character notation “question mark”. For example, the notice icon I1 of the first lord is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1, the notice icon I2 of the second lord is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2, and the notice icon third display area. A notice icon I1 of the first lord is displayed in YA3, a notice icon I2 of the second lord is displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4, and a notice of the third lord is displayed in the notice icon fifth display area YA5. A notice icon I3 is displayed, and a notice icon I1 of the first lord is displayed in the notice icon sixth display area YA6, and a character notation “question mark” is added to each. According to this production example, it may be possible to give a sense of expectation to the notice icon after the change.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 37 (12l ′), for some of the notification icons before the change, the type of the notification icon after the change may be notified by text. For example, the first lord's notice icon I1 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1, the second lord's notice icon I2 displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2, and the notice icon fourth. The notice icon I2 of the second lord displayed in the display area YA4 has a character notation “question mark” attached thereto and cannot recognize the notice icon after the change, but the notice icon third display area The notice icon I1 of the first lord displayed in YA3 is annotated with the letter “Chang eyes” and changed to a shuriken notice icon I7, and is displayed in the notice icon fifth display area YA5. The notice icon I3 of the third lord is marked with the word “continue” and changes to the hat notice icon I6. The notice icon I1 of the first lord displayed in the sixth icon display area YA6 is marked with “continuation” and “question mark” and is changed to a hat notice icon I6. Yes. These character notations may be notified at once for all or some of the notice icons, or may be gradually notified over time.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 37 (12l ″), all or some of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 are changed to the notice icons after the change, and the notice icon after the change is displayed. A corresponding character notation may be added to only the thing.

  FIGS. 38 (8m-1) to FIG. 38 (9m) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 31 (8) to (9). That is, in the production example shown in FIG. 31 (8), Tono-sama character YM appeared and threw a notice icon on the notice icon display area 285, but FIG. 38 (8m-1) further has a notice icon. The DJ character BY appears on the flying carpet and appears from the right side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the example shown in FIG. 38 (8m−1), the DJ character BY appears with a notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 38 (8m-2), after the first lord's notice icon I1 thrown by the lord's character YM is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, As shown in FIG. 38 (9m), while the DJ character BY flies toward the upper left corner, the notice icon I9 of the Thousand Boxes is thrown by the Tono-sama character YM and the notice icon first display area is displayed. An effect display is performed in which the DJ character BY places the preview icon I9 of the Thousand Box in the preview icon first display area YA1 so as to be superimposed on the preview icon I1 of the first lord displayed on YA1. According to this example, the notification icon before change may be overwritten from the notification icon after change. As described above, the execution times of the increase effects of a plurality of types of notice icons may overlap, which may further enhance the effect. This overwriting effect may be performed during execution of the same symbol variation display, or may be performed by a plurality of symbol variation displays. In addition, an overwrite effect may be executed every time a pseudo-continuous effect is performed.

  FIGS. 38 (8n-1) to (9n) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 31 (8) to (9). That is, in the production example shown in FIG. 31 (8), Tono-sama character YM appeared and threw a notice icon on the notice icon display area 285, but FIG. 38 (8n-1) further has a notice icon. The DJ character BY appears on the flying carpet and appears from the right side of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the example shown in FIG. 38 (8n-1), the DJ character BY appears with the first icon-like notice icon I1. Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 38 (8n-2), the thousand thousand box notice icon I9 thrown by Tono-sama character YM is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and then FIG. 9n) As the DJ character BY flies toward the upper left corner, the notice icon I1 of the first lord is held by the character YM of the lord and the notice icon first display area is thrown. An effect display is performed in which the DJ character BY places the first lord's notice icon I1 in the notice icon first display area YA1 so as to be superimposed on the notice icon I9 of the thousand-car box displayed on YA1. In this way, the notification icon after the change may be overwritten from the notification icon before the change. As described above, the execution times of the increase effects of a plurality of types of notice icons may overlap, which may further enhance the effect. This overwriting effect may be performed during execution of the same symbol variation display, or may be performed by a plurality of symbol variation displays. In addition, an overwrite effect may be executed every time a pseudo-continuous effect is performed. In addition, when the notice icon before the change after overwriting (for example, the first notice icon I1 of the first lord) is digested, the notice icon after the change is changed to the notice icon before the overwrite (for example, the notice icon I9 for the thousand boxes). May be another notice icon. At this time, it may be configured such that the reliability of the jackpot is higher when the notification icon after being overwritten is digested than the notification icon before being overwritten, or the reliability of the jackpot is low. Alternatively, the jackpot reliability may not be changed.

  Next, an effect example in which the notice icon changes will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 39 is a figure which shows the example of an effect which a notice icon changes in steps. In FIG. 39, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the universal figure hold lamp 216, and the fourth Illustration of the symbol display device 284a is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 39 (A), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays decorative symbols in a variable manner. Then, two hold icons (hold icons h11 and h12 in FIG. 1) are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 in FIG. 1, indicating that the start of two symbol variations is held. ing. Both of these two hold icons are in the default display mode. Note that the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold is a hold to be read ahead, and is hatched for convenience of explanation, but is displayed as a hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold. The embodiment is the same. In addition, in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, the notice icon I1 of the first lord is displayed, and in the notice icon second display area YA2, the notice icon I3 of the third lord is displayed. Is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 39A, a Tono-like character YM2 with a placard appears during the variation display of the decorative symbol. The placard is marked with the text “I will change” and notifies that the display mode will change for either the notice icon or the hold icon.

  Thereafter, when the display mode of the notice icon changes after the predetermined effect is displayed, the notice icon is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 in the notice icon display area 285 as shown in FIG. 39 (B1). The notice icon I3 of the third lord is changed to a notice icon I9 of a thousand boxes. It should be noted that the display mode of the first icon-like notice icon I1 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 may change, or both notice icons may change. On the other hand, when the display mode of the hold icon changes, as shown in FIG. 39 (B2), the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold displayed in the default display mode is displayed as the pre-reading notice display mode. To change. Note that the display mode of the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold may change, either the display mode of the two hold icons h11 and h12 may change, or the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0. May change. In this way, in this example, there is a case where the notice icon is changed without changing the hold icon as a result of a certain effect, and the result is that the notice icon is changed without changing the hold icon. It can be said that the icon may be changed. Note that the display mode of both the hold icon and the notice icon may change due to this effect.

  In addition, as shown in 39 (C), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a variation of the decorative symbol, but displays it in a reduced size on the lower right. Then, two hold icons (hold icons h11 and h12 in FIG. 1) are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 in FIG. 1, indicating that the start of two symbol variations is held. ing. Both of these two hold icons are in the default display mode. Note that the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold is a hold to be read ahead, and is hatched for convenience of explanation, but is displayed as a hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold. The embodiment is the same. In addition, in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, the notice icon I1 of the first lord is displayed, and in the notice icon second display area YA2, the notice icon I3 of the third lord is displayed. Is displayed.

  And as shown in FIG.39 (C), in the decorative symbol display apparatus 208, the Princess Chibi chance effect is performed. The Chibi princess chance effect is an effect that may be started when the above-mentioned usual-game variable game is executed. Chibi princess chance production is a production that imitates the Amida lottery. The princess Chibi character selects one of the five starting points, moves along the Amida route from the selected starting point, and reaches the goal point. This is a notice that the effect corresponding to the displayed icon will be executed. For example, if the Chibi princess character reaches the goal point indicated by the double circle icon, the wing member 2321 of the second special figure starting port 232 is informed of the long opening, When reaching the goal point indicated by the character notation, the result of the symbol change display being executed is likely to be a big hit, and the goal point indicated by the cross icon is reached In advance, it is notified that the usual fluctuation display result is out of place.

  Furthermore, in this production example, when the goal point indicated by Tonentsu's notice icon is reached, as shown in FIG. 39 (D1), the notice icon before change displayed in the notice icon display area 285 At least one of the changes to a notice icon after the change. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 39 (D1), the third icon-like notice icon I3 displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 is changed to the notice icon I9 of the thousand boxes. It should be noted that the display mode of the first icon-like notice icon I1 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 may change, or both notice icons may change.

  When the Sabohani character reaches the indicated goal point, as shown in FIG. 39 (D2), at least one of the default display mode hold icons in the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. Changes to the display mode of the prefetch notice. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 39 (D2), the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold that is the default display mode is changed to the display mode of the pre-reading notice. Note that the display mode of the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold may change, either the display mode of the two hold icons h11 and h12 may change, or the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0. May change.

  In this way, in this example, there is a case where the notice icon is changed without changing the hold icon as a result of a certain effect, and the result is that the notice icon is changed without changing the hold icon. It can be said that the icon may be changed. Note that the display mode of both the hold icon and the notice icon may change due to this effect.

  Next, a display example when power is interrupted or restored while the notice icon is displayed will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 40 is a diagram showing a display example in a stepwise manner when power interruption / recovery occurs while displaying the notice icon.

  As shown in FIG. 40 (A), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays decorative symbols in a variable manner. Then, two hold icons (hold icons h11 and h12 in FIG. 1) are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 in FIG. 1, indicating that the start of two symbol variations is held. ing. Of these two hold icons, the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold is in the display mode of the prefetch notice, and the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold is the default display. It is an aspect. In addition, in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285, a notice icon I6 of a hat is displayed, respectively, and in the notice icon third display area YA3, a thousand boxes are displayed. A warning icon I9 is displayed, and a fan warning icon I10 is displayed in the warning icon fourth display area YA4.

  In FIG. 40 (B), power interruption occurs for some reason, and FIG. 40 (C) shows the decorative symbol display device 208 immediately after power is restored instantaneously. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 40C, a character display “Please wait for a while during restoration” is displayed. At this time, the first special figure display device 212 resumes the variable display, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the universal figure hold. The lamp 216 has returned to the state before power interruption. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 40 (D), the symbol variation display is terminated, and the first special figure display device 212 is stopped and displayed as a special display result “special figure I”. In the decorative symbol display device 208, when the symbol variation display is finished, the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed as “decoration 6-decoration 2—decoration 7”, which is a combination of the decorative symbols corresponding to the deviation. When the power is interrupted / restored, all the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 are deleted. In the case of power interruption / recovery, the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold that was the display mode of the pre-reading notice is also the default display mode. In the present embodiment, when power interruption / recovery occurs, the prefetch result information stored in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit or the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308 is “undecided” information. You may comprise so that it may become. Here, if there is at least one hold in which the “undecided” information is included in the subcommand including the prefetch result information transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit, the “undetermined” information is included. The prefetching notice including the notice effect and the increase effect of the notice icon may not be performed until all the reserved holds are consumed. In addition, the pre-reading notice is not given for newly added hold (holding in which the pre-reading result is saved) after power interruption / recovery, and the pre-reading notice is given after all the hold containing “undecided” information is digested. However, for the newly increased hold after power interruption / recovery, a pre-reading notice may be made before the hold containing “undecided” information is used.

  Next, another specific example of effects executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 41 is a diagram showing an example of an effect centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment in a step-by-step manner. FIG. 42 is a diagram showing the continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. 41 in stages. 41 to 42, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the universal figure hold. The lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown. Further, in FIG. 41, the second hold icon h12 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that the symbol variation display is a prefetch target, but the display mode is as follows. For example, the default display mode is the same as the first hold icon h11.

  FIG. 41 (1) shows a display corresponding to FIG. 19 (5) described above. However, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol (first decorative symbol) is displayed in a large size in each of the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c in the center of the display screen. The second decorative symbol display area is formed above the reserved icon display area 281 and the third decorative symbol is displayed in a small size, which is different from FIG. 19 (5). The second decorative symbols displayed in the second decorative symbol display area are configured such that after the change starts, the decorative symbols in any of the symbol rows continue to change until the confirmation stops.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 41 (2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the Tono-like character YM appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the Tono-like effect is started. Here, Tono-sama character YM, unlike FIG. 19 (6), possesses notice icon I21 of “house” in which the letters “house” are circled.

  After the Tono-sama character YM moves and displays to a predetermined throwing position at the timing shown in FIG. 41 (3), the notice icon I21 of the “house” possessed at the timing shown in FIG. An effect display to throw toward the area 285 is performed.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 41 (5), the thrown “house” notice icon I21 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 in the notice icon display area 285, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 41 (6). In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs an effect display in which the Tono-sama character YM has successfully displayed the notice icon and makes a happy expression. Thereby, it can be said that the notice icon I21 of “house” is displayed in the notice icon display area 285, which at least suggests that a family crest effect described later may be executed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 41 (7) to (8), a display in which the character YM is framed out downward of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 41 (9), the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 1 -decoration 4 -decoration 2”, and the display result of deviation is determined. Note that the second decorative symbol is also stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols “decoration 1−decoration 4−decoration 2”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  Thereafter, the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and as shown in FIG. 41 (10), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icons h11 and h12 of the special symbol 1 are respectively moved by the movement animation. The hold icon that is displayed and is at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 to become the change icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 is shown in FIG. The first hold icon h11. After that, the decorative symbol variation display is started.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 41 (11), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the Tono-like character YM appears from the outside of the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the Tono-like effect is started. This is also an effect that is executed when it is determined to display the notice icon based on the result of prefetching the hold corresponding to the first hold icon h11. Here, Tono-sama's character YM possesses a “print” notice icon I22 in which the “print” character is circled.

  Then, after the Tono-sama character YM moves and displays to a predetermined throwing position at the timing shown in FIG. 41 (12), the notice “I” is held at the timing shown in FIG. 41 (13). An effect display to throw toward the icon display area 285 is performed.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 41 (14), the thrown “print” notice icon I22 is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285. Thereafter, after the effect display similar to FIG. 41 (6) is performed, the effect display similar to FIG. 41 (7) to FIG. 41 (8) is performed.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 41 (16), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the decorative symbol combination “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2”, and notifies the display result of the deviation. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  Thereafter, the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and as shown in FIG. 41 (17), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon h11 of the special symbol 1 is moved and displayed by the movement animation. The hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and becomes the change icon h0. After that, the decorative symbol variation display is started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 41 (18), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol “decoration 1” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, and a reach state is formed. .

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 42 (19) following FIG. 41 (18), the notice icon I21 of the “house” displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon The display that the notice icon I22 of the “print” displayed in the second display area YA2 is simultaneously digested is started. That is, the “home” notice icon I21 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the “monkey” notice icon I22 displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 include the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon first display area YA1. A display that moves from the second display area YA2 of the notice icon to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed. Note that the notice icon display area 285 may be erased after the notice icon I21 of “Home” and the notice icon I22 of “Crest” are digested. Note that the timing at which the notice icon display area 285 is erased may be erased when an effect corresponding to digestion of the notice icon is started, or an effect corresponding to digestion of the notice icon is started. The display may be continued afterwards. Also, the timing of starting the movement of the “house” notice icon I21 and the “mon” notice icon I22 may be the same, or the movement start of the “house” notice icon I21 is “mon” notice icon I22. It may be earlier than the start of the movement, or the start of movement of the “mon” notice icon I22 may be earlier than the start of the movement of the “house” notice icon I21.

  Thereafter, when the “house” notice icon I21 and the “mon” notice icon I22 move to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, they are enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 21) The family crest character 224B, which is one of the effect movable bodies 224, descends from above the decorative design display device 208, and the decorative design display device 208 displays a family crest in which an effect image to that effect is displayed. Fall production is performed. At this time, the first decorative symbol is displayed small in the lower right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 42 (22), it develops into super reach (swordsman reach). Since the contents of the swordsman reach are as described above with reference to FIGS. 14 to 16, description thereof will be omitted here.

  In the present embodiment, the corresponding two notice icons (for example, the notice icon I21 for “house” and the notice icon I22 for “print”) are digested, so that a corresponding notice effect (family crest drop effect) is performed. It is configured. It should be noted that even if these notice icons are digested, the family crest drop effect may not be performed, or another effect may be performed. In addition, when a family crest drop effect is performed, it may be ensured that the symbol variation display is a big hit, or a loss result may be obtained. Further, the case where the family crest drop effect is performed may be configured to be easier to hit than the case where the family crest drop effect is not performed. Further, the symbol variation display that is a big hit may be configured such that the crest dropping effect is performed more frequently than the symbol variation display that is lost. In addition, the symbol variation display that is a big hit is more easily digested than the symbol variation display that is lost, such as the “house” notice icon I21 and the “mon” notice icon I22). It may be configured.

  FIG. 43 and FIG. 44 are diagrams showing step-by-step examples of other effects of the notice icon digestion effect. 43 to 44, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the universal figure hold. The lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown.

  FIG. 43 (a1) differs from FIG. 41 (5) in that the “mon” notice icon I22 appears before the “house” notice icon I21 and is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. As shown in FIG. 43 (a2), the notice icon I21 of “house” appears and is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 43 (a3), the “monkey” notice icon I22 and the notice icon second display area YA2 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 are displayed. The display in which the notice icon I21 of the “house” that has been used is simultaneously digested is started. That is, the “monkey” notice icon I22 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the “house” notice icon I21 displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 are the notice icon first display area YA1 and A display that moves from the second display area YA2 of the notice icon to the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the reach state by “decoration 1” is formed, and the reach effect is started.

  Thereafter, when the “monkey” notice icon I22 and the “house” notice icon I21 move to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 in this order, they are enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 43 (a4-1). The At this time, it is displayed in the correct order (that is, the order of “house” and “mon”), not the order of “mon” and “house”. Also, as shown in FIG. 43 (a4-2), the “mon” notice icon I22 and the “house” notice icon I21 may be displayed in an enlarged manner in the order of “mon” and “house”. In this production example, whether it is shown in FIG. 43 (a4-1) or the case shown in FIG. 43 (a4-2), the above-described family crest drop production is performed. For example, when the notice icons are enlarged and displayed in the order of “house” and “print” (ie, correct order), the family crest drop effect is performed, and the order of “print” and “house” (ie, When the notice icon is enlarged and displayed in an incorrect order), the family crest drop effect may not be performed. In addition, when the notice icons are enlarged and displayed in the order of "Crest" and "House", the crest drop effect is less likely to start than when the notice icons are enlarged and displayed in the order of "House" and "Crest". May be configured.

  FIG. 43 (b1) to FIG. 43 (b6) show another effect form of the family crest drop effect.

  First, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 43 (b1), only the “house” notice icon I21 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and the “pattern” is displayed. The notice icon I22 is digested without waiting for the notice icon display area 285 to be displayed. Then, as shown in FIG. 43 (b2), when only the “house” notice icon I21 is enlarged and displayed at the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. The object 224B slightly descends from above the decorative symbol display device 208 and overlaps with a part of the front side of the notice icon display area 285 arranged at the upper part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. It operates as if it vibrates in the direction. At this time, in the upper right part of the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a character display of “preparing family crest” indicating that there is a possibility that a family crest drop effect is performed is performed. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol table device 208 shown in FIG. 43 (b2), the notice icon I21 of “house” is enlarged and displayed, while the character YM appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208. And Tono-sama production has started. At this time, Tono-sama's character YM possesses a “monkey” notice icon I22. Then, as shown in FIG. 43 (b4), when the Tono-sama character YM moves to a predetermined throwing position and the “monkey” notice icon I22 is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285, the notice icon display area 285 is displayed. Are displayed in the second display area YA2.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 43 (b5), the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2”, and the display result of the deviation is determined. The second decorative symbol is also stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted. The notice icon I22 of “Crest” remains displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2. Further, at this time, the crest character 224B once retreats to the initial position, so that it is easy to recognize that the symbol has been fixed and stopped, but it does not retreat to the initial position and the curling operation is continued. Also good. On the other hand, the character display of “preparing family crest” is continuously displayed.

  Thereafter, the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and as shown in FIG. 43 (b6), the decorative symbol display device 208 moves and displays the hold icon h11 of the special symbol 1 by the movement animation. The hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and becomes the change icon h0. After that, the decorative symbol variation display is started. At this time, the crest character 224B that has been withdrawn descends again and resumes the scooping action. In this effect example, for example, when the “monkey” notice icon I22 displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2 of the notice icon display area 285 is digested, the family crest character 224B descends, and FIG. The family crest drop effect shown in (21) is performed. Note that there may be a case where the notice icon I22 of “Crest” is not digested and the family crest drop effect is not performed. In FIG. 43 (b2), the “house” notice icon I21 may be displayed in an enlarged state until the “print” notice icon I22 displayed later is digested. At this time, the “print” notice icon I22 may be stocked, but may be digested without being stocked.

  43 (c1) to 43 (c2-3) show other examples of the effect of digesting the notice icon. In this effect example, a state in which a background notice that the background changes is performed by digesting the notice icon is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 43 (c1), in the notice icon display area 285 of the decorative symbol display device 208, a notice icon I31 of “Mr.” in which the character “Mr.” is circled is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. The “princess” notice icon I32 in which the character “princess” is circled is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2, and the “２” notice icon I33 in which the character “爺” is circled is notified. The icon is displayed in the third display area YA3.

  FIG. 43 (c2-1) shows a state of the background display after the three notice icons of the “donor” notice icon I31, the “princess” notice icon I32, and the “爺” notice icon I33 are digested. ing. As shown in FIG. 43 (c2-1), when these three notice icons are digested, in the decorative symbol display device 208, an image with the face of the frog up from the left side of the display screen and the face of Tono-sama are displayed. A background display in which the up image and the image of the princess's face are divided into three equal parts is displayed. In the present embodiment, when all of the three notice icons, the notice icon I31 for “Tono”, the notice icon I32 for “Princess”, and the notice icon I33 for “爺” are digested, the reliability to the jackpot in the symbol variation display Is configured to display a background display indicating that the value is the highest. Also, the three notice icons may be digested simultaneously or one by one. Here, when three notice icons are digested one by one, the reliability of the jackpot may be different depending on the order of the notice icons to be digested. ”Notice icon I32>“ 爺 ”notice icon I33, the reliability may be the highest, but the relationship between the digest order and the reliability for the jackpot can be set as appropriate. .

  Also, in FIG. 43 (c2-2), among the three notice icons, the notice icon I31 for "Tono", the notice icon I32 for "Princess", and the notice icon I33 for "Morning", the notice icon I32 for "Princess" The state of the background display after only the “爺” notice icon I33 is digested is shown. As shown in FIG. 43 (c2-2), when these two notice icons are digested, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an image in which the princess's face is uploaded from the left side of the display screen and a face of the frog. A background display in which the uploaded image is divided into two equal parts is displayed. In the present embodiment, when two of the three notice icons, the notice icon I31 for “Tono”, the notice icon I32 for “Princess”, and the notice icon I33 for “爺” are digested, the symbol variation display is performed. Although the reliability of the jackpot is relatively high, a background display indicating that the reliability is lower than when the three notice icons are digested is displayed. Further, in the present embodiment, an example in which the “princess” notice icon I32 and the “及 び” notice icon I33 are digested among the three notice icons has been described. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The notice icon I31 of “No.” and the notice icon I32 of “Princess” may be digested, or the notice icon I31 of “Tono” and the notice icon I33 of “爺” may be digested. Also, the reliability of the jackpot may be made different depending on the combination of the notice icons to be digested. For example, when the notice icon I31 of “Tono” and the notice icon I32 of “Princess” are digested, “Tono” The reliability of the jackpot is higher than when the notification icon I31 of “I” and the notification icon I33 of “爺”, the notification icon I32 of “princess”, and the notification icon I33 of “爺” are digested, and the notification icon I31 of “To” And when the notice icon I33 of “爺” is digested, the reliability of the jackpot may be higher than when the notice icon I32 of “princess” and the notice icon I33 of “爺” are digested, These can be set appropriately.

  Also, in FIG. 43 (c2-3), only the notice icon I33 for “爺” among the three notice icons of the notice icon I31 for “Tono”, the notice icon I32 for “princess”, and the notice icon I33 for “爺” is shown. The state of the background display after is digested is shown. As shown in FIG. 43 (c2-3), when this one notice icon is digested, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a background display in which an image with the face of the frog is displayed on the entire display screen. Is displayed. In this embodiment, when one of the three notice icons, the notice icon I31 for “Tono”, the notice icon I32 for “Princess”, and the notice icon I33 for “爺” is digested, the symbol variation display is performed. The background display indicating that the reliability of the big hit in is lower than that in the case where the two notice icons are digested is displayed. Further, in the present embodiment, the example in which the “の う ち” notice icon I33 is digested among the three notice icons has been described. However, the present embodiment is not limited thereto, and for example, the “donor” notice icon I31 is digested. Alternatively, the notice icon I32 of “Princess” may be digested. Further, the reliability of the jackpot may be made different depending on the notice icon to be digested. For example, when the notice icon I31 of “Tono” is digested, the notice icon I32 of “princess” or the notice of “予 告” is given. The reliability of the jackpot is higher than when the icon I33 is digested, and the reliability of the jackpot is higher when the “princess” notice icon I32 is digested than when the “爺” notice icon I33 is digested However, these may be set as appropriate.

  Further, in this effect example, an example in which all three notice icons are displayed has been described, but only one or two may be displayed. In this case, the reliability of the jackpot may be different depending on the type of the notice icon displayed. For example, when the notice icon I31 for “Tono” is displayed, the notice icon I32 for “princess” or “や” is displayed. The reliability of the jackpot is higher than when the notification icon I33 is displayed, and the reliability of the jackpot is higher when the notification icon I33 of the “princess” is displayed when the notification icon I33 of the “princess” is displayed. In addition, for example, when the “Tono” notice icon I31 and the “Princess” notice icon I32 are displayed, the “Tono” notice icon I31 and “」 ”notice icon I33 are displayed. Or, the reliability of the jackpot is higher than when the “princess” notice icon I32 and the “爺” notice icon I33 are displayed, and the “don” notice icon I31 and “爺” When the notification icon I33 is displayed, the reliability of the jackpot may be higher than when the “princess” notice icon I32 and the “及 び” notice icon I33 are displayed, but these are set appropriately. can do.

  In this example, the background display corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon is displayed, but a background display different from the background display corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon is displayed. In some cases, the background display may not change. In this case, so-called law breaking may be reported to notify that the jackpot is confirmed.

  In addition, when three notice icons are displayed, three notice icons may be displayed in one symbol variation display, or one notice icon is displayed each time the symbol variation display is performed. It may be. In this case, the reliability for the big hit may be different depending on the display order.

  Also, in this production example, when the “Tono” notice icon I31 is digested, the Tono-sama character appears and the Tono reach is started, and when the “princess” notice icon I32 is digested, When the princess character appears and the princess reach is started, and the notice icon I33 of “爺” is digested, the fox character may appear and the heel reach may be started. In addition, when the “Ichi” notice icon I33 and the “Princess” notice icon I32 are digested, the niece character and the princess character appear, and the niece & princess reach is started, and the “Tono” notice icon is displayed. When I31 and the princess's notice icon I32 are digested, the Tono-sama character and the princess's character appear and the lord and princess reach starts, and the lord's notice icon I31 and the niece's notice icon When I33 is digested, a Tono-sama character and a spear character may appear and the Tono & Samurai reach may be started. In addition, when the notice icon I31 of “Tono”, the notice icon I32 of “Princess”, and the notice icon I33 of “Tatsumi” are digested, the Tono-sama character, the Princess character, and the Samurai character appear and Tono & Princess & Samurai Reach may be started. Thus, the reach effect display corresponding to the character indicated by the digested notice icon may be performed.

  In addition, what is displayed after these notice icons are digested is not limited to the above-mentioned reach effect or background display notice. For example, the effect mode in jackpot game or the mode during symbol change may be changed. Other notices (for example, various notices such as a character that increases the notice icon) may be performed. In addition, the production performed when the notice icon is digested is not limited to the effect display, and audio output (for example, music) corresponding to the digested notice icon may be performed. An effect by a corresponding light emission pattern may be performed.

  Next, referring to FIG. 44, there is a case where an effect may be given for each when the “house” notice icon I21 is digested and when the “mon” notice icon I22 is digested. explain.

  First, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 44 (d1), the notice icon I21 of “house” is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and the notice icon of “mon” is displayed. I22 is displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol forms a reach state with “decoration 1”, and the reach effect is started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 44 (d2), the decorative symbol display device 208 digests only the “house” notice icon I21 out of the “house” notice icon I21 and the “print” notice icon I22. The situation is shown. Then, as shown in FIG. 44 (d3), the “house” notice icon I21 is enlarged and displayed as a middle symbol in the middle symbol display area 208b. That is, it is shown that the notice icon I21 of “house” is digested and changed to a chance symbol which is a special symbol.

  Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIG. 44 (d4-1), an effect image is displayed in association with the chance symbol being displayed, or as shown in FIG. 44 (d4-2), the family crest is displayed together with the effect image. There is a case where a family crest drop effect is performed to drop the accessory 224B. After such an effect is performed, for example, the swordsman reach described above may be transferred. In addition, after performing the effect of dropping the family crest actor 224B without displaying the effect image, it may be shifted to the swordsman reach, or the effect image and the crest hero B 224B are not dropped to the swordsman reach. You may make it transfer. Also, as shown in FIG. 44 (d4-3), there may be a case where the normal reach effect is started without performing any effect due to the digestion of the notice icon I21 of “house”.

  Further, when the chance symbol is stopped and displayed, it may be shifted to another super reach (family crest challenge reach). For example, as shown in FIG. 44 (d3), the decoration symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of “decoration 1-chance symbol-decoration 1” and then at the timing shown in FIG. 44 (d4-4). In the decorative symbol display device 208, a character display of “family crest challenge” indicating that the crest challenge reach has been performed is performed. The first decorative symbol is fluctuated while maintaining the combination of “decoration 1-chance symbol-decoration 1” at the lower right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 44 (d5-4), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which the Tono-sama character YM pulls the “print” notice icon I22 with a rope. This suggests that the icon I22 is attracted to increase the expectation for the big hit.

  As shown in FIG. 44 (d6-4), when the Tono-sama character YM succeeds in attracting the “monkey” notice icon I22, the family crest member 224B falls as shown in FIG. 44 (d7-4). At the same time, a family crest drop effect is displayed in which a predetermined effect image is displayed. In other words, it can be said that the digestion of the “monkey” notice icon I22 is successful. In addition, after the family crest drop effect is performed, for example, the swordsman reach described above is transferred.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 44 (d6-4a), there is a case where the rope pulled by Tono-sama character YM breaks and the drawing of the “monkey” notice icon I22 fails. In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 44 (d7-4a), after only a predetermined effect image is displayed, the swordsman reach described above may be entered. In this case, the reliability with respect to the big hit may be lower than that in the case where the drawing icon “I22” of the “print” is successfully pulled. Also, as shown in FIG. 44 (d6-4b), when the rope pulled by Tono-sama character YM breaks and the pulling of the “print” notice icon I22 fails, the process proceeds to FIG. 44 (d7-4b). As shown, the result of the loss may be displayed as it is. The same may be applied to the case where the “monkey” notice icon I22 is digested first. Further, it may be configured such that a family crest falling effect is more likely to occur when the “monstrength” notice icon I22 is digested than when the “family” notice icon I21 is digested. The reverse may be possible.

  In addition to the above-mentioned "house" notice icon I21, "mon" notice icon I22, "donor" notice icon I31, "princess" notice icon I32, and "爺" notice icon I33, There may be a notice icon that resembles an icon. For example, a notice icon for “U”, a notice icon for “鮫”, a notice icon for “old”, a notice icon for “subject”, and “ May be prepared. For example, even if the “home” notice icon and the “鮫” notice icon are digested, the crest dropping effect may not be performed, or the “house” notice icon and the “mon” notice icon are digested. The crest dropping effect may be performed at a lower frequency when the “house” notice icon and the “鮫” notice icon are digested than when the house icon is digested. In addition, a notice icon such as “鮫” may be changed to a notice icon such as “mon”.

  Moreover, in the example of production described above, one word is formed by two characters of “house” and “mon”, and a predetermined production is performed by satisfying the requirement for the word to be formed. However, for example, a word composed of three or more letters may be used for this production example. For example, a notice icon for “question”, a notice icon for “similar”, and a notice for “ren” When three icons are digested, a pseudo-continuous effect may be performed.

  Also, in this production example, for example, when it is desired to stock the notice icon I21 for “Home” and the notice icon I22 for “Crest”, there is only one free space in the notice icon display area 285. The “home” notice icon I21 and the “mon” notice icon I22 may not be displayed. Further, only one of the “house” notice icon I21 and the “mon” notice icon I22 may be displayed. In this case, the notice icon of the person who could not display the notice icon is displayed. When the space 285 is empty, the display may be increased, or when the space for the warning icon display region 285 is not empty, the displayed warning icon may not be digested in the first place. In addition, even if the notice icon display area 285 is empty, the notice icon may not be stocked and may be digested as it is.

  Further, when there is no space in the notice icon display area 285 and at least one of the notice icon display area 285 is not displayed until the notice icon I21 of “Home” and the notice icon I22 of “Crest” are digested, for example, “House” When the previous notice icon I21 is digested, the "mon" notice icon I22 may be digested together, or the "house" notice icon I21 may be digested.

  FIG. 45 is a diagram showing step by step an example of an effect centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, and an increase effect and a digestion effect of a notice icon applicable to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows a modification in steps. In FIG. 45, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, the second special figure reservation lamp 220, the universal figure reservation lamp 216, and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. In FIG. 45 (e1), the second hold icon h12 in the hold icon display area 281 is a hold icon that is a subject of the pre-reading notice, and the display mode is other hold icons (for example, the first hold icon). The hold icon h11) is displayed larger than the hold icon h11), and is a display mode of a prefetch notice.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (e1), the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are variably displayed. The first decorative symbol is variably displayed at the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 in such a manner that the decorative symbol is displayed large in each of the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c. ing. Further, the second decorative symbol is displayed in a small size at the left end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the notice icon display area 285, no notice icon is displayed in any display area. In this production example, the second hold icon h12, which is the display mode of the pre-reading notice, shows how various parts are added. In FIG. 45 (e1), the hold icon display area 281 shows the state. The second hold icon h12 that is displayed constitutes the first notice part P1. This first notice part P1 is an image simulating the body part of a snowman. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (e1), it is shown that the character EC of the unscrupulous merchant is framed in from the left side of the display screen. The second notice part P2 to be given to the notice part P1 is carried. The second notice part P2 is an image simulating a snowman's head.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 45 (e2), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the unjust merchant character EC attaches the second notice part P2 to the upper part of the first notice part P1. On the other hand, in the decorative design display device 208, the Tono-like character YM appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative design display device 208, and the Tono-like effect is started. Here, Tono-sama character YM possesses the third notice part P3. This third notice part P3 is an image simulating a bucket that covers the head of a snowman.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 45 (e3), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the unscrupulous merchant character EC is out of the frame, and eyes and mouth are drawn on the second notice part P2. On the other hand, after the Tono-sama character YM has moved and displayed to a predetermined throwing position, at the timing shown in FIG. 45 (e4), an effect display in which the third notice part P3 possessed is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285. Is done.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 45 (e5), the thrown third notice part P3 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. That is, in this embodiment, it can be said that the notice icon display area 285 has a function of stocking notice parts constituting the hold icon. Thereafter, Tono-like character YM is out of frame in the manner described above with reference to FIGS. 41 (6) to (8).

  FIG. 45 (e6) shows a state in which the display result of the losing is derived, and the variation display of FIG.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 45 (e7), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a chunklet display area 287 is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen. For example, the notification display area 287 informs that the hold icon is changed from the default display form to the display form of the pre-reading notice, or the display form of the hold icon that is already the display form of the pre-reading notice indicates that the big hit is reliable. It is notified that the display mode is changed to a high degree. Also, a jackpot notice display in the symbol variation display being executed is also performed. Further, in the present embodiment, it may be notified that a notice icon is displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (e7), the variable display of symbols is started in the Chan throughlet display area 287.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 45 (e8), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which the third notice part P3 is digested. This third notice part P3 is moving toward the first hold icon which is the display mode of the snowman. On the other hand, the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that a DJ character BY appears on a flying carpet from the right side of the display screen and flies from the right side to the left side of the display screen. This DJ character BY possesses a fourth notice part P4. The fourth notice part P4 is an image simulating a muffler wound around the neck of a snowman.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 45 (e9), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the third notice part P3 is a second model imitating the head constituting the first hold icon h11 that is a display mode of a snowman. The DJ character BY flies toward the upper left corner of the display screen and the fourth notice part P4 possessed by the notice icon P in the notice icon display area 285 is covered. The effect display put on 2 display area YA2 is performed. It should be noted that the symbols are still displayed in the change display area 287.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 45 (e10), the display result in which the letters “Get” are displayed in the Chan-Sullet display area 287 together with the fifth notice part P5 is derived. That is, it is notified that the fifth notice part P5 is displayed. The fifth notice part P5 is an image simulating a pair of twigs that function as both arms of a snowman.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 45 (e11), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the fifth notice part P5 is a first model imitating the trunk constituting the first hold icon h11 which is a display mode of a snowman. It is attached to the upper left and right of the notice part P1. As shown in FIG. 45 (e11 ′), the first notice icon first in the notice icon display area 285 in which the third notice icon P3 was once displayed without immediately mounting the fifth notice part P5. You may make it display once (stock) on display area YA1. In this case, the notification icon may not be displayed in the first display area YA1, but may be displayed in another display area (for example, the notification icon third display area YA3).

  Thereafter, when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 elapses, as shown in FIG. 45 (e12), the decoration symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed with the combination of the decoration symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2”. The display result of is confirmed. The second decorative symbol is also stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2”. In this production example, the variation icon h0 is still displayed at this time, but may be deleted. Note that the fourth notice part P4 remains displayed in the notice icon second display area YA2.

  Thereafter, the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and as shown in FIG. 45 (e13), the decorative symbol display device 208 moves and displays the hold icon h11 of the special symbol 1 by the movement animation, The hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and becomes the change icon h0. After that, the decorative symbol variation display is started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 45 (e14-1), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the fourth notice part P4 is digested. The fourth notice part P4 is moving toward the change icon h0 that is the display mode of the snowman. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 45 (e15-1), the fourth notice part P4 is wound around the neck of the fluctuation icon h0 which is the display mode of the snowman, and the fluctuation icon h0 (or the hold icon) of the display mode of the snowman. ) Is completed. Thereby, it is notified that the reliability to the big hit in the symbol variation display is high. In addition, when the display form of this completed snowman is a holding icon, it is displayed as a pre-reading notice, and it is notified that the reliability to the big hit in the fluctuation is high.

  Further, the fourth notice part P4 is not limited to the normal symbol variation display, but may be mounted when, for example, a super reach effect is being performed. For example, FIG. 45 (e14-2) As shown in FIG. 4, in the decorative symbol display device 208, in the swordsman reach, the fourth notice part P4 is digested and attached to the change icon h0 of the display mode of the snowman at the timing shown in FIG. 45 (e15-2). You may make it do. Here, since the change icon h0 shifts to super reach, the change icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 are framed downward, and accordingly, the display position is displaced downward.

  In this production example, all the displayed notice parts are attached to the hold icon that is the target of the prefetch notice. For example, the displayed notice parts are digested, but the attachment to the hold icon fails. Display may be performed. In this case, the reliability of the big hit may be lowered. In addition, when the displayed notice part is digested, it is attached to a hold icon other than the hold icon that is the target of prefetching, functions as a prefetch notice of other hold, or is attached to a variable icon that is not subject to prefetching. Alternatively, it may function as a notice display in the symbol variation display.

  FIG. 46 is a diagram showing step-by-step modifications of the effect centered on the decorative symbol display device of the pachinko machine 100 that can be applied to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows the modification of a digestion effect in steps, and FIG. 47 is a figure which shows the continuation of an example of the effect shown in FIG. 46 in steps. 46 to 47, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the universal figure hold. The lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown. In FIG. 46, the second hold icon h12 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that the hold is the target of the pre-reading notice, but the display mode is, for example, 1 Similar to the first hold icon h11, this is the default display mode. 46 to 47 are different from the above-described embodiment in that a first decorative symbol display device 208A as a main display device and a second decorative symbol display device 208B as a sub display device are provided. . The second decorative symbol display device 208B is arranged on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208A, and the lower edge of the second decorative symbol display device 208B is the upper edge of the first decorative symbol display device 208A. It overlaps part of the front side. In the first decorative symbol display device 208A, a variable icon display area 280 and a hold icon display area 281 are displayed, and a change icon h0 and hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed, respectively. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed in the upper left corner of the display screen. The first decorative symbol is displayed in a large size across the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B, and the visibility of the decorative symbol may be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 46 (1), the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B perform the variable display of the first decorative symbol, and the first decorative symbol display device 208A displays the second The decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. As shown in FIG. 46 (1), neither the first decorative symbol display device 208A nor the second decorative symbol display device 208B displays the notice icon display area.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 46 (2), in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, the Tono-like character YM appears from outside the lower right frame of the first decorative symbol display device 208A, and the Tono-like effect is started. Here, Tono-sama character YM possesses a hat notice icon I6. On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol display device 208B, the background display is switched to the display including the notice icon display area 285A in accordance with the appearance of the Tono-sama character YM. The notice icon display area 285A is divided into four display areas: a notice icon first display area YA1, a notice icon second display area YA2, a notice icon third display area, and a notice icon fourth display area YA4. Note that the display area in which the notice icon is displayed is not limited to this, and may be three or less, or may be five or more. Further, for example, when the maximum number of display areas in which the notice icon can be displayed is eight, the second decorative symbol display device 208B displays the second display area when four display areas fewer than eight are displayed. When a notice icon is displayed in all four display areas being displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208B, a display for increasing the display area is performed, and further notification that the notice icon can be stocked. Well, for example, every time the displayed display area is filled with the notice icon, the display area may be increased by one, or when the four display areas are filled with the notice icon May display all the remaining four display areas that have not been displayed. Further, when the Tono-sama character YM appears, the display area may be increased by the number of notice icons possessed by the Tono-sama character YM. Specifically, for example, the number of display areas in the notice icon display area being displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208B is four, and these four display areas are filled with the notice icon. When the Tono-sama character YM possesses one notice icon when the Tono-sama production is started, one display area is displayed when the Tono-sama character YM throws the notice icon. The remaining four display areas that can be displayed may be displayed. Further, when the Tono-sama character YM has three notice icons, the Ton-sama character YM may increase the display area by three when the action of throwing the notice icon is performed. All the remaining four display areas that can be displayed may be displayed. Further, for example, when the maximum number of display areas in which the notice icon can be displayed is eight, the second decorative symbol display device 208B displays the second display area when four display areas fewer than eight are displayed. When a notice icon is displayed in all of the four display areas being displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208B, a notice icon display area (first notice notice area) composed of four display areas in which the four notice icons are displayed. The icon display area) is displayed in a reduced size, and a new notice icon display area (second notice icon display area) composed of four new display areas in which the notice icon is not yet displayed is newly displayed. This second notice icon A notice icon to be newly stocked may be displayed in the display area. Here, the timing at which the second notice icon display area is displayed may be the timing at which the first notice icon display area is full, or the timing at which the notice icon is newly stocked. Good. Further, the number of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285A may be displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208A or the second decorative symbol display device 208B. Further, in the second decorative symbol display device 208B, for example, when performing a super reach effect, the preview icon display area 285 is displayed in a reduced size, or the number of notice icon stocks is displayed instead of the preview icon display area 285. The notice icon display area 285A may be deleted. As described above, in the second decorative symbol display device 208B, the pre-reading notice may be performed by switching from the background display to the display including the notice icon display area 285A.

  After the Tono-sama character YM moves and displays to a predetermined throwing position at the timing shown in FIG. 46 (3), the notice icon I6 of the hat he possesses is shown in the notice icon display area 285A at the timing shown in FIG. 46 (4). An effect display that is thrown toward is performed. In this example, the hat notice icon I6 thrown by Tono-sama character YM is displayed across the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B. That is, it can be said that the hat notice icon I6 may be displayed from the first decorative symbol display device 208A to the second decorative symbol display device 208B. In addition, when displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area 285A, the first decorative design display device 208A and the second decorative design display device 208B may not be straddled, for example, the first decorative design display device. The notice icon that has entered the predetermined warp entrance displayed on 208A may appear on the notice icon display area 285A after appearing at a predetermined position on the second decorative symbol display device 208B.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 46 (5), the notice icon I6 of the thrown hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285A, and then, as shown in FIG. 46 (6), In the first decorative symbol display device 208A, an effect display is performed in which Tono-sama's character YM has succeeded in displaying the notice icon and makes a happy expression. As a result, the hat notice icon I6 is displayed in the notice icon display area 285A, thereby notifying that there is a possibility that a pseudo-continuous effect effect will be executed in the future. Thereafter, Tono-sama character YM goes out of the frame toward the lower side of the display area of first decorative symbol display device 208A.

  FIG. 46 (7) is stopped and displayed with a combination of “decoration 1-decoration 4-decoration 2” in the first ornamental symbol display device 208A, and the display result of the deviation is determined. Note that the second decorative symbol is also stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols “decoration 1−decoration 4−decoration 2”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted. On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol display device 208B, the display including the notice icon display area 285A is continued, and the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1.

  Thereafter, as a result of the symbol variation display based on the suspension of the variation display of the first special diagram 1, as shown in FIG. 46 (8), the first decoration symbol display device 208 A displays “decoration 7-decoration 6”. -The decoration display of “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed, and the display result of the deviation is determined. The second decorative symbol is also stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2”. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted. On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol display device 208B, the display including the notice icon display area 285A is continued, and the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1.

  After that, when the symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 46 (9), the hold icon h11 of the special symbol 1 is moved by the movement animation in the first decorative symbol display device 208A. The hold icon displayed and located at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 and becomes the change icon h0. After that, the decorative symbol variation display is started.

  Then, for example, when 4 seconds have elapsed since the start of the decorative symbol variation display, as shown in FIG. 46 (10), the first notification icon first display icon 285A in the second decorative symbol display device 208B is displayed. The display of digesting the hat icon I6 displayed in the display area YA1 is started. That is, a display is performed in which the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 moves from the notice icon first display area YA1 to the center of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208A. At this time, the hat notice icon I6 is displayed from the second decorative symbol display device 208B to the first decorative symbol display device 208A. That is, it may be said that the hat notice icon I6 may be displayed from the second decorative symbol display device 208B to the first decorative symbol display device 208A. Note that when the notice icon is digested, the notice icon may be displayed so as not to straddle the second decorative symbol display device 208B and the first decorative symbol display device 208A. At this time, the display including the notice icon display area 285A displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208B may be switched to the background display.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 46 (11), the digested hat notice icon I6 moves to the center of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208A, and then is enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 46 (12). Is done. In addition, the digested notice icon shown in FIG. 46 (11) displays the first decoration symbol display timing when switching from the display including the notice icon display area 285A displayed on the second decoration symbol display device 208B to the background display. It may be the timing when the device has moved to the center of the device 208A, or the timing when the notice icon shown in FIG. 46 (12) is enlarged.

  In FIG. 47 (13) continuing from FIG. 46 (12), a character display of “continuation” for notifying that the pseudo-continuous effect is to be performed is additionally displayed below the enlarged hat notice icon I6. The timing for switching from the display including the notice icon display area 285A displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208B to the background display may be the timing when the “continuation” character display is additionally displayed. It may be the timing after the “continuation” character display is additionally displayed, or may be the timing before the “continuation” character display is additionally displayed.

  Thereafter, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) elapses, at the timing of FIG. 47 (14), the hat notice icon I6 is erased together with the “continue” character display, and the second decorative symbol display device 208B provides the notice. The display including the icon display area 285A is switched to the background display. At this time, the first decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner from the first decorative symbol display device 208A to the second decorative symbol display device 208B. That is, the first decorative symbol is displayed across two display screens. On the other hand, the second decorative symbol is displayed in a small size in the upper left corner of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208A. That is, the second decorative symbol is displayed on one display screen. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 47 (15), the left symbol and the right symbol are stopped and displayed. At this time, “decoration 1” is displayed on the left symbol, and “decoration 2” is displayed on the right symbol. That is, it is shown that it is a non-reach state.

  After that, the enlarged character BC2 appears at the timing shown in FIG. 47 (16), and is displayed over the second decorative symbol display device 208B from the first decorative symbol display device 208A, and then, FIG. As shown in (17), in response to the digestion of the hat notice icon I6, there is an effect display in which the Bancho character BC appears from outside the lower right frame of the decorative symbol display device 208 and pushes up the right symbol that is stopped and displayed. This is done to notify the player that there is a possibility that the pseudo-continuous production will be started. At this time, the right symbol pushed up by the chief character BC is displayed across the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B. In the case shown in FIG. 47 (16), it is not necessary for the character BC2 with the longest length to be displayed across the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B. Here, “display straddling” is displayed in cooperation with each other in the image display area (display panel) of the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the image display area (display panel) of the second decorative symbol display device 208B. It may be. Alternatively, the image may be displayed integrally with the image display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the image display area of the second decorative symbol display device 208B. Alternatively, a display may be performed in which the display moves from the image display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208A to the second decorative symbol display device 208B.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 47 (18), the pseudo-continuous symbols are framed in from the upper side of the second decorative symbol display device 208B, and the display moves at a low speed downward. At this time, the pseudo-continuous symbols are displayed from the second decorative symbol display device 208B to the first decorative symbol display device 208A.

  As shown in FIG. 47 (19), in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, the pseudo-continuous symbols are stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b at the timing shown in FIG. 47 (19). Thereafter, for example, the pseudo-continuous effect is performed in the manner described above with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 48 and FIG. 49 are diagrams showing step-by-step examples of another modification of the notice icon increase effect and digestion effect applicable to this embodiment, and FIG. 50 shows the notice icon applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows another modification of digestion production in steps. 48 to 50, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the universal figure hold. The lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown. In FIG. 48 and FIG. 49, the hold icon that is the target of the pre-reading notice in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched for preparation of understanding, but the display mode is the default display mode. ing.

  48 (a1) to FIG. 48 (a7-2), the configuration is the same as that shown in FIGS. 46 to 47, but the second decorative symbol display device 208B is configured to be movable in the vertical direction. The second decorative symbol display device 208B is different in that it can be overlapped with the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208A when the second decorative symbol display device 208B is lowered.

  As shown in FIG. 48 (a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, a variable icon display area 280 and a hold icon display area 281 are displayed, and a change icon h0 and hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed, respectively. ing. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed in the upper left corner of the display screen. The first decorative symbol is displayed in a large size across the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B, and the visibility of the decorative symbol may be improved. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, a chunklet display area 287 is displayed at the lower right corner of the display screen, and a variable display of symbols is performed. Since the contents displayed in the chamber lettuce display area 287 are as described above with reference to FIG. 45, description thereof is omitted here. As shown in FIG. 48 (a1), neither the first decorative symbol display device 208A nor the second decorative symbol display device 208B displays the notice icon display area.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 48 (a2), in the first decorative symbol display device 208A, a hat notice icon I6 is derived and displayed in the Chan-Sullet display area 287. Then, as shown in FIG. 48 (a3), the second decorative symbol display device 208B descends and overlaps the approximate center of the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208A. At this time, the second decorative symbol display device 208B is switched from the background display to the display including the notice icon display area 285A. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208A displays an effect image surrounding the second decorative symbol display device 208B so that the second decorative symbol display device 208B is conspicuous. Note that the notice icon display area 285A shown in FIG. 48 (a3) is the same as that shown in FIG.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 48 (a4), after the notice icon I6 for the hat derived and displayed in the channel display area 287 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 in the notice icon display area 285A, FIG. As shown in (a5-1), the second decorative symbol display device 208B rises and returns to the initial position. Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 48 (a5-1), the variation display of FIG. At this time, the variation icon h0 is not erased, but may be erased at a timing before the end of the variation display in FIG. Further, in FIG. 48 (a5-1), the result of the loss is displayed only in the second decorative symbol, and the first decorative symbol is not displayed. However, the first decorative symbol is displayed and the first decorative symbol is also displayed. The result of the loss may be displayed. In this effect example, when the notice icon is displayed (stocked), it may be possible to easily recognize that the notice icon is stocked by moving the second decorative symbol display device 208B. The second decorative symbol display device 208B is configured not to operate during symbol stop display, but may be configured to be operable even during symbol stop display. Further, the operation of the second decorative symbol display device 208B may be continuously performed without being interrupted regardless of whether the symbol stop display or the symbol variation display is being performed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 48 (a5-2), even after the hat notice icon I6 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285A, the second decorative symbol display device 208B is raised. Instead, the overlapping state may be maintained on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208A. In this example, for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208B maintains the lowered state until the symbol variation display in which all the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display region 285A are consumed is completed. Whether to raise the 2 decorative design display device 208B can be set as appropriate. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 48 (a5-2), the variation display of special figure 1 ends, and both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2”, which is the result of the loss. "Is stopped and displayed. Here, the first decorative symbol is displayed in the upper right corner of the second decorative symbol display device 208B, and the second decorative symbol is displayed in the upper left corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208A. The display position of the symbol can be set arbitrarily.

  FIG. 48 (a6-2) shows a state in which two pending reservations have been consumed and the symbol variation display, which is a prefetch target, has started. Specifically, in the upper right corner of the second decorative symbol display device 208B, the first decorative symbol is changed and displayed, and in the upper left corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208A, the second decorative symbol is changed. The display is done.

  Thereafter, when the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 in the notice icon display area 285A is digested, the hat notice icon I6 is expanded as shown in FIG. 48 (a7-2). Then, the second decorative symbol display device 208B is displayed so as to protrude from the first decorative symbol display device 208A. That is, the hat notice icon I6 is displayed from the second decorative symbol display device 208B to the first decorative symbol display device 208A. In addition, a character display of “continue” for notifying that the pseudo-continuous effect is to be performed is displayed from the second decorative symbol display device 208B to the first decorative symbol display device 208A below the enlarged hat notice icon I6. Is displayed. At this time, the first decorative symbol displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208B is moved to the upper right corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208A so that it can be easily seen by the player. In addition, the second decorative symbol display device 208B may then be raised and returned to the initial position, or may be maintained in a lowered state until the symbol variation ends.

  48 (b1) to 48 (b4), in place of the second decorative symbol display device 208B, the number of notice icon display is displayed at a predetermined position of the game board 200 (for example, a position near the lower portion of the decorative symbol display device 208). An example in which a device 288 is provided is shown. This notice icon display number display device 288 is composed of, for example, two 7-segments, and can display the number (stock number) where the notice icon is displayed.

  48 (b1) to FIG. 48 (b3) have the same effect contents as FIG. 20 (17) to FIG. 19 (19), but in the notice icon display number display device 288 applied in this effect example, A state in which the numerical value is changed according to the number of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is shown. In other words, in FIG. 48 (b1), only one hat warning icon I6 is displayed in the warning icon display area 285, so that the warning icon display number display device 288 displays “01” indicating the number. Yes. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 48 (b2), Tono-sama character YM throws three notice icons (hat notice icon I6, thousand box notice icon I9, fan notice icon I10). Since it is not yet displayed in the notice icon display area 285, the value shown in the notice icon display number display device 288 remains “01”. It should be noted that the value of the notice icon display number display device 288 may be updated at the timing when the character YM throws these notice icons. Further, a number different from the number of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 may be displayed (so-called “gase” is displayed). When the above-described three notice icons are displayed in the notice icon display area 285 at the timing shown in FIG. 48 (b3), the notice icon display number display device 288 updates the value and displays “04”. Is done.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 48 (b4), when the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 in the notice icon display area 285 is digested, it is displayed in the notice icon display area 285. Since the number of the previous notice icons is reduced by 1, the notice icon display number display device 288 updates the value and displays “03”. Note that the timing for displaying the value of the display device for displaying the number of notice icons displayed in a reduced manner may be the time before the notice icon is digested, or at the same time as the notice icon is digested. It may be the timing after digestion. Note that, as shown by surrounding with a broken line, even if the notice icon is digested, the value is not decreased, and the total number (four in this example) of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is counted and displayed. You may do it. In this production example, the number of the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is displayed by 7 segments. For example, the operation by a light emitting means such as an LED or a movable means such as an effect movable body, , A transparent plate member is provided on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 to make a predetermined pattern emit light, sound, a decorative symbol display device (decorative symbol display device in which the notice icon display area 285 is displayed, and other You may make it alert | report the display number of a notice icon by a decorative design display apparatus etc.).

  49 (c1) to 49 (c9) are produced using two display devices (first decorative symbol display device 208C and second decorative symbol display device 208D) as in FIGS. 46 to 47. There is a difference in using a display device of the same size. 49, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, the second special figure reservation lamp 220, the universal figure reservation lamp 216, and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. Further, in FIG. 49 (c1), the second hold icon h12 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that it is a hold of the symbol variation display that is a prefetch target, The mode is, for example, a default display mode as with the first hold icon h11. The second decorative symbol display device 208D is disposed on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208C, and the lower edge of the second decorative symbol display device 208D and the upper edge of the first decorative symbol display device 208C are arranged. It arrange | positions so that it may overlap substantially. The first decorative symbol display device 208C displays a change icon display area 280 and a hold icon display area 281. A change icon h0 and hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed, respectively. In the second decorative symbol display device 208D, the special figure 1 second reserved number display H1 and the special figure 2 second reserved number display H2 are displayed in the upper right corner, and the special figure 1 and special figure 2 reservations are displayed. Corresponding to the numbers, “2” and “0” are displayed, respectively. Further, the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c are displayed in a large size from the first decorative symbol display device 208C to the second decorative symbol display device 208D, and FIG. 49 (c1). At the timing shown in Fig. 4, the decorative symbols are being changed. In addition, in the lower right corner portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208C, the above-described chamberlet display area 287 is displayed, and at the timing shown in FIG. 49 (c1), the hat notice icon I6 is derived and displayed. It is shown. The background display is also displayed in a large size from the first decorative symbol display device 208C to the second decorative symbol display device 208D. That is, the background is displayed on the entire two screens.

  As shown in FIG. 49 (c1), when the hat notice icon I6 is derived and displayed in the Chan throughlet display area 287, the second decorative design display device 208D displays the first decorative design as shown in FIG. 49 (c2). The display device 208C is lowered to a position that covers the upper half of the display device 208C. At this time, the first decorative symbol display device 208C on which the background display has been performed is switched to the display including the notice icon display area 285B and is derived and displayed in the notice icon first display area Y1 of the notice icon display area 285B. A hat notice icon I6 is displayed (stocked). That is, when the notice icon is displayed, the first decorative symbol display device 208C is changed to the display mode when the notice icon is displayed. On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol display device 208D, the decorative symbol variation display is continuously performed. However, the size of the symbol is reduced and is displayed only on the second decorative symbol display device 208D.

  In FIG. 49 (c3), three notice icons are displayed in the notice icon display area 285B. That is, the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon second display area YA2, and the notice icon I7 of the shuriken is displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3. . Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 49 (c3), the number of holds is one, and therefore, in the special figure 1 second hold number display H1, “1” indicating that fact is displayed.

  FIG. 49 (c4) shows a state when the shuriken notice icon I7 is digested. That is, it is notified that the chance eye notice is performed by digesting the shuriken notice icon I7. At this time, the effect display in which the notice icon is digested is performed from the first decorative symbol display device 208C to the second decorative symbol display device 208D.

  Thereafter, when the variation display of the special figure 1 is finished, as shown in FIG. 49 (c5), the second decorative symbol display device 208D stops at the combination of “decoration 7-decoration 1-decoration 1” as a result of the loss. it's shown. However, the combination of the results of the loss is a chance, and it is informed that the symbol variation display that is likely to be a big hit is suspended. That is, the pre-reading notice is given by displaying this chance.

  FIG. 49 (c6) shows a state when the notice icon I6 of the second hat is digested after the symbol variation of the special figure 1 starts. That is, it is notified that the second pseudo-continuous notice will be performed. As the second hat notice icon I6 is digested, no notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area 285B.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 49 (c7), the notice icon display area 285B displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208C is erased, and the second decorative symbol display device 208D rises and returns to the initial position. .

  Then, as shown in FIG. 49 (c8), the decorative symbol is displayed from the first decorative symbol display device 208C to the second decorative symbol display device 208D, and the background display is also displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208C. And it comes to be displayed on the whole two screens of the second decorative symbol display device 208D.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 49 (c9), in response to the digestion of the second hat notice icon I6, the chief character BC appears from the outside of the lower right frame of the first decorative symbol display device 208C, and is stopped. An effect display that pushes up the right symbol is performed, and the player is informed that there is a possibility that the second pseudo-continuous effect may be started. At this time, the long-length character BC is displayed large from the first decorative symbol display device 208C to the second decorative symbol display device 208D. In the example shown in FIG. 49 (c9), when a decorative symbol is displayed in a large size, for example, a large symbol in which a numeric symbol and a character image are integrated is displayed, and a notice icon display area 285B is displayed. When displaying small decorative symbols, small symbols consisting only of numerical symbols are displayed, and large symbols and small symbols are displayed in different display modes. The display mode may be the same by changing only the size.

  In this example, when displaying the notice icon display area 285B, only the second decorative symbol display device 208D is movable, but the first decorative symbol display device 208C may be movable. Both the first decorative symbol display device 208C and the second decorative symbol display device 208D may be movable. In this case, the first decorative symbol display device 208C and the second decorative symbol display device 208D may be moved away from each other. In this case, the first decorative symbol display device 208C and the second decorative symbol display device 208D are displayed. When the device 208D is separated, it may be configured such that an accessory placed on the back side of the device 208D is visible, and further, the accessory can be moved so as to protrude forward. May be. Such a state may be maintained until all the notice icons are consumed.

  FIG. 49D shows an example in which three decorative symbol display devices are arranged in a row. That is, in FIG. 49 (d), the first decorative symbol display device 208E disposed at the center of the three decorative symbol display devices and the second decorative symbol display disposed on the left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208E. The display is performed by the device 208F and the third decorative symbol display device 208G arranged on the right side of the first decorative symbol display device 208E. The second decorative symbol display device 208F and the third decorative symbol display device 208G have the same height as the first decorative symbol display device 208E, but are slightly smaller in width. The three decorative symbol display devices may all have the same size.

  The fluctuation icon display area 280 and the hold icon display area 281 are displayed at the lower end of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208E. On the other hand, the notice icon display area 285C is displayed across three screens of the second decorative symbol display device 208F, the first decorative symbol display device 208E, and the third decorative symbol display device 208G. In the example shown in FIG. 49 (d), the notice icon first display area YA1 and the notice icon second display area YA2 respectively display the notice icon I6 of the hat, and in particular, the notice icon second display area YA2. The hat notice icon I6 displayed on the screen is displayed from the second decorative symbol display device 208F to the first decorative symbol display device 208E. In addition, a warning icon I9 for a thousand boxes is displayed in the third notification icon display area YA3, and a fan warning icon I10 is displayed in the fourth notification icon display area YA4. Further, the decorative symbols are displayed on one decorative symbol display device per symbol row. That is, the left symbol display area 208a is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208F, the middle symbol display region 208b is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208E, and the right symbol display region 208c is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device. It is displayed on the device 208G. There may be a decorative symbol display device in which the notice icon display area 285C is not displayed. Moreover, there may be a decorative symbol display device that does not display the effect display related to the notice icon. This can be applied to the embodiments described so far and the embodiments described below.

  FIG. 50 shows an example in which three decorative symbol display devices are arranged side by side. That is, in FIG. 50, the first decorative symbol display device 208H disposed at the center of the three decorative symbol display devices, and the second decorative symbol display device 208I disposed on the left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208H. The display is performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208J arranged on the right side of the first decorative symbol display device 208H. Compared to the first decorative symbol display device 208H, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J have the same display area in the vertical direction but slightly shorter in the horizontal direction. The second decorative symbol display device 208I is provided with protruding frame portions on the upper end side, the lower end side and the left end side, respectively, and the third decorative symbol display device 208J includes an upper end side, a lower end side and a right end side. The frame portions are provided so as to protrude from each other. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J are each configured to be slidable along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208H, and when they are positioned closest to each other, It is possible to display as if one screen is being displayed on the two display screens of the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J. Further, the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208H The whole can be coated.

  Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J can rotate integrally along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208H when they are closest to each other. It is configured to be able to.

  FIG. 50 (e1) is a display corresponding to FIG. 22 (47), which covers the entire display screens of the first decorative symbol display device 208H, the second decorative symbol display device 208I, and the third decorative symbol display device 208J. The swordsman reach is shown. That is, in FIG. 50 (e1), during the execution of the swordsman reach, the icon I9 of the thousand carton box displayed in the notice icon third display area YA3 is digested and noticed that the transition to a more reliable production is made. The situation is shown.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 50 (e2), the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J start to move in directions close to each other. At this time, since both end portions of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208H are covered with the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J, the display state is difficult to visually recognize. Thus, in this embodiment, the operation of the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J may be started by digestion of the notice icon.

  As shown in FIG. 50 (e3), when the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J move to a position closest to each other, the display state of the first decorative symbol display device 208H is hardly visible. It becomes a state. At this time, the reach decoration effect as shown in FIG. 22 (49) and described above is performed by the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J. In other words, the reach effect display that has been executed over the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J is slightly darkened, and the Tono-sama character appears in a cut-in display, and the reach effect being executed. A display that cuts off the display is performed. This display is a display rotated 90 degrees to the right. At this time, the decorative symbol and the notice icon display area 285 are not displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 50 (e3) to (e5), the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J are integrated on the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208H. Rotate counterclockwise. That is, it can be said that the display of the reach transition effect has been started before the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J start rotating.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 50 (e6), the button image 136a is displayed together with the button reception time meter over the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J, and the operation of the effect button 136 is accepted. Is notified, and the player is encouraged to operate the effect button 136. At this time, the variable display of the decorative symbol displayed in a reduced size at the lower right corner of the second decorative symbol display device 208I is performed.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player, as shown in FIG. 50 (e7), “decoration 1-decoration 2—over the second ornamental symbol display device 208I and the third ornamental symbol display device 208J. The left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c are enlarged and displayed with the combination of the decoration symbols “decoration 1”.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 50 (e8) to (e9), all are temporarily hidden, and in this state, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J are integrated. And rotate 90 degrees clockwise along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208H.

  Then, when the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J move in the direction away from each other and return to the initial position, the first decorative symbol display device 208H, at the timing shown in FIG. Over the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J, display of the fluctuation fluctuation (provisional symbol stop display) of the combination of the decorative symbols "decoration 1-ornament 2-ornament 1" is started. At this time, the display of the notice icon display area 285 is also resumed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 50 (e11-1), the fan warning icon I10 displayed in the warning icon display area 285 is erased, and the decoration of “decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 1” that fluctuated and fluctuated. The combination of symbols is stopped and displayed as a result of loss.

  On the other hand, in the case of a big hit, at the timing shown in FIG. 50 (e11-2), the display of digesting the fan notice icon I10 displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4 is started. That is, a display is performed in which the fan warning icon I10 displayed in the warning icon fourth display area YA4 moves from the warning icon fourth display area YA4 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208H. As described above, even if the notice icon is digested, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J may not operate.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 60 (e12-2), an effect display is performed in which the princess character dances with a fan and is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. The displayed decorative symbol is reduced and displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208H and the third decorative symbol display device 208J, re-variable display is performed, and then a combination of the big hit decorative symbols (for example, “decoration 1-decoration”). 1-decoration 1 "decoration symbol combination) is derived and displayed.

  FIG. 50 (e7 ′) shows an example in which, after the display shown in FIG. 50 (e6) is performed, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player, the combination of the jackpot decorative symbols is derived and displayed. FIG. That is, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J move in directions away from each other. In the example shown in FIG. 50 (e7 ′), the second decorative symbol display device 208I moves downward, and the third decorative symbol display device 208J moves upward. Then, the first decorative symbol display device 208H appears, and the background display including the character of the heel is displayed across the third decorative symbol display device 208J, the first decorative symbol display device 208H, and the second decorative symbol display device 208I. At the same time, the combination of the decoration symbols “decoration 1—decoration 1—decoration 1” is displayed across the third ornament symbol display device 208J, the first ornament symbol display device 208H, and the second ornament symbol display device 208I. That is, it is also possible to derive the jackpot display result without rotating the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J to return to the original position (for example, the initial position).

  FIG. 50 (e7 ″) is configured such that when the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J rotate together, the first decorative symbol display device 208H can also rotate together. The example of the effect in the case of being performed is shown. That is, as shown in FIGS. 50 (e3) to (e5), when the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J rotate integrally, the first decorative symbol display device 208H also rotates. It is also possible to rotate together. In this case, for example, the mechanism for driving the first decorative symbol display device 208H and the mechanism for driving the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J may be configured integrally. It may be configured as a body and driven and controlled by each. According to such a configuration, for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208H may be able to be rotated in a state in which it is difficult to visually recognize the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display device 208J. is there. Further, according to such a configuration, after the display shown in FIG. 6E is performed, when the effect button 136 is operated by the player, the second decorative symbol display device 208I and the third decorative symbol display are displayed. The device 208J moves in a direction away from each other. Then, the first decorative symbol display device 208H appears in a state rotated counterclockwise by 90 degrees, and unlike FIG. 50 (e7 ′), the first decorative symbol display device 208H, the second decorative symbol display device 208I, and the third The display can be performed with the horizontal widths of the display screens of the decorative symbol display device 308J being uniform.

  FIG. 51 is a diagram showing step by step another modification of the notice icon increase effect and the digest effect that can be applied to the present embodiment. 51, the transparent light guide plate IL is disposed on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player can visually recognize the display state of the decorative symbol display device 208 through the light guide plate IL. ing. The light guide plate IL is formed by stacking two layers of panels in the depth direction, and a predetermined lens cut is applied to the transmission region of each layer. Light emitting means such as LEDs are provided at appropriate positions near the side edges of each layer of the light guide plate IL, and light from the light emitter is reflected forward by the lens cut portion, so that the transmission region has a predetermined pattern. It is configured so that it can appear as if it is emitting light. In the embodiment shown in FIG. 51, the first layer panel disposed on the front side is subjected to lens cut having the same pattern as the hat icon I6, and is disposed on the back side of the first layer panel. The second layer panel is subjected to lens cuts in a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image. In FIG. 51, the light guide plate IL is surrounded by a broken line. In addition, the number of layers of the light guide plate IL is not limited to two, and may be one or three or more. Here, in the case of being configured with one layer, for example, the pattern formed on the light guide plate when light is emitted may be changed by changing the lens cut pattern. In FIG. 51, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, the second special figure reservation lamp 220, the universal figure reservation lamp 216, and The fourth symbol display device 284a is not shown. In FIG. 51, the hold icon that is the target of the prefetch notice in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched for the purpose of understanding, but the display mode is the default display mode.

  As shown in FIG. 51 (f1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner, and the variable icon display region 280 and the hold icon display region 281 are displayed. In the hold icon display area 281, a change icon h 0 and hold icons h 11 and h 12 are displayed, respectively. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a notice icon display area 285 is displayed at the top of the display screen, and a chunklet display area 287 is displayed at the lower right corner of the display screen. Since the contents displayed in the chamber lettuce display area 287 are as described above with reference to FIG. 45, description thereof is omitted here. As shown in FIG. 51 (f1), when the hat notice icon I6 is derived and displayed in the Chan-Sullet display area 287, as shown in FIG. 51 (f2-1), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs dark display. At the same time, the light emitting means corresponding to the panel of the second layer of the light guide plate IL emits light to form a pattern imitating the effect image. That is, in FIG. 51 (f2-1), the stock effect of the notice icon is performed by the dark display and the light emission of the light guide plate IL. Thereafter, the light emission of the light guide plate IL ends (extinguishes), and the dark display on the decorative symbol display device 208 ends. The dark display on the decorative symbol display device 208 may be terminated after the light guide plate IL is turned off, or the light guide plate IL may be turned off after the dark display on the decorative symbol display device 208 is completed. .

  Further, as shown in FIG. 51 (f2-2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hat notice icon I6 derived and displayed in the Chan-Sullet display area 287 is the notice icon first display area YA1 in the notice icon display area 285. While the state of moving toward the screen is displayed, the light emitting means corresponding to the second layer panel of the light guide plate IL emits light to form a pattern imitating the effect image, so that the stock effect of the notice icon is performed. You may be made to be.

  Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 51 (f2-3), the light guide plate IL is configured to be rotatable along the display surface of the decorative design display device 208, and the decorative design display device 208 performs dark display and guides the light. Stock effect of the notice icon is performed by rotating the light plate IL 90 degrees counterclockwise and causing the light emitting means corresponding to the second layer panel of the light guide plate IL to emit light to form a pattern imitating the effect image. You may do it. Here, the light guide plate IL may be configured to be separated into a first layer panel and a second layer panel. In this case, for example, only the second layer panel is rotated and the first layer panel is rotated. The panel of the layers may not be rotated, and the panel of the first layer may be rotated together with the panel of the second layer.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 51 (f3), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice icon I6 of the thrown hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, so that It is foretelling that the rendition will be executed.

  FIG. 51G shows a state in which the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 in the notice icon display area 285 is digested. As shown in FIG. 51 (g), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 is moved to the center of the display screen and then erased. The notice icon digestion effect is performed by causing the light emitting means corresponding to the panel of the first layer of the light guide plate IL to emit light to form a pattern imitating the notice icon I6 of the hat.

  FIG. 51 (h) shows the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area 285 before the notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area 285 (before the notice effect of the notice icon is executed). It shows a state in advance of notice. As shown in FIG. 51 (h), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of symbols is performed in the chunklet display area 287 displayed at the lower right corner of the display screen. At this time, the light emitting means corresponding to the first layer panel of the light guide plate IL is caused to emit light to form a pattern imitating the hat notice icon I6. That the notice icon I6 is derived.

  FIG. 51 (i) shows another effect example of the notice icon digestion effect. As shown in FIG. 51 (i), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon display area is moved to the center of the display screen and then erased, and at that timing, the light guide plate The light emitting means corresponding to the first layer panel of IL is caused to emit light to form a pattern imitating the hat notice icon I6, and the light emitting means corresponding to the second layer panel is also caused to emit light to simulate the effect image. The notice icon digestion effect is performed so as to form. At this time, if the emission color of the light emitting means corresponding to the first layer panel is different from the emission color of the light emitting means corresponding to the second layer panel, the pattern formed on the first layer panel and the second layer In some cases, the pattern formed on the panel can be conspicuous.

  FIG. 51 (j) shows another effect example of the notice icon digestion effect. As shown in FIG. 51 (j), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hat notice icon I6 displayed in the notice icon display area 285 is moved to the center of the display screen, and then the hat notice icon I6 is displayed. The enlarged display is performed on the entire screen, and at the timing, the notice icon digestion effect is performed by causing the light emitting means corresponding to the second layer panel of the light guide plate IL to emit light to form a pattern imitating the effect image. At this time, the notice icon display area 285 is erased, but it may be displayed.

  FIG. 52 is a diagram showing step by step another example of the notice icon digestion effect. 52 (1) to FIG. 11 (11), except that the notice icon displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4 is changed to the notice icon I31 for the drink instead of the notice icon I10 for the fan. 22 (44) to FIG. 22 (54), only the portions different from the description described above with reference to FIG. 22 will be described in detail, and descriptions of common portions will be omitted. Further, in this effect example, the effect button 136 can be projected upward by an actuator such as a motor, and the position thereof can be displaced according to the contents of the effect. That is, the effect button 136 can be changed between a normal position (default position) and a protruding position.

  As shown in FIG. 52 (1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a drink notice icon I31 is displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4 in the notice icon display area 285. This drink notice icon I31 is a notice icon for notifying that the content to be produced is changed by digestion.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 52 (11), the effect button 136 is in the default position as shown in FIG. 52 (12). Then, as shown in FIG. 52 (13), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the drink notice icon I31 displayed in the notice icon fourth display area YA4 in the notice icon display area 285 is digested, and the drink notice icon is displayed. I31 moves toward the center of the display screen.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 52 (14), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the drink notice icon I31 is displayed in an enlarged manner, and an effect display for sprinkling the contents of the drink on the button image 136a is performed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 52 (15), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs an effect display in which the liquid spilled from the drink container spreads and the button image 136a is hidden.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 52 (16), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a protruding button image 136b indicating that the effect button 136 is in the protruding position after the liquid image disappears. At this time, it is in a state before the operation reception start of the effect button 136 is started.

  Then, after the effect button 136 is displaced from the default position to the protruding position at the timing shown in FIG. 52 (17), the button reception time meter decreases in the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. 52 (18). Then, it is notified that the operation reception of the effect button 136 has started. Note that the timing at which the effect button 136 is displaced from the default position to the protruding position may be the same as the timing at which the protruding button image 136b is displayed, as shown in FIG. 52 (16), or the protruding button image 136b. May be the timing before is displayed, or may be the timing after the protruding button image 136b is displayed. Also, as shown in FIG. 52 (13), the effect button 136 may be displaced from the default position to the protruding position with the start of the digestion effect of the drink notice icon I31. Further, in this effect example, the chance button lamp 138 may be turned off during a period other than the operation reception period of the effect button 136. Further, in a period other than the operation reception period of the effect button 136, for example, when it is turned on (for example, lit in blue) to notify that it is a period other than the operation reception period, You may make it light (for example, light in red) in the aspect which alert | reports that.

  FIG. 53 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner an effect example using movable means applicable to the present embodiment.

  53 (a1) to FIG. 53 (a3), when the notice icon is stocked, the effect movable body 224C is moved to a position overlapping the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208 to notify the notice icon stock. Yes. FIG. 53 (a1) shows the same display as FIG. 41 (1), but the effect movable body 224C simulating a placard with the character display of “STOCK” attached to the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208 is an effect device. It arrange | positions so that it may be hidden behind 206.

  FIG. 53 (a2) shows a state where the effect movable body 224C has moved from the initial position hidden in the effect device 206 to a viewable position that is a position overlapping the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. Thereby, it is notified that one of a plurality of types of notice icons is stocked. At this time, the type of the notice icon to be stocked may be notified, for example, the kind of the notice icon may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 or may be notified by voice or lamp. A plurality of types of effect movable bodies 224C may be prepared in accordance with the types of notice icons, and the types of notice icons stocked depending on the types of effect movable bodies 224C that appear may be notified.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 53 (a3), when the effect movable body 224C returns from the visible position to the initial position, a notice icon to be stocked is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. 53 (a3) shows a state in which the hat notice icon I6 is stocked.

  In FIG. 53B, effect movable bodies 224Da to 224Df that can rotate about the depth direction as the rotation axis are arranged in the vicinity of the upper and lower sides of the decorative symbol display device 208, respectively. More specifically, in the vicinity of the upper part of the decorative symbol display device 208, a first effect movable body 224Da marked with “Large”, a fifth effect movable body 224De marked with an asterisk symbol, “board” The second effect movable body 224Db to which the character is attached is arranged side by side in the horizontal direction, and in the vicinity of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208, the third effect movable body 224Dc to which the character “shake” is attached, A sixth effect movable body 224Df with an asterisk symbol and a fourth effect movable body 224Dd with a “dance” character are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction. These first effect movable body 224Da to sixth effect movable body 224Df rotate in accordance with the number of notice icons displayed (stocked) in the notice icon display area 285. For example, as shown in FIG. 53B, when four notice icons are displayed in the notice icon display area 285, four effect movable bodies of the first effect movable body 224Da to the fourth effect movable body 224Dd. Rotates. In addition, when the notice icon is digested, the number of effect movable bodies that have been digested may be stopped, or the number of effect movable bodies corresponding to the total number of the stocked notice icons may be rotated. Also good.

  FIGS. 53 (c1) to (c6) show a state in which the effect movable body 224 is informed that the pre-reading mode has been entered. In this production example, a special training notice icon I41 as a notice icon may be displayed. When the special training notice icon I41 is digested, the state shifts to a pre-reading mode for notifying that the change display of the special figure that is likely to be a big hit is suspended.

  FIG. 53 (c1) shows that the special training notice icon I41 has been digested. That is, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a state where the special training notice icon I41 displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 in the notice icon display area 285 is digested and moved to the center of the display screen. An effect movable body 224 simulating an arm is arranged on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The effect movable body 224 includes an upper arm portion 224a and a forearm portion 224b, and the upper arm portion 224a is pivotally attached to the effect device 206 via a rotation axis ax1. . The forearm portion 224b has a base end portion rotatably attached to a distal end portion of the upper arm portion 224a via a rotation axis ax2.

  When the special training notice icon I41 is digested and the pre-reading mode is started, as shown in FIG. 53 (c2), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the character display “Preparing for special training” on the right side in the belt-like scroll display area. Scrolls from left to right. As a result, the player is notified that the pre-read mode has been entered. On the other hand, in the effect movable body 224, an initial position where the upper arm 224a does not overlap the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a position covering the front side of the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208 (first position) A reciprocating operation (prefetching operation) is performed. The pre-reading operation by the effect movable body 224 is temporarily returned to the initial position during the stop display of the symbol, but may be continued even during the stop display of the symbol. In addition, during the pre-reading operation, only the upper arm 224a operates and the forearm 224b does not operate, but the forearm 224b may operate in addition to the upper arm 224a, or the upper arm 224a does not operate and the forearm Only the part 224b may operate.

  FIG. 53 (c3) shows a state in which the reach state is formed by arranging two “decorations 1” during the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 that is the object of prefetching. Here, the prefetching operation is continued.

  FIG. 53 (c4) shows a state in which the special training reach as the super reach production is started. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the scroll display of “Preparing for special training” is ended, and the character display of “Special training start” indicating that the special training reach is started is performed. Further, after the effect movable body 224 returns to the initial position, as shown in FIG. 53 (c5), the upper arm 224a moves from the initial position to the maximum movement position, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 53 (c6). Further, the forearm 224b moves from the initial position to the maximum movement position. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a predetermined effect image and notifies that the reliability for the big hit is high.

  FIG. 54 is a diagram showing an example of an effect centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment in a stepwise manner, and a stepwise showing another example of the effect of increasing the notice icon. It is. In FIG. 54, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, the second special figure reservation lamp 220, the universal figure reservation lamp 216, and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. In FIG. 54, the second hold icon h12 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that the hold is the target of the prefetch notice, but the display mode is, for example, 1 Similar to the first hold icon h11, this is the default display mode.

  Since FIG. 54 (1) is the same display as FIG. 41 (1) described above, detailed description is omitted.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 54 (2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the Tono-like character YM appears from outside the lower right frame of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the Tono-like effect is started. Here, Tono-sama character YM possesses a hat notice icon I6.

  In this example of production, Tono-sama character YM moves and displays to a predetermined throwing position at the timing shown in FIG. 54 (3), but the hat notification icon I6 possessed by the hat has not been thrown yet, and FIG. 54 (4). As shown in FIG. 5, in the state where the character YM of Tono-sama is waiting at the throwing position, the display is stopped with the combination of the decoration symbols “decoration 1-decoration 4—decoration 2”, and the display result of the deviation is determined. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  Thereafter, symbol variation display on the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and as shown in FIG. 54 (5), the hold symbol h11, h12 of the special symbol 1 is moved by the movement animation on the decorative symbol display device 208, respectively. The hold icon that is displayed and is at the display position of the first hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 to become the change icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 is shown in FIG. The first hold icon h11. After that, the decorative symbol variation display is started. Note that Tono-sama character YM still stands by at the throwing position.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 54 (6), an effect display is performed in which the hat's notice icon I6 of the possessed hat is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285. In other words, in this production example, when the symbol variation display subject to prefetching is put on hold, a notice icon is displayed during the symbol variation display being executed, but the notification icon is stocked. The notice icon is stocked after the symbol variation display is finished and the next symbol variation display is started. In addition, when the symbol fluctuation display subject to prefetching is put on hold, a notice icon is displayed while the symbol fluctuation display is being executed, but a so-called gasse warning is not performed. May be. In this case, for example, the character YM of Tono-sama may end the display before the start of the variation display of the symbol that is the target of prefetching. For example, the character YM may be displayed one time before the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching. The display may be terminated at the timing when the result of the symbol variation display to be performed is derived. Further, the display of the character YM of Tonosama may be terminated before the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching ends. For example, super reach that is performed during the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is started. The display of Tono-sama character YM may be ended before. Further, when the notice icon is stocked, the character YM of Tonosama may be continuously displayed after the notice icon is stocked. In addition, when the character's character is waiting and the symbol variation display performed before the symbol variation display in which the notice icon is thrown, the timing for deriving the jackpot symbol after super reach (for example, , While the swing fluctuation display is in progress), the standby display may be continued in a state where the character has the notice icon, or may be deleted.

  Then, the effects shown in FIGS. 54 (7) to (10) are performed, but the effects shown in FIGS. 54 (7) to (10) are the same as those shown in FIGS. Since it is the same except that (12) and the variation display of the second decorative symbol are performed, detailed description is omitted.

  FIG. 54 (11) shows a state in which the result of the symbol variation display that is performed immediately before the symbol variation display to be prefetched is derived. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 54 (11), the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2”, and the display result of the deviation is confirmed. Yes. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  In FIG. 54 (12), the hold icon h11 of FIG. 1 is moved and displayed by the moving animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is moved to the change icon display area 280 and changed to the change icon h0. Become. After that, the decorative symbol variation display is started.

  Then, for example, when 4 seconds have elapsed since the start of the decorative symbol change display, as shown in FIG. 54 (13), the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. The notice icon digestion effect which the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested is performed.

  FIG. 55 is a diagram showing step by step another example of the notice icon increase effect. In FIG. 55, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, the second special figure reservation lamp 220, the universal figure reservation lamp 216, and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. Also, in FIG. 55, the second hold icon h12 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that the symbol variation display is a prefetch target, but the display mode is as follows. For example, the default display mode is the same as the first hold icon h11.

  55 (a1) to 55 (a6) show a state in which the notice icon is stocked after an effect for notifying that the notice icon is stocked is performed.

  FIG. 55 (a1) shows a state in which the bowling effect performed during the symbol variation display being executed when the symbol variation display to be prefetched is suspended is started. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 55 (a1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, an explanation display unit 288 is displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen, and the mission and its success reward are shown. In the explanation display unit 288 shown in FIG. 55 (a1), when a strike is acquired in the bowling game, a character display of “item by strike” indicating that an item can be obtained as a reward is displayed. In this production example, when a strike is acquired in a bowling game, a notice item is stocked. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a bowling effect by the Tono-sama character has been started. Note that the mission displayed on the explanation display unit 288 and the content of the success reward are related to the stock of the advance notice item, for example, the hold display is related to the change to the display mode of the pre-read advance notice, It may be related to a notice about the symbol variation display. Further, the content displayed on the explanation display unit 288 may be a dedicated effect display that is displayed only for the advance notice regarding the stock of the advance notice icon. In this effect example, it can be said that a notice of notice that the notice icon is stocked is performed by performing a bowling effect as shown in FIG. 55 (a1). This bowling effect may be a dedicated effect that is performed only for the advance notice regarding the stock of the advance notice icon, may be used for the advance notice effect in the currently changing symbol display, or may be used as another pre-reading advance notice. May be.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 55 (a2), the decorative symbol display device 208 is stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 1-decoration 4-decoration 2”, and the display result of the deviation is confirmed. At this time, the bowling effect has not ended, and a character display of “following the next variation” is displayed indicating that it is continuously performed in the symbol variation display to be executed next. It should be noted that the “Strike and Item Get” is also displayed on the upper part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, which indicates the mission and its success fee.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 55 (a3), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the ball cast by the Tono-sama character rolls on the lane and moves toward the ten aligned bowling pins. , The expectation that the notice icon may be stocked.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 55 (a4), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the image of the striked scene is displayed together with the text display of “strike”, and the mission is achieved. As shown in the figure, a character display of “GET” is displayed together with the enlarged hat notice icon I6 to notify that the hat notice icon I6 is stocked.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 55 (a6), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a hat notice icon I6 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and the hat notice icon I6 is displayed. It is informed that it has been stocked. In this way, in this production example, when the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is suspended, during the symbol variation display being executed, the announcement item is not displayed (stock), and the announcement item is displayed. A notice is being made.

  As shown in FIG. 55 (b), the wipe display area WP1 may be displayed at the lower right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the above-described bowling effect may be performed in the wipe display area WP1.

  As shown in FIG. 55 (c), in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208, the sub display device 208K is arranged on the right side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and wiped on the upper half of the display screen of the sub display device 208K. The display area WP2 is displayed, the notice icon display area 285C for displaying the notice icon in the lower half is displayed, the above-described bowling effect is performed in the wipe display area WP2, and the notice icon to be stocked is displayed in the notice icon display area 285C. May be displayed.

  In the example of production shown in FIG. 55, when a big hit is made during the bowling production, the bowling production is started at the timing of displaying the big jackpot symbol derived after super reach (for example, during fluctuation fluctuation display). The background display may be displayed, or a different background display may be displayed. For example, the state shown in FIG. 55 (a2) may be displayed.

  Further, in the effect example shown in FIG. 55 (b), when a big hit is made during the bowling effect, the display of the wipe display area WP1 may be terminated, but the display may be continued as it is. . In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 55 (c), when a big hit is made during the bowling effect, the display of the bowling effect on the sub display device 208K may be terminated, but the display is continued as it is. May be.

  FIG. 56 is a diagram showing, in a stepwise manner, another modification of the notice icon increase effect applicable to the present embodiment. In the above-described embodiment, description has been given of the one that preferentially displays the fluctuation of the special figure 2 over the special figure 1. However, in this production example, priority is given to either the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game. However, the special figure variation game for holding each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is applied to the one that performs the start opening prize order variation for starting the start opening prize order. It should be noted that this effect example can also be applied to those that perform special figure 2 priority fluctuation. 56, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the universal figure hold lamp 216, and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. In FIG. 56, the fifth hold icon h13 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that the hold is the target of the pre-reading notice, but the display mode is, for example, 1 Similar to the first hold icon h11, this is the default display mode. In addition, among the hold icons displayed in the hold icon display area 281, the first hold icon h 11, the third hold icon h 12, and the fifth hold icon h 13 are displayed on the first special figure starting port 230. It is a hold icon showing the variable display of the special figure 1 that has been won and put on hold, and the second hold icon h21 and the fourth hold icon h22 have been put on the second special figure starting port 232 and put on hold. It is a hold icon which shows the fluctuation display of special figure 2. FIG.

  The effect shown in FIG. 56 is an effect that may start after the symbol variation display, which is the target of prefetching, is suspended, and the SB character SB moves on the line according to the rules of the lottery, This is an effect (Amida effect) for obtaining a notice item or the like.

  First, as shown in FIG. 56 (a1-1), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops display with a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 1-decoration 4-decoration 2”. It is reported that the result is a loss. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the Amida effect is started. Specifically, when the Amida effect is started, as shown in FIG. 56 (a1-1), a savohani character SB is placed at any one of the starting points of three horizontal lines extending in the horizontal direction. Are arranged at each of the end points of the three horizontal lines, respectively, a hat notice icon I6, a fan notice icon I10, and a lose icon IX. In addition, several vertical lines connecting adjacent horizontal lines are set as appropriate, and the central part of these vertical lines is hidden by smoke. The number of vertical lines to be set is determined, for example, according to the number of holds at the time when the Amida effect is started, but is not limited thereto. In this Amida production, if the Sabohani character moves on the line according to the rules of Amida and reaches the end point where the notice icon I6 of the hat or the notice icon I10 of the fan is arranged, the notice icon is stored in stock. When the end point where the lost icon IX is arranged is reached, it is notified that the notice icon is not stocked. Each time the symbol variation display is started, the Sabohani character SB moves to the position where the vertical line is arranged. It should be noted that every time a pseudo-ream is performed, the Sabohani character SB may move to the position where the vertical line is arranged. For example, when a pseudo-ream occurs, the character moves up to the next vertical line. May be equal. Moreover, you may advance to the place of the vertical line of 2 or more points | pieces per symbol change display. 56, for example, as described above with reference to FIGS. 55C and 55D, the effect can be performed in the wipe display area WP1 or in the sub display device 208K. is there. In this case, for example, it is possible to continue displaying the AMIDA effect even during execution of super reach. Then, for example, there may be an effect that the notice icon increases during super reach.

  Then, when the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is started, as shown in FIG. 56 (a2-1), the hold icons h11, h21, h12, h22, and h13 are moved by the moving animation, respectively, and the first hold icon The hold icon at the display position of h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 to become the change icon h0, and the other hold icons move one by one to the right. On the other hand, the decorative symbol starts to be changed. Also, as shown in FIG. 56 (a2-1), when the symbol variation display is started, the Sabohani character SB starts moving from the starting point of the upper horizontal line among the three horizontal lines, and the first vertical line is displayed. When the line is reached, the smoke hiding the vertical line is erased, and the upper horizontal line and the middle horizontal line are displayed connected by the vertical line, and the Sabohani character SB moves on the vertical line. In the timing shown in FIG. 56 (a2-1), the middle horizontal line is reached halfway.

  After that, when the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is finished, the fluctuation display of the special figure 2 is started, and the four hold icons h21, h12, h22, h13 displayed in the hold icon display area 281 are moved by the movement animation. Is done. Then, as shown in FIG. 56 (a3-1), when the Sabohani character SB reaches the second vertical line connecting the middle horizontal line and the lower horizontal line, the smoke hiding the vertical line is erased. . As a result of the smoke being erased, this vertical line is found to be cut off in the middle, and the vertical line cannot move from the middle horizontal line to the lower horizontal line, so the Sabohani character SB is in the middle Continue straight on the horizontal line toward the end point.

  Then, when the fluctuation display of the special figure 2 is finished, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is continuously started, and the three hold icons h12, h22, h13 displayed in the hold icon display area 281 are respectively moved by the movement animation. . Then, as shown in FIG. 56 (a4-1), when the Sabohani character SB reaches the third vertical line connecting the middle horizontal line and the upper horizontal line, the smoke hiding the vertical line is erased. . As a result of the smoke being erased, this vertical line is connected to the middle horizontal line and the upper horizontal line. Move to the horizontal line. As a result, the Sabohani character SB reaches the end point of the upper horizontal line where the hat notice icon I6 is arranged. As shown in FIG. 56 (a5), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the hat notice icon I6. After the display indicating that it has been acquired, the AMIDA effect ends, and as shown in FIG. 56 (a6), the notice icon I6 of the hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. Is done.

  In this production example, as shown in FIG. 56 (a1-1) and described above, any one of a plurality of different types of notice icons is selected. For example, FIG. 56 (a1- 2) As shown in FIG. 56 (a1-3), the fan warning icon I10 is arranged at all the horizontal line end points, as shown in FIG. 56 (a1-3). Also good. In this way, by arranging the same type of notice icon at all the end points of the horizontal line, it is possible to notify the player that it is determined that the displayed notice icon will be stocked. In particular, as shown in FIG. 56 (a1-3), the fan warning icon I10 is a warning icon indicating that the effect of notifying that the big hit will be confirmed as described above. In some cases, the expectation of a big hit can be further increased. The effect as shown in FIG. 56 (a1-3) is a kind of premier effect that rarely appears.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 56 (a1-4), without disposing the losing icon IX, disposing the hat's notice icon I6, the fan's notice icon I10, and the thousand box notice icon I9 at the end of each horizontal line, It may be determined that any notice icon is always stocked. According to this, the player may be able to enjoy the production of Amid with confidence.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 56 (a1-5), the savohani character SB is arranged at all the starting points of the horizontal lines, and the warning icons (hat warning icon I6, fan warning icon I10) arranged at the end of each horizontal line. In addition, it may be determined that all the notice icons I9) of the thousand car boxes are stocked. In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 56 (a1-5), since the fan notice icon I10 is included, it is ensured that an effect of notifying that the big hit will be confirmed is performed, so that the player hits the big hit. In some cases, it is possible to further enhance the sense of expectation.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 56 (a1-6), the notification icons of the patrons who do not clearly know the type of the warning icon at the end of each horizontal line (the first icon of the first icon I1, the second icon of the warning icon I2, the first icon 3 notice icons I3) may be arranged, so that the player does not know what notice icons will be stocked until the end point is reached. In some cases, the expectation can be improved. Further, as described above, the color of the notice icon of Tono-sama varies depending on the type, and the reliability of the big hit varies depending on the color. Therefore, the player may be able to increase the expectation of the changed notice icon from the lord's notice icon depending on which color of the notice icon is acquired. For example, the notice icon I3 of the third lord, which is a notice icon for the red lord, is more likely to be changed to a notice icon for which the "pseudo-ream" is fixed than a notice icon for which the "pseudo-ream" is not fixed, The notice icon I1 of the first lord, which is the notice icon, can be easily changed to a notice icon in which the “pseudo-ream” is not fixed.

  Also, in this production example, as shown in FIG. 56 (a3-1) and described above, the central portion of the vertical line is concealed with smoke to make it difficult to specify the traveling route of the Sabohani character SB. As shown in (a3-2), the vertical line may not be concealed with smoke, and the progress route of the Sabohani character SB may be specified when the Amida production is started. Thereby, since the player can recognize in advance which notice icon is stocked, the player may be able to enjoy the production in peace. Further, in this case, a roulette effect for determining the starting point of the horizontal line where the Sabohani character SB is arranged may be performed to further enhance the effect.

  Further, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 56 (a2-1) and described above, the notice icon that may be stocked at the start of the AMIDA effect is displayed in a recognizable manner. As shown in FIG. 56 (a2-2), during execution of the AMIDA effect, the area where the notice icon arranged at the end point of each horizontal line is hidden with smoke, and then, FIG. 56 (a2-2a) is displayed. ), The notice icon arranged at the end point of each horizontal line may be changed. In the example shown in FIG. 56 (a2-2a), the loss icon IX is changed to a thousand box notice icon I9, and the content of the Amida effect is promoted. In addition, for example, some or all of the notice icons arranged at the end points of each horizontal line are changed to the lose icon IX or the notice icon with a lower rank, so that the contents of the Amida effect are demoted. It may be.

  Also, in this production example, as shown in FIG. 56 (a4-1), the central part of the vertical line is hidden with smoke so that the traveling route of the Sabohani character SB can be predicted to some extent. For example, FIG. As shown in a4-2), during execution of the Amida effect, the smoke that has partially hidden the vertical line extends in the vertical direction, and the smoke disappears as shown in FIG. 56 (a4-2a). The vertical line may increase or decrease before and after. In the example shown in FIG. 56 (a4-2a), before the smoke is extended, the possibility of acquiring either the hat notice icon I6 or the fan notice icon I10 has been suggested. Then, it is ensured that the third vertical line disappears and the fan notice icon I10 is stocked.

  Further, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 56 (a4-1), the second vertical line is cut in the middle, so that the losing icon IX is not selected. As shown in 56 (a4-3), the second vertical line is not cut. Therefore, after the losing icon IX is selected and the AMIDA effect ends, FIG. 56 (a4-3a) As shown in FIG. 5, it may be notified that the notice icon is not stocked in any display area of the notice icon display area 285.

  Note that, in the above-mentioned AMIDA effect, a pre-reading notice about the symbol variation display that is a pre-reading target may be performed according to the type of the notice icon arranged at the end point of the horizontal line.

  FIG. 57 is a diagram showing an example of an effect centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment in a stepwise manner, and a stepwise showing another example of the effect of increasing the notice icon. is there. In FIG. 57, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the universal figure hold lamp 216, and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. In FIG. 57, the third hold icon h13 in the hold icon display area 281 is a hold of the symbol variation display that is a prefetch target, and the hold display becomes a prefetch notice display mode (savohani hold icon). This is different from the above-described embodiment.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 57 (1), the above-described notice icon display region 285 is displayed at the top. In FIG. 57 (1), no notice icon is displayed in any area of the notice icon display area 285. As shown in FIG. 57 (1), the first special symbol display device 212 performs symbol variation display, and the decorative symbol display device 208 accordingly displays the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol. Symbols are displayed in a variable manner.

  In FIG. 57 (1), the fluctuation icon h0 is displayed in the fluctuation icon display area 280, and the two hold icons h11 and h12 in FIG. 1 are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 in FIG. The hold icons h11 and h12 and the fluctuation icon h0 of these two special drawings 1 are all displayed in a default display mode (round, non-patterned and white display mode).

  Subsequently, when a game ball wins the first special figure starting port 230 at the timing shown in FIG. 57 (2), the third hold icon h13 of the special figure 1 is displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of the special figure 1. Displayed and notified that the number of holds is three. Here, the third hold is a hold that is a target of prefetching. In this effect example, the hold icon h13 of the third special figure 1 is displayed in the display mode of the pre-reading notice (display mode of savohani) instead of the default display mode.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 57 (3), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decorative symbol “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 1”, and the display result of the deviation is determined. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  When the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 57 (4), the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 of the special figure 1 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, respectively. The hold icon at the display position of the hold icon h11 moves to the change icon display area 280 to become the change icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 is the first hold in FIG. The hold icon at the display position of the third hold icon h13 becomes the icon h11, and becomes the second hold icon h12 of the special figure 1, and the decorative symbol variation display is started. FIG. 57 (5) shows a state in which the symbol variation display is continued.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 57 (6), in the decorative design display device 208, the Tono-like character YM appears from outside the lower right frame of the display screen of the decorative design display device 208, and the Tono-like effect is started. Here, Tono-sama character YM possesses a hat notice icon I6. As described above, in this effect example, the notice icon is displayed (stocked) in the symbol variation display that is started after the symbol variation display that is performed when the symbol variation display to be prefetched is suspended. A certain Tono-sama production has started.

  Then, after the Tono-sama character YM moves and displays to a predetermined throwing position at the timing shown in FIG. 57 (7), the notice icon I6 of the possessed hat is displayed as the notice icon at the timing shown in FIG. 57 (8). An effect display to throw toward the area 285 is performed.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 57 (9), the notice icon I6 of the thrown hat is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 57 (10), On the decorative symbol display device 208, an effect display is performed in which the Tono-sama character YM successfully displays the notice icon and makes a happy expression.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 57 (11) to (12), a display in which the character YM is framed out toward the lower side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 57 (13), the decoration symbol display device 208 stops display with the combination of decoration symbols of “decoration 1-decoration 4—decoration 2”, and the display result of the deviation is determined. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  Thereafter, when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 57 (14), the hold icon that has been moved and displayed by the moving animation and was at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed. It moves to the fluctuation icon display area 280 and becomes the fluctuation icon h0, and the holding icon at the display position of the second holding icon h12 becomes the first holding icon h11 of the special figure 1, and the variable symbol display is started. .

  Thereafter, when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 elapses, at the timing shown in FIG. 57 (15), the decoration symbol display device 208 stops and displays the combination of the decoration symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 2”. The display result of is confirmed. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted.

  Thereafter, when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 57 (16), the hold icon that has been moved and displayed by the movement animation and was at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed. It moves to the fluctuation icon display area 280 and becomes the fluctuation icon h0, and the fluctuation display of the decorative symbol is started. That is, the symbol variation display to be prefetched is started.

  Then, for example, when 4 seconds have elapsed since the start of the decorative symbol change display, as shown in FIG. 57 (17), the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1. The notice icon digestion effect which the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested is performed. Thus, according to this production example, it can be said that the prefetching notice with the hold icon is simultaneously performed together with the prefetching notice with the notice icon.

  FIG. 58 is a diagram showing an example of an effect centering on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment in stages, and in stages, other examples of an effect of increasing the notice icon and the effect of digestion FIG. In FIG. 58, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the universal figure hold lamp 216, and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. In FIG. 58, the third hold icon h13 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that it is a pre-reading symbol variation display hold, but the display mode is For example, the default display mode is the same as the first hold icon h11.

  58 (a1) to FIG. 58 (a3-1) show a state in which a notice effect is provided to notify in advance that a notice icon is stocked. As shown in FIG. 58 (a1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 1”, and the display of the deviation is displayed. The result is confirmed. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted. In the notice icon display area 285, no notice icon is displayed in any display area.

  After that, when symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 58 (a2-1), the display is moved and displayed by the moving animation, and the hold that was at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is performed. The icon moves to the fluctuation icon display area 280 and becomes the fluctuation icon h0. The hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11 of FIG. 1, and the third hold icon h13 The on-hold icon at the display position becomes the second on-hold icon h12 in FIG. 1, and the decorative symbol variation display is started. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 58 (a2-1), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a placard PL1 for notifying that the notice icon will be stocked in the symbol change display to be started next. Specifically, this placard PL1 is displayed with a hat notice icon I6 following “with the next change”, and further followed by “ga stock”, and the hat notice icon I6 Is informed that it will be stocked during the next symbol change display.

  After that, when the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 elapses and the fluctuation display is finished and the fluctuation display of the next special figure 1 is started, for example, a Ton-like effect is performed during the execution of the symbol fluctuation display. As shown in 58 (a 3-1), the hat notice icon I 6 is stocked in the notice icon first display area YA 1 of the notice icon display area 285. Thereby, since the player can recognize in advance that the hat notice icon I6 is stocked, the player may be able to enjoy the game with peace of mind.

  In the above-described effect example, the placard PL1 is displayed so that the notice icon is always stocked. However, for example, a placard PL2 as shown in FIG. 58 (a2-2) is used. It may be displayed to notify that the notice icon may not be stocked. Specifically, on the placard PL2, a notice icon I6 for the hat is displayed after “At the next change”, and further followed by “is stock”, but a question mark is added. It is informed that the hat notice icon I6 may be stocked during the next symbol variation display.

  If the hat notice icon I6 is not stocked during the next symbol change display, no effects relating to the stock of the notice icon are performed as shown in FIG. 58 (a3-2). An effect related to the stock of the notice icon (for example, Tono-sama effect) may be performed, but in this case, a so-called gassestock effect that does not stock the notice icon is performed.

  58 (b1) to FIG. 58 (b3) show a state in which a prefetching mode, which is one of the prefetching notices, is performed during the symbol variation display being executed at the time when the symbol variation display to be prefetched is suspended. It is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 58 (b1), a game ball is won at the first special figure starting port 230, and the symbol variation display to be prefetched is put on hold, and a prefetch notice is made as a display mode of the third hold icon h13. The hold icon of the display mode of Sabohani as the display mode is displayed. Note that the decorative symbol display device 208 performs variable display of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol corresponding to the variable display of the special graphic 1.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 58 (b2), the decorative symbol display device 208 starts a prefetching mode that is an effect of notifying that the symbol variation display that is likely to be a big hit is suspended. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 58 (b2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the characters “Intense heat is approaching” scroll from the right to the left in each of the two strip-shaped scroll display areas. Display to be performed.

  Thereafter, when the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 elapses and the fluctuation display is finished and the fluctuation display of the next special figure 1 is started, as shown in FIG. 58 (b3), during the execution of the symbol fluctuation display. Tono-sama performance is performed, and the notice icon I6 of the hat is stocked in the notice icon display area 285. Thus, according to this production example, it is possible to perform a prefetching notice by changing the background display in addition to a prefetching notice by the stock of the notice icon and a prefetching notice by changing the display mode of the hold icon.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 58 (c1) to (c2), a ton-like effect or the like is performed during the symbol variation display being executed when the symbol variation display to be prefetched is suspended, and a notice icon May be stocked.

  58 (d1) to 58 (d3) show how the notice icon stock and digestion are performed during execution of the same symbol variation display. That is, it is configured to be able to execute the stock and digestion of the notice icon related to the notice effect being performed during the symbol variation display.

  As shown in FIG. 58 (d1), when the hat notice icon I6 is thrown toward the notice icon display area 285 by Tono-sama production, the hat notice icon I6 is displayed as a notice icon as shown in FIG. 58 (d2). The notice icon first display area YA1 in the area 285 is temporarily stocked. Then, after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 58 (d3), the notice icon digestion effect is performed, and the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested.

  As shown in FIGS. 58 (e1) to (e2), the hat notice icon I6 is thrown to the notice icon display area 285 by Tono-sama production, but it is digested without being stocked in the notice icon display area 285. You may make it do.

  FIG. 59 is a diagram showing step by step an example of an effect centered on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, and shows different notice icon increase effects and digestion effects applicable to the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows the modification of this in steps. In FIG. 59, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the universal figure hold lamp 216, and Illustration of the fourth symbol display device 284a is omitted. Further, in FIG. 59, the second hold icon h12 in the hold icon display area 281 is hatched to indicate that the symbol variation display is a prefetch target, but the display mode is as follows. For example, the default display mode is the same as the first hold icon h11.

  FIGS. 59 (a1) to (a3) show a state in which the notice icon display area and the area for displaying the stage name for explaining the background display are used together.

  As shown in FIG. 59 (a1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a stage display area 289 indicating the current stage is provided in the lower right corner of the display screen, and the current stage is “Castle Town”. Yes. In this stage display area 289, in addition to displaying the current stage name, for example, a tutorial display such as the contents of the notice and the description of the appearance character may be displayed, or the notice display may be performed. Also good. Thus, it can be said that the stage display area 289 functions as an explanation display area. As shown in FIG. 59 (a1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the above-mentioned Tono-sama effect is performed, and a hat notification icon I6 is thrown.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 59 (a2), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the hat notice icon I6 is displayed in an enlarged manner, the character display of “stock” is added, and the hat notice icon I6 is stocked. Is notified.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 59 (a3), the stage display area 289 displayed at the lower right of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is changed to the notice icon display area 285D, and the notice in the notice icon display area 285D is displayed. A hat notice icon I6 is displayed in the icon first display area YA1.

  As shown in FIGS. 59 (b1) to (b3), the stage display area 289 is not changed to the notice icon display area 285D, and the hat notice icon I6 that appears due to Tono-sama production is not stocked. You may make it digest. Thereby, the digest effect of the notice icon regarding the notice during the symbol variation display can be performed.

  FIGS. 59 (c1) to (c2) show a state in which a plurality of notice icon display areas are provided and the notice icon display area for displaying the notice icon is selected according to the type of the notice icon.

  As shown in FIG. 59 (c1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a first notice icon display region 285E is provided at the left end portion of the display screen, and a second notice icon display region is provided at the right end portion of the display screen. 285F is provided. In this effect example, the first notice icon display area 285E is an area where notice icons other than the button notice icon are displayed, and the second notice icon display area 285F is a display area dedicated to the button notice icon. However, it is not limited to this. The first notice icon display area 285E has four display areas (the notice icon first display area YAL1, the notice icon second display area YAL2, the notice icon third display area YAL3, and the notice icon fourth display area YAL4). The notice icon first display area YAL1 and the notice icon second display area YAL2 respectively display a hat notice icon I6, and the notice icon third display area YAL3 has a shuriken notice icon I7. It is displayed. Also, the second notice icon display area 285F has four display areas (the notice icon first display area YAR1, the notice icon second display area YAR2, the notice icon third display area YAR3, and the notice icon fourth display area YAR4). Is provided, and no notice icon is displayed in any display area. In the decorative symbol display device 208, two second button notice icons I11 are enlarged and displayed side by side in the approximate center of the display screen, and a state in which these second button notice icons I11 are stocked is shown. ing.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 59 (c2), the second button notice icon I11 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YAR1 and the notice icon second display area YAR2 of the second notice icon display area 285F. In this effect example, the second button notice icon I11 is displayed in the notice icon first display area YAR1, the notice icon second display area YAR2, the notice icon third display area YAR3, and the notice icon fourth display area YAR4. In other words, when the second button notice icon I11 is digested after the second button notice icon I11 is full in the second notice icon display area 285F, a smaller number than this. The reliability for the jackpot may be different depending on whether the second button notice icon I11 is digested after the second button notice icon I11 is displayed in the second notice icon display area 285F. Well, for example, the more stock the second button notice icon I11 is stocked, It may be configured so as to be easy with. It should be noted that not all of the stocked button notice icons I11 may be digested. For example, even if four button notice icons I11 are displayed, only two of them may be digested. In this case, The remaining two button notice icons I11 may be kept in stock until the next symbol variation display or may be deleted without being digested. In addition, the first notice icon display area 285E may be configured such that the reliability for the big hit differs depending on the number of the notice items being stocked.

  FIGS. 59 (d1) to (d3) show other examples of the effect of increasing the notice icon.

  As shown in FIG. 59 (d1), the hat notice icon I6s is displayed in a small size overlapping the change icon h0 and the second hold icon h12, and the shuriken notice icon I7s is the first hold. The icon h11 is overlaid on the icon h11. That is, in this effect example, an example in which a notice icon is included and displayed in the hold icon is shown.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 59 (d2), the reduced-size hat notice icon I6s displayed on the variation icon h0 pops out and moves toward the center of the display screen. Then, as shown in FIG. 59 (d3), the notice icon I6 of the hat is enlarged and a character display of “stock” is added, and it is notified that the notice icon I6 of the hat is stocked in the notice icon display area 285. Is done. In this production example, every time the symbol fluctuation display is suspended, the production of stocking the notice icon displayed on the fluctuation icon h0 is performed. It is not limited.

  Further, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 59 (e1), the notice icon may not be displayed on all of the fluctuation icons and the hold icons, but may be displayed only on some of the change icons or the hold icons.

  59 (f1) to FIG. 59 (f3) show an example in which the notice icon may not be stocked even though the notice icon is displayed on the change icon h0.

  59 (f1) is the same as that shown in FIG. 59 (d1) and will not be described in detail.

  In this effect example, after that, the erasing animation of the variation icon h0 is started at the timing when the first decorative symbol is temporarily stopped at the timing shown in FIG. 59 (f2), and then the variation icon is displayed as shown in FIG. 59 (f3). Although h0 is erased, the notice icon I6s of the hat displayed on the change icon h0 is also erased together with the change icon h0, and it is notified that the notice icon I6 of the hat is not stocked. Thus, even if the notice icon is displayed on the fluctuation icon or the hold icon, the displayed notice icon may not be stocked.

  59 (g1) to FIG. 59 (g3) show a state where when a certain notice icon is digested, an effect is obtained that provides the same effect as when a plurality of notice icons are digested.

  As shown in FIG. 59 (g1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice icon I51 of the bouquet as the notice icon is displayed in the notice icon first display area YA1 of the notice icon display area 285. The bouquet notice icon I51 includes two or more of the plurality of kinds of notice icons described above with reference to FIG. 18B, and which notice icon is included. It is a difficult aspect.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 59 (g2), when the bouquet notice icon I51 is digested, the bouquet notice icon I51 is moved from the notice icon first display area YA1 to the center of the display screen and then displayed in an enlarged manner. The

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 59 (g3), the display of the notification icon I51 of the bouquet changes to a notification icon I6 of the hat and a notification icon I8 of the ribbon, and the types of the notification icons included in the notification icon I51 of the bouquet Can be recognized. Therefore, the player may have a sense of expectation as to which type of the notice icon is included while having the pleasure of stocking the notice icon.

  In the embodiment described so far and the embodiments described thereafter, the notice icon may be displayed after the symbol is stopped and displayed. For example, the symbol variation display is suspended. If the symbol is stopped and displayed in a certain state, or if the notice icon is stocked when the symbol is stopped and the symbol change display is not held, the stock status is displayed even during the demonstration display. May be maintained. Further, the stock state may be maintained as long as the notice icon is stocked regardless of whether the symbol variation display is suspended.

  Further, the time until the notice icon is displayed may be notified.

  In addition, an effect may be provided in which the stocked notice icon is changed or promoted (leveled up). For example, a stocked hat notice icon I6 may be changed to a fan notice icon I10. When the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a combination of chances in a state where the hat's notice icon I6 is stocked, an effect may be performed in which the hat's notice icon I6 is changed to the thousand box notice icon I9. . Conversely, the stock notice icon may be demoted (level down).

  In addition, the effect display that is performed when the notice icon is digested may be changed or promoted (leveled up). For example, the effect that the notice icon I6 of the hat is digested is performed. The fan notice icon I10 may be changed to the fan notice icon, or the hat notice icon I6 may be digested and executed to increase the number of pseudo reams. Good. Conversely, an effect that the effect display performed when the notice icon is digested may be demoted (level down).

  Even when the button notice icon is displayed, the button hold icon may be displayed or may not be displayed.

  When the button notice icon is displayed, the button notice may be displayed or may not be displayed.

  Further, it may be determined whether or not to give a notice of stocking the notice icon depending on the length of the symbol variation display time.

  In addition, the length of the variable display time when the notice of stocking the notice icon is not performed may be the same or different between the symbol change display that is a big hit and the symbol change display that is lost.

  Further, as a variation display time of the symbol variation display of the special diagram 2 executed by interrupting the symbol variation display of the special diagram 1, a variation time of a length in which the notice icon is not stocked may be selected.

  Further, when the symbol variation display of the special symbol 2 is executed by interrupting the symbol variation display of the special symbol 1, the notice of stocking the notice icon may be controlled in a controlled manner.

  In addition, when the symbol fluctuation display of special figure 2 is executed by interrupting the symbol fluctuation display of special figure 1, the effect data table may be set so as not to carry out the advance notice of stocking the notice icon.

  In addition, when the symbol fluctuation display of special figure 2 is executed by interrupting the symbol fluctuation display of special figure 1, the length of fluctuation time for stocking the notice icon may be selected. Here, the stocked notice icon may be digested in the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 that has been interrupted, or may be digested during the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 that has been interrupted.

  Further, when the symbol fluctuation display of special figure 2 is executed by interrupting the symbol fluctuation display of special figure 1, it is stocked in the symbol fluctuation display before the symbol fluctuation display of special figure 1 before interruption is performed. The notice icon may be stocked and not digested, or may be configured to digest.

  In addition, the types of notification icons are not limited to those described above or described later, and various types can be employed.

  For example, an item for customization may be displayed as a notice icon. When this item for customization is digested, for example, an increase in selectable BGM, an increase in selectable background, and a player selects You may make it possible to increase possible production modes (for example, one-shot notification mode, etc.).

  Further, for example, an item for effect selection may be displayed, and when the item for effect selection is digested, for example, the BGM can be changed, the effect mode can be changed, the volume setting, The brightness may be set.

  In addition, for example, a user setting clear item may be displayed, and when this user setting clear item is digested, for example, the user setting may be cleared, or the user setting may be cleared. It may be possible to clear after confirming whether or not to do so.

  In addition, for example, an effect mode end item may be displayed, and when the effect mode end item is digested, for example, the prefetch mode can be ended or the effect mode can be ended. Alternatively, it may be possible to end after confirming the end of the pre-reading mode or the end of the effect mode.

  Further, for example, a point acquisition item or a level-up gifting item may be displayed. When these items are consumed, for example, points can be presented or the level can be increased. It may be.

  Further, for example, a reach production corresponding to the notice icon may be started. For example, when the Tono-sama icon is digested, Tono-sama VS swordsman reach may be performed.

  Also, for example, a notice effect corresponding to the notice icon may be started. For example, when the present icon is digested, an icon “next notice” is displayed, and a notice effect of “next notice” is displayed. May be started.

  Further, for example, there may be an icon (fortune telling icon) that starts fortune-telling when digested. In this case, the fortune telling icon may be displayed only during the customer waiting demonstration effect, or may be displayed other than during the customer waiting demonstration effect.

  In addition, for example, there may be an icon for displaying information on the island simultaneous production when digested. For example, the countdown until the start of the island simultaneous production may be started, the time until the island simultaneous production starts may be displayed, or the contents of the next island simultaneous production may be displayed. Also good.

  Also, for example, there may be an icon that allows for store-side customization once digested. For example, it is possible to make settings that allow the production to be performed according to the area of the installed amusement store (for example, setting of the Tohoku region mode or the Chubu region mode) and the name of the amusement store to be installed Good. For example, according to the setting, it is possible to differentiate between a group notice character (for example, Namahage group) appearing in the Tohoku region mode and a group notice character (eg, Shachihoko group) appearing in the Chubu region mode. There is a case.

  Further, for example, there may be an icon for starting a tutorial display when digested.

  Further, for example, there may be an icon for starting a roulette effect when digested. In this roulette effect, for example, a result indicating that the promotion effect of the display mode of the hold icon is performed is displayed, or a result indicating that the symbol change display is notified is displayed.

  Moreover, for example, when digested, there may be an icon that changes the display mode of the symbol or returns to the original state.

  Next, a modification of the above-described embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. Here, FIG. 60 is a diagram showing, in stages, examples of effects that can be executed in the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, and FIG. It is.

  60 shows a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special figure display device 212, a second special figure display device 214, a first special figure reservation lamp 218, and a second special figure reservation lamp 220. In addition, illustration is abbreviate | omitted about the common figure display apparatus 210, the common figure reservation lamp 216, and the 4th symbol display apparatus 284a.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 60 (a), the reserved icon display region 281A of FIG. 1 and the reserved icon display region 282A of FIG. 2 are adjacent to the left and right below the display region of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is displayed as you do. In FIG. 60 (a), the number of reservations is 0 in both FIG. 1 and FIG. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the display is stopped and displayed as “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 4”, which is a combination of decorative symbols corresponding to the deviation. In addition, a notice icon display area 285A is arranged above the hold icon display area 282A in FIG. 2, and a princess notice icon Ih is displayed. In the notice icon display area 285A, the notice icons are displayed left justified, but the display position of the notice icon is not limited to this. Further, the notice icon display area 285 may be displayed constantly, or may be displayed or not as necessary.

  FIG. 60B shows a state in which two game balls have won the first special figure starting port 230. In the hold icon display area 281A of FIG. 1, a hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold and a hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold are displayed side by side aligned. These hold icons h11 and h12 are both in the default display mode.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 60 (c), the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started. In the hold icon display area 281A of FIG. 1, since the first hold is consumed, the hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold moves to the left side as a hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold. Is displayed. At this time, since the game ball has won the second special figure start port 232, the hold icon h21 corresponding to the first hold is displayed in the left-justified manner in the hold icon display area 282A of FIG. The hold icon h21 has a default display mode.

  When the timing shown in FIG. 60 (d) is reached, the display mode of the hold icon h11 corresponding to the first hold in FIG. ).

  After the change of the display mode of the hold icon h11, when the timing shown in FIG. 60 (e) is reached, the notice icon display area 285A and the princess notice icon Ih are additionally displayed in the notice icon display area 285A. The That is, a display in which the notice icon increases is performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 60 (f), “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and the princess notice icon Ih that has been increased after the two princess notice icons Ih is digested. Then, a princess character HI accompanied by a balloon with the character notation “Atari” and “Question Mark” appears. The timing of the appearance of the princess character HI may be before, after or at the same time as the stop display timing of the left symbol.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 60 (g), after “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, “decoration 3” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. Is notified.

  In the present embodiment, the symbol fluctuation display of special figure 2 is executed in preference to the symbol fluctuation display of special figure 1, so the symbol fluctuation display of special figure 2 is started at the timing shown in FIG. The In the present embodiment, when the symbol fluctuation display of special figure 2 is executed by interrupting the symbol fluctuation display of special figure 1, if the result of the symbol fluctuation display of special figure 2 is out of sync, a notice icon Will not be digested, and no notice icon will be displayed. Therefore, the notice icon may not be displayed or the notice icon display area 285A may not be displayed while the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is being performed. In addition, when the result of the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is a big hit, neither the digest icon nor the increase display may be performed, or the preview icon is digested and increased. There may be. On the other hand, the hold icon display areas 281A and 282A may be continuously displayed, any of the hold icon display areas 281A and 282A may be hidden, or the hold icon display of FIG. Only the region 282A may be displayed. In addition, when the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is interrupted and performed, the background may be changed to a dedicated background. When a dedicated background is displayed, the notice icon display area 285A may be hidden and only the hold icon display areas 281A and 282A may be displayed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 60 (i), the display is stopped with the combination of the decoration symbols “decoration 3—decoration 2—decoration 3”, and it is notified that the result of the symbol variation display of special figure 2 is out of place. .

  Subsequently, at the timing shown in FIG. 60 (j), after the suspended symbol variation display of Special Figure 1 is started, Tonen's notice icon It is digested, and “Atari” and “Question Mark” Tono-sama character YI appears with a letter balloon. Note that the appearance timing of Tono-sama character YI may be before, after or at the same time as the start of the symbol variation display of the decorative symbol. In FIG. 60 (j), a bad servant notice icon Id is additionally displayed in the notice icon display area 285A. That is, a display in which the notice icon increases is performed. Here, the timing at which the notice icon Id of the evil agent is added and displayed may be before or after the start of the digest display of the Tono-sama notice icon It may be, or at the same time. It may be.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 60 (k), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol “decoration 3” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, and the princess's notice icon Ih and the villain's notice icon are displayed. Id is digested, and the princess character HI and the evil character DI appear. The timing of the appearance of the princess character HI may be before, after or at the same time as the stop display timing of the left symbol. The timing of the appearance of the princess character HI may be before, after or at the same time as the appearance of the villain character DI.

  Then, at the timing of FIG. 60 (m), in the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 3” is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, and then “decoration 3” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. , You will be informed that it was a big hit.

  Next, the configuration of the lottery table related to the notice icon for determining whether to perform the increase display and the digest display of the notice icon in this production example will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 61 (A), when the jackpot determination result executed with the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is a big hit, regardless of the result of the prefetching of the special figure 1 hold, An increase display of the notice icon of the lord is executed with a probability of / 50, an increase display of the notice icon of the princess is executed with a probability of 3/50, and an increase display of the notice icon of the bad actor is executed with a probability of 2/50 . On the other hand, the display of the notice icon of Tono-sama is executed with a probability of 40/50, the display of digestion of the notice icon of a princess is executed with a probability of 35/50, and the notice icon of an evil agent with a probability of 25/50. Execute the digest display. In addition, since the execution lottery of the increase display and the digest display is performed for each notice icon, the increase display is simultaneously performed for two or more notice icons or the digest display is simultaneously performed for two or more notice icons. There is.

  In addition, when the result of the jackpot determination executed with the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is out of place, when the symbol variation display that becomes a big hit is suspended as a result of the prefetch of the hold in FIG. Will display an increase in the notification icon of Tono-sama with a probability of 3/50, an increase display of the notification icon of the princess with a probability of 2/50, and an increase in the notification icon of the bad actor with a probability of 1/50 Execute the display. Also, on the other hand, digestion display of Tonen's notice icon is executed at a probability of 1/50, digestion display of a princess's notice icon is executed at a probability of 10/50, and a notice icon of an evil agent is executed at a probability of 15/50 Execute the digest display.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 61 (B), when the jackpot determination result executed with the start of the symbol variation display in FIG. , 25/50 probability to increase the notice icon of the princess, 20/50 probability to increase the number of the princess notice icon, 7/50 probability to increase the notice icon of the evil agent Run. On the other hand, the display of the notice icon of Tonosama is executed with a probability of 20/50, the display of digestion of the notice icon of a princess is executed with a probability of 15/50, and the notice icon of an evil agent with a probability of 5/50. Execute the digest display. For example, in a pachinko machine that is not assumed to win the second special figure starting port 232 in a normal gaming state (non-electric support state), even if the big hit determination result is a big hit, The notice icon may not be displayed in an increased manner and any notice icon may not be displayed.

  In addition, when the jackpot determination result executed with the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure 2 is out of place, an increase display is displayed for any of the notice icons regardless of the result of the prefetching of the special figure 1 on hold. Do not perform and do not display any notice icons.

  In addition, for example, when the electric support state is finished and one or a plurality of suspensions remain for the symbol fluctuation display of the special figure 2, the notice icon is not displayed as a pre-reading notice for the special figure 2 suspension. Alternatively, an increase display and a digest display of the notice icon may be performed according to the jackpot determination result that is executed with the start of the symbol variation display of the special figure 2.

  Next, other specific examples of effects executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 to 74.

  62 to 74 are diagrams showing stepwise modification examples of effects centering on the decorative symbol display device of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. 62 to 74, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the universal figure hold. The lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown. 62 to 74 show examples in which three decorative symbol display devices are arranged side by side. That is, the first decorative symbol display device 208L disposed at the center of the three decorative symbol display devices, the second decorative symbol display device 208M disposed on the left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the first decoration. The display is performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N arranged on the right side of the symbol display device 208L. The first decorative symbol display device 208L may be referred to as a main display device, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be referred to as sub-display devices. The length in the width direction of 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is shorter than the half of the length of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the height is slightly shorter. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M has its right end side portion overlapped with the front side of the left end side portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N has the left end side portion thereof as the first end portion. One decorative symbol display device 208N overlaps the front side of the right end side portion. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are configured to be slidable in directions close to each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N can rotate integrally along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L when they are closest to each other. It is configured to be able to. The names of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are not necessarily displayed in a variable manner for each display device. However, it is added here just in case that the interpretation of the display device is not narrowed. Further, a combination of these decorative symbol display devices (first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, and third decorative symbol display device 208N) is used as an effect display means, and the effect display means is a decoration symbol. It is also possible to display various fluctuations or to display a plurality of types of effects. In addition, a transparent light guide plate is arranged on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the player can visually recognize the display state of the first decorative symbol display device 208L through the light guide plate. . The light guide plate has a predetermined lens cut in the transmission region. A light emitter such as an LED is provided at an appropriate position near the side edge of the light guide plate, and light from the light emitter is reflected forward by the lens cut portion, so that the transmission region emits light in a predetermined pattern. It is configured so that it can appear to be. In the embodiment shown in FIGS. 62 to 74, the light guide plate is subjected to a lens cut having a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image. Note that the light guide plate is configured such that the thickness of the portion of the region where light is refracted toward the player side is thinner than the thickness of light irradiation. Therefore, the display states of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be easily visible. Further, the light guide plate may be movable. Further, the light guide plate may be provided on the near side of at least one of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. 62 to 72 and 74 show the state of the speaker 120 and the effect button 136.

  FIG. 62 is a diagram showing step by step another example of the notice icon increase effect and digestion effect applicable to the present embodiment, and FIG. 63 is a diagram showing step by step a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. It is.

  As shown in FIG. 62 (a), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a user interface (UI) part is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and the UI part has a variation icon h0 at the center thereof. It is displayed in a mode of being placed on a pedestal, and a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variation icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 62 (a), since two variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The change icon h0 and the two hold icons h11 and h12 are both in the default display mode. Further, a tutorial display section TT1 as an explanation display section is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0, and various information relating to games and effects is displayed (tutorial display), and the contents are updated at an appropriate timing. Is done. In the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 62 (a), “Tono-sama is a general of Yatsushiro” is displayed, and explanations regarding the character of Tono-sama are made. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed. The UI portion is preferentially displayed during the variable display of the first decorative symbol, and is provided in a region that does not overlap the display region of the first decorative symbol. It may overlap. Here, the explanation display section (or explanation display area) may be a place where a certain thing is displayed in addition to the pattern of the place itself. Specifically, when the stage name is displayed in red and the stage name is displayed in red in a configuration in which the stage name is hot when moving to a certain stage, the display may be an explanatory display instead of a notice. In other words, when the normal stage name is displayed in white, it is not hot as compared with the red stage name display, and this may be a kind of notice.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 as an explanation display unit for displaying the name of the stage and reach currently being performed is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 62A, “Castle Town” is displayed, and it is informed that the current stage is the castle town. In addition, on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage is shown, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. Further, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special drawings 1 and 2 and the fourth symbol of the special drawings 1 and 2 are displayed. Note that the Tono-sama character may or may not be displayed at all times.

  Also, a family crest member 224E, which is one of the effect movable bodies, is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is configured to move in the vertical direction according to the effect contents. ing. Further, the family crest member 224E includes a light emitting means such as a full color LED, and can emit light in various light emission modes depending on the contents of the production. In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an Yatsushiro character 224Fa and a general character 224Fb, which are one of the effect movable bodies, are arranged, and each moves in the vertical direction according to the effect contents. It is configured to be able to. In addition, the Yatsushiro character 224Fa and the shogun character 224Fb each have a built-in light emitting means such as a full color LED, and can emit light in various light emission modes according to the contents of the production.

  Subsequently, when a game ball wins the first special figure starting port 230 at the timing shown in FIG. 62 (b), the third hold icon h13 (third hold icon in FIG. 1) is displayed in the hold icon display area. ) Is displayed, and it is notified that the number of holds has become three. Here, the third hold is a hold of the symbol variation display that is a target of prefetching. In this effect example, the third hold icon h13 is displayed not in the default display mode but in a display mode of a prefetch notice (for example, a display mode with a blue circle). At this time, a sound “Pong” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that a pre-reading notice by the hold display has been performed.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 62 (c), the first decorative symbol display device 208L stops and displays the first decorative symbol as a combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 1”, and the display result of the deviation. Is confirmed. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted. Also, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols “decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 1”.

  Then, when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 62 (d), the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 are respectively moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the first hold icon h11. The hold icon at the display position is placed on the pedestal on which the change icon is displayed and becomes the change icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11. The hold icon at the display position of the third hold icon h13 becomes the second hold icon h12, and each moves onto the corresponding pedestal. In addition, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 62D starts the variable display of the first decorative symbol, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M starts the variable display of the second decorative symbol. Is done. In the tutorial display section TT1, the character display “Tosama is a general of Yatsushiro” is still displayed. Thus, the explanation display in the tutorial display unit TT1 may be performed across a plurality of symbol variation displays.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 62 (e), in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the Tono-sama character is started, and the Tono-sama character displays an icon (bomb icon) I61 like a bomb. It shows how to throw. The bomb icon I61 is an icon that has various effects on the performance when the Tono-sama character throws it. It should be noted that the throwing of the bomb icon I61 may be displayed in an animation in which the displayed notice icon can be specified or impossible. In this case, it may be specified from the middle of throwing, or may be specified from the beginning. Also, an animation related to a notice icon (high expectation notice icon) with a high jackpot expectation when digested and an animation related to a notice icon with a low jackpot expectation when digested than the high expectation notice animation. The display mode of the animation may be the same or different.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 62 (f), a state in which the Tono-sama character has thrown a bomb icon I61 is shown.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 62 (g), display is performed so that the bomb icon I61 moves from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this time, in the tutorial display section TT1, what was displayed as “Tosama is Yatsushiro Shogun” has been changed to “By digesting the notice icon ...”, something has been done by digesting the notice icon An explanation of what happens is given. The timing at which the display of the tutorial display unit TT1 is changed may be the same as the timing at which the bomb icon I61 moves from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or the bomb icon I61. The timing may be before the movement from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L, or from the third decorative symbol display device 208N of the bomb icon I61 to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The timing may be later than the movement to. Thus, in the tutorial display unit TT1, there are cases where a plurality of types of explanation displays are displayed in one symbol variation display.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 62 (h), after the bomb icon I61 thrown by the Tono-sama character bursts, the exploded bomb icon I61 changes to a swordsman notice icon I62 at the timing shown in FIG. 62 (i). . The swordsman notice icon I62 is an icon for notifying that the swordsman reach will shift to the swordsman reach, as will be described later. In addition, at the timing when the swordsman notice icon I62 appears, the speaker 120 outputs a sound “don” informing that effect. Here, the notice icon may have a combination of one-to-one to many-to-many (for example, N to N).

Then, as shown in FIG. 62 (j), the swordsman's notice icon I62 is arranged in a position overlapping the left end portion of the tutorial display portion TT1, while being reduced in size. Then, a voice “Paquin” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the swordsman's notice icon I62 has been stocked, and then, as shown in FIG. 62 (k), the bomb icon I61 is thrown by the Tono-sama character. The animation ends. Thus, since the swordsman notice icon I62 is arranged at a position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display unit TT1, there are cases where it is difficult to visually recognize at least some of the characters displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1. Here, the difficulty in visual recognition means that the visual recognition icon is more difficult to see than when the notice icon is not in a position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display portion TT1. In other words, the notice icon I62 of the swordsman overlaps the front side of the tutorial display part TT1, thereby making it easier for the player to draw attention to the display of the tutorial display part TT1 and the notice of the swordsman notice icon I62. May be possible. In addition, there may be cases where the presence of the tutorial is noticed, and it is possible to concentrate on the symbol variation display rather than the explanation of the effects that may occur in the future.
The arrangement position of the notice icon I62 of the swordsman may be arranged in the vicinity of the tutorial display section TT1 in addition to the position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display section TT1, and in this way the same effect can be obtained. You may be able to get it. Further, the content indicated by the character display displayed in the tutorial display unit TT1 may be, for example, the content related to the swordsman's notice icon I62 or may be the content that is completely unrelated to the swordsman's notice icon I62. It may be content related to the current performance, or content that is completely unrelated to the current performance. In FIG. 62 (j), the content of the character display displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 is a display relating to the notice icon and is related to the notice icon I62 of the swordsman. It is not displayed in relation to the text, but happens to be related to the contents of the explanation, but the content of the text displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 is determined in accordance with the display of the swordsman notice icon I62. It may be configured to be. When displaying the tutorial display along with the notice icon, the tutorial display may be displayed before the notice icon, the notice icon may be displayed before the tutorial display, or the tutorial display and notice icon may be displayed. You may display simultaneously. The notice icon I62 of the swordsman arranged so as to overlap the tutorial display unit TT1 is digested in the symbol variation display to be prefetched as described later. The notice icon I62 of the swordsman may be digested in the symbol variation display that is performed before the symbol variation display to be prefetched. As a result, the overlap with the tutorial display portion TT1 is eliminated before the symbol variation display, which is the target of prefetching, is started. In this example, the description has been given of the case where the notice icon is stocked in the tutorial display part TT1, but the notice icon may be stocked in the stage name display part ST1.

  Thereafter, when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 elapses, at the timing shown in FIG. 62 (l), the first decorative design display device 208L has a decorative design of “decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2”. The combination is stopped and displayed, and the display result of deviation is confirmed. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted. Also, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as a combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 6-decoration 2—decoration 2”. In addition, as shown in FIG. 62 (l), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the display of the tutorial display unit TT1 has been changed from “With the notice icon digestion ...” to “Panda is the master of the lord”. The relationship between the Tono-sama character and the panda character is described. That is, in this production example, the display of the tutorial display unit TT1 may be changed to a new content in a state where the swordsman notice icon I62 is displayed overlapping the tutorial display unit TT1. In other words, it can be said that a new explanation display has started with the swordsman notice icon I62 overlapping the tutorial display section TT1. The display change timing of the tutorial display unit TT1 may be the same as the timing at which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, or may be the timing before the timing at which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, The timing may be later than the timing at which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed. When the timing of the display change of the tutorial display portion TT1 is a timing before the timing at which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the tutorial display portion TT1 displays a plurality of explanations in one symbol variation display. It can be said that it may be started.

  FIG. 62 (m) shows a state in which the symbol variation display performed immediately before the symbol variation display to be prefetched is completed. In other words, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 1-decoration 5-decoration 6”, and the display result of the deviation is determined. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted. Also, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 1-decoration 5-decoration 6”. In addition, as shown in FIG. 62 (m), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the display of the tutorial display unit TT1 is changed from “Panda is the master of the lord” to “When the Yatsushiro general moves ...”. It is explained that something happens when the Yatsushiro character 224Fa and the general character 224Fb operate.

  When the symbol variation on the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 62 (n), the hold icon h11 is moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed at the display position. The suspended icon is placed on the pedestal on which the variation icon is displayed, and becomes the variation icon h0. In addition, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 62 (n) starts the variable display of the first decorative symbol, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M starts the variable display of the second decorative symbol. Is done.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 62 (o), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbol “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, and a reach state is formed. Is done.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 62 (p), the swordsman notice icon I62 starts swinging, and the expectation about whether or not the swordsman notice icon I62 is digested is expressed. By doing so, the player may be anxious to want the notice icon to be used early. At this time, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, effect display is performed in accordance with the swing of the swordsman notice icon I62. The effect display need not be performed. This effect display is applied to the character display portion of the tutorial display portion TT1, and therefore there is a case where attention can be paid to the explanation display.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 62 (q), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the notice icon I62 of the swinging swordsman moves upward and is being digested. At this time, a voice “Paquin” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the notice icon has been consumed. Thereby, the overlap state by the swordsman's notice icon I62 to the tutorial display part TT1 is eliminated, and the player may easily see the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display part TT1.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 63 (a) following FIG. 62 (q), the first decorative symbol display device 208L performs a display for notifying that it will develop into super reach (swordsman reach). That is, in this production example, the advancement to the swordsman reach is foretold by digesting the swordsman notice icon I62. At this time, the first decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 63 (b), the light emitting means corresponding to the light guide plate emits light to form a pattern imitating an effect image, which produces high reliability for the big hit in this swordsman reach. Here, the pattern formed on the light guide plate overlaps the tutorial display unit TT1, and the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 may be difficult to visually recognize.

  FIG. 63 (c) shows a situation where the swordsman reach is being performed. That is, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the background display is changed from the background of the castle town to the background dedicated to the swordsman reach. In the stage name display section ST1 of the device 208M, the characters “Swordsman Reach” are displayed. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a duel scene animation is performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 63 (c), a state in which the Tono-sama character and the swordsman character confront each other is displayed. In the swordsman reach, the UI portion is framed downward, and therefore the display position of the change icon h0 is moved downward. At this time, the UI unit may be out of frame after the hold icon is erased, or the UI unit may be out of frame with the hold icon. In addition to the hold icon, in the state where the explanation display is made, the UI may be out of frame after the hold icon and the explanation display are simultaneously erased. Here, the timing at which the hold icon and the explanation display are erased may be different.

  In FIG. 63 (d), the duel scene animation continues. When the timing shown in FIG. 63 (e) is reached, the button image 136a is displayed together with the button reception time meter in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Notifying that the reception of the operation of the effect button 136 is started, the operation of the effect button 136 is promoted to the player. At this time, the chance button lamp 138 built in the effect button 136 emits light in a light emission mode (for example, red light emission) indicating that the operation is being accepted. The timing at which the light emission mode of the chance button lamp 138 is changed may be the same as the timing at which the effect button image 136a is displayed, or may be before the timing at which the effect button image 136a is displayed. It may be after the timing at which the effect button image 136a is displayed.

  Thereafter, when the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 63 (f), the first decorative symbol display device 208L, as shown in FIG. A cut-in image to which the character display “Ze” is added is displayed superimposed on the animation display of the duel scene.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 63 (h), the main character, Tosama, was defeated by the enemy swordsman. In FIG. 63 (i), both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2”. A combination of decorative symbols is derived and fluctuation fluctuation is started.

  Thereafter, when the variation time of the special figure 1 elapses, at the timing shown in FIG. 63 (j), the first decorative symbol displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is displayed as “decoration 2” on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. -The decoration display of “decoration 3—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed, and the display result of deviation is determined. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted. Also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as a combination of decorative symbols “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2”. In addition, when a notice icon (for example, the fan notice icon I10 described above) for reviving after stock display is stocked, the background display changes from the background of the swordsman reach to the background of the castle town that is the normal background. It may be digested after returning.

  FIG. 64 is a diagram showing step by step another example of the notice icon increase effect and digestion effect applicable to the present embodiment, and FIG. 65 is a diagram showing step by step a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. It is. 64 (a) to (l) are the same as FIGS. 62 (a) to (l), and the description thereof is omitted here.

  FIG. 64 (m) shows a state in which the symbol variation display that is performed immediately before the symbol variation display to be prefetched is performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 64 (m), the notice icon symbol CS (sometimes referred to as “decoration C”) displayed as “C” in the middle symbol display area 208b is stopped and displayed as “decoration 1-decoration C-decoration”. 6 ”is temporarily stopped and displayed with the combination of decorative symbols. When the notice icon symbol CS is derived and displayed, it has a function of notifying that a chance-up notice icon I63 described later is stocked. When the notice icon symbol CS is displayed, the chance up notice icon I63 may always be stocked, or the chance up notice icon I63 may not be stocked. The notice icon symbol CS may include an image imitating the chance-up notice icon I63 (including an enlarged / reduced image itself), which may be moved to the notice icon display area. That is, unlike the throwing animation, the animation for obtaining a notice icon with a symbol may be anything that can display the notice icon in an identifiable manner. Further, there may be an incompatible icon such as the notice icon symbol CS and the chance up notice icon I63. Further, the types of notice icons displayed as symbols may be more or less than the types of notice icons not displayed as symbols. The type of notice icon displayed when an animation (for example, throwing animation) relating to Tonosama's character is displayed as an advance notice when triggered by an animation relating to a figure (eg, an animation performed when the notice icon symbol CS is displayed). It may be different from the type of icon, and at least some of the notice icons may be icons displayed when both animations are triggered. A notice icon may be displayed as both a symbol and a mini character. For example, the pseudo-announcement icon may be displayed on two occasions, and two may be stocked on different occasions with one change, or may not be displayed. In the second decorative symbol, the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner in any symbol row. Note that the fluctuation icon h0 is erased here, but may be displayed. In addition, the display of the tutorial display section TT1 has been changed from “Panda is a master of Tono-sama” to “When a general Yatsushiro moves ...”.

  As described above, when the notice icon symbol CS is derived and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, as shown in FIG. 64 (n), a chance-up notice icon I63 pops out from the notice icon symbol CS, and FIG. ), The position overlaps with the front side of the tutorial display section TT1, and moves to the right side of the swordsman notice icon I62 and is arranged (stocked). Then, a voice “Paquin” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the chance up notice icon I63 is stocked. In addition, at the timing when the chance-up notice icon I63 pops out, notification by voice output is not particularly performed. This is because the player can easily recognize that the notice icon symbol 63 of the chance up is stocked by deriving the notice icon symbol CS, but it may be notified by voice. Thus, in this effect example, it may be difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the characters displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 by the plurality of notice icons. Moreover, according to this production example, it is comprised so that a stock notice icon can be stocked. Also, in this example, the swordsman's notice icon I62 and the chance-up notice icon I63 are stocked differently, and therefore the contents of the production until the stock is different are different.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 64 (p), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed with a combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 1-decoration C-decoration 6”, and the display result of the deviation is displayed. Is confirmed. Also, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 1-decoration C-decoration 6”.

  When the symbol variation on the first special figure display device 212 is started, the hold icon h11 is moved and displayed by the movement animation as shown in FIG. 64 (q), and the first hold icon h11 is displayed at the display position. The suspended icon is placed on the pedestal on which the variation icon is displayed, and becomes the variation icon h0. In addition, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 64 (q) starts the variable display of the first decorative symbol, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M starts the variable display of the second decorative symbol. Is done.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 65 (a) following FIG. 64 (q), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbols of “decoration 2” are stopped in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively. It is displayed and a reach state is formed.

  Thereafter, the swordsman notice icon I62 starts swinging at the timing shown in FIG. At this time, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect display displayed in accordance with the swing of the swordsman's notice icon I62 is the right side of the swordsman's notice icon I62 in addition to the character display part of the tutorial display unit TT1. It may also be noticed that the chance-up notice icon I63 is stocked in addition to the explanation display, so that it may be noted that the chance-up notice icon I63 is stocked.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 65 (c), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows that the swinging swordsman notice icon I62 moves upward and is digested. At this time, a voice “Paquin” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the notice icon has been consumed. In this effect example, the overlap state by the swordsman's notice icon I62 to the tutorial display part TT1 is eliminated, but the chance-up notice icon I63 still overlaps the tutorial display part TT1. Further, when the swordsman notice icon I62 is digested, a predetermined effect display is displayed around the swordsman notice icon I62 to make the swordsman notice icon I62 stand out. FIG. As shown, this effect display is applied to the tutorial display section TT1 and the chance up notice icon I63, and there are cases where attention can be drawn to the explanation display and the chance up notice icon I63.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 65 (d), the first decorative symbol display device 208L performs a display notifying that the swordsman reach has been developed. At this time, the first decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 65 (e), the light emitting means corresponding to the light guide plate emits light to form a pattern imitating the effect image. Here, the pattern formed on the light guide plate overlaps the tutorial display unit TT1, and the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 may be difficult to visually recognize. The pattern formed on the light guide plate also overlaps with the chance up notice icon I63 that has not been digested before the transition to super reach (swordsman reach), and the display state of the chance up notice icon I63 is displayed. May be difficult to see. That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 65 (e), a part of the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is hidden by the pattern formed on the light guide plate and the chance-up notice icon I63. Yes. Here, since a predetermined interval is provided between the light guide plate and the decorative symbol display device, depending on the position that the player sees, it is possible to avoid overlap due to the pattern formed on the light guide plate, The chance-up notice icon I63 may be easily visible.

  FIG. 65 (f) shows a situation where a swordsman reach is being performed. That is, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the background display is changed from the background of the castle town to the background dedicated to the swordsman reach. In the stage name display section ST1 of the device 208M, the characters “Swordsman Reach” are displayed. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a duel scene animation is performed, and at the timing shown in FIG. 65 (f), a state where the Tono-sama character and the swordsman character confront each other is displayed. In the swordsman reach, the UI part is framed downward, so the display position of the fluctuation icon h0 has moved downward, but the chance advance notice icon I63 is not affected by this, and the display position is Not changed.

  In FIG. 65 (g), duel animation continues, and when the timing shown in FIG. 65 (h) is reached, the button image 136a is displayed together with the button reception time meter in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. . At this time, the chance button lamp 138 emits light in a light emission mode (for example, red light emission) indicating that the operation is being accepted. Here, the chance-up notice icon I63 starts swinging, and is expecting whether or not the chance-up notice icon I63 is digested. At this time, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, effect display is performed in accordance with the swing of the chance-up notice icon I63.

  Thereafter, when the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 65 (i), the first decorative symbol display device 208L, as shown in FIG. A cut-in image (first cut-in image) to which the character display “Ze” is added is displayed superimposed on the animation display of the duel scene.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 65 (k), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows the state that the swinging up chance-up notice icon I63 is moved upward and is digested.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 65 (l), the second cut-in image in which the angle of the face of Tono-sama is different and the display image extends in the upper right direction is displayed so as to be superimposed on the first cut-in image. It has been reported that the degree of reliability for has increased. That is, it is shown that the notice by the cut-in image is ranked up by digesting the chance up notice icon I63. The first cut-in image may be erased when the second cut-in image is displayed, that is, the first cut-in image is replaced with the second cut-in image and displayed. May be. Further, when the second cut-in image is displayed and another notice icon is stocked, the second cut-in image may be overlapped with the notice icon stocked. , The second cut-in image may be overlapped with the stock notice icon, or the second cut-in image may not be overlapped with the stock notice icon, The second cut-in image may not be overlapped with the stock notice icon stored. In the embodiments described so far and in the embodiments described below, the timing at which the digested notice icon is deleted is the same as the timing at which the performance corresponding to the notice icon is started. Alternatively, it may be a timing before the execution of the effect corresponding to the notice icon is started, or may be a timing after the execution of the effect corresponding to the notice icon is started. In this effect example, the notice icon overlaps with the tutorial display part TT1 when the tutorial display part TT1 is displayed, but any display when the tutorial display part TT1 is not displayed. There is no overlap. That is, the stock notice icon has a predetermined display area and may overlap with other images at certain moments, but may not overlap with other images at certain moments. Can do. If the chance-up notice icon I63 is used to promote the button display shown in FIG. 65 (h), the notice icon is digested and disappears before the start of cut-in display, which is another promotion target. It does not have to disappear.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 65 (m), the main character, Tono, wins the enemy swordsman. In FIG. 65 (n), both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”. The combination of the decorative symbols is derived and the fluctuation of shaking starts.

  Thereafter, when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 elapses, at the timing shown in FIG. 65 (o), the first decorative symbol displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is displayed as “decoration 2” on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. -The decoration display of “decoration 2—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed, and the jackpot display result is confirmed. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted. Also, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as a combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”.

  FIG. 66 is a diagram showing step by step another example of a notice icon increase effect applicable to the present embodiment. In FIG. 66, after the notice icon is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the third decorative symbol display device 208N is slid to perform an effect display that conveys the displayed notice icon to the stock position. The state of going is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 66 (a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI part is disposed at the lower part of the display screen, and a change icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center of the UI part. On the left side of the variation icon h0, a hold icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 66 (a1), since two variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The change icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 of the two hold icons are in the default display mode, but the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the display mode of the pre-reading notice. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 66 (a1), “castle town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. In addition, on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a treasure box image TR is displayed above the display screen, and there may be an effect display in which a notice icon appears from the treasure box image TR as will be described later. Further, in this effect example, a tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged below the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and “With notice icon digestion ...” is displayed. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth graphic of special figures 1 and 2 are also displayed.

  In addition, the above-mentioned family crest character 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned eight-generation character 224Fa and the general character character 224Fb are disposed above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Has been.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 66 (a2), the third decorative symbol display device 208N shows a state in which the lid of the treasure chest image TR is opened and the bomb icon I61 jumps out from the inside. In the tutorial display section TT1, the explanation display has been changed from “With the notice icon digestion ...” to “Swordsman is Tokusama's nemesis”. Note that the timing of changing the explanation display in the tutorial display unit TT1 may be the same as the timing at which the bomb icon I61 jumps out of the treasure chest image TR, or the timing before the timing at which the bomb icon I61 jumps out of the treasure chest image TR. There may be a timing after the timing when the bomb icon I61 jumps out of the treasure chest image TR.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 66 (a3), the bomb icon I6 popping out from the treasure chest image TR is ruptured. The burst effect display overlaps the front side of the tutorial display portion TT1, and at least part of the characters displayed on the tutorial display portion TT1 may be difficult to view. Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 66 (a4), the ruptured bomb icon I61 changes to a swordsman notice icon I62. At this time, the swordsman notice icon I62 overlaps with the front side of the tutorial display portion TT1, and therefore at least part of the characters displayed on the tutorial display portion TT1 may be difficult to visually recognize. Then, at the timing when the swordsman's notice icon I62 appears, the speaker 120 outputs a sound “paquin” to inform the user that the swordsman's notice icon I62 is stocked.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 66 (a5), the third decorative symbol display device 208N slides to the left along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 66 (a6), the third decorative symbol display device 208N is moved toward the initial position so that the display of the swordsman notice icon I62 is maintained on the display coordinates on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Slide to the right. That is, an aspect as if the swordsman notice icon I62 does not move at a certain position on the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L (that is, the swordsman notice icon I62 is placed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The notice icon I62 of the swordsman is displayed while moving the third decorative symbol display device 208N. 66 (a6) shows a state in which the swordsman notice icon I62 is displayed across the third decorative symbol display device 208N and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. When the swordsman notice icon I62 is completely transferred from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the overlap of the swordsman notice icon I62 with the tutorial display unit TT1 is eliminated. Thereafter, the third decorative symbol display device 208N continues to slide rightward toward the initial position, and returns to the initial position as shown in FIG. 66 (a7).

  Next, with reference to FIG. 66 (b1) to FIG. 66 (b8), another example of the notice icon increase effect performed across a plurality of decorative symbol display devices will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 66 (b1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the UI part is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and the fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center of this UI part. On the left side of the variation icon h0, a hold icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 66 (b1), two variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, so two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The change icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 of the two hold icons are in the default display mode, but the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the display mode of the pre-reading notice. Further, in this effect example, the tutorial display part TT1 is arranged in the lower right part of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and “Swordsman is Tonentsu's nemesis” is displayed as an explanation display. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 66 (b1), “castle town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. In addition, on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a treasure chest image TR is displayed below the display screen, and there may be an effect display in which a notice icon appears from the treasure chest image TR. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth graphic of special figures 1 and 2 are also displayed.

  In addition, the above-mentioned family crest character 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned eight-generation character 224Fa and the general character character 224Fb are disposed above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Has been.

  As shown in FIG. 66 (b2), the third decorative symbol display device 208N shows a state where the lid of the treasure chest image TR is opened, and the bomb icon I61 jumps upward from the inside.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 66 (b3), the bomb icon I6 jumping out from the treasure box image TR is changed to the enlarged swordsman notice icon I62, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 66 (b4), the treasure box image TR. Is erased. At this time, the speaker 120 outputs a sound “paquin” to notify that fact, and notifies that the swordsman notice icon I62 is stocked. Note that the timing of the audio output from the speaker 120 may be the same as the timing when the bomb icon I6 changes to the swordsman notice icon I62, or the timing when the bomb icon I6 changes to the swordsman notice icon I62. It may be the previous timing, may be a timing after the timing when the bomb icon I6 changes to the swordsman notice icon I62, or may be a timing before the treasure chest image TR is erased. The timing may be the same as the timing at which the treasure chest image TR is erased, or may be the timing after the treasure chest image TR is erased.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 66 (b5), the third decorative symbol display device 208N slides to the left along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this time, the lower end portion of the third decorative symbol display device 208N overlaps with the UI portion on the front side of the tutorial display portion TT1 displayed in the lower right portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this time, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, as shown in FIG. 66 (b5), the portion overlapping the UI portion displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed, and the tutorial display portion TT1 is not displayed. Therefore, the tutorial display portion TT1 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is overlapped by the third decorative symbol display device 208N, so that at least a part of the characters displayed on the tutorial display portion TT1 is difficult to visually recognize. It may become.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 66 (b6), the third decorative symbol display device 208N moves toward the initial position so that the display of the swordsman notice icon I62 is maintained on the display coordinates on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Slide to the right. That is, an aspect as if the swordsman notice icon I62 does not move at a certain position on the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L (that is, the swordsman notice icon I62 is placed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The notice icon I62 of the swordsman is displayed while moving the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The timing shown in FIG. 66 (b6) shows a state in which the swordsman notice icon I62 is displayed across the third decorative symbol display device 208N and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Thereafter, the third decorative symbol display device 208N continues to slide rightward toward the initial position, and returns to the initial position as shown in FIG. 66 (b7). When the third decorative symbol display device 208N returns to the initial position, the overlap by the third decorative symbol display device 208N displayed on the tutorial display portion TT1 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 108L is resolved, and the player The explanation display displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 may be easily visible.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 66 (b8), the swordsman's notice icon I62 is displayed in a reduced size while being overlapped with the left end portion of the tutorial display portion TT1. Then, a voice “Paquin” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the swordsman notice icon I62 has been stocked. Thus, since the swordsman notice icon I62 is arranged at a position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display unit TT1, there are cases where it is difficult to visually recognize at least some of the characters displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1.

  In this example, for example, as shown in FIG. 66 (b5 ′), the height of the lower edge of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is set to at least the first decorative symbol display device. If the tutorial display portion TT1 displayed on 208L is higher than the display position, even if the third decorative symbol display device 208N slides and overlaps with the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the tutorial display portion TT1 is displayed. On the other hand, since it is possible to create a non-overlapping state, for example, the third decorative symbol display device 208N displaying the notice icon is displayed in the vicinity of the tutorial display portion TT1 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Because the slide moves, the third decorative symbol display while visually confirming the display state of the tutorial display section TT1 There is a case that can be seen also directed by location 208N.

  66, in the case where the notice icon is displayed on the tutorial display section TT1, in the effect example shown in FIG. 66, after the third decorative symbol display device 208N is slid, the third decorative symbol display device 208N is displayed on the notice icon. May be displayed so that the notice icon displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is transferred to the third decorative symbol display device 208N and carried. As a result, when the notice icon is carried by the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the overlap state of the notice icon on the tutorial display unit TT1 is eliminated, and the explanation display may be easily visible.

  FIG. 67 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of a notice icon increase effect applicable to the present embodiment. In FIG. 67, the tutorial display unit TT1 is out of frame in normal times, and shows a state in which the tutorial is displayed from below when explanation display is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 67 (a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI part is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and the fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center of this UI part. On the left side of the variation icon h0, a hold icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 67 (a1), since three variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, three hold icons h11, h12, and h13 are displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the variable icon h0, the first hold icon h11, and the second hold icon h12 are all in the default display mode, but the third hold icon h13 is displayed in the display mode of the pre-reading notice. Yes. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 67 (a1), “castle town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. In addition, on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

  The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth graphic of special figures 1 and 2 are also displayed.

  In addition, the above-mentioned family crest character 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned eight-generation character 224Fa and general character 224Fb are above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Is arranged. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 67 (a1), the tutorial display unit TT1 is not displayed on any of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. .

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 67 (a2), the first decorative symbol display device 208L starts the frame-in of the tutorial display section TT1 from the lower right side of the display screen, and thereafter, as shown in FIG. 67 (a3). At the timing, the tutorial display section TT1 is arranged at a predetermined display position, and at the timing shown in FIG. 67 (a4), “Tosama is Yatsushiro Shogun” is displayed on the tutorial display section TT1.

  Thereafter, when the display by the tutorial display section TT1 is performed for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds), the tutorial display section TT1 moves downward as shown in FIGS. 67 (a5) to (a6), and the first decorative design is displayed. Frame out from the display device 208L. Note that the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 may be deleted before the animation that starts out of the frame starts, or may be deleted when the animation that starts out of the frame starts, or is out of the frame. It may be deleted at the timing after the animation starts, or may be displayed until the frame out of the tutorial display portion TT1 is completed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 67 (a7), for example, after the swordsman notice icon I62 is stocked in the manner described above with reference to FIGS. 62 (e) to (j), FIG. 67 (a8) As shown, the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the Tono-sama character ends.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 67 (a9), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the frame-in by the tutorial display unit TT1 is started again from the lower right side of the display screen, and thereafter, in FIG. 67 (a10). The tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged at a predetermined display position at the timing shown. At this time, the tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged on the back side of the stock swordsman notice icon I62, and as a result, overlaps the swordsman notice icon I62.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 67 (a11), the tutorial display unit TT1 displays an explanation message “Due to digestion of notice icon ...”, but the tutorial display part TT1 is overlapped by the notice icon I62 of the swordsman. Therefore, at least a part of the explanation display is hidden, making it difficult to view.

  Thereafter, when the display by the tutorial display unit TT1 is performed for a predetermined time, an animation in which the tutorial display unit TT1 is out of frame starts, and then, as shown in FIG. 67 (a12), the tutorial display unit by the swordsman notice icon I62 The overlap state to TT1 is eliminated. If the display of the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 is maintained until the tutorial display section TT1 is out of frame, the explanation display may be easily visible due to the elimination of the overlap state. Then, as shown in FIG. 67 (a13), when the tutorial display unit TT1 completely frames out of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the frame-out animation ends.

  Also in this production example, as shown in FIGS. 67 (b1) to (b2), even when the notice icon is digested and rises during the period in which the tutorial display section TT1 is displayed, the notice icon is used. The overlap state with the tutorial display section TT1 is eliminated. 67 (b1) to (b2) are as described above with reference to FIGS. 62 (p) to (q), and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 68 is a diagram showing step by step another example of the notice icon increase effect applicable to the present embodiment. FIG. 68 shows a state in which the tutorial display is performed not only in the tutorial display in the tutorial display unit TT1 but also in the conversation effect of the character.

  As shown in FIG. 68 (a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the UI part is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and the fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center of the UI part. On the left side of the variation icon h0, a hold icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 68 (a1), since three variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, three hold icons h11, h12, and h13 are displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the variable icon h0, the first hold icon h11, and the second hold icon h12 are all in the default display mode, but the third hold icon h13 is displayed in the display mode of the pre-reading notice. Yes. Further, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0. In the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 68 (a1), “Tono is a Yatsushiro general” is displayed. In this production example, the tutorial display unit TT1 may be referred to as a first tutorial display unit. Furthermore, in this effect example, a balloon part TT2 as a second tutorial display part (explanation display part) is displayed on the left side of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L together with the princess Chibi character CH1. The Chibi princess character CH1 and the speech balloon TT2 are displays that may be displayed when a conversation effect (or speech effect) is performed, such as a tutorial display (description display) or a notice display. At the timing shown in FIG. 68 (a1), the balloon portion TT2 is displayed with an explanation indicating that “gold is hotter than red”, and a description regarding the advance notice performed in the pachinko machine 100 is made. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed. The balloon part TT2 may overlap the first decorative design, but may be arranged at a position where it does not overlap. In addition, no hold icon is displayed in the balloon part TT2 or a balloon part TT3 described later. Also, the same display as that displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 is not displayed on the balloon sections TT2 and TT3. The tutorial display unit TT1 may have a display area larger or smaller than the balloons TT2 and TT3. The tutorial display unit TT1 may have a larger or smaller character font than the balloons TT2 and TT3. Further, the tutorial display unit TT1 and the balloons TT2 and TT3 may have the same font or different fonts. The balloons TT2 and TT3 may overlap with the decorative symbols, but the decorative symbols are configured not to overlap in the display area where other explanation display is performed, but may be overlapped. Further, the tutorial display unit TT1 may have a lower or higher frequency of explanation display than the balloon units TT2 and TT3. Further, the tutorial display portion TT1 and the balloon portions TT2 and TT3 may be display regions partitioned by lines, or may be display regions where either one or both are not partitioned by lines.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 68 (a1), “castle town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. In addition, on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

  The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth graphic of special figures 1 and 2 are also displayed.

  In addition, the above-mentioned family crest character 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned eight-generation character 224Fa and general character 224Fb are above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Is arranged.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 68 (a2), the balloon portion TT2 is erased together with the Chibi princess character CH. In addition, the decorative symbols are still being displayed in a variable manner. Thus, unlike the tutorial display unit TT1, the balloon unit TT2 is configured not to be displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays. The balloon part TT2 may also be configured to be able to display across a plurality of symbol variation displays.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 68 (a3), the first decorative symbol display device 208L stops and displays the first decorative symbol as a combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 1”, and the display result of the deviation. Is confirmed. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted. Also, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols “decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 1”. In the tutorial display part TT1, “Tono-sama is a general of Yatsushiro” is still displayed.

  When the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 68 (a4), the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, respectively, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The hold icon at the display position is placed on the pedestal on which the change icon is displayed and becomes the change icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11. The hold icon at the display position of the third hold icon h13 becomes the second hold icon h12, and each moves onto the corresponding pedestal. Also, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 68 (a4) starts the variable display of the first decorative symbol, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M starts the variable display of the second decorative symbol. Is done. In the tutorial display section TT1, the character display “Tosama is a general of Yatsushiro” is still displayed. Thus, the explanation display in the tutorial display unit TT1 may be performed across a plurality of symbol variation displays.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 68 (a5), in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the Tono-sama character is started, and the Tono-sama character tries to throw the bomb icon I61. Has been. On the other hand, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the princess Chibi character CH1 is displayed again together with the balloon TT2 on the left side of the display screen, and the conversation effect is started. At the timing shown in FIG. 68 (a5), the balloon portion TT2 is displayed with an explanation indicating “the swordsman reach is hot”, and an explanation regarding a specific super reach. Note that the timing at which the balloon portion TT2 is displayed may be the timing before the throwing animation is started, may be the same as the start of the throwing animation, or is the timing after the throwing animation is started. There may be.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 68 (a6), the state that the Tono-sama character has thrown the bomb icon I61 is shown. Further, as shown in FIG. 68 (a6), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a balloon part TT3 as a third tutorial display part (explanation display part) is displayed on the right side of the display screen together with a spear character GY1. ing. The samurai character GY1 and the speech balloon TT3 are displays that may be displayed when a conversation effect (or a speech effect) is performed, such as a tutorial display (description display) or a notice display. At the timing shown in FIG. 68 (a6), the balloon section TT3 is displayed with an explanation “when a panda is intruded”, and an explanation regarding the notice effect is made. Here, the blowing portion TT3 overlaps on the front side of the first decorative design, but may be disposed at a position where it does not overlap. Note that the timing at which the balloon TT3 is displayed may be the same as the timing at which the Tono-sama character throws the bomb icon I61, or the timing before the timing at which the Tono-sama character throws the bomb icon I61. Alternatively, the timing may be later than the timing when the character of Tono-sama throws the bomb icon I61. Further, the conversation effect by the princess Chibi character CH1 and the samurai character GY1 may be performed by operating the effect button 136.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 68 (a7), display is performed so that the bomb icon I61 moves from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this time, in the tutorial display section TT1, what was displayed as “Tosama is Yatsushiro Shogun” has been changed to “With notice icon digestion ...”. Here, at the timing shown in FIG. 68 (a7), the bomb icon I61 is positioned so as to overlap the front side of the balloon part TT3, and at least part of the characters displayed in the balloon part TT3 may be difficult to visually recognize. Therefore, it may be possible to easily draw attention to the player on the display of the balloon TT3 and the bomb icon I61. The timing at which the explanation display in the tutorial display unit TT1 is changed may be the same as the timing at which the bomb icon I61 overlaps the front side of the balloon unit TT3, or the bomb icon I61 overlaps the front side of the balloon unit TT3. It may be a timing before the timing, or may be a timing after the timing at which the bomb icon I61 overlaps the front side of the balloon portion TT3.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 68 (a8), the bomb icon I61 thrown by the Tono-sama character bursts. At this time, the effect image indicating that the bomb icon I61 has exploded may be positioned on the front side of the balloon part TT3, and at least part of the characters displayed on the balloon part TT3 may be difficult to visually recognize.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 68 (a9), the ruptured bomb icon I61 changes to a swordsman notice icon I62. At this time, the notice icon I62 of the swordsman is positioned so as to overlap the front side of the balloon part TT3, and at least a part of the characters displayed on the balloon part TT3 may be difficult to visually recognize. In addition, at the timing when the swordsman notice icon I62 appears, the speaker 120 outputs a sound “don” informing that effect. As described above, in this effect example, only one of the two displayed conversation effects (the balloon part TT2 and the balloon part TT3) may be overlapped by another image. It is configured.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 68 (a10), the swordsman notice icon I62 is arranged in a position overlapping the left end portion of the tutorial display portion TT1, while being reduced in size. Then, a voice “Paquin” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the swordsman notice icon I62 has been stocked. At this time, the swordsman notice icon I62 overlaps at a position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display section TT1. As described above, the swordsman notice icon I62 may overlap a plurality of display parts (tutorial display part TT1 and balloon part TT3) on which explanation display is performed.

  In the example of production shown in FIGS. 68 (a1) to (a10), an explanation display (tutorial display) for explaining the production is displayed on the balloons (balloon part TT2 and balloon part TT3) displayed together with the character. However, for example, as shown in FIG. 68 (b), the display mode of the balloon part TT2 is changed (for example, the background color of the balloon part TT2 is changed to red), and the character “Intense heat” is changed. In some cases, a notice display or a pre-read notice display in the symbol variation display may be performed.

  68 (c1) to 68 (c3) show other examples of contents displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1.

  As shown in FIG. 68 (c1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbol “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, and a reach state is formed. A state in which the swordsman notice icon I62 starts to swing is shown. In the tutorial display section TT1, an explanation display “Panda is a master of the lord” is performed.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 68 (c2), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows that the swinging swordsman notice icon I62 moves upward and is digested. At the timing shown in FIG. 68 (c3), the display of the tutorial display section TT1 has been changed from “Panda is a master of Tonosama” to “Developed as a swordsman reach”. Is displayed). With this configuration, the player may be able to easily understand what happens when the swordsman notice icon I62 is digested. Note that at the timing of FIG. 68 (c3), the speaker 120 outputs a voice “Paquin” to notify that the notice icon has been consumed.

  In the above-described effect example, the tutorial display unit TT1 has been described as having a function of displaying an explanation about the effect. For example, as shown in FIG. 68 (d), the display mode of the tutorial display unit TT1 is changed. In addition to changing (for example, changing the background color of the tutorial display section TT1 to red) and displaying the characters “Intense heat”, a notice display or a pre-read notice display may be performed in the symbol variation display. Also good.

  FIG. 69 is a diagram showing step-by-step examples of other presentation icon increase effects that can be applied to the present embodiment. In FIG. 69, the UI part is displayed in the lower part of the first decorative symbol display device 208L in which the variable icon display area, the hold icon display area, the tutorial display part TT4, and the stage name display part ST2 are integrally displayed. Has been. When the notice icon is stocked, the explanation display in the tutorial display section TT4 and the stage name display section ST2 is deleted. In this production example as well, when the super reach is reached, the UI portion frames out below the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It may be left.

  As shown in FIG. 69 (a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI portion surrounded by a square frame is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. The UI section shown in FIG. 69 (a1) has a hold icon display area in the center. The hold icon display area is partitioned by four frames, and one hold icon is displayed in each frame. In addition, a variation icon display area is formed at the center upper portion of the UI unit, and the variation icon is displayed in a manner of being placed on a frame formed by the UI unit. Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 69 (a1), since two variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The change icon h0 and the two hold icons h11 and h12 are both in the default display mode. A tutorial display section TT4 as an explanation display section is arranged on the right side of the hold icon display area, and a stage name display section ST2 is arranged on the left side of the hold icon display area. Since the functional configurations of the tutorial display unit TT4 and the stage name display unit ST2 are the same as those of the tutorial display unit TT1 and the stage name display unit ST1 described above, description thereof is omitted here. In the tutorial display section TT4 shown in FIG. 69 (a1), “With notice icon digestion ...” is displayed, and in the stage name display section ST2, “Castle Town Stage” is displayed. It is reported that the current stage is a castle town. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage is shown, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth graphic of special figures 1 and 2 are also displayed.

  In addition, the above-mentioned family crest character 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned eight-generation character 224Fa and the general character are above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. 224Fb is arranged.

  Subsequently, when a game ball is won at the first special figure starting port 230 at the timing shown in FIG. 69 (a2), the third hold icon (third hold icon h13 in FIG. 1) is displayed in the hold icon display area. ) Is displayed, and it is notified that the number of holds has become three. Here, the third hold is a hold of the symbol variation display that is a target of prefetching. In this effect example, the third hold icon h13 is displayed not in the default display mode but in a display mode of a prefetch notice (for example, a display mode with a blue circle).

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 69 (a3), the first decorative symbol display device 208L stops and displays the first decorative symbol as a combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 1”, and the display result of the deviation. Is confirmed. At this time, the variation icon h0 is not erased, but may be erased. Also, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed with a combination of decorative symbols “decoration 3-decoration 4-decoration 1”.

  Thereafter, the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, and, as shown in FIG. 69 (a4), a throwing animation is performed in the third decorative symbol display device 208N. This throwing animation is the same as the throwing animation shown in FIGS. 62 (e) to (k) and described above.

  In FIG. 69 (a5), after the bomb icon I61 thrown by the Tono-sama character ruptures, the bomb icon I61 that has been ruptured changes to the princess's notice icon I64 and moves to the stage name display section ST2 while being reduced in size. In the timing shown in FIG. 69 (a5), the stage name display portion ST2 is overlapped but the state where the predetermined display position (stock position) has not been reached is shown. . In this case, since the princess's notice icon I64 is not yet displayed in the stage name display part ST2, an explanation display of “castle town stage” is displayed, and at least a part of the princess's notice icon I64 is displayed. It is difficult to see. The explanation display may be deleted before the notice icon overlaps the stage name display part ST2. In the case of the notice icon related to the notice icon symbol CS (see FIG. 64), the explanation display is erased before it overlaps the stage name display section ST2, and the explanation display is based on the trigger for obtaining the notice icon. You may comprise so that the timing which deletes may differ. Further, the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 may be an animation in which the bomb icon moves to the stage name display section. Further, a pattern (so-called gasse) in which the notice icon is not acquired after the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 may be provided. For example, the bomb icon I61 may pass through the stage name display part ST2 so that the notice icon is not acquired. In this case, the explanation display may not be erased even when the bomb icon I61 is overlapped with the stage name display portion ST2 (that is, the explanation display is not erased in the case of a gas pattern, In the true pattern in which the notice icon is acquired, for example, the explanation display may be deleted when the bomb icon I61 is overlaid on the stage name display unit ST2. At the time of this darkening effect, if the UI part is not displayed, at least a part from the start of the bomb icon throwing animation to the acquisition of the notice icon and the gusset is executed while the darkening effect is being executed Specifically, the darkening effect is produced after the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 is started. When the darkening effect is finished and the UI unit is redisplayed, the notice icon is acquired (the explanation display disappears from the explanation display state). At this time, at least one of the sound and the lamp effect may be performed, or both may not be performed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 69 (a6), when the princess's notice icon I64 is displayed at a predetermined display position of the stage name display unit ST2, the “castle town” that has been displayed up to now is displayed on the stage name display unit ST2. The explanation display of “STAGE” is erased and functions exclusively as an area for displaying the notice icon. Therefore, the characters “STOCK” are displayed above the stage name display section ST2. That is, according to this production example, when the notice icon is stocked in the stage name display part ST2, the stage name is not displayed. The scene where the notice icon is digested may be configured to overlap the execution of the darkening effect described above. Further, when the notice icon is acquired, the movable means (for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.) performs an effect of moving, so that the movable means acquires the notice icon. Or at least a part of the already acquired notification icons (such as at least one of the plurality of notification icons, or a part of one notification icon). May be. Further, the moving means performs an effect of moving at least a part of the period from the start to the end of the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61, and at least a part of the explanation display is overlapped by the moving means. Also good. That is, the visibility of the explanation display may be changed by the movable means before the notice icon is displayed, and the visibility of the explanation display may be changed by the notice icon after the notice icon is displayed.

  After that, when the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 elapses, at the timing shown in FIG. 69 (a7), the first decorative design display device 208L has the decorative pattern of “decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2”. The combination is stopped and displayed, and the display result of deviation is confirmed. Also, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as a combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 6-decoration 2—decoration 2”.

  When the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 69 (a8), the hold icons h11 and h12 are respectively moved and displayed by the moving animation, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The hold icon at the position becomes the change icon h0 in the change icon display area, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11. In addition, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 69 (a8) starts the variable display of the first decorative symbol, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M starts the variable display of the second decorative symbol. Is done. Further, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 69 (a8), the stage is changed with the start of the decorative symbol variation display, and the background display is changed from the castle town to the coast. That is, in this production example, the stage can be changed even when the stage name display unit ST2 is not displayed, and the stage name after the change is displayed when the stage name display unit ST2 is not displayed. There is no display. When the stage is changed, the changed stage name may be displayed on the stage name display unit ST2 for a predetermined time, and thereafter, the stage name may be deleted and a notice icon may be displayed.

  FIG. 69 (a9) shows a state in which five notice icons are stocked. That is, a maximum of three notice icons can be displayed on the stage name display section ST2, but when the fourth notice icon is stocked, it is also displayed on the tutorial display section TT4. In this case, the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display section TT4 is erased, and functions exclusively as an area for displaying the notice icon. That is, according to this production example, when the notice icon is stocked in the tutorial display unit TT4, the tutorial display (description display) is not performed. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 69 (a9), first, the princess notice icon I64 and the two pseudo-continuous notice icons I65 are stocked in the stage name display section ST2, and then the tutorial display section. At TT4, a swordsman notice icon I62 and a chance up notice icon I63 are stocked.

  In this example, for example, when the notice icons are digested sequentially from the left side, an animation for changing the display position of the notice icons other than the notice icon to be digested may be performed. Specifically, for example, in the case shown in FIG. 69 (a9), when the princess notice icon I64 is digested, the two pseudo-continuous notice icons I65 move to the left one by one to display the tutorial. The swordsman notice icon I62 displayed on the left side of the part TT4 moves to the rightmost side of the stage name display part ST2, and the chance-up notice icon I63 displayed on the tutorial display part TT4 moves to the left side by one. To do. When the notice icon displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4 moves to the stage name display unit ST2, the visibility of other displays may not be affected by, for example, instantaneous movement.

  When all the notice icons displayed on the tutorial display section TT4 are digested, the explanation display is resumed on the tutorial display section TT4, and all the notice icons displayed on the stage name display section ST2 are digested. In this case, the display of the stage name is resumed in the stage name display unit ST2. Note that the explanation display and the stage name display need not be resumed. The explanation display may be resumed within the same variation display as that of the symbol variation display in which the notice icon is digested (for example, resumed after super-reach). Further, when the explanation display is resumed, the same display may be resumed, or may be resumed from the display of a different part in the telop (scroll) display.

  Further, the kind of notice icon displayed on the tutorial display section TT4 and the kind of notice icon displayed on the stage name display section ST2 may be determined in advance. In this case, when the notice icon is digested, other notice icons may not be moved.

  In addition, the execution time of the animation for changing the display position of the notice icon may be the same as the execution time of the hold icon movement animation, may be shorter than the execution time of the hold icon movement animation, It may be longer than the execution time of the icon movement animation.

  Also, in this production example, when the notice icon is stocked, it is first stocked on the stage name display part ST2, and when the number of stocks is 3, the notice icon to be stocked after that is displayed in the tutorial display part. Although it is possible to stock up to three more in TT4, when the number of stocks is first stocked in the tutorial display section TT4 and the number of stocks is three, the notice icon to be stocked thereafter is further added to the stage name display section ST2. Up to two stocks may be configured.

  Also, in this effect example, a part of the notice icon is displayed on the stage name display part ST2 and the tutorial display part TT4 before the notice icon completely fits on the stage name display part ST2 and the tutorial display part TT4. In the state), the explanation display may be displayed or may not be displayed. Further, immediately after the notice icon is completely accommodated in the stage name display part ST2 and the tutorial display part TT4, the explanation display may be displayed or may not be displayed. Further, immediately after the notice icon starts to be moved upward, the explanation display may or may not be displayed. Further, the explanation display is displayed before the notice icon completely fits in the stage name display section ST2 and the tutorial display section TT4, and the explanation display is displayed immediately after the notice icon starts to move upward when digesting the notice icon. It may not be done.

  Further, in this effect example, the above-described example shown in FIG. 62 is referred to as an example of the throwing animation, but it is needless to say that the modes shown in other drawings can be combined.

  Further, in the embodiments described so far and in the embodiments described below, there may be a display area dedicated to the notice icon to be digested from now on, such as a variable icon display area.

  Also, the notice icons need not be displayed in the order in which they are digested. For example, a plurality of notice icons may be digested in a tooth-like manner, and other notice icons may be moved so as to be filled in empty places. Good or not moving.

  In addition, each starting port can be divided into a first special figure winning port and a second special figure winning port, and so-called MAX8 machines (8 In some cases, the reservation icon display area is prepared in advance with four hold areas, and when there are four hold areas, the display area expands to five. Or you may enlarge up to eight. At this time, for example, the enlarged hold icon display area may be displayed in the tutorial display area TT4 or the stage name display section ST2, and the explanation display may be hidden.

  69 (b1) to FIG. 69 (b2) show a state where the stock notice icons are digested.

  As shown in FIG. 69 (b1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a chance-up notice icon I63 is displayed on the stage name display section ST2. Note that both the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are in a variable display.

  Thereafter, when the chance-up notice icon I63 is consumed, the chance-up notice icon I63 moves upward as shown in FIG. 68 (b2). In this production example, even if the chance-up notice icon I63 moves from the display position on the stage name display part ST2, if at least a part of the notice icon overlaps the stage name display part ST2, an explanation display is provided. The display of the stage name has not been resumed. The same applies to the tutorial display section TT4. Note that the display of the stage name may be resumed immediately after the notice icon moves from the display position in the stage name display section ST2.

  FIG. 70 is a diagram showing another example of effects according to the present embodiment step by step.

  As shown in FIG. 70 (a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI part is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and a fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center of the UI part. On the left side of the variation icon h0, a hold icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 70 (a1), since two variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the change icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 are both in the default display mode, but the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the display mode of the pre-reading notice. Further, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0. In the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 70 (a1), “With notice icon digestion ...” is displayed. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 70 (a1), “castle town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. In addition, on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

  The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth graphic of special figures 1 and 2 are also displayed.

  In addition, the above-mentioned family crest character 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned eight-generation character 224Fa and general character 224Fb are above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Is arranged.

  FIGS. 70A1 to 70A3 illustrate how the display mode of the UI unit changes depending on the stage.

  FIG. 70 (a1) shows the state of the castle town stage. In addition, about the display mode of this castle town stage, since it is the same as the mode shown by Fig.62 (a), description is abbreviate | omitted.

  FIG. 70 (a2) shows the state of the space stage. The first decorative symbol display device 208L on the space stage is different from the castle town stage described above in that a UI part is formed on the lower left side of the display screen. In other words, the UI part in the space stage has a variation icon display area arranged at the lower center of the display screen, the variation icon h0 is displayed on the pedestal, and a hold icon is displayed on the left side of the variation icon display area. The area and the tutorial display area TT1 are arranged vertically. In addition, the display position of the stocked notice icon is the same as the display position of the notice icon in the castle town stage described above with reference to FIG. The hold icon display area has a display mode in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 70 (a2), since three variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, three hold icons h11, h12, and h13 are displayed in the hold icon display area. In addition, the display mode of the change icon h0 and the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 on the space stage is a pentagon unlike the display mode of the change icon and the hold icon on the castle town stage. In the default display mode, for example, The white pentagon display mode, and the pre-read notice display mode is, for example, a blue pentagon display mode. At the timing shown in FIG. 70 (a2), the change icon h0, the first hold icon h11, and the second hold icon h12 are in the default display mode, and the third hold icon h13 is the display mode of the prefetch notice. It has become. In the tutorial display area TT1 arranged below the hold icon display area, “Panda is a master of the lord” is displayed. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed. As described above, in the space stage, the display position of the notice icon is different from the display position of the tutorial display area TT1, so that the tutorial display area TT1 is not overlapped by the notice icon.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed at the top of the display screen.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage is shown, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth graphic of special figures 1 and 2 are also displayed.

  FIG. 70 (a3) shows a state immediately after the transition from the other stage to the castle town stage. As shown in FIG. 70 (a3), in the tutorial display area TT1, the explanation display is hidden immediately after the transition to the castle town stage, and the non-display state is maintained until a new explanation display is performed. Is done. As shown in FIG. 70 (a3), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the swordsman notice icon I62 overlaps the tutorial display area TT1 in the non-display state. An explanation display may be displayed in the tutorial display area TT1 immediately after the stage transition. In addition, when the tutorial display area TT1 is not displayed in a certain stage (for example, the castle town stage), when a transition is made to another stage (for example, the space stage), an explanation is displayed in the tutorial display area TT1 in the stage after the transition. May be displayed.

  FIGS. 70 (b1) to (b2) show how the tutorial display area TT1 is erased when the tutorial display area TT1 is arranged on the third decorative symbol display device 208N and the notice icon is stocked. Has been.

  As shown in FIG. 70 (b1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the UI part is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and the fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center of this UI part. On the left side of the variation icon h0, a hold icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 70 (b1), since two variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The change icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 of the two hold icons are in the default display mode, but the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the display mode of the pre-reading notice. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 70 (b1), “castle town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. In addition, on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged below the display screen, and “Indicate the notice icon ...” is displayed. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth graphic of special figures 1 and 2 are also displayed.

  In such a configuration, for example, as shown in FIG. 70 (b2), when the button icon IBT is stocked, it is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The tutorial display portion TT1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208N is deleted. Here, a plurality of button icons IBT can be stocked. For example, the button icon IBT is an icon for informing in advance the number of times that an effect of operating a button during a specific effect is generated. It can be said that the reliability for the big hit is high, that is, the larger the number of stocks of the button icons IBT, the easier the big hit.

  Thus, according to this production example, when the notice icon is displayed, it can be said that other display is sacrificed.

  FIG. 71 is a diagram showing step-by-step examples of other presentation icon increase effects that can be applied to the present embodiment. FIG. 71 shows another production example using the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the above-mentioned Tono-sama character.

  71 (a1) to (a6) show how the notice icons already stocked change due to the throwing animation.

  As shown in FIG. 71 (a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI part is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and the fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal at the center of this UI part. On the left side of the variation icon h0, a hold icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 71 (a1), since two variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the change icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 are both in the default display mode, but the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the display mode of the prefetch notice. Further, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the change icon h0, and “Toshi-sama is a Yatsushiro general” is displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 71 (a1). Further, as shown in FIG. 71 (a1), a hatena notice icon I66 is displayed (stocked) so as to overlap the front side of the tutorial display section TT1. Hatena's notice icon I66 is an icon that may change to another notice icon before it is time to be digested, but it does not change to another notice icon and nothing happens when digested. It may function as a notice icon. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 71 (a1), “castle town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. In addition, on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

  The third decorative symbol display device 208N shows a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth graphic of special figures 1 and 2 are also displayed.

  In addition, the above-mentioned family crest character 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned eight-generation character 224Fa and general character 224Fb are above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Is arranged.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 71 (a2), in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the animation of throwing the bomb icon I61 by the Tono-sama character is started, and the Tono-sama character tries to throw the bomb icon I61. Has been.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 71 (a3), a state in which the Tono-sama character throws the bomb icon I61 is shown.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 71 (a4), the bomb icon I61 is displayed so as to move from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this time, in the tutorial display section TT1, what was displayed as “Tosama is Yatsushiro Shogun” has been changed to “With notice icon digestion ...”.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 71 (a5), the bomb icon I61 thrown by the Tono-sama character reaches the warning icon I66 of Hatena and bursts. At this time, an effect image indicating that the bomb icon I61 has exploded is superimposed on the front side of the Hatena notice icon I66, and at least a part of the Hatena notice icon I66 is difficult to view. Note that the size of the effect image of the ruptured bomb icon I61 is large enough to cover at least the Hatena notice icon I66. That is, the effect image is applied only to the notice icon that is the change target.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 71 (a6), the effect image of the ruptured bomb icon I61 is deleted, and Hatena's notice icon I66 is changed to a swordsman notice icon I62. Then, a voice “Paquin” is output from the speaker 120, and it is notified that Hatena's notice icon I66 has been changed to a swordsman notice icon I62. At this time, the swordsman's notice icon I62 overlaps at a position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display section TT1, and therefore at least a part of the explanation display of the tutorial display section TT1 may be difficult to see. In addition, in the tutorial display part TT1 shown in FIG. 71 (a6), what was displayed as “with the notice icon digestion ...” has been changed to “swordsman is the enemy of the lord”. Note that the timing of changing the explanation display of the tutorial display unit TT1 may be the same as the timing at which the display of the swordsman notice icon I62 is started, or from the timing at which the display of the swordsman notice icon I62 is started. May be the previous timing, or may be a timing later than the timing when the display of the swordsman notice icon I62 is started. Thus, it can be said that a part of the stock effect of the notice item is the same as at least a part of the change effect of the notice icon that has been stocked.

  71 (b1) to 71 (b3) show how the notice icons already stocked are changed by the throwing animation. 71 (b1) is the same as FIG. 71 (a4), and FIG. 71 (b3) is the same as FIG. 71 (a6). Therefore, description of these drawings is omitted. In the tutorial display area TT1 in FIG. 71 (b3), “With notice icon digestion ...” is displayed.

  After the performance shown in FIG. 71 (b1) is performed, as shown in FIG. 71 (b2), the bomb icon I61 thrown by the Tono-sama character reaches Hatena's notice icon I66 and bursts. At this time, an effect image indicating that the bomb icon I61 has exploded is displayed overlapping the front side of the tutorial display portion TT1 so as to cover substantially the entire tutorial display portion TT1. As a result, at least a part of Hatena's notice icon I66 and tutorial display portion TT1 is difficult to see, and the overlapping range is larger than the effect image shown in FIG. 71 (a5). If a plurality of notice icons are stocked, they may be overlapped with all the notice icons. Thus, it can be said that a part of the stock effect of the notice item is the same as at least a part of the change effect of the notice icon that has been stocked.

  FIG. 71 (c1) to FIG. 71 (c3) show how the notice icons already stocked change due to the throwing animation. 71 (c1) is the same as FIG. 71 (b1), and FIG. 71 (c2) is the same as FIG. 71 (b2). Therefore, description of these drawings is omitted.

  After the bomb icon I61 ruptures at the timing shown in FIG. 71 (c2), as shown in FIG. 71 (c3), the effect image of the bombed icon I61 is erased, and Hatena's notice icon I66 becomes the swordsman's notice. The icon changes to an icon I62 and a chance-up notice icon I63. That is, one notice icon is changed to two notice icons. In other words, it can be said that the change of the notice icon and the stock of the new notice icon are simultaneously performed by one throwing animation. In this way, it can be said that a part of the stock effect of the advance notice item is the same as at least a part of the effect of changing the stock advance notice icon and stocking the new advance notice icon.

  71 (d1) to (d3) show how the display mode of the hold icon changes due to the throwing animation. Since FIG. 71 (d1) is the same as FIG. 71 (a4), description of this drawing is omitted.

  After the performance shown in FIG. 71 (d1) is performed, as shown in FIG. 71 (d2), the bomb icon I61 thrown by the Tono-sama character is displayed on the second hold icon h12 which is the display mode of the pre-reading notice. Reach and burst. At this time, an effect image indicating that the bomb icon I61 has exploded is superimposed on the front side of the second hold icon h12, and at least a part of the second hold icon h12 is difficult to view. The size of the effect image of the ruptured bomb icon I61 is large enough to cover at least the second hold icon h12. That is, the effect image is applied only to the hold icon that is the change target.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 71 (d3), the effect image of the bomb icon I61 that has been ruptured is deleted, and the display mode of the second hold icon h12 changes (for example, the display mode changes from blue to red). )doing. Then, a sound “Pong” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the display mode of the hold icon h12 has changed. Thus, it can be said that a part of the stock effect of the notice item is the same as at least a part of the change effect of the display mode of the hold icon.

  In this way, in the effect example shown in FIG. 71, at least a part of the animation at the time of obtaining the notice icon is the same as a part of the other animation. For example, when display is performed across a plurality of decorative symbol display devices (for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the third decorative symbol display device 208N), a certain decorative symbol display device (for example, a third decorative symbol display device) The same is true for animations performed on the display device 208N).

  FIG. 72 is a diagram showing, in a stepwise manner, another example of a notice icon increase effect applicable to the present embodiment.

  72 (a1) to FIG. 72 (a7) show a state in which the fact that the mission has been achieved is displayed by displaying the fact that a specific notice icon has been stocked. 72 (a1) to FIG. 72 (a3) are the same as FIG. 62 (h) to FIG. 62 (j), and description thereof will be omitted.

  After the performance shown in FIG. 72 (a3) is performed, the throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the Tono-sama character ends as shown in FIG. 72 (a4). As shown in FIG. 72 (a4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an achievement display unit KM1 serving as an explanation display unit for notifying that a specific effect has been performed is provided above the tutorial display unit TT1. It is displayed. The achievement display section KM1 displays “swordsman stock” indicating that the swordsman notice icon I62 has been stocked. In other words, when a mission to acquire the swordsman's notice icon I62 is imposed, when the swordsman's notice icon I62 is stocked, the achievement display unit KM1 displays that fact to notify the achievement of the mission. be able to. Alternatively, for example, the achievement display unit KM1 is displayed to explicitly notify that the notice icon I62 of the swordsman who predicts that an effect with an extremely high expectation level for the big hit will be performed. Also good. Note that the timing at which the achievement display unit KM1 is displayed may be at the same time as the end of the throwing animation, may be before the end of the throwing animation, or after the end of the throwing animation. It may be timing. Since the achievement display unit KM1 is displayed in the vicinity of the stock swordsman notice icon I62, the achievement display unit KM1 may be noticed in some cases. Note that the notice icon to be stocked may be displayed in an overlapping manner on the achievement display unit KM1.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 72 (a5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, “decoration C” as the notice icon symbol CS is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and “decoration 1-decoration C—decoration” is displayed. 6 ”is temporarily stopped and displayed with the combination of decorative symbols. Note that the fluctuation icon h0 is erased here, but may be displayed.

  As described above, when the notice icon symbol CS is derived and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, as shown in FIGS. 72 (a6) to (a7), a notice icon I63 indicating a chance up is displayed from the notice icon symbol CS. It jumps out toward the display position on the right side of the notice icon I62 of the swordsman in the tutorial display section TT1. At the timing shown in FIG. 72 (a6), the chance-up notice icon I63 overlaps the front side of the achievement display section KM1, making it difficult to see at least part of the explanation display on the achievement display section KM1.

  In this production example, for example, when the display position of the notice icon is predetermined by the type of the notice icon when the notice icon is stocked, the achievement display unit KM1 depends on the kind of the notice icon to be digested. You may make it eliminate the overlap to. Further, for example, when a plurality of notice icons are stocked, and the notice icons are digested, the remaining notice icons are moved so as to be aligned at a predetermined interval. When the predetermined number of notice icons is consumed, the overlap of the notice icon with the achievement display section KM1 may be eliminated.

  In FIG. 72 (b1) to FIG. 72 (b3), for example, examples of the operation modes of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N that operate when developing to a super reach or a big hit are shown. It is shown.

  FIG. 72 (b1) shows a state where super reach is performed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 72 (b1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a background screen of super reach is displayed, and a variation icon h0 is displayed at the lower center of the display screen. . Note that, as described above, the UI unit is out-of-frame at the time of super reach. Therefore, the display position of the variation icon h0 is lower than when the UI unit is displayed. In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed at the top of the display screen. In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the variation display of the first decorative symbol is performed at the upper part of the display screen. The 4th symbol is also displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 72 (b2), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N slide along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L toward each other. Moving. At this time, for example, when the tutorial display unit TT1 is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, at least a part of it overlaps the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. There is a case. According to this, due to the phenomenon that the movable operation and the explanation display by the decorative symbol display device are hidden, there is a case where the explanation display can be focused while giving a sense of expectation for the big hit.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 72 (b3), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N adjacent to each other are integrated along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Rotated 90 degrees clockwise. The variation icon h0 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed on the left end of the display screen across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and has a square shape. An image with the characters “celebration” in the frame is also displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Further, in the third decorative symbol display unit 208N, the second reserved number display of Special Fig. 1 and Special Fig. 2 and the fourth symbol of Special Fig. 1 and Special Fig. 2 are displayed in the lower right corner of the display screen. In addition, as shown in FIG. 72 (b3), the family crest member 224E arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L moves upward to over the lower center of the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Wrapped and the Yatsushiro character 224Fa and the general character 224Fb arranged above the first decorative symbol display device 208L move downward and overlap the upper end portion of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. At this time, for example, when the tutorial display unit TT1 is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, at least a part of it overlaps the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. There is a case. Further, when the tutorial display unit TT1 is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, it may be overlapped with the Yatsushiro character 224Fa and the general character 224Fb. In addition, when the tutorial display unit TT1 is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it may be overlapped with the family crest character 224E. According to this, there is a case in which the explanation display can be focused while giving a sense of expectation for the big hit due to the phenomenon in which the movable operation and the explanation display by the decorative symbol display device or the effect movable body are hidden.

  72 (c1) to FIG. 72 (c4), the button image 136a is displayed constantly or at least for a certain period on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the display state of the button image 136a is changed to change the effect button 136. A state of notifying the state is shown.

  FIG. 72 (c1) shows a state in which a duel scene animation is performed in the swordsman reach. FIG. 72 (c1) corresponds to FIG. 63 (d), but the stage name display unit ST1 is displayed not at the second decorative symbol display device 208M but at the upper left corner of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The difference is that the button image 136a is displayed below the second decorative symbol display device 208M at all times or at least for a certain period. The button image 136a displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M is displayed in a normal state (default display state).

  In FIG. 72 (c2), the duel scene animation continues. At the timing shown in FIG. 72 (c2), the second decorative symbol display device 208L displays a button reception time meter and a button image. The display mode 136a is displayed in a display mode that prompts the user to press the effect button 136. This display notifies the player that the acceptance of the operation of the effect button 136 has started, and promotes the player to operate the effect button 136. At this time, the chance button lamp 138 built in the effect button 136 emits light in a light emission mode (for example, red light emission) indicating that the operation is being accepted.

  Thereafter, when the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 72 (c3), as shown in FIG. 72 (c4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, “I will go” A cut-in image to which the character display “Ze” is added is displayed superimposed on the animation display of the duel scene. On the other hand, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the button image 136a is changed to the default display mode, assuming that the operation valid period of the effect button 136 has ended. In this production example, with the above-described configuration, for example, when the operation of the above-described button notice icon (the first button notice icon I4 or the second button notice icon I11) becomes valid, as described above. In some cases, the player can be prompted to operate the effect button 136.

  FIG. 72 (d) shows an example of a notice icon applicable in this embodiment. For example, in addition to the above-mentioned Hatena notice icon I66, pseudo-continuous notice icon I65, chance up notice icon I63, princess notice icon I64, swordsman notice icon I62, hold promotion notice icon I67, chance eye notice icon I68 A panda notice icon I69 is prepared. Here, the advance notice icon I67 for holding promotion is an icon for notifying that the display form of the hold icon or the change icon is changed to a display form with higher reliability for the big hit when digested. The pseudo-continuous notice icon is an icon for notifying that a pseudo-continuous effect will be performed when digested. Further, the chance eye notice icon I68 is an icon for notifying that the chance eye is derived as a display result of the decorative symbol when digested. In addition, the princess notice icon is an icon for notifying that a transition to the look-ahead zone is made upon digestion. In addition, the panda notice icon I69 is an icon that, when digested, gives an announcement that a panda will intrude and that it will be a big hit (definite).

  FIG. 73 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the notice icon and the tutorial display.

  FIGS. 73 (a1) to (a7) show a state in which an explanation display (for example, a display of “Swordsman is Tokusama's nemesis”) displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 is scrolled. In addition, the tutorial display part TT1 shown in FIG. 73 is overlapped with the notice icon I62 of the swordsman on the left side.

  FIG. 73 (a1) shows a state before the start of the scroll display of the explanation display.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 73 (a2), when the scrolling of the explanation display is started, the display of “Swordsman is Tokusama's nemesis” is sequentially scrolled in from the right side of the tutorial display section TT1. At the timing shown in FIG. 73 (a2), only the “swordsman is” scrolled in, and at the timing shown in FIG. 73 (a3), only the “swordsman is Tono-sama” portion is scrolled in. Yes. In these cases, since no character overlaps the swordsman's notice icon I62, the explanation display may be clearly recognized.

  Thereafter, when the timing shown in FIG. 73 (a4) is reached, the entire character “Swordsman is Tonen-sama's nemesis” is displayed. In this case, at least the character part of “swordsman” is overlapped with the notice icon I62 of the swordsman, and at least a part of the explanation display is in a state where it is difficult to see.

  Next, at the timing shown in FIG. 73 (a5), the “Swordsman is” scrolls out from the left side of the tutorial display area TT1, and the “I am the enemy of Tono-sama” part is displayed in the tutorial display area TT1. . In this case, at least the character portion of “Tono-sama” is overlapped with the notice icon I62 of the swordsman, and at least a part of the explanation display is in a state where it is difficult to see.

  Next, at the timing shown in FIG. 73 (a6), the “Swordsman is Tono-sama” part is scrolled out from the left side of the tutorial display part TT1, and the “Is the enemy” part is displayed on the tutorial display part TT1. . In this case, at least the character part of “At the enemy” is overlapped with the notice icon I62 of the swordsman, and at least a part of the explanation display is in a state where it is difficult to see.

  Subsequently, at the timing shown in FIG. 73 (a7), the scrolling of the explanation display is finished. Thus, in this effect example, the character overlapped by the notice icon changes over time by scrolling the explanation display. In addition, scrolling the explanation display causes a period in which the explanation display is overlapped by the notice icon and a period in which the explanation display is not overlapped. Note that when the scrolling of the explanation display is repeated, these periods also occur repeatedly.

  73 (b1) to FIG. 73 (b7) show another display in the tutorial display section TT1 during the scroll display of the explanation display (for example, the display of “Swordsman is Tokusama's nemesis”) displayed in the tutorial display section TT1. A state in which the display (for example, a notice display of “extreme heat”) is performed is shown. 73 (b1) to FIG. 73 (b3) and FIG. 73 (b6) to FIG. 73 (b7) are respectively the same as FIG. 73 (a1) to FIG. 73 (a3) and FIG. 73 (a6) to FIG. Since it is the same as FIG. (A7), detailed description is omitted.

  After the explanation display is performed in the mode shown in FIG. 73 (b3), as shown in FIGS. 73 (b4) to 73 (b5), the tutorial display unit TT1 displays the notice. For the advance notice display, the background color of the tutorial display section TT1 is changed to red, and the letters “Intense heat” are displayed, thereby performing the advance notice display and the pre-read notice display in the symbol variation display. The scrolling display of the explanation display is interrupted during the preview display. For example, the above-described notice display may overlap the explanation display to make the explanation display difficult to view, or the display may be switched from the scroll display of the explanation display to the notice display.

  Thereafter, when the notice display ends, the scroll display of the explanation display resumes as shown in FIG. 73 (b6). The scroll display of the explanation display is progressing in the background even during the period in which the notice display is performed, and the display mode of the explanation display when the display of the explanation display is resumed is the display after progressing in the background. It is an aspect. The display mode of the explanation display at the time when the display of the explanation display is resumed may be the display mode at the time of interruption. Thereafter, when the timing shown in FIG. 73 (b7) is reached, the scrolling display of the explanation display ends. Note that the explanation display has been described as an example in which the scroll display of the explanation display is interrupted and displayed, but the scroll display of the explanation display may be interrupted by a display other than the notice display.

  FIG. 73 (c1) to FIG. 73 (c5) are explanatory displays (for example, “Swordsman is Tokusama's nemesis”) displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 in a state where a plurality of notice icons are stocked. During the display, it is shown that other notice icons move as some notice icons are consumed.

  In FIG. 73 (c1), a chance-up notice icon I63 which is a notice icon scheduled to be digested first and a swordsman notice icon I62 which is a second notice icon scheduled to be digested are a chance-up notice icon I63. The swordsman notice icon I62 is arranged side by side on the right side of the tutorial display portion TT1 on the left side. Therefore, a part of the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is in a state where it is difficult to visually recognize.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 73 (c2), when the chance up notice icon I63 is digested, the swordsman notice icon I62 is up as shown in FIGS. 73 (c3) to (c5). The notice icon moving animation for moving to the position where the notice icon I63 is displayed is performed. Thus, after the overlap range of the tutorial display unit TT1 by the swordsman's notice icon I62 changes over time, the overlap state is released, and the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is easily visible. There is a case. That is, in this effect example, depending on the number of stocked notice icons, the notice icons may or may not overlap the tutorial display part TT1. When the explanation display is scroll-displayed in the tutorial display section TT1, the notice icon moving display in the notice icon moving animation may overlap the explanation display scroll display.

  FIG. 74 is a diagram showing, in a stepwise manner, another example of a notice icon increase effect applicable to the present embodiment. In the example of production shown in FIG. 74, when the notice icon is stocked, the stock notice icon is displayed in an enlarged manner.

  As shown in FIG. 74A, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows a state in which the UI unit UI1 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen. The UI unit UI1 has a hold icon display area on the left side where four hold icons can be displayed in a substantially rectangular display frame, and four notice icons are displayed in a substantially square display frame on the upper right side. A notice icon display area that can be displayed on the right is formed in the upper right, and a tutorial display section TT5 is formed below the notice icon display area. The variable icon display area is displayed at a position above the UI unit UI1 and close to the hold icon display area. More specifically, the variable icon display area is arranged above the display frame in which the first hold icon h11 is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 74 (a), since three variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, three hold icons h11, h12, and h13 are displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the variable icon h0, the first hold icon h11, and the second hold icon h12 are all in the default display mode, but the third hold icon h13 is displayed in the display mode of the pre-reading notice. Yes. Also, in the tutorial display section TT5 shown in FIG. 74 (a), “Tono is a Yatsushiro general” is displayed. In addition, two pseudo-continuous notice icons I65 are stocked in the notice icon display area shown in FIG. 74 (a), both of which are referred to as a normal display form (in this production example, “first display form”). It may be displayed in (). In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed. Here, since the notice icon of the normal display mode displayed in the notice icon display area is located at a position separated from the display area of the decorative design, it does not overlap with the decorative design, and the decorative design is also displayed. Do not overlap. In addition, the notice icon of the normal display mode may be overlapped with the decorative design, or the decorative design may be overlapped.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 74 (a), “castle town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. In addition, a button image 136a is displayed in a default display form above the stage name display section ST1, and the display form is changed when an operation of the effect button 136 is instructed. The button image 136a may be displayed constantly, or there may be a period during which it is not displayed. In addition, on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage is shown, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth graphic of special figures 1 and 2 are also displayed.

  In addition, the above-mentioned family crest character 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned eight-generation character 224Fa and the general character are above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. 224Fb is arranged.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 74 (b), in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the Tono-sama character is started, and the Tono-sama character tries to throw the bomb icon I61. Has been.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 74 (c), a state in which Tono-sama character throws a bomb icon I61 is shown.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 74 (d), display is performed so that the bomb icon I61 moves from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Note that the bomb icon I61 overlaps with the decorative symbol that is displayed in a variable manner, but the bomb icon I61 may overlap the decorative symbol that is displayed as a variable symbol.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 74 (e), the bomb icon I61 thrown by the Tono-sama character reaches the display frame in which the third notice icon in the notice icon display area is stocked and bursts. At this time, the effect image representing the explosion of the bomb icon I61 overlaps the display frame in which the third notice icon in the notice icon display area is stocked, and the third notice icon in the notice icon display area is stocked. At least part of the displayed display frame is difficult to view. The size of the effect image of the ruptured bomb icon I61 is large enough to cover at least the display frame in which the third notice icon in the notice icon display area is stocked. This notifies the user that the third notice icon will be stocked. In the example shown in FIG. 74 (e), the effect image of the bomb icon I61 is adjacent to a part of the character display displayed in the tutorial display section TT5 and the display frame of the hold display area where the bomb icon I61 has exploded. If the display frame to be displayed and the notice icon are stocked in the display frame, the display icon overlaps the notice icon.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 74 (f), the effect image of the ruptured bomb icon I61 is enlarged, and the display mode is changed to a flame effect EF1 that covers the entire UI unit UI1 with flame. For this reason, the change icon h0, the hold icons h11, h12, h13 and the tutorial display part TT5 are also difficult to view together with the notice icon displayed on the UI part UI1. At this time, the UI unit UI1 may be hidden, or the UI unit UI1 may be displayed and the entire UI unit UI1 may be overlapped by the flame effect EF1. Further, the flame effect EF1 may cover only a part of the UI part UI1, make it possible to visually recognize at least part of the change icon h0, the hold icons h11, h12, h13 and the tutorial display part TT5. It may be difficult to see only.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 74 (g), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a notice icon enlargement animation is started. That is, at the timing shown in FIG. 74 (g), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the notice icon display frame YF formed by extracting the notice icon display area formed in the UI unit UI1 is a flame effect. A state of appearance from EF1 is displayed. At this time, in the notice icon display frame YF, two pseudo-continuous notice icons I65 are displayed in a display frame in which the first notice icon is stocked and a display frame in which the second notice icon is stocked. In the display frame in which the third notice icon is stocked, a swordsman notice icon I62 is newly displayed to notify that the swordsman notice icon I62 has been stocked. At the timing shown in FIG. 74 (g), the notice icon display frame YF is displayed larger than the notice icon display area formed in the UI unit UI1, and the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display frame YF is These are enlarged and displayed with respect to the normal display mode in accordance with the size of the notice icon display frame YF. Thereby, the player may be able to easily recognize that the swordsman notice icon I62 has been stocked.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 74 (h), the notice icon display frame YF moves toward the center of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L and is further enlarged and displayed. A part of the left side of the display frame in which the icons are stocked and a part of the right side of the display frame in which the fourth notice icon is stocked are displayed so as to be outside the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The In addition, the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display frame YF are further enlarged and displayed in accordance with the size of the notice icon display frame YF. This makes it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the pseudo-continuous notice icon I65 displayed in the display frame in which the first notice icon is stocked. Furthermore, at the timing shown in FIG. 74 (h), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208 overlap the front sides of the left and right ends of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208, respectively. Therefore, a part of the notice icon display frame YF displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is further difficult to view. That is, it can be said that at least a part of the pseudo-continuous notice icon I65 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and is difficult to view. In addition, the notice icon display frame YF is displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the decorative symbol being displayed in a variable manner, so that it may be easier to understand that the notice icon has been stocked. In other words, it can be said that the notice icon displayed in an enlarged manner may overlap the decorative design. Note that the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display frame YF may be displayed so as to overlap the decorative design. Also, in this effect example, when an effect in which the notice icon is stocked is performed, the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display frame is displayed with priority over other indications (for example, notice display) (overlapping). However, the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display frame may be overlapped with another notice display.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 74 (i), the notice icon display frame YF is enlarged to the maximum size, and the notice icon enlargement animation ends. A display frame in which a third notice icon with a swordsman notice icon I62 is displayed is displayed in the approximate center of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The notice icon displayed in the notice icon display frame YF is also enlarged and displayed up to the maximum size. That is, the stocked swordsman notice icon I62 and the already stocked pseudo-continuous notice icon I65 are displayed in an enlarged display form (in this production example, “ It may be referred to as “second display mode”). At this time, a part of the display frame in which the second notice icon adjacent to the display frame in which the third notice icon is stocked and a part of the display frame in which the fourth notice icon is stocked are displayed. Are displayed so as to be outside the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. As a result, at least part of the pseudo-continuous notice icon I65 displayed in the display frame in which the second notice icon is stocked is difficult to view. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 74 (i), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208 overlap the front sides of the left and right end portions of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208, respectively. Therefore, a part of the notice icon display frame YF displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is further difficult to view. That is, at least a part of the pseudo-continuous notice icon I65 in the display frame in which the second notice icon displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is stocked is overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and visually recognized. It can be said that it is difficult. Furthermore, in other words, it can be said that a part of the already stocked pseudo-continuous notice icon I65 is visible in a state where the third notice icon is in an enlarged display mode. In addition, since the display frame in which the first notice icon is stocked is entirely outside the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is displayed in the display frame in which the first notice icon is stocked. The pseudo-continuous notice icon I65 is not displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 74 (j), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the notice icon reduction animation is started. That is, at the timing shown in FIG. 74 (j), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the notice icon display frame YF is reduced and the notice icon display area formed in the UI unit UI1 is displayed. The display that moves toward is done. In addition, the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display frame YF are also reduced and displayed in accordance with the size of the notice icon display frame YF. At this time, the entire display frame in which the second notice icon is stocked is completely displayed within the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. That is, the pseudo-continuous notice icon I65 displayed in the display frame in which the second notice icon is stocked is completely displayed, and is easily visible. Further, a part of the display frame in which the first notice icon is stocked is within the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the pseudo-continuous displayed in the display frame in which the first notice icon is stocked. A part of the notice icon I65 is visible. That is, in this effect example, in the notice icon reduction animation, the notice icon outside the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is gradually visible. In other words, it can be said that the number of notice icons that can be visually recognized is increased by the notice icon reduction animation.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 74 (k), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the reduced animation of the notice icon display frame YF continues. That is, at the timing shown in FIG. 74 (k), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the notice icon display frame YF is further reduced, and the notice icon display area formed in the UI unit UI1 is displayed. The display that moves toward is done. In addition, the notice icons displayed in the notice icon display frame YF are also reduced and displayed in accordance with the size of the notice icon display frame YF. At this time, the notice icon display frame YF is entirely within the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the notice icons (two pseudo-continuous notice icons I65 and I65) displayed in the notice icon display frame YF are displayed. All the swordsman notice icons I62) are visible. That is, it can be said that although the preview icon displayed in the preview icon display frame YF is displayed in an enlarged manner with respect to the normal display mode, all of the preview icons are visible.

  Thereafter, the notice icon reduction animation ends at the timing shown in FIG. That is, as shown in FIG. 74 (l), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the notice icon display frame YF is erased and the flame effect EF1 overlapped with the notice icon display frame YF is also erased. UI part UI1 is displayed again. At this time, the notice icon display area shows that the swordsman notice icon I62 is stocked in addition to the two pseudo-continuous notice icons I65. Also, in the tutorial display section TT5, what was displayed as "Tono-sama is a general of Yatsushiro" has been changed to "Panda is a master of Tosama". Here, after the notice icon display frame YF is erased, the flame effect EF1 may be erased, or after the flame effect EF1 is erased, the notice icon display frame YF may be erased. The icon display frame YF and the flame effect EF1 may be erased simultaneously. Further, the display change of the tutorial display section TT5 may be a timing before the flame effect EF1 is erased or may be a timing after the flame effect EF1 is erased. Moreover, the display change of the tutorial display part TT5 does not need to be performed. Further, the change icon and the hold icon may be displayed at a timing between the timing shown in FIG. 74 (k) and the timing shown in FIG. 74 (l). In this case, a configuration may be adopted in which the increase in the number of holdings is firmly reflected.

  In this production example, the case where the third notice icon is stocked has been described. For example, when the first notice icon is stocked, when the notice icon enlargement animation described above ends, Since the display frame in which the first notice icon in the notice icon display frame YF is stocked is the center of the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the left end portion of the notice icon display frame YF is visible, In the area on the left side of the left end portion of the notice icon display frame YF in the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the background display appears. In this case, since there is no notice icon that is outside the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, no notice icon that is difficult to view is generated.

  In this example, when the notice icon is stocked, the notice icon enlargement animation and the notice icon reduction animation are performed to produce the notice icon stock. For example, a flame effect EF1 is displayed. After that, the notice icon display frame YF may be displayed as shown in FIG. 74 (i) without passing through the notice icon enlargement animation. After the display as shown in i), the UI part UI1 is displayed as shown in FIG. 74 (l) without the notice icon reduction animation, and the notice icon stocked this time is added to the hold icon display area. May be displayed.

  Moreover, in this production example, the stocked notice icon is displayed in the normal display mode by the reduced animation after being enlarged and displayed. For example, the notice icon is digested in the state of being enlarged and displayed. In some cases, the notice icon may be digested without being displayed in a normal display mode.

  Also, in this production example, when the notice icon is stocked, the notice icon enlargement animation is performed to display the stock notice icon in an enlarged manner. The notice icon to be digested is enlarged (displayed in the second display mode) and then digested, or the digest icon is enlarged (displayed in the second display form) when digested. You may do it.

  Further, in this effect example, a part of the notice icon enlargement animation that is performed when stocking the notice icon may be canceled due to the stock trigger. For example, in a notice icon stock by a character action (for example, a throwing animation of a bomb icon I61 by Tono-sama character), if it is performed immediately before the stop display of the decorative symbol, a part is canceled (for example, the second half part) May be canceled), for example, it may not be canceled in the stock of the notice icon due to the stop of the special symbol such as the pseudo-continuous symbol.

  Further, the display mode of the enlarged display may be different depending on the number of already-announced notice icons and the number of the previously-stocked notice icons. Further, the enlarged display mode may be the same regardless of the number of the notice icons.

  In addition, when the hold is increased while the notice icon is enlarged, an effect image is displayed, an LED (for example, an LED provided at the start port) is flashed, or an effect sound is output. There may be. This may be performed, for example, at the time of increase in hold that is a target of prefetching at the time of starting winning a prize. Even if the hold is increased when the notice icon is enlarged, an effect image is displayed, an LED (for example, an LED provided at the start port) is flashed, or an effect sound is output. Or the like, and the display mode of the hold icon may be changed after the enlarged display of the notice icon is completed. In this way, the player notices the change in the display mode of the hold icon. Sometimes it can be made easier.

  Further, when the notice icon is enlarged and displayed, the variable icon and the hold icon may also be enlarged and displayed. In this case, if the hold increases during the enlarged display of the notice icon, the hold increase animation may not be performed.

  In the description so far, when the notice icon is composed of characters (for example, “chance”, “extreme heat”, “SP”, “pseudo-ream”, etc.), it may be called a notice text.

  Next, an example of the structure of the effect device 206 in the game board 200 applicable in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 75 is a schematic explanatory diagram showing an example of the structure of the effect device 206 in the game board 200 applicable in the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 75 (a-1), in the gaming board 200 applicable to the present embodiment, a plate-like shape extending substantially in parallel with the display surface of the decorative symbol display device 208 on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208. The transparent protective member CL is provided. For example, the transparent protective member CL is formed so as to rise from the rear end of the stage 244, and a rib RB is formed at the upper end, and protrudes forward substantially along the shape of the stage 244. The transparent protective member CL covers about 1/3 below the decorative symbol display device 208, and the player can visually recognize the display state of the decorative symbol display device 208 through the transparent protective member CL. Yes. The rib RB prevents the game ball jumping into the stage 244 from jumping over the transparent protective member CL and deviating backward, and the decorative symbol display device 208 or between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the transparent protective member CL. In some cases, it is possible to prevent a problem from occurring due to a collision with the effect movable body or the like arranged on the screen.

  FIG. 75 (a-2) shows a state in which effect display is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208 by applying the effect device 206 shown in FIG. 75 (a-1). In the example shown in FIG. 75, a family crest character 224E as one of the effect movable bodies is disposed below the decorative design display device 208, and between the decorative design display device 208 and the transparent protective member CL. It can be displaced by. As shown in FIG. 75 (a-2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a UI part is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and the UI unit has a variable icon h0 in the center of the square display. It is displayed in a mode accommodated in the frame FL1, and a hold icon display area is formed on the left side of the change icon h0. The hold icon display area is formed with four pedestals arranged to display four hold icons. At the timing shown in FIG. 75 (a-2), since two variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the change icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 are both in the default display mode, but the second hold icon h12 is in the default display mode but is displayed in a blinking manner. It is the display mode of the notice. A tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0, and the display content is updated at an appropriate timing. Note that the tutorial display portion TT1 shown in FIG. 75 (a-2) is in a non-display state. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed. The UI portion is preferentially displayed during the variable display of the first decorative symbol, and is provided in a region that does not overlap the display region of the first decorative symbol. It may overlap. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 75 (a-2), the Chibi princess character CH1 is displayed together with the balloon TT2 on the left side of the display screen, and along with the spear character GY1 on the right side of the display screen, A balloon part TT3 is displayed. In the balloon part TT2, a line “Where is the bag?” Is displayed, and in the balloon part TT3, a line “here is” is displayed. Note that the balloons TT2 and TT3 are overlapped with the decorative symbol during the variable display, and are in a state that is difficult to visually recognize as compared with the state where the balloon TT2 and TT3 are not overlapped with the decorative symbol during the variable display. Further, a part of the UI portion (the hold display frame FL1 and the change icons h0 and hold icons h11 and h12 displayed in the hold display frame FL1) and the princess Chibi character CH1 overlap the transparent protective member CL, and are transparent. The visibility may be lower than when the protective member CL does not overlap.

  FIG. 75 (a-3) shows a state in which the family crest member 224E rises and overlaps the decorative symbol display device 208. At this time, the range of the hold display frame FL1 is enlarged so as to extend upward, and the ninja character NJ1 is displayed in the enlarged portion. At the timing shown in FIG. 75 (a-3), a part of the ninja character NJ1 is overlapped with the family crest character 224E.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 75 (a-4), the crest character 224E returns to the initial position below the decorative symbol display device 208, and the overlap state with respect to the decorative symbol display device 208 is eliminated. Therefore, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 75 (a-4) shows a state in which the variation icon h0 and the ninja character NJ1 are displayed side by side in the expanded display frame FL1. Has been. Note that the balloon portion TT2 is overlapped with the extended portion of the extended display of the hold display frame FL1, and is difficult to see compared with the case where it is not overlapped with the extended portion of the extended display of the hold display frame FL1. The balloon portion TT3 is not overlapped because it is displayed above the hold display frame FL1. In addition, the decorative symbols during the variable display are overlapped with the hold display frame FL1, and a part thereof is difficult to visually recognize compared with the case where the decorative symbols are not overlapped with the hold display frame FL1. In the present embodiment, since the hold display frame FL1 is expanded and displayed upward, it is possible to display up above the transparent protective member CL, and thus the visibility of the hold display frame FL1 may be improved.

  FIG. 75 (b-1) shows the state described above with reference to FIG. 75 (a-2). FIG. 75 (b-1a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. The situation is schematically represented.

  As shown in FIG. 75 (b-1a), between the decorative design display device 208 and the transparent protective member CL, the size of the decorative design display device 208 is substantially the same as the size of the decorative design display device 208, in addition to the above-mentioned crest character 224E. A light guide plate IL is disposed. The light guide plate IL is disposed on the front side (that is, the player side) of the family crest member 224E. In the state shown in FIG. 75 (b-1), the family crest character 224 </ b> E is retracted below the decorative symbol display device 208. Since the player is configured in this way, a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 is visually recognized only through the light guide plate IL, and the other part through the transparent protective member CL and the light guide plate IL. Will be visually recognized. The configuration of the light guide plate IL is as described above with reference to FIG. 51, and thus the description thereof is omitted here.

  FIG. 75 (b-2) shows the state described above with reference to FIG. 75 (a-3). FIG. 75 (b-2a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB of FIG. The situation is schematically represented.

  As shown in FIG. 75 (b-2a), the family crest character 224E is interposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the light guide plate IL, and the family crest character 224E is provided between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the light guide plate IL. The decorative symbol display device 208 is difficult to visually recognize compared with the case where it is not interposed between them.

  FIG. 75 (b-3) shows the state described above with reference to FIG. 75 (a-4). FIG. 75 (b-3a) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line CC in FIG. The situation is schematically represented.

  As shown in FIG. 75 (b-3a), since the family crest character 224E has moved below the decorative symbol display device 208, the player can determine whether the family crest character 224E is between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the light guide plate IL. As compared with the case where the decorative symbol display device 208 is interposed, the display state of the decorative symbol display device 208 is easily visible through the transparent protective member CL and the light guide plate IL.

  FIG. 75 (c-1) and FIG. 75 (c-2) are diagrams illustrating an example of a layer configuration in which an image displayed on the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 75 (c-1), the above-described hold display frame FL1 is arranged in the first layer layer LY1. In the example shown in FIG. 75 (c-2), the second layer arranged rearward of the first layer layer LY1 with respect to the portion (extended portion) that extends upward in the hold display frame FL1. Arranged in the layer LY2. Note that the ninja character NJ1 displayed in the extended portion of the hold display frame FL1 is also arranged in the second layer layer LY2. That is, it can be said that the extended portion of the hold display frame FL1 has a low display priority. Here, another layer LY3 is formed between the parts arranged in the two layers constituting the hold display frame FL1, and for example, a serif notice, a decorative symbol, a notice display (for example, an arrow flying display) Or any other display can be displayed. Further, the extended portion of the hold display frame FL1 is also displayed on the first layer layer LY1 (or the second layer layer LY2) so that parts do not straddle two or more layers and are configured as one image data. It may be.

  The display mode of the UI unit may be configured so as to be different depending on the production mode (hereinafter referred to as “production stage, etc.”) depending on the production stage and the gaming state.

  In addition, at least a part of the production stage or the like may be selectable by the player's operation, or may change according to the progress of the game (for example, every fluctuation). Also good.

  In addition, the operation of “the hold display frame FL1 is expanded and displayed upward” which is a characteristic operation of the present invention is at least a part of an effect stage (for example, an effect stage in a non-electric support state, It may be performed at a part of the stage or the like that can be selected by the player while the setting screen is displayed during the change, or may be performed at all stage stages or the like.

  Next, other specific examples of effects executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

  76 to 91 are diagrams showing stepwise modification examples of effects centering on the decorative symbol display device of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. 76 to 91, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the universal figure hold. The lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown. In addition, FIGS. 76 to 87, FIG. 89, and FIG. 91 show examples in which three decorative symbol display devices are arranged side by side. That is, the first decorative symbol display device 208L disposed at the center of the three decorative symbol display devices, the second decorative symbol display device 208M disposed on the left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the first decoration. The display is performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N arranged on the right side of the symbol display device 208L. The first decorative symbol display device 208L may be referred to as a main display device, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be referred to as sub-display devices. The length in the width direction of 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is shorter than the half of the length of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the height is slightly shorter. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M has its right end side portion overlapped with the front side of the left end side portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N has the left end side portion thereof as the first end portion. One decorative symbol display device 208N overlaps the front side of the right end side portion. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are configured to be slidable in directions close to each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N can rotate integrally along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L when they are closest to each other. It is configured to be able to. The names of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are not necessarily displayed in a variable manner for each display device. However, it is added here just in case that the interpretation of the display device is not narrowed. Further, a combination of these decorative symbol display devices (first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, and third decorative symbol display device 208N) is used as an effect display means, and the effect display means is a decoration symbol. It is also possible to display various fluctuations or to display a plurality of types of effects. Further, a transparent light guide plate IL is disposed on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the player can visually recognize the display state of the first decorative symbol display device 208L via the light guide plate IL. ing. The light guide plate IL has a predetermined lens cut in the transmission region. A light emitter such as an LED is provided at an appropriate position near the side edge of the light guide plate IL, and light from the light emitter is reflected forward by the lens cut portion, so that the transmission region emits light in a predetermined pattern. It is structured so that it can look like. In the embodiment shown in FIGS. 76 to 91, the light guide plate IL is subjected to a lens cut having a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image. The light guide plate IL is configured such that the thickness of the portion of the region where light is refracted toward the player side is thinner than the thickness of the irradiated light. Therefore, the display states of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be easily visible. Further, the light guide plate IL may be movable. The light guide plate IL may be provided on the near side of at least one of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. 76 to 87 and 89 to 91 show the state of the speaker 120 and the effect button 136.

  FIG. 76 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner an example of a pending change notice effect as a prefetching notice effect with a hold icon applicable to the present embodiment, and FIG. 77 is a continuation of the example of the effect shown in FIG. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 76 (a), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a user interface (UI) part is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and the UI part has a variation icon h0 at the center thereof. It is displayed in a form accommodated in a square-shaped hold display frame FL1, and a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the fluctuation icon h0. Yes. In a broad sense, the entire UI unit may be interpreted as a holding icon base. At the timing shown in FIG. 76 (a), since two variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The change icon h0 and the two hold icons h11 and h12 are both in the default display mode. Further, a tutorial display section TT1 as an explanation display section is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0, and various information relating to games and effects is displayed (tutorial display), and the contents are updated at an appropriate timing. Is done. In the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 76 (a), “Tono-sama is Yatsushiro shogun” is displayed, and explanations regarding Tono-sama's character are made. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed. The UI portion is preferentially displayed during the variable display of the first decorative symbol, and is provided in a region that does not overlap the display region of the first decorative symbol. It may overlap. Here, the explanation display section (or explanation display area) may be a place where a certain thing is displayed in addition to the pattern of the place itself. Specifically, when the stage name is displayed in red and the stage name is displayed in red in a configuration in which the stage name is hot when moving to a certain stage, the display may be an explanatory display instead of a notice. In other words, when the normal stage name is displayed in white, it is not hot as compared with the red stage name display, and this may be a kind of notice.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 as an explanation display unit for displaying the name of the stage and reach currently being performed is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 76 (a), “castle town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. In addition, a button image 136a is displayed in a default display form above the stage name display section ST1, and the display form is changed when an operation of the effect button 136 is instructed. The button image 136a may be displayed constantly, or there may be a period during which it is not displayed. In addition, the UI unit may be always displayed or there may be a period during which it is not displayed. In addition, on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage is shown, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. Further, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special drawings 1 and 2 and the fourth symbol of the special drawings 1 and 2 are displayed. Note that the Tono-sama character may or may not be displayed at all times.

  Also, a family crest member 224E, which is one of the effect movable bodies, is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is configured to move in the vertical direction according to the effect contents. ing. Further, the family crest member 224E includes a light emitting means such as a full color LED, and can emit light in various light emission modes depending on the contents of the production. In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an Yatsushiro character 224Fa and a general character 224Fb, which are one of the effect movable bodies, are arranged, and each moves in the vertical direction according to the effect contents. It is configured to be able to. In addition, the Yatsushiro character 224Fa and the shogun character 224Fb each have a built-in light emitting means such as a full color LED, and can emit light in various light emission modes according to the contents of the production.

  Subsequently, when a game ball wins the first special figure starting port 230 at the timing shown in FIG. 76 (b), the third hold icon h13 (third hold icon in FIG. 1) is displayed in the hold icon display area. ) Is displayed, and it is notified that the number of holds has become three. Here, the third hold is a hold of the symbol variation display that is a target of prefetching. However, in this effect example, the third hold icon h13 is displayed in the default display mode at the timing shown in FIG. 76 (b).

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 76 (c), the hold icon h13 of the third special figure 1 in the hold icon display area changes to a pre-read notice display form (for example, a display form blinking in white). At this time, a sound output “picone” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that a pre-reading notice is made by a hold display. Note that audio output from the speaker 120 may be performed before the display mode of the hold icon h13 is changed, or the display mode of the hold icon h13 is changed before audio output from the speaker 120. May be. In this case, it may be configured to always be performed at any timing, or may be configured so that the timing differs depending on the case. Further, the timing of changing the display mode of the hold icon h13 and the timing of outputting the sound from the speaker 120 may be the same timing. In addition, on the left side of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a balloon portion TT2 as a second tutorial display portion (explanation display portion) is displayed together with the character CH1 of Princess Chibi. The Chibi princess character CH1 and the speech balloon TT2 are displays that may be displayed when a conversation effect (or speech effect) is performed, such as a tutorial display (description display) or a notice display. At the timing shown in FIG. 76 (c), the balloon portion TT2 is displayed with an explanation “This change is ...”, which suggests the advance notice performed in the pachinko machine 100. The balloon part TT2 is overlapped with the first decorative symbol, but may be arranged at a position where it does not overlap. Further, Princess Chibi character CH1 and balloon part TT2 may be displayed at the same timing, balloon part TT2 may be displayed after Princess Chibi character CH1 is displayed, and balloon part TT2 is displayed. After being done, Princess Chibi character CH1 may be displayed. In this case, it may be configured to always be performed at any timing, or may be configured so that the timing varies depending on the case.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 76 (d), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows a state in which a plurality of arrows descend from the upper right to the lower left of the display screen. The plurality of arrows appear as a notice display, and are overlapped with the decorative pattern being displayed in a variable manner. In addition, the balloon part TT2 is changed to an explanation display "Maybe ...". Here, the timing at which the display of the plurality of arrows may be the timing before the explanation display of the balloon portion TT2 is changed, or the timing after the explanation display of the balloon portion TT2 is changed. Alternatively, it may be the same timing as the timing at which the explanation display of the balloon TT2 is changed. In this case, it may be configured to always be performed at any timing, or may be configured so that the timing varies depending on the case. In addition, the Chibi princess character CH1 and the balloon TT2 are overlapped by a plurality of arrows, but may be overlapped by a plurality of arrows. In the tutorial display portion TT1, it is not displayed. Note that the timing at which the tutorial display unit TT1 is not displayed may be the timing after the display of the balloon unit TT2 is changed, or the timing before the display of the balloon unit TT2 is changed. Also good. Further, it may be the same timing as the timing when the explanation display of the tutorial display portion TT1 is erased and the timing when the display of the balloon portion TT2 is changed. In this case, it may be configured to always be performed at any timing, or may be configured so that the timing varies depending on the case.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 76 (e), the first decorative symbol display device 208 </ b> L shows a state where the left symbol is stopped and displayed as “decoration 6”. It should be noted that the left symbol stopped and displayed as “decoration 6” is displayed so as to overlap a part of Princess Chibi's character CH1 and the balloon portion TT2. Further, the plurality of arrows are displayed so as to pierce the right side of the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 76 (f), the first decorative symbol display device 208 </ b> L shows a state where the right symbol is stopped and displayed as “decoration 2”. The plurality of arrows and the Princess Chibi character CH1 are deleted. The timing at which the arrows are erased may be after the princess Chibi character CH1 is erased, may be before the princess Chibi character CH1 is erased, or the princess Chibi character CH1 is erased. It may be the same timing as the timing. In this case, it may be configured to always be performed at any timing, or may be configured so that the timing varies depending on the case.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 76 (g), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, after the middle symbol is stopped and displayed as “decoration 2”, the combination of the ornament symbols “decoration 6-decoration 2—decoration 2” is combined. After shaking fluctuation is performed, the display result of the loss is confirmed. In addition, the second decorative symbol that has been variably displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M is also stopped and displayed in the combination of “decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2” at the timing of the first decorative symbol confirmation stop display. . At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 may be erased or may remain displayed. Moreover, you may comprise so that it may erase | eliminate before the fluctuation variation state of a decoration design is started.

  FIG. 77 (a) shows a state where the symbol stop display is continued from FIG. 76 (g).

  When the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 77 (b), the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, respectively, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The hold icon at the display position is accommodated in the hold display frame FL1 where the change icon is displayed and becomes the change icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 is the first hold icon h11. Thus, the hold icon at the display position of the third hold icon h13 becomes the second hold icon h12, and each moves onto the corresponding pedestal. In addition, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 77B starts the variable display of the first decorative symbol, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M starts the variable display of the second decorative symbol. Is done. In the tutorial display section TT1, the characters “Panda is a master of the panda” are displayed. Here, the display of the tutorial display unit TT1 may be the timing after the decorative symbol variation display starts, the same timing as the start of the decorative symbol variation display, or the decoration symbol variation. It may be a timing before the start of display. In this case, it may be configured to always be performed at any timing, or may be configured so that the timing varies depending on the case.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 77 (c), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, on the left side of the display screen, there is a balloon portion TT2 as a second tutorial display portion (explanation display portion) along with the Chibi princess character CH1. It is displayed. The speech balloon TT2 is displayed with a dialogue “Where is the bag?”, And a conversation notice is started. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that a plurality of arrows again fall from the upper right to the lower left of the display screen. As described above, the plurality of arrows may function as a continuous notice performed in a plurality of times of symbol variation display. In this example, as in FIG. 76 (c), Princess Chibi character CH1 is displayed, but other characters may be displayed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 77 (d), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a balloon part TT3 as a third tutorial display part (explanation display part) is displayed on the right side of the display screen together with a spear character GY1. ing. The samurai character GY1 and the speech balloon TT3 are displays that may be displayed when a conversation effect (or a speech effect) is performed, such as a tutorial display (description display) or a notice display. At the timing shown in FIG. 77 (d), in response to the line display by Princess Chibi's character CH1, the line display “here is” is displayed in the balloon portion TT3, and the conversation notice continues. Here, the samurai character GY1 and the speech balloon TT3 are overlapped by the first decorative symbol, but the samurai character GY1 and the speech balloon TT3 may be overlapped by the first decorative symbol. Further, the frog character GY1 and the balloon portion TT3 may be arranged at a position that does not overlap the first decorative symbol. The spear character GY1 and the balloon part TT3 may be displayed at the same timing, or after the spear character GY1 is displayed, the balloon part TT3 may be displayed, or the balloon part TT3 is displayed. A spear character GY1 may be displayed later. Further, the conversation announcement by the princess Chibi character CH1 and the samurai character GY1 may be performed by operating the effect button 136. In the tutorial display portion TT1, it is not displayed. Note that the timing at which the tutorial display portion TT1 is not displayed may be the timing after the spear character GY1 is displayed, or the timing before the spear character GY1 is displayed. Also good. Further, the timing at which the explanation display on the tutorial display portion TT1 is erased may be the same as the timing at which the frog character GY1 is displayed. In this case, it may be configured to always be performed at any timing, or may be configured so that the timing varies depending on the case. Further, the plurality of arrows are displayed so as to pierce the right side of the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 77 (e), the crest character 224E is lifted from the initial position and overlapped with the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. More specifically, the crest character 224E completely covers the hold display frame FL1 after movement, and also includes a part of the first hold icon h11, a part of the tutorial display part TT1, and one of the balloon parts TT2. Each part is covered.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 77 (f), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an extended animation (extended animation) of the hold display frame FL1 is performed, the hold display frame FL1 is expanded upward, and the crest character 224E. A state of appearing above is shown. That is, it can be said that the portion where the hold display frame FL1 is not overlapped with the family crest member 224E appears. Further, the expanded hold display frame FL1 overlaps the balloon part TT2 and overlaps the balloon part TT2, but does not overlap the balloon part TT3 and does not overlap. That is, in this effect example, there is a case where the speech notice (balloon portion TT3) displayed later does not overlap even if the hold display frame FL1 is expanded. As described above, the display mode of the extended hold display frame FL1 may be referred to as an extended display mode. In this production example, the hold display frame FL1 before expansion and the hold display frame FL1 after expansion are shown, but the extended animation includes one in which the hold display frame FL1 expands in stages.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 77 (g), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows the appearance of the ninja character NJ1 in the upper part of the hold display frame FL1. Note that the ninja character NJ1 is partially overlapped with the family crest character 224E, and is more difficult to view than when the crest character 224E is not partially overlapped.

  FIG. 77 (h) shows a state in which the family crest member 224E descends toward the initial position. As a result, a portion of the ninja character NJ1 that is not overlapped with the family crest member 224E is enlarged, so that the visual recognition is easy. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows a state where the ninja character NJ1 is throwing the shuriken SH1. The shuriken SH1 is moving toward the second hold icon h12 for which a pre-reading notice is being made. In addition, the effect display of the shuriken SH1 may be displayed on the front side than the display of the conversation notice by the Chibi princess character CH1 or the samurai character GY1, or may be displayed on the rear side. . It can be said that the performance by the ninja character NJ1 is performed in the expanded portion of the expanded display frame FL1. In other words, it can be said that the ninja character NJ1, which is an example of the effect display, is displayed in the expanded portion of the hold display frame FL1. In other words, the ninja character NJ1 is displayed in the area of the difference between the area in the hold display frame FL1 in the extended display mode and the area in the hold display frame FL1 in the default display mode. It can also be said. This effect by the ninja character NJ1 may function as an effect of pre-reading notice or change notice. The effect display by the shuriken SH1 is related to the effect performed in the expanded hold display frame FL1 (the effect by the ninja character NJ1), but it can be said that the effect is performed outside the hold display frame FL1.

  Thereafter, FIG. 77 (i) shows a state in which the crest character 224E returns to the initial position. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a state where the shuriken SH1 is heading toward the second hold icon h12 is shown. As shown in FIG. 77 (i), the area within the hold display frame FL1 in the extended display mode includes the area within the frame of the hold display frame FL1 in the default display mode. In other words, it can be said that the hold display frame FL1 in the extended display mode is a display mode in which the area of the area in the frame of the hold display frame FL1 in the default display mode is increased.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 77 (j), the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays the effect EF2 in which the shuriken SH1 overlaps the second hold icon h12 and the second hold icon h12 explodes. ing. The effect EF2 makes it difficult to visually recognize the entire second hold icon h12, and also overlaps a part of the adjacent first hold icon h11. Thereby, there is a case where the player can have a sense of expectation that the display mode of the second hold icon h12 may change to increase the reliability of the big hit.

  Thereafter, FIG. 77 (k) shows a state in which the emission color of the family crest member 224E is changed from white to green. That is, it can be said that the advance notification is made that the display color of the second hold icon h12 changes from white to green. In other words, a predetermined light emitting means (an LED built in the family crest member 224E, an LED provided at a special drawing start port, etc.) is held on the hold icon before the hold icon to be read ahead changes. It can be said that the mode is changed according to the mode after the change.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 77 (l), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect EF2 is deleted, and the second hold icon h12 is easily displayed again. At this time, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is displayed in a mode of lighting in green. On the other hand, a sound “picone” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the display mode of the hold icon has changed. Note that the sound output may be performed after the display mode of the hold icon h12 is changed, the display mode of the hold icon h12 may be changed after the sound output is performed, or the display of the hold icon h12 is displayed. The change of the aspect and the sound output may be performed simultaneously. In this case, it may be configured to always be performed at any timing, or may be configured so that the timing varies depending on the case.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 77 (m), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the ninja character NJ1 displayed in the hold display frame FL1 disappears, and then the hold display frame FL1 is displayed in FIG. An animation display (reduction animation) is performed to reduce the image to the shape shown. The reduced animation may be performed without deleting the ninja character NJ1, and in this case, the ninja character NJ1 is displayed so as to move downward in accordance with the reduction of the hold display frame FL1, and the change icon h0 is displayed. It is also possible to erase the data finally by overlapping with each other.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 77 (n), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the reduced animation of the hold display frame FL1 ends, and the hold display frame FL1 becomes the default display mode.

  In the example of the above-described effects, the start timing of each effect such as Princess Chibi character CH1, Samurai character GY1, notice display of a plurality of arrows, family crest character 224E, decorative symbol variation display, expansion operation of hold display frame FL1, etc. The end timing can be performed in any combination.

  Further, in this effect example, a character (for example, ninja character NJ1) for changing the hold icon is displayed in the extended hold display frame FL1, but an image substantially the same as the changed hold icon is displayed. You may comprise, and you may comprise so that the image which respond | corresponds the hold icon after a change (corresponding to the hold icon after a change) may be displayed.

  Next, in the change effect of the display mode of the hold icon by the ninja character NJ1, an effect example when the change of the display mode of the hold icon fails will be described.

  FIG. 77 (i ′) corresponds to FIG. (I), and has the same effect content as FIG. 77 (i). Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 77 (j ′), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the shuriken SH1 overlaps the second hold icon h12, but the effect EF2 is not displayed and the shuriken SH1 is in the second hold. As shown in FIG. 77 (k ′), the shuriken SH1 frames out to the lower part of the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L so that the change in the display mode of the hold icon has failed. Directing. Therefore, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 remains white and flashing.

  FIG. 78 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the pending change notice effect. FIG. 78 shows a state in which a change effect of the display mode of the hold icon is performed when the decorative symbol whose character change is displayed on the middle symbol is stopped and displayed. That is, it can be said that the decoration pattern of “change” is a display suggesting the contents of the effect.

  As shown in FIG. 78 (a), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the UI part is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI part, the change icon h0 is placed in the hold display frame FL1 in the center. It is displayed in the accommodated form, and on the left side of the variation icon h0 is formed a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 78 (a), since two variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the change icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 of the two hold icons are in the default display mode, but the second hold icon h12 is blinking in white and displays a prefetch notice. It is displayed in a manner. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the fluctuation varies with the combination of the decorative symbol “decoration 3-change-decoration 1”. At this time, the hold display frame FL1 is a default display mode and does not overlap the decorative design. Further, the tutorial display portion TT1 is not displayed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 78 (a), “castle town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. In addition, a button image 136a is displayed in a default display form above the stage name display section ST1, and the second decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner at the top of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. ing.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage is shown, and in the upper part of the display screen, the second reserved number display of Special Fig. 1 and Special Fig. 2 and Special Fig. 1 are shown. And the 4th symbol of special figure 2 is displayed.

  In addition, the above-mentioned family crest character 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned eight-generation character 224Fa and the general character character 224Fb are disposed above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Has been.

  Thereafter, FIG. 78 (b) shows a state in which the family crest member 224E rises from the initial position and overlaps the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this time, the family crest member 224E completely covers the hold display frame FL1, and also covers a part of the first hold icon h11, a part of the tutorial display part TT1, and a part of the middle symbol of “change”. Covering. Note that the family crest character 224E may not overlap the decorative design.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 78 (c), in the first decorative symbol display device 208, the hold display frame FL1 is expanded upward and is shown above the family crest member 224E. At this time, the expanded hold display frame FL1 overlaps the decorative symbol (the middle symbol of “change”). In other words, it can be said that the decorative symbol (the middle symbol of “change”) is overlapped with the expanded hold display frame FL1. Note that the expanded hold display frame FL1 may not overlap the decorative design.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 78 (d), the first decorative symbol display device 208 shows the appearance of the ninja character NJ1 in the upper part of the hold display frame FL1. Note that the ninja character NJ1 is partially overlapped with the family crest character 224E, and is difficult to view compared to the case where the character is not partially overlapped with the crest character 224E.

  FIG. 78 (e) shows a state in which the family crest character 224E descends toward the initial position. As a result, a portion of the ninja character NJ1 that is not overlapped with the family crest member 224E is enlarged, so that the visual recognition is easy. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows a state where the ninja character NJ1 is throwing the shuriken SH1. The shuriken SH1 is moving toward the second hold icon h12 for which a pre-reading notice is being made. That is, in this effect example, it can be said that the change effect of the display mode of the hold icon is started in a state where the display indicating the content of the effect (the decoration pattern of “change”) is overlapped.

  Thereafter, FIG. 78 (f) shows a state in which the family crest member 224E returns to the initial position. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a state where the shuriken SH1 is heading toward the second hold icon h12 is shown.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 78 (g), the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays the effect EF2 in which the shuriken SH1 overlaps the second hold icon h12 and the second hold icon h12 explodes. ing. The effect EF2 makes it difficult to visually recognize the entire second hold icon h12, and also overlaps a part of the adjacent first hold icon h11.

  Thereafter, FIG. 78 (h) shows a state in which the emission color of the family crest member 224E changes from white to green.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 78 (i), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect EF2 is erased, and the second hold icon h12 is easily visible again compared to the state where the effect EF2 is not erased. Is displayed. At this time, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is displayed in a mode of lighting in green. On the other hand, a sound “picone” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the display mode of the hold icon has changed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 78 (j), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the ninja character NJ1 displayed in the hold display frame FL1 disappears, and then the reduced animation of the hold display frame FL1 is performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 78 (k), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the reduced animation of the hold display frame FL1 ends, and the hold display frame FL1 becomes the default display mode. That is, the overlap with the decorative symbol by the hold display frame FL1 is eliminated, and the decorative symbol becomes easier to visually recognize as compared with the state in which the overlap with the decorative symbol by the hold display frame FL1 is not eliminated.

  FIG. 79 is a diagram showing a modification of the effect shown in FIG. In FIG. 79, the tutorial display unit TT1 is out of the frame at normal time, and when the explanation display is performed, a state in which the frame is entered from below is shown. 79 (a) to FIG. 79 (n) are different from FIG. 77 (a) to FIG. 77 (n) except that the tutorial display unit TT1 performs an animation in and out of the tutorial display unit TT1. Only the portion will be described, and the description of the same contents as those in FIGS. 77 (a) to (n) will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 79 (a), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the tutorial display portion TT1 is not displayed and is in a frame-out state.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 79 (b), the first decorative symbol display device 208L starts the frame-in animation (frame-in animation) of the tutorial display unit TT1 from the lower right side of the display screen. At the timing shown in FIG. 79 (c), the tutorial display portion TT1 is arranged at a predetermined display position, and the character display of “Panda is the Master” is displayed on the tutorial display portion TT1. Note that the timing at which the character display of the tutorial display section TT1 is displayed may be the same as the completion of the frame-in animation, the timing after the completion of the frame-in animation, or the timing before the completion of the frame-in animation. It may be. In this case, it may be configured to always be performed at any timing, or may be configured so that the timing varies depending on the case. In addition, the character display of “Panda is the Master of the Panda” in the tutorial display section TT1 is displayed until the frame-out animation (frame-out animation) of the tutorial display section TT1 is started at the timing shown in FIG. For 5 seconds). Therefore, as shown in FIG. 79 (e), when the crest character 224E rises and overlaps with a part of the tutorial display part TT1, a part of the character display displayed on the tutorial display part TT1 is displayed. May overlap.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 79 (f) to FIG. 79 (h), the tutorial display unit TT1 moves downward, and a frame-out animation is performed to frame out from the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The explanation display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 may be deleted before the frame-out animation starts, or may be deleted at the timing when the frame-out animation starts, or the frame-out animation starts. It may be erased at a timing after that, or may be displayed until the frame out of the tutorial display portion TT1 is completed. In this case, it may be configured to always be performed at any timing, or may be configured so that the timing varies depending on the case. Further, the start timing of the frame-out animation may be the same as the start timing of the extended animation in the hold display frame FL1, may be the timing before the start of the extended animation, or the extended animation The timing may be later than the start. In this production example, the tutorial display unit TT1 can be said to be an example of the second extended display. For example, the tutorial display unit TT1 is the same as the extended hold display frame FL1 (in this presentation example, it may be an example of the first extended display) in that it is not overlapped with the decorative design. It can be said that it differs in that it does not overlap the notice, there are few overlapping areas, and the frequency of overlapping is low.

  FIG. 80 is a diagram showing another modification of the effect shown in FIG. FIG. 80 shows a state in which the tutorial display unit TT1 performs explanation display and the frame is out of frame, and then the tutorial display unit TT1 enters the frame again, and the tutorial display unit TT1 performs a preview display. 80 (a) to 80 (n) are the same as those in FIG. 79 except that the tutorial display unit TT1 enters the frame again after the tutorial display unit TT1 is out of frame, and the tutorial display unit TT1 displays a preview. Since it is the same as (a) to (n) in the figure, only different parts will be described, and description of the same contents as those in FIGS. 79 (a) to (n) will be omitted.

  After the effects shown in FIG. 80 (a) to FIG. 80 (h) are performed, the first decorative symbol display device 208L performs the tutorial from the bottom right side of the display screen at the timing shown in FIG. 80 (i). The frame-in animation of the display unit TT1 is started again, and then, at the timing shown in FIG. 80 (j), the tutorial display unit TT1 is arranged at a predetermined display position. The display is displayed. That is, a display suggesting that a pseudo-ream may be performed is performed. That is, in the tutorial display unit TT1, in addition to the tutorial display, a preview display can be performed. The character display of “pseudo-ream” may be a notice of the change or a prefetch notice. The completion timing of the frame-in animation in the tutorial display section TT1 may be the timing before the display of the effect EF2 is started, or the timing after the display of the effect EF2 is started. It may be the same timing when the display of the effect EF2 is started. In this case, it may be configured to always be performed at any timing, or may be configured so that the timing varies depending on the case. Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 80 (j) to (n), the tutorial display section TT1 is continuously displayed. In this example, the display time of the tutorial display unit TT1 is configured to be longer when the notice display is performed than when the explanation display is performed. Alternatively, the display time of the tutorial display unit TT1 may be configured to be longer when the explanation display is performed than when the notice display is performed. In addition, the character color may be different between the explanation display and the notice display. Thus, in this effect example, the tutorial display unit TT1 may be displayed a plurality of times.

  In the tutorial display unit TT1, a plurality of types of mini-games having a success / failure pattern are displayed, and when the success pattern of the mini-game is performed, simultaneously with the display indicating success or after the display. , A display that changes the other display such as a change in hold (for example, a change in the display mode of the hold icon, a change in the display mode of the fluctuation icon, the stop of the pseudo-continuous pattern, the occurrence of the pseudo-run, the display mode of the serif notice Change (for example, a line in blue or blue background changes to a line in red or red text), a step up in a line advance notice (for example, in the state where a line advance notice for character A is displayed, then the line in character B For example, a notice display may be performed)).

  FIG. 81 is a diagram showing step by step an example of a super reach effect applicable to the present embodiment. The effect example shown in FIG. 81 is performed after the effect display shown in FIG. 77 is performed, for example, and the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon whose display mode is changed as described above is performed. Is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 81 (a), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the UI part is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI part, the change icon h0 is placed in the hold display frame FL1 at the center. It is displayed in the accommodated form, and on the left side of the variation icon h0 is formed a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 81 (a), since two variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the change icon h0 is a pre-read notice display mode that is lit in green, and the two hold icons h11 and h12 are default display modes. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is deleted. At this time, the hold display frame FL1 is a default display mode and does not overlap the decorative design. Further, the tutorial display section TT1 shows a character display “Panda is a master of the lord” and an explanation display.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 81 (a), “castle town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. In addition, a button image 136a is displayed in a default display form above the stage name display section ST1, and the second decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner at the top of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. ing.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage is shown, and in the upper part of the display screen, the second reserved number display of Special Fig. 1 and Special Fig. 2 and Special Fig. 1 are shown. And the 4th symbol of special figure 2 is displayed. Further, the first decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  In addition, the above-mentioned family crest character 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned eight-generation character 224Fa and the general character character 224Fb are disposed above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Has been. The family crest member 224E emits green light in accordance with the color of the change icon h0.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 81 (b), the first decorative symbol display device 208L performs a display for notifying that it has developed into super reach (swordsman reach).

  Then, as shown in FIG. 81 (c), the light emitting means corresponding to the light guide plate IL emits light to form a pattern imitating an effect image, which produces high reliability for the big hit in this swordsman reach. . Here, the pattern formed on the light guide plate IL overlaps the tutorial display portion TT1, the hold display frame FL1, the variation icon and the hold icon, and the tutorial display portion TT1, the hold display frame FL1, the change icon and the hold icon. These displays may be difficult to visually recognize compared with the case where they do not overlap.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 81 (d), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an animation (UI part FO animation) in which the UI part is framed out below the display screen is started. Specifically, when the UI unit FO animation is started, the character display displayed in the tutorial display unit TT1 is deleted and the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area is deleted. Note that the character display erasure timing in the tutorial display unit TT1 may be a timing before the hold icon erasure timing, or may be a timing after the hold icon erasure timing. The timing may be the same as the timing of deleting the hold icon. In this case, it may be configured to always be performed at any timing, or may be configured so that the timing varies depending on the case. Although the fluctuation icon h0 is not erased, the fluctuation icon h0 may also be erased.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 81 (d) to (g), the UI unit frames out by the UI unit FO animation. Even if the hold display frame FL1 is deleted, the display mode of the hold icon may be recognized by the light emission color of the family crest character 224E. In other words, as described above, the display is performed by performing the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon changed by the change effect of the display mode of the hold icon performed by extending the hold display frame FL1. In some cases, the display mode after the change of the hold icon can be confirmed even after the hold display frame FL1 in which the variable icon is accommodated is not displayed.

  FIG. 81 (h) shows a situation where a swordsman reach is being performed. That is, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the background display is changed from the background of the castle town to the background dedicated to the swordsman reach. In the stage name display section ST1 of the device 208M, the characters “Swordsman Reach” are displayed. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a duel scene animation is performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 81 (h), a state in which the Tono-sama character and the swordsman character confront each other is displayed.

  Thereafter, for example, after the duel scene animation display by the Tono-sama character and the swordsman character shown in FIGS. 63 (c) to (h), the first decoration is displayed as shown in FIG. 81 (i). In the symbol display device 208L, the protagonist loses to the enemy swordsman, and as a result, a combination of “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” ornamental patterns is derived for both the first ornamental symbol and the second ornamental symbol. Is started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 81 (j), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the background dedicated to the swordsman reach is changed to the castle town background. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, as shown in FIG. 81 (j) to FIG. 81 (n), an animation (UI portion FI animation) in which the UI portion enters the frame from the lower side of the display screen is performed. The hold icon is displayed again after the display of the UI part FI animation is completed. However, the hold icon may be displayed when the display of the UI part FI animation is started, or the UI part FI animation is displayed. It may be displayed simultaneously with completion. In this case, it may be configured to always be performed at any timing, or may be configured so that the timing varies depending on the case.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 81 (o), the first decorative symbol displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N becomes the decoration “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2” on the first ornamental symbol display device 208L. The display is stopped by the combination of symbols, and the display result of the deviation is confirmed. At this time, the fluctuation icon h0 is also deleted. Also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed as a combination of decorative symbols “decoration 2-decoration 3-decoration 2”. Further, the family crest character 224E changes from a green light emission mode to a default light emission mode (white light emission mode). Although the first decorative symbol is displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it may be erased when stopped. Further, the timing at which the family crest character 224E changes to the default light emission mode may be the same timing as the stop display of the decorative symbol, may be the timing before the stop display of the decorative symbol, or the decoration The timing may be after the symbol stop display. In this case, it may be configured to always be performed at any timing, or may be configured so that the timing varies depending on the case. In addition, the change icon h0 may be changed to the default display mode before the decoration symbol is stopped and displayed and then deleted, or after the decoration symbol is stopped and displayed, the change icon h0 is changed to the default display mode. It may be erased after that, or it may be erased without changing the display mode before the stop display of the decorative symbol, or the display mode may be changed after the stop display of the decorative symbol. It may be erased without changing, or it may be erased without changing the display mode at the same timing as the decorative symbol stop display timing.

  In addition, in the state where the pattern formed on the light guide plate IL is displayed, the hold display frame FL1 after being expanded, being expanded, and being reduced may be configured to be displayed. All the hold display frames FL1 may be configured not to overlap the pattern formed on the light guide plate IL.

  Further, the hold display frame FL1 and the change icon h0 may be displayed during the super reach, and in this configuration, each timing during the super reach (for example, the cut-in of the ally character and the cut-in of the enemy character). Or the display mode of the lines displayed in blue, the display timing of lines displayed in red, or the like may be changed.

  Further, in addition to or in place of the above configuration, the tutorial display unit TT1 may be configured to be able to frame-in during super reach, and the display mode at each timing may be changed. One of a plurality of types of display may be displayed.

  FIG. 82 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the pending change notice effect. Here, FIGS. 82 (a-1) to (a-4) show a state in which an effect display for stocking the notice icon is performed in the extended portion of the hold display frame FL1, and FIG. 82 (b- 1) to (b-6) in FIG. 82 show a state in which a change effect of the display mode of the hold icon is performed in a state where the notice icon is stocked, and FIG. 82 (c-1) to FIG. FIG. 6C-6 shows a state in which an effect that changes the display mode of the notice icon is performed by an effect that is partially in common with the change effect of the display mode of the hold icon.

  The production example shown in FIG. 82 (a-1) is the same as FIG. 77 (g) except that a treasure box notice icon BX is displayed in place of the ninja character NJ1, and a detailed description thereof will be given. Omitted. As shown in FIG. 82 (a-1), the treasure box notice icon BX is partially overlapped with the family crest character 224E and not partially overlapped with the crest character 224E. It is considered difficult to visually compare. Also, in this production example, description will be given using a treasure chest notice icon BX as an example of a notice icon, but the present invention is also applicable, for example, to displaying various notice icons shown in FIG. 18 and FIG. 73 (d). Needless to say.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 82 (a-2), the crest character 224E is lowered toward the initial position. Then, a portion of the treasure chest notice icon BX that is not overlapped with the family crest member 224E is enlarged so that visual recognition is easy.

  Thereafter, FIG. 82 (a-3) shows a state in which the crest character 224E returns to the initial position. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the treasure chest notice icon BX is moving toward the second hold icon h12. At this time, the treasure box notice icon BX is displayed in a reduced size, but may be displayed without being reduced, or may be displayed in an enlarged size. Further, the shape may be changed or the display color may be changed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 82 (a-4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the treasure box notice icon BX is stopped and displayed above the second hold icon h12 and corresponds to the second hold icon h12. This suggests that some kind of notice will be given in the symbol variation display based on the hold. In other words, a pre-reading notice is performed using the treasure box notice icon BX.

  The production examples shown in FIGS. 82 (b-1) to 82 (b-6) are the same as those shown in FIG. 77 (g), except that a treasure box notice icon BX is displayed above the second hold icon h12. Since it is the same as that shown in FIG. Note that the notice icon BX shown in FIG. 82 (b-1) is not limited to the one displayed in the manner described above in FIGS. 82 (a-1) to (a-4), for example, other effects. (For example, an effect or the like performed by stopping the chance symbol) may be displayed. Further, the notice icon may not be displayed in the effect in the hold display frame FL1.

  FIG. 82 (b-3) shows a state where the shuriken SH1 overlaps the treasure chest notice icon BX. Here, the shuriken SH1 may overlap the treasure box notice icon BX, or may overlap the treasure box notice icon BX. That is, for example, even when the treasure box notice icon BX is displayed in the manner described above in FIGS. 82 (a-1) to (a-4), the shuriken SH1 is better than the treasure box notice icon BX. May be displayed on the front side, or may be displayed on the back side.

  FIG. 82 (b-4) shows that the effect EF2 overlaps all of the treasure box notice icons BX in addition to the second hold icon h12. Thereby, it is not known whether the display mode of the second hold icon h12 changes or the display mode of the notice icon BX of the treasure box changes, and it may be possible to give the player a sense of expectation.

  The production examples shown in FIG. 82 (c-1) to FIG. 82 (c-5) are the same as those in FIG. 82 (b-1) to FIG. 82 (b-5).

  In FIG. 82 (c-5), the effect EF2 is displayed so as to cover the entire second hold icon h12. However, the crest character 224E corresponding to the display mode (display color) of the hold icon after the change is emitted. There is no change in appearance. That is, it can be said that the change display of the hold icon is not performed due to the change in the emission color of the family crest member 224E.

  FIG. 82 (c-6) following FIG. 82 (c-5) shows a state after the effect EF2 is erased. That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 82 (c-6), after the effect EF2 is deleted, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 does not change, and the display mode of the treasure box notice icon BX changes. The player may not be able to change the display mode of the hold icon, but the advance notice of the treasure box BX may change the appearance of the game and make the production more surprising and may further increase the expectation of the big hit. is there. Note that the change mode of the notice icon BX of the treasure box is not limited to a change in size. For example, the shape may change, the color may change, or the combination may change. . Note that, as shown in FIG. 82 (c-6), audio output is made from the speaker 120 to notify that the display mode of the notice icon BX of the treasure box has changed, but audio output is not performed. It may be.

  FIG. 83 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the hold change notice effect. Here, in FIG. 83 (a-1) to FIG. 83 (a-6), the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon other than the hold icon displayed in the pre-read notice display mode (for example, blinking white). 83 (b-1) to 83 (b-4), another character appears in the extended portion of the hold display frame FL1, and the display mode of the hold icon is displayed. The state where the changing effect is performed is shown. In FIGS. 83 (c-1) to 83 (c-5), the effect of changing the display mode of all the hold icons displayed is performed. Is shown.

  The production example shown in FIG. 83 (a-1) is the same as FIG. 77 (g) except that the third hold icon h13 is displayed, and thus detailed description thereof is omitted. As shown in FIG. 83 (a-1), the third hold icon h13 is displayed in a default display mode.

  FIG. 83 (a-2) following FIG. 83 (a-1) shows a state in which the family crest character 224E descends toward the initial position. As a result, a portion of the ninja character NJ1 that is not overlapped with the family crest member 224E is enlarged, so that the visual recognition is easy. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows a state where the ninja character NJ1 is throwing the shuriken SH1. The shuriken SH1 is moving toward the third hold icon h13 adjacent thereto, not the second hold icon h12 for which the pre-reading notice is being made.

  Thereafter, FIG. 83 (a-3) shows a state in which the crest character 224E returns to the initial position. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the shuriken SH1 is shown moving toward the third hold icon h13.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 83 (a-4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the display of the effect EF2 in which the shuriken SH1 overlaps the third hold icon h13 and the third hold icon h13 explodes. Has been done. The effect EF2 makes it difficult to visually recognize the entire third hold icon h13, and also overlaps a part of the adjacent second hold icon h12. It should be noted that the second hold icon h12 remains in the pre-read notice display mode (blinking in white).

  Thereafter, FIG. 83 (a-5) shows a state in which the emission color of the family crest character 224E changes from white to green. That is, it can be said that the advance notification is made that the display color of the third hold icon h13 changes from white to green.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 83 (a-6), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect EF2 is erased, and the third hold icon h13 is visually recognized again as compared with the state where the effect EF2 is not erased. Displayed easily. At this time, the display mode of the third hold icon h <b> 13 is displayed in a mode of lighting in green. On the other hand, a sound “picone” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the display mode of the hold icon has changed. Note that the sound output may be performed after the display mode of the hold icon h13 is changed, the display mode of the hold icon h13 may be changed after the sound output is performed, or the display of the hold icon h13 is displayed. The change of the aspect and the sound output may be performed simultaneously. In this case, it may be configured to always be performed at any timing, or may be configured so that the timing varies depending on the case. In addition, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 remains the same as the display mode of the pre-read notice. According to this production example, not only the second hold icon h12 but the display mode of the third hold icon h13 adjacent to the second hold icon h13 changes, so that the production can be surprised and the second While maintaining the expectation for the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon h12, the expectation for the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the third hold icon h13 may be dramatically improved. . In addition, although this example of production demonstrated the example performed with respect to the 3rd holding | maintenance icon adjacent to the 2nd holding | maintenance icon which is the object of a prefetch notice, you may make it perform with respect to the 1st holding | maintenance icon. When there is a fourth hold, the fourth hold icon h14 may be performed.

  83 (b-1) to FIG. 83 (b-4) show an example in which the chord character BC1 is displayed in place of the ninja character NJ1 in the extended portion of the hold display frame FL1, and the thrown object. 77 is the same as FIG. 77 (g) to FIG. 77 (j) except that only the differences are described in detail, and the detailed description of the other points is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 83 (b-1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208, in the upper part of the holding display frame FL1, not the ninja character NJ1 but the long character BC1 appears. It should be noted that the chief character BC1 is partially overlapped with the family crest character 224E, and is difficult to view compared to a state where the character crest character 224E is not partially overlapped with the family crest character 224E.

  FIG. 83 (b-2) shows a state in which the family crest member 224E descends toward the initial position. As a result, a portion of the bancho character BC1 that is not overlapped with the family crest member 224E is enlarged to facilitate visual recognition. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, it is shown that the chief character BC1 emits a Qigong wave KK1 instead of the shuriken SH1 as a thrown object. This qigong wave KK1 is moving toward the second hold icon h12 for which the pre-reading notice is being made. It should be noted that the effect display of the Qigong wave KK1 may be displayed on the front side rather than the display of the conversation notice by the Chibi princess character CH1 or the samurai character GY1, or may be displayed on the back side. Good.

  Thereafter, FIG. 83 (b-3) shows a state in which the crest character 224E returns to the initial position. And in the 1st decoration symbol display apparatus 208L, a mode that Qigong wave KK1 is heading to the 2nd holding | maintenance icon h12 is shown.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 83 (b-4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect EF2 in which the qigong wave KK1 overlaps the second hold icon h12 and the second hold icon h12 explodes. Has been done. Here, the display mode of the effect EF2 may be different between the case of the shuriken SH1 and the case of the Qigong wave KK1. At this time, the longest character BC1 is erased from the hold display frame FL1, but may be displayed. Thus, in this production example, by allowing characters other than the ninja character NJ1 to be displayed, for example, there may be a case where the reliability of the big hit can be changed by the appearing character.

  83 (c-1) to FIG. 83 (c-3), the third hold icon h13 is displayed, and the second hold icon h12 is the default display mode. Except for the above, it is the same as FIG. 83 (b-1) to FIG. 83 (b-3), so only the differences will be described in detail, and detailed description of the other will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 83 (c-4) following FIG. 83 (c-3), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the Qigong wave KK1 is overlapped with the second hold icon h12 and the exploding effect EF3 is displayed. However, the effect EF3 is an effect display that explodes not only in the second hold icon h12 but in the entire hold icon display area. That is, the display of the effect EF3 informs that all the hold icons displayed in the hold icon display area are to be changed in display mode. This may give a sense of expectation that reliability may increase for all holds. Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 83 (c-4), the longest character BC1 is erased from the hold display frame FL1, but it may be displayed. The effect by the effect EF3 may be an effect that is performed only when the chief character BC1 appears, and may not be performed when the ninja character NJ1 appears. In addition, when the longest character BC1 appears, the effect EF3 may always be performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 83 (c-5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect EF3 is erased and the first hold icons h11 to 3 are compared with the state where the effect EF3 is not erased. The hold icon h13 is easily displayed again. At this time, all the display modes of the first hold icon h11 to the third hold icon h13 are changed from the default display mode to the display mode of the main character. According to this production example, not only the hold icon that is the target of prefetching but also the display mode of all the displayed hold icons can be changed, so that the production can be given unexpectedness and the In some cases, the expectation of a big hit can be dramatically improved. This production example may be performed, for example, when the hold increases at a specific timing, and more specifically, when the hold increases after the extended animation of the hold display frame FL1 is started. You may make it carry out.

  FIG. 84 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the hold change notice effect. 84 (a-1) to 84 (a-5) show how the extended range of the hold display frame FL1 is enlarged, and FIGS. 84 (b-1) to 84 (b). FIG. 84 (c-1) to FIG. 84 (c-4) show a state in which the background of the hold display frame FL1 is opened and a character related to the hold change notice effect appears there. In the figure, a state in which an effect of changing the display mode of the fluctuation icon is performed is shown.

  The example of the effect shown in FIG. 84 (a-1) is the same as that shown in FIG. 77 (g) and described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 84A-1 following FIG. 84A-1, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the hold display frame FL1 is further expanded upward. Further, the ninja character NJ1 is further moved upward in accordance with the further expansion of the hold display frame FL1. At this time, the ninja character NJ1 is not overlapped with the family crest member 224E, and is easier to visually recognize than the state where it is overlapped with the family crest member 224E. In addition, the hold display frame FL1 overlaps the balloon part TT3, and the display of the balloon part TT3 is difficult to visually recognize as compared with the state where it does not overlap the balloon part TT3. Also, the family crest member 224E is lowered toward the initial position.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 84 (a-3), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows a state in which the ninja character NJ1 throws three shurikens SH1. These three shurikens SH1 are all moving toward the second hold icon h12 for which a pre-reading notice is being made. In addition, the effect display of the shuriken SH1 overlaps the balloon part TT2. Also, at the timing shown in FIG. 84 (a-3), the crest character 224E has returned to the initial position.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 84 (a-4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the three shurikens SH1 overlap the second hold icon h12 and the second hold icon h12 explodes. The display is done.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 84 (a-5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect EF2 is erased and the second hold icon h12 is visually recognized again as compared with the state where the effect EF2 is not erased. Displayed easily. At this time, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the display mode of Tono. At this time, a notification sound indicating that the display mode of the hold icon has changed may be output from the speaker 120. At this time, the light emission mode of the family crest member 224E is not changed, but may be changed. Thus, in this effect example, as compared with the effect example shown in FIG. 77, the extended range of the hold display frame FL1 is further increased upward, and the effect content is also partially different. It should be noted that the production content may be the same even if the extended range of the hold display frame FL1 is enlarged. Further, the extended range of the hold display frame FL1 may be changed according to the reliability. Thereby, there may be a case where a change in the expectation for the big hit can be given by the amount of change of the hold display frame FL1.

  Note that the extended range of the hold display frame FL1 may be expanded not only in the upper direction but also in the width direction. In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 84 (a-3 '), the hold display frame FL1 may be expanded in the width direction up to a range overlapping the hold icon to be prefetched in addition to the upward expansion. Good. Further, the extended range in the vertical direction of the hold display frame FL1 may be set to the extent shown in FIG. 77 (g), and the extended range in the width direction may be set to a range that overlaps the hold icon to be prefetched. In addition, when a third hold icon that is digested after the second hold icon h12 that is the target of prefetching is displayed, it is expanded in the width direction to at least a part of the third hold icon. You may comprise. In other words, a part of the hold display frame FL1 may be configured to overlap the third hold icon.

  In FIG. 84 (b-1), the crest character 224E rises from the initial position, and the hold display frame FL1 is expanded upward by the extended animation of the hold display frame FL1, but no character appears in the extended portion. A state in which the family crest member 224E has moved to the initial position is shown. The other contents of the production are the same as those shown in FIG. 77 (g), and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 84 (b-2), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an opening operation in which the background of the hold display frame FL1 rises like a shutter is started so that the back side of the background is visually recognized. A state in which various types of display are performed is shown.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 84 (b-3), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows a state in which the background of the holding display frame FL1 is fully opened and a ninja character NJ1 appears. A plurality of back colors of the hold display frame FL1 whose background is fully opened may be prepared, and the color may be varied depending on the expected degree of change in the display mode of the hold icon. Then, as shown in FIG. 84 (b-3), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows a state in which the ninja character NJ1 throws the shuriken SH1. Note that the timing at which the throwing effect of the shuriken SH1 is started may be after the timing at which the background of the hold display frame FL1 is fully opened, or the same as the timing at which the background of the hold display frame FL1 is fully open. It may be a timing before the background of the hold display frame FL1 is fully opened. In this case, it may be configured to always be performed at any timing, or may be configured so that the timing varies depending on the case.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 84 (b-4), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows a state in which the shuriken SH1 faces the second hold icon h12.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 84 (b-5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the display of the effect EF2 in which the shuriken SH1 overlaps the second hold icon h12 and the second hold icon h12 explodes. Has been done. At this time, a closing operation in which the background of the hold display frame FL1 is lowered like a shutter is started, and then the door is closed. Note that the start timing of the closing operation of the background of the hold display frame FL1 may be before the start timing of the display of the effect EF2, or may be the same as the start timing of the display of the effect EF2. It may be after the timing when the display of the effect EF2 is started. In this case, it may be configured to always be performed at any timing, or may be configured so that the timing varies depending on the case.

  The example shown in FIG. 84 (c-1) is the same as FIG. 77 (i) except that the ninja character NJ1 is throwing a shuriken toward the change icon h0. This will be described in detail, and the description of the others will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 84 (c-1), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows a state where the ninja character NJ1 is throwing the shuriken SH1 toward the change icon h0.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 84 (c-2), the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays the effect EF3 in which the shuriken SH1 overlaps the variation icon h0 and the variation icon h0 explodes. The effect EF3 makes it difficult to visually recognize the entire variation icon h0, and also overlaps a part of the ninja character NJ1. Note that the second hold icon h12 remains unchanged in the display mode of the prefetch notice. Thereby, while maintaining the expectation for the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the second hold icon, the display mode of the change icon h0 may change, and the reliability of the change with respect to the big hit may be increased. In some cases, the player can have a sense of expectation.

  Thereafter, FIG. 84 (c-3) shows a state in which the emission color of the family crest character 224E changes from white to green. In other words, it can be said that the advance notification is made that the display color of the variation icon h0 changes from white to green. In other words, prior to the notice that the display mode of the change icon changes, a predetermined light emitting means (such as an LED incorporated in the family crest member 224E or an LED provided at the special drawing start opening) is changed to the change icon. It can be said that the mode is changed according to the mode after the change of h0.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 84 (c-4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect EF3 is deleted, and the change icon h0 is easily displayed again. At this time, the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is displayed in a mode of lighting in green. On the other hand, a sound “picone” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 has changed. Note that the sound output may be performed after the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is changed, the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 may be changed after the voice output is performed, or the display of the fluctuation icon h0 is displayed. The change of the aspect and the sound output may be performed simultaneously.

  FIG. 85 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the hold change notice effect. FIG. 85 shows a state in which a change effect of the display mode of the hold icon is performed when the UI unit is out of the display screen.

  As shown in FIG. 85 (a), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the UI part is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and in this UI part, the change icon h0 is placed in the hold display frame FL1 at the center. It is displayed in the accommodated form, and on the left side of the variation icon h0 is formed a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 85 (a), since two variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The change icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 are in the default display mode, but the second hold icon h12 is blinking in white and is displayed in the display mode of the pre-reading notice. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows a state in which the first decorative symbol is variably displayed. At this time, the hold display frame FL1 is a default display mode and does not overlap the decorative design. Further, the tutorial display portion TT1 is not displayed. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a balloon portion TT2 is displayed on the left side of the display screen together with the princess Chibi character CH1. A plurality of question marks are displayed side by side in the balloon part TT2, suggesting that a UI part FO animation will be performed in which the UI part including the hold display frame FL1 described later is out of frame. That is, it can be said that the display of the balloon part TT2 shown in FIG. 85 (a) is a display related to a predetermined effect in which the hold display frame FL1 is hidden by the frame-out.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 85 (a), “castle town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. In addition, a button image 136a is displayed in a default display form above the stage name display section ST1, and the second decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner at the top of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. ing.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the state that the Tono-sama character is on the stage is shown, and in the upper part of the display screen, the second reserved number display and special diagram of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 are shown. The 4th symbol of 1 and special figure 2 is displayed.

  In addition, the above-mentioned family crest character 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned eight-generation character 224Fa and the general character character 224Fb are disposed above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Has been.

  FIG. 85 (b) shows a state where the UI part FO animation is performed and the UI part is framed out together with the hold display frame FL1 below the display screen. This UI unit FO animation is performed, for example, when shifting to darkening effects or SP reach.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 85 (c), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the ninja character NJ1 is displayed, and the shuriken SH1 is thrown toward the position where the second hold icon h12 was displayed. Has been done. That is, in this effect example, an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon by the ninja character NJ1 is performed even when the hold display frame FL1 is not displayed. As shown in FIG. 85 (c), the ninja character NJ1 overlaps the decorative design and also overlaps the balloon portion TT2.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 85 (d), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the shuriken SH1 reaches the position where the second hold icon h12 is displayed, and the exploding effect EF2 is displayed. Yes.

  Thereafter, FIG. 85 (e) shows a state in which the emission color of the family crest character 224E changes from white to green. That is, a notice is given that the display color of the second hold icon h12 changes from white to green.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 85 (f), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect EF2 is erased, but since the UI unit is still out of frame, the second hold icon h12 is still displayed. It has not been. On the other hand, a sound “picone” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the display mode of the hold icon has changed.

  FIG. 85 (g) shows a state in which an animation in which the UI unit enters a frame (UI unit FI animation) is performed and the UI unit FI animation is completed. When the UI part FI animation is completed, the UI part is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L together with the hold display frame FL1. At this time, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is changed from white to green.

  In this production example, the UI section including the hold display frame FL1 is out of the frame, and during this time, the display mode of the hold icon is changed. For example, FIG. 85 (a ′) to FIG. As shown in ′), the UI portion may be framed out while leaving the hold display frame FL1. Here, the example of the effect shown in FIG. 85 (a ′) is the same as that in FIG. 85 (a), and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 85 (b ′) following FIG. 85 (a ′) shows a state where the UI unit FO animation is completed. As shown in FIG. 85 (b '), in this production example, when the UI part FO animation is performed, the UI part is framed out below the display screen, but the hold display frame FL1 is displayed without being framed out. The state is maintained.

  In FIG. 85 (c ′), the extended animation of the hold display frame FL1 is performed, the hold display frame FL1 is expanded upward, and then the ninja character NJ1 throws the shuriken SH1 in the hold display frame FL1. It is shown. That is, as shown in FIG. 85 (c ′), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the ninja character NJ1 is displayed in the extended portion of the hold display frame FL1, and the shuriken SH1 is displayed by the second hold icon h12. There is an effect of throwing it to the position where it was done. In other words, in this effect example, a change effect of the display mode of the hold icon by the ninja character NJ1 is performed even when the hold icon that is the target of the change of the display mode is not displayed.

  FIG. 86 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the hold change notice effect. Here, in FIGS. 86 (a-1) to 86 (a-7), an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon and the display of the notice icon are shown at the same time. FIG. 86 (b-1) to FIG. 86 (b-5) show how the hold icon changes to the display mode of the prefetch notice.

  The effect example shown in FIG. 86 (a-1) is the same as that shown in FIG. 77 (f) and described above, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 86 (a-1) following FIG. 86 (a-1), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows the appearance of the ninja character NJ1 in the upper part of the hold display frame FL1. Note that the ninja character NJ1 is partially overlapped with the family crest character 224E, and is difficult to view compared to a state where the character is not partially overlapped with the crest character 224E.

  In addition, in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the animation of throwing the bomb icon I61 by the character of Tono-sama is started, and the state of the character of Tono-sama trying to throw the bomb icon I61 is shown.

  Thereafter, FIG. 86 (a-3) shows a state in which the crest character 224E descends toward the initial position. As a result, a portion of the ninja character NJ1 that is not overlapped with the family crest member 224E is enlarged, so that the visual recognition is easy. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows a state where the ninja character NJ1 is throwing the shuriken SH1. The shuriken SH1 is moving toward the second hold icon h12 for which a pre-reading notice is being made.

  On the other hand, the third decorative symbol display device 208N shows a state in which the Tono-sama character has thrown a bomb icon I61. The timing at which the bomb icon I61 starts to be thrown may be the same as the timing at which the ninja character NJ1 starts throwing the shuriken SH1, or before the start of throwing the shuriken SH1. Alternatively, it may be the timing after the throwing of the shuriken SH1 is started. In this case, it may be configured to always be performed at any timing, or may be configured so that the timing varies depending on the case.

  Thereafter, FIG. 86 (a-4) shows a state in which the crest character 224E returns to the initial position. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a state where the shuriken SH1 is heading toward the second hold icon h12 is shown.

  On the other hand, at the timing shown in FIG. 86 (a-4), the bomb icon I61 is displayed so as to move from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Note that the bomb icon I61 overlaps the first decorative symbol and also overlaps the spear character GY1 and the speech balloon TT3. In other words, the first decorative symbol is overlapped with the bomb icon I61, and the spear character GY1 and the speech balloon TT3 are also overlapped with the bomb icon I61. The bomb icon I61 may be overlapped with the first decorative symbol, or may be overlapped with the spear character GY1 or the balloon portion TT3.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 86 (a-5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the display of the effect EF2 in which the shuriken SH1 overlaps the second hold icon h12 and the second hold icon h12 explodes. Has been done.

  On the other hand, at the timing shown in FIG. 86 (a-5), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows a state in which the bomb icon I61 thrown by the Tono-sama character bursts. Note that the timing at which the bomb icon I61 bursts may be the same as the timing at which the effect EF2 is displayed, may be the timing before the effect EF2 is displayed, or after the effect EF2 is displayed. It may be the timing. In this case, it may be configured to always be performed at any timing, or may be configured so that the timing varies depending on the case.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 86 (a-6), a notice is given that the emission color of the crest character 224E changes from white to green and the display color of the second hold icon h12 changes from white to green.

  On the other hand, at the timing shown in FIG. 86 (a-6), the ruptured bomb icon I61 is changed to the swordsman notice icon I62, and the swordsman reach is notified. Here, at the timing when the notice icon I62 of the swordsman appears, a sound notifying that may be output from the speaker 120. In addition, the timing at which the swordsman notice icon I62 changes may be the same as the timing at which the light emission color of the family crest character 224E changes to green, or before the light emission color of the crest character 224E changes to green. Or the timing after the emission color of the family crest character 224E changes to green. In this case, it may be configured to always be performed at any timing, or may be configured so that the timing varies depending on the case.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 86 (a-7), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect EF2 is erased and the second hold icon h12 is visually recognized again as compared with the state where the effect EF2 is not erased. Displayed easily. At this time, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is displayed in a mode of lighting in green. On the other hand, a sound “picone” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that the display mode of the hold icon has changed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 86 (a-7), the notice icon I62 of the swordsman is arranged in a position overlapping the left end portion of the tutorial display portion TT1 while being reduced in size, and then the bomb icon I61 by the character of Tono-sama. The throwing animation ends. In addition, you may alert | report by the audio | voice output that the notice icon I62 of the swordsman is arrange | positioned in the tutorial display part TT1. In this way, since the swordsman notice icon I62 is arranged at a position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display part TT1, it is compared with the state where the swordsman notice icon I62 is not arranged at the position overlapping the front side of the tutorial display part TT1. As a result, at least part of the characters displayed on the tutorial display portion TT1 may be difficult to view. In other words, according to this production example, it may be said that the swordsman notice icon I62 may overlap the tutorial display portion TT1 as a part of the hold display frame. In this way, in this production example, the swordsman notice icon I62 overlaps the front side of the tutorial display part TT1, so that it is easy to attract the player to display the tutorial display part TT1 and the swordsman notice icon I62. You may be able to. In addition, there may be cases where the presence of the tutorial is noticed, and it is possible to concentrate on the symbol variation display rather than the explanation of the effects that may occur in the future.

  The production example shown in FIG. 86 (b-1) is the same as that shown in FIG. 76 (a) except that the text “Panda is a master of the lord” is displayed in the tutorial display section TT1. The explanation is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 86 (b-2) following FIG. 86 (b-1), in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a throwing animation of the bomb icon I61 by the Tono-sama character is started, and the Tono-sama character becomes a bomb icon. A state of trying to throw I61 is shown.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 86 (b-3), the character of Tono throws a bomb icon I61, and the bomb icon I61 moves from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The state of doing is shown.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 86 (b-4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the bomb icon I61 thrown by the Tono-sama character reaches the second hold icon h12, and the bomb icon I61 explodes. Is shown. The display of the ruptured bomb icon I61 covers the entire second hold icon h12 and also overlaps a part of the first hold icon h11.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 86 (b-5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the ruptured bomb icon I61 is erased and compared with a state in which the ruptured bomb icon I61 is not erased. The hold icon h12 is easily displayed again. At this time, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is displayed in the display mode of the pre-reading notice (display mode flashing in white). As described above, the manner of changing the display mode of the prefetch notice of the hold icon is not limited to when the hold is increased, but may be performed at an appropriate timing after the hold is increased. Moreover, you may make it change the display aspect of a holding | maintenance icon by another change production like this production example. Moreover, the effect which changes the display mode of the pre-reading notice of the hold icon mentioned above may be performed in a state where the UI unit is out of frame, for example.

  FIG. 87 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the hold change notice effect. Here, FIG. 87 shows a state in which an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed while moving the sub display devices (second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N).

  The example of production shown in FIG. 87 (a-1) is the same as that shown in FIG. 77 (d) and described above, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 87 (a-2) following FIG. 87 (a-1) shows a state in which the Tono-like character displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is erased together with the stage.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 87 (a-3), the third decorative symbol display device 208N moves toward the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The situation is shown. At this time, each part of the samurai character GY1, the balloon part TT3, the tutorial display part TT1, and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol is overlapped with the third decorative symbol display device 208N. Compared with the state where TT3, tutorial display part TT1, and each part of the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are not overlapped with the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is difficult to visually recognize each.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 87 (a-4), the third decorative symbol display device 208N is continuously moving. In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a hold display frame FL2 is displayed at the bottom of the display screen, and a variation icon h00 is displayed in the frame. The hold display frame FL2 and the change icon h00 displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N are larger in size than the hold display frame FL1 and the change icon h0 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, respectively. . That is, it can be said that the hold display frame FL2 displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is an expanded display of the hold display frame FL1 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 87 (a-4), the overlap with the character GY1 of the heel has been eliminated, but the balloon part TT3 and each part of the right symbol of the first decorative symbol are still displayed in the third decorative symbol display. It is overlapped with the device 208N. Furthermore, at the timing shown in FIG. 87 (a-4), the hold display frame FL1, the variation icon h0 accommodated in the hold display frame FL1, and each part of the balloon portion TT2 are overlapped with the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In comparison with the state in which the hold display frame FL1 and the variation icon h0 accommodated in the hold display frame FL1 and a part of the balloon portion TT2 are not overlapped with the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is difficult to see. .

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 87 (a-5), the third decorative symbol display device 208N has finished moving, with its center being aligned with the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Then, the hold display frame FL1 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the middle symbols of the first decorative symbol all overlap the third decorative symbol display device 208N, together with the middle symbols and the hold display frame FL1. The fluctuation icon h0 becomes invisible in front view. In addition, a part of the first hold icon h11, the balloon part TT2, and the balloon part TT3 are also overlapped by the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and a part of the first hold icon h11, the balloon part TT2, and the balloon part TT3 are overlapped. Compared with a state in which the third decorative symbol display device 208N is not overlapped, it is difficult to visually recognize.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 87 (a-6), in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the extended animation of the hold display frame FL2 is performed and the hold display frame FL2 expands upward, and the extended portion is displayed with the ninja's A state in which the character NJ2 appears is shown. That is, it can be said that the hold display frame FL2 in which the hold display frame FL1 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is extended and displayed is further displayed in an extended manner. The ninja character NJ2 displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N is larger in size than the ninja character NJ1 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, but may be the same. However, it may be made smaller.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 87 (a-7), the third decorative symbol display device 208N displays a state in which the ninja character NJ2 throws the shuriken SH1. The shuriken SH1 is moving toward the second notice icon h12 for which a prefetch notice is being made. It should be noted that the shrine sword SH1 effect display may be displayed on the front side or on the back side of the conversation notice display by the Chibi princess character CH1 or the samurai character GY1. . It can be said that the performance by the ninja character NJ2 is performed in the extended portion of the extended display frame FL2. In other words, it can be said that the ninja character NJ2, which is an example of the effect display, is displayed in the expanded portion of the hold display frame FL2. The effect by the ninja character NJ2 may function as an effect of pre-reading notice or change notice. Further, the effect display by the shuriken SH1 is related to the effect performed in the expanded hold display frame FL2 (the effect by the ninja character NJ2), but it can be said that the effect is performed outside the hold display frame FL2.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 87 (a-8), the shuriken SH1 moves from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and moves toward the second hold icon h12. The situation is shown.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 87 (a-9), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the display of the effect EF2 in which the shuriken SH1 overlaps the second hold icon h12 and the second hold icon h12 explodes. Has been done. The effect EF2 is partially overlapped with the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  Thereafter, FIG. 87 (a-10) shows a state in which the emission color of the family crest character 224E changes from white to green. In addition, the LEDs arranged around the third decorative symbol display device 208N emit green light, and these light emitting means notify that the display color of the second hold icon h12 changes from white to green. To do. It should be noted that the timing of the change in the emission color of the family crest character 224E may be the same as the timing at which the LED provided on the third decorative symbol display device 208N emits green light. The timing may be after the provided LED emits green light, or may be the timing before the LED provided in the third decorative symbol display device 208N emits green light. In this case, it may be configured to always be performed at any timing, or may be configured so that the timing varies depending on the case.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 87 (a-11), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the effect EF2 is erased, and the second hold icon h12 is visually recognized again as compared with the state where the effect EF2 is not erased. Displayed easily. At this time, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is displayed in a mode of lighting in green. Here, it may be notified by voice output that the display mode of the hold icon has changed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 87 (a-12), the third decorative symbol display device 208N shows a state in which the hold display frame FL2 is erased together with the ninja character NJ2. In this case, for example, it may be performed by animation out of the frame from the third decorative symbol display device 208N, may be erased by fading out, or may be erased suddenly.

  Thereafter, FIG. 87 (a-13) shows a state in which the third decorative symbol display device 208N moves rightward toward the initial position. At the timing shown in FIG. 87 (a-13), the overlap of the first hold icon h11 is eliminated, and the hold display frame FL1 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed in the third decorative symbol display. A part of the device 208N is overlapped, and part of the state is visible along with the change icon h0. In addition, the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol is also partially overlapped with the third decorative symbol display device 208N, which is one in comparison with the state where the third decorative symbol display device 208N is not partially overlapped. While the part is visible, the right symbol is overlapped with the third decorative symbol display device 208N, which is difficult to visually recognize compared to the non-overlapped state.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 87 (a-14), the third decorative symbol display device 208N is shown in the initial position. At the timing shown in FIG. 87 (a-14), the overlap is eliminated for each display in the first decorative symbol display device 208L that has been overlapped by the third decorative symbol display device 208N so far. As compared with a state where the is not solved, both displays are in a state of easy visual recognition.

  Thereafter, FIG. 87 (a-15) shows a state in which the LEDs emitting light around the third decorative symbol display device 208N are turned off. In addition, you may make it light by a default light emission mode (For example, the light emission mode lighted in white), without turning off. On the other hand, the family crest member 224E still emits light in green corresponding to the display color of the second hold icon h12.

  In this effect example, one of the two sub display devices (second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N) is used as the first decorative symbol display device. The display device 208L is moved so as to overlap, and an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed. For example, as shown in FIG. 87B, both of the two sub display devices are connected. You may make it perform the effect which moves and changes the display mode of a holding | maintenance icon.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 87 (b), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are connected to the first decorative symbol when changing the display mode of the hold icon. The display device 208L is moved to a position close to each other at the center. The hold display frame FL2 is expanded and displayed from the third decorative symbol display device 208N to the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the lower portion of the hold display frame FL2 displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N. And a ninja character NJ2 is displayed above the variation icon h00. At this time, by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the balloon part TT2, the balloon part TT3, the first hold icon h11, the second hold icon h12, the hold display frame FL1, and the change icon All of h0 are overlapped, and the tutorial display portion TT1 and a part of Princess Chibi's character CH1 are overlapped.

  FIG. 88 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the hold change notice effect. Here, in FIG. 88, in place of the two sub-display devices described above, only one sub-display device (sub-decorative symbol display device 208P is provided, and this sub-decorative symbol display device 208P has an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon. Is shown.

  88 differs from the above-described embodiment in that a decoration symbol display device 208 as a main display device and a sub decoration symbol display device 208P as a sub display device are provided. The sub-decorative symbol display device 208P is disposed on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the upper end edge of the sub-decorative symbol display device 208P overlaps the front side of a part of the lower end edge of the ornamental symbol display device 208. ing. As shown in FIG. 88 (a), on the sub-decorative symbol display device 208P, the hold display frame FL1 and the hold icon display area are arranged side by side in the horizontal direction, and below these are the tutorial display section TT1. Is displayed, a change icon h0 is displayed in the hold display frame FL1, and hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the change icon h0 and the first hold icon h11 are in the default display mode, but the second hold icon h12 is in the display mode of the prefetch notice. In the tutorial display section TT1, “Panda is a master of the lord” is displayed, and the relationship between the panda and the lord is explained. In the decorative symbol display device 208, a balloon portion TT2 is displayed on the left side of the display screen together with a princess Chibi character CH1. The speech balloon TT2 is displayed with a dialogue “Where is the bag?”. In addition, a balloon portion TT3 is displayed on the right side of the display screen together with the frog character GY1. A speech display “here is” is displayed on the balloon portion TT3. That is, in the effect example shown in FIG. 88 (a), conversation notice is performed. Note that the balloon part TT2 and the balloon part TT3 are overlapped with the decorative symbols, but the decorative symbol may be overlapped with the balloon parts TT2 and TT3. Further, in the upper right part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the second reserved number display of the special figures 1 and 2 and the fourth graphic of the special figures 1 and 2 are displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 88 (a), the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner.

  Thereafter, FIG. 88 (b) shows a state in which an extended animation of the hold display frame FL1 is performed, the hold display frame FL1 expands upward, and a ninja character NJ2 appears in the extended portion. At this time, the hold display frame FL1 displayed on the sub-decorative symbol display device 208P extends from the sub-decoration symbol display device 208P to the decorative symbol display device 208, and is displayed on the decor symbol display device 208. A ninja character NJ1 is displayed on the expanded portion of FL1. Here, a part of the balloon part TT2 is overlapped with the expanded hold display frame FL1, and a part of the balloon part TT2 is visually recognized compared with a state where it is not overlapped with the expanded hold display frame FL1. It is considered difficult. In the decorative symbol display device 208, an effect display in which the ninja character NJ1 throws the shuriken SH1 is performed, and at the timing shown in FIG. The state of moving toward the displayed second hold icon h12 is shown.

  Thereafter, FIG. 88 (c) shows that the thrown shuriken SH1 moves from the decorative symbol display device 208 to the sub-decorative symbol display device 208P and moves toward the second hold icon h12.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 88 (d), the sub-decorative symbol display device 208P displays the effect EF2 in which the shuriken SH1 overlaps the second hold icon h12 and the second hold icon h12 explodes. Yes. This effect EF2 is overlapped with a part of the first hold icon h11 displayed adjacently.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 88 (e), in the sub-decorative symbol display device 208P, the effect EF2 is erased, and the second hold icon h12 is displayed again more easily than when the effect EF2 is not erased. Is done. At this time, the display mode of the second hold icon h12 is displayed in a mode of lighting in green. Here, it may be notified by voice output that the display mode of the hold icon has changed.

  FIG. 89 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the hold change notice effect. Here, FIGS. 89 (a-1) to 89 (a-6) show a state in which an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed when the error display is being performed. FIG. 89 (b) shows a state in which an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed when an effect display performed over a plurality of decorative symbol display devices is performed. (C-1) to (c-3) in FIG. 89 show that an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed by operating the effect button 136, and FIG. 89 (d-1) to FIG. FIG. 6D-3 shows a state in which an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon when the button effect is performed, prompting the user to operate the effect button 136, is shown.

  The production example shown in FIG. 89 (a-1) is the same as that described above with reference to FIG. 77 (d) except that error display is performed, so only the differences will be described in detail. Detailed explanations of the others are omitted.

  In FIG. 89 (a-1), when the lower pan is full, a letter “please pull out the ball” is displayed to notify that the lower pan full error has occurred. A state in which the tan error display ER is displayed is shown. The lower plate full tank error display ER is an example of an error display in the present embodiment, and other error displays include, for example, a door open display for notifying that the front frame door 106 is open. Since such an error display needs to be promptly communicated to the player, it is displayed with priority over other displays. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 89 (a-1), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows a state where the lower pan full tank error display ER overlaps a part of the blowing portion TT2. Such an error display is continuously displayed until the error is resolved.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 89 (a-2), the crest character 224E is lifted from the initial position and overlapped with the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In FIG. 89 (a-2), the family crest character 224E is disposed on the front surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, so that a part of the lower pan full tank error display ER is overlapped with the family crest character 224E. In addition, it is difficult to visually recognize a part of the lower plate full tank error display ER as compared with a state in which a part of the crest member 224E is not overlapped.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 89 (a-3), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the extended animation of the hold display frame FL1 is performed, and the hold display frame FL1 is expanded upward, so that it is more than the crest character 224E. A state of appearing upward is shown. In this production example, since the error display is displayed with priority over the hold display frame FL1, a part of the hold display frame FL1 is overlapped with the lower plate full tank error display ER, and a part of the hold display frame FL1 is displayed. Is difficult to visually recognize compared with a state where the lower plate full tank error display ER is not overlapped.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 89 (a-4), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows the appearance of the ninja character NJ1 in the upper part of the hold display frame FL1. Note that a portion of the ninja character NJ1 is overlapped with the lower plate full tank error display ER, and it is difficult to see compared with a state where a part of the ninja character NJ1 is not overlapped with the lower plate full tank error display ER. It is said that.

  FIG. 89 (a-5) shows a state in which the family crest member 224E descends toward the initial position. Then, a portion of the ninja character NJ1 that is not overlapped with the family crest member 224E is enlarged. However, since a part of the ninja character NJ1 is still overlapped with the lower plate full tank error display ER, the ninja is compared with a state where a part of the ninja character NJ1 is not overlapped with the lower plate full tank error display ER. The character NJ1 is difficult to visually recognize. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows a state where the ninja character NJ1 is throwing the shuriken SH1. The shuriken SH1 is moving toward the second hold icon h12 for which a pre-reading notice is being made.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 89 (a-6), the crest character 224E is returned to the initial position. Then, the overlap state of the family crest character 224E with respect to the hold display frame FL1, the change icon h0, and the ninja character NJ1 is canceled. However, since the lower plate full tank error is still continued, the lower plate full tank error display ER is still displayed, and the ninja character NJ1 displayed in a part of the hold display frame FL1 and the extended part of the hold display frame FL1 is displayed. Part of it overlaps the bottom plate full tank error display ER. In addition, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows a state where the shuriken SH1 is heading toward the second hold icon h12.

  89 (b), the notice display YK is displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and is shown scrolling to the left. Has been. At this time, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the hold display frame FL1 is expanded and displayed upward, the ninja character NJ1 is displayed in the extended portion, and an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed. The situation is shown. Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 89 (b), the second hold icon h12 is in the display mode of the prefetch notice. Further, in the tutorial display section TT1, a character display of “enemy invades” is displayed, and contents related to the notice display YK are displayed. In this effect example, in order to preferentially display the effect display in the display mode of the hold icon over the notice display YK, a part of the notice display YK is overlapped with the hold display frame FL1 displayed.

  89 (c-1) shows a state in which the second hold icon h12 is a button hold icon that is a display form imitating the effect button 136, as an example of the display form of the prefetch notice. In this production example, Princess Chibi character CH1 and Samurai character GY1 are not displayed, and tutorial display portion TT1 is not displayed. In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the button image 136a is not displayed, but the button image 136a may be displayed. Further, since the button hold icon is displayed at a position separated from the hold display frame FL1, it can be said that the button hold icon is a non-overlapping display even when the hold display frame FL1 is enlarged. The display mode of the hold icon of the button may be displayed when the hold is increased, or may be changed from another display mode (for example, a default display mode) after the hold is increased.

  Thereafter, when the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 89 (c-2), the second hold icon h12 is changed from the button hold icon as shown in FIG. 89 (c-3). It changes into the hold icon of the display mode of Tonosama character. It should be noted that the operation of the effect button 136 is in a state where it can be accepted on condition that the symbol is changing, and cannot be accepted during the symbol stop display, but the operation of the effect button 136 can be accepted even during the symbol stop display. Also good.

  FIG. 89 (d-1) shows a state where an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is being performed when the button effect is being performed. Specifically, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a button image 136a simulating the effect button 136 is displayed in the center, and a remaining time display bar indicating the operation effective period of the effect button 136 is displayed below the button image 136a. It is displayed. That is, a button effect is performed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this time, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the hold display frame FL1 is expanded and displayed upward, the ninja character NJ1 is displayed in the extended portion, and an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is also performed. . In this effect example, in order to preferentially display the effect display that changes the display mode of the hold icon over the button effect, the button image 136a and a part of the remaining time display bar are expanded and displayed on the hold display frame FL1. It is overlapped. In addition, while the button effect is being performed, the first decorative symbol is not displayed. Therefore, it can be said that the button effect is an effect that does not overlap with the decorative symbol, and the decorative symbol is a button effect. It can also be said that the production is not overlapped. At this time, when the error display described above is performed, the button effect and the hold display frame FL1 are displayed with priority. When the above button hold icon is displayed, it is displayed on the front side of the button image 136a and the remaining time display bar, and is displayed on the front side of the hold display frame FL1, but the button image 136a is displayed. May be displayed on the back side of the remaining time display bar, or may be displayed on the back side of the hold display frame FL1.

  After that, when the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 89 (d-2), the cut-in displayed with the Tono-sama character up and displayed as shown in FIG. 89 (d-3). Display may occur. By performing this cut-in display, the player may be able to recognize that the jackpot reliability is high. In this effect example, in order to preferentially display the effect that changes the display mode of the hold icon over the cut-in effect, a part of the cut-in image is overlapped with the hold display frame FL1 displayed in an expanded manner. . At this time, when the error display described above is performed, it is displayed with priority over the cut-in display and the hold display frame FL1. When the above button hold icon is displayed, it is displayed on the front side of the cut-in display, and is displayed on the front side of the hold display frame FL1, but on the back side of the cut-in display. It may be displayed, or may be displayed on the back side of the hold display frame FL1.

  FIG. 90 is a diagram showing step by step an example of a symbol variation display applicable to the present embodiment. 90 (a-1) to 90 (a-5) do not include the sub display device, and the effect display is performed only by the decorative symbol display device 208 as the main display device. 90 (b-1) to FIG. 90 (b-2) show how the error display is performed. FIG. 90 (c) shows that the display positions of the change icon h0 and the ninja character NJ1 are reversed in the hold display frame FL1, and FIG. 90 (d-1) to FIG. -2) shows a state in which a hold display frame is displayed in the hold icon display area.

  90 (a-1) is different from the above-described embodiment in that it includes only the decorative symbol display device 208 as the main display device and does not include the sub display device. Then, as shown in FIG. 90 (a-1), the UI unit is arranged at the lower part of the display screen of the decorative design display device 208, the second decorative design is displayed at the upper left of the display screen, and the display screen In the upper right of, the second hold number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 and the fourth symbol of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are displayed.

  Further, a family crest character 224E is arranged below the decorative symbol display device 208, and an eight-yield character 224Fa and a general character character 224Fb are arranged above the decorative symbol display device 208.

  As shown in FIG. 90 (a-1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol is displayed as a combination of “decoration 6−decoration 2−decoration 2”, and fluctuations are performed. In addition, variable display is performed on the second decorative symbol. In the UI portion, a hold display frame FL1 in which the change icon h0 is accommodated is displayed, and two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The change icon h0 and the hold icons h11 and h12 are all in the default display mode. Further, the tutorial display portion TT1 is not displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 90 (a-2), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs wipe display in which the wipe images WP1 and WP2 move from the left and right of the display screen toward the center. In this effect example, images simulating a heel are used as the wipe images WP1 and WP2, and an effect display that closes the heel is performed as the wipe display. Here, the term “wipe” refers to a video effect that is displayed by interrupting the next image to be displayed from a part of the display screen when switching images. There are various types of techniques for wiping, but any technique can be applied. In this production example, the wipe display is performed by the wipe images WP1 and WP2 after the fluctuation fluctuation is started by the combination of the decorative pattern of the loss, but the wipe display is performed at the timing when the fluctuation fluctuation is finished and the display is confirmed. May be performed. Further, for example, it may be performed when a stage change is performed, or may be performed when a transition is made to a super reach effect, and can be performed at an appropriate timing. The wipe images WP1 and WP2 overlap the UI part and the first decorative symbol, while they overlap the second decorative symbol, the second reserved number display, and the fourth symbol. Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 90 (a-2), the two hold icons h11 and h12 and the hold display frame FL1 displayed in the hold icon display area do not overlap the wipe images WP1 and WP2. Note that the change icon h0 is deleted at the timing when the wipe images WP1 and WP2 are started to be displayed. Here, the timing at which the change icon h0 is deleted may be a timing before the display of the wipe images WP1 and WP2 is started, or at the same timing as the timing at which the wipe images WP1 and WP2 are started to be displayed. The timing may be after the timing at which the display of the wipe images WP1 and WP2 is started. In this case, it may be configured to always be performed at any timing, or may be configured so that the timing varies depending on the case.

  FIG. 90 (a-3) shows a state in which the wipe images WP1 and WP2 further move toward the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. At the timing shown in FIG. 90 (a-3), the two hold icons h11 and h12 displayed in the hold icon display area overlap the wipe image WP1, but the hold display frame FL1 is the wipe image WP1. , WP2 is not overlapped.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 90 (a-4), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the entire display screen is covered with the wipe images WP1 and WP2, and a state in which the display is confirmed with the lost symbol is displayed. Therefore, the entire hold display frame FL1 is overlapped with the wipe images WP1 and WP2. Further, the second decorative symbol displayed at the upper left of the display screen is a combination of “decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2” according to the combination of the decorative symbols displayed when the first decorative symbol fluctuates. The display is stopped, and the special figure 1 figure 4 is also stopped and displayed as a lost pattern.

  Thereafter, when the hold is exhausted and the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is started, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a wipe display in which the wipe images WP1 and WP2 are framed out in the horizontal direction of the display screen, respectively. Is called. As a result, the UI part is visible and the hold display frame FL1 is also displayed so as to be visible. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol, the second decorative symbol, and the special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol have started to be displayed in a variable manner. At this time, for example, by the hold movement animation, the first hold icon displayed as the first hold icon h11 moves to the hold display frame FL1 and is displayed as the change icon h0. The second hold icon displayed as the second hold icon h12 also moves to the display position of the first hold icon and is displayed as the first hold icon h11. In the tutorial display section TT1, a character display of “Panda is a master of lord” is displayed.

  90B-1 to FIG. 90B-2 show a state in which the wipe display is performed during the error display. 90 (b-1) to FIG. 90 (b-2), the example of production shown in FIG. 90 (a-3) to FIG. Since it is the same as a-4), only different points will be described in detail, and detailed description of other points will be omitted. As shown in FIGS. 90 (b-1) to (b-2), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which the lower pan full tank error display ER described above overlaps the wipe images WP1 and WP2. Has been. Since such an error display needs to be promptly communicated to the player, it is displayed with priority over other displays. Therefore, also in the case shown in FIG. 90 (b-1), the lower pan full tank error display ER is given priority over the wipe images WP1 and WP2. Note that, as shown in FIG. 90 (b-2), even when the symbol is confirmed and displayed, the lower pan full error display ER is not erased and is displayed overlapping the wipe images WP1 and WP2. . Note that an error display such as a lower plate full tank error display ER may be overlapped with the wipe images WP1 and WP2.

  FIG. 90 (c) shows that the display positions of the change icon h0 and the ninja character NJ1 are reversed in the hold display frame FL1. Here, FIG. 90 (c) is the same as FIG. 77 (i) except that the display positions of the change icon h0 and the ninja character NJ1 are reversed, so only the differences will be described in detail. Detailed explanation is omitted. In the effect example shown in FIG. 90C, for example, when the extended animation of the hold display frame FL1 is performed, the change icon h0 moves upward along with the extension of the hold display frame FL1, and from the back side of the change icon h0. An effect such that a ninja character NJ1 appears is performed. Thus, in this effect example, it can be said that the display position of the variation icon h0 is changed when the hold display frame FL1 is expanded.

  In FIG. 90 (d-1), a hold display frame FL4 surrounding the second hold icon h12 that is the subject of the pre-reading notice is displayed, and the hold display frame FL4 expands upward, and the extended portion has a ninja display. A state in which the character NJ3 is displayed is shown. 90 (d-1) is the same as the example shown in FIG. 77 (except that the hold display frame FL4 surrounding the second hold icon h12 is displayed and is not displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1). Since it is the same as b), only different points will be described in detail, and detailed descriptions of the other will be omitted. As shown in FIG. 90 (d-1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the hold display frame FL4 is displayed so as to surround the second hold icon h12 which is the display mode of the prefetch notice. The hold display frame FL4 is, for example, a default display mode having a size that matches the size of the second hold icon h12, and is moved in from the lower part of the display screen to the position surrounding the second hold icon h12. Thereafter, a display in which the hold display frame FL4 expands upward is performed in the manner described above by the extended animation. Then, the ninja character NJ3 is displayed on the extended portion of the extended hold display frame FL4, and an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed as described above. It should be noted that both the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon performed by expanding the hold display frame FL1 and the effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon performed by expanding the hold display frame FL4 are performed. You may make it overlap, and you may make it the time when both productions are performed not overlap.

  Moreover, when the effect which changes the display mode of a holding | maintenance icon is performed, when a symbol stops display and the next symbol fluctuation | variation display is started, as shown in FIG.90 (d-2), The hold display frame FL4 also moves in accordance with the movement of the hold icon. In this case, for example, when the symbol stop display is performed, the extended hold display frame FL4 is reduced and changed to the default display mode, and then the symbol is fixedly displayed. Then, the hold display frame FL4 of the default display mode is also moved in accordance with the movement of the second hold icon h12 by the moving animation, and the symbol variation display is started. Thereafter, the hold display frame FL4 is expanded with the extended animation so that the hold display frame FL4 is directed upward. The hold display frame FL4 may be moved in such a manner. Further, at the time of symbol stop display, the hold display frame FL4 may be once erased, and the hold display frame FL4 may be displayed again after the next symbol variation display is started. Also, the display of the hold display frame FL4 may be maintained in an expanded state during the symbol stop display, and the hold display frame FL4 may be moved according to the movement display by the moving animation of the second hold icon h12.

  FIG. 91 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the expansion effect of the hold display frame. Here, FIG. 91 (a-1) to FIG. 91 (a-4) show how the tutorial display section TT6 as the hold display frame expands, and FIG. 91 (b-1) to FIG. In b-5), a state is shown in which the hold display frame in which the hold icon is accommodated is expanded and an effect of changing the display mode of the hold icon is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 91 (a-1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI part is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and a change icon h0 is placed at the center of this UI part in the hold display frame. It is displayed in the form accommodated in FL1, and a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the fluctuation icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 91 (a-1), since two variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The change icon h0 and the two hold icons h11 and h12 are both in the default display mode. At this time, the hold display frame FL1 is a default display mode and does not overlap the decorative design. Further, in this effect example, the tutorial display unit TT6 extends in the left-right direction along the lower end edge of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is disposed below the hold display frame FL1 and the hold icon display area. . In the tutorial display section TT6, a character display “Panda is a master of the lord” is displayed and an explanation display is shown. In this effect example, the tutorial display unit TT6 may function as a hold display frame.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 91 (a-1), “castle town” is displayed, and it is informed that the current stage is a castle town. In addition, on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed. In this example effect, the button image 136a is not displayed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage is shown, and in the upper part of the display screen, the second reserved number display of Special Fig. 1 and Special Fig. 2 and Special Fig. 1 are shown. And the 4th symbol of special figure 2 is displayed. Further, the first decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  In addition, the above-mentioned family crest character 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned eight-generation character 224Fa and the general character character 224Fb are disposed above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Has been.

  FIG. 91 (a-2) shows a state in which the range of the tutorial display portion TT6 is expanded by pushing up the hold display frame FL1 and the hold icon display region by an animation in which the tutorial display portion TT6 extends upward. ing. In the expanded tutorial display section TT6, the drinker showdown reach production is started. At this time, the first decorative symbol that has been variably displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L moves to the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the variable display is continued. Therefore, in this effect example, it can be said that the area where the display of the decorative symbols is not disturbed is expanded. In other words, by moving the hold display frame FL1 and the hold icon display area, the lower area (lower area) of the hold display frame FL1 and the hold icon display area is expanded. The display performed in the lower area is a display that does not overlap with the decorative pattern that is variably displayed, for example, the display of a dialogue such as a conversation notice, the display of the notice, or the effect of changing the display of the hold icon. It can be said. Further, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a character display of “SP development by victory” is performed, and the contents of the effect performed when winning by the drinker confrontation reach effect are notified. In the drinking confrontation reach directing, the main character's Tono-sama is confronted with drinking, and if the intoxication is drunk, the main character's Tono-sama will win and it will be announced that it will develop into SP reach. When the drinker confrontation reach effect is started, the hold display frame FL1 and the hold icon display area may be hidden, or the hold display frame FL1 is displayed and the hold icon display area is hidden. May be.

  FIG. 91 (a-3) shows a state in which the drinker confrontation reach effect is continuously performed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 91 (a-4), in the case of shifting to the SP reach, an effect display in which the frog is intoxicated and the main character wins is performed. On the other hand, when the result of losing is displayed without shifting to the SP reach, as shown in FIG. 91 (a-4 ′), the main character's lord is drunk, and the main character's lord is defeated by the trap. Is done. The tutorial display unit TT6 in the state of FIG. 91 (a-1) may be configured so that the effect display performed in the tutorial display unit TT6 in the state of FIG. 91 (a-2) is not performed. The tutorial display unit TT6 in the state of FIG. 91 (a-2) may be configured such that the explanation display performed in the tutorial display unit TT6 in the state of FIG. 91 (a-1) is not performed. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 91 (a-2), the hold icon and the change icon may be hidden.

  As shown in FIG. 91 (b-1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the UI unit UI2 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen. The UI unit UI2 in this effect example has a hold icon display area on the left side. The hold icon display area is partitioned by four frames, each forms a hold display frame, and one hold icon is displayed in each frame. At the timing shown in FIG. 91 (b-1), four hold icons are accommodated in each frame in the hold icon display area, and the first hold icon h11 to the fourth hold icon h14 are included. The second hold icon h12 is a pre-read notice display mode (for example, a display mode that lights in blue), and the other hold icons are set to the default display mode. In addition, a variation icon display area is formed above the frame in which the first hold icon h11 is accommodated, and the variation icon h0 is displayed in the variation icon display area during symbol variation display. Here, the area where the change icon h0 is displayed may also be included in the UI unit UI2. A tutorial display section TT7 is arranged on the right side of the hold icon display area. At the timing shown in FIG. 91 (b-1), a text display of “With notice icon digestion ...” is displayed on the tutorial display portion TT 7, suggesting that a notice effect is to be performed. In the tutorial display unit TT7, an explanation display may be performed. Note that neither the fluctuation icon h0 nor the first hold icon h11 to the fourth hold icon h14 overlap the decorative symbol.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed at the top of the display screen. In this effect example, the stage name display part and the button image 136a are not displayed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage is shown, and in the upper part of the display screen, the second reserved number display of Special Fig. 1 and Special Fig. 2 and Special Fig. 1 are shown. And the 4th symbol of special figure 2 is displayed.

  In addition, the above-mentioned family crest character 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned eight-generation character 224Fa and the general character character 224Fb are disposed above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Has been. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 91 (b-1), the family crest actor 224E emits blue light in accordance with the display color of the second hold icon h12.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 91 (b-2), the hold icon display area is enlarged and displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The enlarged display of the hold icon display area can be performed by, for example, an animation display that gradually increases. At the timing shown in FIG. 91 (b-2), the hold display frame that accommodates the second hold icon h12, which is the display mode of the prefetch notice, is enlarged and displayed at the center of the display screen. In other words, in this effect example, it can be said that the hold display frame in which the second hold icon h12 is accommodated is displayed in an expanded manner. Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 91 (b-2), the first decorative symbol is variably displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 91 (b-3), the emission color of the family crest character 224E that has emitted blue light changes to green. That is, it can be said that the display color of the second hold icon h12 is foreseeing a change from blue to green.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 91 (b-4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the display color of the enlarged second hold icon h12 is changed from blue to green. Thereby, the player may be able to increase a sense of expectation for the big hit for the symbol variation display related to the hold corresponding to the second hold icon h12.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 91 (b-5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the hold icon display area is reduced to return to the default display mode. The reduced display of the hold icon display area can be performed by, for example, an animation display that gradually reduces. In this effect example, the hold display frame can be expanded in this way, and the display mode of the hold icon can be changed with the expanded hold display frame.

  Next, the pachinko machine 100 according to Examples 1 to 9 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 92 to 95. First, the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first to ninth embodiments will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 92 (a), the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is replaced with a first display device 800, a second display device 802, and a third display device in place of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. Display device 804. The first display device 800, the second display device 802, and the third display device 804 are arranged in the effect device 206 of the game board 200 shown in FIG. In this embodiment, liquid crystal display devices are employed as the first display device 800, the second display device 802, and the third display device 804, but various effects and various games are possible even if they are not liquid crystal display devices. It is sufficient that the information can be displayed. For example, a dot matrix display device, a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (Electro-Luminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, Other display devices including a projector may be employed.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the first to ninth embodiments includes a production movable body 806, a production movable body 808, and a production movable body 810. The effect movable body 806, the effect movable body 808, and the effect movable body 810 are arranged in the effect device 206 shown in FIG.

  Here, the positional relationship among the first display device 800, the second display device 802, the third display device 804, the effect movable body 806, the effect movable body 808, and the effect movable body 810 will be described. . Thereafter, when the pachinko machine 100 is installed on, for example, an island facility, a position relatively close to the player facing the pachinko machine 100 is referred to as “front”, and a position farther from the player than the “front” is indicated. Indicated as “after”. Therefore, for example, the one closer to the player is expressed as “front”, and the one farther from the player than “front” is expressed as “rear”. The side closer to the player is referred to as “front side”, and the side farther from the player than the “front side” is referred to as “rear side”. In addition, when the pachinko machine 100 is installed in, for example, an island facility, the horizontal left when viewed from the player is “left” (left, left, left end, etc.), and the opposite is “right” (right, right) , Right end, etc.).

  The first display device 800 is disposed substantially in the center of the rendering device 206 shown in FIG. 3, the second display device 802 is disposed on the left side of the first display device 800, and the third display device 804. Is arranged on the right side of the first display device 800. The second display device 802 and the third display device 804 are arranged in front of the first display device 800. The position of the second display device 802 and the third display device 804 in the front-rear direction is the same position.

  The effect movable body 806 is disposed on the upper left side of the first display device 800, and the effect movable body 808 is disposed on the upper right side of the first display device 800. The effect movable body 806 and the effect movable body 808 are arranged adjacent to each other. The position of the effect movable body 806 and the effect movable body 808 in the front-rear direction is the same, and is the front side of the first display device 800.

  The effect movable body 810 is disposed below the first display device 800. The position of the effect movable body 810 in the front-rear direction is the front side of the first display device 800.

  These display device and effect movable body are the first display device 800, the second display device 802, the third display device 806, the effect movable body 806, the effect movable body 808, and the effect movable body 810 from the rear side. Arranged in order. It should be noted that the production movable body 806, the production movable body 808, and the production movable body 810 may have the same position in the front-rear direction, and the production movable body 806 and the production movable body 808 are arranged in front of the production movable body 810. It may be. Further, the second display device 802 and the third display device 804 may be arranged in front of the effect movable body 806, the effect movable body 808, and the effect movable body 810.

  The first display device 800 has a horizontally long display area. As shown in FIG. 5C, the first display device 800 includes “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... “Decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” → It is possible to execute a variation display of the decorative symbols for switching the display of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol in the order of. During the stop display of the decorative symbol, the first display device 800 displays the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol in this order in a horizontal row from the left. In the example shown in FIG. 92 (a), the first display device 800 stops and displays the symbol combination “decoration 6-decoration 2—decoration 2” other than the symbol combination for notifying the winning.

  A game information display area a is provided below the display area of the first display device 800. The lower end side of the game information display area a coincides with the lower end side of the display area of the first display device 800, the left end side of the game information display area a coincides with the left end side of the display area, and the game information display area The right end of a coincides with the right end side of the display area. In the center of the game information display area a, a variable icon display area b surrounded by a square frame is provided. A variation icon is displayed in the variation icon display area b. The variation icon is an icon displayed in the variation icon display area b when the hold is consumed and the special figure variation game is started. By changing the display mode of the variation icon, it is possible to notify (predict the variation) of the special figure variation game with a predetermined big hit reliability (expected degree). In the example shown in FIG. 92A, the variation icon f1 is displayed in a white (indicated by dot hatching) circular display mode. The white circular display mode is a default display mode, and is the display mode having the lowest jackpot reliability among the plurality of display modes.

  A special figure 1 hold icon display area c is provided in the game information display area a and to the left of the variable icon display area b. In the special figure 1 holding icon display area c, the number of holding icons of the special figure 1 corresponding to the number of holdings of the special figure 1 can be displayed. In the special figure 1 holding icon display area c, it is possible to notify the number of holdings of the special figure 1 variable game by the number of the holding icons of the special figure 1, and the special figure related to the holding by the display mode of each holding icon. It is possible to notify (pre-reading advance notice) whether or not one variable game is successful with a predetermined jackpot reliability (expected degree).

  The special figure 1 hold icon display area c is roughly divided into four areas of a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area from right to left. The first to fourth areas correspond to the first to fourth holding ranks, respectively. That is, the hold icon of FIG. 1 corresponding to the earliest hold (stored in the past) can be displayed in the first area, and the second to fourth areas are similarly displayed in the second to fourth areas. The hold icon of FIG. 1 corresponding to the hold of can be displayed respectively.

  An elliptical pedestal image indicating the display position of the hold icon in FIG. 1 is displayed at the bottom of each of the first to fourth areas. In the example shown in FIG. 92 (a), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 3, and the hold icons g1, g2, and g3 in the first area, the second area, and the third area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c. Are displayed. The hold icons g1, g2, and g3 are displayed so as to overlap the upper part of the pedestal image. In the example shown in FIG. 92 (a), the hold icons g1, g2, and g3 are displayed in a white (indicated by dot hatching) circular display mode. The white circular display mode is a default display mode, and is the display mode having the lowest jackpot reliability among the plurality of display modes. Note that a special figure 1 hold icon indicating a hold whose special figure 1 prefetch result is “undecided” may be displayed in a default display mode. In this case, the reliability of the default display mode is not set.

  As shown in FIG. 92A, the hold icon is displayed in a display size smaller than the variation icon. This may facilitate the identification of the hold icon and the fluctuation icon.

  As shown in FIG. 92 (a), a special figure 2 hold icon display area d is provided in the game information display area a and to the right of the variable icon display area b. In the special figure 2 hold icon display area d, the number of hold icons of the special figure 2 corresponding to the number of hold of the special figure 2 can be displayed. In the special figure 2 hold icon display area d, it is possible to notify the number of hold of the special figure 2 variable game by the number of the hold icons of the special figure 2, and the special figure related to the hold by the display mode of each hold icon. The success or failure of the two-variable game can be notified (pre-reading advance notice) with a predetermined jackpot reliability (expectation).

  In the example shown in FIG. 92 (a), since the number of holds in the special figure 2 is 0, the hold icon in the special figure 2 is not displayed in the special figure 2 hold icon display area d. When the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0, a horizontally long rectangular display area e is provided so as to overlap a part of the special figure 2 hold icon display area d as shown in FIG. It is done. In the display area e, it is possible to display a tutorial display and a notice display such as a description of the way of playing, description of effects, description of characters, etc. as a character image. As shown in FIG. 92A, during the decorative symbol stop display, no character image is displayed in the display area e, and the tutorial display and the notice display are not executed in the display area e. As described above, the tutorial display or the notice display may not be displayed in the display area e during the stop display of the decorative symbol. In addition, when the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 1 or more, or when the gaming state is the electric support state, the display area e may not be provided, or within the display area of the first display device 800. The display area e may be provided at a position that does not overlap the special figure 2 hold icon display area d, or the display area e may be provided in the second display device 802 or the third display device 804. Good.

  In the example shown in FIG. 92A, the castle town stage is set as the stage. The first display device 800 displays a castle town background image (hereinafter referred to as “castle town background”) corresponding to the castle town stage. The background image is displayed on the backmost surface of the display area of the first display device 800. The first display device 800 can display a background image corresponding to the current effect stage, effect mode, and gaming state.

  The second display device 802 has a vertically long rectangular display area. The vertical length of the display area of the second display device 802 is shorter than the vertical length of the display area of the first display device 800, and the display area of the second display device 802 is the same as that of the first display device 800. It is smaller than the display area. On the upper part of the display area of the second display device 802, a mini decorative design having a display size smaller than the decorative design displayed on the first display device 800 is displayed. In FIG. 92 and subsequent figures, a mini decorative pattern is illustrated more simply than the decorative pattern displayed on the first display device 800. In addition, the display mode of the mini decorative pattern may be different from the display mode of the decorative pattern displayed on the first display device 800. The second display device 802 can display three mini decorative symbols, left symbol, middle symbol, and right symbol, arranged in this order from left to right. During the execution of the special figure 1 or special figure 2 variable game, the symbols in the left middle right are “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” → ... “decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → The variable display of the mini decoration symbols that are switched in the order of “decoration 1” →... Is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 92A, the second display device 802 has a symbol combination “decoration 6-decoration 2—decoration 2” other than the symbol combination for notifying of the hit, similar to the first display device 800. Stop is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 92A, a reception number display 850 indicating the number of receptions of the operation of the chance button 136 is displayed at the center of the display area of the second display device 802. In the example shown in FIG. 92 (a), a character string image reception count display 850 of “0 more times” is displayed, and the number of receptions of the operation of the chance button 136 is zero. A button image 852 simulating the chance button 136 is displayed in the display area of the second display device 850 and below the reception count display 850. The button image 852 has three lines drawn at equal intervals in the vertical direction, and the button image 852 is divided into four regions. The button image 852 also functions as a meter by changing the display color of these divided areas from white to, for example, green. In the example shown in FIG. 92A, all four areas of the button image 852 are displayed in white, and the meter is zero. Specific contents of the effect using the reception count display 850 and the button image 852 will be described later.

  In the lower part of the display area of the second display device 802, a horizontally long rectangular frame image is displayed, and information on the current stage is displayed in the frame image. In the example shown in FIG. 92A, the effect stage is the castle town stage, and therefore a character string image of “castle town” is displayed in the frame image.

  The second display device 802 displays a background image of the castle town background. The background image is displayed on the rearmost surface of the display area of the second display device 802. The second display device 802 can display a background image corresponding to the current effect stage, effect mode, and gaming state.

  A full color LED is arranged on the outer peripheral portion (frame portion) of the display area of the second display device 802. By causing the full-color LED to emit light in a predetermined color, it is possible to execute a predetermined effect or notification.

  As shown in FIG. 92A, the third display device 804 has a vertically long rectangular display area having the same size as the second display device 802. The vertical length of the display area of the second display device 802 is shorter than the vertical length of the display area of the first display device 800. In the upper left part of the display area of the third surface device 804, a number indicating the number of reserved special figures is displayed. The numbers displayed on the left side indicate the number of holds in FIG. 1, and the numbers displayed on the right side indicate the number of holds in FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 92 (a), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 3, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0. Therefore, “3” is displayed at the upper left of the display area of the third display device 804. And the number “0” is displayed.

  In the upper right part of the display area of the third display device 804, the fourth symbol is displayed. The fourth symbol is a symbol indicating whether or not a special figure variable game is being executed. The square 4th symbol displayed on the left is the 4th symbol for the special figure 1, and the circular 4th symbol displayed on the right is the 4th symbol for the special figure 2. During the execution of the special figure 1 variable game, the 4th symbol for the special figure 1 is displayed in white, and during the non-execution of the special figure 1 variable game, the 4th symbol for the special figure 1 is displayed in black. Similarly, the 4th symbol for special figure 2 is displayed in white while the special figure 2 variable game is being executed, and the 4th symbol for special figure 2 is displayed in black when the special figure 2 variable game is not being executed. . In the example shown in FIG. 92 (a), since the special figure 1 and special figure 2 variable games are not being executed, both the fourth figure for special figure 1 and the fourth figure for special figure 2 Displayed in black. In addition, when the special figure 1 of the big hit symbol form is stopped and displayed, the fourth figure for the special figure 1 may be displayed in a predetermined color other than black. Similarly, when the special symbol 2 of the big hit symbol pattern is stopped and displayed, the fourth symbol for the special symbol 2 may be displayed in a predetermined color other than black.

  In the lower part of the display area of the third display device 804, a character image of a lord riding on a cylindrical stage is displayed. A predetermined effect or notification can be executed using the character image of Tonosama.

  The third display device 804 displays a castle town background. The background image is displayed on the rearmost surface of the display area of the third display device 804. The third display device 804 can display a background image corresponding to the current effect stage, game state, and effect mode.

  A full color LED is arranged on the outer peripheral portion (frame portion) of the display area of the third display device 804. By causing the full-color LED to emit light in a predetermined color, it is possible to execute a predetermined effect or notification.

  The second display device 802 may display a decorative symbol, a variation icon, a hold icon, a tutorial display, a number-of-holds display, or a fourth symbol, or the third display device 804 may display a decorative symbol or a variation icon. Or a hold icon, a tutorial display, a reception count display, a button image, a mini decoration pattern, and information on the current stage may be displayed. The first display device 800 may display a mini-decorative symbol, a reception count display, a button image, information on the current stage, a fourth symbol, and a number-of-holds display with numbers.

  Display control of the first display device 800, the second display device 802, and the third display device 804 is executed by the first sub-control unit 400 shown in FIG. In addition, you may provide the control part (for example, liquid crystal control part) which performs display control of the 1st display apparatus 800, the 2nd display apparatus 802, and the 3rd display apparatus 804 separately. The light emission control of the LEDs provided in the second display device 804 and the third display device 806 is executed by the second sub-control unit 500 shown in FIG.

  In the example shown in FIG. 92A, each of the second display device 802 and the third display device 804 is located at the initial position. The second display device 802 and the third display device 804 are driven by, for example, a stepping motor, and each of the initial positions is in front of the display area of the first display device 800 and parallel to the display area. It is possible to move from left to right. Drive control (movement control) of the second display device 804 and the third display device 806 is executed by the second sub-control unit 500 shown in FIG. The initial positions of the second display device 802 and the third display device 804 are positions that are bilaterally symmetric with respect to a virtual straight line that passes through the center of the display area of the first display device 800 and extends in the vertical direction. Further, the second display device 802 and the second display device 802 are arranged at positions where a virtual straight line extending in the horizontal direction through the display region center of the first display device 800 passes through the display region centers of the second display device 802 and the third display device 804. Three display devices 804 are arranged. The right end portion of the second display device 802 located at the initial position overlaps with a part of the left end portion of the display area of the first display device 800 as viewed from the front. Similarly, the left end portion of the third display device 804 located at the initial position overlaps with a part of the right end portion of the display area of the first display device 800 when viewed from the front.

  In the example shown in FIG. 92A, the effect movable body 806 and the effect movable body 808 are located at the initial positions. The effect movable body 806 is disposed relatively on the left side, and the effect movable body 808 is disposed relatively on the right side. The vertical positions of the effect movable body 806 and the effect movable body 808 at the initial position are the same. The effect movable body 806 and the effect movable body 808 have horizontally-long rectangular plates of the same size, and are arranged so that the plate surfaces are orthogonal to a virtual straight line extending in the front-rear direction. The character “Yatsushiro” is written on the plate surface of the production movable body 806, and the character “General” is written on the plate surface of the production movable body 808.

  The effect movable body 806 and the effect movable body 808 are driven by, for example, a stepping motor, and are in front of the display area of the first display device 800 and parallel to the display area in the vertical direction from the respective initial positions. It is movable. In addition, the effect movable body 806 and the effect movable body 808 may operate integrally during the operation, or may operate individually. In addition, the effect movable body 806 and the effect movable body 808 have full-color LEDs, and can execute predetermined effects and notifications by causing the full-color LEDs to emit light. In the example shown in FIG. 92A, the effect movable body 806 and the effect movable body 808 emit light in white (indicated by dot hatching in the drawing).

  The effect movable body 810 has a circular shape and is decorated with a family crest on the surface. In the example shown in FIG. 92A, the effect movable body 810 is located at the initial position. The effect movable body 810 is driven by, for example, a stepping motor, and is movable in the vertical direction from the respective initial positions on the front side of the display area of the first display device 800 and parallel to the display area. In addition, the effect movable body 810 has a full color LED, and can execute a predetermined effect or notification by causing the full color LED to emit light. In the example shown in FIG. 92A, the effect movable body 810 emits light in white (indicated by dot hatching in the figure).

  The drive control (movement control) of the effect movable body 806, the effect movable body 808, and the effect movable body 810 is executed by the second sub-control unit 500 shown in FIG. The light emission control of the LEDs provided in the effect movable body 806, the effect movable body 808, and the effect movable body 810 is executed by the second sub-control unit 500 shown in FIG.

  Also, in each drawing after FIG. 92 (a), the configuration necessary for the description is extracted from the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 in the region on the paper surface separated by the one-dot chain line. As shown in each figure after FIG. 92 (a), the speaker 120 is schematically shown in the upper left part of the figure, the chance button 136 is schematically shown in the lower left part of the figure, and the general prize is shown in the lower right part of the figure. A mouth 226 is schematically illustrated.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. Each figure in FIG. 92 is a diagram showing the present effect example in time series. FIG. 92 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In the first display device 800 and the second display device 802, the symbol combination “decoration 6-decoration 2” other than the symbol combination for notifying the winning, which indicates that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct is out of place. “Decoration 2” is stopped. On the third display device 804, a black 4th design for special figure 1 is displayed.

  At the time shown in FIG. 92 (a), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 3, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0. Therefore, the hold icons g1, g2, and g3 are displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area c. In the display area of the third display device 804, the number of holds is indicated by numbers “3” and “0”. The variation icon f1 displayed in the variation icon display area b is deleted while the decorative symbol is stopped. The variation icon f1 may be deleted simultaneously with the end of the variation display of the decorative symbol, or may be deleted simultaneously with the start of the variation display of the next decoration symbol.

  During the game, a predetermined BGM is output from the speaker 120. The chance button 136 emits light in white (indicated by dot hatching in the figure).

  FIG. 92 (b) following FIG. 92 (a) shows that the special figure 1 variable game is started by the special figure 1 display device 212 (first special figure display device 212) not shown in FIG. This shows a state in which the decorative display variation display and the mini-decoration variation display are started. In each figure, the decorative symbol variation display and the mini decoration symbol variation display are represented by downward black arrows.

  Prior to the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the change icon deletion animation is executed, and the change icon f1 is deleted. In addition, with the start of the special figure 1 variable game, a decrease animation of the hold icon is executed, and the hold icon g1 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c changes to the change icon f2. The icon is moved to the icon display area b, and the hold icon g2 displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c is moved to the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c. The hold icon g3 displayed in the third area of the display area c moves to the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c. At the time shown in FIG. 92 (b), the animation of decreasing the hold icon is finished, and the movement of the fluctuation icon f2 and the hold icons g2 and g3 is completed.

  Further, with the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the tutorial display is started in the display area e. In this example, a character string image “Panda is a master of the panda” is displayed in the display area e, and the panda character is described.

  FIG. 92 (c) continued from FIG. 92 (b) shows a state immediately before one game ball wins the general winning opening 226. FIG. 92 (d) continued from FIG. 92 (c) shows a state where the meter of the button image 852 is increased by one in response to the winning of one game ball in the general winning opening 226. More specifically, the leftmost region of the four divided regions of the button image 852 changes from white to green (indicated by cross hatching with diagonal lines). In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, each time one game ball wins in the general winning opening 226, one of the four divided areas of the button image 852 changes from white to green. Increases by 1.

  The five vertical dots shown in FIG. 92 (e) indicate the passage of time from FIG. 92 (d). In this example, the special figure 1 variable game started in FIG. 92 (b) is being executed, and two game balls are won in the general winning opening 226 after FIG. 92 (d).

  FIG. 92 (f) shows a state after two game balls are won in the general winning opening 226. In response to the winning of two game balls at the general winning opening 226, two more areas of the button image 852 change from white to green and the meter increases by two. At this point, the meter value is 3.

  After the time point shown in FIG. 92 (f), one game ball is won in the general winning opening 226. FIG. 92 (g) shows a state continued from FIG. 92 (f). In response to the winning of one game ball in the general winning opening 226, one more area of the button image 852 changes from white to green, the meter increases by 1, and the meter becomes full. In this example, when a total of four game balls are won in the general winning opening 226, the number of times the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted (hereinafter may be referred to as “the number of times accepted”) increases by one. The reception number display 850 updates the display content to a character string image of “one more time”, and informs that the number of receptions of the chance button 136 has increased from zero to one. In the button image 852, after the meter is full, all four areas change from green to white, and the meter value is reset to zero. The meter of the button image 852 may be reset at the same time as the display content of the reception count display 850 is updated, or before the display content is updated, It may be after the display content is updated. In this example, the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started when the number of times the chance button 136 is accepted increases from zero to one. Note that when the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started, the chance button 136 may emit red light. The red emission start of the chance button 136 may be simultaneously with the start of the operation effective period of the chance button 136, may be after the start of the operation effective period, or immediately before the start of the operation effective period. May be.

  The five vertical dots shown in FIG. 92 (h) indicate the passage of time from FIG. 92 (g). In this example, the special figure 1 variable game started in FIG. 92 (b) is being executed, and eight more game balls are won in the general winning opening 226 after FIG. 92 (g).

  FIG. 92 (i) shows a state after eight more game balls have won the general winning opening 226. In response to the winning of eight game balls in the general winning opening 226, the number of times the chance button 136 is accepted increases by two. The reception count display 850 updates the display content to a character string image of “3 more times”, and informs that the reception count of the chance button 136 has increased to 3 times. In the button image 852, all four areas are displayed in white, and the meter is reset to zero.

  FIG. 92 (j) continued from FIG. 92 (i) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game started in FIG. 92 (b) has ended. In the first display device 800 and the second display device 802, the symbol combination “decoration 3—decoration 2” other than the symbol combination for notifying the winning, indicating that the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is wrong. “Decoration 2” is stopped. On the third display device 804, a black 4th design for special figure 1 is displayed. During the stop display of the decorative symbol, no character image is displayed in the display area e, and the tutorial display is not executed. The timing at which the character image in the display area e is erased may be the same as the start of the stop display of the decorative design, may be immediately before the start of the stop display of the decorative design, or the stop display of the decorative design may be in progress. May be.

  In FIG. 92 (k) following FIG. 92 (j), as the special figure 1 variable game is started by the special figure 1 display device 212, the decorative symbol fluctuation display and the mini decorative symbol fluctuation display are started. Shows the state. In each figure, the decorative symbol variation display and the mini decoration symbol variation display are represented by downward black arrows.

  Prior to the start of the special figure 1 variable game, a change icon deletion animation is executed and the change icon f2 is deleted. Also, with the start of the special figure 1 variable game, a decrease animation of the hold icon is executed, and the hold icon g2 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c becomes the change icon f3 and changes. Moving to the icon display area b, the hold icon g3 displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c moves to the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c. At the time shown in FIG. 92 (k), the animation of decreasing the hold icon has been completed, and the movement of the fluctuation icon f3 and the hold icon g3 has been completed.

  Further, with the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the tutorial display is started in the display area e. In this example, a character string image “Tosama is a Yatsushiro general” is displayed in the display area e, and the character of Tosama is explained. Thus, the display contents of the tutorial display may be changed for each symbol variation display.

  The second display device 802 displays a reception count display 850 with a character string image of “3 more times”. The number of times of accepting the operation of the chance button 136 accumulated during the execution of the last special figure variable game can be carried over to the next special figure variable game transition.

  FIG. 92 (l) following FIG. 92 (k) shows a state where the chance button 136 is operated once by the player. FIG. 92 (m) subsequent to FIG. 92 (l) shows a state immediately after the chance button 136 is operated (pressed). In this example, the effect is not executed according to the operation of the chance button 136. As the chance button 136 is operated once, the number of times the chance button 136 is accepted decreases to two. Thereby, the display content of the reception count display 850 displayed on the second display device 802 is updated to “2 more times”.

  The five vertical dots shown in FIG. 92 (n) indicate the passage of time from FIG. 92 (m). In this example, the chance button 136 is operated twice by the player during the execution of the special figure 1 variable game started in FIG. 92 (k) after FIG. 92 (m).

  FIG. 92 (o) shows a state after the chance button 136 has been operated twice by the player. In this example, the effect is not executed in response to any of the two operations of the chance button 136. When the chance button 136 is operated twice, the number of times the chance button 136 is accepted is reduced to zero. Thereby, the display content of the reception number display 850 displayed on the second display device 802 is updated to “0 more times”. In this example, when the number of times the chance button 136 is accepted decreases from 1 to 0, the operation valid period of the chance button 136 ends. For example, in the case where the result of determination as to whether or not the symbol variation display being executed is out of date, the chance button 136 may be operated or the presentation may not be executed in response to the operation.

  FIG. 92 (p) shows another pattern of the effect example that continues from FIG. 92 (k). In this pattern, the notice effect of the change is executed in response to the operation of the chance button 136. In FIG. 92 (p), the chance button 136 is operated by the player. The variation icon f3 is displayed in a green circular display mode. When the fluctuation icon or the hold icon is displayed in a predetermined color, the big hit reliability is set to increase in the order of white, blue, green, and red. That is, the display mode with the lowest jackpot reliability is white, the display mode with the highest jackpot reliability is blue, the display mode with the next highest jackpot reliability is green, and the display mode with the highest jackpot reliability is the highest. It is red. For this reason, the white circular fluctuation icon f3 shown in FIG. 92 (k) is displayed when the green circular fluctuation icon f3 shown in FIG. 92 (p) is displayed during the execution of the symbol fluctuation display. It is easier to confirm and display the big hit symbol form in the symbol variation display than the case. The display mode of the variation icon f3 shown in FIG. 92 (p) may be changed from white to green during the execution of the symbol variation display, or the display mode from white to green at the start of the symbol variation display. It may be changed, the display mode may be changed from white to green in the period displayed as the hold icon f2 before the change icon, or the hold icon f2 is displayed in the green display mode from the beginning. It may be.

  FIG. 92 (q) continued from FIG. 92 (p) shows a state where the chance button 136 is operated once by the player. In this example, a notice effect of the change is executed according to the operation of the chance button 136. As a notice effect of the change, a notice image including a character image of “celebration” is displayed in the display area of the second display device 802 and above the button image 852, and the light emitting colors of the effect movable bodies 806 and 808 are displayed. Changes from white to red (indicated by vertical and horizontal cross-hatching in the figure), and a sound effect of “Kean” is output from the speaker 120. The notice image is displayed so as to overlap the entire reception count display 850. Note that the reception count display 850 may be erased during the display of the notice image. In addition, either the timing at which the display of the notice image starts and the timing at which the light emission color of the effect movable bodies 806 and 808 changes from white to red may be first or simultaneously. Good. The production movable bodies 806 and 608 may perform a moving operation as a notice production. For example, the effect movable bodies 806 and 808 may move downward simultaneously with the emission color changing to red, may move downward after the emission color changes to red, or the emission color is red. You may move down before changing to.

  Moreover, either the timing when the notice image starts to be displayed and the timing when the sound effect “Kean” is output from the speaker 120 may be first or may be simultaneous. In addition, either the timing at which the emission color of the production movable bodies 806 and 808 changes to red and the timing at which the sound effect “Kean” is output from the speaker 120 may be first, or at the same time. There may be.

  In this example, the preview image including the character image of “celebration” is a preview image for determining the big hit, and is displayed only when the determination result regarding the symbol variation display being executed is a big hit. If the determination result regarding the symbol variation display being executed is out of place, as shown in FIGS. 92 (m) and (o), even if the effect is not executed in response to the operation of the chance button 136, For example, a notice image including a character string image of “chance” may be displayed as the notice of the change. The notice image including the character string image of “chance” can be displayed even when the result of the determination as to whether or not the symbol variation display being executed is a big hit. The preview image including the “chance” character string image has a lower jackpot reliability than the preview image including the “celebration” character image, and the preview image including the “celebration” character image is displayed during the symbol variation display. In the case of the display, the big hit symbol pattern is more easily determined and displayed in the symbol variation display than in the case where the preview image including the character string image of “chance” is displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the big hit reliability of the notice effect in which the effect movable body emits red light is set to be relatively high. The emission color of the effect movable body at the time of the notice effect is set such that the big hit reliability is high in the order of white, blue, green, and red. During the execution of the symbol variation display, when the effect movable body emits red light and the announcement effect is executed, the symbol variation does not occur when the effect movable body emits blue light and the announcement effect is executed. In the display, there is a high probability that the big hit symbol mode is fixedly displayed.

  In this embodiment, the change notice effect is executed in response to the first operation of the chance button 136, but the change notice effect may be executed in response to the second operation of the chance button 136. Then, the change notice effect may be executed in response to the third operation, or the change notice effect may be executed every time the chance button 136 is operated. Note that. The effect executed in response to the operation of the chance button 136 may be a prefetch notice effect.

  In the present embodiment, every time four game balls are won in the general winning opening 226, the number of times the chance button 136 is accepted increases by one. It should be noted that every time one game ball is won at the general prize opening 226, the number of times the chance button 136 is accepted may be increased by one, or every time two or three game balls are won at the general prize slot 226. The number of times of accepting the operation of the chance button 136 may be increased by one, or the number of times of accepting the operation of the chance button 136 is increased by one every time a predetermined number of five or more game balls are won in the general winning opening 226. May be. The upper limit of the number of times the chance button 136 is accepted may be three times, less than three times, or four times or more.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes a chance button 136 as an operation means and a general winning opening 226 as a first area. The number of times of accepting the operation of the chance button 136 in the effect (first button effect) related to the chance button 136 based on the reception number display 850 and the button image 852 can be increased and decreased, and the number of times of reception when the game ball enters the general winning opening 226 May increase. According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the player can grasp the number of winning game balls to the general winning opening 226 by increasing the number of times the chance button 136 is accepted and the number of times the chance button 136 is operated. There is a case.

  Next, an example of the effect of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 93 (a) to 93 (c) are diagrams showing the present effect example in time series. FIG. 93 (a) shows a state during execution of the special figure 1 variable game. In the first display device 800, the decorative display variation display is executed, and in the second display device 802, the mini decoration display variable display is executed. On the third display device 804, a white 4th design for special figure 1 is displayed. Since the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 2 and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0, the hold icons g1 and g2 are displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area c, and the display area of the third display device 804 is displayed. On the upper left of the screen, the number of holds is indicated by numbers “2” and “0”. The hold icons g1 and g2 are displayed in a white circular display mode. The fluctuation icon f1 is displayed in the fluctuation icon display area b. The fluctuation icon f1 is displayed in a green circular display mode.

  In FIG. 93A, a button image 854 simulating the chance button 136 is displayed at the center of the display area of the first display device 800, and a gauge image 856 indicating the operation effective period of the chance button 136 is displayed below the button image 854. ing. The button image 854 is displayed in a red display mode. The gauge image 856 displays the remaining time of the operation effective period of the chance button 136 in a predetermined color (light ink color in the drawing). The button image 854 and the gauge image 856 are displayed overlapping the decorative symbol variation display (medium symbol variation display). The button image 854 has a larger display size than the button image 852.

  In addition, the number of times the chance button 136 is accepted in response to the 12 game balls having won the general winning opening 226 before the time shown in FIG. 93 (a) is three times. In 802, a reception count display 850 is displayed as a character string image of “3 more times”. Note that the entire area of the button image 852 is white and the value of the meter is zero.

  In the present embodiment, an effect relating to the chance button 136 based on the reception count display 850 and the button image 852 (hereinafter referred to as “button effect A”), and an effect relating to the chance button 136 based on the button image 854 and the gauge image 856 (hereinafter referred to as “button effect”). B ") is executed in duplicate. The operation effective period of the chance button 136 in the button effect A is continued until the chance button 136 is operated three times. The operation effective period of the chance button 136 in the button effect B is, for example, 10 seconds. The remaining time is informed. In this example, the button image 854 and the gauge image 856 are displayed simultaneously with the start of the operation effective period of the chance button 136 in the button effect B. The button image 854 and the gauge image 856 may be displayed after the operation effective period of the chance button 136 in the button effect B is started, or the button image 854 is prior to the start of the operation effective period of the chance button 136 in the button effect B. And a gauge image 856 may be displayed. In the button effect B, when the chance button 136 is operated once, a notice effect is executed in accordance with the operation. Note that the operation valid period of the chance button 136 in the button effect B ends when the chance button 136 is operated once. If the chance button 136 has not been operated once during the operation valid period of the chance button 136 in the button effect B, the button image 854 and the gauge image 856 are deleted at the end of the operation valid period. In this case, the notice effect corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136 in the button effect B is not executed. Even if the chance button 136 is not operated once during the operation valid period of the chance button 136 in the button effect B, the notice effect corresponding to the operation of the chance button 136 in the button effect B is executed. Also good.

  FIG. 93 (b) continuing from FIG. 93 (a) shows a state in which the player operates the chance button 136 once. FIG. 93 (c) continued from FIG. 93 (b) shows a state in which an effect has been executed in response to the operation of the chance button 136. In this example, in response to the operation of the chance button 136, the first notice effect is executed corresponding to the button effect A, and the second notice effect is executed corresponding to the button effect B. The first notice effect and the second notice effect are started at the same time. The first notice effect is the same as the notice effect of the change shown in FIG. 92 (q), and the first notice effect is within the display area of the second display device 802 and above the button image 852. , The notice image including the character image of “Holiday” is displayed, the emission color of the effect movable bodies 806 and 808 changes from white to red, and the sound effect “Kean” is output from the speaker 120. The second notice effect is the notice effect of the change, and as the second notice effect, a cut-in image 858 that is a horizontally long parallelogram and includes a character image of the lord is displayed on the first display device 800. The cut-in image 858 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the decorative symbol variation display and variation icon display area b. In this example, if the first notice effect and the second notice effect overlap, the sound effect corresponding to the first notice effect is output, but the sound effect corresponding to the second notice effect is output. May be.

  In the button effect A, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can execute the first notice effect when the chance button 136 is operated when the number of times the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted is 1 or more. When the chance button 136 is operated in the button effect B, the second notice effect can be executed. Button effect A and button effect B are separate and independent effects, and even when the character image reception count display 850 of “0 more” is displayed, chance button 136 is operated in button effect B. Then, the second notice effect can be executed. 93 (a) and 93 (b), the button effect A and the button effect B can be executed in parallel, and the first notice effect and the second notice effect can be executed in parallel. It is.

  When the chance button 136 is operated in the state shown in FIG. 93 (b), the second notice effect may be started after the first notice effect is started. In this case, when the effect movable bodies 806 and 808 emit green light as the second notice effect, the effect movable bodies 806 and 808 emit light red as the first notice effect and then as the second notice effect. The production movable bodies 806 and 808 may emit green light. When the chance button 136 is operated in the state shown in FIG. 93B, the first notice effect may be started after the second notice effect is started. In this case, after the effect movable bodies 806 and 808 emit red light as the second notice effect, the effect movable bodies 806 and 808 may emit red light as the first notice effect. In this way, the emission color of the effect movable body may be overwritten with a color corresponding to the notice effect that was started later.

  In this example, the button effect B is an effect requesting a single operation of the chance button 136, but the button effect B may be an effect requesting a repeated operation of the chance button 136. For example, when the button effect B is an effect requesting ten consecutive hits of the chance button 136, the button effect B is operated seven times by the button effect B even after the number of times the button effect A is received. Is accepted and the chance button 136 is operated 10 times, the operation effective period of the button effect B ends, and the second notice effect is executed.

  The chance button 136 may emit red light only when the operation effective period of the chance button 136 in the button effect A and the operation effective period of the chance button 136 in the button effect B overlap. The red light may be emitted only during the operation effective period of the chance button 136, or the red light may be emitted only during the operation effective period of the chance button 136 in the button effect B.

  In the button effect A, a period other than the stop display of the decorative symbol and the execution of the wipe effect display described later in FIG. 95 may be set as the operation valid period of the chance button 136. In addition, after the big hit game ends, the number of times of accepting the operation of the chance button 136 by the button effect A may be reset to zero.

  Next, a modified example of the effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 93 (d) and 93 (e) are diagrams showing an example of the production of this modification in time series. FIG. 93 (d) shows a state during execution of the special figure 1 variable game. In the first display device 800, the decorative display variation display is executed, and in the second display device 802, the mini decoration display variable display is executed. On the third display device 804, a white 4th design for special figure 1 is displayed. Since the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 2 and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0, the hold icons g1 and g2 are displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area c, and the display area of the third display device 804 is displayed. On the upper left of the screen, the number of holds is indicated by numbers “2” and “0”. The hold icon g1 is displayed in a white circular display mode. The fluctuation icon f1 is displayed in the fluctuation icon display area b. The fluctuation icon f1 is displayed in a green circular display mode.

  The hold icon g <b> 2 is displayed in a pattern display mode that imitates the chance button 136. The hold icon g2 is displayed in red. The hold icon g2 has a smaller display size than the button image 850. Also, the number of times the chance button 136 is accepted in response to the 12 game balls having won the general winning opening 226 prior to the time shown in FIG. 93 (d), the second display device. In 802, a reception count display 850 is displayed as a character string image of “3 more times”. Note that the entire area of the button image 852 is white and the value of the meter is zero.

  In this example, the button effect A based on the reception count display 850 and the button image 852 and the effect related to the chance button 136 based on the hold icon g2 (hereinafter referred to as “button effect C”) are executed in an overlapping manner. The operation effective period of the chance button 136 in the button effect A is continued until the chance button 136 is operated three times, and the operation effective period of the chance button 136 in the button effect C is a period in which the hold icon g2 is displayed. This is continued until the chance button 136 is operated once. In this example, the operation effective period of the chance button 136 in the button effect C is started simultaneously with the start of the display of the holding icon g2 of the pattern imitating the chance button 136. The operation effective period of the chance button 136 in the button effect C may be started after the display of the hold icon g2 is started, or the operation effective period of the chance button 136 in the button effect C before the display of the hold icon g2 is started. May be started.

  FIG. 93 (e) following FIG. 93 (d) shows a state where the chance button 136 has been operated once by the player. In response to the operation of the chance button 136, the first notice effect is executed corresponding to the button effect A, and the third notice effect is executed corresponding to the button effect C. The first notice effect is the same as the notice effect of the change shown in FIG. 92 (q). , A notice image including a character image of “Holiday” is displayed, and the emission color of the effect movable bodies 806 and 808 changes from white to red. The third notice effect is a look-ahead notice effect, and the third notice effect in this example is a look-ahead notice for the special figure variable game related to the second hold in FIG. As a third notice effect, the display mode of the hold icon g2 changes from a pattern imitating the chance button 136 to a character pattern of Tono. In the hold icon, the big hit reliability of the display mode of the Tono-sama character pattern is set higher than that of the red circular display mode. When the display mode of the hold icon g2 is changed, a hold icon change animation may be displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area c. In this example, if the first notice effect and the third notice effect overlap, a sound effect corresponding to the first notice effect is output, but a sound effect corresponding to the third notice effect is output. May be.

  In the button effect A, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can execute the first notice effect when the chance button 136 is operated when the number of times the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted is 1 or more. When the chance button 136 is operated in the button effect C, the third notice effect can be executed. The button effect A and the button effect C are separately independent effects, and even when the character image reception count display 850 of “0 more characters” is displayed, the chance button 136 is operated in the button effect C. Then, the third notice effect can be executed. As shown in FIG. 93 (d), the button effect A and the button effect C can be executed in parallel, and the first notice effect and the third notice effect can be executed in parallel. In this example, the button effect A and the first notice effect are executed as the notice effect of the change, and the button effect C and the third notice effect are executed as the pre-read notice effect. 93 (a) and 93 (b) and the button effect C shown in FIG. 93 (d) may be executed in parallel, or the button effect B and the button effect C may be executed in parallel. When the chance button 136 is operated in a state in which are executed in parallel, the second notice effect and the third notice effect may be executed in parallel.

  In the first and second embodiments, when the game ball is won in the general winning opening 226, the number of times of accepting the operation of the chance button 136 is increased. Start port 230), special figure 2 start port 232 (second special figure start port), even when a game ball enters the general view start port 228, the number of times of accepting the operation of the chance button 136 is increased. Good.

  In addition, a sensor (for example, a gate or a through chucker) that detects the passage of the game ball is provided in front of the flow path of the game ball at the general winning opening 226, and the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted when the game ball passes through the sensor. The number of times may be increased.

  It should be noted that the number of times of accepting the operation of the chance button 136 may be increased only in a predetermined gaming state (for example, a special figure low probability ordinary figure low probability state, a big hit game not being executed).

  Next, a production example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to each drawing of FIG. Each figure in FIG. 94 is a diagram showing the present effect example in time series. FIG. 94 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. In the first display device 800 and the second display device 802, the symbol combination “decoration 6-decoration 2” other than the symbol combination for notifying the winning, which indicates that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct is out of place. “Decoration 2” is stopped. On the third display device 804, a black 4th design for special figure 1 is displayed.

  At the time shown in FIG. 94 (a), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 3, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0. Therefore, the hold icons g1, g2, and g3 are displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area c. In the display area of the third display device 804, the number of holds is indicated by numbers “3” and “0”. The variation icon f1 displayed in the variation icon display area b is deleted while the decorative symbol is stopped. The variation icon f1 may be deleted simultaneously with the end of the variation display of the decorative symbol, or may be deleted simultaneously with the start of the variation display of the next decoration symbol.

  In this example, a horizontally-long rectangular wipe display screen wpa is displayed at the lower right of the display area of the first display device 800 as shown in FIG. A still image, a moving image, or the like different from the still image or the moving image displayed outside the wipe display area is displayed in the wipe display screen wpa, and a predetermined effect is executed. The wipe display screen wpa functions as a so-called corner wipe. The wipe display screen wpa may be provided in the second display device 802 or the third display device 804. For example, the wipe display screen wpa may be provided on the first display device 800 when the super reach effect is not executed, and may be provided on the second display device 802 or the third display device 804 when the super reach effect is executed. Good. The wipe display screen wpa is provided on the second display device 802 and the third display device 804 when the super reach effect is not executed, and may be provided on the first display device 800 when the super reach effect is executed. Good.

  As shown in FIG. 94A, the wipe display screen wpa displays a character image of Tono-sama with a disappointed expression. The character image is a default display displayed on the wipe display screen wpa. During the stop display of the decorative symbol, the wipe display screen wpa and a part of the image displayed in the wipe display screen wpa (in this example, the upper end) exceed the decorative symbol (the right symbol) being stopped. Wrapped and displayed.

  In FIG. 94 (b) following FIG. 94 (a), as the special figure 1 variable game is started by the special figure 1 display device 212, the decorative display variable display and the mini decorative pattern variable display are started. Shows the state.

  Prior to the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the change icon deletion animation is executed, and the change icon f1 is deleted. In addition, with the start of the special figure 1 variable game, a decrease animation of the hold icon is executed, and the hold icon g1 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c changes to the change icon f2. The icon is moved to the icon display area b, and the hold icon g2 displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c is moved to the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c. The hold icon g3 displayed in the third area of the display area c moves to the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c. At the time shown in FIG. 94 (b), the hold icon decreasing animation is completed, and the movement of the fluctuation icon f2 and the hold icons g2 and g3 is completed.

  During the variation display of the decoration symbol, the wipe display screen wpa and a part of the image displayed in the wipe display screen wpa (in this example, the upper end portion) are not overlapped with the variation display of the right symbol of the decoration symbol. In other words, the wipe display screen wpa and a part of the image displayed in the wipe display screen wpa (the upper end portion in this example) are displayed so as to overlap the variation display of the right design of the decorative design. Note that the lower end of the variation display of the right design of the decorative design may coincide with the upper end side of the wipe display screen wpa.

  FIG. 94 (c) continued from FIG. 94 (b) shows a state immediately before one game ball wins the general winning opening 226. FIG. 94 (d) continued from FIG. 94 (c) shows a state in which the mini game effect display is started on the wipe display screen wpa in response to the winning of one game ball in the general winning opening 226. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the mini game effect display is executed as the wipe display on the wipe display screen wpa in response to the game ball winning in the general winning opening 226. Even if a game ball is won in the general winning opening 226, when the special figure is on hold, when the decorative symbol is stopped (when the symbol variation is stopped), or when the big hit game is being executed, When the remaining variation time of the special figure variation game being executed is, for example, 10 seconds or less, the mini game effect display may not be performed. Further, the mini game effect display may be executed as many times as the number of game balls won in the general winning opening 226. For example, a mini-game effect display is started in response to one game ball winning in the general prize opening 226 while the mini-game effect display is not being executed. When the ball wins, the start of the mini game effect display may be put on hold. In addition, the mini game effect display is started only when the game ball is won in the general winning opening 226 while the mini game effect display is not executed, and the game ball is won in the general pay hole 226 while the mini game effect display is being executed. In this case, the start of the mini game effect display may not be suspended.

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 94 (d), a mini-game effect display is performed in which Tono-sama and Tsuji are confronting each other for drinking. On the wipe display screen wpa, a moving image of a scene in which Tonosama and Tsuji are confronting each other for drinking is displayed. The mini-game effect display of this example is executed as a pre-reading notice effect for the special figure variable game related to the second hold in FIG. The mini game effect display may be executed as a pre-reading notice effect, or may be executed as a notice of the change.

  FIG. 94 (e) continuing from FIG. 94 (d) shows a state in which the mini game effect display is being executed. FIG. 94 (f) continued from FIG. 94 (e) shows a state where the result of the mini game effect display is displayed. In this example, Tono-sama wins the contest against drinking alcohol, and the wipe display screen wpa displays a character string image of “win” and a moving image of the scene to which Ton-sama won. In this example, if the mini-game is successful, Tono-sama wins the confrontation compared to drinking alcohol.

  FIG. 94 (g) subsequent to FIG. 94 (f) shows a state in which the notice effect that is executed when the mini game is successful is started. In this example, a hold icon change animation for changing the display mode of the hold icon g3 indicating the second hold in FIG. 1 is executed as the notice effect. In the hold icon change animation of this example, a moving image in which the effect image 860 moves from the wipe display screen wpa toward the hold icon g3 is displayed. A part of the hold icon change animation in this example is displayed as a wipe display on the wipe display screen wpa. The arrows in FIGS. 94 (g) and 94 (h) indicate the locus of movement of the effect image 860.

  FIG. 94 (h) following FIG. 94 (g) shows a state in which the effect image 860 is displayed overlapping the hold icon g3. The entire hold icon g3 is hidden by the effect image 860. Note that the effect image 860 may be displayed so as to overlap with at least a part of the hold icon that is not the target of the hold icon change animation (for example, the hold icon g2).

  FIG. 94 (i) subsequent to FIG. 94 (h) shows a state where the hold icon change animation is finished. When the hold icon change animation ends, the effect image 860 is erased, and the entire hold icon g3 becomes visible again. Due to the hold icon change animation, the hold icon g3 is displayed with the display mode changed from white to green.

  FIG. 94 (j) continuing from FIG. 94 (i) shows a state after the mini game effect display ends. In this example, the mini game effect display ends after the hold icon change animation ends. On the wipe display screen wpa, the same default display as in FIG. 94B is executed.

  FIG. 94 (k) shows a production example of a pattern in which the mini game has failed. When the mini game fails, Tono-sama is defeated in the confrontation of drinking, and on the wipe display screen wpa, a character string image of “losing” and a moving image of the scene in which Tosama is defeated are displayed. If the mini game fails, the hold icon change animation is not executed and the mini game effect display ends.

  FIG. 94 (l) shows an example in which the mini game effect display is displayed overlapping another effect display. In the lower right part of the display area of the first display device 800, a conversation notice image 862 including a Chibi princess character image and a balloon image including a character string image is displayed. A part of the conversation preview image 862 is overlapped with the wipe display screen wpa. More specifically, in the conversation preview image 862, the right half of the character image of Princess Chibi, the entire character string image, and the portions other than the upper end portion and the right end portion of the balloon image are visually overlapped with the wipe display screen wpa. It is impossible. In other words, in this example, the wipe screen wpa is displayed on the conversation notice image 862 without overlapping. Further, in this example, the conversation notice image 862 is displayed as the notice image of the change. Note that the conversation preview image 862 may be displayed as a prefetch preview image.

  94 (m) to (r) show another example of mini-game effect display in time series. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can execute a plurality of mini game effect displays. FIG. 94 (m), which continues from FIG. 94 (b), shows a state immediately before one game ball wins the general winning opening 226. FIG. FIG. 94 (n) subsequent to FIG. 94 (m) shows a state in which the mini game effect display is started on the wipe display screen wpa in response to the winning of one game ball in the general winning opening 226. In this example, as shown in FIG. 94 (n), a mini-game effect display is performed in which Tono-sama challenges to throw a thousand boxes. On the wipe display screen wpa, a moving image of a scene in which Tono-sama is about to throw a thousand boxes is displayed. The mini-game effect display of this example is executed as a pre-reading notice effect for the special figure variable game related to the second hold in FIG. The mini game effect display may be executed as a pre-reading notice effect, or may be executed as a notice of the change.

  FIG. 94 (o) following FIG. 94 (n) shows a state in which the mini game effect display is being executed. FIG. 94 (p) following FIG. 94 (o) shows a state in which the result of the mini game effect display is displayed. In this example, Tono-sama succeeded in throwing a thousand boxes, and the wipe display screen wpa displays a moving image of a scene in which Tosama succeeded in throwing a thousand boxes. In this example, if the mini-game is successful, Tono-sama wins a Thousand Box throw.

  FIG. 94 (q) subsequent to FIG. 94 (p) shows a state in which the notice effect that is executed when the mini game is successful is started. In this example, a hold icon change animation for changing the display mode of the hold icon g3 indicating the second hold in FIG. 1 is executed as the notice effect. In the hold icon change animation of this example, a moving image in which the effect image 860 moves from the wipe display screen wpa toward the hold icon g3 is displayed. The arrows in FIG. 94 (q) indicate the movement trajectory of the effect image 860. The hold icon change animation of this example is the same as the hold icon change animation shown in FIGS. 94 (g) to (i). In this example, as in FIG. 94 (j), the mini-game effect display ends after the hold icon change animation ends.

  FIG. 94 (r) shows an effect example of a pattern in which the mini game has failed. If the mini game fails, Tosama fails to throw a thousand boxes, and the wipe display screen wpa displays a moving image of a scene where Tosama failed to throw a thousand boxes. If the mini game fails, the hold icon change animation is not executed and the mini game effect display ends.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can execute a plurality of types of mini-game effect display. The jackpot reliability may be set according to the type of mini game effect display. For example, the mini-game effect display (hereinafter referred to as “mini-game effect display A”) for the comparison of drinking and drinking shown in FIGS. 94 (d) to (l) is shown in FIGS. The jackpot reliability may be set higher than the mini game effect display (hereinafter, referred to as “mini game effect display B”) for challenging the thousand-throw box throw. In this case, when the mini game effect display A is executed, the big hit symbol pattern is more easily determined and displayed in the symbol change table to be notified than when the mini game effect display B is executed. Conversely, the mini-game effect display B may be set higher in the jackpot reliability than the mini-game effect display A. In this case, when the mini game effect display B is executed, it is easier to confirm and display the big hit symbol pattern in the symbol variation table to be notified than when the mini game effect display A is executed. The case where the mini game effect display A is executed may be easier to succeed in the mini game than the case where the mini game effect display B is executed, or the case where the mini game effect display B is executed. However, it may be easier to succeed in the mini game than when the mini game effect display A is executed. Note that only one type of pending icon change animation may be provided, or a plurality of types may be provided. In the case where a plurality of types of hold icon change animations are provided, the hold icon change animation to be executed for each mini game effect display may be determined in advance, or the hold icon change animation to be executed is determined by lottery each time. May be.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes a general winning opening 226 as a first area, and display means of a first display device 800, a second display device 802, and a third display device 804. When a game ball enters the general winning opening 226, a mini game effect display may be executed, and the mini game effect display is not overlapped with the decorative pattern that is changing. According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, not only the winning ball based on the winning at the general winning opening 226 but also the player is given a sense of expectation for the big hit by the effect display based on the winning at the general winning opening 226. May be possible.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can display a mini game effect display as a wipe display within the wipe screen wpa which is a part of the display area of the first display device 800. Note that the mini game effect display may be displayed in a part of the display area of the second display device 802 or the third display device 804.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can display a part of the hold icon change animation as a wipe display within the wipe screen wpa. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may display a part of the variation icon change animation for changing the variation icon in the wipe screen wpa as the wipe display. Note that the mini game effect display does not have to be started during the execution of the decorative symbol stop display.

  In this embodiment, a mini-game effect display is executed when a game ball wins the general winning opening 226. However, the special figure 1 starting opening 230, the special figure 2 starting opening 232, The mini-game effect display may be executed when a game ball enters the figure start port 228.

  In addition, a sensor (for example, a through) that detects the passage of the game ball is provided in front of the flow path of the game ball at the general winning opening 226 so that the mini game effect display is executed when the game ball passes through the sensor. It may be configured.

  Note that the mini game effect display may be executed only in a predetermined game state (for example, a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, a big hit game is not being executed).

  Note that the change animation of the hold icon is an animation of only the start of display of the effect image 860 and deletion of the effect image 860, and the animation in the wipe display screen wpa in FIGS. It may be an animation.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. Each figure in FIG. 95 is a diagram showing the present effect example in time series. FIG. 95A shows a state in which “decoration 6-decoration 2—decoration 6”, which suggests a shift during the super reach production, is temporarily stopped (swaying fluctuation display). 95, the second display device 802 and the third display device 804 are not shown.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment uses the mini decorative symbols displayed on the second display device 802 and the numbers displayed on the third display device 804 in the production examples shown in FIGS. A number display and a fourth symbol are displayed on the first display device 800. The mini decoration symbol is displayed at the upper left part of the display area of the first display device 800, and the number of reserved numbers and the fourth symbol are displayed at the upper right part of the display area. Further, during the temporary stop display of the decorative symbol, since the decorative symbol is being changed, the wipe display screen wpa is displayed overlapping “decoration 6” of the right symbol.

  At the time shown in FIG. 95 (a), since the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 2 and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0, the hold icons g1 and g2 are displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area c. In the upper right portion of the display area of the first display device 800, the number of holds is displayed by the numbers “2” and “0”.

  FIG. 95 (b) following FIG. 95 (a) shows a state where the wipe effect display is started. The wipe effect display is an effect in which the image is erased so as to be wiped from the edge of the display area of the display device. In this example, as shown in FIG. 95B, the wipe display wpb1 starts to appear from the left end of the display area of the first display device 800, and the wipe display wpb2 starts to appear from the right end of the display area. The wipe display wpb1 and the wipe display wpb2 have started to appear at the same time, and the wipe effect display is started when the wipe displays wpb1 and wpb2 start to appear. The display mode of the wipe displays wpb1 and wpb2 is a pattern of strawberry. Note that the wipe effect display may or may not be executed on the second display device 802 and the third display device 804.

  The wipe displays wpb1 and wpb2 are displayed so as to overlap with the mini-decorated symbols, the number-of-holds display, and the display other than the fourth symbol. As shown in FIG. 95 (b), the wipe display wpb1 is displayed so as to overlap with a display other than the mini decoration symbol, and the wipe display wpb2 is overlapped with a display of the number of on-hold numbers and a display other than the fourth symbol. Is displayed. In other words, the mini decoration symbol, the number of held numbers and the fourth symbol are displayed overlapping the wipe displays wpb1 and wpb2.

  Further, the fluctuation icon f1 is deleted simultaneously with the start of the wipe effect display. Note that the change icon f1 may be deleted prior to the start of the wipe effect display, may be deleted after the start of the wipe effect display, or may be displayed after the start of the wipe effect.

  FIG. 95 (c) following FIG. 95 (b) shows a state where the wipe effect display is being executed. The change icon f1 may be deleted at the time shown in FIG.

  FIG. 95 (d) following FIG. 95 (c) shows a state where the appearance of the wipe displays wpb1 and wpb2 is completed. The entire display area of the first display device 800 is displayed in a display mode in which the eyelids are closed by the wipe displays wpb1 and wpb2. In this example, the mini-decoration symbol variation display and the fourth symbol variation display (design variation display) are completed simultaneously with the completion of the appearance of the wipe displays wpb1 and wpb2. In the upper left part of the display area of the first display device 800, a mini-decorative symbol of a combination of “decoration 6-decoration 2—decoration 2” is stopped and displayed, and in the upper right part of the display area, a black special figure 1 is displayed. The 4th symbol for use is displayed. Note that the symbol variation display may end after the appearance of the wipe displays wpb1 and wpb2 is completed. Note that the wipe display wpb1, wpb2 is withdrawn after the symbol variation display is finished, and the stop display of the decorative symbol of the combination of “decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 6” becomes visible.

  FIG. 95 (e) following FIG. 95 (d) shows a state in which the next special figure 1 variable game is started. Prior to the start of the next special figure 1 variable game, the withdrawal display of the wipe display is completed. In the withdrawal display of the wipe display, the wipe display wpb1 shrinks toward the left end of the display area of the first display device 800, the wipe display wpb1 is erased from the display area, and the wipe display wpb2 shrinks toward the right end of the display area. The wipe display wpb2 is erased from the display area. The timing of completion of the withdrawal display of the wipe display wpb1 and the timing of completion of the withdrawal display of the wipe display wpb2 are the same.

  In addition, with the start of the special figure 1 variable game, a decrease animation of the hold icon is executed, and the hold icon g1 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c changes to the change icon f2. Moving to the icon display area b, the hold icon g2 displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c moves to the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c. At the time shown in FIG. 95 (e), the animation of decreasing the hold icon has ended, and the movement of the fluctuation icon f2 and the hold icon g2 has been completed.

  As shown in FIG. 95 (e), since the wipe displays wpb1 and wpb2 are deleted, the wipe display area wpb, the change icon f2, the hold icon g2, and the castle town background can be visually recognized. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may be able to refresh the player's mood by executing the wipe effect display before starting the next change when the super reach effect shifts.

  95 (f) and 95 (g) show another example of the wipe effect display in time series. FIG. 95 (f) shows the same state as that shown in FIG. 95 (c) except that the lower pan full tank error display 864 is displayed.

  At the time shown in FIG. 95 (f), the lower pan 128 is filled with game balls, and a lower pan full tank error occurs. At the bottom of the center of the display area of the first display device 800, there is displayed a lower pan full error display 864 in which a character string image of “please remove the sphere” is displayed in a black horizontally long rectangular image. Yes. The lower pan full tank error display 852 is displayed under the control of the first sub control unit 400 based on the reception of a command including information about the lower pan full tank error from the main control unit 300. The lower plate full tank error display 864 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative symbols and the wipe displays wpb1 and wpb2.

  FIG. 95 (g) subsequent to FIG. 95 (f) shows the same state as that shown in FIG. 95 (d) except that the lower pan full tank error display 864 is displayed. The lower plate full tank error display 864 is displayed overlapping the wipe displays wpb1 and wpb2. Thus, the lower pan full tank error display 864 is displayed overlapping the wipe displays wpb1 and wpb2 at the time of disconnection. In other words, the wipe display wpb1 and wpb2 at the time of detachment are not overlapped with the lower pan full tank error display 864.

  FIG. 95 (h) shows another example of the wipe effect display in time series. FIG. 95 (h) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 95 (g) except that the hold icon change animation is displayed. FIG. 95 (h) shows a state where the effect image 860 of the hold icon change animation is displayed overlapping the wipe displays wpb1 and wpb2. The arrows in FIG. 95 (h) indicate the movement trajectory of the effect image 860. The moving effect image 860 is not overlapped with the lower pan full error display 864. In other words, the lower pan full error display 864 is displayed so as to overlap the moving effect image 860.

  Thus, the notice effect display may be displayed overlapping the wipe display wpb1 and wpb2 at the time of losing. In this example, the effect image 860 of the hold icon change animation as a pre-reading notice effect is displayed overlapping the wipe displays wpb1 and wpb2 at the time of detachment. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment performs a wipe effect display before executing the next change in the case of a shift in the super reach effect, thereby renewing the player's mood and displaying a pre-reading notice on the wipe effect display. In some cases, it can be expected after the next symbol variation display.

  Next, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first to fourth examples of the present embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 92 to 95 again.

(A1)
Operation means (for example, chance button 136);
A first area (for example, a general winning opening 226, a special figure 1 start opening 230, a special figure 2 start opening 232, a general figure start opening 228),
A game machine equipped with
The first area is an area into which a game ball can enter,
The number of times of accepting the operation of the operation means in the first button effect (for example, the effect relating to the chance button 136 shown in FIG. 92, the button effect A) (hereinafter referred to as “reception frequency”) can be increased or decreased.
When a game ball enters the first area, the number of receptions may increase.
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the gaming table having such a configuration, the player may be able to grasp the number of game balls entering the first area by increasing the number of times the operation means is accepted and the number of times the operation means is operated.

(A2)
The game stand according to A1 above,
Display means (for example, a generic name of the first display device 800, the second display device 802, the third display device 804),
The display means (for example, at least one of the first display device 800, the second display device 802, and the third display device 804) is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays. ,
One of the plural types of displays is a notice display (hereinafter referred to as “first display” (for example, a notice display including a character image of “celebration” shown in FIG. 92D)). ,
In the first button effect, the first display may be displayed when the operation means is operated when the number of times of reception is one or more.
A game stand characterized by that.

(A3)
The game stand according to A2 above,
One of the plurality of types of display is a notice display (hereinafter referred to as “second display” (for example, cut-in image 858 shown in FIG. 93C, hold icon g2 shown in FIG. 93E)). And)
The display mode of the second display is a display mode different from the display mode of the first display,
When the operation means is operated in the second button effect (for example, button effect B, button effect C), the second display may be displayed.
Even if the number of receptions is 0, the second display may be displayed.
The second display and the first display can be displayed in parallel.
A game stand characterized by that.

(A4)
The game stand according to A3 above,
The first button effect and the second button effect can be executed in parallel.
A game stand characterized by that.

(A5)
The game table according to A3 or A4 above,
In the first button effect, the display means can display an image imitating the operation means (hereinafter referred to as “third display” (for example, a button image 852)),
The display means is an image simulating the operation means in the second button effect (hereinafter referred to as “fourth display” (for example, the button image 854, the hold icon g2 shown in FIG. 93D)). Can be displayed,
The size of the third display is different from the size of the fourth display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(A6)
The game stand according to any one of A1 to A5 above,
When the operation means is operated, the number of receptions may be reduced.
A game stand characterized by that.

(A7)
The game stand according to any one of A1 to A6 above,
When a plurality of (for example, four) game balls enter the first area, the number of receptions may increase.
A game stand characterized by that.

(A8)
The game stand according to any one of A1 to A7 above,
The first area is a general winning opening (for example, a general winning opening 226).
A game stand characterized by that.

(A9)
The game stand according to any one of A1 to A8 above,
A second region (for example, a through provided in front of the flow path of the game ball of the general winning opening 226),
The second area is an area through which a game ball can pass,
A game ball that has passed through the second area may enter the first area,
When a game ball enters the second area, the number of receptions may increase.
A game stand characterized by that.

(A10)
The game stand according to any one of A1 to A9,
The game machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
A game stand characterized by that.

  When a game ball enters the first area, the number of receptions may necessarily increase.

  The number of receptions may be increased only when a game ball enters the first area in a state where a predetermined condition such as the number of receptions is not full is satisfied.

  There may be a case where the number of receptions does not increase even if a game ball enters the first area in a state where a predetermined condition such as the number of receptions is not full is not satisfied.

  In the first button effect, when the operation means is operated when the number of receptions is one or more, the first display may be displayed.

  In the first button effect during the execution of the symbol variation display, the first display may be displayed only when the operating means is operated when the number of receptions is one or more.

  In the first button effect during the non-execution of the symbol variation display, the first display may not be displayed even when the operating means is operated when the number of receptions is one or more.

  When the operation means is operated in the second button effect, the second display may be displayed.

  The second display may be displayed only when the operation means is operated in the second button effect.

  Even when the operation means is operated in the second button effect, the second display may not be displayed.

  Even when the number of times of reception is 0 when operating the operation means, the second display may be displayed without fail.

  The second display may be displayed only when the number of receptions is 0 when operating the operation means.

  The second display may not be displayed even when the number of times of reception is 0 when operating the operating means when operating the operating means.

  When the operating means is operated, the number of receptions may be reduced.

  The number of receptions may be reduced only when the operating means is operated.

  Even if the operation means is operated, the number of times of reception may not be reduced.

  When a plurality of game balls enter the first area, the number of receptions may necessarily increase.

  The number of receptions may be increased only when a plurality of game balls enter the first area.

  Even if a plurality of game balls enter the first area, the number of receptions may not increase.

  A game ball that has passed through the second area may necessarily enter the first area.

  Only game balls that have passed through the second region may be able to enter the first region.

  The game ball that has passed through the second area may not enter the first area.

  When a game ball enters the second area, the number of receptions may necessarily increase.

  The number of receptions may be increased only when a game ball enters the second area in a state where a predetermined condition such as the number of receptions is not full is satisfied.

  There may be a case where the number of receptions does not increase even if a game ball enters the second area in a state where a predetermined condition such as the number of receptions is not full is not satisfied.

  In order to increase the base (number of winning balls / number of game balls fired) in the low probability state of special charts, it is possible to increase the winning rate to the general winning opening. Since there is no means to allow the player to recognize that the winning rate to 226 has increased, the number of winning balls based on winning to the general winning port 226 increases, so the total number of winning balls is not won. There was a risk of distrust to the player about the increase. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment increases the number of times the operation of the chance button 136 is accepted and increases the number of times the operation of the chance button 136 is performed and the number of times the chance button 136 is operated by increasing the number of times the chance button 136 is operated based on winning in the general winning opening 226. In some cases, the player can be made aware of the number of winning game balls to the general winning opening 226.

  Each time one game ball is won in the first area, the number of receptions may be increased by one.

  In a so-called right-handed machine that has a normal start opening and an attacker on the right side of the game area, when right-handed (during electric support or big hit game), the game ball wins the general winning opening provided on the left side of the game area. In this case, the number of receptions may not be increased.

  In case of right-handed, the number of receptions may or may not increase even if the general winning opening provided on the right side of the game area is won. Good.

  When a game ball enters the first area, an effect that the operation means is operated at least once may be started. For example, in a configuration in which an operation means is always accompanied by operation of a certain effect, the number of occurrences of the certain effect (for example, pseudo-continuous effect) may be indicated.

  The display of the first display (for example, the first notice effect) may be configured such that a plurality of operations of the operation means are required even if the symbol variation display being executed is a big hit.

  The number of receptions may be configured to increase at other occasions (the number of wins or the number of predetermined reach executions).

  Even when the first display is in progress, the number of receptions decreases when the operating means is operated.

  When a game ball enters the first area during the first display, the number of receptions may or may not increase.

(B1)
A first area (for example, a general winning opening 226, a special figure 1 start opening 230, a special figure 2 start opening 232, a general figure start opening 228),
Display means (for example, a generic name of the first display device 800, the second display device 802, and the third display device 804);
A game machine equipped with
The first area is an area into which a game ball can enter,
The display means (for example, at least one of the first display device 800, the second display device 802, and the third display device 804) is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays. ,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a notice display (hereinafter referred to as “first display” (for example, mini-game effect display)),
When a game ball enters the first area, the first display may be displayed,
The first display does not overlap with the fluctuating decorative design,
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the game stand having the above structure, not only a winning ball based on winning in the first area but also a first display based on winning in the first area gives the player a sense of expectation for a big hit. You may be able to.

(B2)
The game stand according to B1 above,
One of the plural types of displays is a notice display (hereinafter referred to as “second display” (for example, conversation notice image 862)),
The display mode of the second display is a display mode different from the display mode of the first display,
The display means is means capable of displaying a wipe display,
The wipe display does not overlap the second display,
The first display is the wipe display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(B3)
The game stand according to B2 above,
The wipe display is displayed in a part of the display area of the display means (for example, the wipe screen wpa).
A game stand characterized by that.

(B4)
The game stand according to any one of B1 to B3,
One of the plurality of types of display is a notice display (hereinafter referred to as “third display” (for example, a hold icon, a change icon)),
The display mode of the third display is a display mode different from the display mode of the first display,
As the display for changing the display mode of the third display, the first display (for example, a wipe effect display as a hold icon change animation or a change icon change animation) is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(B5)
The game stand according to B4 above,
The third display is a hold icon.
A game stand characterized by that.

(B6)
The game stand according to any one of B1 to B5,
Display of the first display is not started during execution of the stop display of the decorative symbol (for example, display of a wipe effect display is not started during execution of the stop display of the decorative symbol),
A game stand characterized by that.

(B7)
The game stand according to any one of B1 to B6 above,
When a game ball enters the first area during the display of the first display, the first display is continuously displayed (for example, in the general winning opening 226 during the execution of the wipe effect display). When the game ball wins, the wipe effect display is continuously executed)
A game stand characterized by that.

(B8)
The game stand according to any one of B1 to B7,
The first area is a general winning opening (for example, a general winning opening 226).
A game stand characterized by that.

(B9)
The game stand according to any one of B1 to B8 above,
A second region (for example, a through provided in front of the flow path of the game ball of the general winning opening 226),
The second area is an area through which a game ball can pass,
A game ball that has passed through the second area may enter the first area,
When the game ball enters the second area, the first display may be displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(B10)
The game stand according to any one of B1 to B9,
The game machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
A game stand characterized by that.

  The first display may be displayed whenever a game ball enters the first area.

  The first display may be displayed only when a game ball enters the first area during the execution of the symbol variation display.

  Even if a game ball enters the first area during the non-execution of the symbol variation display, the first display may not be displayed.

  A game ball that has passed through the second area may necessarily enter the first area.

  Only game balls that have passed through the second region may be able to enter the first region.

  The game ball that has passed through the second area may not enter the first area.

  The first display may always be displayed when a game ball enters the second area.

  The first display may be displayed only when a game ball enters the second area.

Even if a game ball enters the second area, the first display may not be displayed. To increase the base (number of award balls / number of game balls fired) in a low-probability state Although a means of increasing the winning rate to the mouth is conceivable, there is no means for allowing the player to recognize that the winning rate to the general winning port 226 is high in the conventional game stand. Due to the increase in the number of winning balls based on winning, there was a risk of distrust to the player about the increase in the total number of winning balls even though he did not win a big hit. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment executes a mini-game effect display based on winning in the general winning opening 226, thereby notifying the player that the game ball has won in the general winning opening 226, while mini game In some cases, the player can be given a sense of expectation for the big hit by the effect display. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment executes the mini game in the wipe screen wpa that displays the mini game effect display in preference to the decorative symbol or other effect display (for example, the conversation notice image 862). In some cases, it is possible to grasp the winning rate to the general winning opening 226 with the frequency of the effect display effect display, and not to give distrust to the player.

  On the wipe screen wpa, not only the mini game effect display, but also the number of times the chance button 136 is accepted (for example, the number of times received 850) and a button image (for example, the button image 852) may be displayed.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 96 and 97A to 97E. Each of FIGS. 96 and 97 (a) to 97 (e) is a diagram showing the present effect example in time series. In the states shown in FIGS. 96 and 97 (a) to 97 (e), the gaming state is a non-electric support state. As shown in FIG. 96 (a), the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is within the game information display area a of the display area of the first display device 800 and to the right of the change icon display area b. A display area i is provided. The digest icon display area i is roughly divided into four areas, ie, a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area, from left to right. In the digestion icon display area i, a variation icon corresponding to the finished special figure variation game (design variation display) can be displayed as a digestion icon. A horizontally long pedestal image indicating the display position of the digestion icon is displayed at the bottom of each of the first to fourth regions.

  Moreover, in each figure after Fig.96 (a), the structure required for description is extracted and shown in the area | region on the paper surface divided | segmented with the dashed-dotted line. As shown in each figure after FIG. 96A, the speaker 120 is schematically shown in the upper left part of the figure, and the chance button 136 is schematically shown in the lower left part of the figure.

  FIG. 96 (a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game has not yet been executed since the pachinko machine 100 is powered on. The pachinko machine 100 displays “decoration 6—decoration 2—decoration 2”, which is a default symbol combination, on the first display device 800 and the second display device 802 after the power is turned on. At the time shown in FIG. 96 (a), the number of holds in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is 0. Therefore, the hold icon is not displayed on the first display device 800, and the third display device 804 has no hold icon. The number of holds is indicated by the numbers “0” and “0”. The third display device 804 displays a black 4th symbol for special figure 1 and a black 4th symbol for special figure 2.

  On the second display device 802, a button image 870 simulating the chance button 136 is displayed. The display color of the button image 870 is white. The chance button 136 emits white light. The production movable bodies 806, 808, and 810 are located at the initial positions, and all emit white light. A predetermined BGM is output from the speaker 120.

  In FIG. 96 (b) following FIG. 96 (a), the special figure 1 hold increases by one in response to the winning of one game ball in the special figure 1 starting port 230, and the special figure 1 hold is consumed. Then, in accordance with the start of the special figure 1 variable game by the special figure 1 display device 212, a state in which the variable display of the decorative symbol and the variable display of the mini decorative symbol are started is shown. In the fluctuation icon display area b, a fluctuation icon f1 having a white circular display mode is displayed. The third display device 804 displays a white 4th design for special figure 1.

  In FIG. 96 (b), when the number of holdings of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is 0, the holding of special figure 1 is increased by 1, and the increased holding of special figure 1 is digested and special figure 1 variable game is played. Has been started. In this case, a command including information that the number of suspensions in FIG. 1 has increased by one is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400. When the first sub-control unit 400 receives the command, the first sub-control unit 400 controls the first display device 800 to execute an increase animation of the hold icon. The increase animation of the hold icon is executed in such a manner that the hold icon gradually rises from below toward the first region of the special figure 1 hold icon c. In this example, since the suspension of the special figure 1 is digested during the execution of the increase animation of the hold icon, the first sub-control unit 400 starts the symbol variation from the main control unit 300 during the execution of the increase animation of the hold icon. Receive commands. When the first sub-control unit 400 receives the symbol variation start command, the first sub-control unit 400 controls the first display device 800 to stop the increase animation of the reserved icon, to display the decorative symbol variation display and the animation of movement between the pending / variable icons. Is executed. In the movement animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon corresponding to the reserved hold of the special figure 1 becomes a change icon and moves to the change icon display area b. When the first sub-control unit 400 receives a symbol variation start command during execution of the increase animation of the hold icon, the first sub-control unit 400 controls the first display device 800 to display the increase animation of the hold icon. Stop halfway through and start moving animations between hold and change icons. When the number of holds in Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 is 0, and the number of holds in Special Figure 1 increases by 1, an increase animation of the hold icon, a hold icon corresponding to the increased hold, and hold / variation Instead of displaying a movement animation between icons, a fluctuation icon corresponding to a special figure fluctuation game (symbol fluctuation display) that is started immediately after the increase in holding may be displayed in the fluctuation icon display area b. Note that after the hold icon corresponding to the increased hold has been moved to the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c (after the increase animation of the hold icon has been completed to the end), the movement animation between the hold and change icons May be executed.

  In FIG. 96 (c) continuing from FIG. 96 (b), four game balls are won in the special figure 1 starting port 230, the special figure 1 hold is increased by 4 and an increase animation of the hold icon is executed. The state where the icon increase animation is finished is shown. In the first to fourth areas of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c, hold icons g1 to g4 are displayed. The display modes of the hold icons g1 to g4 are all white and circular. The increase animation of the hold icon is executed in such a manner that the hold icons g1 to g4 gradually rise from below toward the first area to the fourth area. On the third display device 804, the number of holds is displayed by the numbers “4” and “0”.

  FIG. 96 (d) continuing from FIG. 96 (c) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the first display device 800 and the second display device 802, the symbol combination “decoration 3—decoration 4” other than the symbol combination for notifying the winning, which indicates that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct is out of place. “Decoration 2” is stopped. On the third display device 804, a black 4th design for special figure 1 is displayed.

  In FIG. 96 (e) following FIG. 96 (d), as the special figure 1 variable game is started by the special figure 1 display device 212, the decorative pattern variable display and the mini decorative pattern variable display are started. The state is shown. The third display device 804 displays a white 4th design for special figure 1.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is capable of executing a movement animation between fluctuation / digestion icons and a reduction animation of a hold icon with the start of the special figure 1 variable game. In the movement animation between the variation / digestion icons, the icon displayed as the variation icon becomes the digestion icon and moves to the digestion icon display area i. In the movement animation between the variation / digestion icons in this example, the variation icon f1 corresponding to the special figure 1 variation game ended in FIG. 96 (e) becomes the digestion icon j1 simultaneously with the start of the movement, and the digestion icon j1 is the digestion icon display area. Gradually move toward the first region of i. At the time shown in FIG. 96 (e), the movement of the digest icon j1 is completed. The movement animation between the change / digestion icons ends when the movement of the digestion icons is completed. Moreover, the display mode of the digestion icon j1 changes from a white circle to a gray ninja character pattern after the movement is completed. Note that the display mode of the digestion icon j1 may change during the movement of the digestion icon j1, or may change simultaneously with the completion of the movement of the digestion icon j1. In this example, the digest icon in the display mode of the character pattern of the gray ninja may be displayed as a pre-reading notice or a notice icon as a notice display of the change. For example, a notice effect such as an on-hold change animation can be executed by the digestion icon in the display form of the character pattern of the gray ninja. Note that there may be a case where the notice effect such as the hold change animation is not executed even if the digest icon in the display mode of the character pattern of the gray ninja is displayed.

  The decrease animation of the hold icon is an animation including a movement animation between the hold / change icon and a move animation of the hold icon. In the moving animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon g1 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c becomes the change icon f2 and gradually moves to the change icon display area b. At the time shown in FIG. 96 (e), the movement of the fluctuation icon f2 is completed. The movement animation between the hold / change icons ends when the change icons move. Further, the display size of the fluctuation icon f2 is gradually enlarged during the movement to the fluctuation icon display area b.

  The hold icon moving animation is an animation in which each hold icon moves to an area corresponding to the hold order one level higher. In this example, the hold icon g2 displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c moves to the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c, and the special figure 1 hold icon display area c The hold icon g3 displayed in the third area moves to the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c, and the hold icon g4 displayed in the fourth area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c changes. 1 moves to the third area of the hold icon display area c. At the time shown in FIG. 96 (e), the movement of the hold icons g2 to g4 is completed. The hold icon movement animation ends when the hold icon movement is completed.

  In this example, the movement animation between the change / digestion icon, the movement animation between the hold / change icon, and the movement animation of the hold icon are started at the same time. Note that the three animations may be started in any order, and two of the three animations may be started simultaneously.

  Further, in this example, the movement animation between the change / digestion icons, the movement animation between the hold / change icons, and the movement animation of the hold icon are finished at the same time. Note that the animation of the three may end in any order, or two of the three animations may end simultaneously.

  FIG. 96 (f) continued from FIG. 96 (e) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game has ended. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the first display device 800 and the second display device 802, the symbol combination “decoration 2—decoration 9” other than the symbol combination for notifying the winning, which indicates that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct is out of place. -Decoration 5 "is stopped and displayed. On the third display device 804, a black 4th design for special figure 1 is displayed.

  In FIG. 96 (g) following FIG. 96 (f), as the special figure 1 variable game is started by the special figure 1 display device 212, the decorative symbol fluctuation display and the mini decorative symbol fluctuation display are started. Shows the state. The third display device 804 displays a white 4th design for special figure 1.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can execute a movement animation of a digestion icon when one or more digestion icons are displayed in the digestion icon display area i at the start of the special figure 1 variable game. The digestion icon movement animation is an animation in which the digestion icon moves to the right by one area. In the digestion icon movement animation of this example, the digestion icon j1 displayed in the first area of the digestion icon display area i in FIG. 96 (f) gradually moves toward the second area of the digestion icon display area i. . At the time shown in FIG. 96 (g), the movement of the digestion icon j1 has been completed. The digestion icon movement animation ends when the digestion icon movement is completed.

  In addition, with the start of the special figure 1 variable game, a movement animation between the change / digestion icons and a decrease animation of the hold icons are executed. In the movement animation between the variation / digestion icons, the variation icon f2 corresponding to the special game 1 variation game ended in FIG. 96 (f) becomes the digestion icon j2 at the start of the movement, and the digestion icon j2 is the first in the digestion icon display area i. Move gradually toward one area. During the movement, the display size of the digest icon j2 is gradually reduced so that the digest icon j2 has the same display size as the hold icon at the same time as the movement to the first area of the digest icon display area i is completed. The display size of the digest icon j2 is the same as the display size of the circular hold icons (for example, the hold icons g3 and g4 shown in FIG. 96 (g)), and the display color of the digest icon j2 is gray (the horizontal line in the figure). (Shown in a striped pattern). The circular gray display mode is the default display mode of the digestion icon. The digest icon in the default display mode is not used as a notice icon.

  In this way, the digest icon in the default display mode has the same display size and shape as the fluctuation icon in FIG. 1 and the hold icon in FIG. This may make it easier for the player to recognize that the digest icon is an icon corresponding to the special figure 1 variable game.

  In this example, the digestion icon j1 is moved to the second area as if the digestion icon j1 is pushed out of the first area of the digestion icon display area i by the digestion icon movement animation and the movement animation between the change / digestion icons. To do.

  In addition, with the start of the special figure 1 variable game, a decrease animation of the hold icon is executed. In the moving animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon g2 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c becomes the change icon f3 and gradually moves to the change icon display area b. At the time shown in FIG. 96 (g), the movement of the fluctuation icon f3 is completed. In the hold icon moving animation, the hold icon g3 displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c moves to the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c, and the special figure 1 hold icon display is displayed. The hold icon g4 displayed in the third area of the area c moves to the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c. At the time shown in FIG. 96 (g), the movement of the hold icons g3 and g4 is completed.

  In this example, the movement animation of the digestion icon is started simultaneously with the movement animation between the change / digestion icon, the movement animation between the hold / change icon, and the movement animation of the hold icon. Note that the four animations may be started in any order, and two or three of the four animations may be started simultaneously.

  Also, in this example, the movement animation of the digestion icon ends at the same time as the movement animation between the change / digestion icon, the movement animation between the hold / change icon, and the movement animation of the hold icon. Note that the four animations may end in any order, and two or three of the four animations may end.

  FIG. 96 (h) following FIG. 96 (g) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the first display device 800 and the second display device 802, a symbol combination “decoration 6-decoration 3” other than the symbol combination for notifying the winning, which indicates that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct is out of place. -Decoration 9 "is stopped and displayed. On the third display device 804, a black 4th design for special figure 1 is displayed.

  The five dots arranged vertically in FIG. 96 (i) indicate the passage of time from FIG. 96 (g). In this example, after the state shown in FIG. 96 (g), two special figure 1 variable games are executed. It is assumed that there is no winning of a game ball at the special figure 1 starting port 230 during the execution of the two special figure 1 variable games. In addition, since the special figure 1 floating game is started twice, the digestion icon movement animation, the movement animation between the fluctuation / digestion icon, the movement animation between the hold / fluctuation icon, and the movement animation of the hold icon are 2 respectively. Executed once.

  The digestion icon j1 displayed in the second area of the digestion icon display area in FIGS. 96 (g) and (h) is accompanied by the start of the first special figure 1 variable game from the state shown in FIG. 96 (h). It moves to the 3rd area | region of the digestion icon display area i by the movement animation of the digestion icon performed, and then digestion icon display by the digestion icon movement animation performed with the start of the 2nd special figure 1 variable game started next Move to the fourth area of area i.

  The digest icon j2 displayed in the first area of the digest icon display area in FIGS. 96 (g) and 96 (h) is accompanied by the start of the first special figure 1 variable game from the state shown in FIG. 96 (h). It moves to the 2nd area | region of the digestion icon display area i by the movement animation of the digestion icon performed, and then digestion icon display by the digestion icon movement animation performed with the start of the 2nd special figure 1 variable game started next Move to the third area of area i.

  The change icon f3 displayed in the change icon display area b in FIGS. 96 (g) and 96 (h) was executed with the start of the first special figure 1 change game from the state shown in FIG. 96 (h). The digestion icon j3 is moved to the first region of the digestion icon display region i by the movement animation between the variation / digestion icons, and then the digestion icon executed when the second special figure 1 variable game is started. The movement animation moves to the second area of the digestion icon display area i.

  The hold icon g3 displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area c in FIGS. 96 (g) and (h) is accompanied by the start of the first special figure 1 variable game from the state shown in FIG. 96 (h). The change animation f4 (not shown) is moved to the fluctuation icon display area b by the movement animation between the held / fluctuation icons executed, and then executed with the start of the second special figure 1 variable game started next. The movement / digestion icon moves to the digestion icon display area i in the digestion icon display area i as a digestion icon j4.

  The hold icon g4 displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area c in FIGS. 96 (g) and 96 (h) is accompanied by the start of the first special figure 1 variable game from the state shown in FIG. 96 (h). It moves to the 1st area | region of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c by the movement animation of the hold icon performed, and then between the hold and change icons executed with the start of the 2nd special figure 1 variable game started next As a result of the moving animation, the icon changes to the fluctuation icon display area b.

  FIG. 96 (j) shows a state in which the second special figure 1 variable game is completed from the state shown in FIG. 96 (h). The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the first display device 800 and the second display device 802, the symbol combination “decoration 3—decoration 1” other than the symbol combination for notifying the winning, which indicates that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct is out of place. -Decoration 4 "is stopped and displayed. On the third display device 804, a black 4th design for special figure 1 is displayed.

  The five dots arranged vertically in FIG. 96 (k) indicate the passage of time from FIG. 96 (j). In this example, it is assumed that one game ball is won at the special figure 1 starting port 230 during the non-execution of the special figure variable game shown in FIG. In response to the winning, the number of holds in FIG. 1 increases by one, an increase animation of the hold icon is started, and a hold icon g5 (not shown) corresponding to the increased hold is the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon c. It is displayed in a mode that gradually rises from below toward. In this example, during the execution of the increase icon of the hold icon, the hold of the special figure 1 is digested and the special figure 1 variable game is started. Therefore, the increase animation of the hold icon is stopped and the movement between the hold icon and the change icon is performed. Animation starts. In the movement animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon g5 becomes the change icon f6 and moves to the change icon display area b. FIG. 96 (l) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. In the first display device 800, the decorative symbol variation display is executed, in the second display device 802, the mini decorative symbol variation display is executed, and in the third display device 804, the white special symbol 1 is displayed. The 4th symbol for use is displayed.

  In addition, with the start of the special figure 1 variable game, a movement animation of the digestion icon and a movement animation between the change / digestion icons are executed.

  In this example, a maximum of four digestion icons can be displayed in the digestion icon display area i. When the digestion icon movement animation is started in a state where four digestion icons are displayed in the digestion icon display area i, the digestion icon display area i is displayed in the fourth area of the digestion icon display area i at the start of the digestion icon movement animation. The digestion icon is moved to the right, and the digestion icon is gradually erased in such a manner that the digestion icon moves toward the outside of the display area of the first display device 800. In this example, the digest icon movement animation is executed, whereby the digest icon j1 displayed in the fourth region of the digest icon display region c in FIG. 96 (j) moves to the right, and the digest icon j1 The first display device 800 is gradually erased so as to move out of the display area. In addition, when the digest icon movement animation is executed, the digest icon j2 displayed in the third area of the digest icon display area i moves to the fourth area of the digest icon display area i, and the digest icon display area The digest icon j3 displayed in the second area of i moves to the third area of the digest icon display area i. At the time shown in FIG. 96 (l), the digest icon j1 has been erased, the digest icons j2 and j3 have been moved, and the digest icon movement animation has ended. In this example, the digest icon j1 is erased without the notice effect being executed by the digest icon j1 in the display mode of the character pattern of the ninja.

  By executing the movement animation between the change / digestion icons, the change icon f5 displayed in the change icon display area b in FIG. 96 (j) becomes the digest icon j5 and moves to the first area of the digestion icon display area i. . At the time shown in FIG. 96 (l), the movement of the digestion icon j5 has been completed, and the movement animation between the change / digestion icons has ended.

  Also, during the execution of the special figure 1 variable game, two game balls are won in the special figure 1 starting port 230, the number of special balls 1 is increased by 2, and an increase animation of the hold icon is started. The hold icon g6 corresponding to the hold increased according to the winning of the eye is displayed in a mode of gradually rising from below toward the first area of the special figure 1 holding icon c, and according to the second winning The hold icon g7 corresponding to the increased hold is displayed in a manner that gradually rises from below toward the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon c. At the time shown in FIG. 96 (l), the movement of the hold icons g6 and g7 has been completed, and the movement animation of the hold icon has ended. The display mode of the hold icons g6 and g7 is a default display mode.

  FIG. 96 (m) subsequent to FIG. 96 (l) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the first display device 800 and the second display device 802, the symbol combination “decoration 3—decoration 6” other than the symbol combination for notifying the winning, which indicates that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct is out of place. -Decoration 7 "is stopped and displayed. On the third display device 804, a black 4th design for special figure 1 is displayed.

  In FIG. 96 (n) following FIG. 96 (m), as the special figure 1 display device 212 starts the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative display variable display and the mini decorative display variable display are started. The state is shown. The third display device 804 displays a white 4th design for special figure 1.

  With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the movement animation of the digestion icon, the movement animation between the fluctuation / digestion icon, the movement animation between the hold / variation icon, and the movement animation of the hold icon are executed.

  By executing the digest icon movement animation, the digest icon j2 displayed in the fourth area of the digest icon display area i is erased, and the digest icon j3 displayed in the third area of the digest icon display area i is the digest icon. Moving to the fourth area of the display area i, the digestion icon j4 displayed in the second area of the digestion icon display area i moves to the third area of the digestion icon display area i, and the first of the digestion icon display area i. The digest icon j5 displayed in the area moves to the second area of the digest icon display area i. At the time shown in FIG. 96 (n), the digest icon j2 has been erased, the digest icons j3, j4, and j5 have been moved, and the digest icon movement animation has been completed.

  By executing the movement animation between the change / digestion icons, the change icon f6 displayed in the change icon display area b in FIG. 96 (m) becomes the digest icon j6 and moves to the first area of the digest icon display area i. . At the time shown in FIG. 96 (n), the movement of the digestion icon j6 has been completed, and the movement animation between the change / digestion icons has ended.

  By executing the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the hold icon g6 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c in FIG. 96 (m) becomes the change icon f7 and the change icon display area b. Move to. At the time shown in FIG. 96 (n), the movement of the fluctuation icon f7 is completed, and the movement animation between the hold / fluctuation icons is finished.

  By executing the movement animation of the hold icon, the hold icon g7 displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c in FIG. 96 (m) is moved to the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c. To do. At the time shown in FIG. 96 (n), the movement of the hold icon g7 has been completed, and the movement animation of the hold icon has ended.

  FIG. 96 (o) following FIG. 96 (n) shows a state in which the display mode of the digestion icon j4 is changed to a gray ninja character pattern. The digestion icon j4 after the display mode change is displayed as a notice icon.

  FIG. 96 (p) following FIG. 96 (o) shows a state in which the change animation of the hold icon for changing the display mode of the hold icon is executed. The change animation of the hold icon is a pre-reading notice effect. In this example, the hold for the pre-reading notice target is the special figure 1 hold corresponding to the hold icon g7 (the hold order is the first special figure 1 hold), and the change animation of the hold icon corresponds to the pre-reading notice hold. This is executed to change the display mode of the hold icon (the hold icon g7 in this example). In the change animation of the hold icon in this example, the digestion icon j4 displayed as the notice icon throws the shuriken image k (hereinafter referred to as “shuriken k”) toward the hold icon g7 whose display mode is to be changed. The moving image of the scene where the shuriken k hits is displayed on the hold icon g7. The arrow in FIG. 96 (p) indicates the trajectory of the shuriken k. The shuriken k is displayed so as to overlap the display of variation of the decorative pattern. In other words, the variation display of the decorative symbol is not displayed overlapping the shuriken k. At the time shown in FIG. 96 (p), the shuriken k hits the hold icon g7.

  FIG. 96 (q) subsequent to FIG. 96 (p) shows a state in which the hold icon change animation is being executed. In the change animation of the hold icon in this example, after the shuriken k hits the hold icon g7, the effect image 872 is displayed overlapping the hold icon g7. The shuriken k is erased simultaneously with the start of display of the effect image 872. The shuriken k may be deleted prior to the display of the effect image 872 or may be deleted after the display of the effect image 872 is started.

  FIG. 96 (r) continuing from FIG. 96 (q) shows a state where the change animation of the hold icon is finished. When the effect image 872 displayed overlapping the entire holding icon g7 is deleted, the entire holding icon g7 whose display mode is changed to a blue circle becomes visible again. When the effect image 872 is deleted, the change animation of the hold icon is ended. In addition, the light emission color of the effect movable body 810 changes from white to blue prior to the end of the hold icon change animation. In other words, the emission color of the effect movable body 810 changes from white to blue before the entire hold icon g7 becomes visible again. Note that the light emission color of the effect movable body 810 may change from white to blue simultaneously with the end of the hold icon change animation, or the light emission color of the effect movable body 810 changes from white to blue after the hold icon change animation ends. It may change. In other words, the light emission color of the effect movable body 810 may change from white to blue at the same time that the entire hold icon g7 becomes visible again, and the effect is made after the entire hold icon g7 becomes visible again. The emission color of the movable body 810 may change from white to blue. Thus, when the change animation of the hold icon is executed, the display color of the hold icon whose display mode has changed and the emission color of the effect movable body 810 become the same color. In this example, the light emission color of the effect movable body 810 changes as a prefetch notice effect. The effect in which the emission color of the effect movable body 810 changes is related to the change animation of the hold icon. Note that the effect movable body whose emission color changes as the pre-reading notice effect when the change animation of the hold icon is executed may be at least one effect movable object among the effect movable objects 806, 808, and 810.

  In this example, the change animation of the hold icon for changing the display mode of the hold icon g7 by the digest icon j4 of the display mode of the ninja pattern is executed. In FIGS. 96 (o) to 96 (r), the digest icon j4 is displayed as a prefetch notice display. It should be noted that the change animation of the hold icon only starts the display of the effect image 872 and deletes the effect image 872, and the animation of the scene where the digestion icon j4 throws the shuriken k and the shuriken k flies is an animation for changing the hold icon It is good.

  FIG. 97 (a) continuing from FIG. 96 (r) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the first display device 800 and the second display device 802, the symbol combination “decoration 3—decoration 5” other than the symbol combination for notifying the winning, which indicates that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct is out of place. -Decoration 7 "is stopped and displayed. On the third display device 804, a black 4th design for special figure 1 is displayed.

  The decorative design displayed on the first display device 800 is surrounded by a vertically-long rectangular frame image. When the decorative design is an odd number, the inside of the frame image is displayed in red, and the decorative design is an even number. In some cases, the frame image is displayed in blue. It is assumed that the display pattern of the decorative design includes the display color in the frame image. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can execute the pre-reading notice by displaying all the stop symbols of the decorative symbols as odd numbers or even numbers. In this example, the prefetching notice with the combination of the odd number of decorative symbols is set to have a higher jackpot reliability than the prefetching notice with the combination of the even number of decorative symbols. In other words, the big hit reliability is set higher in the prefetching notice by the combination of the red decorative symbols than in the prefetching notice by the combination of the blue decorative symbols. For this reason, when a combination of odd (red) decorative symbols is displayed, the jackpot symbol pattern is displayed in a stoppage display in the symbol change display for the pre-reading notice rather than when an even (blue) decorative symbol combination is displayed. Easy to be. The combination of the odd number, even number, and the decorative pattern of the same color is a so-called chance.

  In FIG. 97 (b) continued from FIG. 97 (a), as the special figure 1 variable game is started by the special figure 1 display device 212, the decorative display variable display and the mini decorative pattern variable display are started. The state is shown. The third display device 804 displays a white 4th design for special figure 1.

  With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the movement animation of the digestion icon, the movement animation between the fluctuation / digestion icons, and the movement animation between the hold / variation icons are executed. When only one hold icon is displayed at the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the movement animation of the hold icon is not executed with the start of the special figure 1 variable game.

  By executing the digest icon movement animation, the digest icon j3 displayed in the fourth area of the digest icon display area i is erased, and the digest icon j4 displayed in the third area of the digest icon display area i is the digest icon. Moving to the fourth area of the display area i, the digest icon j5 displayed in the second area of the digest icon display area i moves to the third area of the digest icon display area i, and the first of the digest icon display area i. The digest icon j6 displayed in the area moves to the second area of the digest icon display area i. At the time shown in FIG. 97 (b), the digest icon j3 has been erased, the digest icons j4, j5, and j6 have been moved, and the digest icon movement animation has been completed.

  By executing the movement animation between the change / digestion icons, the change icon f7 displayed in the change icon display area b in FIG. 97A becomes the digest icon j7 and moves to the first area of the digest icon display area i. . At the time shown in FIG. 97 (b), the movement of the digestion icon j7 has been completed, and the movement animation between the change / digestion icons has ended.

  By executing the movement animation between the hold / change icons, the hold icon g7 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c in FIG. 97 (a) becomes the change icon f8 and the change icon display area b. Move to. At the time shown in FIG. 97 (b), the movement of the variation icon f8 has been completed, and the movement animation between the hold / variation icons has been completed.

  FIG. 97 (c) following FIG. 97 (b) shows a state in which a variation icon change animation for changing the display mode of the variation icon is executed. The variation animation mode of the variation icon of this example is the same as the variation animation mode of the hold icon shown in FIGS. 96 (p) to (r). As shown in FIG. 97 (c), the digestion icon j4 displayed as the notice icon throws the shuriken k toward the variation icon f8, and the moving image of the scene where the shuriken k hits the variation icon f8 is displayed. The arrow in FIG. 97 (c) indicates the trajectory of the shuriken k. The shuriken k is displayed so as to overlap the display of variation of the decorative pattern. In other words, the variation display of the decorative symbol is not displayed overlapping the shuriken k. At the time shown in FIG. 96 (p), the shuriken k hits the variation icon f8.

  Note that the change animation mode of the variation icon may be different from the change animation mode of the hold icon. For example, in the change animation of the change icon, a moving image of a scene where the digest icon j4 throws a bomb may be displayed.

  FIG. 97 (d) continuing from FIG. 97 (c) shows a state in which the change icon change animation is being executed. In the change icon change animation, similarly to the hold icon change animation, after the shuriken k hits the change icon f8, the effect image 872 is displayed overlapping the change icon f8. The shuriken k is erased simultaneously with the start of display of the effect image 872. The shuriken k may be deleted prior to the display of the effect image 872 or may be deleted after the display of the effect image 872 is started.

  FIG. 97 (e) continuing from FIG. 97 (d) shows a state in which the change icon change animation has ended. When the effect image 872 displayed overlapping the entire variation icon f8 is deleted, the entire variation icon f8 whose display mode has changed to a red circle can be viewed again. When the effect image 872 is deleted, the change icon change animation ends. Further, prior to the end of the change icon change animation, the light emitting color of the effect movable body 810 changes from blue to red. In other words, the light emission color of the effect movable body 810 changes from blue to red before the entire variation icon f8 becomes visible again. Note that the light emission color of the effect movable body 810 may change from blue to red simultaneously with the end of the change icon change animation, or after the change icon change animation ends, the light emission color of the effect movable body 810 changes from blue to red. It may change. In other words, the light emission color of the effect movable body 810 may change from blue to red at the same time as the entire variation icon f8 becomes visible again, and the effect is produced after the entire change icon f8 becomes visible again. The emission color of the movable body 810 may change from blue to red. As described above, when the change icon change animation is executed, the display color of the change icon whose display mode has changed and the emission color of the effect movable body 810 become the same color. In this example, the emission color of the effect movable body 810 changes as the notice effect of the change. The effect of changing the emission color of the effect movable body 810 is related to the change animation of the change icon. It should be noted that when the change icon change animation is executed, the effect movable body whose emission color changes as the notice effect of the change is at least one effect movable object among the effect movable objects 806, 808, and 810. Good.

  In this example, the change icon change animation is executed by changing the display mode of the change icon f8 by the digest icon j4 of the display mode of the ninja pattern. In FIGS. 97 (b) to 97 (e), the digest icon j4 is displayed as a notice of change notice. The change animation of the hold icon is an animation of only the start of displaying the effect image 872 and erasing the effect image 872, and the animation of the scene in which the digestion icon j4 throws the shuriken k and the shuriken k flies is for changing the change icon. It may be an animation. In this example, the digest icon j4 is displayed as a pre-reading notice display and then as a notice of the change.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes a first display device 800, a second display device 802, and a third display device 804. In this example, the first display device 800 can display the decorative display of the decorative designs shown in FIGS. 96 (e) and 96 (f) after the decorative display of the decorative designs shown in FIGS. 96 (b) to 96 (d). It is. The first display device 800 can display the variation icon f1 corresponding to the variation display of the decorative symbols shown in FIGS. 96 (b) to 96 (d), and the icon displayed as the variation icon f1 is displayed in FIG. 96 (e). ), And can be displayed as the digestion icon j1 in the decorative symbol variation display shown in (f). The digest icon j1 is displayed as a notice icon. The digest icon display area i where the digest icon j1 is displayed is an area different from the variation icon display area b. According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, even if a symbol pattern that is not in the symbol variation display is stopped, in the next symbol variation display, a variation icon corresponding to the previous symbol variation display is displayed as a notice icon. Therefore, there is a case where expectation can be given to the symbol variation display immediately after the loss.

  In the present embodiment, the first display device 800 can display the variation icon f2 corresponding to the variation display of the decoration symbol in the variation display of the decoration symbol shown in FIGS. 96 (e) and 96 (f). The first display device 800 can display both the change icon f2 and the digest icon j1.

  In the present embodiment, the first display device 800 can display the icon displayed as the hold icon as the variation icon f4. The notice icon can be changed to one of a plurality of display modes, and one of the plurality of display modes is a gray ninja character pattern as the first display mode. It is a display mode. The gray ninja character pattern digest icon j4 is displayed as a notice icon, and is an icon related to a change in the display mode of the hold icon g7 (for example, a change animation of the hold icon).

  The gray ninja character pattern digest icon j4 is displayed as a notice icon, and is an icon related to a change in the display mode of the change icon f8 (for example, a change icon change animation).

  Note that one display mode among the plurality of types of display modes of the digestion icon is, for example, a display mode of a Bancho character pattern (a display mode of the hold icon g1 shown in FIG. 97 (E) described later). The digest icon of the gray Bancho character design may be displayed as a notice icon, and is an icon related to a change in the display mode of the hold icon (for example, a change animation of the hold icon). It is an icon related to a change (for example, a change icon change animation).

  It should be noted that the display mode of the Banchou character design may be set to have a higher jackpot reliability than the display mode of the ninja character design. For example, when the notice icon of the display style of the Banchou character design is displayed, the jackpot design is stopped in the symbol variation display of the notice target than when the notice icon of the display style of the ninja character design is displayed It may be easy to be displayed.

  In this example, the digestion icon displayed in the second area of the digestion icon display area i is changed from the digestion icon displayed in the first area of the digestion icon display area i to the second area by executing the digestion icon movement animation. Move as if being pushed out of. Similarly, the digestion icon displayed in the third area of the digestion icon display area i moves so as to be pushed out of the second area to the digestion icon displayed in the second area of the digestion icon display area i. The display of the first display device 800 is such that the digestion icon displayed in the fourth area of the icon display area i is pushed out of the second area by the digestion icon displayed in the third area of the digestion icon display area i. Erased from area.

  In this example, the hold icon displayed in the third area of the hold icon display area is changed from the third area to the digest icon displayed in the fourth area of the hold icon display area c by executing the hold icon moving animation. Move as if pushed out. Similarly, the hold icon displayed in the second area of the hold icon display area c moves so as to be pushed from the second area to the hold icon displayed in the third area of the hold icon display area c. The hold icon displayed in the first area of the icon display area c is moved to the variable icon display area b so that the hold icon displayed in the second area of the hold icon display area c is pushed out of the first area. .

  As described above, the movement animation of the digestion icon and the movement animation of the hold icon are common in an animation mode in which the icon moves to an area opposite to the adjacent area so that the icon is pushed out to the adjacent area icon.

  In the present embodiment, when the movement animation of the digestion icon movement animation, the movement animation between the fluctuation / digestion icons, and the movement animation of the movement animation between the hold / variation icons are executed, they are displayed in the fourth area of the digestion icon display area i. The timing at which the digested icon is pushed and erased by the digested icon displayed in the third region of the digested icon display area i, the timing at which the change icon becomes the digest icon, and the timing at which the hold icon becomes the change icon Is the same. These three timings may be different, and the order can be arbitrarily set. Note that two of the three timings may be the same.

  In the present embodiment, the increase animation of the hold icon is executed in a mode in which the hold icon rises from below, but may be executed in a mode in which the hold icon descends from above.

  The effect of displaying the fluctuation icon as a digest icon or a notice icon after the next symbol fluctuation display is executed only in the non-electric support state. For this reason, the movement animation of the digestion icon and the movement animation between the change / digestion icons are executed only in the non-electric support state. Note that the movement animation of the digestion icon and the movement animation between the change / digestion icons may be executed without fail in the electric support state.

  The number of digestion icons whose display mode changes is not limited to one. In the present embodiment, the display mode of only the digestion icon j4 is changed in FIG. 96 (o), but the display mode of at least one digestion icon among the digestion icons j3, j5, and j6 along with the digestion icon j4. May change. When the display mode of many digest icons changes at a time, the jackpot symbol may be more easily confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display of the notice target than when only the display mode of one digest icon changes. In this case, there is a case where the player can be entertained with a lively production having a relatively high jackpot reliability. On the other hand, when only the display mode of one digestion icon changes, the jackpot symbol is confirmed in the symbol change display for the notice target than when the display mode of many digestion icons changes at once. It may be easy to be displayed. In this case, the player may be able to impress the digestion icon displayed as the notice icon by changing the display mode.

  In the present embodiment, during the symbol variation display in FIG. 96 (m) to FIG. 97 (a), the notice target hold is the hold of the special figure 1 having the first hold order (the hold 1 of the special figure 1). When the hold 1 of the special figure 1 is the object of the notice, the icon indicating the symbol change display of the notice object is displayed as the hold icon in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c, and the change icon is displayed. There is an opportunity for two changes in the display mode (promotion to a display mode with high jackpot reliability) compared to the case where the region b is displayed as a variation icon. 96 (o) to 97 (a), the digest icon j4 as the notice icon is displayed in the third area of the digest icon display area i. In FIGS. 97 (b) to 97 (e), the notice icon is displayed as the notice icon. The digestion icon is displayed in the fourth region of the digestion icon display region i, and the digestion icon j4 can be displayed over two symbol variation displays. Since the change animation of the hold icon and the variation icon is executed only once in one symbol variation display, the digest icon as a notice icon related to the variation animation is displayed over two symbol variation displays. In some cases, it may be possible to predict that the symbol variation display next to the symbol variation display when the digestion icon starts to be displayed is the subject of the notice.

  For example, when the hold of the notice target is the hold of the second special figure 1 (hold 2 of the special figure 1), the icon indicating the symbol variation display of the notice target is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area. Change in display mode three times (display with high jackpot reliability) when displayed as a hold icon in the second area and the first area of c and when displayed as a change icon in the change icon display area b There is an opportunity for promotion to mode. A digestion icon as a notice icon related to the icon change animation may start to be displayed in the second area of the digestion icon display area i. As a result, the digest icon is displayed over the three symbol fluctuation displays, and when the digest icon is displayed, the third symbol fluctuation display including the symbol fluctuation display being executed is the subject of the notice. Sometimes it can be predicted.

  As described above, there may be a case where the target change of the prefetching notice can be predicted based on the display start position of the digest icon as the notice icon. Note that the greater the chance of promotion of the icon display mode, the higher the jackpot reliability may be. The jackpot reliability may be suggested by the number of opportunities for promotion of the display mode of the icon.

  For example, when the hold of the notice target is the hold of the second special figure 1 (hold 2 of the special figure 1), the icon indicating the symbol variation display of the notice target is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area. Change in display mode three times (display with high jackpot reliability) when displayed as a hold icon in the second area and the first area of c and when displayed as a change icon in the change icon display area b There is an opportunity for promotion to mode. The digest icon as a notice icon related to the change animation of the icon may start to be displayed in the fourth area of the digest icon display area i. Thereby, since the said digestion icon is displayed over the pattern change display of 1 time, it may be able to estimate that the opportunity of the promotion of the display mode of an icon is 1 time.

  Note that the digest icon as the notice icon can be displayed in the first area to the fourth area of the digest icon display area i, regardless of which one of the reservations is reserved. It should be noted that the digest icon as the notice icon can be related to the promotion of the icon display mode up to four times when the display is started in the first area of the digest icon display area i. On the other hand, the hold icon displayed in the 4th area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c has five opportunities for promotion of the display mode, and one digestion icon is related to all promotion opportunities. I can't. The hold icon displayed in the fourth area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c does not have to be the object of change animation of the hold icon (target of promotion of the display mode).

  The display on the first display device 800 in the present embodiment may be displayed on at least one of the second display device 802 and the third display device 804.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 97 (f) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. On the first display device 800, the decorative symbol variation display is executed, on the second display device 802 the mini ornamental symbol variation display is executed, and on the third display device 804, the white fourth symbol for the special symbol 1 is displayed. It is displayed. In the fluctuation icon display area b, a white circular fluctuation icon f1 is displayed.

  In the state shown in FIG. 97 (f), the gaming state is a non-electric support state, the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 4, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 2. On the third display device 804, the number of holds is displayed by the numbers “4” and “2”. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area c of the first display device 800, hold icons g1 to g4 corresponding to the special figure 1 hold are displayed.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment does not have a display area dedicated to displaying the hold icon of the special figure 2 in the non-electric support state, and when the hold of the special figure 2 becomes 1 or more in the non-electric support state, The hold icon corresponding to the hold in the special figure 2 is displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area c. As shown in FIG. 97 (f), the hold icon m1 corresponding to the hold 1 shown in FIG. 2 partially overlaps the hold icons g1 and g2 corresponding to the hold shown in FIG. The hold icon m2 corresponding to the hold 2 shown in FIG. 2 is partially overlapped with the hold icons g2 and g3 corresponding to the hold shown in FIG. 1 and displayed in the special figure 1 hold icon display area c. Is done. For this reason, some of the hold icons m1 and m2 corresponding to the hold in FIG. Note that the hold icons m1 and m2 are displayed in a white square display mode. The display mode of the white square is the default display mode of the hold icon corresponding to the hold in FIG. The hold icon corresponding to the hold in FIG. 2 is displayed on the back side of the hold icon corresponding to the hold in FIG.

  Thus, in the non-electric support state, the hold icon corresponding to the hold in FIG. 2 is displayed so as to overlap the hold icon corresponding to the hold in FIG. In other words, in the non-electric support state, the hold icon corresponding to the hold in FIG. 1 is displayed without being overlapped with the hold icon corresponding to the hold in FIG.

  The hold icon corresponding to the hold in the special figure 2 is displayed as a change icon in the symbol variation display executed when the corresponding hold is digested, and the digest icon or the advance notice in the symbol change display next to the symbol change display. It is not displayed as an icon. The variation icon corresponding to the symbol variation display of special figure 2 is erased at the end of the symbol variation display. For example, when the special figure 2 hold remaining at the end of the electric support is digested after the electric support ends, the hold icon corresponding to the hold of the special figure 2 is displayed as a change icon in the symbol change display. In the next symbol variation display, it is not displayed as a digestion icon or a notice icon.

  In addition, in the non-electric support state, when the suspension of the special figure 2 becomes 1 or more, or when the special figure 2 variable game is started, the game information display area a is deleted, and the digestion icon or the special figure 1 is displayed. Is also deleted, and a special figure 2 hold icon display area is provided in the display area of at least one of the first display device 800, the second display device 802, or the third display device 804. May be. In addition, in the non-electric support state, when the special figure 2 hold becomes 1 or more, or when the special figure 2 variable game is started, the digest icon or the notice icon may be deleted.

  In the non-electric support state, by using a device that distributes the winning game balls to the special figure 1 starting port 230 and the special figure 2 starting port 232 for each ball, it is possible to play the game with a maximum number of eight holds. In the forward variation configuration, since the maximum number of the hold icons and the digest icons can be displayed, when the digest icon is mistaken for the hold icon, the number of the hold icons appears to be 16, and the maximum hold number is It may be mistaken for 16 pieces. Thereby, a fresh feeling may be given to a player. In addition, in the electric support state, since the hold icon and the digest icon in FIG. 1 are not displayed, the maximum hold number may appear to be four.

  It is possible to display a maximum of four hold icons and digest icons in FIG. For example, the display area of the first display device 800 is divided into two parts, and a display is performed in one area by displaying a hold icon and a variation display of a decorative symbol corresponding to the special figure variation game, A fake effect may be executed by displaying a change display of a fake decorative pattern that does not correspond to the digest icon and the special figure change game in the region. The false effect may be displayed in the wipe screen wpa shown in FIG.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 97 (A) to 97 (E). Each of FIGS. 97A to 97E is a diagram showing this production example in time series. In the states shown in FIGS. 97A to 97E, the gaming state is a non-electric support state. FIG. 97 (A) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the first display device 800 and the second display device 802, the symbol combination “decoration 3—decoration 5” other than the symbol combination for notifying the winning, which indicates that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct is out of place. -Decoration 7 "is stopped and displayed. In the first display device 800, a pre-reading notice is executed by a combination of odd (red) decorative symbols of “decoration 3-decoration 5-decoration 7”. In this example, the pre-reading notice target is the hold in FIG. 1 having the second hold order.

  On the third display device 804, a black 4th design for special figure 1 is displayed. Digestion icons j1 to j4 are displayed in the digestion icon display area i. The display mode of the digest icons j1 to j4 is a gray round default display mode. In the variation icon display area b, a variation icon f5 of the display mode of the ninja character design is displayed. The fluctuation icon f5 is displayed in color and is not displayed in gray. The icon of the display form of the ninja character pattern may be displayed not only in the digest icon display area i but also in the variable icon display area b and the special figure 1 hold icon display area c. When the icon of the display form of the ninja character design is displayed in the variation icon display area b or the special figure 1 hold icon display area c, it is displayed in color. In this example, the change icon f5 is displayed as a pre-reading notice display for the hold of the special figure 1 having the second hold order.

  In FIG. 97 (B) following FIG. 97 (A), as the special figure 1 variable game is started by the special figure 1 display device 212, the decorative display variable display and the mini decorative display variable display are started. The state is shown. The third display device 804 displays a white 4th design for special figure 1.

  With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the movement animation of the digestion icon, the movement animation between the fluctuation / digestion icon, the movement animation between the hold / variation icon, and the movement animation of the hold icon are executed.

  By executing the digest icon movement animation, the digest icon j1 displayed in the fourth area of the digest icon display area i is erased, and the digest icon j2 displayed in the third area of the digest icon display area i is the digest icon. The digest icon j3 displayed in the second area of the digest icon display area i moves to the third area of the digest icon display area i and moves to the fourth area of the digest icon display area i. The digest icon j4 displayed in the area moves to the second area of the digest icon display area i. At the time shown in FIG. 97 (B), the digest icon j1 has been deleted, the digest icons j2, j3, and j4 have been moved, and the digest icon movement animation has been completed.

  By executing the movement animation between the change / digestion icons, the change icon f5 displayed in the change icon display area b becomes the digest icon j5 and moves to the first area of the digest icon display area i. At the time shown in FIG. 97 (B), the movement of the digestion icon j5 has been completed, and the movement animation between the change / digestion icons has ended. The digest icon j5 is displayed with the same display size as the variation icon f5. Thus, the display size of the icon of the ninja character pattern display mode is the same when displayed as a variation icon and when displayed as a digestion icon. In addition, the digestion icon j5 is displayed in gray. The display color of the digestion icon j5 may be changed to gray simultaneously with the start of the movement of the digestion icon j5 to the first area of the digestion icon display area i, or may be changed to gray during the movement to the first area. Alternatively, it may be changed to gray simultaneously with the completion of movement to the first region, or may be changed to gray after completion of movement to the first region.

  By executing the movement animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon g5 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c becomes the change icon f6 and moves to the change icon display area b. At the time shown in FIG. 97 (B), the movement of the variation icon f6 has been completed, and the movement animation between the variation / digestion icons has been completed.

  By executing the movement animation of the hold icon, the hold icon g6 displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c moves to the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c. At the time shown in FIG. 97 (B), the movement of the hold icon g6 has been completed, and the movement animation of the hold icon has ended.

  FIG. 97 (C) following FIG. 97 (B) shows a state in which the change animation of the hold icon for changing the display mode of the hold icon is executed. At the time shown in FIG. 97C, the shuriken k thrown by the digestion icon j5 hits the hold icon g6. The icon displayed as the variation icon in FIG. 97 (A) may be used for the notice effect after becoming the digest icon.

  FIG. 97 (D) subsequent to FIG. 97 (C) shows a state in which the hold icon change animation is being executed. After the shuriken k hits the hold icon g6, the effect image 872 is displayed overlapping the hold icon g6. The shuriken k is erased simultaneously with the start of display of the effect image 872. The display mode of the icon corresponding to the symbol change display to be notified (in this example, the hold icon g6) may be changed when it is displayed as a hold icon.

  FIG. 97 (E) following FIG. 97 (D) shows a state in which the change animation of the hold icon is finished. When the effect image 872 displayed overlapping the entire holding icon g6 is deleted, the entire holding icon g6 whose display mode is changed to a red circle becomes visible again. Prior to the end of the change animation of the hold icon, the light emission color of the effect movable body 810 changes from white to red. Thus, when the change animation of the hold icon is executed, the display color of the hold icon whose display mode has changed and the emission color of the effect movable body 810 become the same color. In this example, the light emission color of the effect movable body 810 changes as a prefetch notice effect.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can display the change icon as a notice icon for a notice other than the change. Note that the hold icon may be displayed as a notice icon with a hold other than the hold of the corresponding hold order as a notice target. In addition, the icon of the display form of the ninja character pattern may be displayed as a notice of change notice in the change icon display area b, and may be displayed as a pre-read notice display in the special figure 1 hold icon display area c. is there.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 97 (a) to 97 (e). Each of FIGS. 97A to 97E is a diagram showing this production example in time series. In the states shown in FIGS. 97A to 97E, the gaming state is a non-electric support state. FIG. 97 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. On the first display device 800, a decorative pattern of a combination of “decoration 3—decoration 5—decoration 7” is temporarily stopped. On the second display device 802, the variable display of the mini decorative symbol is executed, and on the third display device 804, the white fourth symbol for special figure 1 is displayed. Further, the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 2, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0. On the third display device 804, the number of holdings is displayed by the numbers “2” and “0”. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area c of the first display device 800, hold icons g1 and g2 corresponding to the hold in FIG. 1 are displayed.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the digestion icon display area i is not provided in the game information display area a, and the digestion icon is not displayed. Further, unlike the variation icon display area b in the above embodiment, the variation icon display area n of the present embodiment is not surrounded by a square frame image, and the display position of the variation icon is displayed below the variation icon display area n. A horizontally long pedestal image is displayed. In FIG. 97 (a), a change icon f1 of the display mode of the character pattern of the ninja is displayed. The fluctuation icon f1 is displayed in color. The fluctuation icon f1 is displayed as a notice icon that takes notice of the hold of the special figure 1 having the first hold order.

  FIG. 97 (i) following FIG. 97 (a) shows a state in which the display mode of the hold icon g1 is changed during the execution of the special figure 1 variable game. The display mode of the hold icon g1 is changed from a white circle to a display pattern of a character pattern with a long length. The display mode of the Banchou character pattern is the display mode of the prefetch notice. When the display mode of the hold icon g1 is changed, a change icon f1 animation including a scene in which the change icon f1 throws the shuriken to the hold icon g1 may be executed, or the change icon f1 shown in FIG. An animation in which the character of the ninja faces the hold icon g1 may be displayed. When the display mode of the hold icon g1 is changed, an animation including a moving image of the change icon f1 may be displayed, and the change icon f1 may be related to the change of the display mode of the hold icon g1.

  FIG. 97 (u) following FIG. 97 (i) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The success / failure determination result relating to the special figure 1 variable game is out of place. In the first display device 800 and the second display device 802, the symbol combination “decoration 3—decoration 5” other than the symbol combination for notifying the winning, which indicates that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct is out of place. -Decoration 7 "is stopped and displayed. In the first display device 800, a pre-reading notice is executed by a combination of odd (red) decorative symbols of “decoration 3-decoration 5-decoration 7”. The hold for the pre-reading notice is the hold in FIG. 1 having the first hold order.

  In FIG. 97 (e) following FIG. 97 (u), as the special figure 1 display device 212 starts the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative display variable display and the mini decorative display variable display are started. The state is shown. The third display device 804 displays a white 4th design for special figure 1.

  With the start of the special figure 1 variable game, in this example, in addition to the movement animation between the fluctuation icons, the movement animation between the hold / fluctuation icons, and the movement animation of the hold icons, the movement animation of the fluctuation icons is executed.

  By executing the movement animation of the fluctuation icon, the fluctuation icon f1 moves from the center of the fluctuation icon display area n to the right side. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the variation icon related to the change display of the hold icon display mode is displayed in the variation icon display area n even after the corresponding special figure variation game is finished. At the time shown in FIG. 97 (e), the movement of the fluctuation icon f1 is completed, and the movement animation of the fluctuation icon is completed.

  By executing the movement animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon g1 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c becomes the change icon f2 and moves to the change icon display area n. At the time shown in FIG. 97 (e), the movement of the variation icon f2 has been completed, and the movement animation between the variation / digestion icons has been completed.

  By executing the movement animation of the hold icon, the hold icon g2 displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c moves to the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area c. At the time shown in FIG. 97 (e), the movement of the holding icon g2 is completed, and the moving animation of the holding icon is finished.

  In the present embodiment, two variation icons may be displayed in the variation icon display area n. In the example shown in FIG. 97 (e), the variation icon f1 is displayed in the upper right part of the pedestal image in the variation icon display area n, and the variation icon f2 is displayed in the upper left part of the pedestal image. The fluctuation icon f1 and the fluctuation icon f2 are displayed in different areas in the fluctuation icon display area n so that either one does not overlap the other. A part of one of the fluctuation icon f1 and the fluctuation icon f2 may be overlapped with a part of the other icon. Above the variation icon f1 and the variation icon f2, a character string image of “joint fighting” is displayed, and the variation notice f1 of the ninja character design and the variation icon f2 of the chief character design provide a notice effect of the variation. Executed. In this way, the fluctuation icon f1 and the fluctuation icon f2 may be displayed integrally and function as one fluctuation icon. In FIG. 97 (e), the fluctuation icon f1 may be displayed as a notice icon or a digest icon. The variation icon corresponding to the symbol variation display shown in FIG. 97 (e) may be only the variation icon f2.

  As in this embodiment, there are cases where two icons are integrally displayed as one variable icon. When two icons are displayed together as one variation icon, the jackpot symbol is easier to confirm and display in the symbol variation display during execution than when one icon is displayed as one variation icon. Also good.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 97 (a) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is being executed. On the first display device 800, the decorative symbol variation display is executed, on the second display device 802 the mini ornamental symbol variation display is executed, and on the third display device 804, the white fourth symbol for the special symbol 1 is displayed. It is displayed. In the fluctuation icon display area b, a white circular fluctuation icon f1 is displayed.

  In the state shown in FIG. 97 (a), the gaming state is a non-electric support state, the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 2, and the number of holds in FIG. 2 is 0. On the third display device 804, the number of holdings is displayed by the numbers “2” and “0”. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area c of the first display device 800, hold icons g1 and g2 corresponding to the hold in FIG. 1 are displayed. The display mode of the hold icons g1 and g2 is a default display mode.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is provided with a horizontally-long rectangular display area e similar to the example shown in FIG. 92A within the game information display area a and to the right of the variable icon display area b. . In the display area e, it is possible to display a tutorial display and a notice display such as a description of the way of playing, the contents of the effects and the description of the character as a character string image. In FIG. 97A, the tutorial display is executed by displaying a character string image of “With notice icon digestion ...” in the display area e.

  A notice icon o is displayed overlapping the upper part of the character string image of “notice” in the display area e. The display mode of the notice icon o is a character pattern of a swordsman. The icon displayed as the change icon is displayed as a notice icon o after the corresponding special figure change game (symbol change display) ends. In this example, the notice icon o is an icon that has been displayed as a change icon in the special figure 1 variable game one time before the special figure 1 variable game executed in FIG. Note that the notice icon o may be an icon displayed as a variation icon in the special diagram 1 variable game two or more times before the special diagram 1 variable game executed in FIG. The notice icon o may be a swordsman character design or a circular display mode of a predetermined color during the period displayed as the variation icon. The notice icon in this example is the same as the notice icon I62 shown in FIG. Note that the notice icon in this example may be displayed as the notice icon shown in FIG. For example, the pseudo-continuous effect may be executed when the notice icon of this example is digested. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment can be applied to the production examples shown in FIGS.

  Next, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to Examples 5 to 9 of the present embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 96 and 97 again.

(C1)
Display means (for example, first display device 800, second display device 802, third display device 804 generic name, special figure 1 display device 212)
A game machine equipped with
The display means (for example, at least one of the first display device 800, the second display device 802, and the third display device 804, the special figure 1 display device 212)
Is a symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “first symbol variation display” (for example, a variation display of a decoration symbol, a variation display of a special diagram 1, a variation display of a mini decoration symbol, and FIGS. 96B to 96D). Symbol variation display, symbol variation display ended in Fig. 97 (A), symbol variation display shown in Figs. 97 (A) to (U))), and the following symbol variation display (hereinafter, "second symbol"). Fluctuation display "(for example, variation display of decorative symbols, variation display of special symbols, variation display of mini-decoration symbols, symbol variation display shown in FIGS. 96 (e) and 96 (f), FIGS. 97 (B) to (E)) The symbol variation display shown, and the symbol variation display shown in FIG. 97 (e))).
In the first symbol variation display, the variation icon corresponding to the first symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “first variation icon” (for example, the variation icon f1 illustrated in FIGS. 96B to 96D, FIG. 97 (A) and a change icon f1) shown in FIGS. 97A to 97U) can be displayed.
The icons displayed as the first variation icon (for example, the variation icon f1 shown in FIGS. 96 (b) to 96 (d), the variation icon f5 shown in FIG. 97 (A), and FIGS. 97 (a) to (u). Is a notice icon (for example, digest icon j1 shown in FIGS. 96 (e) and 96 (f), digest icon j5 shown in FIGS. 97 (B) to 97 (E)) in the second symbol change display. , And can be displayed as a variation icon f1) shown in FIG.
The area where the notice icon is displayed (for example, the notice icon display area i) is a different area from the area where the first change icon is displayed (for example, the change icon display area b).
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine having such a configuration, even if the off symbol pattern is stopped in the first symbol variation display, the first symbol variation display is performed in the second symbol variation display. Since the corresponding variation icon can be displayed as a notice icon, there may be a case where expectation can be given to the second symbol variation display immediately after the deviation.

(C2)
The game stand according to C1 above,
In the second symbol variation display, the variation icon corresponding to the second symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “second variation icon” (for example, variation icon f2 shown in FIGS. 96 (e) and 96 (f)), FIG. 97 (B) to (E) is referred to as a variation icon f6)).
The second variation icon (for example, the variation icon f2 shown in FIGS. 96 (e) and 96 (f), the variation icon f6 shown in FIGS. 97 (B) to 97 (E)) and the notice icon (for example, FIG. 96 (e) ), Digestion icon j1 shown in (f), and digestion icon j5 shown in FIGS. 97B to 97E) are configured to be displayable (for example, FIG. 96 (e), (f), FIG. 97 (A) to (E)),
A game stand characterized by that.

(C3)
The game table according to C1 or C2, wherein
The icon displayed as the hold icon (for example, the hold icon g7 shown in FIGS. 96 (l) to (r) and FIG. 97 (a)) is used as the change icon (eg, the change icon f8 shown in FIG. 97 (b)). Can be displayed,
The notice icon can be changed to one of a plurality of display modes (for example, a gray circular display mode, a gray ninja character design display mode),
One display mode among the plurality of types of display modes is a first display mode (for example, a display mode of a character pattern of a gray ninja),
The notice icon in the first display mode (for example, the digest icon j4 shown in FIGS. 96 (o) to (r), FIG. 97 (a) to (e), and the digest shown in FIGS. 97 (B) to (E)). The icon j5) is a display mode of the hold icon (for example, the hold icon g7 shown in FIGS. 96 (l) to (r), FIG. 97 (a), and the hold icon g6 shown in FIGS. 97 (B) to (E)). (For example, see FIGS. 96 (p) to (r) and FIGS. 97 (C) to (E)),
A game stand characterized by that.

(C4)
The game stand according to C3 above,
The notice icon (for example, the digest icon j4 shown in FIGS. 96 (o) to 96 (r) and 97 (a) to 97 (e)) in the first display mode is the same as the change icon (for example, FIG. 97 (b). ) Is an icon related to a change in the display mode of the change icon f8) shown in FIG.
A game stand characterized by that.

(C5)
The game stand according to C3 or C4 above,
One display mode among the plurality of types of display modes is a second display mode (for example, a display mode of a character pattern with a gray dress length),
The notice icon of the second display mode is an icon related to a change in the display mode of the hold icon (for example, a change animation of the hold icon),
The notice icon in the second display mode is an icon related to a change in the display mode of the variable icon (for example, a change icon change animation).
A game stand characterized by that.

(C6)
The game stand according to any one of C1 to C5 above,
The display mode of the notice icon (for example, the display color is gray) is different from the display mode of the variable icon (for example, the display color is a color other than gray (white, blue, green, red, color)).
A game stand characterized by that.

(C7)
The game stand according to any one of C1 to C6 above,
It is possible to display an animation including the movement of the notice icon (for example, a movement animation between fluctuation / digestion icons, a movement animation of digestion icons),
A game stand characterized by that.

(C8)
The game stand according to any one of C1 to C7,
The display means (for example, the first display device 800, the second display device 802, and the third display device 804) includes an image display device (for example, a liquid crystal display device).
A game stand characterized by that.

(C9)
The game stand according to any one of C1 to C8,
In the non-electric support state, the icon displayed as the first variation icon is displayed as the notice icon in the second symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(C10)
The game stand according to any one of C1 to C9,
The game machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
A game stand characterized by that.

  The display mode of the hold icon, the change icon, and the notice icon may be different from each other, the display form of the hold icon and the change icon is the same, and the notice icon may be different only in color from the hold icon and the change icon. Alternatively, the notice icon may be different in color and shape from the hold icon and the change icon.

  The display mode of the fluctuation icon and the notice icon is the same, and the hold icon may be different in color only from the change icon and the notice icon, and the hold icon may be different in color and shape from the change icon and the notice icon. It's okay.

  Note that the display mode of the hold icon and the notice icon is the same, the change icon may be different from the hold icon and the notice icon only in color, and the change icon may be different from the hold icon and the notice icon in color and shape. It's okay.

  In addition, the animation which changes the display mode of a digestion icon by a hold icon may be performed. The hold icon may be an icon related to a change in the display mode of the digest icon. On the contrary, even if the animation which changes the display mode of a digestion icon by a hold icon is not performed. The hold icon may be an icon that is not related to a change in the display mode of the digest icon.

  In addition, the animation which changes the display mode of the digestion icon different from the said digestion icon by the digestion icon may be performed. The digestion icon may be an icon related to a change in the display mode of the digestion icon different from the digestion icon.

  When a special figure variation game is being executed (in the case of symbol variation display) and a display suggesting a divergence (for example, a temporary stop display of a detachment symbol aspect) is executed, the variation icon of the default display aspect is a ninja. It may be displayed as a notice icon after the symbol change display is finished, for example, after changing to the character pattern such as the character number.

  The digest icon may return to the default display mode after the end of the notice effect related to the digest icon (for example, the change icon change animation or the change icon change animation). The digestion icon that has finished the role of production may return to the default display mode. It should be noted that the hold icon of the ninja character design does not return to the default display mode even after an effect of changing another hold icon, a variation icon, or a digestion icon is executed by the hold icon of the ninja character design.

  At least a part of the same aspect of the effect of changing the display mode of the notice icon and other effects (for example, change of the display state of the hold icon, acquisition of the mini item (notice icon), stop of the middle symbol) It is feasible.

In addition, the pachinko machine 100 according to the first to ninth embodiments has the first display device 8 as a display unit.
00, the second display device 802, and the third display device 804, the pachinko machine 100 may include only the first display device 800 of these display devices. In this case, the display on the second display device 802 and the third display device 804 described in the above-described effect example may be displayed on the first display device 800. In Examples 1 to 9, the display on the first display device 800 may be displayable on at least one display device of the second display device 802 or the third display device 804. The display on the second display device 802 may be displayable on at least one of the first display device 800 and the third display device 804, or the display on the third display device 804 may be displayed. The image may be displayed on at least one of the first display device 800 and the second display device 804. The pachinko machine 100 according to the first to ninth embodiments has a first decorative design shown in FIG. 62 instead of the first display device 800, the second display device 802, and the third display device 804 as display means. The display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be provided. In this case, the display described in the above effect example is executed by the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. The display on the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIGS. 62 to 91 is the first display device 800 and the second display device 802. It may be displayed on the third display device 804. Note that the game information display area a corresponds to the user interface (UI) portion in FIG. The game information display area a may be referred to as a user interface (UI) unit.

  In addition, the matter demonstrated in the said Examples 1-9 can be combined.

  Next, another specific example of effects executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

  98 to 107 are diagrams showing stepwise modifications of effects centered on the decorative symbol display device of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. 98 to 107, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the universal figure hold. The lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown. 98 to 107 show an example in which three decorative symbol display devices are arranged in a row. That is, the first decorative symbol display device 208L disposed at the center of the three decorative symbol display devices, the second decorative symbol display device 208M disposed on the left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the first decoration. The display is performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N arranged on the right side of the symbol display device 208L. The first decorative symbol display device 208L may be referred to as a main display device, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be referred to as sub-display devices. The length in the width direction of 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is shorter than the half of the length of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the height is slightly shorter. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M has its right end side portion overlapped with the front side of the left end side portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N has the left end side portion thereof as the first end portion. One decorative symbol display device 208N overlaps the front side of the right end side portion. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are configured to be slidable in directions close to each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N can rotate integrally along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L when they are closest to each other. It is configured to be able to. The names of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are not necessarily displayed in a variable manner for each display device. However, it is added here just in case that the interpretation of the display device is not narrowed. Further, a combination of these decorative symbol display devices (first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, and third decorative symbol display device 208N) is used as an effect display means, and the effect display means is a decoration symbol. It is also possible to display various fluctuations or to display a plurality of types of effects. Further, a transparent light guide plate IL is disposed on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the player can visually recognize the display state of the first decorative symbol display device 208L via the light guide plate IL. ing. The light guide plate IL has a predetermined lens cut in the transmission region. A light emitter such as an LED is provided at an appropriate position near the side edge of the light guide plate IL, and light from the light emitter is reflected forward by the lens cut portion, so that the transmission region emits light in a predetermined pattern. It is structured so that it can look like. In the embodiment shown in FIGS. 98 to 107, the light guide plate IL is subjected to a lens cut having a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image. The light guide plate IL is configured such that the thickness of the portion of the region where light is refracted toward the player side is thinner than the thickness of the irradiated light. Therefore, the display states of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be easily visible. Further, the light guide plate IL may be movable. The light guide plate IL may be provided on the near side of at least one of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. 98 to 107 show the state of the speaker 120 and the effect button 136.

  FIG. 98 is a diagram showing step by step an example of a mini game effect applicable to the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 98 (a), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a user interface (UI) part is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and the UI part has a variation icon h0 at the center thereof. It is displayed in a form accommodated in a square-shaped hold display frame FL1, and a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the fluctuation icon h0. Yes. In a broad sense, the entire UI unit may be interpreted as a holding icon base. At the timing shown in FIG. 98 (a), since three variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, three hold icons h11, h12, h13 are displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the change icon h0 and the three hold icons h11, h12, and h13 are all in the default display mode. Further, a tutorial display section TT1 as an explanation display section is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0, and various information relating to games and effects is displayed (tutorial display), and the contents are updated at an appropriate timing. Is done. In the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 98 (a), no display is performed and no display is performed. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed (confirmed display) with a combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2”, and it is notified that it is lost. Yes. The UI unit is provided in an area that does not overlap with the display area of the first decorative design, but may overlap with the display area of the first decorative design. In addition, the UI unit may be displayed constantly or there may be a period during which it is not displayed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 as an explanation display unit for displaying the name of the stage and reach currently being performed is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 98 (a), “castle town” is displayed, and it is informed that the current stage is a castle town. In addition, at the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed (determined display) with the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2”, which is a loss. It has been reported.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage is shown, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. Further, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of the special drawings 1 and 2 and the fourth symbol of the special drawings 1 and 2 are displayed. Note that the Tono-sama character may or may not be displayed at all times.

  Also, a family crest member 224E, which is one of the effect movable bodies, is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and is configured to move in the vertical direction according to the effect contents. ing. Further, the family crest member 224E includes a light emitting means such as a full color LED, and can emit light in various light emission modes depending on the contents of the production. In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an Yatsushiro character 224Fa and a general character 224Fb, which are one of the effect movable bodies, are arranged, and each moves in the vertical direction according to the effect contents. It is configured to be able to. In addition, the Yatsushiro character 224Fa and the shogun character 224Fb each have a built-in light emitting means such as a full color LED, and can emit light in various light emission modes according to the contents of the production.

  Then, when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 98 (b), the hold icons h11, h12, h13 are moved and displayed by the moving animation, respectively, and the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The hold icon at the display position is accommodated in the hold display frame FL1 where the change icon is displayed and becomes the change icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 is the first hold icon h11. Thus, the hold icon at the display position of the third hold icon h13 becomes the second hold icon h12, and each moves onto the corresponding pedestal. In addition, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 98B starts the variable display of the first decorative symbol, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M starts the variable display of the second decorative symbol. Is done. In the tutorial display section TT1, a character display of “Panda is a master of the lord” is performed, and the relationship between the panda and the character of the lord is described. Here, the display of the tutorial display unit TT1 may be the timing after the decorative symbol variation display starts, the same timing as the start of the decorative symbol variation display, or the decoration symbol variation. It may be a timing before the start of display. In this case, it may be configured to always be performed at any timing, or may be configured so that the timing varies depending on the case.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 98 (c), the second hold icon h12 shown in FIG. 1 in the hold icon display area changes to the button hold icon display mode. In the present embodiment, the change timing of the display mode of the hold icon may be configured to always be performed at the same timing after the symbol variation display is started, or may be configured to have a different timing depending on circumstances. Good. Further, audio output may be performed from the speaker 120 at the timing of the change in the display mode of the hold icon h12 to notify that the display mode of the hold icon has changed. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 98 (c), the operation is not validated even if the effect button 136 is operated, and the display mode of the hold icon h12 is not changed, but the operation of the effect button 136 is valid. The display mode of the hold icon h12 may be changed.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 98 (d), the second decorative symbol display device 208M starts the effect of the mini game. When the mini game is started, in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the dice symbol is stopped and displayed above the stage name display unit ST1 in a manner indicating the outcome of “1”. The explanation of the mini-game mission is displayed. In the explanation display of the mission shown in FIG. 98 (d), the display of “button push” and the display of the result of “3” of the dice are displayed together with “de-chance”, and the mini game starts. After that, it is explained that something good happens when the production button 136 is operated and the dice “3” is stopped and displayed. In this production example, the mini game is executed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. In other words, the display area on which the mini game is executed is a liquid crystal frame formed by the second decorative symbol display device 208M. It can be said that it is partitioned by (bezel).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 98 (e), in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the dice symbol variation display is started, the button image 136a is displayed together with the button reception time meter, and the operation of the effect button 136 is accepted. Is started, and the player is encouraged to operate the effect button 136. The display mode of the button reception time meter changes so that the gauge becomes shorter according to the time from the start of the mini game. The button reception time meter may not be displayed. In the effect example shown in FIG. 98, when the effect button 136 is operated during execution of the mini game, the result of the mini game is derived in preference to the change in the display mode of the hold icon. It is configured.

  Therefore, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 98 (f) after the mini-game is started, as shown in FIG. 98 (g), the second decorative symbol display device 208M has a dice symbol. Is stopped and displayed, but the display mode of the hold icon h12 in the display form of the button hold icon displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is not changed. In the example shown in FIG. 98 (g), the dice symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating the outcome of “3”, and it is informed that the mission has been achieved.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 98 (h), the second decorative symbol display device 208M displays “pending 1UP” indicating that it is a reward for accomplishing the mission. That is, it is notified in advance that the reliability of the pre-reading notice in the hold icon is increased by one level. In other words, it can be said that the reward for accomplishing the mission functions as a notice of jackpot notice. Since the reward for mission achievement functions as a notice of jackpot notice, it can be said that the jackpot symbol is easier to be finally displayed when the mission is performed than when the mission is not performed. In addition, at the timing when the mini game is finished, an operation reception period of the effect button 136 in the change icon display of the hold icon is started. At this time, a button reception time meter may be displayed. FIG. 98 (i) shows a state where the mission achievement reward is continuously displayed. In addition, since the effect button 136 has not been operated yet, the second hold icon h12 in the special figure 1 remains in the display mode of the button hold icon.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 98 (j), as shown in FIG. 98 (k), the hold icon h12 of the button hold icon display form changes to a circular and blue display form. Change. That is, the display mode of the prefetch notice is changed. In the present embodiment, the hold icon in the display mode of the pre-reading notice can be displayed in three display modes of blue, green, and red, and the reliability of the big hit is high in the order of red> green> blue. . In other words, when the hold icon in a circular and red display mode is displayed, it is easier to finally display the big hit symbol than when the hold icon in the green and green display mode is displayed. When the hold icon with the green display mode is displayed, the jackpot symbol is finally easier to confirm and display than when the hold icon with the blue and blue display mode is displayed. When the display mode hold icon is displayed, the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the default display mode hold icon is displayed. In this effect example, by operating the effect button 136, the hold icon h12 in the display form of the button hold icon is changed to the hold icon in the blue display form, which is the first rank of the prefetch notice, but the green icon The hold icon may be changed to a display mode or a red display mode. In this case, for example, the display mode of the button hold icon may be displayed in a mode in which it is combined with an aura, so that the hold icon may be expected to change to a higher display mode.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 98 (l), the display of “pending 1UP” displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M moves across the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and changes to a blue display mode. A state of moving toward the second hold icon h12 of the changed special figure 1 is shown. In this embodiment, the timing at which the display of “hold 1UP” starts moving is the timing after the display mode of the hold icon h12 is changed, but may be any timing. For example, the timing at which the display of “hold 1 UP” starts moving may be the same as the timing at which the display mode of the hold icon h12 changes. In the present embodiment, the timing at which the display of “pending 1 UP” starts moving is within the same symbol variation display as the symbol variation display in which the display mode of the hold icon h12 is changed, but the display mode of the hold icon h12 is changed. The symbol variation display performed after the symbol variation display may be being executed.

  Thereafter, when the display of “hold 1UP” overlaps with the second hold icon h12 in FIG. 1, the display mode of the hold icon h12 changes from blue to green as shown in FIG. 98 (m). That is, the result of the mini game is reflected, and it is produced that the reliability of the pre-reading notice in the hold icon h12 is increased by one level. Note that even if the display of “hold 1UP” overlaps the hold icon, the display mode of the hold icon may not change.

  Thereafter, when the symbol variation display time elapses, as shown in FIG. 98 (n), the first decorative symbol display device 208L stops and displays the first decorative symbol as a combination of “decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2”. , It is notified that it is lost. Also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in combination with “decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2”. At this time, the character display displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 is erased and is not displayed.

  In the present embodiment, the mini-game mission is achieved, so that the display state of the pre-reading notice on the hold icon is increased by one level. For example, the mini-game mission is achieved. As a result, one of the mini items shown in FIG. 18 and FIG. 72 (d) is stocked, and the contents of the effect (notification effect) to be performed thereafter may be notified in advance, or timer stock may be performed. May be. Here, the timer stock is, for example, one aspect of a notice that displays a timer and suggests that a special effect is started when the time indicated by the timer has elapsed. In addition, as a result of the mini-game mission being achieved, it may be possible to acquire rare items that are not related to the determination result.

  In the present embodiment, the mini game is started at the timing after the hold icon is changed to the display mode of the button hold icon and the change effect of the hold icon is started. However, the mini game is started. The change icon change effect may be started later. In the present embodiment, the period during which the hold icon change effect is performed overlaps with the period during which the mini game is performed. However, the periods may not overlap. The mini-game may be started after a change effect of the hold icon is performed in the display and the hold icon is changed to a pre-read notice display mode (for example, a blue display mode). That is, the mini game may be started during execution of a certain symbol variation display in a state where the hold icon in the blue display mode is displayed. The same applies to the following description.

  Also, in this embodiment, as a reward that the mini-game mission has been achieved, the hold icon that has changed to the display mode of the pre-reading notice due to the change effect of the button hold icon will be notified in advance, As a reward for the achievement of the mini game mission, it may be notified that the hold icon changes to the display mode of the pre-read notice by the change effect of the button hold icon. In this case, the rank of the display mode of the prefetch notice may be notified in advance. Moreover, you may make it notify in advance that the change effect of a button holding | maintenance icon is performed.

  In this example, the mini game is played on the sub liquid crystal (second decorative symbol display device 208M), but may be played on the main liquid crystal (first decorative symbol display device 208L).

  FIG. 99 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of a mini game effect. 99 (a) to 99 (j) are the same as FIGS. 98 (a) to 98 (j) and will not be described.

  When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 99 (j), as shown in FIG. 99 (k), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the hold icon h12 of the button hold icon display mode is displayed. The display mode changes to a circle and green, and the display of “pending 1 UP” is erased in the second decorative symbol display device 208M. As described above, in this effect example, the operation of the effect button 136 shows the case where the change of the hold icon of the button hold icon display mode and the change of the hold icon display mode due to the achievement of the mini game mission are simultaneously performed. . In other words, in this effect example, the change of the display state of the hold icon by the change effect of the button hold icon to the first display mode (blue display mode) of the pre-reading notice and the result of the mini game mission achievement are reflected. The rank of the pre-reading notice of the display mode of the hold icon is simultaneously performed.

  FIG. 100 is a diagram showing step by step about another example of the effect of the mini game. 100 (a) to 100 (b) are the same as FIGS. 98 (a) to 98 (b), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  In FIG. 100 (c), unlike FIG. 98 (c), the change effect of the hold icon is not started, and the hold icon h12 of the second special figure 1 remains in the default display mode. Thereafter, the mini-game effect is started at the timing shown in FIG. 100 (d), and the mini-game is played in the manner described above with reference to FIGS. 98 (d)-(h) (FIG. 100 (d)- (H) in FIG.

  In the state where the change effect of the hold icon is not started, at the timing shown in FIG. 100 (i), the hold icon h12 of the second special figure 1 changes to a blue display mode in the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Then, the display mode changes to the first stage of the pre-reading notice. That is, in this production example, the change in the display mode of the hold icon due to the change display effect of the hold icon using the button hold icon is not performed, but only the change in the display mode of the hold icon as a reflection of the mini game mission achievement result. Has been done.

  FIG. 101 is a diagram showing step by step about another example of the effect of the mini game. 101A to 101 are the same as FIGS. 98A to 98 and will not be described.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 101 (l), the display of “pending 1UP” displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M moves across the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the display of “pending 1UP” is displayed. As shown in FIG. 101 (m), when the second hold icon h12 in FIG. 1 overlaps, the display mode of the hold icon h12 changes from blue to red, and the reliability of the pre-reading notice increases by two levels. ing. In this production example, as a result of accomplishing the mission of the mini-game, a one-step rank increase in the reliability of the pre-reading notice was foretold, but a result more advantageous than the noticed content (a two-step increase in the reliability of the pre-reading notice) Is reflected.

  Thereafter, when the symbol variation display time elapses, as shown in FIG. 101 (n), the first decorative symbol display device 208L stops and displays the first decorative symbol as a combination of “decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2”. , It is notified that it is lost. Also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in combination with “decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2”. At this time, the character display displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 is erased and is not displayed.

  In this embodiment, due to the change effect of the button hold icon, the display mode of the hold icon changes to the first display mode (blue display mode) of the pre-reading notice, and then the result of the mini game mission achievement is obtained. As a reflection, the display mode of the hold icon is further changed. However, after the change mode of the button hold icon changes, the display mode of the hold icon changes to the display mode of two or more ranks of the pre-reading notice, You may make it rank-up the display mode of a hold icon as reflection of the result of mission achievement. Here, for example, due to the change effect of the button hold icon, the display mode of the hold icon is the highest-ranked display mode (for example, the red display mode, or the premium display mode (for example, the rainbow) When the display mode is changed to the color display mode)), the display mode of the hold icon may not be changed even when the rank of the display mode of the hold icon is notified as a result of achievement of the mini game mission. Further, the display mode may be changed to a specific display mode (for example, a gold display mode) that can be displayed only as a reflection of the achievement result of the mini game mission.

  FIG. 102 is a diagram showing step by step another example of the effect of the mini game. 102 (a) to 102 (e) are the same as FIGS. 98 (a) to 98 (e), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 102 (f) after the mini game is started, the dice symbol is stopped on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, as shown in FIG. 102 (g). indicate. On the other hand, in this effect example, the hold icon h12 in the display mode of the button hold icon displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L changes to the first display mode (blue display mode) of the pre-reading notice. . That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the button operation reception in the mini game and the button operation reception in the button hold icon change effect are performed simultaneously by one operation of the effect button 136.

  Thereafter, effects are performed in the manner described above with reference to FIGS. 98 (k) to (l) (FIG. 102 (h) to (k)).

  FIG. 103 is a diagram showing step by step another example of the mini-game effect. 103 (a) to 103 (c) are the same as FIGS. 98 (a) to 98 (c), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  In this effect example, before the start of the mini-game effect, at the timing shown in FIG. 103 (d), the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are replaced by the first decorative symbol display device 208L. The second decorative symbol display device 208M starts to slide along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208M, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M has a position where the left end side of the display region substantially matches the left end side of the display region of the first decorative symbol display device 208L The third decorative symbol display device 208N stops at a position where the right end side of the display area substantially matches the right end side of the display region of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. At this time, the hold icon h12 in the display mode of the button hold icon is overlapped with the second decorative symbol display device 208M where the mini game is performed, and compared with the state where the second decorative symbol display device 208M is not overlapped. The hold icon h12 is difficult to visually recognize. In other words, it can be said that the effect including the button image for promoting the button operation is overlapped with the effect including the button image for promoting the button operation. The change effect of the button hold icon is performed by the hold icon h12 of the second special figure 1, the hold icon h13 of the third special figure 1, and the hold icon h14 of the fourth special figure 1. In this case, it is overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and when it is performed with the hold icon h11 of the first special symbol 1, it is not overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Even when the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 is used, the second decorative symbol display device 208M may be overlapped. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 103 (d), a part of the hold icon h12 of the second special figure 1 is overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M. All of the hold icons h12 may be overlapped with the second decorative symbol display device 208M. In this effect example, if only one of the change notice of the display mode of the hold icon and the mini game is being performed, the effects of each other do not overlap, Even when the period in which the display mode change notice is performed and the period in which the mini-game is performed do not overlap, the effects of each other do not overlap. Further, the tutorial display unit TT1 in the first decorative symbol display device 208L is also overlapped with the third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the tutorial display unit is compared with the state in which the third decorative symbol display device 208M is not overlapped. It is difficult to visually recognize the character displayed on TT1. In addition, the first decorative symbol has a left symbol and a right symbol overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N, respectively. It is not overlapped by the display device and is visible.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 103 (e), the second decorative symbol display device 208M starts the mini-game effect as described above with reference to FIG. 98 (d).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 103 (f), the second decorative symbol display device 208 </ b> M starts dice symbol variation display.

  When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 103 (g) after the mini game is started, as shown in FIG. 103 (h), the dice symbol is stopped on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. indicate. Note that the display mode of the hold icon h12 of the button hold icon display mode displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is not changed. That is, also in this effect example, the operation of the effect button 136 in the change effect of the button hold icon is not accepted, and only the operation of the effect button 136 in the mini game is accepted. In the example shown in FIG. 103 (h), the dice symbol is stopped and displayed in a mode indicating “3”, and it is notified that the mission has been achieved.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 103 (i), the second decorative symbol display device 208M displays “pending 1UP” indicating that it is a reward for accomplishing the mission. Thereafter, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N start to slide in a direction away from each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, as shown in FIG. 103 (j). As shown, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N both stop at the initial position. At this time, the hold icon h12 in the display mode of the button hold icon has the overlap by the second decorative symbol display device 208M eliminated, and the hold icon h12 has a hold icon compared to the state in which it is overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M. h12 is easily visible. Note that the timing at which the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N return to the initial positions may be after the mini game has ended or during the derivation of the mini game result. May be.

  Thereafter, an effect is performed in the manner described above with reference to FIGS. 98 (j) to (n) (FIG. 103 (k) to (n).

  In this effect example, the display device that performs the change effect by the button hold icon is different from the display device that performs the effect of the mini game, and the button is displayed by the second decorative symbol display device 208M where the effect of the mini game is performed. Although the state in which the change effect by the hold icon is overlapped is shown, the display device in which the change effect by the button hold icon is performed may be the same as the display device in which the mini game effect is performed. In this case, for example, the mini-game effect may be displayed so as to overlap the change effect by the button hold icon.

  Further, in this effect example, a change effect by a button hold icon is performed in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and a mini game effect is performed in the second decorative symbol display device 208M. A change effect by the button hold icon may be performed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and a mini game effect may be performed by the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In this case, the change effect by the button hold icon is performed. The effect of the mini game may be overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

  Further, when the display device that performs the change effect by the button hold icon and the display device that performs the effect of the mini game are the same, for example, the change effect by the button hold icon overlaps the effect of the mini game. You may make it display.

  In addition, in this production example, an example in which the production of the mini game overlaps with another production is shown, but for example, in addition to the mini game production, other than the mini game such as the customer waiting demonstration production and the decorative symbol variation display The effect may be performed, and this effect may overlap other effects. More specifically, for example, the big decorative effect is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol display device 208M is moved along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the first decorative symbol is displayed. You may make it overlap with the production | presentation displayed on the display apparatus 208L. According to this, there may be a case where an effect other than the mini-game is performed, and the effect can be more noticed.

  FIG. 104 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of the effect of the mini game. 104 (a) to 104 (g) are the same as FIGS. 103 (a) to 103 (g), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 104 (g) after the mini game is started, as shown in FIG. 104 (h), the design of the dice is stopped on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. indicate. On the other hand, in this effect example, the display mode of the button hold icon displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L and overlapped with the second decorative symbol display device 208M where the effect of the mini game is performed. The hold icon h12 changes to the display mode (blue display mode) of the first stage of the prefetch notice. That is, in this effect example, button operation reception in the mini game and button operation reception in the change effect of the button hold icon overlapped with the mini game effect are simultaneously performed by operating the effect button 136 once. Is shown.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 104 (i), the second decorative symbol display device 208M displays “pending 1UP” indicating that it is a reward for mission achievement. Thereafter, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N start to slide in a direction away from each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. FIG. As shown, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N both stop at the initial position. At this time, the hold icon h12 that has changed to the blue display mode has the overlap by the second decorative symbol display device 208M eliminated, and the hold icon h12 has a hold icon compared to the state in which it is overlapped by the second decorative symbol display device 208M. h12 is easily visible.

  Thereafter, effects are performed in the manner described above with reference to FIGS. 102 (i) to (k) (FIG. 104 (k) to (l)).

  FIG. 105 is a diagram showing step by step another example of the effect of the mini game. 105 (a) to 105 (g) are the same as FIGS. 103 (a) to 103 (g), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 105 (g) after the mini game is started, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 105 (h), the second decorative symbol display device 208M performs the operation. The design of the dice in the production of the mini game is not stopped and displayed on the first decorative design display device 208L, and is overlapped with the second decorative design display device 208M in which the production of the mini game is performed. The hold icon h12 in the display mode of the button hold icon is changed to the display mode (blue display mode) of the first stage of the pre-reading notice. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the button operation in the mini game is not accepted, and only the button operation in the change effect of the button holding icon overlapped with the mini game effect is accepted. In other words, in this effect example, it can be said that the button operation is accepted in the button suspension icon change effect in preference to the button operation accepted in the mini game.

  Thereafter, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N start sliding in a direction away from each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. As shown, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N both stop at the initial position. At this time, the effect of the mini game is still continuing, and the state where the gauge of the button reception time meter is reduced is shown together with the display of the button image 136a in order to promote the operation of the effect button 136. . On the other hand, the hold icon h12 that has changed to the blue display mode has the overlap by the second decorative symbol display device 208M eliminated, and the hold icon h12 is compared to the state in which the overlap is performed by the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Is easily visible.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 105 (j), as shown in FIG. 105 (k), in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the result of the dice symbol “3” is displayed. The stop is displayed in the mode shown to notify that the mission has been achieved.

  Thereafter, effects are performed in the manner described above with reference to FIGS. 102 (h) to (k) (FIG. 105 (l) to (n)).

  FIG. 106 is a diagram showing step by step another example of the effect of the mini game. 106 (a) to FIG. 106 (f) are the same as FIG. 98 (a) to FIG. 98 (f), description thereof will be omitted.

  When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 106 (f) after the mini-game is started, as shown in FIG. 106 (g), the design of the dice is stopped on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. On the other hand, the display mode of the hold icon h12 of the button hold icon display mode displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is not changed. In the example shown in FIG. 106 (g), the dice symbol is stopped and displayed in a manner indicating the outcome of “1”, and it is notified that the mission has not been achieved.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 106 (h), the second decorative symbol display device 208M displays “sorry” to notify that the mini game mission has failed. Therefore, in this production example, the notice of jackpot notice is not performed. In the present embodiment, it is configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily when the achievement of the mission is derived than when the achievement other than the achievement of the mission is derived. Yes.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 106 (i), the hold icon h12 of the button hold icon display mode changes to the default display mode as shown in FIG. 98 (j). . In other words, it is indicated that the change effect of the button hold icon is the effect of changing the display state of the prefetch notice.

  Thereafter, when the symbol variation display time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 106 (k), the first decorative symbol display device 208L stops and displays the first decorative symbol as a combination of “decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2”. , It is notified that it is lost. Also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in combination with “decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2”. At this time, the character display displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 is erased and is not displayed.

  FIG. 107 is a diagram showing another example of a minigame effect in stages. 107 (a) to 107 (e) are the same as FIGS. 98 (a) to 98 (e), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 107 (f) shows a state in which the mini-game has started, but the effect button 136 has not been operated yet. Therefore, the change display of the dice symbol is continuously performed.

  Thereafter, when the operation reception period of the effect button 136 elapses at the timing shown in FIG. 107 (g), the mini-game effect ends without notification of the mini-game result as shown in FIG. 107 (h). To do.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 107 (i), the hold icon h12 of the button hold icon display mode changes to a blue display mode as shown in FIG. 107 (j). A pre-reading notice will be made.

  Thereafter, when the symbol variation display time has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 107 (k), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the first decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in a combination of “decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2”. , It is notified that it is lost. Also in the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in combination with “decoration 6-decoration 2-decoration 2”. At this time, the character display displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 is erased and is not displayed.

  In the effect example shown in FIG. 98, in the mini game, when the effect button 136 is operated during the operation reception period of the effect button 136, a notice that the mini game mission is achieved and the display mode of the hold icon changes. However, in this effect example, since the effect button 136 is not operated in the mini game, the mission is not achieved, and the notice that the display mode of the hold icon changes is not performed. Also, in this production example, since the mission has not been achieved, the production that the display mode of the hold icon is increased by one level is not performed. For example, the display mode of the hold icon changes to the second stage. If it is determined in advance, the display mode of the hold icon may be changed as previously set regardless of the result of the mini game. For example, the hold icon may be changed to the second stage. After changing the hold icon to the first stage with the change effect of the hold icon on the button, the mini game effect is executed so that the result of the mini game is achieved, and the mini game is derived. Even if the result of the mini-game is not derived when it is planned to change the hold icon to the second level according to the result, The end to hold the icon may be changed to a second stage. Regarding the change mode, for example, in the change effect of the button hold icon, the hold icon is changed from the button hold icon display mode to the green display mode in accordance with the operation of the effect button 136. The display mode may be changed, or the hold icon is changed from the display mode of the button hold icon to the first display mode which is the blue display mode in response to the operation of the effect button 136. Later, during the execution of the symbol variation display, when the symbol variation is stopped, or during the execution of the symbol variation display performed after the symbol variation display being executed, the second stage which is the green display mode The display mode may be changed. In other words, a notice corresponding to the result of executing the mini game may be given, or if the result of the mini game is not derived, the notice corresponding to the result that was scheduled to be derived is given. It may not be performed. Even if it does in this way, since the result of a symbol fluctuation display does not fluctuate, it is possible to perform suitable production.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the hold icon may be configured to have a green display mode more easily when the mini game is played than when the mini game is not played. That is, it can be said that when the mini game is started, the advance notice is easily performed in an advantageous manner as compared with the case where the mini game is not started.

  In this production example, if the mini-game is started and the result of the mini-game is not derived in the state where the hold icon is displayed in the pre-read notice display mode, the rank-up of the display mode of the hold icon is Although it is not performed, the current state is maintained, but even when the mini game result is not derived, the display mode of the hold icon may be ranked up. In this case, the ranking may be increased in the symbol variation display in which the mini game is performed, or may be ranked in the symbol variation display started after the symbol variation display in which the mini game is performed.

  In this example, the example of changing the display mode of the hold icon has been described as an example of the pre-reading notice. However, a known form such as a continuous notice can be applied to the pre-reading notice. .

  Next, another specific example of effects executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS.

  108 to 116 are diagrams showing stepwise modifications of effects centered on the decorative symbol display device of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to this embodiment. 108 to 116, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the universal figure hold. The lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown. 108 to 116 show a pachinko machine 100 configured with a single decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. Note that, as in the embodiment described above, a plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided. Further, the above-described transparent light guide plate IL may be disposed on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 108 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of a mini game effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, and FIG. 109 is a diagram showing a continuation of the specific effect example shown in FIG. It is. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 108 (a), “decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3”, which is a combination of losing decorative symbols, is stopped and displayed. Further, the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed in the default display mode, but the hold icon h12 of the second special figure 1 is displayed in the display form of the sabotani. That is, it is displayed in the display mode of the pre-reading notice. In addition, in this production example, the second hold number display of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 and the fourth symbol display of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 are not performed, but these displays may be performed. .

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 108 (b), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested, and the hold icon h12 of the second special figure 1 is used as the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1. In addition, the display of the decorative symbols is started. At this time, after the hold is digested and the symbol variation display is started, one variation icon corresponding to the symbol variation display may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The display mode of the fluctuation icon may be the same as or different from the display mode of the digested hold icon h11, for example.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 108 (c), the first stop is performed and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the decorative symbol variation display continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 108 (d), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the decorative symbol variation display continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 108 (e), the third stop is performed, and “decoration 5” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. -It is fixedly displayed with the combination of the decorative pattern of the “decoration 5—decoration 7”.

  Subsequently, in FIG. 108 (f), the hold of the special figure 1 is digested and the hold display disappears, the first special figure display device 212 (not shown) starts the symbol variation display, and the decorative symbol display device 208 also displays the decorative symbol. Fluctuation display has started.

  Thereafter, step-up notice is started in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The step-up notice is a notice that sequentially switches and displays a plurality of display modes in a predetermined display order. In the step-up notice in the present embodiment, each display form has a number indicating the number of steps of the display form. It is displayed. The number of steps is a display showing the level of reliability of the big hit. For example, when displayed up to step 5, the development to super reach is confirmed and the possibility of a big hit is increased. However, even if it is displayed up to step 5, it may be missed, and the reliability is not 100%. In addition, when displayed up to step 5, the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed. As the number of steps increases, the display size also increases. At the timing shown in FIG. 108B (g), the step-up notice SU1 in the display mode of step 1 is displayed. This step-up notice SU1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative design. Therefore, it is more difficult to visually recognize the decorative symbols when they are overlapped by the step-up notice SU1 than when they are not overlapped by the step-up notice SU1.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 108 (h), the decorative symbol display device 208 updates the step-up notice and displays the step-up notice SU2 in the display mode of step 2. Here again, the step-up notice SU2 in the display mode of step 2 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative design.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 108 (i), the decorative symbol display device 208 further updates the step-up notice and displays the step-up notice SU 3 in the display mode of step 3. Here again, the step-up notice SU3 in the display mode of step 3 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative design.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 108 (j), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the first stop is performed, and “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the decorative symbol variation display continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 108 (k), the second stop is performed, “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, and a reach state is formed. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “reach” to notify that it has reached the reach state. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the decorative symbol variation display continues.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 108 (l), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state where it has been developed into super reach (subjugation reach). In the super reach state, the decorative symbols displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c are displayed small in the upper left corner, and a screen on which the main character and the enemy swordsman confront each other is displayed.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 108 (m), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a mini game display area MN1 in which a mini game is displayed is formed in the lower right part of the display area. The mini game display area MN1 is displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the super reach effect display, and the super reach effect display is difficult to see compared to the case where the mini game display area MN1 is not displayed. Yes. The mini game in this production example is a game whose mission is to continuously perform the production button 136 during the operation valid period and finally derive “Daiyoshi”. In other words, the mini game in this production example requires multiple operations of the production button 136 in order to derive the result. FIG. 108 (m) shows a state in which a mini game is started, and a description of play in the mini game is displayed. Specifically, the characters “continuous hit” are displayed together with the button image 136 a to prompt the player to press the effect button 136 repeatedly. Below that, there is a text display of “Daikichi and Atsu notice”, and it is announced that there is a possibility that a highly reliable notice may be generated by deriving “Daikichi”. The contents of the mission and the results of mission achievement are explained. Note that the mini game display area MN1 may not be partitioned by a frame.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 108 (n), in the mini game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, “Daiyoshi”, which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini game, is displayed.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 108 (o), in the mini game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, “Nakayoshi”, which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini game, is displayed. The display of “Nakayoshi” is overlapped with a part of the display of “Daiyoshi”.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 108 (p), in the mini game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, “Kiyoshi”, which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini game, is displayed. The display of “Koyoshi” is overlapped with a part of the display of “Nakayoshi”.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 108 (q), in the mini-game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the character “continuous hit” is displayed together with the button image 136a below the display of “Koyoshi”. It has been informed that the acceptance of the continuous hitting operation has been started.

  FIG. 108 (r) shows a state in which the player has repeatedly operated the effect button 136.

  FIG. 109 (a) following FIG. 108 (r) shows a state in which the player is continuously performing the continuous operation of the effect button 136. FIG. When the effect button 136 is operated a predetermined number of times, a star effect image is displayed in the mini game display area MN1, and the number increases as the number of operations increases due to repeated hits. In this effect example, when the player interrupts the continuous hitting of the effect button 136, the number of star effect images gradually decreases, but may not be decreased. At the timing shown in FIG. 109 (a), four star effect images are displayed in the mini game display area MN1.

  FIG. 109 (b) shows a state in which the player continuously performs the continuous operation of the effect button 136. At the timing shown in FIG. 109 (b), five star effect images are displayed in the mini game display area MN 1, and the display of “Koyoshi” is erased by operating the effect button 136 a predetermined number of times. It is reported that the possibility of deriving “Nakayoshi” or “Daichi” as a result of the mini-game is increased. In this production example, when the player interrupts the continuous firing of the production button 136, the display of “Kokichi” once erased may be displayed again. Also good.

  FIG. 109 (c) shows a state where the player continues to perform the continuous operation of the effect button 136. At the timing shown in FIG. 109 (c), there is no change in the number of star effect images displayed in the mini game display area MN1, and “Daiyoshi” and “Nakayoshi” are displayed continuously. Instead of displaying the button image 136 and the characters “continuous hit”, the characters “2 seconds remaining” are displayed, and it is informed that the operation valid period is 2 seconds remaining.

  FIG. 109 (d) shows a state in which the player continues to perform the continuous operation of the effect button 136. At the timing shown in FIG. 109 (d), there is no change in the number of star effect images displayed in the mini game display area MN1, and the display of “Daiyoshi” and “Nakayoshi” continues. The display for notifying the operation effective period is “1 second”, and it is notified that the operation effective period is 1 second.

  FIG. 109 (e) shows a state in which the player continuously performs the continuous operation of the effect button 136. At the timing shown in FIG. 109 (e), there is no change in the number of star effect images displayed in the mini game display area MN1, and there is no change in the display for notifying the operation valid period. It is informed that the display of “Nakayoshi” is erased by the operation of 136, and there is a high possibility that “Daiyoshi” will be derived as a result of the mini game. In this production example, if the player interrupts the continuous firing of the production button 136, the display of “Nakayoshi” once erased may be displayed again. Also good.

  FIG. 109 (f) shows a state in which “daikichi” is derived as a result of the mini-game in the mini-game display area MN1 after the player continuously performs the continuous operation of the effect button 136. That is, it is notified that the mini game mission has been achieved. As a result, the player is informed that there is a possibility that an intense hot notice will appear. It should be noted that, by deriving the display of “Daikichi”, a notice may be given that an intense notice will always be executed.

  Subsequently, when the mini game display area MN1 is erased at the timing shown in FIG. 109 (g), the super reach effect is resumed. Also, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 109 (g), the button notice effect is started, the button image 136a is displayed in a vibrating and rotating manner, and “Push” is displayed together with the button image 136a. Is displayed, and a state in which a single operation of the effect button 136 is promoted is shown. At this time, the effect button 136 vibrates as the inside of the cover body rotates, for example. In addition, the button image 136a may be displayed in a mode in which only the vibration is performed, may be displayed in a mode in which only the rotation is performed, or may be displayed in a mode in which neither the vibration nor the rotation is performed. There may be cases. In this production example, when the button image 136a is displayed in a manner that vibrates and rotates, the button image 136a is displayed in a final state, compared to when the button image 136a is displayed in a manner in which at least one of vibration and rotation is not performed. Therefore, the big hit symbol is configured to be easily stopped. Note that the button image 136a may be displayed only in a mode that neither vibrates nor rotates. Thus, in the present embodiment, it can be said that the number of operations of the effect button 136 is different between the mini game and the main effect (effect related to the variation display of the decorative symbols). In this example, in the mini game, an effect is performed by repeatedly operating the effect button 136. In the main effect, an effect is performed by operating the effect button 136 once. However, in the mini game, the effect button is used in the main effect. An effect by 136 continuous hitting operations may be performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 in FIG. 109 (h), the super reach effect is continuously performed, and the display for promoting the operation of the effect button 136 is continuously performed. Here, when the operation effective period is started, the button reception time meter MT is displayed instead of the character display of “Push”, and the gauge is displayed in a manner that the gauge decreases as the operation effective period elapses.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 109 (h), when the production button 136 is operated, as shown in FIG. 109 (i), along with the up image of Tono-sama's character, the characters "game" A cut-in image including a balloon image in which is arranged is displayed. The cut-in image displayed here is a strong cut-in image CI1a in which a large number of face length faces (for example, nine) are arranged around the characters “game” in the balloon. In the game, a display of “Daiyoshi” is derived and displayed in accordance with the result of the achievement of the mission.

  On the other hand, in the mini game, when the display of “Daiyoshi” is not derived and the mission is not achieved, a weak cut-in image CI1b as shown in FIG. 109 (i ′) is displayed. The weak cut-in image CI1b is an image that is smaller in size than the strong cut-in image CI1a, and is an image in which the face of the bancho is not arranged around the characters “game” in the balloon. Note that the strong cut-in image CI1a may be displayed even when the mission is not achieved in the mini game. It should be noted that both the strong cut-in image CI1a and the weak cut-in image CI1b overlap the super reach effect, and when these cut-in images are displayed, the super reach is performed more than when these cut-in images are not displayed. The production is considered difficult to see. Further, the strong cut-in image CI1a and the weak cut-in image CI1b are overlapped with a decorative design.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 109 (j), on the decorative symbol display device 208, a screen is displayed in which the main character defeats the enemy swordsman and wins. “Decoration 7” scheduled to be stopped and displayed is displayed in the symbol display area 208b, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7” is scheduled to be stopped. .

  Thereafter, at the timing when the variation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 109 (k), the decoration symbol display device 208 stops and displays (decision display) the combination of the decoration symbols “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”. One special game of variable game is completed.

  In this production example, the mini-game requests a continuous operation of the production button 136 in order to achieve the mission, while the main production requires a single operation of the production button 136 to make a notice appear. The mini-game may require one operation of the effect button 136, and the main effect may require a continuous operation of the effect button 136.

  Moreover, when the result of the mini game is related to the notice related to the symbol variation display as in this production example, the execution time of the mini game is shorter than the execution time of the symbol variation display. .

  FIG. 110 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

  FIG. 110 (a) is an effect following FIG. 108 (j), showing that “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, and a reach state is formed. ing. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “reach” to notify that it has reached the reach state. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the decorative symbol variation display continues.

  Subsequently, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 110 (b), the state of development to super reach (subjugation reach) is shown. In the super reach state, the decorative symbols displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c are displayed small in the upper left corner, and a screen on which the main character and the enemy swordsman confront each other is displayed.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 110 (c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a mini game display area MN1 is formed in the lower right portion of the display area. The mini game in this production example is also performed in the manner described above with reference to FIGS. FIG. 110 (c) shows a state in which a mini game is started, and a description of play in the mini game is displayed. Specifically, the characters “continuous hit” are displayed together with the button image 136 a to prompt the player to press the effect button 136 repeatedly. Below that, there is a text display of “Daikichi and Atsu notice”, and it is announced that there is a possibility that a highly reliable notice may be generated by deriving “Daikichi”. The contents of the mission and the results of mission achievement are explained. On the other hand, the button operation effect that requires the operation of the effect button is started even in the main effect. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 110 (c), the button image 136a is displayed in a vibrating and rotating manner, the letters “Push” are displayed together with the button image 136a, and the effect button 136 is displayed once. It shows how the operation is promoted. At this time, the effect button 136 vibrates as the inside of the cover body rotates, for example. In addition, the button image 136a may be displayed in a mode in which only the vibration is performed, may be displayed in a mode in which only the rotation is performed, or may be displayed in a mode in which neither the vibration nor the rotation is performed. There may be cases.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 110 (d), in the mini game display area MN 1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, “Daiyoshi”, which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini game, is displayed. On the other hand, in the main effect, the operation effective period in the main effect has not started and the button reception time meter is displayed, but the gauge does not decrease. This suggests that there is some relationship between the minigame and the main performance in the minigame display area MN1.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 110 (e), in the mini game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, “Nakayoshi”, which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini game, is displayed. The display of “Nakayoshi” is overlapped with a part of the display of “Daiyoshi”. On the other hand, in the main effect, the operation effective period has not yet started, and the display mode of the button reception time meter has not changed.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 110 (f), in the mini game display area MN 1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, “Koyoshi”, which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini game, is displayed. The display of “Koyoshi” is overlapped with a part of the display of “Nakayoshi”. On the other hand, in the main effect, the operation effective period does not start as usual, and the display mode of the button reception time meter does not change.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 110 (g), in the mini game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the character “continuous hit” is displayed together with the button image 136a below the display of “Koyoshi”. It is notified that acceptance of the continuous hitting operation by the effect button 136 has started. Then, the player starts to hit the effect button 136 continuously after seeing this notification. On the other hand, in the main effect, the operation effective period has not yet started, and the display mode of the button reception time meter has not changed. Thus, in this effect example, the button image 136a as the operation promotion display in the mini game and the button image 136a as the operation promotion display in the main effect are displayed in an overlapping manner. Further, in this effect example, the button operation for the mini game in the mini game display area MN1 overlapping the main effect is preferentially accepted. It should be noted that the button operation for the main effect overlapped with the mini game display area MN1 may be accepted with priority.

  FIG. 110 (h) shows a state in which the player performs a continuous hitting operation on the effect button 136. In the mini game display area MN1, a state is shown in which the number of star effect images increases in accordance with the number of operations of the effect button 136. At the timing shown in FIG. 110 (h), four star effect images are displayed in the mini game display area MN1. On the other hand, in the main effect, the operation effective period has not yet started, and the display mode of the button reception time meter has not changed.

  FIG. 110 (i) shows a state in which the player continuously performs the continuous operation of the effect button 136. At the timing shown in FIG. 110 (i), the display of “Koyoshi” is erased by the operation of the production button 136 a predetermined number of times, and “Nakayoshi” or “Daiyoshi” is derived as a result of the mini game. It has been reported that the possibility has increased. Note that the number of star effect images displayed in the mini game display area MN1 remains four. On the other hand, in the main effect, the operation effective period has not yet started, and the display mode of the button reception time meter has not changed.

  FIG. 110 (j) shows that the player continues to perform the continuous operation of the effect button 136. At the timing shown in FIG. 110 (j), five star effect images are displayed in the mini game display area MN1. Further, instead of displaying the button image 136 and the characters “continuous hit”, the characters “2 seconds remaining” are displayed, and it is notified that the operation valid period is the remaining 2 seconds. On the other hand, in the main effect, the operation effective period does not start as usual, and the display mode of the button reception time meter does not change.

  FIG. 110 (k) shows a state in which the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 by the player is interrupted. Then, the star effect images displayed in the mini game display area MN1 are gradually erased, and at the timing shown in FIG. 110 (k), the number of star effect images in the mini game display area MN1 is zero. The situation is shown. In addition, the display of “Daikichi” and the display of “Nakakichi” are continued, but the display for notifying the operation effective period is “1 second”, and the operation effective period is the remaining 1 second. Informed.

  FIG. 110 (l) shows a state in which “Nakayoshi” is derived as a result of the mini game in the mini game display area MN1 after the operation effective period in the mini game has elapsed. That is, it is notified that the mini game mission has not been achieved. Originally, “Daikichi” should have been derived when the continuous hitting operation was continuously performed, but the mission was not achieved due to the insufficient number of operations of the production button 136. It is due to that.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 110 (m), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the mini game is ended, the mini game display area MN1 is erased, the super reach effect is resumed, and the gauge of the gauge by the button reception time meter MT is restarted. Decrease display starts. Thereby, it is notified that the acceptance of the operation of the production button 136 in the main production is started. When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 110 (n), the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed as shown in FIG. 110 (o). This is displayed based on the fact that the derivation result of the mini-game is not “Daichi”. At this time, the strong cut-in image CI1a may be displayed. If it is determined in advance whether to display the strong cut-in image CI1a or the weak cut-in image CI1b, and if it is determined in advance that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, FIG. As shown in o ′), the strong cut-in image CI1a may be displayed as determined regardless of the participation situation (operation situation) of the effect button 136 in the mini game. Further, when it is determined in advance that the weak cut-in image CI1b is to be displayed, the display of “Daiyoshi” may not be derived regardless of the participation status (operation status) of the effect button 136 in the mini game. Good.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 110 (p), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a screen is displayed in which the main character defeats the enemy swordsman and wins, and in the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208, “Decoration 7” scheduled to be stopped and displayed is displayed in the symbol display area 208b, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7” is scheduled to be stopped. .

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 110 (q), the decoration symbol display device 208 stops displaying (decision display) the combination of the decoration symbols “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” at the timing when the variation time elapses. One special game of variable game is completed. In this way, the result of the success / failure is determined in advance, and the result of the symbol variation display corresponding to the result of the success / failure is derived. Therefore, the midway effect may be changed as appropriate. The notice that appears can be changed according to the operation status of the effect button 136).

  FIG. 111 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of the mini game effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

  FIG. 111 (a) is an effect following FIG. 108 (k), and the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state where it has developed into super reach (subjugation reach). In the super reach state, the decorative symbols displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c are displayed small in the upper left corner, and a screen on which the main character and the enemy swordsman confront each other is displayed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 111 (b), a mini game display area MN1 is formed in the lower right part of the display area, and a state in which a mini game is started in the mini game display area MN1 is shown. . Specifically, the characters “push” are displayed together with the button image 136a to prompt the operation of the effect button 136 once. In addition, below that, there is a character display of “Take out the Daikichi and see a super hot appearance in Daikichi”, and it will be announced that a highly reliable notice will be generated by deriving “Daikichi”. The contents of the mission and the results of mission achievement are explained.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 111 (c), in the mini game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, “Daiyoshi”, which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini game, is displayed.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 111 (d), in the mini game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, “Nakayoshi”, which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini game, is displayed. The display of “Nakayoshi” is overlapped with a part of the display of “Daiyoshi”.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 111 (e), in the mini-game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, “Koyoshi”, which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini-game, is displayed. The display of “Koyoshi” is overlapped with a part of the display of “Nakayoshi”.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 111 (f), in the mini game display area MN 1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, high-speed loop rotation of each display of “Daiyoshi”, “Nakayoshi”, and “Koyoshi” is started. In the lower part where the effect of the high-speed loop rotation is performed, the letters “push” are displayed together with the button image 136a, and it is notified that the acceptance of the single operation by the effect button 136 in the mini game is started. ing. On the other hand, in the main effect, a button operation effect that requires repeated operation of the effect buttons is started. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 111 (f), the button image 136 a is displayed in a manner that vibrates and rotates, along with this button image 136 a, the characters “continuous hit” are displayed, and the effect button 136 is repeatedly operated. It is shown that it is promoting. At this time, the effect button 136 vibrates as the inside of the cover body rotates, for example. In addition, the button image 136a may be displayed in a mode in which only the vibration is performed, may be displayed in a mode in which only the rotation is performed, or may be displayed in a mode in which neither the vibration nor the rotation is performed. There may be cases. As described above, in this effect example, an effect requesting continuous hitting operation by the effect button 136 is performed in the main effect, and an effect requesting one operation by the effect button 136 is performed in the mini game. That is, it can be said that the number of times of requesting the operation of the effect button 136 in the mini game is smaller than the number of times of requesting the operation of the effect button 136 in the main effect. In this effect example, an effect including a button image 136a as an operation promotion display in a mini game and an effect including a button image 136a as an operation promotion display in a main effect are displayed in an overlapping manner. Moreover, the button image 136a as the operation promotion display in the mini game and the button image 136a as the operation promotion display in the main effect may be displayed in an overlapping manner.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 111 (g), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the button reception time meter MT starts to display a decrease in gauge, and the operation reception of the effect button 136 is started. In this effect example, the reception of the operation of the effect button 136 in the main effect and the reception of the operation of the effect button 136 in the mini game are performed simultaneously. Note that the acceptance of the operation of the effect button 136 in the mini game may be started after the reception of the operation of the effect button 136 in the main effect is started, or the acceptance of the operation of the effect button 136 in the mini game is started. After that, the acceptance of the operation of the effect button 136 in the main effect may be started. Then, the player sees this and starts to repeatedly perform the effect button 136. In this effect example, the display mode of the button image 136a displayed in the button effect in the main effect corresponds to the state of the effect button 136, but the button image displayed in the mini game display area MN1. The display mode of 136a and the state of the effect button 136 are different. Thus, in this production example, both the main production and the mini-game production can be operated with the same operation means (production button 136). For this reason, for example, when an effect in which the acceptance of operation is given priority is an effect requesting repeated operations, and an effect in which the acceptance of operations is non-priority is an effect requiring one operation, the momentum of the operation means is repeated. A result may be derived for a non-priority effect, and an effect in which operation acceptance is given priority is an effect requiring one operation, and an effect in which operation acceptance is non-priority is a repeated hit operation. In the case of the requested effect, the continuous hitting operation is performed from the beginning, so that there may be a case where the result can be reliably derived for the priority effect.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 111 (h), in the mini game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, “daikichi” is derived as a result of the mini game in response to the first operation by the effect button 136. The situation is shown. Then, the word “achievement” indicating that the mini-game mission has been achieved is also displayed to notify that effect. That is, in this effect example, the operation of the effect button 136 in the effect of the mini game is accepted in preference to the reception of the operation of the effect button 136 in the main effect. On the other hand, continuous operation of the effect button 136 by the player is continuously performed.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 111 (i), the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in accordance with the repeated operation of the effect button in the main effect. In this effect example, a state in which a cut-in image is displayed during the operation effective period in the repeated operation effect in the main effect is shown. And the button reception time meter MT is overlapped by this cut-in image, and it is in a state that it is difficult to visually recognize as compared with the case where the cut-in image is not displayed. On the other hand, in the vicinity of the lower end edge of the decorative symbol display device 208, a “Mission Completed” display for notifying that the mission in the mini game has been achieved is scrolled from the right end to the left end. Thereby, it is notified that the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed on condition that the continuous operation of the effect button 136 is continued. It should be noted that the continuous operation of the effect button 136 by the player is still continued.

  Thereafter, as a result of the player's continuous operation of the effect button 136 being continuously performed, as shown in FIG. 111 (j), the decorative symbol display device 208 replaces the weak cut-in image CI1b with the strong cut-in image CI1a. The state where is displayed is shown. This is displayed as a result of mission achievement in the mini game as described above. In this effect example, a continuous hitting gauge whose display mode changes according to the number of operations of the effect button 136 may be displayed. For example, when the hitting gauge reaches the first amount, the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed. When the image is displayed and full, the strong cut-in image CI1a may be displayed. At this time, if it is determined in advance that the strong cut-in image CI1a is not displayed, the continuous hitting gauge may not be filled no matter how many consecutive hits are performed.

  When the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as described above, thereafter, as shown in FIG. 111 (k), in the vicinity of the lower edge of the decorative symbol display device 208, the display of “Mission accomplished” is displayed. “Intense notice notice” is displayed, and it is notified that the strong cut-in image CI1a, which is the notice notice, has been displayed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 111 (h), the mini-game mission is achieved, and then, as shown in FIG. 111 (i ′), the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed by the continuous operation of the effect button 136. However, if the number of operations of the effect button 136 is insufficient due to, for example, the player stopping the continuous hitting operation, the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed as shown in FIG. 111 (j ′). May remain. That is, as shown in this example of production, even if the mission is achieved, there may be a case where the law breaks up so that the intense warning notice does not appear depending on the operation state of the production button 136. In order to match the achievement of the mini-game mission, the strong cut-in image CI1a may be displayed regardless of the operation state of the effect button 136, or other strong cut-in image CI1a may be displayed. You may make it display an intense hot notice. Further, when the continuous hit operation is not performed in the main effect, neither the strong cut-in image CI1a nor the weak cut-in image CI1b may be displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 111 (l), on the decorative symbol display device 208, a screen is displayed in which the main character defeats the enemy swordsman and wins. “Decoration 7” scheduled to be stopped and displayed is displayed in the symbol display area 208b, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7” is scheduled to be stopped. .

  Thereafter, at the timing when the variation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 111 (m), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of decorative symbols “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed (determined display). One special game of variable game is completed.

  Thus, in this production example, the achievement of the mission is one of the display conditions of the strong cut-in image CI1a, and the strong cut-in is performed when the number of operations of the production button 136 is less than a predetermined number. When the image CI1a is not displayed and the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed, and the number of operations of the effect button 136 exceeds a predetermined number, the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. In this production example, when it is determined in advance whether the strong cut-in image CI1a or the weak cut-in image CI1b can be displayed, and when it is determined that the strong cut-in image CI1a can be displayed, the mini- In the game, the display of “Daichi” can be derived. In addition, when it is determined that only the weak cut-in CI 1b can be displayed, the display of “Daiyoshi” is not derived in the mini game. Further, in this effect example, in the button repeated operation effect in the main effect, the cut-in image is not displayed when the effect button 136 has not been operated at least as many times as necessary to display the weak cut-in CI1b. It may be. Further, when the effect button 136 is not operated in the mini game, the cut-in image may not be displayed even if the effect button 136 is repeatedly hit in the button continuous hit operation effect in the main effect, or the weak cut-in image is not displayed. Although CI1b can be displayed, strong cut-in image CI1a may not be displayed.

  FIG. 112 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

  FIG. 112 (a) is an effect following FIG. 108 (j), showing that “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, and the reach state is formed. ing. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “reach” to notify that it has reached the reach state. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the decorative symbol variation display continues.

  Subsequently, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 112 (b), the state of development to super reach (subjugation reach) is shown. In the super reach state, the decorative symbols displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c are displayed small in the upper left corner, and a screen on which the main character and the enemy swordsman confront each other is displayed.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 112 (c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a mini game display area MN1 is formed in the lower right portion of the display area. FIG. 112 (c) shows a state in which a mini game is started, and an explanation of play in the mini game is displayed. More specifically, the text “Let's make a big hit with repeated hits” is displayed together with the button image 136a, prompting the player to repeatedly press the effect button 136. It should be noted that the button image 136a displayed in the mini game display area MN1 shown in FIG. 112 (c) is larger than the button image 136a displayed in the mini game display area MN1 shown in FIG. 108 (m). However, they may be the same size. Further, the small button image 136a and the large button image 136a may be selectively displayed, and the reliability of mission achievement may be varied depending on the size of the displayed button image 136a. . That is, when the large button image 136a is displayed, the mission may be more easily achieved than when the small button image 136a is displayed. Also, below that, there is a character display of “Daiyoshi's strong cut-in occurrence”, and when “Daiyoshi” is derived, it is predicted that a strong cut-in notice with high reliability of big hit will occur. The contents of the mission and the results of the mission achievement are explained.

  Thereafter, the description of the game of the mini game displayed in the mini game display area MN1 is deleted, and as shown in FIG. 112 (d), the decorative symbol display device 208 may be derived as a result of the mini game. Each display of “Daikichi”, “Nakakichi”, “Kokichi” is displayed in this order, the display of “Daikichi” is overlapped with the display of “Nakakichi”, and the display of “Nakakichi” is “Kokichi” It is displayed so as to overlap the display of.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 112 (e), in the mini game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, the character “continuous hit” is displayed together with the button image 136a below the display of “Koyoshi”, and the effect button 136 is displayed. It has been informed that the acceptance of the continuous hitting operation has been started. A button reception time meter MT is displayed on the left side of the mini game display area MN1, and the gauge is displayed in a manner that the gauge decreases as the operation reception period of the effect button 136 elapses. In this effect example, it is shown that the display relating to the mini game is also performed in an area other than the mini game display area MN1.

  112 (f) to FIG. 112 (g) show a state in which the effect button 136 continues to be continuously hit during the operation reception period of the effect button 136 in the mini game. In the mini game display area MN1, the number of star effect images increases in accordance with the number of times the effect button 136 is repeatedly hit.

  After that, when the operation effective period of the effect button 136 elapses, a result corresponding to the number of repeated hits of the effect button 136 is derived. In the example shown in FIG. 112 (h), “Daiyoshi” is derived as a result of the mini game, and a character “Mission accomplished” is displayed below it to notify that the mission of the mini game has been achieved. ing.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 112 (i), the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed as the cut-in notice. Thereby, it is notified that the reliability of the big hit is high. The display of the strong cut-in image CI1a is based on the result of the mission achieved by deriving “Daiyoshi” as a result of the mini-game described above.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 112 (j), on the decorative symbol display device 208, a screen in which the main character defeats the enemy swordsman and wins is displayed. “Decoration 7” scheduled to be stopped and displayed is displayed in the symbol display area 208b, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7” is scheduled to be stopped. .

  Thereafter, at the timing when the fluctuation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 112 (k), the decoration symbol display device 208 stops and displays (decision display) the combination of the decoration symbols “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”. One special game of variable game is completed.

  On the other hand, after the acceptance of the continuous hitting operation by the effect button 136 is started at the timing shown in FIG. 112 (e), the number of operations of the effect button 136 as shown in FIG. 112 (f ′) to FIG. 112 (g ′). However, when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 has elapsed in a state where the number of times determined in advance is not reached, as shown in FIG. 112 (h ′), as a result of the mini game, the mini game display area MN1 While “Koyoshi” is derived, the text “Mission Failed” is displayed below it to notify that the mini-game mission has not been achieved. Note that the result of the mini game may be determined in advance based on the result of the determination.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 112 (i ′), the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed as the cut-in notice. Thereby, it is notified that the reliability of the big hit is lower than when the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. The display of the weak cut-in image CI1b is based on the result that the mission was not achieved because “Koyoshi” was derived as a result of the mini-game described above.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 112 (j ′), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a screen in which the main character Tosama defeated and defeated the enemy swordsman is displayed, and in the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208, “Decoration 6” scheduled to be stopped and displayed is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and it is notified that the combination of the “decoration 7”-“decoration 6”-“decoration 7” decoration symbol is scheduled to be stopped. The

  Thereafter, at the timing when the variation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 112 (k ′), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed (determined display). Then, the one-time special figure variable game is completed.

  FIG. 113 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of a mini game effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

  FIG. 113 (a) is an effect following FIG. 108 (d). In the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 2-decoration 5-decoration 7”, which is a combination of losing decorative symbols, is stopped and displayed. Further, the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed in the display form of Sabohani, that is, is displayed in the display form of the pre-reading notice.

  Subsequently, in FIG. 113 (b), the hold of the special figure 1 is digested and the hold display disappears, the first special figure display device 212 (not shown) starts the symbol variation display, and the decorative symbol display device 208 also displays the decorative symbol. Fluctuation display has started.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 113 (c) shows a state in which the mission as the main effect is started. Specifically, a “mission mission” character is displayed above the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 to notify that the mission has started. In addition, at the lower edge of the display area, “cut out” and “big hit if you go out” are displayed together with the image of the face of the bancho, and the contents of the mission are informed. That is, it is informed that if the image of the face of the chief leader appears during the mission, the mission is achieved and the jackpot is confirmed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 113 (d), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the first stop is performed, and “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the decorative symbol variation display continues. In the lower left corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, “Mission” is displayed to indicate that the mission is continuing.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 113 (e), the second stop is performed, “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c, and a reach state is formed. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “reach” to notify that it has reached the reach state. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the decorative symbol variation display continues. Also, “Mission” is displayed continuously.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 113 (f), the decorative symbol display device 208 performs display that develops into super reach. In the super reach state, the decorative symbols displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c are displayed small in the upper left corner, and a screen on which the main character and the enemy swordsman confront each other is displayed. Even after the development of Super Reach, “Mission” is still displayed.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 113 (g), the decoration symbol display device 208 shows that the mini game display area MN1 is formed in the lower right part of the display area and the mini game is started. This production example shows a state in which a mission as a main production and a mission in a mini game are performed simultaneously. In other words, a state in which a mini-game mission is overlapped with a mission as a main performance is shown. Here, in this production example, the mini game is started after the mission is started, but the mission may be started after the mini game is started. In addition, the effects shown in FIGS. 113 (g) to (l) are the same as those shown in FIGS. 112 (c) to 112 (c), except that “Mission” is displayed to indicate that the mission is in progress. Since it is the same as h), detailed description is omitted. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 113 (j) to FIG. 113 (k), part of the display of “in mission” is overlapped with the button reception time meter MT. The "Mission" display is more difficult to see than when there is no overlap.

  As shown in FIG. 113 (l), after the “daikichi” is derived as a result of the mini game and the mission is achieved, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs the cut-in notice at the timing shown in FIG. 113 (m). A strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. The display of the strong cut-in image CI1a is based on the result of the mission achieved by deriving “Daiyoshi” as a result of the mini-game described above. Note that the mission continues while the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed, and the display of “in mission” continues, but is overlapped with the strong cut-in image CI1a, and the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. It is considered that it is more difficult to see than when it is not overlapped with CI1a.

  As described above, the strong cut-in image CI1a is an image including a speech balloon in which a number of face-length faces are arranged around the character “game”. For this reason, the appearance of the face of Bancho, which is the mission in the main performance, has been achieved, so that the character display of “Mission accomplished” is over the strong cut-in image CI1a in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 113 (n). Wrapped and displayed. That is, it is informed that the big hit is fixed when the mission in the main performance is achieved. In other words, in this effect example, it can be said that the mission in the main effect is achieved by the appearance of the strong cut-in image CI1a.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 113 (o), on the decorative symbol display device 208, a screen in which the main character defeats the enemy swordsman and wins is displayed. “Decoration 7” scheduled to be stopped and displayed is displayed in the symbol display area 208b, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7” is scheduled to be stopped. .

  Thereafter, at the timing when the variation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 113 (p), the decoration symbol display device 208 stops and displays (decision display) the combination of the decoration symbols “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”. One special game of variable game is completed.

  FIG. 114 is a diagram showing step by step about another example of the mini game effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. 114 (a) to (k) are the same as FIGS. 113 (a) to (k), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 114 (l), when “Kiyoshi” is derived as a result of the mini game, the text “Mission failure” is displayed below the mini game, and the mission of the mini game has not been achieved. Is notified. In this production example, the result of the success / failure determination is a loss. Therefore, when the mini game mission is achieved, the strong cut-in image CI1a must be displayed. Regardless of the number of operations of the effect button 136, it is determined in advance so that anything other than “Daichi” is always derived.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 114 (m), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the weak cut-in image CI1b as the cut-in notice. The weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed because the mission has not been achieved as a result of the above-described mini game. Note that the mission continues while the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed, and the display of “Mission” continues, but is overlapped with the weak cut-in image CI1b, and the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed. Although it is considered that it is more difficult to view than when not overlapped with CI1b, the size of the weak cut-in image CI1b is smaller than the size of the strong cut-in image CI1a. The case where it overlaps with weak cut-in image CI1b is easier to visually recognize than the case where it overlaps with CI1a.

  As described above, the weak cut-in image CI1b is an image that does not include the face of the bancho. Therefore, since the appearance of the face of the chief, which is the mission in the main performance, has not been achieved, the character display of “mission failure” is displayed in the weak cut-in image CI1b in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. It is displayed overlapping. In other words, in this effect example, it can be said that the mission in the main effect has not been achieved due to the appearance of the weak cut-in image CI1b.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 114 (o), on the decorative symbol display device 208, a screen in which the hero's lord lost to the enemy swordsman and defeated is displayed. “Decoration 6” scheduled to be stopped and displayed is displayed in the symbol display area 208b, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 7”-“decoration 6”-“decoration 7” is scheduled to be stopped. .

  Thereafter, at the timing when the variation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 114 (p), the decoration symbol display device 208 stops and displays (decision display) the combination of the decoration symbols “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7”. One special game of variable game is completed.

  FIG. 115 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of a mini game effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. 115 (a) to FIG. 115 (i) are the same as FIG. 113 (a) to FIG.

  115 (i), after the acceptance of the continuous hitting operation by the effect button 136 in the mini game is started, as shown in FIGS. 115 (j) to (k), the number of operations of the effect button 136 is as follows. When the operation valid period of the effect button 136 has passed in a state where the number of times determined in advance is not reached, as shown in FIG. 115 (l), in the mini game display area MN1, as a result of the mini game, ”And“ Mission failed ”are displayed below it to notify that the mini-game mission has not been achieved. In this production example, the result of the determination of success or failure is a big hit, and based on this result, it is determined that “Daiyoshi” can be derived as the result of the mini game. However, since the operation valid period has passed since the number of operations of the production button 136 has not reached the predetermined number of times, “Kiyoshi” is derived without deriving “Daikichi”. Note that if the mini game has started but the production button 136 has never been operated, the result of the mini game may not be derived even if it is determined that “Daikichi” can be derived. . If it is determined that “Daikichi” can be derived, “Daikichi” may be derived even if the number of operations of the effect button 136 is insufficient or the operation button 136 is not operated. .

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 115 (m), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the weak cut-in image CI1b as the cut-in notice. The weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed because the mission has not been achieved as a result of the above-described mini game. Note that the mission continues while the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed, and the display of “Mission” continues, but is overlapped with the weak cut-in image CI1b, and the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed. Although it is considered that it is more difficult to view than when not overlapped with CI1b, the size of the weak cut-in image CI1b is smaller than the size of the strong cut-in image CI1a. The case where it overlaps with weak cut-in image CI1b is easier to visually recognize than the case where it overlaps with CI1a. Note that the weak cut-in image CI1b may be displayed even when the mission result is not derived.

  As described above, the weak cut-in image CI1b is an image that does not include the face of the bancho. For this reason, the appearance of the face of the Bancho, which is the mission in the main performance, has not been achieved, so that the character display of “mission failure” is displayed in the weak cut-in image CI1b in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. It is displayed overlapping. In other words, in this effect example, it can be said that the mission in the main effect has not been achieved due to the appearance of the weak cut-in image CI1b.

  However, in this production example, the result of the determination of success / failure is a big hit, so as shown in FIG. 115 (o), on the decorative symbol display device 208, a screen is displayed in which the main character, Tono, defeats the enemy swordsman and wins. In addition, “decoration 7” scheduled to be stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b is displayed in the approximate center of the ornament symbol display device 208, and the ornament symbols “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7” are displayed. It is notified that it is scheduled to be stopped and displayed in combination.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 115 (p), the decoration symbol display device 208 stops and displays (decision display) the combination of the decoration symbols “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” at the timing when the variation time elapses. One special game of variable game is completed. That is, in this production example, the number of operations of the production button 136 is insufficient in the mini game, and the mini game mission fails. Therefore, although the main production mission related thereto cannot be achieved, A state in which the big hit symbol is determined and displayed according to the determination result is shown.

  FIG. 116 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of the mini game effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. In the effect example shown in FIG. 116, the appearance movable effect body 224 is also shown in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 116 (a) is an effect following FIG. 108 (k), and the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state of development to super reach (subjugation reach). In the super reach state, the decorative symbols displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c are displayed small in the upper left corner, and a screen on which the main character and the enemy swordsman confront each other is displayed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 116 (b), a button operation effect requesting repeated operation of the effect button 136 is started as the main effect. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 116 (b), the button image 136a is displayed in a manner that vibrates and rotates. The button image 136a is displayed with the characters “continuous hit”, and the effect button 136 is repeatedly operated. It is shown that it is promoting. At this time, the effect button 136 vibrates as the inside of the cover body rotates, for example.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 116 (c), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the button reception time meter MT starts to display a decrease in gauge, and the operation reception of the effect button 136 in the main effect is started. Has been. Then, the player sees this and starts to strike the effect button 136 continuously.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 116 (d), a mini game display area MN1 is formed in the lower right part of the display area, and a state in which the mini game is started in the mini game display area MN1 is shown. ing. Specifically, the characters “push” are displayed together with the button image 136a to prompt the operation of the effect button 136 once. Below that, there is a text display of “Daikichi and Atsu notice”, and it is announced that there is a possibility that a highly reliable notice may be generated by deriving “Daikichi”. The contents of the mission in the mini-game and the results of the mission achievement are explained. Thus, in this effect example, the mission effect in the main effect is started before the mini game is started. The button reception time meter MT changes in display mode according to the time from the start of the operation reception period of the effect button 136 in the main effect.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 116 (e), in the mini game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, “Daiyoshi”, which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini game, is displayed. It should be noted that the player has continuously operated the effect button 136 continuously.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 116 (f), in the mini game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, “Nakayoshi”, which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini game, is displayed. The display of “Nakayoshi” is overlapped with a part of the display of “Daiyoshi”. Also, at the timing shown in FIG. 116 (f), the forearm portion 224b of the effect movable body 224 moves and overlaps the mini game display area MN1. In this production example, the production movable body 224 operates, for example, as a big hit announcement, but for example, the production movable body 224 operates to notify that there is a high possibility of achieving a mission in a mini game. You may make it notify in advance that the possibility of mission achievement in the main performance is high. It should be noted that the player has continuously operated the effect button 136 continuously.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 116 (g), in the mini game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, “Kiyoshi”, which is a display that may be derived as a result of the mini game, is displayed. The display of “Koyoshi” is overlapped with a part of the display of “Nakayoshi”. In addition, the display of “Koyoshi” is overlapped with the forearm portion 224b of the effect movable body 224, and is difficult to view. On the other hand, the effect of continuous operation of the effect button 136 in the main effect is also continuously performed, and the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 116 (g) responds to the repeated operation of the effect button 136 in the main effect. The weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed. In this effect example, a state in which a cut-in image is displayed during the operation effective period in the repeated operation effect in the main effect is shown. In this effect example, the weak cut image CI1 is displayed in a small size on the left side thereof so as not to overlap the button image 136a and the button reception time meter MT. It should be noted that the continuous operation of the effect button 136 by the player is still continued.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 116 (h), in the mini game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, high-speed loop rotation of each display of “Daiyoshi”, “Nakayoshi”, and “Koyoshi” starts. In the lower part where the effect of the high-speed loop rotation is performed, the letters “push” are displayed together with the button image 136a, and it is notified that the acceptance of the single operation by the effect button 136 in the mini game is started. ing. The display of the mini game is overlapped with the upper arm 224b of the effect movable body 224, and is difficult to visually recognize. On the other hand, in the main effect, the button operation effect that requires repeated operation of the effect buttons continues. In this effect example, an effect including a button image 136a as an operation promotion display in a mini game and an effect including a button image 136a as an operation promotion display in a main effect are displayed in an overlapping manner. Here, the player continues to perform the continuous operation of the effect button 136, but when the reception of the single operation by the effect button 136 in the mini game is started, the operation of the effect button 136 is the effect button in the main effect. Since the operation of the effect button 136 in the mini game is accepted in preference to the operation of 136, for example, the result of the mini game is derived in response to the effect button 136 operated at the timing surrounded by the one-dot chain line. It is configured. Note that a single operation of the effect button 136 may be accepted as an operation of the effect button 136 in the main effect, and may be accepted as an operation of the effect button 136 in the mini game.

  As a result, as shown in FIG. 116 (i), in the mini game display area MN1 of the decorative symbol display device 208, “Daiyoshi” is derived as a result of the mini game in response to one operation by the effect button 136. The situation is shown. Then, the word “achievement” indicating that the mini-game mission has been achieved is also displayed to notify that effect. However, since the mini game display area MN1 is overlapped with the forearm portion 224b of the effect movable body 224, it is difficult to visually recognize the characters “achievement”. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 116 (i), the operation reception period of the effect button 136 in the main effect has elapsed, and the player has finished the repeated operation of the effect button 136.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 116 (j), when the mission in the main effect ends, the weak cut-in image CI1b moves to the center of the display area. That is, the display of the weak cut-in image CI1b is derived as a result of the mission in the main effect. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 116 (j), the forearm 224b of the effect movable body 224 has moved to the initial position. For this reason, the overlap with the mini game display area MN1 is eliminated, and the characters “achievement” to the effect that the mini game mission has been achieved are also easily visible. Note that the timing at which the weak cut-in image CI1b moves to the center of the display area after the mission in the main performance ends may be the same as the timing at which the forearm portion 224b of the production movable body 224 moves to the initial position. Then, after the mission in the main production ends and the weak cut-in image CI1b moves to the center of the display area, the forearm portion 224b of the production movable body 224 may move to the initial position, or the production movable body 224. After the forearm 224b has moved to the initial position, the mission in the main effect may end and the weak cut-in image CI1b may move to the center of the display area.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 116 (k) shows a state in which the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed instead of the weak cut-in image CI1b. This is displayed as a result of mission achievement in the mini game as described above. Here, the size of the strong cut-in image CI1a is larger than the size of the weak cut-in image CI1b. Further, the strong cut-in image CI1a overlaps a part of the mini game display area MN1. Even when the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed, if the number of operations of the effect button 136 in the main effect is insufficient, even if the mission in the mini game is achieved, the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed. Although the display is not performed, when the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed, the strong cut-in image CI1a is displayed when the mission in the mini-game is achieved regardless of the number of operations of the effect button 136. You may do it.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 116 (l), on the decorative symbol display device 208, a screen is displayed in which the main character defeats the enemy swordsman and wins. “Decoration 7” scheduled to be stopped and displayed is displayed in the symbol display area 208b, and it is notified that the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 7”-“decoration 7”-“decoration 7” is scheduled to be stopped. . Thereafter, at the timing when the variation time elapses, the combination of the decoration symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed (determined display), and the variation game of one special figure is completed.

  Next, another specific example of effects executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 117 to 121.

  117 to 121 are diagrams showing stepwise modification examples of effects centered on the decorative symbol display device of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. 117 to 121, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, the second special figure reservation lamp 220, the universal figure. The hold lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown. 117 to 121 show a pachinko machine 100 configured with a single decorative symbol display device 208. Note that, as in the embodiment described above, a plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided. Further, the above-described transparent light guide plate IL may be disposed on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 117 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. In the effect example shown in FIG. 117, the appearance buttons 136 and the operation key unit 137 are shown in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 117 (a) shows a state in which a mini game is started during decorative symbol variation display. In this production example, the mini game is played without being divided into regions. When the mini game is started, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a small decorative symbol in the upper left corner, and the right treasure chest image BXR and the left treasure chest image BXL are displayed side by side on the lower left and right sides of the display area. ing. In addition, in the approximate center of the display area, “SP reach if Yoshimune comes out” is displayed, and it is informed that when the main character appears from the treasure chest, it shifts to super reach (SP reach). In addition, “select with the cross key” and “determine with the button” are displayed above the display area, and the treasure box selected by the operation button 136 and the treasure box selected by the effect button 136 is determined as the treasure box to be opened. It is reported that it is possible. That is, in this effect example, a state in which a mini game using a plurality of operation means is performed is shown. Further, in this effect example, a state is shown in which a mini game is performed using an area wider than the effect related to the decorative symbol variation display.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 117 (b) shows a state in which the operation reception period of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 is started. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the cursor CSL is displayed so as to surround the left treasure chest image BXL, and it is indicated that the treasure chest surrounded by the cursor CSL is the currently selected treasure chest. In addition, the remaining time of the operation effective period is shown on the right side of the center of the display area, and “3” indicating that the operation effective period is remaining 3 seconds is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 117 (b). Has been. FIG. 117 (b) also shows a state in which the player operates the right button of the operation key unit 137.

  Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 117 (c), it is shown that the cursor CSL surrounding the left treasure chest image BXL moves to the right treasure chest image BXR and surrounds the right treasure chest image BXR. . The display of the remaining time of the operation effective period is “2”, which indicates that the operation effective period is the remaining 2 seconds.

  Then, when the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 117 (d), the selected right treasure chest image BXR is determined as a treasure chest that is opened as shown in FIG. 117 (e). The treasure chest image BXR is enlarged and displayed together with the cursor CSL, while the left treasure chest image BXL not selected is reduced and displayed. In the decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 117 (d), the display of the remaining time of the operation effective period is “1”, which indicates that the operation effective period is the remaining 1 second. In addition, after the player has operated the effect button 136 to determine the treasure chest that can be opened, a display may be made to determine the treasure chest that will be opened when the operation validity period elapses. Further, when the operation valid period has passed without the operation by the effect button 136 being performed, it may be determined as a treasure box for opening the treasure box selected by the cursor CSL, or the operation by the effect button 136 is performed. If the operation valid period has passed without any treasure box selected, the treasure box may not be opened. According to this, the willingness to operate the operation means such as the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 may be improved for the player.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 117 (f), the character YSM of the main character appears from the right treasure chest image BXR, and the mini-game mission is achieved. As a result, the advance to SP reach is foretold. Note that a pre-reading notice may be given by the appearance of the character YSM of the main character.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 117 (g), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, respectively, and a reach state is formed. . At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “reach” to notify that it has reached the reach state. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the decorative symbol variation display continues.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 117 (h), the state of development to SP reach is shown. As described above, in this effect example, in the case of the mini-game executed before the transition to the SP reach, when the decorative pattern variation pattern determined based on the result of the determination is a transition to the SP reach, Character YSM of the main character who is informed of the transition to SP reach is displayed. Accordingly, there is a case where the transition to the SP reach can be announced by causing the Tono-sama character YSM to appear in the mini game.

  In this production example, if the transition to the SP reach is determined in advance, the Tono-sama character YSM appears regardless of which of the right treasure chest image BXR and the left treasure chest image BXL is selected, and the transition to the SP reach is not performed. If it is determined in advance, the character YSM may be configured not to appear regardless of which of the right treasure chest image BXR and the left treasure chest image BXL is selected. Further, on the condition that the transition to the SP reach is determined in advance, it is randomly determined which of the right treasure chest image BXR and the left treasure chest image BXL is to be hit, and the treasure chest image determined to be the hit is selected. In this case, a Tono-sama character YSM may appear. In addition, when the variable time during which SP reach can be executed is selected, the right treasure chest image BXR or the left treasure chest image BXL is randomly determined and the treasure chest image determined to be a winning is selected. In the case where the Tono-sama character YSM appears, when the Tono-sama character YSM appears, the SP reach is developed later. However, when the Tono-sama character YSM does not appear, the SP reach is subsequently developed. However, it may be configured to perform a reach with lower reliability than the SP reach such as the normal reach until the fluctuation time elapses. Further, whether or not the Tono-sama character YSM appears at the timing when the treasure box image is selected may be randomly drawn. In addition, even if Tono-sama character YSM appears, there may be a case where it does not shift to the SP reach. In this case, the big hit symbol may be finally displayed as a broken law.

  FIG. 118 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of the mini game effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. In the effect example shown in FIG. 118, the appearance buttons 136 and the operation key unit 137 are also shown in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 118 (a) shows a state in which a mini game is started during decorative symbol variation display. When the mini game is started, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a small decorative symbol in the upper left corner, and the right treasure chest image BXR and the left treasure chest image BXL are displayed side by side on the lower left and right sides of the display area. ing. In addition, in the approximate center of the display area, “SP reach if Yoshimune comes out” is displayed, and it is informed that when the main character appears from the treasure chest, it shifts to super reach (SP reach). In addition, “select with the cross key” and “determine with the button” are displayed above the display area, and the treasure box selected by the operation button 136 and the treasure box selected by the effect button 136 is determined as the treasure box to be opened. It is reported that it is possible. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 118 (a), the cursor CSL is displayed between the right treasure chest image BXR and the left treasure chest image BXL, and no treasure chest image is displayed in a selected state. Has been.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 118 (b), the operation reception period of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 is started, and the remaining time of the operation effective period is displayed on the center right side of the display area. The At the timing shown in FIG. 118 (b), “3” indicating that the operation valid period is the remaining 3 seconds is displayed.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 118 (c), the remaining time of the operation effective period in the decorative symbol display device 208 in a state in which no operation is performed after the operation reception of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 is started. The display is “2”, showing that the operation valid period is 2 seconds remaining. Therefore, no treasure chest image has been selected yet, and the cursor CSL is located between the right treasure chest image BXR and the left treasure chest image BXL.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 118 (d), the remaining time of the operation effective period in the decorative symbol display device 208 in a state in which no operation is performed after the operation reception of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 is started. The display is “1”, showing that the operation valid period is 1 second. Therefore, no treasure chest image is selected yet, and the cursor CSL is located between the right treasure chest image BXR and the left treasure chest image BXL.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 118 (e), the remaining time of the operation effective period in the decorative symbol display device 208 in a state in which no operation is performed after the operation reception of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 is started. The display is “0”, indicating that the operation valid period has elapsed. Therefore, no treasure chest image is selected yet, and the cursor CSL is located between the right treasure chest image BXR and the left treasure chest image BXL. As a result, none of the treasure chests are selected, and none of the treasure chests are opened, that is, the mini game result is not derived, and the decorative symbol display device 208 reaches the reach state as shown in FIG. 118 (f). It is transferred to.

  In this production example, when the transition to SP reach is determined in advance, SP reach is executed even when no treasure chest is selected. Since it is determined in advance based on the result of the determination, whether or not any treasure box is selected, SP reach is not performed. It may be. According to this, the willingness to operate the operation means such as the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 may be improved for the player.

  FIG. 119 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of the mini game effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. In the effect example shown in FIG. 119, the appearance of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 is also shown in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208. 119 (a) to (d) are the same as FIGS. 117 (a) to (d), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  When the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 119 (d), as shown in FIG. 119 (e), the selected right treasure chest image BXR is determined as a treasure chest to be opened, and the right treasure chest image While BXR is enlarged and displayed together with the cursor CSL, the left treasure chest image BXL that has not been selected is reduced and displayed. In addition, in this production example, as shown in FIG. 119 (e), an error display (error game ball is jammed) “please call a clerk” below the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 (error Notification) is performed, and it is notified that a ball clogging error, which is a state where game balls are clogged in the payout route, has occurred. Specifically, for example, a payout condition for a winning ball or a rental ball is established, and the payout device 152 (see FIG. 2 and the like) is driven. (3 times) When the game ball is not paid out, the ball clogging error notification is issued. Since such an error can continue the game, in the present embodiment, the game is continued while the error is notified. In addition, when the cancellation of the error that is the subject of the error notification is detected (for example, when the payout device 152 is normally paid out of the game ball), the error notification is deleted. Here, the timing at which the error display is started may be the same as the timing at which the right treasure chest image BXR starts the enlarged display, or the timing after the timing at which the right treasure chest image BXR starts the enlarged display. Alternatively, the timing may be before the timing when the right treasure chest image BXR starts the enlarged display.

  FIG. 119 (f) to FIG. 119 (h) are the same as FIG. 117 (f) to FIG.

  In this way, in this production example, a state in which the mini game is continued if the game is an error that is not interrupted is shown.

  FIG. 120 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of the mini game effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. In the effect example shown in FIG. 120, the appearance buttons 136 and the operation key unit 137 are also shown in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208. In this production example, a magnetic detection sensor that detects magnetic force is provided at a predetermined position of the pachinko machine 100, and when the magnetic detection sensor detects magnetic force, a detection signal is output to the main control unit 300. When the main control unit 300 receives a detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor, the main control unit 300 determines that a magnetic detection error has occurred, transmits a magnetic detection command to the first sub control unit 400, stops the game, and disables the game. To control. After the deactivation, the main control unit main process (see FIG. 6) is configured so that it cannot return until the initialization process in step S113 is executed. On the other hand, the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the magnetism detection command outputs an error sound from the speaker 120, or performs a predetermined error mode by using various lamps 418, a game board lamp 532, and a game table frame lamp 542, for example. The lamp can be blinked or a predetermined error display can be performed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Here, FIGS. 119 (a) to (c) are the same as FIGS. 117 (a) to (c), and thus description thereof is omitted.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 120 (c) shows a state in which the right treasure chest image BXR is surrounded. The display of the remaining time of the operation effective period is “2”, which indicates that the operation effective period is the remaining 2 seconds.

  Thereafter, for example, when a player performs a fraud using a magnet and a magnetic detection sensor (not shown) detects this, as shown in FIG. 120 (d), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “magnet” The magnetic error display ERR including the characters “sensor error” is displayed overlapping the display shown in FIG. 117 (d), for example, and the game is stopped. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 120 (d), the display of the magnetic error display ERR is not erased even if the effect button 136 is operated, and also shown in FIGS. 117 (d) to (h). However, the magnetic error display ERR is continuously displayed until the power is shut off without visually recognizing the effect display (FIGS. 120D to 120H). )). The magnetic error display ERR shown in FIG. 120 is different from the error display shown in FIG. 119 in that the area overlapping the effect of the mini game is different. In other words, it can be said that the display area of the mini game has different areas that overlap the error display depending on the type of error that has occurred.

  FIG. 121 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

  FIG. 121 (a) is an effect following FIG. 108 (j), showing that “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c, and the reach state is formed. ing. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “reach” to notify that it has reached the reach state. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the decorative symbol variation display continues.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 121 (b), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state where it develops into a bowling reach which is one of the super reach. Bowling reach is a reach production performed as a main production. After shifting to the bowling reach, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbols displayed in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c are displayed small in the upper left corner, and ten bowlings arranged in a pyramid shape are displayed. There is an effect display where the ball rolls on the lane toward the pin, and in the upper right part of the display area, the character “Strike with big hit” is displayed, and if you achieve the mission of strike, it will be a big hit Informed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 121 (c), it is shown that the ball has reached a position close to the ten boring pins and still tries to defeat the boring pins. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 121 (c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the mini game display area MN1 is displayed in the lower right part of the display area and overlaps at least part of the bowling reach effect display. . In the mini game display area MN1, an explanation of the mini game is displayed. In the explanation display of the mini-game shown in FIG. 121 (c), the “1” on the dice and the “get out” are displayed below the “mini-game” display. It is described that the mission button 136 is operated after the start of the operation, and the mission of stopping and displaying the “1” of the dice is performed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 121 (d), the nine boring pins are shown to have fallen. That is, a state in which one boring pin remains without falling is shown. On the other hand, in the mini game display area MN1, the button image 136a is displayed together with the display of “Push”, and it is notified that the operation reception period of the effect button 136 in the mini game has started. At this time, for example, dice symbols may be displayed in a variable manner.

  FIG. 121 (e) shows a state in which the result of the mini game is derived in the mini game display area MN1 by operating the effect button 136. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, since the strike did not occur in the bowling reach, the word “sorry” is displayed, and it is informed that the mission in the bowling reach is not achieved and the game is lost. On the other hand, in the mini game display area MN1, when the effect button 136 is operated, the result of the mini game is stopped, the outcome of the dice “1” is stopped, and the mission is achieved. A display of “+1” for notifying that the book will fall is displayed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 121 (f), the mini game display area MN1 is erased, and the dice “1” derived as a result of the mini game is a reward for mission achievement “ After “+1” is displayed, as shown in FIG. 121 (g), a state is shown in which one boring pin that has not fallen falls and strikes. That is, it is shown that an effect that is a revival hit from the loss is being performed.

  Thereafter, at the timing when the fluctuation time elapses, as shown in FIG. 121 (h), the decoration symbol display device 208 stops and displays (decision display) the combination of the decoration symbols “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”. One special game of variable game is completed.

  Thus, in this effect example, it can be said that the result of the mini game has an influence on the result of the reach effect as the main effect.

  Next, another specific example of effects executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 122 to 129.

  122 to 129 are diagrams showing stepwise modifications of effects centered on the decorative symbol display device of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. 122 to 129, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the universal figure. The hold lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown. 122 to 129 show a pachinko machine 100 configured with one decorative symbol display device 208. Note that, as in the embodiment described above, a plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided. Further, the above-described transparent light guide plate IL may be disposed on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 122 is a diagram showing step by step about another example of the mini game effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 122 (a), “decoration 1-decoration 2—decoration 3”, which is a combination of losing decorative symbols, is stopped and displayed. Also, the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1, the hold icon h12 of the second special figure 1, the hold icon h13 of the third special figure 1 representing the hold of the special figure 1 are both in the default display mode. It is displayed. In addition, a multifunction display area MF1 partitioned into a substantially square shape is formed in the right half of the lower end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The multi-function display area MF1 can perform the above-described tutorial display, notice display, mini-game effect display, and the like. In addition, in this production example, the second hold number display of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 and the fourth symbol display of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 are not performed, but these displays may be performed. .

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 122 (b), the hold (first hold) of the special figure 1 is digested, and the hold icon h12 of the second special figure 1 is used as the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1. The hold icon h13 of the third special figure 1 is displayed as the hold icon h12 of the second special figure 1, and the decorative symbol variation display is started. At this time, the change icon may be displayed as described above.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 122 (c) shows a state in which the tutorial display is performed in the multi-function display area MF1. Specifically, in the multi-function display area MF1, “Mini game starts at various timings” is displayed, which suggests when the mini game starts.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol. -It is fixedly displayed with the combination of the decorative pattern of the “decoration 5-decoration 7”

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 122 (e), the special figure 1 hold (first hold) is digested, and in the decorative symbol display device 208, the second special figure 1 hold icon h12 is the first special figure 1. The hold icon h11 is displayed, and the decorative symbol variation display is started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 122 (f), a state is shown in which tutorial display is performed in the multi-function display area MF1. Specifically, in the multi-function display area MF1, “Yoshimune is an 8th general” is displayed, and information about the main character is displayed.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 122 (g), the tutorial display displayed in the multi-function display area MF1 is interrupted, and the mini game is started. When the mini game is started, the “dice game” is displayed in the multi-function display area MF1 together with the face image BCH of the watch face, and it is notified that the dice game as the mini game is started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 122 (h), in the multi-function display area MF1, a display of “1” on the dice is displayed on the right side of the face image BCH of the longest face, and “Delay 1 UP” is displayed. When the effect button 136 is operated after the mini game is started and the outcome of the dice “1” is stopped and displayed, it is explained that the display mode of the hold icon is increased by one level. That is, as a result of the mini-game, the outcome of the “1” of the dice as a mission is derived, so that the hold icon in the default display mode is notified to change to the hold icon in the display mode of the pre-reading notice. It becomes.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 122 (i), in the multi-function display area MF1, “press” is displayed together with the button image 136a, and it is notified that the operation effective period of the effect button 136 in the mini game has started. ing.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 122 (j), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the decorative symbol variation display continues. Further, in the multi-function display area MF1, a button reception time meter MT is displayed, and the gauge is displayed in a manner that the gauge decreases according to the time after the operation effective period of the effect button 136 is started.

  When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 122 (j), as shown in FIG. 122 (k), in the multi-function display area MF1, the design of the dice is the outcome of mission achievement. Derived and displayed in a manner indicating the outcome of “1”, and “1UP confirmed” indicating that it is a reward for mission achievement. In addition, in the multi-function display area MF1, an image BCH of the face with the longest length is also displayed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 122 (k), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the second stop is performed, and “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the decorative symbol variation display continues. Note that the right symbol stop display and the mini-game result derivation display may be at the same timing, or the mini-game result may be derived and displayed after the right symbol is stopped and displayed. After the result is derived and displayed, the right symbol may be stopped and displayed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 122 (l), the third stop is performed, and “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The display is finalized by the combination of the decorative pattern of “decoration 2—decoration 7—decoration 7”. Further, the result of the mini game displayed in the multi-function display area MF1 has been deleted, and the display mode of the hold icon h11 in the first special figure 1 is changed from the default display mode to the first display mode of the pre-reading notice. As a circular and blue display mode. Also in this production example, the hold icon has a high jackpot reliability in the order of red> green> blue. It should be noted that the change of the display mode of the hold icon and the confirmation display of the decoration symbol may be at the same timing, the decoration design may be fixedly displayed after the display mode of the hold icon changes, or the decoration design is The display mode of the hold icon may change after the confirmation display. In addition, the timing of erasing the mini game result may be the same as the timing of the final display of the decoration pattern, or the decoration pattern may be finalized and displayed after the result of the mini game is deleted. The result of the mini game may be deleted after the symbol is fixedly displayed.

  In addition, a fortune game may be started in place of the dice game as the mini game described above with reference to FIGS. 122 (g) to (k). Here, FIG. 122 (g ′) is another example of the effect following FIG. 122 (f). Specifically, the tutorial display displayed in the multi-function display area MF1 shown in FIG. 122 (f) is interrupted, and as shown in FIG. 122 (g ′), the mini-game is played in the multi-function display area MF1. Be started. In this effect example, when the mini game is started, the “fortune game” is displayed in the multi-function display area MF1 together with the face image BCH of the bancho, and the fact that the fortune game as a mini game is started is notified. Is done. In this example, even when different types of mini games are started, the face image BCH having the same head length is displayed. In other words, in this production example, the same character (banchou face image BCH) can appear and a plurality of types of mini games can be executed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 122 (h ′), in the multi-function display area MF1, “Nakayoshi” and “Deferred 1UP” are displayed on the right side of the face image BCH of the longest face. It is explained that when “Nakayoshi” is derived and displayed, the display mode of the hold icon is increased by one level. That is, as a result of the mini-game, the “Nakakichi” Omikuji as a mission is derived, so that the hold icon in the default display form is changed to the hold icon in the pre-read notice display form.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 122 (i ′), in the multi-function display area MF1, the treasure chest image BXS is displayed together with the face image BCH of the watch face, and the effect of opening the treasure chest is started. Note that the mini game in this effect example is one in which no operation is performed by operating means such as the effect button 136.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 122 (j ′), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the decorative symbol variation display continues. Further, in the multi-function display area MF1, the treasure box image BXS is changed to a display in an open state, and the fortune of “Nakayoshi” is derived and displayed to show that the mission has been achieved. Note that the stop display of the left symbol and the derivation display of the result of the mini game may be at the same timing, or the result of the mini game may be derived and displayed after the left symbol is stopped and displayed. The left symbol may be stopped and displayed after the result is derived and displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 122 (k ′), in the multi-function display area MF1, the treasure chest image BXS is erased, and “1UP confirmed” is displayed indicating that it is a reward for mission completion. Yes. In addition, in the multi-function display area MF1, the face image BCH of the longest face is also continuously displayed. Also, as shown in FIG. 122 (k ′), the decoration symbol display device 208 performs the second stop, and “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the decorative symbol variation display continues. Note that the timing of the right symbol stop display may be the same as the timing at which the mission achievement reward display starts, or the mission achievement reward display starts after the right symbol is stopped. Alternatively, the right symbol may be stopped and displayed after the mission completion display is started.

  After that, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 122 (l ′), the third stop is performed, “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the temporary stop due to the fluctuation of the swing is performed. The display is finalized by the combination of the decorative pattern of “decoration 2—decoration 7—decoration 7”. Further, the result of the mini game displayed in the multi-function display area MF1 has been deleted, and the display mode of the hold icon h11 in the first special figure 1 is changed from the default display mode to the first display mode of the pre-reading notice. As a circular and blue display mode. It should be noted that the change of the display mode of the hold icon and the confirmation display of the decoration symbol may be at the same timing, the decoration design may be fixedly displayed after the display mode of the hold icon changes, or the decoration design is The display mode of the hold icon may change after the confirmation display. In addition, the timing of erasing the mini game result may be the same as the timing of the final display of the decoration pattern, or the decoration pattern may be finalized and displayed after the result of the mini game is deleted. The result of the mini game may be deleted after the symbol is fixedly displayed.

  In this way, the production example shown in FIG. 122 shows an example in which different types of mini-games can be played when the mini-game start condition is satisfied, and on the other hand ( In the mini game of the dice game), the operation of the effect button 136 is required, and in the other mini game (the fortune game), no operation by the operating means is required. Are the same (both are changing the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1). That is, FIG. 122 shows an example of an effect in which the same target is influenced in the main effect as a result in any mini game. In this production example, which of the dice game and the fortune game is to be executed may be determined at random or may be determined based on the determination result, for example, the dice game is executed. In the case where the fortune game is executed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than the case where the fortune game is executed.

  Further, in this mini-game, in a mini-game, a character that is smaller than a character that appears during execution of a decorative symbol variation display (sometimes referred to as a “small character”), for example, in a tutorial display or the like An appearing character (sometimes referred to as “navigator character”) may appear. These characters may be configured to be displayed in a tutorial display or other notice when the mini game is not performed, or may be configured to appear only in the mini game. Further, these characters may be displayed constantly. Further, it is preferable that the character appearing in the mini-game and the character appearing during execution of the decorative pattern change display are visually different, for example, the size may be different, or the 3D character and the deformed character may be deformed. There may be differences in expression, such as

  In this example, the fortune game (second mini game) may use a larger area than the dice game (first mini game). That is, the second mini game uses at least a certain display area (multifunctional display area MF1 in which the first mini game is performed), and further displays another display area (a display area in which the multifunction display area MF1 is enlarged). ) May also be used.

  FIG. 123 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of the mini game effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. 123 (a) to (e) are the same as FIGS. 122 (a) to (e), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 123 (f) shows a state in which a mini game start notice is displayed in the multi-function display area MF1. Specifically, in the multi-function display area MF1, “attention” is displayed together with the face image BCH of the longest face, and it is predicted that a mini game will be started from now.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 123 (g), the mini game is started. When the mini game is started, the “dice game” is displayed in the multi-function display area MF1 together with the face image BCH of the watch face, and it is notified that the dice game as the mini game is started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 123 (h), in the multi-function display area MF1, a display of “3” on the dice is displayed on the right side of the face image BCH of the longest face and “delay 3 UP” is displayed. It is described that when the effect button 136 is operated after the mini game is started and the “3” of the dice is stopped and displayed, the display mode of the hold icon is increased by three levels. That is, as a result of the mini-game, it is predicted that the hold icon in the default display mode changes to the hold icon in the display mode of the pre-reading notice by deriving the “3” roll of the dice as a mission. It becomes. Moreover, in this production example, the contents of the mission and the reward for accomplishing the mission are more advantageous than the dice game shown in FIG.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 123 (i), in the multi-function display area MF1, “press” is displayed together with the button image 136a, and it is notified that the operation effective period of the effect button 136 in the mini game has started. ing.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 123 (j), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the decorative symbol variation display continues. Further, in the multi-function display area MF1, a button reception time meter MT is displayed, and the gauge is displayed in a manner that the gauge decreases according to the time after the operation effective period of the effect button 136 is started.

  Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 123 (j), as shown in FIG. 123 (k), in the multi-function display area MF1, the design of the dice is the achievement of the mission. Derived and displayed in a manner indicating the outcome of “3”, and “3UP confirmed” indicating that it is a reward for mission achievement. In addition, in the multi-function display area MF1, an image BCH of the face with the longest length is also displayed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 123 (k), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the second stop is performed, and “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the decorative symbol variation display continues. Note that the right symbol stop display and the mini-game result derivation display may be at the same timing, or the mini-game result may be derived and displayed after the right symbol is stopped and displayed. After the result is derived and displayed, the right symbol may be stopped and displayed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 123 (l), the third stop is performed, and “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The display is finalized by the combination of the decorative pattern of “decoration 2—decoration 7—decoration 7”. Further, the result of the mini game displayed in the multi-function display area MF1 is erased, and the display mode of the hold icon h11 in the first special figure 1 is changed from the default display mode to the third display mode of the pre-reading notice. As a circular and red display mode. It should be noted that the change of the display mode of the hold icon and the confirmation display of the decoration symbol may be at the same timing, the decoration design may be fixedly displayed after the display mode of the hold icon changes, or the decoration design is The display mode of the hold icon may change after the confirmation display. In addition, the timing of erasing the mini game result may be the same as the timing of the final display of the decoration pattern, or the decoration pattern may be finalized and displayed after the result of the mini game is deleted. The result of the mini game may be deleted after the symbol is fixedly displayed.

  When the fortune game is started instead of the dice game, as shown in FIG. 123 (g ′), in the multi-function display area MF1, when the mini game is started, the multi-function display area MF1 The “Omikuji game” is displayed together with the face image BCH of the person, and it is notified that the Omikuji game is started as a mini game.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 123 (h ′), in the multi-function display area MF1, “Daiichi 3UP” is displayed together with “Daiichi” on the right side of the face image BCH of the Banchou face. It is explained that when “Daikichi” is derived and displayed, the display mode of the hold icon is increased by three levels. In other words, as a result of the mini-game, the “Okichi” Omikuji as a mission is derived, so that the hold icon in the default display mode is changed to the hold icon in the display mode of the prefetch notice. Moreover, in this production example, the contents of the mission and the reward for completing the mission are more advantageous than the fortune game shown in FIG.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 123 (i ′), in the multi-function display area MF1, the treasure chest image BXS is displayed together with the face-length image BCH, and the effect of opening the treasure chest is started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 123 (j ′), the first stop is performed and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the decorative symbol variation display continues. Further, in the multi-function display area MF1, the treasure chest image BXS is changed to a display in an open state, and a fortune-telling of “Daikichi” is derived and displayed to show that the mission has been achieved. Note that the stop display of the left symbol and the derivation display of the result of the mini game may be at the same timing, or the result of the mini game may be derived and displayed after the left symbol is stopped and displayed. The left symbol may be stopped and displayed after the result is derived and displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 123 (k ′), in the multi-function display area MF1, the treasure chest image BXS is erased, and “3UP confirmed” indicating that the mission is rewarded is displayed. Yes. In addition, in the multi-function display area MF1, the face image BCH of the longest face is also continuously displayed. Also, as shown in FIG. 123 (k ′), the decoration symbol display device 208 performs the second stop, and “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the decorative symbol variation display continues. Note that the timing of the right symbol stop display may be the same as the timing at which the mission achievement reward display starts, or the mission achievement reward display starts after the right symbol is stopped. Alternatively, the right symbol may be stopped and displayed after the mission completion display is started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 123 (l ′), after the third stop is performed, “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the temporary stop due to the fluctuation of shaking is performed. The display is finalized by the combination of the decorative pattern of “decoration 2—decoration 7—decoration 7”. Further, the result of the mini game displayed in the multi-function display area MF1 is erased, and the display mode of the hold icon h11 in the first special figure 1 is changed from the default display mode to the third display mode of the pre-reading notice. As a circular and red display mode. It should be noted that the change of the display mode of the hold icon and the confirmation display of the decoration symbol may be at the same timing, the decoration design may be fixedly displayed after the display mode of the hold icon changes, or the decoration design is The display mode of the hold icon may change after the confirmation display. In addition, the timing of erasing the mini game result may be the same as the timing of the final display of the decoration pattern, or the decoration pattern may be finalized and displayed after the result of the mini game is deleted. The result of the mini game may be deleted after the symbol is fixedly displayed.

  As described above, the example of the production shown in FIG. 123 shows an example in which the contents of the mission and the reward for accomplishing the mission can be varied even in the same type of mini game. It should be noted that the mission achievement rewards may be made different with the same mission contents, or the mission achievement rewards may be made different with different mission contents.

  FIG. 124 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of the mini game effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

  124 (A1) to FIG. 124 (A6) show examples of effects performed in the heel mode, and FIGS. 124 (B1) to 124 (B6) show examples of effects performed in the princess mode. Yes. Note that the samurai mode and the princess mode are names of effect modes, respectively, and are configured such that an effect specific to each mode is performed in each mode. Note that, for example, at least one of the cocoon mode and the princess mode may be the prefetch mode. In addition, it may be determined at random whether to shift to the samurai mode or the princess mode, or may be determined based on the gaming state. For example, in the normal gaming state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state), it is easy to shift to the spear mode, and in the hidden probability change state (special figure high probability normal figure low probability state), it shifts to the princess mode. For example, the current gaming state may be estimated by the player.

  FIG. 124 (A1) shows a state where the effect mode is the heel mode. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 124 (A1), “婆 mode” is displayed at the upper center of the display area, and the character BA of the heel is displayed at the upper left portion of the display area. In addition, it is reported that the current production mode is the heel mode. Also, as shown in FIG. 124 (A1), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Further, the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 representing the special figure 1 hold is displayed in a default display mode. A multifunction display area MF1 is formed in the right half of the lower end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Then, in the multi-function display area MF1, a mini game has been started, and a “dice game” is displayed together with the face image BCH of the bancho, so that the dice game as a mini game is started. In this production example, in the heel mode, the dice game is more easily started than the fortune game. Here, when the mini game is executed in the heel mode, the dice game may be always started and the fortune game may not be started. 124 (A2) to FIG. 124 (A6) are the same as FIG. 123 (h) to FIG. 123 (l) except that the display of the heel mode and the display of the character BA of the heel are performed. The description is omitted.

  FIG. 124 (B1) shows that the effect mode is the princess mode. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 124 (B1), the “princess mode” is displayed at the upper center of the display area, and the princess character HM1 is displayed at the upper left part of the display area. It is reported that the current production mode is the princess mode. Also, as shown in FIG. 124 (B1), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Further, the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 representing the special figure 1 hold is displayed in a default display mode. A multifunction display area MF1 is formed in the right half of the lower end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Then, in the multi-function display area MF1, a mini game has been started, and a “fortune game” is displayed together with the face image BCH of the bancho, so that it is notified that the fortune game as a mini game is started. In this effect example, in the princess mode, the fortune game is more easily started than the dice game. Here, in the princess mode, when the mini game is executed, the fortune game may be always started and the dice game may not be started. 124 (B2) to FIG. 124 (B6) are the same as FIG. 123 (h ′) to FIG. 123 (l ′) except that the display of the princess mode and the display of the princess character HM1 are performed. Therefore, the description is omitted.

  FIG. 125 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

  125 (A1) to FIG. 125 (A6) show an example of the effect performed in the heel mode, and FIG. 125 (B1) to FIG. 125 (B6) show an example of the effect performed in the princess mode. Yes.

  FIG. 125 (A1) shows a state where the effect mode is the heel mode. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 125 (A1), the “婆 mode” is displayed at the upper center of the display region, and the character BA of the heel is displayed at the upper left portion of the display region. In addition, it is reported that the current production mode is the heel mode. In addition, as shown in FIG. 125 (A1), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Further, the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 representing the special figure 1 hold is displayed in a default display mode. A multifunction display area MF1 is formed in the right half of the lower end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Then, in the multi-function display area MF1, a mini game has been started, and a “dice game” is displayed together with the face image BCH of the bancho, so that the dice game as a mini game is started. In this effect example, the type of mini game to be executed is determined based on the content of the notice executed in the main effect. For example, if it is decided to execute a step-up notice, it is easier to start a dice game than a fortune game as a mini game in the symbol variation display, and it is decided to execute a pseudo-ream If it is, the symbol variation display is configured such that the fortune game is easier to start as a mini game than the dice game. In addition, when it is decided to execute the step-up notice, the dice game is always started as a mini game in the symbol variation display, and when it is decided to execute the pseudo-ream, In the symbol variation display, the fortune game may be surely started as a mini game. Further, in this effect example, the type of mini game to be executed without depending on the current effect mode is determined, but the type of mini game to be executed may be determined depending on the effect mode.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 125 (A2), in the multi-function display area MF1, a display of “3” on the dice and a display of “hold 3 UP” are displayed on the right side of the face image BCH of the longest face. It is described that when the effect button 136 is operated after the mini game is started and the “3” of the dice is stopped and displayed, the display mode of the hold icon is increased by three levels. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a step-up notice is started as a main effect. At the timing shown in FIG. 125 (A2), the step-up notice SU1 in the display mode of step 1 is displayed. This step-up notice SU1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative design. Therefore, it is more difficult to visually recognize the decorative symbols when they are overlapped by the step-up notice SU1 than when they are not overlapped by the step-up notice SU1. It should be noted that even when the display of the “3” roll of the dice and the display of “with hold 3 UP” in the multi-function display area MF1 is started, and the display start timing of the step-up notice SU1 is the same. Alternatively, the display of the step-up notice SU1 may be started after the indication of the “3” of the dice and the display of “with hold 3UP” in the multi-function display area MF1, or the step-up notice. After the display of SU1 is started, the display of the “3” roll of the dice and the display of “Delay 3 UP” in the multi-function display area MF1 may be started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 125 (A3), in the multi-function display area MF1, “press” is displayed together with the button image 136a, and it is notified that the operation effective period of the effect button 136 in the mini game has started. ing. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the step-up notice is updated, and the step-up notice SU2 having the display mode in step 2 is displayed. Here again, the step-up notice SU2 in the display mode of step 2 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative design. It should be noted that the timing at which the button image 136a and “press” display in the multi-function display area MF1 are started may be the same as the timing at which the step-up notice SU2 starts to be displayed, or in the multi-function display area MF1. After the display of the button image 136a and “press” is started, the display of the step-up notice SU2 may be started, or after the display of the step-up notice SU2 is started, the button image 136a in the multi-function display area MF1 is started. And “Press” may be displayed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 125 (A4), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the decorative symbol variation display continues. Further, the step-up notice is further updated, and the step-up notice SU3 in the display mode of step 3 is displayed. Here again, the step-up notice SU3 in the display mode of step 3 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative design. Further, in the multi-function display area MF1, a button reception time meter MT is displayed, and the gauge is displayed in a manner that the gauge decreases according to the time after the operation effective period of the effect button 136 is started.

  When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 125 (A4), as shown in FIG. 125 (A5), in the multi-function display area MF1, the design of the dice is the outcome of mission achievement. Derived and displayed in a manner indicating the outcome of “3”, and “3UP confirmed” indicating that it is a reward for mission achievement. In addition, in the multi-function display area MF1, an image BCH of the face with the longest length is also displayed. Also, as shown in FIG. 125 (A5), the decoration symbol display device 208 performs the second stop, and “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the decorative symbol variation display continues. Here, the right symbol stop display and the mini-game result derivation display may be at the same timing, or the mini-game result may be derived and displayed after the right symbol is stopped and displayed. The right symbol may be stopped and displayed after the game result is derived and displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 125 (A5), the step-up notice is finished. Note that the stop timing of the right symbol and the end timing of the step-up notice may be the same, or the step-up notice may end after the right symbol is stopped and displayed, or the step-up notice. After ending, the right symbol may be stopped and displayed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 125 (A6), the third stop is performed, and “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The display is finalized by the combination of the decorative pattern of “decoration 2—decoration 7—decoration 7”. Further, the result of the mini game displayed in the multi-function display area MF1 is erased, and the display mode of the hold icon h11 in the first special figure 1 is changed from the default display mode to the third display mode of the pre-reading notice. As a circular and red display mode. It should be noted that the change of the display mode of the hold icon and the confirmation display of the decoration symbol may be at the same timing, the decoration design may be fixedly displayed after the display mode of the hold icon changes, or the decoration design is The display mode of the hold icon may change after the confirmation display. In addition, the timing of erasing the mini game result may be the same as the timing of the final display of the decoration pattern, or the decoration pattern may be finalized and displayed after the result of the mini game is deleted. The result of the mini game may be deleted after the symbol is fixedly displayed.

  FIG. 125 (B1) shows a state in which the effect mode is the princess mode. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 125 (B1), “princess mode” is displayed at the upper center of the display area, and the princess character HM1 is displayed at the upper left part of the display area. It is reported that the current production mode is the princess mode. In addition, as shown in FIG. 125 (B1), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which a decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Further, the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 representing the special figure 1 hold is displayed in a default display mode. A multifunction display area MF1 is formed in the right half of the lower end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Then, in the multi-function display area MF1, a mini game has been started, and a “fortune game” is displayed together with the face image BCH of the bancho, so that it is notified that the fortune game as a mini game is started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 125 (B2), a state in which the temporary stop is shown with a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 3” is shown. In this production example, for example, it is informed that there is a case where a pseudo-ream may be performed by temporarily stopping with a combination of only “decoration 7” and “decoration 3”. That is, there is a case where the combination of the decoration pattern of only “decoration 7” and “decoration 3” becomes a chance. In addition, you may make it alert | report the start of a pseudo-ream by displaying a pseudo-continuous symbol. Also, in the multi-function display area MF1, “Daiichi 3UP” is displayed together with “Daiyoshi” on the right side of the face-length face image BCH, and “Daiichi” is derived and displayed in the mini game. It is explained that the display mode of is increased by three ranks. It should be noted that the timing at which the “daikichi” display and the “delay 3 UP” display start in the multi-function display area MF1 may be the same as the temporary stop timing of the decorative symbols, or the multi-function display area MF1. After the display of “Daiyoshi” and “hold 3UP” is started, the decorative design may be temporarily stopped, or after the decorative design is temporarily stopped, “Daiyoshi” in the multi-function display area MF1 is displayed. "And" hold 3 UP "display may be started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 125 (B3), in the multi-function display area MF1, the treasure chest image BXS is displayed together with the face image BCH of the watch face, and the effect of opening the treasure chest is started. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variation display of the decoration symbol has been started, and the first variation display of the pseudo-ream is shown. Here, the number of times the pseudo-ream is performed may be displayed. The start of the decorative symbol variation display (pseudo-ream) and the start of the treasure chest BXS display may be the same timing, or after the decorative symbol variation display (pseudo-ream) starts, the treasure chest BXS display. May be started, or after the display of the treasure chest BXS is started, the decorative symbol variation display (pseudo-continuous) may be started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 125 (B4), in the multi-function display area MF1, the treasure box image BXS is changed to a display in an open state, and the fortune of “Daiyoshi” is derived and displayed, and the mission is achieved. It is shown. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a temporary stop is made with a combination of decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 3”, and it is informed that pseudo-ream may be further performed. Note that the temporary stop of the decorative symbol and the derivation display of the result of the mini game may be at the same timing, or the result of the mini game may be derived and displayed after the decorative symbol temporarily stops. The decorative design may temporarily stop after the result is derived and displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 125 (B5), in the multi-function display area MF1, the treasure chest image BXS is erased, and “3UP confirmed” indicating that it is a reward for mission completion is displayed. In addition, in the multi-function display area MF1, the face image BCH of the longest face is also continuously displayed. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the variation display of the decoration symbol is started, and the second variation display of the pseudo-continuation is performed. Note that the start of the decorative symbol variation display (pseudo-ream) and the timing at which the mission achievement reward display may be the same, or after the decorative symbol variation display (pseudo-ream) is started. The display of the mission achievement reward may be started, or after the display of the mission achievement reward is started, the decorative symbol variation display (pseudo-ream) may be started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 125 (B6), the result of the mini game displayed in the multi-function display area MF1 is erased, and the display mode of the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 is displayed. Is changed from the default display mode to the circular and red display mode as the third display mode of the pre-reading notice. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 3” is confirmed and notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss is obtained. Here, after the decorative design is temporarily stopped, the pseudo-ream may be further performed. It should be noted that the change of the display mode of the hold icon and the confirmation display of the decoration symbol may be at the same timing, the decoration design may be fixedly displayed after the display mode of the hold icon changes, or the decoration design is The display mode of the hold icon may change after the confirmation display. In addition, the timing of erasing the mini game result may be the same as the timing of the final display of the decoration pattern, or the decoration pattern may be finalized and displayed after the result of the mini game is deleted. The result of the mini game may be deleted after the symbol is fixedly displayed.

  In this example, it has been described that the result of the mini-game affects the display mode of the hold icon. However, as a result of the mini-game, it may be announced that a pseudo-ream will be performed as a reward for accomplishing the mission. Alternatively, the number of times that the pseudo-reams are started may be notified, or the number of times of the pseudo-reams may be increased.

  Further, as a result of the mini-game, it may be notified that the step-up notice will be performed as a reward for accomplishing the mission, or the number of steps displayed in the step-up notice may be notified. You may make it alert | report that a number will increase.

  FIG. 126 is a diagram showing step by step another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

  126 (A1) to FIG. 126 (A6) show an example of the effect performed in the heel mode, and FIGS. 126 (B1) to 126 (B6) show an example of the effect performed in the princess mode. Yes.

  FIG. 126 (A1) shows a state where the effect mode is the heel mode. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 126 (A1), the “婆 mode” is displayed at the upper center of the display area, and the character BA of the heel is displayed at the upper left portion of the display area. In addition, it is reported that the current production mode is the heel mode. In addition, as shown in FIG. 126 (A1), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Further, the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 representing the special figure 1 hold is displayed in a default display mode. A multifunction display area MF1 is formed in the right half of the lower end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the multi-function display area MF1, a mini game is started. In this example, a Sabohani character image SBH is displayed in place of the Banchou face image BCH, and a “dice game” is displayed together with the Sabohani character image SBH. It is shown that the dice game is informed. The Sabohani character image SBH is an image that may be displayed only in the dice game, for example, and is configured not to be displayed in the fortune game, but may be displayed in the fortune game. In this production example, the reward for mission achievement in the dice game is more advantageous when the Sabohani character image SBH is displayed than when the face length BCH image is displayed. That is, in this effect example, when the Sabohani character image SBH is displayed, the display mode of the hold icon is changed from the default display mode as a reward for accomplishing the mission as compared to the case where the image BCH of the face length is displayed. It is easy to make a notice that the display mode (red display mode) of the third stage of the pre-reading notice is made, and when the face length BCH image BCH is displayed, the mission is more than when the Sabohani character image SBH is displayed. As a reward for achievement, a notice that the display mode of the hold icon is changed from the default display form to the first display form (blue display form) of the prefetch notice is easily performed. More specifically, when the Sabohani character image SBH is displayed, the outcome of the mini-game is more easily derived as a result of the minigame than when the Banchou face image BCH is displayed. When the face image BCH is displayed, the outcome of “1” is more easily derived as a result of the mini-game than when the Sabohani character image SBH is displayed. Further, when the Sabohani character image SBH is displayed, the mission may be more easily achieved than when the Banchou face image BCH is displayed. 126 (A2) to FIG. 126 (A6) are the same as those shown in FIG. 125 (A2) except that the face image BCH of the longest length displayed in the multi-function display area MF1 is replaced with the Sabohani character image SBH. Since it is the same as (A6) in FIG.

  FIG. 126 (B1) shows that the effect mode is the princess mode. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 126 (B1), the “princess mode” is displayed at the upper center of the display area, and the princess character HM1 is displayed at the upper left part of the display area. It is reported that the current production mode is the princess mode. In addition, as shown in FIG. 126 (B1), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Further, the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 representing the special figure 1 hold is displayed in a default display mode. A multifunction display area MF1 is formed in the right half of the lower end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the multi-function display area MF1, a mini game is started. In this production example, the princess character image HM2 is displayed instead of the Banchou face image BCH, and the "Omikuji game" is displayed together with the princess character image HM2, and as a result, a mini game is displayed. It is shown that the fortune game is informed. The princess character image HM2, for example, is an image that may be displayed only in the fortune game, and is configured not to be displayed in the dice game, but may be displayed in the dice game. In this production example, the reward for accomplishing the mission in the fortune game is more advantageous when the princess character image HM2 is displayed than when the Banchou face image BCH is displayed. That is, in this effect example, when the princess character image HM2 is displayed, the display mode of the hold icon is changed from the default display mode as a reward for accomplishing the mission, as compared to the case where the image BCH of the chief face is displayed. It is easier to make a notice that the display mode (red display mode) of the third stage of the pre-reading notice is made, and when the image BCH of the face of the Bancho is displayed, the mission is more than when the character image HM2 of the princess is displayed. As a reward for achievement, a notice that the display mode of the hold icon is changed from the default display form to the first display form (blue display form) of the prefetch notice is easily performed. More specifically, when the princess character image HM2 is displayed, “Taichi” is more easily derived as a result of the mini-game than when the Banchou face image BCH is displayed. When BCH is displayed, “Nakayoshi” is more easily derived as a result of the mini game than when the princess character image HM2 is displayed. Note that, as in this effect example, the character displayed in the mini game may be the same as the character displayed corresponding to the effect mode. That is, in this effect example, the character (princess character HM1) displayed in the princess mode and the character (princess character image HM2) displayed in the mini game are the same. Furthermore, when the princess character image HM2 is displayed, the mission may be achieved more easily than when the Banchou face image BCH is displayed. FIG. 126 (B2) to FIG. 126 (B6) are the same as those in FIG. 125 (B2) except that the face image BCH of the longest length displayed in the multifunction display area MF1 is replaced with the princess character image HM2. Since it is the same as that in FIG.

  FIG. 127 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

  127 (A1) to FIG. 127 (A6) show an example of the effects performed in the normal gaming state (special figure low probability normal figure low probability state), and FIG. 127 (B1) to FIG. In addition, an example of the effect performed in the probability variation state (special drawing high probability ordinary figure high probability state) is shown. In this effect example, a state is shown in which the type of mini-game started depending on the current gaming state is different. More specifically, in the normal gaming state, the dice game is likely to be started as a mini game, and in the probability variation state, the fortune game is likely to be started as a mini game. In the normal game state, the dice game may be started as a mini game, and in the probability change state, the fortune game may be started as a mini game. Also, the appearance frequency of mini-games may vary depending on the gaming state. For example, in a probabilistic state, the player basically feels like waiting for a big hit. Therefore, the occurrence probability of the mini game may be higher than that in the normal gaming state. Also, the probability of occurrence of a mini game may be higher in the normal gaming state than in the probability variation state. Further, the mini game may be executable only in the probability variation state, or the mini game may be executable only in the normal gaming state. In addition, for a certain mini-game, the appearance rate may be higher in the normal gaming state than in the probability variation state, the probability variation state may be higher in the probability variation state than in the normal gaming state, or appears only in the probability variation state. May appear, or may appear only in the normal gaming state. Also, with regard to a certain notice, the appearance rate may be higher in the normal gaming state than in the probability variation state, the probability variation state may be higher in the probability variation state than in the normal gaming state, or appears only in the probability variation state. There may be a case, and it may appear only in a normal gaming state.

  FIG. 127 (A1) shows a state in which the gaming state is a normal gaming state (a special figure low probability ordinary figure low probability state). Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 127 (A1), “normal mode” is displayed at the upper center of the display area, and it is notified that the current gaming state is the normal gaming state. Has been. 127 (A1) to FIG. 127 (A6) are the same as those shown in FIG. 126 (A) except that the display of the spear mode and the display of the spear character BA are the normal mode display indicating that the normal game state is displayed. Since this is the same as (A1) to (A6) in FIG.

  In FIG. 127 (B1), a state is shown in which the gaming state is a probable change state (a special figure high probability ordinary figure high probability state). Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 127 (B1), the “probability change mode” is displayed at the upper center of the display area, and it is notified that the current gaming state is the probability change state. ing. In the upper right part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, “right-handed” is displayed, and a hitting suggestion display is performed. Also, as shown in FIG. 127 (B1), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Also, the hold icon h21 of the first special figure 2, the hold icon h22 of the second special figure 2, and the hold icon h23 of the third special figure 2 representing the hold of the special figure 2 are both in the default display mode. Displayed on the lower right side of the display area. In this effect example, the multifunction display area MF1 is formed in the left half of the lower end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. That is, in this effect example, the display position of the multi-function display area MF1 is changed depending on the gaming state. Then, in the multi-function display area MF1, the mini game is started, and the “Omikuji game” is displayed together with the princess character image HM2 to notify that the Omikuji game as a mini game is started. 127 (B1) to FIG. 127 (B5) show that the game mode is the performance mode of the princess mode, and the hold display in FIG. 1 becomes the hold display in FIG. 126 (B1) to FIG. 126 (B5) except that the number of hold displays is different and the position of the hold display and the display position of the multifunction display area MF1 are switched. Therefore, the description is omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 127 (B5), after the display of “3UP confirmed” indicating that the mission has been achieved is displayed in the multi-function display area MF1, the decorative symbol display shown in FIG. 127 (B6) is displayed. In the device 208, the result of the mini game displayed in the multi-function display area MF1 is deleted. In this production example, the display mode of the hold icon h22 in the second special figure 2 is changed from the default display mode to the pre-reading notice. The third display mode is changed to a circular and red display mode. On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 3” is confirmed and notified that the combination of the decorative symbols of the loss is obtained. In this manner, the result of the mini game may affect any of the hold icons.

  FIG. 128 is a diagram showing step by step about another example of the mini game effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

  128A1 to 128A6 show examples in which the display area of the multi-function display area MF1 is expanded. FIGS. 128B1 to 128B6 show that the multi-function display area MF1 is displayed. An example in which a hold display area for displaying a hold icon is also used is shown. Note that FIG. 128 is an example of a dice game as a mini game, but it can also be applied to the above-mentioned fortune game.

  FIG. 128 (A1) shows a state in which the gaming state is a normal gaming state (a special figure low probability ordinary figure low probability state). Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 127 (A1), “normal mode” is displayed at the upper center of the display area, and it is notified that the current gaming state is the normal gaming state. Has been. In addition, as shown in FIG. 128 (A1), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Further, the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 representing the special figure 1 hold is displayed in a default display mode. A multifunction display area MF1 is formed in the right half of the lower end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Then, in the multi-function display area MF1, a mini game is started, and a “dice game” is displayed together with the savohani character image SBH, thereby informing that a dice game as a mini game is started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 128 (A2), the multi-function display area MF1 is displayed in an expanded manner to show that the area is enlarged. In this effect example, when the mini game is started, the multifunction display area MF1 is expanded and displayed so that the visibility is improved. Also, in the multi-function display area MF1, the display of “3” on the dice is displayed on the right side of the character image SBH of Sabohani, and “Delay 3UP” is displayed, and the effect button is displayed after the mini game is started. It is explained that when the item “3” of the dice is stopped and displayed by operating 136, the display mode of the hold icon is increased by three levels. Here, the display showing the Sabohani character image SBH and the dice “3” is enlarged. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a step-up notice is started as a main effect. At the timing shown in FIG. 128 (A2), the step-up notice SU1 in the display mode of step 1 is displayed. Since this step-up notice SU1 is not displayed overlapping the multi-function display area MF1, it does not affect the visibility of both. Note that the timing at which the multi-function display area MF1 is expanded and displayed may be the same as the timing at which the step-up notice SU1 starts to be displayed, or after the multi-function display area MF1 is expanded and displayed. The notice SU1 may be displayed, or the multifunction display area MF1 may be expanded and displayed after the step-up notice SU1 is displayed. Further, even when the display of the “3” roll of the dice and the display of “with hold 3 UP” in the multi-function display area MF1 is started, and the display start timing of the step-up notice SU1 is the same. Alternatively, the display of the step-up notice SU1 may be started after the indication of the “3” of the dice and the display of “with hold 3UP” in the multi-function display area MF1, or the step-up notice. After the display of SU1 is started, the display of the “3” roll of the dice and the display of “Delay 3 UP” in the multi-function display area MF1 may be started. Also, the timing at which the multifunction display area MF1 is expanded and displayed is the same as the timing at which the display of the “3” on the dice in the multifunction display area MF1 is started and the display of “Delay 3UP” is started. Alternatively, after the multi-function display area MF1 is expanded and displayed, the display of the “3” roll of the dice and the “hold 3 UP” display in the multi-function display area MF1 may be started. The multifunction display area MF1 may be expanded and displayed after the display of the “3” roll of the dice and the “hold 3 UP” display in the function display area MF1 are started. Further, when the mini game is started, the multi-function display area MF1 may be necessarily expanded or may not be expanded. Further, the multi-function display area MF1 may be expanded according to the gaming state. For example, when the mini game is started in the probability changing state, the multi-function display area MF1 is expanded, and the mini game is played in the normal gaming state. When started, the multi-function display area MF1 may not be expanded. When the mini game is started in the normal gaming state, the multi-function display area MF1 is expanded, and the mini game is started in the probability change state. In this case, the multifunction display area MF1 may not be expanded. Further, in this effect example, the expanded multi-function display area MF1 is not overlapped with the decorative pattern, but the expanded multi-function display area MF1 may be overlapped with the decorative pattern, or the multi-function display area MF1 is expanded. It may be overlapped with the function display area MF1. In addition, the multifunction display area MF1 that is not expanded may be overlapped with the decorative pattern, or may be overlapped with the multifunction display area MF1 that is not expanded.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 128 (A3), in the multi-function display area MF1, a large button image 136aL is displayed together with this button image 136aL, and “press” is displayed, and the effect button 136 in the mini game is displayed. It is informed that the operation valid period has been started. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the step-up notice is updated, and the step-up notice SU2 having the display mode in step 2 is displayed. Here again, the step-up notice SU2 in the display mode of step 2 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative design. This step-up notice SU2 is displayed so as to overlap with a part of the multifunction display area MF1, and affects the visibility of the multifunction display area MF1. Therefore, when the step-up notice SU2 is overlapped with the multi-function display area MF1, the visibility may be lower than when the step-up notice SU2 is not overlapped with the multi-function display area MF1. It should be noted that the step-up notice may be overlapped only when the multi-function display area MF1 is expanded and displayed, or the step-up notice may be overlapped even when the multifunction display area MF1 is not expanded and displayed. In addition, the timing at which the button image 136aL and “press” display in the multi-function display area MF1 are started may be the same as the timing at which the step-up notice SU2 starts to be displayed, or in the multi-function display area MF1. After the display of the button image 136aL and “Press” is started, the display of the step-up notice SU2 may be started, or after the display of the step-up notice SU2 is started, the button image 136aL in the multi-function display area MF1 is started. And “Press” may be displayed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 128 (A4), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the decorative symbol variation display continues. Further, the step-up notice is further updated, and the step-up notice SU3 in the display mode of step 3 is displayed. Here again, the step-up notice SU3 in the display mode of step 3 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative design. This step-up notice SU3 is also displayed so as to overlap a part of the multi-function display area MF1, and affects the visibility of the multi-function display area MF1. Therefore, when the step-up notice SU3 is overlapped with the multi-function display area MF1, the visibility may be lower than when the step-up notice SU3 is not overlapped with the multi-function display area MF1. Further, in the multi-function display area MF1, a button reception time meter MT is displayed below the button image 136aL, and the gauge is displayed in a manner that the gauge decreases according to the time after the effective operation period of the effect button 136 is started. Has been. The button reception time meter MT is also enlarged and displayed. Therefore, the decrease rate of the gauge is faster than when the button reception time meter MT is not expanded. Here, the decrease rate of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT displayed in the mini game may be faster than the decrease rate of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT displayed in the main effect. The decrease rate of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT displayed in the main effect may be faster than the decrease rate of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT displayed in the mini game. The decrease rate of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT displayed in the game may be the same as the decrease rate of the gauge of the button reception time meter MT displayed in the main effect.

  Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 128 (A4), as shown in FIG. 128 (A5), in the multi-function display area MF1, the enlarged dice symbol shows the achievement of the mission. Is derived and displayed in a manner indicating the outcome of “3”, and “3UP confirmed” indicating that it is a mission achievement reward is displayed. In the multi-function display area MF1, the Sabohani character image SBH is also enlarged and displayed. As shown in FIG. 128 (A5), the decoration symbol display device 208 performs the second stop, and “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the decorative symbol variation display continues. Here, the right symbol stop display and the mini-game result derivation display may be at the same timing, or the mini-game result may be derived and displayed after the right symbol is stopped and displayed. The right symbol may be stopped and displayed after the game result is derived and displayed. In addition, as shown in FIG. 128 (A5), the step-up notice is finished. Note that the stop timing of the right symbol and the end timing of the step-up notice may be the same, or the step-up notice may end after the right symbol is stopped and displayed, or the step-up notice. After ending, the right symbol may be stopped and displayed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 128 (A6), the third stop is performed, and “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The display is finalized by the combination of the decorative pattern of “decoration 2—decoration 7—decoration 7”. Further, the expanded multifunction display area MF1 is reduced and returned to the default size. Further, the result of the mini game displayed in the multi-function display area MF1 is erased, and the display mode of the hold icon h11 in the first special figure 1 is changed from the default display mode to the third display mode of the pre-reading notice. As a circular and red display mode. It should be noted that the change of the display mode of the hold icon and the confirmation display of the decoration symbol may be at the same timing, the decoration design may be fixedly displayed after the display mode of the hold icon changes, or the decoration design is The display mode of the hold icon may change after the confirmation display. In addition, the timing of erasing the mini game result may be the same as the timing of the final display of the decoration pattern, or the decoration pattern may be finalized and displayed after the result of the mini game is deleted. The result of the mini game may be deleted after the symbol is fixedly displayed. Further, the timing at which the multi-function display area MF1 returns to the default size may be the same as the timing at which the mini-game result is erased, or after the multi-function display area MF1 returns to the default size, The result may be erased, or after the result of the mini game is erased, the multi-function display area MF1 may return to the default size.

  FIG. 128 (B1) shows a state in which the gaming state is the normal gaming state. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 125 (B1), “normal mode” is displayed at the upper center of the display area, and it is notified that the current gaming state is the normal gaming state. Has been. In addition, as shown in FIG. 128 (B1), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Further, in this effect example, a multi-function display area MF2 is formed across the left and right ends of the lower end portion of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the multi-function display area MF2, in addition to the above-described tutorial display, notice display, and mini-game effect display, a hold icon is also displayed. The hold icon shown in FIG. 1 can be displayed on the left side of the multi-function display area MF2, and the hold icon shown in FIG. 2 can be displayed on the right side of the multi-function display area MF2. As shown in FIG. 128 (B1), on the left side of the multi-function display area MF2, the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 representing the hold of the special figure 1 is displayed in the default display mode. Further, on the right side of the multi-function display area MF2, a mini game is started using the display area of the hold icon in FIG. 2, and the “dice game” is displayed together with the savohani character image SBH. It is notified that the dice game is started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 128 (B2), in the multi-function display area MF2, a display of “3” on the dice is displayed on the right side of the character image SBH of Sabohani, and “delay 3UP” is displayed. It is described that when the effect button 136 is operated after the mini game is started and the “3” of the dice is stopped and displayed, the display mode of the hold icon is increased by three levels. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a step-up notice is started as a main effect. At the timing shown in FIG. 128 (B2), the step-up notice SU1 in the display mode of step 1 is displayed. This step-up notice SU1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative design. Therefore, it is more difficult to visually recognize the decorative symbols when they are overlapped by the step-up notice SU1 than when they are not overlapped by the step-up notice SU1. It should be noted that even when the display of the "3" roll of the dice and the display of "with hold 3UP" in the multi-function display area MF2 is started, the timing at which the display of the step-up notice SU1 is started is the same. Alternatively, the display of the step-up notice SU1 may be started or the step-up notice may be started after the display of the “3” roll of the dice and the “hold 3 UP” display in the multi-function display area MF2. After the display of SU1 is started, the display of the “3” roll of the dice and the display of “Delay 3UP” in the multi-function display area MF2 may be started.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 128 (B3), in the multi-function display area MF2, “press” is displayed together with the button image 136a, and it is notified that the operation effective period of the effect button 136 in the mini game has started. ing. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the step-up notice is updated, and the step-up notice SU2 having the display mode in step 2 is displayed. Here again, the step-up notice SU2 in the display mode of step 2 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative design. The timing at which the display of the button image 136a and “press” in the multi-function display area MF2 is started may be the same as the timing at which the display of the step-up notice SU2 is started, or in the multi-function display area MF2. After the display of the button image 136a and “press” is started, the step-up notice SU2 may be displayed, or after the step-up notice SU2 is displayed, the button image 136a in the multi-function display area MF2 is started. And the display of “press” may be started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 128 (B4), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the decorative symbol variation display continues. Further, the step-up notice is further updated, and the step-up notice SU3 in the display mode of step 3 is displayed. Here again, the step-up notice SU3 in the display mode of step 3 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative design. Further, in the multi-function display area MF1, a button reception time meter MT is displayed, and the gauge is displayed in a manner that the gauge decreases according to the time after the operation effective period of the effect button 136 is started.

  When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 128 (B4), as shown in FIG. 128 (B5), in the multi-function display area MF2, the design of the dice is the outcome of mission achievement. Derived and displayed in a manner indicating the outcome of “3”, and “3UP confirmed” indicating that it is a reward for mission achievement. In the multi-function display area MF2, a savory character image SBH is also displayed. Also, as shown in FIG. 128 (B5), the decoration symbol display device 208 performs the second stop, and “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the decorative symbol variation display continues. Here, the right symbol stop display and the mini-game result derivation display may be at the same timing, or the mini-game result may be derived and displayed after the right symbol is stopped and displayed. The right symbol may be stopped and displayed after the game result is derived and displayed. Also, as shown in FIG. 128 (B5), the step-up notice has ended. Note that the stop timing of the right symbol and the end timing of the step-up notice may be the same, or the step-up notice may end after the right symbol is stopped and displayed, or the step-up notice. After ending, the right symbol may be stopped and displayed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 128 (B6), the third stop is performed, and “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The display is finalized by the combination of the decorative pattern of “decoration 2—decoration 7—decoration 7”. Further, the result of the mini game displayed in the multi-function display area MF2 is erased, and the display mode of the hold icon h11 in the first special figure 1 is changed from the default display mode to the third display mode of the pre-reading notice. As a circular and red display mode. It should be noted that the change of the display mode of the hold icon and the confirmation display of the decoration symbol may be at the same timing, the decoration design may be fixedly displayed after the display mode of the hold icon changes, or the decoration design is The display mode of the hold icon may change after the confirmation display. In addition, the timing of erasing the mini game result may be the same as the timing of the final display of the decoration pattern, or the decoration pattern may be finalized and displayed after the result of the mini game is deleted. The result of the mini game may be deleted after the symbol is fixedly displayed.

  FIG. 129 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

  FIG. 129 (a) shows a state in which the gaming state is the normal gaming state. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 129 (a), the “normal mode” is displayed at the upper center of the display area, and it is notified that the current gaming state is the normal gaming state. Has been. In addition, the decorative symbol display device 208 shows a state in which the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Further, the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 representing the special figure 1 hold is displayed in a default t display mode. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 129 (a), a step-up notice as a main effect is started. At the timing shown in FIG. 129 (a), the step-up notice SU1 in the display mode of step 1 is displayed. This step-up notice SU1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative design. Therefore, it is more difficult to visually recognize the decorative symbols when they are overlapped by the step-up notice SU1 than when they are not overlapped by the step-up notice SU1.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 129 (b), the step-up notice is updated, and the step-up notice SU2 in the display mode of step 2 is displayed. Here again, the step-up notice SU2 in the display mode of step 2 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative design. In addition, a mini game display area MN2 is formed in the right half of the lower end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Then, in this mini game display area MN2, the mini game is started, and the “dice game” is displayed together with the savohani character image SBH, thereby informing that the dice game as the mini game is started. That is, in this effect example, a state in which a dedicated area (mini game display area MN2) appears when the mini game is started is shown. Here, the timing at which the display of the step-up notice SU2 is started may be the same as the timing at which the mini-game is started, or the mini-game may be started after the display of the step-up notice SU2 is started. The step-up notice SU2 may be displayed after the mini game is started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 129 (c), the decorative symbol being displayed in a variable manner is displayed in a reduced size in the upper left corner of the display area, and the mini game display area MN2 is erased to produce a mini game effect. A state in which the display is greatly enlarged and displayed in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown. Specifically, on the right side of the character image SBH of Sabohani, a display indicating the outcome of the “3” of the dice and a display of “Delay 3 UP” are displayed in a greatly enlarged manner, and an effect is produced after the mini game is started. It is described that when the button 136 is operated and the "3" roll of the dice is stopped and displayed, the display mode of the hold icon is increased by three levels. Thus, in this effect example, a state is shown in which the dedicated area (mini game display area MN2) is erased during at least a part of the period in which the mini game is being performed. In addition, when the mini-game is not started, the step-up notice is scheduled to be displayed up to the step-up notice SU3 in the display mode of step 3, but with the expansion display of the mini game effect display, Has been censored. Even when the mini game is started, the step-up notice may be continuously displayed without being terminated. In this case, for example, the display area may be moved so as not to overlap the effect display of the mini game, or the step-up notice may be reduced and displayed. Further, the step-up notice may overlap and be displayed on the mini-game effect display, or the mini-game effect display may overlap and be displayed on the step-up notice.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 129 (d), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 2” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the decorative symbol variation display continues. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a button reception time meter MT is displayed below the enlarged button image 136aL, and the gauge decreases according to the time since the operation effective period of the effect button 136 is started. Are displayed. The button reception time meter MT is also enlarged and displayed. Here, the timing at which the button image 136aL and the button reception time meter MT are displayed may be the same as the timing at which the left symbol is stopped, or after the button image 136aL and the button reception time meter MT are displayed. The left symbol may be stopped and the button image 136aL and the button reception time meter MT may be displayed after the left symbol is stopped.

  Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 129 (d), in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 129 (e), the enlarged dice symbol is “3 "Is derived and displayed in a manner indicating the outcome of". " At this time, the mini game display area MN2 is displayed again on the right side of the lower end portion of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this mini game display area MN2, the dice symbol is derived with an outcome of “3”. In addition to notifying that it has been displayed, “3UP confirmed” indicating that it is a reward for mission achievement is displayed. In addition, in the mini game display area MN2, a Sabohani character image SBH is also displayed. Further, as shown in FIG. 129 (e), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the second stop is performed, and “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the decorative symbol variation display continues. Here, the right symbol stop display and the mini-game result derivation display may be at the same timing, or the mini-game result may be derived and displayed after the right symbol is stopped and displayed. The right symbol may be stopped and displayed after the game result is derived and displayed. Note that the timing of the derivation display of the mini game result may be the same as the timing of the redisplay of the mini game display area MN2, or after the mini game result is derivation displayed, the mini game display area MN2 The result of the mini game may be derived and displayed after the mini game display area MN2 is redisplayed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 129 (f), the third stop is performed, and “decoration 7” is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The display is finalized by the combination of the decorative pattern of “decoration 2—decoration 7—decoration 7”. At this time, the size of the decorative design returns from the reduced size to the default size, and the display position also returns to the default display position. Also, with the end of the mini game, the mini game display area MN2 is also erased, and the display mode of the hold icon h11 of the first special figure 1 is circular and red as the display mode of the third stage of the pre-reading notice from the default display mode. The display mode has been changed. It should be noted that the change of the display mode of the hold icon and the confirmation display of the decoration symbol may be at the same timing, the decoration design may be fixedly displayed after the display mode of the hold icon changes, or the decoration design is The display mode of the hold icon may change after the confirmation display. Further, the timing of erasing the mini game display area MN2 may be the same as the timing of finalizing the decorative symbols, or the decorative symbols may be finalized after the mini game display area MN2 is erased. The mini game display area MN2 may be erased after the decorative symbol is fixedly displayed. The timing at which the mini game display area MN2 is erased may be the same as the timing at which the display mode of the hold icon changes, or after the mini game display area MN2 is erased, the display mode of the hold icon changes. Alternatively, after the display mode of the hold icon is changed, the mini game display area MN2 may be deleted.

  In the production example shown in FIG. 129, the dice game is described as an example of the mini game, but the present invention can also be applied to the above-described fortune game.

  Moreover, although the dice game and the fortune game are executed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in which the decorative symbol variation display is performed as the mini-game described above, it is configured to be executed on a display device different from the decorative symbol display device 208. May be.

  Next, another specific example of effects executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 130 to 137.

  130 to 137 are diagrams showing stepwise modifications of effects centered on the decorative symbol display device of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to the present embodiment. 130 to 137, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, the second special figure reservation lamp 220, the universal figure. The hold lamp 216 and the fourth symbol display device 284a are not shown. 130 to 137 show a pachinko machine 100 configured with one decorative symbol display device 208. Note that, as in the embodiment described above, a plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided. Further, the transparent light guide plate IL described above may be disposed on the front side of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 130 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of the mini game effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 130 (a), a customer waiting demonstration display is displayed. This customer-waiting demonstration display is a display that may be displayed in a standby state in which no special drawing is displayed, and is an effect display for promoting the player's willingness to play the game. In the lower part of the display area, “display menu with push button” is displayed so as to overlap with the customer waiting demonstration display, and each button of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 is displayed in the standby state. It is informed that the menu screen is displayed when is operated.

  When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 130B, a menu screen is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. 130C. In the menu screen, each item of member registration, two-dimensional code issuance, game history, mini-game, and end is displayed in a column, and below it is displayed a text of “select” along with the direction key operation promotion image 137p. In addition, “OK” is displayed together with the OK button operation promotion image 137q and the button image 136a, and the cursor CSL is moved by operating the upper button 137a and the lower button 137b of the operation key unit 137, and OK. It is shown that the item indicated by the cursor CSL is executed by operating the button 137e or the effect button 136.

  Here, when the item “member registration” is executed, the screen shifts to a member registration screen. On the member registration screen, for example, a two-dimensional code for acquiring a password is displayed. This two-dimensional code includes the URL of the registration page for the initial registration on the management server side. In the present embodiment, by registering as a member, it is possible to set an original mode such as recording a game history or customizing an effect. The player reads the two-dimensional code and obtains the URL of the initial registration page, for example, with a portable terminal having a camera function and a barcode reader function. The player accesses the registration page of the acquired URL from the portable terminal. The management server acquires personal identification information (ID) that can identify a person who has accessed the initial registration page, and issues a password. The personal identification information (ID) may be information based on an individual identification number unique to the portable terminal or information input by an accessor. The password issued here includes initial values of personal identification information (ID) and history information. The history information is stored in the management server in association with the personal identification information acquired here. When the password is issued from the management server, the password is displayed on the display screen of the mobile terminal.

  When the item “2D code issuance” is executed, a 2D code issuance screen is displayed. On the two-dimensional code issuance screen, the two-dimensional code generated by the pachinko machine 100 is displayed. The two-dimensional code issuance is prepared on the assumption that the player selects the game when the game in the original mode is set.

  The two-dimensional code here has a maximum capacity of 2053 bytes (about 2 KB), and the display size is changed in increments of 4 cells in the range of 21 × 21 [cells] to 177 × 177 [cells]. Can do. A QR code (registered trademark) is known as a typical two-dimensional code. In place of the two-dimensional code, a one-dimensional barcode or an encrypted character string may be used. However, the two-dimensional code has an advantage that the amount of information that can be included is much larger than that of a simple character string. In the case of a character string, as the amount of information to be included increases, the number of character strings increases, which cannot be remembered by humans and cannot be completely written. Therefore, the burden can be reduced by notifying with a two-dimensional code.

  In the present embodiment, the two-dimensional code includes, for example, personal identification information (ID), information indicating the result of the current game, the mission achievement status, and the accumulated value of the original mode points. In addition, the number of winnings to the special figure starting port (230, 232), the number of jackpots, the number of jackpots, store identification information, information specific to the game machine, operating status, number of errors, and the like may be included. Information representing the game result, mission achievement status, accumulated value of original mode points, number of winnings, etc. correspond to history information. Further, the two-dimensional code includes the URL of the update reception page prepared in the management server.

  In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, when a two-dimensional code is issued, information such as the result of the current game included in the two-dimensional code is erased from the pachinko machine 100. Therefore, in this embodiment, when issuing a two-dimensional code, a warning screen is displayed to warn the player that information such as the result of the current game will be deleted.

  When the player photographs the issued two-dimensional code using the camera function of the mobile terminal, the barcode reader function is activated. Then, on the display screen of the mobile terminal, “http: //www.˜/jp” representing the address of the update reception page prepared in the management server, personal identification information (ID) included in the two-dimensional code, A URL to which an argument representing history information is added is displayed. When the player accesses the URL converted by the barcode reader function from the read two-dimensional code, the history information that has been stored in the operation server so far in association with the personal identification information included in the argument portion is Updated to the history information contained in the argument part.

  In the present embodiment, since the player who has finished reading the two-dimensional code may leave the gaming table as it is, the history information stored in the gaming table at the time of issuing the two-dimensional code is erased. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the history information may be erased based on the player's operation after the two-dimensional code is issued. If the player does not erase the history information, the game can be returned to the game reflecting the history information. You may comprise as follows.

  When the item “game history” is executed, for example, information indicating the result of the current game, the mission achievement status, the accumulated value of the original mode points, and the like are displayed. In addition, the number of winnings, the number of big hits, the number of small hits, the operating status, the number of errors, etc. to the special figure starting port (230, 232) may be displayed.

  When the item “mini game” is executed, the mini game is executed. Details of the mini game will be described later.

  Further, when the “end” item is executed, the display of the menu screen is ended, and the customer waiting demonstration display is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 130C, when the down button 137b is operated once while the cursor CSL indicates “member registration”, as shown in FIG. When "2D code issuance" is instructed and the down button 137b is operated once more, as shown in FIG. 130 (e), the cursor CSL indicates "game history" and the down button 137b is operated once more. Then, as shown in FIG. 130 (f), the cursor CSL instructs the “mini game”.

  When the OK button 137e is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 130 (f), the mini-game is started on the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. 130 (g). Specifically, the title “Today's fortune telling” is displayed at the top of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and four treasure chests are arranged from the center to the left side of the display area. A character “select” is displayed together with the key operation promotion image 137p, and a character “decision” is displayed below the button image 136a. The cursor CSL is moved by operating the direction key of the operation key unit 137. It is informed that one of the four treasure chests (BX1, BX2, BX3, BX4) is instructed and the treasure chest designated by the cursor CSL can be opened by operating the effect button 136. At the timing shown in FIG. 130 (g), the cursor CSL indicates the treasure chest BX1 in the upper left. In this mini game, a player selects from four treasure chests and notifies the contents of the selected treasure chests. The contents of the treasure box are the results of fortune-telling fortune telling (for example, Daikichi, Nakakichi, Kokichi, Evil, etc.), and a plurality of types are prepared. In addition, in this production example, a word advice is added together with the result of fortune telling. The fortune-telling results and the word advice are not related to the result of the determination. In other words, it does not at least indicate whether or not the decision is correct. Also, which result is associated with each treasure chest is determined at random. Therefore, for example, even if the same treasure box is selected, the contents change every time the mini game is executed. That is, it can be said that the contents of the treasure box (the result of the mini game) change according to the operation status of the operation means such as the operation key unit 137 and the effect button 136.

  Thereafter, when the lower button 137b is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 130 (h), the cursor CSL points to the lower left treasure box BX2, as shown in FIG. 130 (i).

  Then, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 130 (i), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the lower left treasure box BX2 is surrounded by the cursor CSL as shown in FIG. 130 (j). The upper left treasure chest BX1, the upper right treasure chest BX3, and the lower right treasure chest BX4 are reduced and displayed in the lower right portion. Thereby, it is notified that the lower left treasure chest BX2 has been determined as a treasure chest to be opened.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 130 (k), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the lower left treasure chest BX2 is opened, and as a result of the mini game, a spear character BA appears from the treasure chest, and the result of fortune telling “Kokichi” is displayed as a message, “moderately ...” is displayed as a word advice, and a state of calling attention so as not to be too absorbed in the game is shown. In other words, in this production example, there is a case where it is understood that “Komikichi” is associated with the character of the samurai and the result of the fortune-telling is “Kiyoshi” by looking at the character BA of the samurai.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 130 (l), a character display “Other results are now” is displayed, and the contents of the treasure chest that has not been opened are notified. The content of the character display shown in FIG. 130 (l) differs depending on the character that has appeared. For example, when a princess character HM3 to be described later appears, a character display such as “other results are here” is displayed. Is displayed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 130 (m), the princess character HM3 appears from the upper left treasure chest BX1, the face image BCH of the chief face appears from the upper right treasure chest BX3, and from the lower right treasure chest BX4. The appearance of the Panda face image PND is shown. The princess character HM3 is a character corresponding to Daikichi, the Banchou face image BCH is a character corresponding to Nakakichi, and the panda face image PND is a character corresponding to evil. The combination of the fortune-telling results and the character can be set as appropriate, and the combination of the fortune-telling results and the character may be changed each time the mini game is played.

  As another example of the contents of the treasure box displayed as a result of the mini game, for example, as shown in FIG. 130 (k1), a princess character HM3 appears from the treasure box, and as a result of fortune telling, "Is displayed, and as a word of advice, there is a display of" Today's premonition of big catch ", which gives a sense of expectation that a large amount of balls may be obtained.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 130 (k2), a face-length image BCH appears from the treasure box, “Nakayoshi” is displayed as a result of fortune telling, ”Is displayed, and there is also a thing that gives a sense of expectation that it may be necessary to play slowly while sitting.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 130 (k3), an image PND of a panda's face appears from the treasure box, “Fill” is displayed as a result of fortune telling, and “Gauoo” and “Dangerous danger of recognizing” ”Is displayed, and some of them are shown to call attention so as not to be overly engaged in the game.

  In addition, for example, a mini-game result that can appear depending on the setting contents by the DIP switch connected to the first sub-control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 may be prepared. When the setting to increase the appearance rate of the premier notice that is promised to be made is made, as shown in FIG. 130 (k4), the message “Today is a premonition of big catch” is displayed. You may make it change to the display "Premiere notice is easy to come out." That is, there may be a case where a result that is not related to the result of the success / failure determination, such as an indication of the appearance rate of the notice, is displayed. According to this, it may be possible to make the player think as if it is indirectly related to the influence of the determination. Even when the appearance rate of the notice is not changed, the result of the mini game shown in FIG. 130 (k4) may be displayed. Thus, even when the same character appears, the display added to the character, such as a single word advice, may be changed.

  Further, in this effect example, instead of a single word advice, a tutorial display such as a game description or a model character description may be performed.

  FIG. 131 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of a mini game effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

  131 (A1) to FIG. 131 (A6) are effects following FIG. 130 (f), and show an example of another minigame effect. That is, when the OK button 137e is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 130 (f), the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 131 (A1) displays “Today's fortune telling-Draw Daikichi- ”Is displayed, and a mini game whose mission is to select a treasure box inside“ Daichi ”is started. 131 (A1) to 131 (A4) are the same as FIGS. 130 (g) to (j) except that the display of the titles is different, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 131 (A5) shows a state where the lower left treasure chest BX2 is opened. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 131 (A5), the treasure box at the lower left is opened, and as a result of the mini game, a princess character HM3 appears from the treasure box and as a result of fortune telling. “Taichi” is displayed. Since “Daiyoshi” is displayed, the mini-game mission has been achieved, and therefore “Mission accomplished” is displayed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 131 (A6), instead of displaying “Mission accomplished”, the message “Today is a good feeling today” is displayed as a single advice, and the player is awarded a winning ball. It gives an expectation. This one-word advice can also be said to be a display that is not related to the result of the determination.

  131 (B1) to FIG. 131 (B6) are also effects following FIG. 130 (f) and show a state where the mission could not be achieved. Note that FIG. 131 (B1) has a display similar to that in FIG. 131 (A1).

  When the right button 137d is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 131 (B2), the cursor CSL points to the upper right treasure box BX3 as shown in FIG. 131 (B3).

  When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 131 (B3), the upper right treasure chest BX3 is surrounded by the cursor CSL in the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. 131 (B4). The upper left treasure chest BX1, the lower left treasure chest BX2, and the lower right treasure chest BX4 are reduced and displayed in the lower right portion. Thereby, it is notified that the upper right treasure chest BX3 is determined as the treasure chest to be opened.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 131 (B5), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the treasure chest BX3 in the upper right is opened, and as a result of the mini game, a spear character BA appears from the treasure chest and the result of fortune telling "Koyoshi" is displayed. Since the “Daiyoshi” is not displayed, the mini-game mission has not been achieved. Therefore, “not achieved…” is displayed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 131 (B6), instead of displaying “not achieved…”, a message “moderately ...” is displayed as a single word advice. It shows how to call attention so as not to overdone.

  FIG. 132 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of the mini game effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 132 (a), the above-described customer waiting demonstration display is displayed.

  When the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 132 (b), a menu screen is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. 132 (c). In the menu screen shown in FIG. 132 (c), the items of member registration, customization, mini-game, personal data clear, and end are displayed in a column, and “select” is displayed below the direction key operation promotion image 137p. "Is displayed, and the OK button operation promoting image 137q and the button image 136a are displayed together with the" OK "character display. The cursor is operated by operating the upper button 137a and the lower button 137b of the operation key unit 137. It is shown that the item indicated by the cursor CSL is executed by moving the CSL and operating the OK button 137e or the effect button 137.

  When the “customize” item is executed, various settings can be customized. Details of customizable settings will be described later.

  In addition, when the item “Clear Personal Data” is executed, information indicating the result of the current game, the mission achievement status, and the accumulated value of the original mode points is deleted from the pachinko machine 100. At this time, a warning screen may be displayed to prevent the data from being cleared accidentally.

  As shown in FIG. 132 (c), when the down button 137b is operated once while the cursor CSL indicates “member registration”, as shown in FIG. 132 (d), the cursor CSL Indicates “customize”. When the OK button 137e is operated while the cursor CSL indicates “customize”, the screen shifts to a customization menu screen as shown in FIG.

  On the customize menu screen, auto button mode on / off, eco mode on / off, premier notice appearance rate setting, tutorial display on / off settings are displayed in a column, and the direction below “Select” characters are displayed together with the key operation promotion image 137p, and “decision” characters are displayed together with the OK button operation promotion image 137q. The upper button 137a and the lower button 137b of the operation key unit 137 are displayed. By operating the cursor CSL to move up and down and operating the left button 137c and the right button 137b, the setting instructed by the cursor CSL can be changed.

  Here, the “auto button mode” is an effect mode in which each button of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 is automatically operated. When the auto button mode is set to on, the auto button mode flag is turned on, and the button operation timing is automatically determined and the operation is performed. For example, when a continuous hitting operation effect that requests a continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 is executed, the button operation is controlled to be automatically performed at every appropriate timing (for example, every 200 ms). In this production example, when the “auto button mode” is set to ON, the buttons are set to full auto in which the various buttons are automatically operated without operating the various buttons. It may be possible to set to long press auto in which the button is automatically operated by long press. Here, the long press auto is an operation in which a plurality of operations are continuously performed when a long press operation by the operation unit is performed in an effect (including a mini game) that requires a plurality of operation units. It is a pseudo operation that has been done. In this case, when the operating means is operated for long pressing, it is handled as if the first manual operation was performed. For example, when the above-described continuous hit operation effect is executed, by pressing and holding the effect button 136 for a long time, control is performed so as to perform a pseudo continuous hit operation. The full auto is an operation that is performed when the operation unit is operated in a certain effect that requires the operation of the operation unit even when the operation unit is not operated.

  In addition, the “eco mode” restricts driving of one or a plurality of driving devices, for example, turning off various lamps 418 in order to reduce power consumption when the standby state is maintained for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds). Or it is a mode to stop. In this embodiment, when the eco mode start condition is satisfied after the eco mode is turned on, various lamps 418 are turned off, and the brightness of the backlight of the decorative symbol display device 208 is reduced. Note that a device whose drive is to be limited or stopped can be set as appropriate.

  In addition, “Premier notice appearance rate” indicates the appearance rate of the notice that it is guaranteed that the jackpot symbol will be finalized and displayed when it appears. The normal probability table where the premier notice appears with a probability is used to draw the premier notice, and if it is set to high, the premier notice appears with a second probability higher than the first The high-probability table is used, and the lottery for the appearance of the premier notice is controlled.

  Further, when “Tutorial” is set to OFF, the above-described tutorial display is controlled not to be performed.

  As shown in FIG. 132 (f), when the left button 137 c is operated once while the cursor CSL indicates “auto button mode”, as shown in FIG. 132 (g), “OFF”. The “Auto Button Mode” setting that has been instructed is changed to “On”.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 132 (g), when the OK button 137e is operated once with the “auto button mode” set to “on”, the “auto button mode” setting is set to “on”. To be confirmed. Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated once, the screen moves to the menu screen as shown in FIG. In addition, when the OK button 137e is not operated and the effect button 136 is operated in a state where the setting of the “auto button mode” is “on”, the result of the setting of the “auto button mode” is not reflected. The menu screen may be displayed, or the result of setting the “auto button mode” may be reflected (confirmed) and then the menu screen may be displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 132 (h), when the down button 137b is operated once while the cursor CSL indicates “customize”, as shown in FIG. Instruct the mini-game.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 132 (i), when the OK button 137e is operated in a state where the cursor CSL indicates “mini game”, the mini game is started as shown in FIG. 34 (j). The Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a bancho character is displayed, the name of the mini-game “bancho wake-up game” is displayed, and below that, a mission of “breaking clothes with button hits” is displayed. Is displayed. In other words, in this mini-game, when the mission button 136 is repeatedly hit during the operation reception period of the production button 136 and the mission is achieved on the condition that the production button 136 has been operated a predetermined number of times, the dresser's clothes are broken. To indicate the mission completion.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 132 (k), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the button image 136a and the button reception time meter MT together with the long character, and displays “START” characters above it. The state in which the operation reception period of the effect button 136 in the mini game is started is shown. In this production example, as described above, although the “auto button mode” setting is set to “on” and set to full auto, in the mini game, the full auto setting is not effective, and the production button The automatic operation 136 is not performed. When the “auto button mode” setting is set to “on” and the long press auto is set, even if the effect button 136 is long pressed, the long press auto setting is not effective. Only the one manually operated is effective, and thereafter the production button 136 is not automatically operated. In this example, the change rate of the display mode of the button reception time meter MT is made different from the change rate of the display mode of the button reception time meter MT displayed in the mini game executed during the symbol variation display. For example, as in this production example, it is performed during the execution of the symbol variation display rather than the change speed of the display mode of the button reception time meter MT displayed in the mini game that can be started during the customer waiting demonstration display. The change rate of the display mode of the button reception time meter MT displayed in the mini game may be faster or slower. In addition, the change rate of the display mode of the button reception time meter MT displayed in the mini game that can be started during the customer waiting demonstration display, and the button reception time meter MT displayed in the mini game executed during the symbol variation display. The change speed of the display mode may be the same. Further, in this effect example, the display mode of the button image 136a displayed in the mini game executed during the execution of the symbol variation display, rather than the number of display modes of the button image 136a (for example, one type of the default display mode). (For example, the default display mode, the vibrating display mode, the rotating display mode, the vibration mode and the rotating display mode) may be larger or smaller. The number of display modes of the button image 136a displayed in the mini game that can be started during the customer waiting demonstration display, and the number of display modes of the button image 136a displayed in the mini game performed during the execution of the symbol variation display May be the same.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 132 (l) to (n), when the operation valid period elapses without any pressing operation of the effect button 136, as shown in FIG. The display mode does not change, indicating that the mission of breaking the dress of the watchmaster character has not been achieved. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 132 (o), “bancho awakening game” and “end” are displayed to notify that the mission has ended.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 132 (p), the decorative symbol display device 208 shifts to the menu screen.

  In this production example, the player may be able to select the mini-game execution. For example, in the customized menu screen that shifts from the menu screen, whether or not the mini-game can be executed is set. It may be possible to select the type of mini-game that can be executed.

  Also, it may be configured such that a customized effect is easily executed as a result of the mini game. For example, if the effect is such that an effect with a very low appearance rate is normally executed, the willingness to participate in the mini game May be improved.

  FIG. 133 and FIG. 134 are diagrams showing in a stepwise manner another example of the mini game effect executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses.

  FIG. 133 (A1) to FIG. 133 (A6) are the effects following FIG. 132 (i), and show that the mission is achieved as a result of the player operating the effect button 136 repeatedly. Note that FIGS. 133A1 to A2 are the same as FIGS. 132J to K, and thus description thereof is omitted.

  When the operation reception period of the effect button 136 in the mini game is started at the timing shown in FIG. 133 (A2), the effect button 136 is repeatedly hit by the player.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 133 (A3), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the number of star effect images corresponding to the number of operations of the effect button 136 is displayed. As shown in FIGS. 133 (A3) to (A5), the number of star effect images increases as the number of operations increases, and the number of star effect images approaches the number of operations to achieve the mission. As shown in FIG. 133 (A5), an effect image of a large star is displayed. After that, when the effect button 136 is repeatedly hit and the number of operations that the mission is achieved by the time the operation acceptance period elapses is reached, the decoration symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. You will be shown that your clothes have been broken, and you will be informed that the mission has been accomplished by displaying “Banchou Awakening” and “Today is in good condition”.

  133 (B1) to FIG. 13 (B6) are examples of the effects following FIG. 132 (i), in which the long press auto is enabled in the mini game. It shows how the mission was achieved as a result of the pseudo-hit operation. Note that FIG. 133 (B1) to FIG. 133 (B2) are the same as FIG. 132 (j) to FIG.

  When the operation reception period of the effect button 136 in the mini game is started at the timing shown in FIG. 133 (B2), the effect button 136 is long pressed by the player.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 133 (B3), in the decorative symbol display device 208, only one star effect image is displayed in response to the pressing operation of the effect button 136. However, the pseudo continuous hitting operation has not yet started. In the present embodiment, when the long press auto is enabled, when one press operation is desired, the long press of the effect button 136 is performed in order to prevent an erroneous operation due to the start of pseudo continuous hitting. When a predetermined time (for example, 500 ms) elapses from the start of the quake, the pseudo continuous hitting operation is started. In this case, one operation at the time when the long press is started is accepted. Therefore, compared with the operation state of the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 133 (A3), the number of operations of the effect button 136 is small, and the star effect image is also displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 133 (A3). It is less than the display. That is, the manner in which the display mode of the decorative symbol display device 208 changes is different depending on whether a normal continuous hitting operation by the player is performed or a pseudo repeated hitting operation by long press auto is performed. .

  When a predetermined time has elapsed after the long press of the effect button 136 is started and the pseudo continuous hit operation is started, as shown in FIGS. 133 (B4) to (B5), an operation by the pseudo operation is performed. As the number of times increases, the number of star effect images to be displayed also increases. When the number of operations to achieve the mission is approached, as shown in FIG. 133 (B5), the effect image of a large star is displayed. Thereafter, a pseudo continuous hitting operation is further performed with the effect button 136, and when the number of operations that the mission is achieved before the operation reception period elapses, the decoration symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. The clothes worn by the character are shown to be broken, and “Banchou Awakening” and “Today is in good condition” are displayed to inform that the mission has been accomplished.

  134 (C1) to FIG. 134 (C7) are effects following FIG. 132 (i) and show an example in which the long press auto is disabled in the mini game. It shows that the operation was not performed and as a result the mission was not achieved. Note that FIG. 133 (B1) to FIG. 133 (B2) are the same as FIG. 132 (j) to FIG.

  When the operation reception period of the effect button 136 in the mini game is started at the timing shown in FIG. 134 (C2), the effect button 136 is long pressed by the player.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 134 (C3), in the decorative symbol display device 208, only one star effect image is displayed in response to the pressing operation of the effect button 136.

  However, in this effect example, since the long press auto is disabled, the pseudo continuous hit operation is not started even if a predetermined time elapses after the long press of the effect button 136 is started. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 134 (C4), since the number of operations of the effect button 136 does not increase, the star effect image does not increase, and a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) since the effect button 136 was last operated. ), The number of displayed star effect images gradually decreases, and at the timing shown in FIG. 134 (C5), the star effect images are completely erased. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 134 (C6), when the operation acceptance period elapses, as shown in FIG. 134 (C7), the display mode of the watchdog character does not change, and the mission of breaking the watchdog character's clothes is It is shown that it was not achieved. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 134 (C7), “bancho awakening game” and “end” are displayed to notify that the mission has ended.

  FIG. 135 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. In FIG. 135, for an effect (including a mini game) that requires one operation of a button or a plurality of operations, a full auto (or long press auto) function is enabled, but an operation key unit 137 is used. With regard to effects (including mini-games) that require selection using, an example in which the function of full auto (or long press auto) is disabled is shown.

  FIG. 135 (A1) to FIG. 135 (A6) are examples of the effects subsequent to FIG. 132 (i), and show an example in which full auto is enabled in a mini game in which the effect button 136 is repeatedly hit. As a result of the pseudo continuous hit operation of the effect button 136, a state in which the mission is achieved is shown. 135 (A1) to 135 (A2) are the same as FIGS. 132 (j) to 132 (k), and thus description thereof is omitted.

  When the operation reception period of the effect button 136 in the mini game is started at the timing shown in FIG. 135 (A2), the full auto functions and the pseudo continuous hit operation is started.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 135 (A3), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the number of star effect images corresponding to the number of pseudo operations of the effect button 136 is displayed. As shown in FIG. 135 (A3) to FIG. 135 (A5), the star effect image increases as the number of operations by the pseudo operation increases, and the number of the star effect images increases. As shown in FIG. 135 (A5), an effect image of a large star is displayed. Thereafter, the pseudo operation of the effect button 136 is continuously performed, and when the number of operations at which the mission is achieved is reached before the operation reception period elapses, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. , The clothes worn by the Bancho character are shown to be broken, and the display of “Bancho Awakening” and “Today is in good condition” is displayed to inform that the mission has been achieved.

  FIG. 135 (B1) shows an effect subsequent to FIG. 130 (f) and shows another example of the mini game effect. That is, when the mini game is started, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 135 (B1) displays the title “Today's Fortune-telling-Draw Daikichi” at the top of the display area. A mini game whose mission is to select a treasure chest inside is started. In this mini game, each button of the operation key unit 137 is operated to move the cursor CSL, and the treasure chest to be opened is determined by operating the effect button 136. By operating a plurality of buttons, the mini game Since this is done, the full auto function is disabled. Therefore, after the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 135 (B1) is displayed, no change occurs in the display state unless any button is operated.

  On the other hand, full auto may be made to function even in such a mini game. For example, as shown in FIG. 135 (B1 ′), as soon as the mini game is started, the full auto is activated and the effect button 136 is activated. Is manipulated in a pseudo manner, and as shown in FIG. 135 (B2 ′), the upper left treasure box is automatically selected. That is, in the mini game in which the treasure chest is selected by the buttons of the operation key unit 137 and the treasure chest to be opened by the effect button 136 is determined as described above, when the full auto function is activated, the treasure chest that the cursor CSL indicates first. May be arbitrarily determined as a treasure chest to be opened, and the player's intention to operate may not be reflected at all.

  In the present embodiment, a mini-game for deriving a result that is not related to the result of the determination as to whether or not the game is in the standby state is performed. And / or at least one of the symbol variation display) may be executed in a mini game to be executed, or may be executed at any time regardless of the gaming state for the purpose of killing the player's time. .

  136 and 137 are diagrams showing step by step another example of the effect of the mini game executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. 136 and FIG. 137 show the state of the effect movable body 224 in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208. 136 and 137 show how the mini game is started during the big hit game. It should be noted that the mini game may be always started during the execution of the big hit game, or may not be started.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 136 (a), the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed, and a state of a big hit is shown. Also, the hold icon h21 of the first special figure 2, the hold icon h22 of the second special figure 2, the hold icon h23 of the third special figure 2, and the fourth special figure 2 representing the hold of the special figure 2 All the hold icons h24 are displayed in a default display mode. In addition, in this production example, the second hold number display of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 and the fourth symbol display of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 are not performed, but these displays may be performed. .

  FIG. 136 (b) shows a state in which the big hit game has started and the game has shifted to the first round. Specifically, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “big hit start” to notify that the big hit game has started, and the upper right of the display area indicates that it is the first round of the big hit game. “1R” is displayed, and “0GET” is displayed to indicate the current number of winning balls in the big hit. In addition, you may make it display the total number of winning prize balls from the first big hit to the end of the ream. In addition, the number of winning prize balls won (over winning) just before the variable winning slot 234 is closed when the number of winning balls in the variable winning slot 234 in one round becomes a predetermined number (for example, 10). The number of prize balls based on game balls may be included or may not be included. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 136 (b), a child panda character may appear and perform a comical action to entertain the player. In addition, when the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is a right-handed machine, a right-handed notification for instructing a right-handed hand may be performed.

  FIG. 136 (c) shows a state where the fifth round of the jackpot game is being performed. Specifically, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “5R” indicating the fifth round of the jackpot game and “735GET” indicating the number of winning prize balls on the upper right of the display area. ing. This number of winning balls is due to the fact that 49 game balls have been won in the variable winning opening 234 since the big hit. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 136 (c), the display “Mini game starts in the next round” is displayed, and the mini game is started in the next round (sixth round). I foresee that.

  FIG. 136 (d) shows a state in which the sixth round is started. In the specific period, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “6R” indicating the sixth round of the jackpot game and “750 GET” indicating the number of winning prize balls on the upper right of the display area. ing. This number of winning balls is due to the fact that 50 game balls have been won in the variable winning opening 234 since the big hit. Then, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 136 (d), a display “Mini game is about to start” is displayed, and it is predicted that the mini game will be started.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 136 (e) shows a state in which the mini game is started. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a chief character appears, a display indicating the outcome of the “1” of the dice and a display of “actual action UP when it appears” are performed, and the mini game is played. It is described that after the start, the effect button 136 is operated and when the outcome of the dice “1” is stopped and displayed, it is predicted that the effect movable body 224 is likely to operate. In addition, the number of winning balls displayed in the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 indicates “765 GET”, and display based on winning of 51 game balls in the variable winning opening 234 is performed. Yes. In addition, if the production movable body 224 operates during the execution of the big hit game, it is ensured that the reserved consecutive villa is generated. That is, it can be said that the operation of the effect movable body 224 during the big hit game is an example of a prefetch notice.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 136 (f), the decorative symbol display device 208 starts to display the variation of the dice symbol, and the button image 136a and the button reception time meter MT are displayed. Is displayed, and a state in which the operation reception period of the effect button 136 in the mini game is started is shown. The number of winning prize balls displayed in the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 indicates “780 GET”, and display based on winning of 52 game balls in the variable winning opening 234 is performed. Yes.

  Then, when the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 136 (g), as shown in FIG. 136 (h), the decoration symbol display device 208 has the result that the design of the dice is “3”. It is shown that the mission was stopped in the manner shown, and the mission was not achieved. The number of winning balls displayed at the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 136 (g) indicates “810 GET”, and the decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 136 (h). The number of winning prize balls displayed in the upper right of the display area 208 indicates “825 GET”.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 136 (i) enlarges and displays a display indicating the outcome of “3” derived as a result of the mini game, and that the mini game mission has not been achieved. The display of “sorry” to notify is performed. Therefore, in this effect example, the effect movable body 224 does not operate, and no notification is made as to whether or not the reserved consecutive resort is performed. In this production example, if the result of pre-reading results in a reserved consecutive resort, the mission may always be achieved in the mini game, and the production movable body 224 may be operated. The movable body 224 may not operate. In addition, when the mission is achieved, the effect movable body 224 may always operate or may not operate. Note that the number of winning prize balls displayed on the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 136 (i) indicates “840 GET”, and 56 game balls are awarded to the variable winning opening 234. Display based on.

  Thereafter, when the big hit game is finished, as shown in FIG. 136 (j), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “big hit end” to notify the player that the big hit game has ended. In the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, “16R” indicating the 16th round and “2400 GET” indicating 2400 winning prize balls are displayed. Yes.

  In the mini game of this production example, the game is performed by operating the production button 136 once. For example, the “bancho awakening game” shown in FIG. 34 is started and a privilege is given when the mission is achieved. (For example, the advance notice of the effect movable body 224) may be made.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 137, a description will be given of a situation where a mission is achieved in a mini game executed during the execution of a big hit game. Note that FIGS. 137 (a) to (d) are the same as FIGS. 136 (a) to (d), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  Thereafter, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 137 (e) shows a state in which the mini game is started. Specifically, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a chief character appears, a display indicating the outcome of the “1” of the dice and a display of “actual action UP when it appears” are performed, and the mini game is played. It is described that after the start, the effect button 136 is operated and when the outcome of the dice “1” is stopped and displayed, it is predicted that the effect movable body 224 is likely to operate. Here, the chief character is displayed in a manner in which clothes are broken, suggesting that the mission is likely to be accomplished. In addition, the number of winning balls displayed in the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 indicates “765 GET”, and display based on winning of 51 game balls in the variable winning opening 234 is performed. Yes.

Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 137 (f), the decorative symbol display device 208 starts to display the variation of the dice symbol, and the button image 136a and the button reception time meter MT are displayed. Is displayed, and a state in which the operation reception period of the effect button 136 in the mini game is started is shown. In this effect example, the button image 136a is displayed in a rotating and vibrating manner, and the effect button 136 also vibrates as the inside of the cover body rotates, for example. This suggests that the mission is likely to be accomplished. In addition, the number of winning balls displayed in the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 indicates “780 GET”, and display based on winning of 52 game balls in the variable winning opening 234 is performed. Yes.

  Then, when the player operates the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 137 (g), as shown in FIG. 137 (h), the decoration symbol display device 208 has a dice symbol “1”. It is indicated that the mission was achieved by stopping the display in the manner shown. Note that the number of winning prizes displayed at the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 137 (g) indicates “810 GET”, and the decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 137 (h). The number of winning prize balls displayed in the upper right of the display area 208 indicates “825 GET”.

  Then, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 137 (i) enlarges and displays a display indicating the outcome of “1” derived as a result of the mini game, and notifies that the mini game mission has been achieved. The message “Yet's done” is displayed. In addition, a display of “attention to arms” is displayed below, and it is predicted that there is a possibility that the effect movable body 224 may operate. Note that the number of winning prize balls displayed at the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 137 (i) indicates “840 GET”, and 56 game balls are won in the variable winning opening 234. Display based on.

  FIG. 137 (j) shows a state in which the seventh round is started. In the specific period, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “7R” indicating the seventh round of the big hit game and “900 GET” indicating the number of winning prize balls on the upper right of the display area. The display is based on the fact that 60 game balls have been won in the variable winning opening 234 after the big hit.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 137 (k), the forearm portion 224b of the effect movable body 224 operates, and the forearm portion 224b overlaps the decorative design display device 208. Correspondingly, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a large number of star effect images are displayed, and a display as if the operation of the effect movable body 224 affects the display in the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed. Yes. Note that the number of winning prize balls displayed in the upper right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 indicates “915 GET”, and display based on winning of 61 game balls in the variable winning opening 234 is performed. Yes.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 137 (l), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “holding villa confirmation” and informs that the symbol variation display that is a big hit is suspended. In other words, the pre-reading notice is performed by the operation of the effect movable body 224 and the display of “holding villa confirmation” in FIG. 137 (l).

  In this production example, it may be informed that the reserved consecutive resort is confirmed by the achievement of the mission.

  In the present embodiment, one or more of the plurality of types of mini games described above can be combined and executed.

  In the embodiment described so far, the buttons (operation means) used in the mission in the main effect may be different from the buttons (operation means) used in the mission in the mini game.

  Further, the result of the main effect and the result of the mini game may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, or may be displayed using other display means (for example, a display device dedicated to the mission). , Other production means (for example, movable means such as production movable body 224 and shielding device 246, sound output means such as speaker 120, light emitting means such as various lamps 418, game board lamp 532, game table frame lamp 542, etc. Other devices) may be used for notification.

  Further, the above-described mini game may be executed during the execution of one symbol variation display from the start to the end, or may be performed across a plurality of symbol variation displays.

  In addition, as in the mini game described above, when the mini game is started, it is preferable that the result is always notified, but it may function as a false notice. For example, in the case of a symbol variation display in which the number of suspensions of the variation display of the special figure is four, generally the variation time may be short. You may make it interrupt without notifying. According to such a configuration, it may be possible to liven up the effects of the game.

  Further, the above-described mini game may be configured to be interrupted or stopped when a predetermined condition is satisfied. For example, a sudden big hit (for example, a combination of a big hit decorative pattern is displayed without going through a reach effect). Mini-games when an error such as a door opening error or a magnetic detection error occurs, or when the RTC effect starts, the effect display being executed switches to a display such as a wipe, etc. May be interrupted. For example, if a mini-hit occurs suddenly during a mini-game and the mini-game is interrupted, the player suddenly becomes a big-hit during the period when he is looking forward to the results of the mini-game. There are cases where you can give. If the mini-game is interrupted when the RTC effect starts, it may be possible to entertain the link on the effect with other game machines by the RTC effect.

  Further, the display area in which the mini game is executed may be configured such that the position and size thereof change depending on the gaming state, the effect mode, and the stage.

  In addition, as an operation mode required in the above-described mini game, an appropriate operation mode such as a one-time operation, a continuous hitting operation, a long press operation, and a timing operation can be employed. Thereby, the result of a mini game may be able to be changed depending on the skill of the player and the willingness to participate in the game.

  Further, when the mini game is executed during the symbol variation display, the mini game may be started before reaching the reach. When reaching reach, there is a tendency to pay attention to the effect of the symbol variation display. Therefore, by starting a mini game before reach, the effect of effect before reach may be enhanced.

  In addition, the reward for accomplishing the mission in the above-described mini game is for notifying that the advance notice is performed, but the reward for achieving the mission in the mini game may be the advance notice or the prefetch notice. For example, the change notice or the prefetch notice may be performed as a result of the mini game performed during the execution of the symbol variation display, and the prefetch notice may be performed as a result of the mini game performed during the execution of the jackpot game.

  Hereinafter, other game machines (for example, ball game machines such as pachinko machines and spinning machine machines such as slot machines) that can be applied to the present invention will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 138 to 185. Note that the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 138 to 185 are used only in the description with reference to FIGS. 138 to 185 in principle. In the description using FIG. 185, priority is given to the reference numerals shown in FIG.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, it is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment from the front side (player side).

  As an external structure, the pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a door 108 with a ball storage tray, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 on the front surface.

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation sales shop.

  The main body 104 is referred to as an inner frame, and is a member that is provided inside the outer frame 102 and serves as a longitudinal rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space 114 inside. In addition, when the main body 104 is opened, an inner frame opening sensor (not shown) that detects the opening of the main body 104 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function, and is configured in a frame shape so that the inner side of the front frame door 106 can be opened and closed. Is a door member having an opening. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A game area 124 is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. Further, a front frame door opening sensor 109 that detects opening of the front frame door 106 when the front frame door 106 is opened is provided.

  The door 108 with a ball storage tray is a door member attached to the lower side of the main body 104 on the front surface of the pachinko machine 100 so as to have a lock function and be openable and closable. The ball storage tray-equipped door 108 is capable of storing a plurality of game balls (hereinafter simply referred to as “balls”), and an upper plate 126 provided with a passage for guiding the game balls to the launching device 110. A lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, a ball removal button 130 that discharges the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 to the lower plate 128 by the player's operation, A ball discharge lever 132 that discharges game balls stored in the lower plate 128 to a game ball collection container (common name, dollar box) by operation, and a game ball guided to the launching device 110 by operation of the player A ball launching handle 134 for launching into the game area 124 of 200, an effect button 136 as an example of an operation means for changing the effect mode of various effect devices 206 (see FIG. 140) by the player's operation, An effect button lamp 138 that is incorporated in the button 136 and emits the effect button 136, a ball lending operation button 140 that issues a ball lending instruction to a card unit (CR unit) installed in the amusement store, and a card unit A return operation button 142 for giving an instruction to return the player's balance, and a ball rental display unit (not shown) for displaying the player's balance and the state of the card unit. The effect button lamp 138 is composed of, for example, a full-color LED, and can emit light in many colors. In the present embodiment, the effect button lamp 138 is an example of a light emitting unit that can emit light from the inside of the operation unit. Further, an operation key unit 137 as an example of the operation means is also provided. In the present embodiment, the effect button 136 may be referred to as a first operation means, and each button constituting the operation key unit 137 may be referred to as a second operation means. A specific configuration of the operation key unit 137 will be described later. Further, a lower plate full tank sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower plate 128 is filled with game balls is provided.

  The launching device 110 is attached to the lower side of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. .

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104.

  FIG. 139 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 140 viewed from the back side.

  The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a lower part of the ball tank 150 that is positioned below the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 is provided for guiding a ball passing through the formed communication hole and dropping to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the back surface.

  The payout device 152 is formed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor. The sprocket that temporarily passes through the tank rail 154 and flows down into the payout device 152 is temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the temporarily accumulated game balls are sent one by one downward to the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket. When the game ball is passing, either a high signal or a low signal is passed. Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the dispensing control unit 600. The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor passes through a ball rail (not shown) and reaches the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100. The pachinko machine 100 has this configuration. To pay out the ball to the player.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the figure, a main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control section 300 that performs control processing for the entire game, and control related to effects based on the processing information generated by the main control section 300 The first sub-board case 162 that houses the first sub-board 160 that constitutes the first sub-control unit 400 that performs processing, and the second sub-board that performs control processing related to effects based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400. An error release switch that constitutes a second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the control unit 500, a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to the payout of game balls, and that releases an error by the operation of a game clerk Discharge board case 172 storing the payout board 170 having 168, launch base constituting the launch control unit 630 that performs control processing relating to the launch of the game ball A launch board case 176 for storing 174, a power supply control unit 660 for supplying power to various electric game machines, and a power switch 178 for turning on / off the power by an operation of a game store clerk and a RAM clear by being operated when the power is turned on. A power supply board case 184 that houses a power supply board 182 that includes a RAM clear switch 180 that outputs a signal to the main control unit 300, and a CR interface unit 186 that transmits and receives signals between the payout control unit 600 and the card unit. ing.

  FIG. 140 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. In the game board 200, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined.

  An effect device 206 is disposed in the approximate center of the game area 124. The effect device 206 is provided with a decorative symbol display device 208 substantially in the center, and around the normal symbol display device 210, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, and the ordinary device. A symbol holding lamp 216, a first special symbol holding lamp 218, a second special symbol holding lamp 220, and a high-probability medium lamp 222 are provided. Hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as “general symbol” and the special symbol may be referred to as “special symbol”. The effect device 206 performs the effect by operating the effect movable body 224, and details thereof will be described later.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for performing various displays used for decorative symbols and effects. In this embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 is constituted by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas, a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a and the middle symbol display area 208b. The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Furthermore, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, although the liquid crystal display device is employ | adopted as the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, it is not a liquid crystal display device, What is necessary is just the structure which can display various effects and various game information, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted. In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 functions as an effect unit capable of executing a plurality of types of effects. In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 functions as a display unit capable of executing a plurality of types of display.

  The general map display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general map, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in this embodiment. The first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are display devices for displaying a special figure, and are configured by 7 segment LEDs in this embodiment. In the present embodiment, the first special symbol display device 212 and the second special symbol display device 214 function as symbol display means capable of executing symbol variation display.

  The multi-purpose hold lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of general-purpose variable games (details will be described later) that are on hold. In this embodiment, the general-purpose variable games are reserved up to a predetermined number (for example, two). It is possible to do. The first special figure hold lamp 218 and the second special figure hold lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of special figure variable games (details will be described later) that are being held. In this embodiment, the special figure variable games are displayed. It is possible to hold up to a predetermined number (for example, four). The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur or a high probability state, and the gaming state is changed from a low probability state in which a big hit is unlikely to occur. Turns on when switching to the probability state, and turns off when switching from the high probability state to the low probability state.

  In addition, there are predetermined ball entrances, for example, a general prize opening 226, a general start port 228, a first special view start port 230, a second special view start port 232, around the effect device 206. A variable winning opening 234 is provided.

  In this embodiment, a plurality of general winning holes 226 are arranged on the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detecting sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning holes 226 (in the general winning holes 226). In the case of winning, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the upper plate 126. With these configurations, the player can pay out the winning balls to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. In this embodiment, a ball to be paid out to a player as a consideration for winning is sometimes referred to as a “prize ball”, and a ball lent to a player is sometimes referred to as “rental ball”. They are called “balls (game balls)”.

  The normal start port 228 is constituted by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed a predetermined area of the game area 124. In this embodiment, the left side of the game board 200 is used. One is arranged. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the usual starting port 228 is not discharged to the amusement island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has passed through the general map starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a general map variable game by the general map display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one first special figure starting port 230 is disposed at the center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the first special figure starting port 230, a payout device 152, which will be described later, is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls is used as a prize ball for the upper plate 126. The special figure changing game by the first special figure display device 212 is started. The ball that has entered the first special figure starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The second special figure starting port 232 is called an electric tulip (electric Chu). In the present embodiment, only one second special figure starting port 232 is disposed directly below the first special figure starting port 230. The second special figure starting port 232 includes a wing member 232a that can be opened and closed to the left and right. When the wing member 232a is closed, it is impossible to enter a ball. When 210 hits and stops and displays the symbol, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the second special figure starting port 232, the payout device 152 is driven and a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. At the same time, the special figure variation game by the second special figure display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the second special figure starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The variable winning opening 234 is called a large winning opening or an attacker, and in the present embodiment, only one variable winning opening 234 is disposed below the center of the game board 200. This variable winning opening 234 includes a door member 234a that can be opened and closed. When the door member 234a is closed, it is impossible to enter a ball, and the special figure display device stops the big hit symbol when the special figure variable game is won. When displayed, the door member 234a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval (for example, an opening time of 29 seconds and a closing time of 1.5 seconds) and at a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times). When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, 15 balls) of balls to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The ball that entered the variable winning opening 234 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  Further, a plurality of disc-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and start openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, After guiding a ball that has not won any prize opening or start opening to the back side of the pachinko machine 100, an out opening is provided for discharging to the game island side.

  This pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 by the player to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with strength according to the operation amount of the player's operation handle, and launches 146 Further, the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are passed by the launcher 148 and driven into the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the advancing direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and a winning opening (general winning opening 226, variable winning opening 234) or start opening (Outside the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232), winning out any winning port or starting port, or just passing through the normal start port 228, the out port 240 To reach.

<Directing device 206>
Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  On the front side of the effect device 206, a warp device 242 and a stage 244 are arranged in an area where the game ball can roll, and an effect movable body 224 is arranged in an area where the game ball cannot roll. . On the back side of the effect device 206, a decorative symbol display device 208, an effect movable body 225, and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter may be referred to as a door) are disposed. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect movable body 225, and the shielding device 246 are located behind the warp device 242, the stage 244, and the effect movable body 224.

  The warp device 242 discharges the game balls that have entered the warp inlet 242a provided at the upper left of the effect device 206 to the stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b. The stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b, a ball carried on by a nail of the game board 200, or the like, and the passed ball is a first special figure starting port 230 at the center of the stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate entry into the golf course.

  In this embodiment, the effect movable body 224 includes an upper arm 224a and a forearm 224b imitating the upper arm and forearm of a human right arm, and an upper arm motor and an elbow (not shown) that rotate the upper arm 224a to the position of the shoulder. A forearm motor (not shown) that rotates the forearm 224b at a position is provided. The effect movable body 224 moves in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 by the upper arm motor and the forearm motor.

  The effect movable body 225 is formed in a circular shape imitating a family crest, is disposed on the back side of the game board 200, and can be moved in the vertical direction by a family crest motor (not shown). The effect movable body 225 can be displaced to a position where it is retracted above the decorative symbol display device 208 (retracted position) and a position where it overlaps on the front side of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 (advance position).

  The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-like left door 246a and right door 246b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right as the belt driven by the motor through the pulley moves. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding device 246 covers the inner end portions of the shielding device 246 so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, each inner end portion slightly overlaps the outer end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, respectively, for example, only a part of the decorative design so that the player can identify which decorative design the displayed decorative design is. Can be shielded. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b may be configured so that a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 behind the lattice hole can be visually recognized, or the shoji part of the lattice hole is closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be made vaguely visible to the player, or the shoji part of the holes in the lattice is completely blocked (shielded), and the decorative symbol display device 208 behind is made completely invisible. Also good.

<Control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

  The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly classified into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. A first sub-control unit 400 that controls the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on a command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and a command transmitted by the main control unit 300 The payout control unit 600 that mainly controls the game ball payout, the launch control unit 630 that controls the launch of the game ball, and the power supply control unit 660 that controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100 are configured. Yes.

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, and temporary data. RAM 308 for storing data, I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, counter timer 312 for measuring time and frequency, and WDT 314 for monitoring abnormalities in program processing are mounted. . Note that another storage device may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  In addition, the basic circuit 302 includes a counter circuit 318 used as a hardware random number counter that changes a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 each time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received (this circuit includes two circuits). And a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor that detects a game ball passing through each start port, winning port, variable winning port, front frame door opening sensor, and inner frame opening sensor. And a sensor circuit 322 for receiving signals output from various sensors 320 including a lower plate full sensor and outputting a comparison result with an amplification result or a reference voltage to the counter circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302, and a predetermined symbol display device For example, a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214, a predetermined symbol display device, A drive circuit 326 for performing display control of the general-purpose display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example, a general-purpose reservation lamp 216, a first special figure reservation lamp 218, a second special figure reservation lamp 220, a high-probability medium) A drive circuit 330 for performing display control of the lamp 222 and the like, and various solenoids 332 for opening and closing a predetermined movable member, for example, a blade member 232a of the second special figure starting port 232, a door member 234a of the variable winning port 234, and the like. A drive circuit 334 for controlling the above is connected.

  When the ball detection sensor 320 detects that a ball has won the first special figure starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the ball has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318. The random value generation circuit 318 that has received this signal latches the value of the counter corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230 at that timing, and uses the latched value as a built-in counter corresponding to the first special figure starting port 230. Store in the value storage register. Similarly, when the random value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that a ball has won at the second special figure starting port 232, the random number generation circuit 318 calculates the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232. The latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the second special figure starting port 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 336. The game information (for example, game state) of the machine 100 is output.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 is a voltage value of the power source. Is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When the activation signal is input, game control is started (main control unit main processing described later is started).

  The main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. With this configuration, the first control unit 300 Communication with the sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is enabled. Here, information communication between the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400, and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 sends commands to the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. The first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 are configured not to transmit signals such as commands to the main control unit 300. The main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 may be configured by bidirectional communication, and the main control unit 300 and the payout control unit 600 may be configured by bidirectional communication.

<Sub control unit>
Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 mainly based on commands transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404 and ROM 406 for storing control programs and various effects data, RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and for measuring time, frequency, etc. The counter timer 412 is mounted. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs.

  The basic circuit 402 also controls a sound source IC 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier) and various lamps 418 (for example, an effect button lamp 138 provided inside the effect button 136). A drive circuit 420, a drive circuit 432 for controlling the drive of the shielding device 246, a shielding device sensor 430 for detecting the current position of the shielding device 246, and various buttons included in the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 (for details) An operation unit sensor 426 that detects the pressing of (described later), a sensor circuit 428 that outputs detection signals from the shielding device sensor 430 and the operation unit sensor 426 to the basic circuit 402, and a signal from the CPU 404 that is stored in the ROM 406. Read image data, etc., and use VRAM 436 work area to generate display image And VDP434 for displaying an image on the decorative pattern display device 208 and (Video Display Processor), is connected to.

  The first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit (not shown) that monitors the voltage value of the power supplied from the power control unit 660 to the first sub-control unit 400. This voltage monitoring circuit Outputs a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped to the basic circuit 402 when the voltage value of the power supply is less than a predetermined value (9 v in this embodiment).

  The first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit, not shown) that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When an activation signal is input from the output circuit, game control is started (first sub-control unit main process described later is started).

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time and frequency 512 is installed. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock, and controls a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, and an image display A ROM 506 storing data and the like is provided.

  The basic circuit 502 includes a drive circuit 516 for controlling the driving of the effect movable bodies 224 and 225, an effect movable body sensor 424 for detecting the current positions of the effect movable bodies 224 and 225, and an effect movable body sensor 424. Sensor circuit 518 for outputting a detection signal from the basic circuit 502, a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532, and a game table for controlling the game table frame lamp 542 A frame lamp drive circuit 540 and a serial communication control circuit 520 that performs lighting control by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game stand frame drive circuit 540 are connected.

<Discharge control unit, launch control unit, power supply control unit>
Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described.

  The payout control unit 600 controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 mainly based on a command signal or the like transmitted from the main control unit 300, and a prize ball or a rental ball based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604 It is detected whether or not the payout has been completed, and communication with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 is performed via the interface unit 606.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 to permit or stop the launch, or a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134 to operate the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Control of the launch motor 632 that drives the launcher 146 and launcher 148, and control of the ball feeder 634 that supplies the launcher 110 with a ball from the upper plate 126 based on a control signal that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount. I do.

  The power control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a DC voltage, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the payout device 152, etc. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, a power supply circuit) for supplying power to a predetermined part (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the second sub control unit 500, and the launch control unit are supplied from the payout control unit 600. Although a predetermined voltage is supplied to 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power supply path.

<Type of design>
142 (a) to 142 (c), the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the normal symbol display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of special maps and common maps to be explained

  FIG. 4A shows an example of the stop symbol form of the special figure. The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the first special figure start port 230, and the ball has entered the second special figure start port 232 The special figure 2 variable game is started on the condition that the second start port sensor has detected. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the first special symbol display device 212 performs “variable display of special figure 1” by repeating all lighting of seven segments and lighting of one central segment. In addition, when the special figure 2 variable game is started, the second special symbol display device 214 displays “fluctuation display of special figure 2” which repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment. Do. These “variation display of special figure 1” and “variation display of special figure 2” correspond to an example of the symbol fluctuation display according to the present invention. Then, when the variation time determined before the variation start of the special figure 1 (corresponding to the variation time referred to in the present invention) elapses, the first special symbol display device 212 stops and displays the special symbol form of the special figure 1. When the variation time determined before the start of variation 2 (this also corresponds to the variation time according to the present invention) has elapsed, the second special symbol display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special diagram 2. Therefore, from the start of “figure display of special figure 1” until the stop symbol form of special figure 1 is stopped, or after the start of “fluctuation display of special figure 2”, the stop symbol form of special figure 2 is displayed. Until stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol variation stop display referred to in the present invention, hereinafter, after the “variable display of special figure 1 or 2” is started, the stop symbol form of special figure 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed. The series of displays up to is referred to as symbol variation stop display. As will be described later, the symbol variation stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times. FIG. 10A shows 10 types of special drawings from “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure J” as stop symbol forms in the symbol variation stop display, and the white portions in the figure are turned off. The location of the segment to be displayed is shown, and the black portion indicates the location of the segment to be lit.

  “Special figure A” is a 15 round (15R) special jackpot symbol, and “Special figure B” is a 15R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, as will be described later, the determination as to whether or not the big hit in the special figure variable game is made by lottery of hardware random numbers, and the decision as to whether or not it is a special big hit is made by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the jackpot and the special jackpot is the difference in whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (special jackpot) or low (jackpot) in the next special figure variation game. Hereinafter, a state having a high probability of winning the jackpot is referred to as a special figure high probability state, and a state having a low probability is referred to as a special figure low probability state. In addition, after the 15R special jackpot game ends and after the 15R jackpot game ends, both shift to the time-saving state. Although the time reduction will be described in detail later, the state that shifts to the time reduction state is referred to as a normal high probability state, and the state that does not shift to the time reduction state is referred to as a normal low probability state. “Special figure A”, which is a 15R special jackpot symbol, is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, and “Special figure B”, which is a 15R jackpot symbol, is a special figure low probability ordinary figure high probability state. These “special chart A” and “special chart B” are symbols that give a relatively large profit amount to the player.

  “Special figure C” is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden probability change, and is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state. That is, “Special Figure C” is 2R compared to “Special Figure A” which is 15R. “Special figure D” is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden time reduction, and is a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state. That is, “Special Figure D” is 2R compared to “Special Figure B” which is 15R.

  “Special figure E” is a 2R jackpot symbol called hidden probability change, and is a special figure high probability normal figure low probability state. "Special figure F" is a 2R jackpot symbol suddenly called normal, and is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. These “special drawing E” and “special drawing F” are both 2R and are in a state in which they do not shift to the time-saving state.

  “Special figure G” is the first small hit symbol, and “Special figure H” is the second small hit symbol, both of which are in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. The small hit here corresponds to the same as the big hit with no short time at 2R. That is, “Special Figure G” and “Special Figure H” are in the same state as “Special Figure F”, but the effects displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 are different in both cases. By providing “G”, “Special Figure H”, and “Special Figure F”, the interest of the game is enhanced.

  In addition, “Special Figure I” is a first off symbol, and “Special Figure J” is a second off symbol, and the profit amount given to the player is a relatively small profit amount.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, symbols other than “Special Illustration A” are prepared as 15R special jackpot symbols, and the same applies to other symbols such as 15R jackpot symbols.

  FIG. 142 (b) shows an example of a decorative design. There are 10 types of decoration patterns of the present embodiment: “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 10”. The first start port sensor detects that a ball has won the first special figure start port 230 or the second special view start port 232, that is, the ball has entered the first special view start port 230; or On the condition that the second start port sensor detects that a ball has entered the second special symbol start port 232, the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display of the decorative symbol display device 208 are displayed. Displayed in the order of “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... “Decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →... “Decoration display of decorative pattern” is performed. When the 15R jackpot of “special drawing B” is notified, a symbol combination (for example, “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration”) corresponding to the 15R jackpot corresponding to the 15R jackpot in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. 1 ”or“ decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 2 ”). When notifying the 15R special jackpot of “special drawing A”, a combination of three symbols of the same odd number of decorative symbols (for example, “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3” or “decoration 7—decoration 7—decoration 7”). Etc.) is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, the 2R big hit called “hidden probability change” of “special drawing E”, the 2R big hit called “special drawing F” suddenly normal, or the first small hit of “special drawing G”, “special drawing H” When notifying the second small hit, “decoration 1-decoration 2—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed. Furthermore, in order to notify 2R jackpot called “sudden probability change” of “special drawing C” or 2R jackpot called “sudden time reduction of“ special drawing D ”,“ decoration 1-decoration 3—decoration 5 ”is set. Stop display.

  On the other hand, when notifying the first deviation of “Special Figure I” and the second deviation of “Special Figure J”, the symbol combination other than the symbol combination shown in FIG. 5B is stopped in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. indicate.

  FIG. 142 (c) shows an example of a usual stop display symbol. In the present embodiment, there are two types of stoppage display modes for ordinary maps, “general diagram A” which is a winning symbol and “general symbol B” which is a missed symbol. Based on the fact that the above-mentioned gate sensor has detected that a sphere has passed through the general-purpose start opening 228, the normal symbol display device 210 repeats all lighting of the seven segments and lighting of the central one segment. Perform a “normal change display”. Then, when notifying the winning of the common figure variable game, the “normal figure A” is stopped and displayed, and when notifying the usual figure variable game, the “normal figure B” is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 6C, the white portions in the figure indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on.

<Main control unit main processing>
Next, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit.

  As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal has been input resets by a reset interrupt and executes a main control unit main process shown in FIG. 143 in accordance with a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

  In step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In this initial setting 1, setting of a stack initial value (temporary setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, setting of an interrupt mask, initial setting of the I / O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308, to the WDT 314 The operation is permitted and the initial value is set. In the present embodiment, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in WDT 314 as an initial value.

  In step S103, the value of the counter of WDT 314 is cleared and time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted.

  In step S105, whether or not the low voltage signal is ON, that is, the voltage value of the power source that the voltage monitoring circuit 338 supplies from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value (in this embodiment, 9v), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power supply is cut off), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect that the power supply is cut off), The process proceeds to S107. Even when the predetermined value (9 V) is not yet reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In this initial setting 2, a process for setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312 and a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, A process of outputting a clear signal from the output port to the first sub control unit 400, a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like are performed.

  In step S109, it is determined whether or not the state before the power interruption (before power interruption) is restored, and the state before the power interruption is not restored (when the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is set to the initial state). ) Proceeds to an initialization process (step S113).

  Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when a store clerk or the like of a game store operates a RAM clear switch 180 provided on a power supply board is turned on (indicates that there has been an operation). That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear is necessary. If the RAM clear signal is on (when the RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is OFF (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the power status information is information indicating suspend. It is determined whether or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to an initial state. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, a predetermined area of the RAM 308 is set. A checksum is calculated by adding all the 1-byte data stored in (for example, all areas) to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0, and the calculated checksum results in a specific value (for example, 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal). When the checksum result is a specific value (eg, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power interruption, and the checksum result is a specific value. If the value is other than 0 (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state. Similarly, when the power status information indicates information other than “suspend”, the process proceeds to step S113.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read out and reset to the stack pointer (this setting). In addition, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. That is, the processing is resumed from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. The RAM 308 mounted on the basic circuit 302 in the main control unit 300 is provided with a transmission information storage area. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been restored to the state at the time of power-off, and is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300 described later.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting to the stack pointer (this setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and in the same way as the power recovery command, in step S233 in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, 1 is transmitted to the sub-control unit 400.

  In step S115, after setting for prohibition of interruption, a basic random number initial value update process is performed. In this basic random number initial value update process, two initial value generation random number counters for generating the initial values of the ordinary figure winning random number counter and the special figure random value counter, the ordinary figure timer random number value, and the special figure timer, respectively. Two random number counters for generating each random value are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a normal timer random number value is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal timer random value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are similarly updated. Note that the initial value generation random number counter is also updated in step S207 described later.

  The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during a timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, about once every 2 ms), and the main control unit timer interrupt is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. The process is started at a predetermined cycle.

  In step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving each register value of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

  In step S203, the WDT is periodically updated (so that the count value of the WDT 314 exceeds the initial setting value (32.8 ms in the present embodiment) and no WDT interruption occurs (so as not to detect a processing abnormality). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every about 2 ms, which is the period of the main control unit timer interrupt.

  In step S205, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door open sensor, inner frame open sensor, lower pan full sensor, and various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310. The input is monitored for the presence or absence of a detection signal, and stored in a signal state storage area provided for each of the various sensors 320 in the RAM 308. If the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor is described as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and stored in the RAM 308 in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each sphere detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) ) Is read from the current detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area described above. To remember. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in step S205, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly started at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes one ball detection sensor is started several times. For this reason, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, in step S205 described above, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before, a previous detection signal, and a current detection signal. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection of the sphere detection sensor and noise, it is determined that there is a prize when the detection signal is stored twice continuously after no detection signal. The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 141 stores winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous detection signal, that there is a previous detection signal, and that there is a current detection signal). In this step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor is predetermined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal, current detection signal present). In the case of the general winning port 226, the variable winning port 234, the first special figure starting port 230, and the second special figure starting port 232, or the ordinary drawing starting port 228. Is determined to have passed. In other words, it is determined that a prize has been awarded to the winning ports 226 and 234 and the starting ports 230, 232, and 228. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three matches with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the general winning opening sensor for detecting the winning at the general winning opening 226, there is a winning at the general winning opening 226. If the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winnings are performed. The process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with winning the prize to the mouth 226. Note that the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before the previous time, no previous detection signal, and no current detection signal). After it is determined that there has been a single win, it is not determined that there has been a win until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the winning determination clear pattern information in each ball detection sensor, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In step S207 and step S209, basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing are performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the value of the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S115 is updated, and then the normal winning random number value used in the main control unit 300, Two random number counters for generating the special figure 1 random value and the special figure 2 random value are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a random number value for a normal winning number is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has made one round as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired and stored in the storage area of the random number counter. set. For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a regular winning random number that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and a result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal number, The initial value set this time is stored in the above-described initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating the winning random number value has made one round next time, in addition to setting it in the random number counter for generating the winning random value Keep it. Further, apart from the above-described initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal signal has made one round next, it is determined that the random number counter for generating the special figure random number has made one round. An initial value storage area is provided in the RAM 308. In the present embodiment, the counter for acquiring the random number value of FIG. 1 and the counter for acquiring the random value of FIG. 2 are separately provided, but the same counter may be used.

  In step S211, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number update process, a random number counter for generating an effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step S213, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, the normal symbol display symbol update timer for timing the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped on the normal symbol display device 210, and the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped to be displayed on the first special symbol display device 212 are timed. Special symbol 1 display symbol update timer for performing, special symbol 2 display symbol update timer for measuring the time for the symbol to be changed and stopped on the second special symbol display device 214, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time Various timers including a timer for measuring a predetermined closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like are updated.

  In step S215, winning prize counter update processing is performed. In this winning opening counter updating process, when winning holes 226, 234 and starting holes 230, 232, 228 are won, the RAM 308 stores the winning ball number storage area provided for each winning hole or for each starting hole. The value is read out, 1 is added, and the original prize ball number storage area is set.

  In step S217, a winning acceptance process is performed. In this winning acceptance process, it is determined whether or not there has been a winning at the first special figure starting port 230, the second special figure starting port 232, the ordinary drawing starting port 228, and the variable winning port 234. Here, the determination is made using the determination result of whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information in step S203. If the first special figure starting port 230 is won and if the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is selected from the winning counter value storage register of the random number generation circuit 318. The value is acquired as a random value, and the value is acquired as a special figure 1 random number value from the random number counter for generating the special figure 1 random value and stored in the corresponding random value storage area. When a winning is made at the second special figure starting port 232 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is received from the winning counter value storage register of the random value generation circuit 318. Obtained as a random number value, obtains a value from the random number counter for generating the special figure 2 random value as a special figure 2 random value, and stores it in the corresponding random value storage area. If there is a win at the general figure starting port 228 and the corresponding reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is obtained as a normal figure winning random value from the random number counter for generating the normal figure winning random number value. Store in the corresponding random value storage area. When there is a winning at the variable winning opening 234, information indicating that a ball has entered the variable winning opening 234 is stored in the winning storage area for the variable winning opening.

  In step S219, a payout request number transmission process is performed. Note that the output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of, for example, 1 byte, strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bit 6 Power-on information (if turned on, indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4-5 indicate the current processing type for encryption (0-3), and bits 0-3 indicate encryption The number of payout requests after processing is shown.

  In step S221, a normal state update process is performed. This normal state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal state. For example, in the normal state update process in the middle of the normal symbol display (the above-described general symbol display symbol update timer value is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off drive control. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 performs a usual fluctuation display (ordinary figure fluctuation game).

  Also, in the normal state update process at the timing when the normal symbol change display time has elapsed (the timing at which the value of the general symbol display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), if the hit flag is on, the hit symbol is displayed. The normal symbol display device 210 is controlled so that the 7-segment LED constituting the normal symbol display device 210 is turned on / off, and when the hit flag is off, the normal symbol display device 210 is configured to be in the off symbol display mode. 7 segment LED on / off drive control is performed. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the normal state update process. Here, the above-described lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the normal symbol display device 210 determines one of the winning symbols (the general symbol A shown in FIG. 142 (c)) and the off symbol (the universal symbol B shown in FIG. 142 (c)). Display. Thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 msec). With this setting, the symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the normal game.

  Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is a hit, the usual figure hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the usual figure hit flag is on, in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the usual figure stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), The normal operation is set in the setting area, and the blade member 232a is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the blade member 232a of the second special figure starting port 232 for a predetermined opening period (for example, 2 seconds). And a signal indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  In the usual state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the blade member has a predetermined closing period (for example, 500 milliseconds). A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the opening / closing drive solenoid 332, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the normal state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the non-operating state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Furthermore, if the result of the usual figure fluctuation game is out, the usual figure out flag is turned on as will be described later. When the off-normal flag is on, the normal state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing at which the normal stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0) In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal operation inactive is set. In the general state update process in the case where the general map is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S223.

  In step S223, a general drawing related lottery process is performed. In this general map-related lottery process, the open / close control of the general map variable game and the second special map start port 232 is not performed (the state of the general map is not in operation), and the pending general map variable game is not held. When the number is 1 or more, it is decided whether to win or not to win the result of the variable figure game by random lottery based on the random number value stored in the random number value storage area. When the winning judgment is made and the winning is made, the winning flag provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON. If unsuccessful, turn off the winning flag. Regardless of the result of the hit determination, next, the value of the random number counter for generating the normal figure timer random value is acquired as the normal figure timer random number value, and a plurality of fluctuation times are obtained based on the acquired general figure timer random number value. One time is selected for variably displaying the normal map on the general map display device 210, and this variable display time is stored as a normal map variable display time in a general map variable time storage area provided in the RAM 308. In addition, the number of pending general figure variable games is stored in the usual figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending custom figure variable games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in the usual figure reservation number storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (the special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In the special figure 2 state update process, one of the following eight processes is performed in accordance with the state of the special figure 2. For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the above-mentioned special figure 2 display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 is turned on. Performs lighting / extinguishing drive control that repeatedly turns off. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 performs the variable display of the special figure 2 (special figure 2 variable game).

  In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the process ends.

  Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 includes a 15R big hit flag, a 2R big hit flag, a first small hit flag, a second small hit flag, a first off flag, a second off flag, a special figure probability variation flag, and a normal figure. A flag for each probability variation flag is prepared. In the special figure 2 state update process starting at the timing when the special figure 2 fluctuation display time has elapsed (the timing when the special figure 2 display symbol update timer value has changed from 1 to 0), the 15R big hit flag is on, and the special figure probability fluctuation When the flag is also on and the normal figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure A, 15R jackpot flag shown in FIG. 142 (a) is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, and the common figure probability fluctuation flag is on. When the special figure B, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, and the general figure probability fluctuation flag is also on, the special figure C, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, When the probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure D, 2R jackpot flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, and when the common figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure E, 2R jackpot flag is on, special chart The probability flag is off, Special figure F when figure probability fluctuation flag is off, special figure G when first small hit flag is on, special figure H when first small hit flag is on, special figure H, first off flag is on In this case, the 7-segment LED constituting the second special symbol display device 214 is controlled to be turned on / off so that the special figure I is turned on when the special figure I is turned on and the second off-flag is turned on. In the setting area of the RAM 308, a setting indicating that the special figure 2 stop display is in progress is made. By performing this control, the second special symbol display device 214 has a 15R special jackpot symbol (special symbol A), a 15R jackpot symbol (special symbol B), a sudden probability variation symbol (special symbol C), and a sudden time-short symbol symbol (special symbol). D), hidden probability variation (special E), suddenly normal (special F), first small hit (special G), second small hit (special H), first off symbol (special) Any one of the symbols I) and the second off-set symbol (special symbol J) is confirmed and displayed. After that, information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 milliseconds). With this setting, the specially displayed special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. In addition, if the time reduction number stored in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the time reduction number, and if the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0, the special figure probability is changing. If not (details will be described later), the time reduction flag is turned off. Further, the hourly flag is also turned off during the big hit game (in the special game state).

  Further, the special transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the design for stopping the variable display is shown in FIG. The special figure 2 identification information indicating the presence is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data, which will be described later, and the processing is terminated.

  If the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on as will be described later. When the jackpot flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the RAM 308 In the setting area, the special figure 2 is in operation and waits for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image for notifying the player that the big win by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started is displayed. Therefore, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined release period (for example, 29 seconds) Alternatively, the door member 234a is opened to the solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member 234a of the variable prize opening 234 until a winning of a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected at the variable prize opening 234. In addition to outputting a signal to be held at the same time, information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening release setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member 234a in a closed state is output to a solenoid (332) for opening and closing the door member 234a of the variable prize opening 234, and a closing period is stored in a storage area of a door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Set the information indicating. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In addition, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the door member opening / closing control is repeated a predetermined number of times (15 rounds or 2 rounds in this embodiment) and finished, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds) In other words, the effect standby period is stored in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308 in order to set to wait for a period during which an image for informing the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is to be ended is displayed. Set the information indicating. Also, if the normal probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of the big hit game, the time reduction number 100 is set in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308, and the time reduction flag provided in the RAM 308 is set. Turn on. If the usual time probability variation flag is set to OFF, the time reduction number is not set in the time reduction number storage unit, and the time reduction flag is not turned ON. The short time here means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variable game to the start of the next big hit. If the short time flag is set to ON at this time, it is a normal high probability state. There is a higher probability of hitting a general-purpose variable game in the high-probability state than in the low-probability state. In addition, the fluctuation time of the normal figure variable game and the fluctuation time of the special figure variable game are shorter in the normal figure high probability state than in the normal figure low probability state. Further, in the normal high probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the second special start port 232 tends to be longer than in the normal low probability state. In addition, the pair of blade members 232a are more likely to open in the normal high probability state than in the normal low probability state. In addition, as described above, the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Therefore, the normal low probability state is maintained during the big hit game. This is because if the game is in a high probability state during a big hit game, a large number of games will be placed in the second special figure starting port 232 until a predetermined number of game balls are entered during the big win game. There is a problem that a ball enters and the number of game balls that can be acquired during a big hit increases, resulting in an increase in euphoria. This is to solve this problem.

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (when the production standby time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not activated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set medium. Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of the way, the off flag is turned on as will be described later. In the case where the miss flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 inactive is set. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S227.

  Subsequently, special figure state update processing (special figure 1 state update process) for special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In the special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of the special figure 1. Each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, a special figure related lottery process for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed. Also here, first, a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 2 (a special drawing 2 related lottery process) is performed (step S229), and then a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 1 (a special drawing 1 related lottery process). ) Is performed (step S231). Also for these special drawing related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the special figure 2 variable game start condition and the special figure 1 fluctuation Even if the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, since the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. Further, the notification of the result of the jackpot determination of the special figure variable game by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the second special figure starting port 232 is notified. However, it is performed in preference to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the first special figure starting port 230.

  In step S233, command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, for example, bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bits 11 to 14 are Command type (In this embodiment, command types such as basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command are specified. Possible information), bits 0 to 10 are composed of command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on and off in the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start command, the command data includes information such as the value of the 15R jackpot flag or 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the timer number selected in the special figure related lottery process, and the like. In the case of the symbol variation stop command, the value of the 15R jackpot flag, the 2R jackpot flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, and the like are included. In the case of a jackpot round number designation command, the value of the special variation probability flag, the number of jackpot rounds, and the like are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, device information in the command data, presence / absence of winning at the first special figure starting port 230, presence / absence of winning at the second special figure starting port 232, winning of the variable winning port 234 Includes presence or absence.

  In the rotation start setting transmission process described above, the value of the 15R big hit flag or 2R big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the special figure 1 related lottery process, and the special figure 2 related are stored in the RAM 308 as command data. Information indicating the timer number selected in the lottery process, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game held, etc. is set. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating the value of the 15R big hit flag, the value of the 2R big hit flag, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data. In the winning effect setting transmission process described above, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the first special figure variable game or the second special figure variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described large winning opening release setting transmission process, the number of big hits stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the pending first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation game is stored. Set information such as number. In the above-mentioned big winning opening closing setting transmission process, the number of big hits stored in the RAM 308 in the command data, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the pending first special figure variation game or the second special figure variation game is stored. Set information such as number. In step S233, general command special figure hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase process, special figure identification information (information showing special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, command notice information (preliminary notice information, false) Set either advance notice information or no advance notice information).

  In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the production control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and it is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined.

  In step S235, an external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a full tray error is monitored. When the front frame door opening error or the lower pan full error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating the presence or absence of the front frame door opening error or the lower pan full error. Set. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the second special figure starting port 232 and the variable prize opening 234, and the normal symbol display device 210 and the first special symbol display via the display circuits 324, 326 and 330. Display data to be output to the device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the first sub-control unit 400 via the output port (I / O 310).

  In step S239, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when power supply cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241.

  In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, and the like, and then the process returns to the main process of the main control unit.

  On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 as return data, and power-off processing such as initialization of input / output ports is performed. After that, the process returns to the main process of the main control unit.

<Processing of First Sub-Control Unit 400>
The process of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 5B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 5C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400. FIG. 4D is a flowchart of the image control process of the first sub control unit 400.

  When the pachinko machine 100 is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S301. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S303, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step SC05. In step S305, 0 is substituted into the timer variable.

  In step S307, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S309, effect control processing is performed. In this effect control process, for example, when there is a new command in step S307, the effect data corresponding to this command is read from the ROM 406, and the effect data is updated when the effect data needs to be updated. Update processing is performed.

  In step S311, when it is detected that the various buttons of the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 have been pressed, processing for changing the effect data updated in step S309 to effect data corresponding to the press of the various buttons is performed.

  In step S313, image control processing is performed. Although details will be described later, in this image control process, if there is a command to the VDP 434 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the VDP 434. In step S315, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step S317, if there is a command to the various lamps 418 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the drive circuit 420. In step S319, if there is a command to the shielding device 246 in the effect data read in step S309, this command is output to the drive circuit 432.

  In step S321, if there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S309, the control command is set to be output, and the process returns to step S303.

  In step S323, a mission achievement determination process (details will be described later) is performed. In step S325, an original mode control process (details will be described later) is performed, and then the process ends.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described using FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output from the main control unit 300. In step S401 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

  Next, the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms). Execute in the cycle.

  In step S501 of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first sub-control unit main process, and the original timer variable storage area is stored. To do. Therefore, in step S303, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S503, transmission of a control command to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step S321, an effect random number update process, and the like are performed.

  In step S505, it is monitored whether or not the above-described low voltage signal is on. Then, if the low voltage signal is on (when power supply shutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S507. If the low voltage signal is off (power supply shutoff is not detected), the process ends. In step S507, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 as return data, and power-off processing such as initialization of the input / output port is performed.

<Image control processing>
Next, the image control process in step S313 in the main process of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

  In step S601, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the display areas A and B in the VRAM 436. As a result, an image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative design display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436) and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table and the like, and then the image from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the command set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 436 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S603, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 is input. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S605. If not, a transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for it. In step S605, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table and attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S601, the CPU 404 has information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis and image size of the VRAM 436). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) are instructed to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 sets parameters according to attributes based on instructions stored in the attribute register.

  In step S607, a drawing instruction is performed. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer in accordance with an instruction from the CPU 404.

  In step S609, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 based on the end of image drawing is input. If a generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S611. If not, the generation end interrupt signal is determined. Wait for input. In step S611, a scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many scene images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

<Processing of Second Sub-Control Unit 500>
Next, the process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 6A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 7B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500. FIG. 8C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500.

  When the pachinko machine 100 is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S701. In this initialization processing, initial setting of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

  In step S703, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S705. In step S705, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

  In step S707, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S709, an effect control process is performed. For example, if there is a new command in step S707, the effect data corresponding to this command is read from the ROM 506, and if the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

  In step S <b> 711, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game table frame lamp 542, this command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520. In step S713, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the effect movable body 224, this command is output to the drive circuit 516, and the process returns to step S703.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub control unit 500 detects the strobe signal output from the first sub control unit 400. In step S801 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the first sub control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

  Next, the second sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms), and a timer interrupt process is performed in response to this timer interrupt. Execute in the cycle.

  In step S901 of the second sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S703 in the second sub control unit main process, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. To do. Therefore, in step S703, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S903, an effect random number update process is performed.

  Next, a specific configuration of the operation key unit 137 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, FIG. 147 (a) is a diagram showing the operation key unit 137 shown in FIG. 138, and FIG. 147 (b) is a diagram schematically showing the operation key unit 137.

  As shown in FIG. 147 (a), the operation key unit 137 has six buttons, an upper button 137a, a lower button 137b, a left button 137c, a right button 137d, an OK button 137e, and a clear button 137f. Yes. In the following description, in order to simplify the description, among the components of the operation key unit 137, the upper button 137a, the lower button 137b, the left button 137c, the right button 137d, and the OK button 137e are shown in FIG. It may be expressed in the form shown in b).

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment has a long press automatic continuous hitting function that performs a pseudo continuous hitting operation by a long pressing operation of each button constituting the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137. Here, the long press operation is an operation mode in which the state where the buttons constituting the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 are pressed is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) or longer. Yes, the continuous hitting operation is an operation mode in which the pressing operation by each button constituting the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 is performed a plurality of times. In the present embodiment, the long press automatic continuous hitting function is enabled or disabled according to the contents of the effects using the effect buttons 136 and the buttons constituting the operation key unit 137. In the present embodiment, in a state where the long press automatic continuous hitting function is valid, the continuous hitting operation at a constant interval (for example, 100 ms interval) while the buttons constituting the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137 are continuously pressed. Is configured to be performed in a pseudo manner. Further, in the present embodiment, in the effect of performing a single pressing operation (single operation) by each button constituting the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137, the effect button 136 and each button constituting the operation key unit 137 are used. In order to appropriately perform the single operation, the long press automatic continuous hitting function is used until a predetermined time (for example, 500 ms) elapses after the start of the pressing operation of each button constituting the effect button 136 and the operation key unit 137. It is configured not to start the pseudo continuous hitting operation.

  Next, a specific effect example in the pachinko machine of the present embodiment will be described.

  FIG. 148 is a diagram showing a display example on the menu screen, and FIG. 149 is a diagram showing a continuation of the display example on the menu screen shown in FIG. 148. The following figure shows how the screen changes in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 148 and FIG. 149 show how various settings are performed on a menu screen that can be executed in a standby state in which symbol variation display is not performed, for example.

  Note that the menu screen in the present embodiment allows a player to change the setting. In addition to this menu screen, for example, a setting menu screen for a game store side is displayed. It may be configured such that various settings can be changed by the side, for example, a master volume, a store name, or the like may be input. Further, in the slot machine, for example, a setting change for determining the probability of BB, RB, etc. may be made on the menu screen.

  In the present embodiment, the menu screen can be displayed in the standby state, but for example, the menu screen cannot be displayed in the power support state (probability change, time reduction). Also good.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 148 (a), “decoration 3”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 1”, which is a combination of outlier decorative symbols, is stopped and displayed. Although not shown, the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214 are both stopped and displayed in an out-of-display manner, and the special figure 1 fourth pattern t1 and the special figure 2 are displayed. The fourth symbol t2 is also stopped and displayed with a display result that is not corresponding to the display results of the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214, respectively. Although not shown in the figure, the number of hold of the variable display in special figure 1 and special figure 2 is both zero. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 148 (a), an effect display in the standby state is performed.

  Also, at the bottom of the display screen, an icon representing the effect button 136 is displayed along with the characters “display menu screen”, and it is notified that the screen can be shifted to the menu screen by operating the effect button 136. ing.

  As shown in FIG. 148 (a), when the player presses the effect button 136 once, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a menu screen (“setting screen” as shown in FIG. 148 (b). Is sometimes displayed.) Is displayed. Specifically, on the menu screen, “volume light intensity adjustment” for adjusting volume and light intensity, “member registration” for registering a player's game history by entering a password, appearance frequency of effects such as notices, etc. Four menus are displayed so as to be selectable: “Production customization” for setting the button, and “Operation assist setting” for setting the long-press auto-strike function and the auto button function to be described later. Below these menus, the characters “Select” are displayed together with the icons of the upper button 137a and the lower button 137b, and the characters “Determine” are displayed together with the icon of the OK button 137e on the right side thereof. Further, on the right side, a character “Return by” is displayed together with the icon of the effect button 136. By operating the upper button 137a and the lower button 137b, the cursor CL is moved and the OK button 137e is operated. Thus, it is informed that the menu indicated by the cursor CL can be executed. Further, in FIG. 148 (b), it is also notified that when the effect button 136 is operated, the display returns to the effect display in the standby state shown in FIG. 148 (a).

  In the present embodiment, in the volume light amount adjustment, the volume and the light amount can be set, for example, from 11 levels of 0 to 10, respectively. The volume and amount of light are set to default values when the power is turned on, and the default values are set to “5”, for example. Needless to say, the default value can be set as appropriate. Further, in the present embodiment, the player can change the setting of the volume and the light amount by the setting operation on the menu screen. However, the player may not be able to change the setting of at least one of the sound volume and the light amount. .

  Further, in the present embodiment, the volume and light amount settings can be changed only on the setting screen on the menu screen. However, for example, the volume and light amount settings can be changed without going through the setting screen. For example, during the decorative symbol variation display or immediately after the decorative symbol stop display, the operation key unit 137 can be operated to change the volume and light quantity settings without displaying the setting screen. Good.

  In the present embodiment, on the menu screen, the cursor CL can be moved one by one for each operation of the upper button 137a or the lower button 137b, and the long press automatic repeated hitting function described later is invalid on the menu screen. Therefore, the cursor CL cannot be moved by two or more by performing a long press operation. Note that when the upper button 137a or the lower button 137b is pressed and operated on the menu screen, the cursor CL may be moved by two or more.

  In addition, when the effect display in the standby state is performed, in addition to the effect button 136, any of the buttons constituting the operation key unit 137 or a specific button (for example, an OK button 137e) is pressed. In this case, the menu screen may be displayed. When the menu screen is displayed, in addition to the effect button 136, for example, when the clear button 137f is pressed, the menu screen may return to the effect display in the standby state.

  As shown in FIG. 148 (c), when the “volume light intensity adjustment” is selected with the cursor CL, when the player presses the down button 137b once, the decorative symbol display device 208 As shown in FIG. 148 (d), a display indicating that “member registration” has been selected with the cursor CL is performed.

  Thereafter, when the player presses down button 137b once more, decoration symbol display device 208 indicates that “effect customization” is selected with cursor CL, as shown in FIG. 148 (e). Display is performed. That is, in this effect example, when “volume light intensity adjustment” is selected with the cursor CL, the “effect customization” menu operates the lower button 137b twice (or the upper button 137a is operated twice). This is a display that can be selected. In other words, in the present embodiment, the long press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled on the menu screen. Therefore, when “volume light intensity adjustment” is selected with the cursor CL, the “production customization” menu is displayed only when the lower button 137b is operated twice (or the upper button 137a is operated twice). It can be said that there is.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, in the display (an example of the second display) in which “effect customization” is selected with the cursor CL, the lower button 137b (up button 137a) is operated a plurality of times (for example, twice). This is a display that may be displayed in response to (operated in the first operation mode), and that the lower button 137b (up button 137a) has been pressed (operated in the second operation mode). In other words, it can be said that the display in which “production customization” is selected with the cursor CL is not started.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display in which “production customization” is selected with the cursor CL can be said to be a display when one of a plurality of options is selected.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display in which “effect customization” is selected with the cursor CL may be a display displayed on the menu screen (setting screen).

  In the present embodiment, the menu screen is a screen including a display for instructing selection of one option from among a plurality of options, and a display in which “volume light amount adjustment” is selected by the cursor CL (first display). When the lower button 137b (upper button 137a) is operated a plurality of times (operating in the first operation mode) when the third display example) is displayed, “effect customization” is selected with the cursor CL. Display (an example of the second display) may be started, and a display (an example of the third display) in which “volume light amount adjustment” is selected with the cursor CL is displayed. When the down button 137b (up button 137a) is operated for a long time (operated in the second operation mode), a display (an example of the second display) in which “effect customization” is selected with the cursor CL is displayed. Started It can also be referred to have.

  In the present embodiment, the display in which “production customization” is selected with the cursor CL is displayed when the display in which “volume light amount adjustment” is selected with the cursor CL is displayed. It can also be said that the display is started when the operation is performed N times (N ≧ 2) by 137a).

  In the present embodiment, the display in which “production customization” is selected with the cursor CL may be a display that does not start during the display of the symbol variation display.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 148 (e), when the player clicks the OK button 137e once in the state where “effect customization” is selected with the cursor CL on the decorative symbol display device 208, On the decorative symbol display device 208, an effect customization setting screen as shown in FIG. 148 (f) is displayed. On the effect customization setting screen, “normal mode” where the appearance frequency of notices and other effects is set to the default setting, only the notice of jackpot confirmation that is determined to be a big hit by appearing without making a false jackpot notice notification The “Premium Up Mode” menu, which is set to improve the appearance frequency of the pre-announcement of the jackpot confirmation with a low appearance frequency in the “One-shot Notification Mode” and “Normal Mode”, are displayed to be selectable. ing.

  As shown in FIG. 148 (g), when the “normal mode” is selected with the cursor CL, if the player presses the OK button 137e once, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the figure. As shown in 148 (h), along with Princess Chibi's character, "Normal mode" and "You can see the usual performance" are displayed to inform you that the normal mode has been set, and the appearance of effects such as notices The frequency is set to the default.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the long press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled on the menu screen. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 148 (e), when “production customization” is selected with the cursor CL. In this case, even if the player presses the OK button 137e for a long time, the “normal mode” is not set, and the OK button 137e is operated again after the display screen transitions to the effect customization setting screen. “Normal mode” is set.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 148 (f), when the “normal mode” is selected with the cursor CL, if the down button 137b is pressed twice, as shown in FIG. 148 (g1). The display indicating that “Premier Up Mode” is selected with the cursor CL is performed. In the present embodiment, as described above, since the long press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled on the menu screen, when “normal mode” is selected with the cursor CL, the menu of “premier up mode” The display can be selected by operating the down button 137b twice. In other words, the display can be selected only when the down button 137b is operated twice. That is, in this embodiment, the display indicating that “Premier Up Mode” is selected with the cursor CL can be considered as an example of a second display, and “Normal Mode” is selected with the cursor CL. It can be said that the display indicating is an example of the third display.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 148 (g1), when the “Premier Up Mode” is selected with the cursor CL, when the player presses the OK button 137e once, the decorative symbol display device 208 As shown in FIG. 148 (h1), along with Princess Chibi's character, the message “You can see a lot of premier performances” is displayed to notify that the premier up mode has been set, and the appearance frequency of the premier notice will increase. Set to

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 148 (e), when “effect customization” is selected with the cursor CL, if the down button 137b is pressed once more, as shown in FIG. 149 (e2). In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a display indicating that “operation assistance setting” is selected with the cursor CL is performed. In the present embodiment, as described above, since the long press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled on the menu screen, when “volume light amount adjustment” is selected with the cursor CL, the “operation assistance setting” menu is displayed. The display can be selected by operating the down button 137b three times. In other words, the display can be selected only when the down button 137b is operated three times. That is, in the present embodiment, the display indicating that “operation assistance setting” is selected with the cursor CL can be said to be an example of a second display.

  As shown in FIG. 149 (e2), when the “operation assist setting” is selected with the cursor CL, when the player presses the OK button 137e once, the decorative symbol display device 208 An operation assistance setting screen as shown in FIG. 149 (f2) is displayed. On the operation assistance setting screen, “no assistance” that does not assist the continuous operation of each button constituting the production button 136 or the operation key unit 137, and each button constituting the production button 136 or the operation key unit 137 is pressed and operated. Even if the operation of each button constituting the effect button 136 or the operation key unit 137 is not performed during the execution of the effect related to the operation of the operation of the effect button 136, etc. Three menus of “auto buttons” for performing a single operation, a long press operation and a continuous hitting operation in a pseudo manner are displayed in a selectable manner.

  As shown in FIG. 149 (f2), when “no assistance” is selected with the cursor CL, when the player presses the down button 137b once, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the figure. As shown in 149 (g2), a display indicating that “long press auto-strike” is selected with the cursor CL is performed.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 149 (h2), when the player presses the OK button 137e once, the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. Is displayed to notify that the long-pressing automatic continuous hitting function is enabled, and the long-pressing automatic continuous hitting function is set to be enabled. In the present embodiment, on the condition that the long-pressing automatic continuous hitting function is set to be valid in this way, the continuous hitting assist function by the long press operation of each button constituting the effect button 136 or the operation key unit 137. Is configured to activate. In the embodiment described in this specification, it may be configured such that the long press automatic continuous hitting function is always in an effective state without setting the long press automatic continuous hitting function.

  In the present embodiment, the menu screen is configured such that the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled. However, the menu screen may be configured such that the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is enabled. When the button 137a or the down button 137b is continuously pressed, the cursor CL may be moved in accordance with the pseudo continuous hit operation. At this time, the interval between the pseudo continuous hitting operations may be set to an interval (for example, 0.5 seconds) at which it can be easily recognized that the menu that is the selection target of the player has been changed. In this case, for example, when the upper button 137a, the lower button 137b, or the OK button 137e is kept pressed before the setting screen is switched, such as a transition from the menu screen to the effect customization setting screen, the setting screen is displayed. After switching, the pseudo continuous hitting operation is not performed, and the pseudo continuous hitting operation is performed again by pressing the upper button 137a, the lower button 137b, or the OK button 137e after the setting screen is switched. May be. Further, at least one of the movement of the cursor CL and the transition of the setting screen may be such that the pseudo continuous hit operation by the long press operation is not performed.

  In addition, according to the present embodiment, the result set on the menu screen may affect the effect that the long press automatic continuous hit function described later functions. For example, it is possible to set the difficulty level for the effect of performing the continuous hit operation on the menu screen, and when the difficulty level is high, it is easier for the effect that the long press automatic continuous hit function is performed more easily than the continuous hit operation to be performed. Can do. In addition, the volume and light amount set on the volume light amount setting screen are reflected in the effect that the long press auto-strike functions.

  FIG. 150 is a diagram illustrating an example of a pseudo-continuous effect. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 150 shows a state in which an effect of operating the effect button 136 a plurality of times is performed in the pseudo-continuous effect. Here, the pseudo-ream means that the decorative symbol display device 208 variably displays the decorative symbol display device 208 according to the special symbol variable display. The decorative pattern variation pattern in which the re-variable display is performed once or a plurality of times after the decorative symbol variation display is temporarily stopped in all of the symbol display region 208b and the right symbol display region 208c. Point to. In other words, the pseudo-ream is a pseudo-variation that makes it appear that the decorative symbol is fluctuated a plurality of times with respect to a variation display of one special figure.

  As shown in FIG. 150 (a), in the first special symbol display device 212, the symbol variation display of the special symbol 1 is started, and in the decorative symbol display device 208 correspondingly, the left symbol display area 208a, In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Also, in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, a special symbol 1 fourth symbol t1 that is variably displayed in accordance with the display state of the first special symbol display device 212 is displayed. In the special figure 1 and the 4th symbol t1, in accordance with the symbol fluctuation display of the first special figure display device 212, for example, the fluctuation display is performed in such a manner that the color shown in the circle changes into a plurality of types. Yes. In FIG. 150 and subsequent figures, the special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol t1 are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in a manner in which the symbols that are stopped can be recognized for convenience of explanation. The displayed symbols are displayed in a manner that is difficult for the player to recognize. In addition, the special figure 1 4th pattern t1 may be displayed in a manner recognizable to the player.

  In addition, a hold display area is provided at the bottom of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this hold display area, the first special figure 1 hold display h11 corresponding to the first hold in FIG. 1 and the second special figure 1 hold display corresponding to the second hold in FIG. h12, a third special figure 1 hold display h13 corresponding to the third hold in FIG. 1, and a fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 corresponding to the fourth hold in FIG. Has been. In FIG. 150 (a), since the number of holdings of the variable display in FIG. 1 is one, one holding lamp in the first special figure holding lamp 218 is lit, and the number of holdings of the variable display in FIG. Is 0, all the holding lamps in the second special figure holding lamp 220 are turned off. On the other hand, in the hold display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first special figure 1 hold display h11 among the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 correspondingly. Are displayed in the default display mode (default hold icon), and the other special figure 1 hold display is displayed in a non-pending mode (for example, a grayed-out hold icon). In addition, it is good also as a mode which replaces with the display in the aspect which is not on hold, and does not display a hold icon.

  In the lower left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, a variable icon display area 284 for displaying a variable icon is provided. The variation icon has, for example, a display form related to the special figure hold display, and is displayed in the same display form as the hold display. For example, the change icon can execute a notice about the display result of the change display (the change notice) according to the display mode. The variation icon is deleted after the variation display is started. Note that the erase timing of the change icon is not limited to this. For example, the change icon may be deleted when the change display ends.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 150 (b), the first stop is performed, and “decoration 3” is stopped and displayed in the manner of fluctuation fluctuation in the left symbol display area 208 a. In the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c, the decorative symbol variation display continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 150 (c), the second stop is performed, and “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c in a manner of fluctuation fluctuation. In the middle symbol display device 208b, the decorative symbol variation display continues.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 150 (d), the third stop is performed, and the pseudo continuous symbol GG including the character display of “continue” is stopped and displayed in a manner of fluctuation fluctuation in the middle symbol display area 208b. This pseudo-continuous symbol GG is stopped and displayed, so that the player can expect whether or not pseudo-ream will occur.

  Subsequently, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 150 (e), the characters “PUSH” are displayed in the center of the screen together with the effect button image BT that prompts the user to press the effect button 136, and the remaining period for receiving the effect button press is left. A remaining time meter MT representing time is displayed below the effect button image BT. The effect button image BT and the remaining time meter MT are displayed so as to overlap the pseudo-continuous pattern GG. Thereby, the player is notified that the operation by the effect button 136 is acceptable.

  Thereafter, when a single pressing operation by the effect button 136 is performed at the timing shown in FIG. 150 (f), the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. 150 (g), results from the operation of the effect button 136. An effect display is performed to the effect that the effect display is started and the second variation of the decorative symbol display by the pseudo-ream is started. Specifically, the display of “× 2” indicating that the second variation display of the decorative symbol is being executed is displayed above the decorative symbol.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 150 (h), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbols that have been stopped and displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c change again, respectively. The first pseudo-continuous production is started. That is, the second variation display of decorative symbols is started.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. 150 (i), after the first stop and the second stop are performed in the same manner as described above in FIGS. The third stop is performed, and the pseudo continuous symbol GG is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b in a manner of fluctuation fluctuation. By stopping and displaying this pseudo-continuous symbol GG, it is possible to make the player expect whether or not the second pseudo-ream will occur.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 150 (j), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the characters “PUSH” together with the effect button image BT in the same manner as shown in FIG. Meter MT is also displayed. Thereby, the player is notified that the operation by the effect button 136 is acceptable.

  Thereafter, when a single pressing operation by the effect button 136 is performed at the timing shown in FIG. 150 (k), as shown in FIG. 150 (l), in the decorative symbol display device 208, as a result of the operation of the effect button 136, An effect display is made to the effect that the display of the variation of the decorative pattern for the third time by the pseudo-ream starts after the effect is successful. Specifically, a display of “× 3” indicating that the third variation of the decorative symbol is being displayed is displayed above the decorative symbol. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 150 (m), the second pseudo-continuous effect is started.

  In the above-described effect example, the effect button image BT is displayed every time an effect (sometimes referred to as a “pseudo continuous generation effect”) that indicates whether or not to generate a pseudo continuous generation is executed, and the pseudo continuous generation effect is generated a plurality of times. Since the effect button image BT is also displayed a plurality of times because it is executed, the effect button image BT displayed at a time is one, and the display of the effect button image BT is intermittently generated every time the pseudo-continuous effect is generated. Indicates that it will be done.

  In addition, in the above-described effect example, the effect button 136 has been pressed and the effect has been successful. However, when the pseudo-continuous effect is not started, for example, the effect of the effect button 136 is that the effect has failed. The effect display may be executed, and the stop display may be performed with a combination of out-of-place decorative symbols. In addition, after the effect display indicating that the effect has failed is executed, the display may be stopped with a combination of the jackpot decorative symbols.

  Further, in the above-described effect example, the result of the operation is displayed by a single press operation (single operation) with the effect button 136. For example, a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) or more by the effect button 136 is displayed. The result of the operation may be displayed by performing a long press operation. Further, for example, the result of the operation may be displayed by performing a continuous hitting operation with the effect button 136. In the above-described example of the production, the production of the production button 136 by a single operation is performed a plurality of times. However, the production of a plurality of times is performed by using two of the production by a single operation, the production by a long press operation, and the production by a continuous hitting operation. You may comprise by the above combination. Further, in the above-described effect example, the long-press auto-strike function may be enabled, and when the effect button 136 is continuously pressed, the effect accompanying the pressing operation by the effect button 136 is simulated. You may make it carry out sequentially according to a continuous striking operation. That is, in this effect example, it can be said that the result of the operation is displayed even when the effect button 136 is repeatedly hit, and the result of the same operation is also displayed when the effect button 136 is pressed for a long time. Moreover, in the production example described above, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be disabled. In this case, the effect button lamp 138 may be turned off even when the operation of the effect button 136 can be accepted. In addition, the effect button lamp 138 may be caused to emit light in a light emission mode (for example, light emission in blue) different from the light emission mode (for example, light emission in red) in a state where the long press automatic continuous hitting function is valid.

  Thus, in this embodiment, one press operation (single operation) by the production button 136 is an example of a first operation mode. Further, the long press operation for a predetermined time or longer by the effect button 136 is an example of a second operation mode in which the operation is continued for a longer period than the first operation mode.

  In this production example, when the long-press auto-strike function is in an effective state, the production display by the pseudo-run that is executed as a result of the operation of the production button 136 generated after the second operation is the first operation. The first production that can be started when the first number of operations are performed by the operation means in the mode, and can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode. It can be said an example.

  Further, in this effect example, when the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is in an invalid state, the effect display by the pseudo-continuous executed as a result of the operation of the effect button 136 generated after the second operation is the second operation. It is an example of the second effect that is easier to start when the operation means is operated the second number of times by the operation means in the first operation mode than when the operation means is operated once by the operation means. be able to. Moreover, it can also be said to be an example of a second effect that does not start when only one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode.

  Further, in this effect example, in the case where the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is in an effective state, the effect display by the pseudo continuous execution executed as a result of the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 is performed by the operating means in the first operation mode. It can be said to be an example of the first effect that can be started when the first number of operations are performed and can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode. .

  FIG. 151 is a diagram for explaining an example of the chance eye effect. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 151 shows a state of transition to super reach after an effect of operating the effect button 136 a plurality of times in the chance eye effect. Here, the chance eye is an aspect in which the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed in a specific combination (for example, a combination of symbols having the same color), and is an aspect of the notice effect.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 151 (a), after the variable symbols are displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c, the left symbol display area 208a is displayed. The chance symbol “A” constituting a part of the chance eye is stopped and displayed, the chance symbol “B” constituting a part of the chance eye is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the chance symbol “B” is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. The chance symbol “C” constituting a part of the symbol is stopped and displayed, and the combination of the decorative symbols that are chances is stopped and displayed. The first special symbol display device 212 is changing the symbol, and the special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol t1 are also variably displayed corresponding to the symbol variation display of the first special symbol display device 212.

  In FIG. 151 (a), since the number of hold of the variable display of the special figure 1 is 1, one hold lamp in the first special figure hold lamp 218 is lit, and the fluctuation display of the special figure 2 is displayed. Since the number of holds is 0, all the hold lamps in the second special figure hold lamp 220 are turned off. On the other hand, in the hold display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first special figure 1 hold display h11 among the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 correspondingly. Are displayed in the default display mode, and the other special figure 1 hold display is displayed in a non-hold mode.

  Subsequently, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 151 (b), together with the effect button image BT1 prompting the user to press the effect button 136 so as to overlap the chance symbol “A” stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. The characters “PUSH” are displayed, and a remaining time meter MT1 indicating the remaining time of the reception period for pressing the effect button is displayed below the effect button image BT1. In addition, the word “PUSH” is displayed together with the effect button image BT2 that prompts the user to press the effect button 136 so as to overlap the chance symbol “B” that is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. The remaining time meter MT2 representing the remaining time is displayed below the effect button image BT2. In addition, the word “PUSH” is displayed together with the effect button image BT3 that prompts the user to press the effect button 136 so as to overlap the chance symbol “C” stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. A remaining time meter MT3 representing the remaining time is displayed below the effect button image BT3.

  Thereafter, when a single pressing operation with the effect button 136 is performed at the timing shown in FIG. 151 (c), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a stop in the left symbol display area 208a as shown in FIG. 151 (d). The chance symbol “A” that has been made is changed to a Tono-sama symbol YM1 that imitates Tono-sama's face. At this time, the effect button image BT1 and the remaining time meter MT1 remain displayed superimposed on the Tonosama symbol YM1, but the character display of “PUSH” is erased, and the remaining time meter MT1 has a gauge remaining. It is displayed in a mode that is 0 seconds.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 151 (e), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect button image BT1 and the remaining time meter MT1 that are displayed in a superimposed manner on the Tonama symbol YM1 are deleted, and the Tonama symbol YM1 is easily visible. Is displayed. Note that the timing at which the effect button image BT1 and the remaining time meter MT1 are erased can be set as appropriate. For example, the timing is before the timing at which the display is changed from the chance symbol “A” to the lord symbol YM1. Alternatively, the timing may be the same as the timing when the display is changed from the chance symbol “A” to the lord symbol YM1. The same applies to the middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c. Further, the display of the remaining time shown in the remaining time meter MT2 and the remaining time meter MT3 is continuously updated while the above-described effect display is performed.

  In addition, when a single pressing operation with the effect button 136 is performed at the timing shown in FIG. 151 (e), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays in the middle symbol display area 208b as shown in FIG. 151 (f). The chance symbol “B” that has been set is changed to Tonosama symbol YM2. At this time, the effect button image BT2 and the remaining time meter MT2 remain displayed superimposed on the Tonosama symbol YM2, but the character display of “PUSH” is erased, and the remaining time meter MT2 has a gauge remaining. It is displayed in a mode that is 0 seconds. In FIG. 151 (e), a state in which the effect button image BT1 and the remaining time meter MT1 are deleted and a state in which a press operation by the effect button 136 is performed are shown at the same time. After the button image BT1 and the remaining time meter MT1 are erased, the pressing operation by the effect button 136 is performed. It should be noted that the deletion of the effect button image BT1 and the remaining time meter MT1 and the pressing operation by the effect button 136 may be simultaneously performed, or after the pressing operation by the effect button 136 is performed, the effect button image BT1 and The remaining time meter MT1 may be deleted. Further, even if the effect button 136 is pressed, the effect button image BT1 and the remaining time meter MT1 may not be deleted, or only the effect button image BT1 may be deleted, or only the remaining time meter MT1. May be deleted.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 151 (g), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect button image BT2 and the remaining time meter MT2 that are displayed superimposed on the Tonama symbol YM2 are deleted, and the Tonama symbol YM2 is easily visible. Is displayed. Further, the display of the remaining time shown in the remaining time meter MT3 is continuously updated while the above-described effect display is performed.

  In addition, when a single pressing operation with the effect button 136 is performed at the timing shown in FIG. 151 (g), the decorative symbol display device 208 stops and displays in the right symbol display area 208c as shown in FIG. 151 (h). The chance symbol “C” that has been set is changed to Tonosama symbol YM3. At this time, the effect button image BT3 and the remaining time meter MT3 remain displayed superimposed on the Tonosama symbol YM3, but the character display of “PUSH” is erased, and the remaining time meter MT3 has a gauge remaining. It is displayed in a mode that is 0 seconds. In FIG. 151 (g), a state in which the effect button image BT2 and the remaining time meter MT2 are deleted and a state in which a press operation by the effect button 136 is performed are shown at the same time. After the button image BT2 and the remaining time meter MT2 are erased, the pressing operation by the effect button 136 is performed. It should be noted that the deletion of the effect button image BT2 and the remaining time meter MT2 and the pressing operation by the effect button 136 may be simultaneously performed, or after the pressing operation by the effect button 136 is performed, the effect button image BT2 and The remaining time meter MT2 may be deleted. Further, even if the effect button 136 is pressed, the effect button image BT2 and the remaining time meter MT2 may not be deleted, or only the effect button image BT2 may be deleted, or only the remaining time meter MT2. May be deleted.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 151 (i), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect button image BT3 and the remaining time meter MT3 that are displayed in a superimposed manner on the Tono-like symbol YM3 are deleted, and the Tono-like symbol YM3 is easily visible. Is displayed, and the Tono-like symbols YM1 to YM3 are arranged. Then, as shown in FIG. 151 (j), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c move to the upper left corner of the display screen, and super reach is achieved. “SP reach” is displayed to indicate the transition. Even when the effect button 136 is pressed, the effect button image BT3 and the remaining time meter MT3 may not be deleted, only the effect button image BT3 may be deleted, or only the remaining time meter MT3. May be deleted.

  In the above-described effect example, effect button images BT1 to BT3 are displayed for each decorative symbol, and a plurality of these effect button images BT1 to BT3 are simultaneously displayed, and each time the effect button 136 is operated, the effect button images BT1 to BT1 are displayed. It shows that BT3 is erased one by one.

  In addition, in the above-described production example, the production button 136 is pressed and the production is successful, and all the chance symbols are changed to the Tono-sama design and transition to super reach. However, after the chance eye production is performed, In the case of not shifting to the super reach, for example, at least one of the chance symbols displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c as a result of the operation of the effect button 136, Change the display from a chance symbol to a symbol different from the Tono-sama symbol (for example, an evil agent model that imitates the face of an evil agent), inform you that you will not move to Super Reach, and then use a combination of decorative patterns You may make it display a stop.

  Further, in the above-described effect example, the result of the operation is displayed by a single press operation (single operation) with the effect button 136. However, for example, when a long press operation with the effect button 136 is performed, the operation is performed. The result may be displayed. Further, for example, the result of the operation may be displayed by performing a continuous hitting operation with the effect button 136. In the above-described example of the production, the production of the production button 136 by a single operation is performed a plurality of times. However, the production of a plurality of times is performed by using two of the production by a single operation, the production by a long press operation, and the production by a continuous hitting operation. You may comprise by the above combination. Further, in the above-described effect example, the long-press auto-strike function may be enabled, and when the effect button 136 is continuously pressed, the effect accompanying the pressing operation by the effect button 136 is simulated. You may make it carry out sequentially according to a continuous striking operation. That is, in this effect example, it can be said that the result of the operation is displayed even when the effect button 136 is repeatedly hit, and the result of the same operation is also displayed when the effect button 136 is pressed for a long time. Moreover, in the production example described above, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be disabled.

  In this effect example, when the long-press auto-strike function is in an effective state, the chance symbol “B” is changed to the Tonosama symbol YM2, and the chance symbol “C” is changed to the Tosama symbol YM3. The production can be started when the first number of operations are performed by the operation means in the first operation mode, and also when the one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode. It can be said to be an example of the first production that can be started.

  Also, in this effect example, when the long-press auto-strike function is disabled, the effect that the chance symbol “B” is changed to the Tono-sama symbol YM2, and the chance symbol “C” is changed to the Tono-sama symbol YM3. The effect to be changed is more when the second operation mode is operated by the operation means in the first operation mode and the second operation mode is operated by the operation means in the second operation mode. It can be said that it is an example of the 2nd production which is easy to start. Moreover, it can also be said to be an example of a second effect that does not start when only one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode.

  Also, in this effect example, when the long-press auto-strike function is in an effective state, the effect in which the chance symbol is changed to the ton-like symbol as a result of the striking operation of the effect button 136 is operated in the first operation mode. It is an example of the first effect that can be started when the first number of operations are performed by the means, and can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode. Can do.

  FIG. 152 is a diagram illustrating an example of a cut-in effect. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 152 shows a state in which an effect of operating the effect button 136 a plurality of times is performed during the decorative symbol variation display. In this effect example, a cut-in effect is displayed in which a cut-in image is displayed each time a pressing operation by the effect button 136 is performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 152 (a), the decorative symbol is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen. The first special symbol display device 212 is changing the symbol, and the special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol t1 are also variably displayed corresponding to the symbol variation display of the first special symbol display device 212. On the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the text “PUSH” is displayed together with the effect button image BT1, and the remaining time meter MT1 is displayed below the effect button image BT1. Further, in the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, characters “PUSH” are displayed together with the effect button image BT2, and a remaining time meter MT2 is displayed below the effect button image BT2. In addition, on the right side of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, characters “PUSH” are displayed together with the effect button image BT3, and a remaining time meter MT3 is displayed below the effect button image BT3.

  In FIG. 152 (a), the number of hold of the variable display in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is both 0, so the hold lamp in the first special figure hold lamp 218 and the hold in the second special figure hold lamp 220. All lamps are off. Note that in this effect example, the hold display is not performed on the decorative symbol display device 208, but the hold display may be performed as described above.

  Thereafter, for example, when 1 second has passed, as shown in FIG. 152 (b), the remaining time meters MT1 to MT3 indicate that 1 second has passed, that is, the gauge has decreased by 1 second. Displayed in a manner.

  When a single pressing operation is performed with the effect button 136, as shown in FIG. 152 (c), “PUSH” displayed together with the effect button image BT1 displayed on the central left side of the decorative symbol display device 208. Is deleted and the remaining time meter MT1 is displayed in such a manner that the gauge remains at 0 seconds. At this time, the update display of the remaining time meter MT2 and the remaining time meter MT3 is stopped. That is, the remaining operation reception time of the effect button 136 does not decrease. Note that the update display of the remaining time meter MT2 and the remaining time meter MT3 may not be stopped (the remaining operation reception time of the effect button 136 is decreased).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 152 (d), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect button image BT1 and the remaining time meter MT1 are deleted.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 152 (e), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the first cut-in image CI1. The first cut-in image CI1 is displayed so as to overlap the effect button image BT2 and the effect button image BT3.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 152 (f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the first cut-in image CI1 is deleted, the updated display of the remaining time meter MT2 and the remaining time meter MT3 is resumed, and the effect button 136 is displayed. Will be resumed.

  After that, for example, when the timing at which one second has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 152 (g), the remaining time meter MT2 and the remaining time meter MT3 indicate that one second has elapsed, that is, the gauge is Furthermore, it is displayed in a mode of decreasing by 1 second.

  Then, when the pressing operation is performed once by the effect button 136, as shown in FIG. 152 (h), “PUSH” displayed together with the effect button image BT2 displayed at the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. And the remaining time meter MT2 is displayed in such a manner that the remaining gauge is 0 seconds. At this time, the update display of the remaining time meter MT3 is stopped. Note that the update display of the remaining time meter MT3 may not be stopped (the remaining operation reception time of the effect button 136 is decreased).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 152 (i), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect button image BT2 and the remaining time meter MT2 are deleted.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 152 (k), the decorative design display device 208 displays the second cut-in image CI2. The second cut-in image CI2 is displayed so as to overlap the effect button BT3. In addition, the second cut-in image CI2 has a larger display range in the vertical direction than the first cut-in image CI1.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 152 (l), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the second cut-in image CI2 is deleted, the updated display of the remaining time meter MT3 is resumed, and the operation reception of the effect button 136 is resumed. Is done.

  Thereafter, for example, when the timing when one second has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 152 (m), the remaining time meter MT3 indicates that one second has elapsed, that is, the gauge is further decreased by one second. Is displayed in the manner described above.

  When a single press operation is performed with the effect button 136, as shown in FIG. 152 (n), the “PUSH” displayed together with the effect button image BT3 displayed on the central right side of the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. "And the remaining time meter MT3 are displayed in such a manner that the remaining gauge is 0 seconds.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 152 (o), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the effect button image BT3 and the remaining time meter MT3 are deleted.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 152 (p), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the third cut-in image CI3. The third cut-in image CI3 is an image displayed over the entire display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In the example of production described above, an example is shown in which the cut-in image is displayed as a successful production every time the production button 136 is pressed and the production button 136 is pressed. The cut-in image may be displayed for only one or two of the pressing operations of the button 136, and the cut-in image is displayed in any of the three pressing operations of the effect button operation 136e. May not be displayed.

  Further, these cut-in images may be displayed even when the depressing operation of the effect button 136 is not performed. At this time, it is good also as a different display mode by the case where pressing operation of the production button 136 is performed, and the case where it is not performed, and it is good also as the same display mode.

  Further, in the above-described effect example, the result of the operation is displayed by a single press operation (single operation) with the effect button 136. However, for example, when a long press operation with the effect button 136 is performed, the operation is performed. The result may be displayed. Further, for example, the result of the operation may be displayed by performing a continuous hitting operation with the effect button 136. In the above-described example of the production, the production of the production button 136 by a single operation is performed a plurality of times. However, the production of a plurality of times is performed by using two of the production by a single operation, the production by a long press operation, and the production by a continuous hitting operation. You may comprise by the above combination. Further, in the above-described effect example, the long-press auto-strike function may be enabled, and when the effect button 136 is continuously pressed, the effect accompanying the pressing operation by the effect button 136 is simulated. You may make it carry out sequentially according to a continuous striking operation. At this time, as soon as the operation of the effect button 136 is accepted, a pseudo pressing operation by the effect button 136 is performed, so that the remaining time meter is updated in a state where the operation of the effect button 136 can be received. In some cases, three cut-in images can be displayed with almost no change in the display mode of the remaining time of the remaining time meter. That is, in this effect example, it can be said that the result of the operation is displayed even when the effect button 136 is repeatedly hit, and the result of the same operation is also displayed when the effect button 136 is pressed for a long time. Moreover, in the production example described above, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be disabled.

  In this effect example, in the case where the long press automatic continuous hitting function is in an effective state, the effect in which the second cut-in image CI2 is displayed and the effect in which the third cut-in image CI3 is displayed are The first operation mode can be started when the operation unit performs the first number of operations, and the second operation mode can be started even when the operation unit performs one operation. It can be said to be an example of one production.

  Further, in this effect example, when the long press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled, an effect in which the second cut-in image CI2 is displayed and an effect in which the third cut-in image CI3 is displayed. Is easier to start when a second number of operations are performed by the operating means in the first operating mode than when a single operation is performed by the operating means in the second operating mode. It can be said that it is an example of the second production. Moreover, it can also be said to be an example of a second effect that does not start when only one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode.

  Further, in this effect example, when the long-press auto-strike function is enabled, an effect in which a cut-in image is displayed as a result of the striking operation of the effect button 136 is performed by the operating means in the first operation mode. It can be said to be an example of the first effect that can be started when the first number of operations are performed and can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode. .

  FIG. 153 is a diagram illustrating an example of a cut-in effect. The following diagram shows how the production progresses in numerical order in parentheses. FIGS. 153 (a-1) to (a-6) illustrate a state in which an effect is generated by a single operation of the effect button 136 during the decorative symbol variation display, and FIGS. 153 (b-1) to (b−). 6) shows a state where an effect is produced by a single operation of the effect button 136 when the auto button function is in an effective state. Here, the auto button function is a function of performing a single operation, a long press operation, and a continuous hitting operation in a pseudo manner even if the operation of the effect button 136 is not performed during the execution of the effect related to the operation of the effect button 136. is there. In the present embodiment, the auto button function is enabled or disabled according to the content of the effect using the effect button 136. In addition, in a state where the auto button function is enabled, only one or two functions of the single operation, the long press operation, and the continuous operation are enabled according to the content of the effect using the effect button 136. You may be comprised so that it may become.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 153 (a-1), “decoration 3”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 4”, which is a combination of outlier decorative symbols, is fixedly displayed. It should be noted that the first special figure display device 212 is confirmed and displayed with the display result of the deviation, and the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol t1 also display the deviation corresponding to the display result of the first special figure display device 212. The result (for example, a white circle) is confirmed and displayed. The effect button lamp 138 is turned off. That is, the effect button lamp 138 is turned off, indicating that the effect button 136 is not in the operation acceptance state. If the operation button 136 is not in the operation acceptance state, the effect button lamp 138 may emit light in a specific color (for example, blue). Here, the color of light emission is not limited to blue, and can be set to an appropriate color. Thus, in the present embodiment, it can be said that the effect button 136 is in the second state when it is not in the operation acceptance state.

  Since the number of hold of the variable display in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is both 0, the hold lamp in the first special figure hold lamp 218 and the hold lamp in the second special figure hold lamp 220 are both turned off.

  Thereafter, when a game ball wins at the first special figure starting port 230, as shown in FIG. 153 (a-2), the first special figure display device 212 starts the fluctuation display of the special figure 1, and Correspondingly, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol, and also starts the variable display of the special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol t1. At this time, the decorative symbol is displayed in the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Thereafter, the characters “PUSH” are displayed in the center of the screen together with the effect button image BT that prompts the user to press the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 153 (a-3), and the remaining time is displayed below the effect button image BT. Meter MT is displayed. At this time, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light indicating that the effect button 136 is in the operation acceptance state. Note that the light emission color is not limited to red, and can be set to an appropriate color. Thus, in the present embodiment, it can be said that the effect button 136 is in the first state when it is in the operation acceptance state.

  Then, when a single pressing operation by the effect button 136 is performed at the timing shown in FIG. 153 (a-4), the effect button image BT displayed along with the effect button image BT is displayed as shown in FIG. 153 (a-5). The characters “PUSH” are erased, and the remaining time meter MT is displayed in such a manner that the gauge remains at 0 seconds.

  Subsequently, as illustrated in FIG. 153 (a-6), the cut-in image CI4 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In the effect example described above, after the pressing operation by the effect button 136 is performed, as shown in FIG. 153 (a-5), the characters “PUSH” displayed together with the effect button image BT are deleted. The remaining time meter MT is displayed in such a manner that the remaining gauge is 0 seconds, but such display may not be performed.

  On the other hand, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 153 (b-1), “decoration 3”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 4”, which is a combination of outlier decorative symbols, is fixedly displayed. It should be noted that the first special figure display device 212 is confirmed and displayed with the display result of the deviation, and the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol t1 also display the deviation corresponding to the display result of the first special figure display device 212. The result (for example, a white circle) is confirmed and displayed. The effect button lamp 138 emits green light indicating that the auto button function is enabled. Note that the light emission color is not limited to green, and can be set to an appropriate color. Thus, in the present embodiment, it can be said that the effect button 136 is in the third state when the auto button function is enabled.

  Since the number of hold of the variable display in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is both 0, the hold lamp in the first special figure hold lamp 218 and the hold lamp in the second special figure hold lamp 220 are both turned off.

  After that, when a game ball wins the first special figure starting port 230, as shown in FIG. 153 (b-2), the first special figure display device 212 starts the fluctuation display of the special figure 1, and Correspondingly, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol, and also starts the variable display of the special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol t1. At this time, the decorative symbol is displayed in the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Thereafter, the characters “PUSH” are displayed in the center of the screen together with the effect button image BT prompting the user to press the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 153 (b-3), and the remaining time is displayed below the effect button image BT. Meter MT is displayed.

  Thereafter, when half of the period for accepting the push of the effect button 136 has elapsed, a single operation with the effect button 136 is performed in a pseudo manner at the timing shown in FIG. 153 (b-4) by the auto button function.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 153 (b-5), the characters “PUSH” displayed together with the effect button image BT are deleted, and the remaining time meter MT is displayed in a mode in which the gauge is 0 seconds remaining. The

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 153 (b-6), the cut-in image CI4 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In the effect example described above, “PUSH” displayed together with the effect button image BT as shown in FIG. 153 (b-5) after the operation of the effect button 136 is artificially performed by the auto button function. Is deleted, and the remaining time meter MT is displayed in such a manner that the gauge is 0 seconds remaining, but such display may not be performed.

  In the production example described above, an example in which a single operation with the production button 136 is performed and a cut-in image is displayed as a successful production when the single operation is performed is shown, but even if a single operation is performed, The cut-in image may not be displayed for failure.

  Further, in the above-described effect example, the result of the operation is displayed by a single operation with the effect button 136. For example, the result of the operation is displayed by performing a long press operation with the effect button 136. It may be. Further, for example, the result of the operation may be displayed by performing a continuous hitting operation with the effect button 136. Further, in the above-described effect example, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be enabled or disabled.

  Further, in the above-described effect example, the effect content (display of the cut-in image CI4) executed when the effect button 136 is pseudo-operated by the auto button function is performed by a single operation by the effect button 136. The content of the effect that is executed when the effect button 136 is simulated by the auto button function is the same as the effect content that is executed when the effect button 136 is operated. It may be different from the contents of the performance executed in the case of, or may be different.

  In the example of the effect shown in FIG. 153, the light emission mode of the effect button lamp 138 is different between a state where the normal operation of the effect button 136 in the effect of the single operation can be accepted and a state where the auto button function is enabled. Is shown.

  FIG. 154 is a diagram for explaining an example of the pending change notice. The following diagram shows how the production progresses in numerical order in parentheses. In FIGS. 154 (a-1) to (a-7) and FIGS. 154 (b-1) to (b-8), a hold change notice is made in which the display mode of the hold icon is changed by the operation of the effect button 136. It shows how it is.

  As shown in FIG. 154 (a-1), in the first special symbol display device 212, the symbol variation display of the special symbol 1 is started, and the decorative symbol display device 208 correspondingly displays the left symbol display region. The decorative symbols are variably displayed in 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. Further, in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol t1 are displayed. In the special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol t1, the variable display is performed as described above corresponding to the symbol variable display of the first special symbol display device 212.

  In FIG. 154 (a-1), since the number of hold of the variable display of the special figure 1 is 3, the three hold lamps in the first special figure hold lamp 218 are lit, and the fluctuation display of the special figure 2 is displayed. Since the number of holds is 0, all the hold lamps in the second special figure hold lamp 220 are turned off. On the other hand, in the hold display area below the decorative symbol display device 208, the first special figure 1 hold among the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 correspondingly. The display h11, the second special figure 1 hold display h12, and the third special figure 1 hold display h13 are displayed in the default display mode, and the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 is not held. Is displayed. Note that a variable icon display region 284 is provided in the lower left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Thereafter, when a game ball enters the first special figure starting port 230, as shown in FIG. 154 (a-2), the number of hold of the variable display of the special figure 1 increases to 4, and the first special figure hold lamp The four hold lamps at 218 are lit. Then, in the reserved display area at the bottom of the decorative symbol display device 208, the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 is displayed in the default display mode correspondingly. At this time, the effect button image BTH is displayed small so as to overlap the upper end portion of the hold icon in the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14.

  Thereafter, when a single pressing operation with the effect button 136 is performed, as shown in FIG. 154 (a-3), an animation display in which the hold icon in the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 is deformed is started. In FIG. 154 (a-3), an animation in which the hold icon displayed in a circle extends in the horizontal direction and changes to an ellipse is displayed. At this time, the effect button image BTH is continuously displayed, but may be deleted when the effect button 136 is operated. Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 154 (a-3) to (a-5), the hold icon extends in the vertical direction or in the horizontal direction only for a predetermined effect execution period (for example, 2 seconds). The animation continues.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 154 (a-6), after the animation that the hold icon in the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 bursts is displayed, as shown in FIG. 154 (a-7), the hold icon Changes to the notice display mode imitating Tonosama's face.

  On the other hand, in FIG. 154 (b-1), the state during the symbol variation display of special figure 1 is shown. At this time, since the number of hold of the variable display in FIG. 1 is 4, the four hold lamps in the first special figure hold lamp 218 are lit, and the number of hold of the variable display in FIG. Therefore, all the holding lamps in the second special figure holding lamp 220 are turned off. On the other hand, the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 are all displayed in a default display mode. At this time, the effect button image BTH is displayed small so as to overlap the upper end portion of the hold icon in the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14.

  Thereafter, when the symbol stop display timing is reached, as shown in FIG. 154 (b-2), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the combination of the decorative symbols is “decoration 2” − “decoration”, which is a combination of disparate decorative symbols. 3 ”-“ decoration 3 ”is finalized. In addition, the first special figure display device 212 is confirmed and displayed with the display result of deviation, and the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol t1 are also confirmed and displayed with the display result of deviation corresponding to the display result of the first special figure display device 212. Has been.

  In this state, for example, even if a single pressing operation with the effect button 136 is performed, as shown in FIG. 154 (b-3), the animation display in which the hold icon in the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 is deformed is displayed. Not started. That is, in this effect example, the operation of the effect button 136 is not accepted during the stop display of the symbol. Note that the operation of the effect button 136 may be accepted even during the stop display of the symbol. Here, the stop display of a symbol may be a stop display of a special figure or a stop display of a decorative symbol.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 154 (b-4), the symbol variation display based on the suspension of the first variation display in FIG. 1 is started. That is, the first special figure display device 212 starts the variable display of the special figure 1 and, in response, the decorative symbol display apparatus 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol. Variation display is also started at t1. At this time, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon displayed in the first special figure 1 hold display h11 is erased after moving to the variable icon display area 284, and the second special figure 1 hold display h12 is displayed. The animation icons for moving the hold icons respectively displayed on the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 to the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the third special figure 1 hold display h13 are displayed.

  After the symbol variation display is started as described above, when the pressing operation is performed once by the effect button 136, the third special figure 1 hold display h13 is performed at the timing shown in FIG. 154 (b-5). The animation display in which the hold icon is deformed is started, and thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 154 (b-5) to (b-6), the hold icon is extended in the vertical direction only for a predetermined effect execution period. Animation display that extends in the horizontal direction is continued.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 154 (b-7), after the animation that the hold icon in the third special figure 1 hold display h13 bursts is displayed, the hold icon is displayed as shown in FIG. 154 (b-8). It changes to the notice display mode imitating Tonosama's face.

  In the above-described production example, an example in which a single operation with the production button 136 is performed, and when the single operation is performed, a display is performed in which the hold icon is changed as the production is successful, but the single operation is performed. For example, when the production button 136 is changed, the display of changing the hold icon may not be performed. For example, when a single operation with the production button 136 is performed, the display of the hold icon is deformed and then the default display is displayed again. You may make it perform the effect display used as an aspect.

  Further, in the above-described effect example, the result of the operation is displayed by a single operation with the effect button 136. For example, the result of the operation is displayed by performing a long press operation with the effect button 136. It may be. In this case, for example, when the symbol variation display ends and the stop display is displayed during the long press operation, after the next symbol variation display starts, the effect button 136 is pressed again to perform the long press operation. It may be necessary to continue the long press operation even during the stop display of the symbol. Further, for example, the result of the operation may be displayed by performing a continuous hitting operation with the effect button 136. Moreover, in the production example described above, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be in an effective state. In this case, for example, when the symbol change display is terminated and stopped during the long press operation, the effect button is displayed to enable the long press automatic continuous hitting function after the next symbol change display is started. 136 may be required to be pressed again, or the long-pressing automatic continuous hitting function may be continuously effective even when the long-pressing operation is continued even during the symbol stop display. Further, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be disabled. Further, the operation of the effect button 136 may be performed in a pseudo manner by enabling the auto button function.

  FIG. 155 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect using the effect movable body. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 155 shows a state in which an effect of operating the effect button 136 is performed in the super reach. In the example of production shown in FIG. 155, for the convenience of explanation, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, and the second special figure reservation lamp 220 are decorated. It is shown on the lower right side of the display device 208.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 155 (a), “decoration 3”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 1”, which is a combination of outlying decorative symbols, is fixedly displayed. It should be noted that the first special figure display device 212 is confirmed and displayed with the display result of the deviation, and the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol t1 also display the deviation corresponding to the display result of the first special figure display device 212. The final result is displayed.

  Since the number of hold of the variable display in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is both 0, the hold lamp in the first special figure hold lamp 218 and the hold lamp in the second special figure hold lamp 220 are both turned off. Further, the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special figure hold display h14 are displayed in a state in which none is held.

  In addition, in this effect example, a state in which the effect movable body 224 is arranged so as to overlap the right end portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 is shown.

  Thereafter, when a game ball wins the first special figure starting port 230, as shown in FIG. 155 (b), the first special figure display device 212 starts displaying the fluctuation of the special figure 1 and responds to this. Thus, the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol, and also starts the variable display of the special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol t1.

  Then, after the transition to super reach as shown in FIG. 155 (c), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the characters “Press the button” prompting the user to press the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 155 (d). Display is performed.

  Then, when a single pressing operation by the effect button 136 is performed at the timing shown in FIG. 155 (e), as shown in FIG. 155 (f), the effect movable body 224 is moved to the initial position (the first position indicated by the chain line). (Position) to a position (second position) indicated by a solid line.

  In the above-described production example, the single operation by the production button 136 is performed, and when the single operation is performed, the production movable body 224 is moved as if the production was successful, but even if the single operation is performed, If the production fails, the production movable body 224 may be prevented from moving. Further, when a single operation is performed, the effect movable body 224 moves toward the second position, but it may be operated so as to return to the first position in the middle of the movement because the effect has failed.

  Moreover, in the example of the production described above, the result of the operation is displayed by a single operation with the production button 136. However, for example, the result of the operation is produced by performing a long press operation with the production button 136. It may be. Further, for example, the result of the operation may be produced by performing a continuous hitting operation with the production button 136. At this time, for example, each time the effect button 136 is pressed, the position may be gradually changed, or the position may be moved at the first position, or from the first position to the second position. You may make it move gradually toward. Further, in the above-described effect example, the long-press auto-strike function may be enabled, for example, because the display as shown in FIG. 155 (d) is performed and the operation of the effect button 136 can be accepted. If the effect button 136 is continuously pressed from the front, the effect movable body 224 is moved as if the effect button 136 is pseudo-pressed when the operation of the effect button 136 becomes possible. It may be configured to. After that, in the state where the effect button 136 is continuously pressed, when another effect for operating the effect button 136 is generated, the effect button 136 is pseudo-pressed in the generated effect. As a result, the result of the operation may be displayed or produced (in other words, the operation result is displayed or produced even when the production button 136 is repeatedly hit, and the same operation is performed when the button is pressed for a long time. The result may be displayed or produced), or the long-press auto-strike function may be disabled so that the production button 136 is not pressed in a pseudo manner. Moreover, in the production example described above, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be disabled.

  FIG. 156 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect produced by a single operation of an effect button. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 156 shows a state where an effect is generated by a single operation of the effect button 136 in the reach effect.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 156 (a), “decoration 3”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 1”, which is a combination of out-of-place decorative symbols, is fixedly displayed. It should be noted that the first special figure display device 212 is confirmed and displayed with the display result of the deviation, and the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol t1 also display the deviation corresponding to the display result of the first special figure display device 212. The final result is displayed. Further, in this effect example, a special figure 2 fourth symbol t2 is displayed below the special figure 1 fourth symbol t1. In the special figure 2 fourth symbol t2, in accordance with the symbol fluctuation display of the second special symbol display device 214, for example, the fluctuation display is performed in such a manner that the color represented in the square mark changes into a plurality of types. It is. As shown in FIG. 156 (a), since the second special figure display device 214 is confirmed and displayed with the display result of losing, the special figure 2 fourth symbol t2 is the display result of the second special figure display device 212. Is displayed in a definite manner with a display result of deviation (for example, a white square mark). In FIG. 156 and subsequent figures, for convenience of explanation, the special symbol 2 and the fourth symbol t2 are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in such a manner that the symbol that has been stopped can be recognized. The symbols are displayed in a manner that is difficult for the player to recognize. In addition, the special figure 2 4th symbol t2 may be displayed in a manner recognizable to the player. In FIG. 156 (a), the effect button lamp 138 is turned off, indicating that the effect button 136 is not in the operation acceptance state.

  Further, in FIG. 156 (a), since the number of hold of the variable display of the special figure 1 is 4, the four hold lamps in the first special figure hold lamp 218 are lit, and the fluctuation display of the special figure 2 is displayed. Since the number of holds is 0, all the hold lamps in the second special figure hold lamp 220 are turned off. Further, in this effect example, a variable icon display area 284 is provided at the lower center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a hold display area of FIG. 1 is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area 284. In the hold display area, the hold icon is displayed in the default display form in any of the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 156 (b), the symbol variation display based on the suspension of the first variation display in FIG. 1 is started. That is, the first special figure display device 212 starts the variable display of the special figure 1 and, in response, the decorative symbol display apparatus 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol. Variation display is also started at t1. At this time, the hold icon displayed in the first special figure 1 hold display h11 is moved to the change icon display area 284, and then changed to a change icon h00 having a hexagonal star shape as a notice display mode. In this production example, the timing at which the variation icon h00 is deleted is the timing at which the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed. However, it can be set to an appropriate timing, for example, at a timing before the decorative symbol is confirmed and displayed. It may also be before the start of reach production. Note that the change icon h00 is displayed in the same display mode as the hold icon which is the default display mode when displayed in the default display mode. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icons respectively displayed on the second special figure 1 hold display h12 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 are displayed on the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to third. An animation moving to the special figure 1 hold display h13 is performed. The fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 displays a hold icon that is not held.

  Thereafter, after the reach effect is started as shown in FIG. 156 (c), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the effect button image BT prompting the user to press the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 156 (d). “Press” is displayed in the center of the screen, and a remaining time meter MT is displayed below the effect button image BT. At this time, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light indicating that the effect button 136 is in the operation acceptance state.

  Then, when a single pressing operation with the effect button 136 is performed at the timing shown in FIG. 156 (e), the cut-in image CI5 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. 156 (f). The

  In the production example described above, an example in which a single operation with the production button 136 is performed and a cut-in image is displayed as a successful production when the single operation is performed is shown, but even if a single operation is performed, The cut-in image may not be displayed for failure.

  Further, in the above-described effect example, the result of the operation is displayed by a single operation with the effect button 136. For example, the result of the operation is displayed by performing a long press operation with the effect button 136. It may be. Further, for example, the result of the operation may be displayed by performing a continuous hitting operation with the effect button 136. Further, in the above-described effect example, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be enabled or disabled. Moreover, in the production example described above, the auto button function may be enabled or disabled.

  FIG. 157 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect produced by a single operation of an effect button. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 157 shows a state in which an effect by a single operation of the effect button 136 is performed in the reach effect.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 157 (a), “decoration 3” − “decoration 4” − “decoration 1”, which is a combination of outlier decorative symbols, is fixedly displayed. It should be noted that the first special figure display device 212 is confirmed and displayed with the display result of the deviation, and the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol t1 also display the deviation corresponding to the display result of the first special figure display device 212. The final result is displayed. In addition, the second special figure display device 214 is confirmed and displayed with the display result of deviation, and the special figure 2 and the fourth symbol t2 are also displayed with the deviation display result corresponding to the display result of the second special figure display device 214. Confirmed display. The effect button lamp 138 is turned off, indicating that the effect button 136 is not in the operation acceptance state. In the present embodiment, in the state where the effect button lamp 138 is lit, the operation accepting state may be basically set. In this case, the operation accepting state may be performed even when the effect button lamp 138 is turned off, or the operation accepting state may be performed even when the effect button lamp 138 is turned on. Further, when the effect button lamp 138 is lit, the operation is always accepted, but even when the effect button lamp 138 is turned off, the operation is not always not accepted. Good.

  Further, in FIG. 157 (a), since the number of hold of the variable display of the special figure 1 is four, the four hold lamps in the first special figure hold lamp 218 are lit, and the fluctuation display of the special figure 2 is displayed. Since the number of holds is 0, all the hold lamps in the second special figure hold lamp 220 are turned off. Further, in this effect example, a variable icon display area 284 is provided at the lower center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a hold display area of FIG. 1 is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area 284. In the hold display area, the hold icon is displayed in the default display form in any of the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14. In this effect example, the effect button 136 is continuously pressed before the start of the symbol variation display, but the long press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 157 (b), the symbol variation display based on the suspension of the first variation display in the special figure 1 is started. That is, the first special figure display device 212 starts the variable display of the special figure 1 and, in response, the decorative symbol display apparatus 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol. Variation display is also started at t1. At this time, the hold icon displayed in the first special figure 1 hold display h11 is moved to the change icon display area 284 and then changed to the change icon h00 which is a notice display mode. In addition, the hold icons respectively displayed in the second special figure 1 hold display h12 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 are displayed as the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the third special figure 1 hold display h13. An animation that moves to is displayed. The fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 displays a hold icon that is not held.

  Thereafter, after the reach effect is started as shown in FIG. 157 (c), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the effect button image BT prompting the user to press the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. “Press” is displayed in the center of the screen, and a remaining time meter MT is displayed below the effect button image BT. At this time, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light indicating that the effect button 136 is in the operation acceptance state. At this time, since the long press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled, the operation of the effect button 136 is not accepted. In order for the operation to be accepted, it is necessary to once cancel the press of the effect button 136 and press the effect button 136 again.

  Then, as shown in FIGS. 157 (e) to (f), the effect button 136 continues to be pressed during the operation reception period of the effect button 136, and then the timing is as shown in FIG. 157 (g). When an operation reception period (for example, 5 seconds) of the button 136 elapses, the display mode of the gauge of the remaining time meter MT becomes a mode in which the remaining time is 0 seconds. Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 157 (h), the cut-in image CI5 is finally displayed.

  In this effect example, when the effect button 136 is not operated effectively, the cut-in image CI5 may not be displayed, and is different from the cut-in image CI5 shown in FIG. 156 (f). A cut-in image in a display mode may be displayed.

  FIG. 158 is a diagram for explaining an example of the effect by the single operation of the effect button. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 158 shows a state where an effect is generated by a single operation of the effect button 136 in the reach effect.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 158 (a), “decoration 3” − “decoration 4” − “decoration 1”, which is a combination of outlier decorative symbols, is fixedly displayed. It should be noted that the first special figure display device 212 is confirmed and displayed with the display result of the deviation, and the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol t1 also display the deviation corresponding to the display result of the first special figure display device 212. The final result is displayed. In addition, the second special figure display device 214 is confirmed and displayed with the display result of deviation, and the special figure 2 and the fourth symbol t2 are also displayed with the deviation display result corresponding to the display result of the second special figure display device 214. Confirmed display. The effect button lamp 138 is turned off, indicating that the effect button 136 is not in the operation acceptance state.

  Further, in FIG. 158 (a), since the number of hold of the variable display of the special figure 1 is four, the four hold lamps in the first special figure hold lamp 218 are lit, and the fluctuation display of the special figure 2 is displayed. Since the number of holds is 0, all the hold lamps in the second special figure hold lamp 220 are turned off. Further, in this effect example, a variable icon display area 284 is provided at the lower center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a hold display area of FIG. 1 is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area 284. In the hold display area, the hold icon is displayed in the default display form in any of the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14. In this effect example, the auto button function is in a valid state, and a character display of “auto setting” indicating that is displayed on the lower left of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this effect example, the effect button lamp 138 is turned off, but it may be made to emit green light as described above. Further, in this effect example, the effect button 136 is continuously pressed before the start of the symbol variation display, but the long press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 158 (b), the symbol variation display based on the suspension of the first variation display in FIG. 1 is started. That is, the first special figure display device 212 starts the variable display of the special figure 1 and, in response, the decorative symbol display apparatus 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol. Variation display is also started at t1. At this time, the hold icon displayed in the first special figure 1 hold display h11 is moved to the change icon display area 284 and then changed to the change icon h00 which is a notice display mode. In addition, the hold icons respectively displayed in the second special figure 1 hold display h12 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 are displayed as the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the third special figure 1 hold display h13. An animation that moves to is displayed. The fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 displays a hold icon that is not held.

  Thereafter, after the reach effect is started as shown in FIG. 158 (c), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the effect button image BT prompting the user to press the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. “Press” is displayed in the center of the screen, and a remaining time meter MT is displayed below the effect button image BT. At this time, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light indicating that the effect button 136 is in the operation acceptance state. In addition, the green light emission mode which shows that the auto button function is in a valid state may be used.

  Then, as shown in FIGS. 158 (e) to (f), after the effect button 136 continues to be pressed, a predetermined auto button function activation time (for example, the effect button 136 at the timing of FIG. 158 (g)). When 2.5 seconds have elapsed since the operation was accepted, the auto button function is activated and a single operation by the effect button 136 is performed in a pseudo manner. Then, as shown in FIG. 158 (h), a cut-in image CI5 is displayed.

  In this effect example, when the auto button function is activated and the effect button 136 is operated in a pseudo manner, the display is different from the cut-in image CI5 shown in FIGS. 156 (f) and 157 (h). The cut-in image of the aspect may be displayed.

  FIG. 159 is a diagram for describing an example of an effect produced by repeatedly operating the effect buttons. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 159 shows a state where an effect is obtained by a repetitive operation of the effect button 136 in the reach effect.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 159 (a), “decoration 3”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 1”, which is a combination of outlier decorative symbols, is fixedly displayed. It should be noted that the first special figure display device 212 is confirmed and displayed with the display result of the deviation, and the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol t1 also display the deviation corresponding to the display result of the first special figure display device 212. The final result is displayed. The second special figure display device 214 is also confirmed and displayed with the display result of deviation, and the special figure 2 and the fourth symbol t2 are also displayed with a deviation display result corresponding to the display result of the second special figure display device 214. Confirmed display. In FIG. 159 (a), the effect button lamp 138 is turned off, indicating that the effect button 136 is not in the operation acceptance state.

  Further, in FIG. 159 (a), since the number of hold of the variable display of the special figure 1 is 4, the four hold lamps in the first special figure hold lamp 218 are lit, and the fluctuation display of the special figure 2 is displayed. Since the number of holds is 0, all the hold lamps in the second special figure hold lamp 220 are turned off. Further, in this effect example, a variable icon display area 284 is provided at the lower center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a hold display area of FIG. 1 is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area 284. In the hold display area, the hold icon is displayed in the default display form in any of the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 159 (b), the symbol variation display based on the suspension of the first variation display in the special figure 1 is started. That is, the first special figure display device 212 starts the variable display of the special figure 1 and, in response, the decorative symbol display apparatus 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol. Variation display is also started at t1. At this time, the hold icon displayed in the first special figure 1 hold display h11 is moved to the change icon display area 284, and then changed to a change icon h00 having a hexagonal star shape as a notice display mode. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icons respectively displayed on the second special figure 1 hold display h12 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 are displayed on the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to third. An animation moving to the special figure 1 hold display h13 is performed. The fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 displays a hold icon that is not held.

  Thereafter, after the reach effect is started as shown in FIG. 159 (c), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “ The characters “Repeat repeatedly” are displayed in the center of the screen, and a remaining time meter MT is displayed below the effect button image BT. That is, the continuous hit operation effect is started. At this time, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light indicating that the effect button 136 is in the operation acceptance state. Further, a continuous hitting meter RD is displayed on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208. This repeated hitting meter RD is displayed so that the gauge increases in accordance with the number of operations of the effect button 136, and when the gauge is full, it is configured that the notice effect is executed assuming that the effect is successful. Has been.

  Then, as shown in FIGS. 159 (e) to (g), when the repeated operation by the effect button 136 is performed, the gauge of the repeated hit meter RD increases according to the number of operations of the effect button 136. The effect button lamp 138 remains illuminated in red during the operation reception period of the effect button 136 regardless of whether or not the effect button 136 is operated.

  Then, when the operation reception period (for example, 5 seconds) of the effect button 136 elapses at the timing shown in FIG. 159 (g), the display mode of the gauge of the remaining time meter MT becomes the remaining 0 seconds. At this time, it is shown that the continuous hitting meter RD is not full and increased to 3/6. At this time, since the operation reception period of the effect button 136 has elapsed, the effect button lamp 138 is turned off. Then, as shown in FIG. 159 (h), since the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD has not become full, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “unfortunately…” indicating that the production has failed. Is done.

  In the above-described effect example, an example is shown in which a continuous hitting operation with the effect button 136 is performed, and as a result of the repeated hitting operation, an indication to that effect is displayed, but the gauge of the repeated hitting meter RD is full. In such a case, it may be determined that the production has been successful, and a notice display such as a cut-in image or a notice that a big hit will be announced may be performed. Whether or not the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD can be filled up is determined based on the display result of the special figure. That is, if it is not possible to fill the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD, the gauge will not become full no matter how many times the effect button 136 is hit.

  Further, in the above-described effect example, when the striking operation by the effect button 136 (an example of the first operation means) is performed and the effect is successful, a notice display such as a cut-in image or a big hit is announced. For example, even when a continuous hitting operation is performed by an OK button 137e (an example of the second operation means), a notice display such as a cut-in image or a notice for notifying that a big hit will be made. It may be performed. At this time, the long-pressing automatic hitting function by the OK button 137e is disabled, and the long-pressing operation by the OK button 137e does not perform a notice display such as a cut-in image or a notice that a big hit will be given. Good. In addition, the long-pressing automatic continuous hitting function by the OK button 137e may be validated, and a notice display informing that a cut-in image or the like will be a big hit is also performed by a long-pressing operation by the OK button 137e. In this case, since there is a difference in operability between the effect button 136 and the OK button 137e, such as a difference in button size or stroke, the player can select and operate a favorite button. There is. Further, since the OK button 137e is smaller than the effect button 136 and is not provided with light emitting means such as the effect button lamp 138, it is difficult for the player to know whether the OK button 137e is in an operation valid state, and the OK button 137e. For example, it can be said that the operation is for advanced users who have obtained the information from a strategy magazine or the Internet. Here, the OK button 137e may be provided on the left side or the lower side of the effect button 136 so that the OK button 137e can be easily operated with the left hand.

  Further, in the above-described effect example, when the striking operation by the effect button 136 (an example of the first operation means) is performed and the effect is successful, a notice display such as a cut-in image or a big hit is announced. The notification is performed, but, for example, only by operating the OK button 137e (an example of the second operation means) once, a notice display such as a cut-in image or a notice that a big hit is given is performed. You may do it. In this case, it may not be notified that an effect is performed by a single operation of the OK button 137e. As a result, there may be a case where superiority can be given to a skilled player who knows the existence of the back button effect.

  In this effect example, the continuous hit operation effect is an effect that can be started while the symbol variation display is being executed, and is an example of a third effect that prompts the operation means to be operated continuously in the first operation mode. it can.

  Further, in this effect example, when the long-press auto repetitive strike function is disabled, the effect that is executed when the gauge of the repetitive strike meter RD is full is the operation means in the second operation mode. It can be said that it is an example of the second effect that is easier to start when the operation is performed the second number of times by the operation means in the first operation mode than when the operation is performed once. Moreover, it can also be said to be an example of a second effect that does not start when only one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode.

  Note that, in this effect example, when the long press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled, the effect button lamp 138 may be in the second state during the operation reception period of the effect button 136. In other words, the effect button lamp 138 may not emit light, or may emit blue light.

  FIG. 160 is a diagram illustrating a state in which long-pressing automatic repeated hitting is performed in the effect by the continuous hit operation of the effect button. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 160 shows a state in which an effect is produced by a repetitive operation of the effect button 136 in the reach effect.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 160 (a), “decoration 3”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 1”, which is a combination of extraordinary decorative symbols, is fixedly displayed. It should be noted that the first special figure display device 212 is confirmed and displayed with the display result of the deviation, and the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol t1 also display the deviation corresponding to the display result of the first special figure display device 212. The final result is displayed. The second special figure display device 214 is also confirmed and displayed with the display result of deviation, and the special figure 2 and the fourth symbol t2 are also displayed with a deviation display result corresponding to the display result of the second special figure display device 214. Confirmed display. In FIG. 160A, the effect button lamp 138 is turned off, indicating that the effect button 136 is not in the operation acceptance state.

  Further, in FIG. 160 (a), since the number of hold of the variable display of the special figure 1 is four, the four hold lamps in the first special figure hold lamp 218 are lit, and the fluctuation display of the special figure 2 is displayed. Since the number of holds is 0, all the hold lamps in the second special figure hold lamp 220 are turned off. Further, in this effect example, a variable icon display area 284 is provided at the lower center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a hold display area of FIG. 1 is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area 284. In the hold display area, the hold icon is displayed in the default display form in any of the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 160 (b), the symbol variation display based on the suspension of the first variation display in the special figure 1 is started. That is, the first special figure display device 212 starts the variable display of the special figure 1 and, in response, the decorative symbol display apparatus 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol. Variation display is also started at t1. At this time, the hold icon displayed in the first special figure 1 hold display h11 is moved to the change icon display area 284, and then changed to a change icon h00 having a hexagonal star shape as a notice display mode. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icons respectively displayed on the second special figure 1 hold display h12 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 are displayed on the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to third. An animation moving to the special figure 1 hold display h13 is performed. The fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 displays a hold icon that is not held.

  Thereafter, after the reach effect is started as shown in FIG. 160 (c), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the effect button image BT prompting the user to press the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 160 (d). The characters “Repeat repeatedly” are displayed in the center of the screen, and a remaining time meter MT is displayed below the effect button image BT. At this time, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light indicating that the effect button 136 is in the operation acceptance state. Further, a continuous hitting meter RD is displayed on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In this effect example, the long press automatic continuous hitting function is in an effective state, and the player starts the long press operation of the effect button 136 after the display as shown in FIG. 160 (d) is performed.

  Then, as shown in FIGS. 160 (e) to 160 (g), the continuous hitting operation is performed in a pseudo manner by the long press automatic continuous hitting function, and the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD increases. In this case, at the start of the long press operation, one operation due to the press of the effect button 136 is accepted, and then the operation is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) as described above. A pseudo continuous hit operation is started. The effect button lamp 138 remains illuminated in red during the operation reception period of the effect button 136 regardless of whether or not the effect button 136 is operated.

  Then, when the operation reception period (for example, 5 seconds) of the effect button 136 elapses at the timing of FIG. 160 (g), the display mode of the gauge of the remaining time meter MT becomes the remaining 0 seconds. At this time, it is shown that the continuous hitting meter RD is not full and increased to 4/6. At this time, since the operation reception period of the effect button 136 has elapsed, the effect button lamp 138 is turned off. Then, as shown in FIG. 160 (h), since the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD is not full, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “unfortunate ...” indicating that the production has failed. Is done.

  In the production example described above, an example in which a pseudo continuous operation of the production button 136 by the long press automatic continuous hitting function is performed, and as a result, the display indicating that the production has failed is shown. If the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD becomes full after 4 seconds, it may be possible to give a notice of a cut-in image or a notice of a big hit, assuming that the production has been successful. In other words, when the state in which the operating means is operated is maintained for the second time, it is assumed that the operating means is operated in the first operation mode for the first number of times (for example, 20 times) in the first operation mode. It can be said that the production of is configured to be able to start.

  In this effect example, the effect executed when the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD is full is the first operation by the operation means in the first operation mode during the execution of the third effect. This is an example of the first effect that can be started when the operation is performed, and can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode during the execution of the third effect. it can. In other words, in this effect example, the result of the operation (first effect) is displayed even when the effect button 136 is repeatedly hit, and the same operation result (first effect) is displayed even when the button is pressed for a long time. It can be said that it is displayed.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the notification button 136 is operated a plurality of times (first operation) for a notification display such as a cut-in image that is displayed successfully in a repeated hitting operation effect or a notification that a big hit is expected. It is an effect that may be executed in response to being operated in a mode, and when a long press operation of the effect button 136 (operated in the second operation mode) is performed, the continuous hit operation effect is displayed successfully. It can be said that a notice display such as a cut-in image or a notice for notifying that it will be a big hit may be started.

  In the present embodiment, a notice display such as a cut-in image that has been successfully displayed in a continuous hitting operation effect or a notification for notifying that it will be a big hit may be started during the display of the symbol variation display. It can also be said.

  FIG. 161 is a diagram illustrating a state in which a long press auto-strike is performed in the effect by the repeated operation of the effect button. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 161 shows a state in which an effect is produced by a repetitive operation of the effect button 136 in the reach effect.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 161 (a), “decoration 3”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 1”, which is a combination of outlier decorative symbols, is fixedly displayed. It should be noted that the first special figure display device 212 is confirmed and displayed with the display result of the deviation, and the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol t1 also display the deviation corresponding to the display result of the first special figure display device 212. The final result is displayed. The second special figure display device 214 is also confirmed and displayed with the display result of deviation, and the special figure 2 and the fourth symbol t2 are also displayed with a deviation display result corresponding to the display result of the second special figure display device 214. Confirmed display. In FIG. 161A, the effect button lamp 138 is turned off, indicating that the effect button 136 is not in the operation acceptance state.

  Further, in FIG. 161 (a), since the number of hold of the variable display of the special figure 1 is four, the four hold lamps in the first special figure hold lamp 218 are lit, and the fluctuation display of the special figure 2 is displayed. Since the number of holds is 0, all the hold lamps in the second special figure hold lamp 220 are turned off. Further, in this effect example, a variable icon display area 284 is provided at the lower center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a hold display area of FIG. 1 is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area 284. In the hold display area, the hold icon is displayed in the default display form in any of the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14.

  In this effect example, the long press automatic continuous hitting function is in an effective state, and the player continues to press the effect button 136 before the start of the symbol variation display.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 161 (b), the symbol variation display based on the suspension of the first variation display in the special figure 1 is started. That is, the first special figure display device 212 starts the variable display of the special figure 1 and, in response, the decorative symbol display apparatus 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol. Variation display is also started at t1. At this time, the hold icon displayed in the first special figure 1 hold display h11 is moved to the change icon display area 284, and then changed to a change icon h00 having a hexagonal star shape as a notice display mode. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icons respectively displayed on the second special figure 1 hold display h12 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 are displayed on the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to third. An animation moving to the special figure 1 hold display h13 is performed. The fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 displays a hold icon that is not held.

  Thereafter, after the reach effect is started as shown in FIG. 161 (c), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the effect button image BT prompting the user to press the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 161 (d). The characters “Repeat repeatedly” are displayed in the center of the screen, and a remaining time meter MT is displayed below the effect button image BT. At this time, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light indicating that the effect button 136 is in the operation acceptance state. Further, a continuous hitting meter RD is displayed on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Then, as shown in FIGS. 161 (e) to (g), the continuous hitting operation is performed in a pseudo manner by the long press automatic continuous hitting function, and the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD increases. In this effect example, since the player has already started the long press operation of the effect button 136, the pseudo continuous hit operation is started when the effect button 136 is in the operation acceptance state. The effect button lamp 138 remains illuminated in red during the operation reception period of the effect button 136 regardless of whether or not the effect button 136 is operated.

  Then, when the operation reception period (for example, 5 seconds) of the effect button 136 elapses at the timing of FIG. 161 (g), the display mode of the gauge of the remaining time meter MT becomes the remaining 0 seconds. At this time, it is shown that the continuous hitting meter RD is not full and has increased to 5/6. At this time, since the operation reception period of the effect button 136 has elapsed, the effect button lamp 138 is turned off. Then, as shown in FIG. 161 (h), since the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD is not full, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “unfortunate ...” indicating that the production has failed. Is done.

  In the above-described production example, a pseudo continuous operation of the production button 136 by the long-press auto-tapping function is performed, and as a result, a display indicating that the production has failed is shown. When the tank is full, it is possible to perform a notice display of a cut-in image or a notice that a big hit will be made, assuming that the production has been successful. That is, when the operation means is being operated for the second time, the first effect can be started as if the operation means was operated in the first operation mode for the first number of times. It can be said that it is composed.

  In this effect example, the effect executed when the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD is full is the first operation by the operation means in the first operation mode during the execution of the third effect. This is an example of the first effect that can be started when the operation is performed, and can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode during the execution of the third effect. it can.

  FIG. 162 is a diagram for describing an example of an effect produced by repeated operation of an effect button. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 162 shows a state in which an effect is produced by a repetitive operation of the effect button 136 in the reach effect.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 162 (a), “decoration 3”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 1”, which is a combination of outlier decorative symbols, is fixedly displayed. It should be noted that the first special figure display device 212 is confirmed and displayed with the display result of the deviation, and the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol t1 also display the deviation corresponding to the display result of the first special figure display device 212. The final result is displayed. The second special figure display device 214 is also confirmed and displayed with the display result of deviation, and the special figure 2 and the fourth symbol t2 are also displayed with a deviation display result corresponding to the display result of the second special figure display device 214. Confirmed display. In FIG. 162 (a), the effect button lamp 138 is turned off, indicating that the effect button 136 is not in the operation acceptance state.

  Further, in FIG. 162 (a), since the number of hold of the variable display of the special figure 1 is 4, the four hold lamps in the first special figure hold lamp 218 are lit, and the fluctuation display of the special figure 2 is displayed. Since the number of holds is 0, all the hold lamps in the second special figure hold lamp 220 are turned off. Further, in this effect example, a variable icon display area 284 is provided at the lower center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a hold display area of FIG. 1 is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area 284. In the hold display area, the hold icon is displayed in the default display form in any of the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 162 (b), the symbol variation display based on the suspension of the first variation display in the special figure 1 is started. That is, the first special figure display device 212 starts the variable display of the special figure 1 and, in response, the decorative symbol display apparatus 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol. Variation display is also started at t1. At this time, the hold icon displayed in the first special figure 1 hold display h11 is moved to the change icon display area 284, and then changed to a change icon h00 having a hexagonal star shape as a notice display mode. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icons respectively displayed on the second special figure 1 hold display h12 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 are displayed on the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to third. An animation moving to the special figure 1 hold display h13 is performed. The fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 displays a hold icon that is not held.

  Thereafter, after the reach effect is started as shown in FIG. 162 (c), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “ The characters “Repeat repeatedly” are displayed in the center of the screen, and a remaining time meter MT is displayed below the effect button image BT. At this time, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light indicating that the effect button 136 is in the operation acceptance state. Further, a continuous hitting meter RD is displayed on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Then, as shown in FIGS. 162 (e) to (h), when the continuous operation by the effect button 136 is performed, the gauge of the continuous hit meter RD increases according to the number of operations of the effect button 136. The effect button lamp 138 is turned off each time the effect button 136 is pressed, and emits red again when the press operation is released. Therefore, it is easy for the player to press the effect button 136. Sometimes it can be recognized. In addition, each time the effect button 136 is pressed, a different color (for example, blue) may be emitted.

  When the operation reception period (for example, 5 seconds) of the effect button 136 elapses at the timing of FIG. 162 (h), the display mode of the gauge of the remaining time meter MT is set to the remaining 0 seconds. At this time, it is shown that the continuous hitting meter RD is not full and increased to 3/6. At this time, since the operation reception period of the effect button 136 has elapsed, the effect button lamp 138 is turned off. Then, as shown in FIG. 162 (i), since the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD has not become full, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “unfortunate ...” indicating that the production has failed. Is done.

  In the above-described effect example, an example is shown in which a continuous hitting operation with the effect button 136 is performed, and as a result of the repeated hitting operation, an indication to that effect is displayed, but the gauge of the repeated hitting meter RD is full. In such a case, it may be determined that the production has been successful, and a notice display such as a cut-in image or a notice that a big hit will be announced may be performed. Whether or not the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD can be filled up is determined based on the display result of the special figure. That is, if it is not possible to fill the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD, the gauge will not become full no matter how many times the effect button 136 is hit.

  Also, in the above-described effect example, the long-press auto-strike function may be enabled. In this case, the effect button lamp 138 blinks only once when the effect button 136 is first pressed. Also good.

  FIG. 163 is a diagram illustrating a state in which a hold change advance notice is performed during the production by the continuous operation of the production button. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 163 shows a state in which the effect by the continuous operation of the effect button 136 is performed and the hold change notice is simultaneously performed in the reach effect.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 163 (a), “decoration 3”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 1”, which is a combination of outlying decorative symbols, is fixedly displayed. It should be noted that the first special figure display device 212 is confirmed and displayed with the display result of the deviation, and the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol t1 also display the deviation corresponding to the display result of the first special figure display device 212. The final result is displayed. The second special figure display device 214 is also confirmed and displayed with the display result of deviation, and the special figure 2 and the fourth symbol t2 are also displayed with a deviation display result corresponding to the display result of the second special figure display device 214. Confirmed display. In FIG. 163 (a), the effect button lamp 138 is turned off, indicating that the effect button 136 is not in the operation acceptance state.

  Further, in FIG. 163 (a), since the number of hold of the variable display of the special figure 1 is four, the four hold lamps in the first special figure hold lamp 218 are lit, and the fluctuation display of the special figure 2 is displayed. Since the number of holds is 0, all the hold lamps in the second special figure hold lamp 220 are turned off. Further, in this effect example, a variable icon display area 284 is provided at the lower center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a hold display area of FIG. 1 is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area 284. In the hold display area, the hold icon is displayed in the default display form in any of the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 163 (b), the symbol variation display based on the suspension of the first variation display in the special figure 1 is started. That is, the first special figure display device 212 starts the variable display of the special figure 1 and, in response, the decorative symbol display apparatus 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol. Variation display is also started at t1. At this time, the hold icon displayed in the first special figure 1 hold display h11 is moved to the change icon display area 284, and then changed to a change icon h00 having a hexagonal star shape as a notice display mode. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icons respectively displayed on the second special figure 1 hold display h12 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 are displayed on the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to third. An animation moving to the special figure 1 hold display h13 is performed. The fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 displays a hold icon that is not held.

  Thereafter, after the reach effect is started as shown in FIG. 163 (c), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “ The characters “Repeat repeatedly” are displayed in the center of the screen, and a remaining time meter MT is displayed below the effect button image BT. At this time, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light indicating that the effect button 136 is in the operation acceptance state. Further, a continuous hitting meter RD is displayed on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  In this effect example, the long press automatic continuous hitting function is in an effective state, and the player starts the long press operation of the effect button 136 after the display as shown in FIG.

  Then, as shown in FIGS. 163 (e) to (g), the continuous hitting operation is performed in a pseudo manner by the long press automatic continuous hitting function, and the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD increases. In this case, at the start of the long press operation, one operation due to the press of the effect button 136 is accepted, and then the operation is maintained for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) as described above. A pseudo continuous hit operation is started. The effect button lamp 138 remains illuminated in red during the operation reception period of the effect button 136 regardless of whether or not the effect button 136 is operated.

  Also, in this production example, a game ball enters the first special figure starting port 230 during execution of the above-described repeated hitting production, and the number of suspension of the variable display of the special figure 1 increases to 4, FIG. 163 (f) As shown in FIG. 4, the four holding lamps in the first special figure holding lamp 218 are turned on. Then, in the hold display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 is displayed in the default display mode correspondingly. At this time, the effect button image BTH is displayed small so as to overlap the upper end portion of the hold icon in the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14. That is, the pending change notice is started. However, in this effect example, priority is given to the continuous hit effect that was being executed, and the operation of the effect button 136 accepts only the hit operation related to the repeat hit effect, and the operation of the effect button 136 related to the pending change notice is at least the repeat hit effect. Will not be accepted until.

  Then, when the operation reception period (for example, 5 seconds) of the effect button 136 elapses at the timing of FIG. 163 (h), the display mode of the gauge of the remaining time meter MT becomes the remaining 0 seconds. At this time, it is shown that the continuous hitting meter RD is not full and increased to 4/6. At this time, since the operation reception period of the effect button 136 has elapsed, the effect button lamp 138 is turned off. Then, as shown in FIG. 160 (i), since the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD has not become full, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “unfortunate ...” indicating that the production has failed. Is done.

  In this effect example, after the continuous hit effect is completed in this manner, the operation of the effect button 136 related to the hold change notice is accepted. At this time, if the long press automatic continuous hitting function is continuously enabled and the effect button 136 is continuously pressed, the hold change notice may be started by a pseudo operation of the effect button 136. Alternatively, it may be configured such that when the continuous hitting effect is finished, the long press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled and the effect button 136 needs to be pressed again. It should be noted that during the execution of the continuous hit effect, the continuous hit effect and the hold change advance notice may be executed simultaneously so that the operation of the effect button 136 relating to the hold change advance notice can be accepted. At this time, the operation of the effect button 136 related to the hold change notice may be accepted by the operation of the long press automatic continuous hitting function, or after the hold change notice is started, the long press operation of the effect button 136 is temporarily performed. It may be configured to be able to execute the hold change notice by canceling and depressing the effect button 136 again.

  In the above-described production example, a pseudo continuous operation of the production button 136 by the long-press auto-tapping function is performed, and as a result, a display indicating that the production has failed is shown. When the tank is full, it is possible to perform a notice display of a cut-in image or a notice that a big hit will be made, assuming that the production has been successful.

  Also, in this effect example, for example, two effect buttons are provided, and the first effect button and the second effect button can be accepted in the repetitive strike effect, and are held only by the operation of the first effect button. You may be comprised so that a change notice can be started. In this case, for example, for the second effect button, if the long press automatic continuous hitting function is enabled, the first effect button is operated to hold and change while holding the second effect button for long press operation. A notice can be started.

  FIG. 164 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect produced by a long press operation of an effect button. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 164 shows a state where an effect is produced by a long press operation of the effect button 136 in the reach effect.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 164 (a), “decoration 3”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 1”, which is a combination of outlying decorative symbols, is fixedly displayed. It should be noted that the first special figure display device 212 is confirmed and displayed with the display result of the deviation, and the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol t1 also display the deviation corresponding to the display result of the first special figure display device 212. The final result is displayed. The second special figure display device 214 is also confirmed and displayed with the display result of deviation, and the special figure 2 and the fourth symbol t2 are also displayed with a deviation display result corresponding to the display result of the second special figure display device 214. Confirmed display. In FIG. 164 (a), the effect button lamp 138 is turned off, indicating that the effect button 136 is not in the operation acceptance state.

  Further, in FIG. 164 (a), since the number of hold of the variable display of the special figure 1 is four, the four hold lamps in the first special figure hold lamp 218 are lit, and the fluctuation display of the special figure 2 is displayed. Since the number of holds is 0, all the hold lamps in the second special figure hold lamp 220 are turned off. Further, in this effect example, a variable icon display area 284 is provided at the lower center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a hold display area of FIG. 1 is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area 284. In the hold display area, the hold icon is displayed in the default display form in any of the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 164 (b), the symbol variation display based on the suspension of the first variation display in the special figure 1 is started. That is, the first special figure display device 212 starts the variable display of the special figure 1 and, in response, the decorative symbol display apparatus 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol. Variation display is also started at t1. At this time, the hold icon displayed in the first special figure 1 hold display h11 is moved to the change icon display area 284, and then changed to a change icon h00 having a hexagonal star shape as a notice display mode. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icons respectively displayed on the second special figure 1 hold display h12 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 are displayed on the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to third. An animation moving to the special figure 1 hold display h13 is performed. The fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 displays a hold icon that is not held.

  Thereafter, after the reach effect is started as shown in FIG. 164 (c), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the effect button image BT prompting the user to press the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 164 (d). “Long press to save the meter” is displayed in the center of the screen, and a remaining time meter MT is displayed below the effect button image BT. At this time, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light indicating that the effect button 136 is in the operation acceptance state. A long press meter NO is displayed on the left side of the fluctuation icon display area 284. This long press meter NO is displayed so that the gauge increases in accordance with the accumulated time that the production button 136 is pressed. It is configured to be.

  Then, as shown in FIGS. 164 (e) to (g), when the long press operation with the effect button 136 is performed, the gauge of the long press meter NO increases according to the pressing time of the effect button 136. . The effect button lamp 138 remains illuminated in red during the operation reception period of the effect button 136 regardless of whether or not the effect button 136 is operated.

  Then, when the operation reception period (for example, 5 seconds) of the effect button 136 elapses at the timing of FIG. 164 (g), the display mode of the gauge of the remaining time meter MT is set to the remaining 0 seconds. At this time, it is indicated that the long press meter NO is not full and increased to 5/6. At this time, since the operation reception period of the effect button 136 has elapsed, the effect button lamp 138 is turned off. Then, as shown in FIG. 164 (h), the gauge of the long press meter NO did not become full. Display is performed.

  In the example of the effect described above, an example is shown in which a long press operation with the effect button 136 is performed, and as a result of the long press operation being performed, a display to that effect is displayed, but the gauge of the long press meter NO is full. In the case of a tan, it may be possible to perform a notice display such as a cut-in image or a notice that a big hit will be made, assuming that the production has been successful. Whether or not the gauge of the long press meter NO can be filled is determined based on the display result of the special figure. That is, if it is not possible to make the gauge of the long press meter NO full, the gauge will not become full no matter how long the effect button 136 is kept pressed.

  Further, in the above-described effect example, the long press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled, but the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be enabled. In this case, for example, when the effect button 136 is pressed for a long time during the long press effect, the continuous hit operation may be performed in a pseudo manner by the long press automatic continuous hit function.

  FIG. 165 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect produced by a long press operation of an effect button. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 165 shows a state where an effect is produced by a long press operation of the effect button 136 in the reach effect.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 165 (a), “decoration 3”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 1”, which is a combination of out-of-order decorative symbols, is fixedly displayed. It should be noted that the first special figure display device 212 is confirmed and displayed with the display result of the deviation, and the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol t1 also display the deviation corresponding to the display result of the first special figure display device 212. The final result is displayed. The second special figure display device 214 is also confirmed and displayed with the display result of deviation, and the special figure 2 and the fourth symbol t2 are also displayed with a deviation display result corresponding to the display result of the second special figure display device 214. Confirmed display. In FIG. 165 (a), the effect button lamp 138 is turned off, indicating that the effect button 136 is not in the operation acceptance state.

  Further, in FIG. 165 (a), since the number of hold of the variable display of the special figure 1 is four, the four hold lamps in the first special figure hold lamp 218 are lit, and the fluctuation display of the special figure 2 is displayed. Since the number of holds is 0, all the hold lamps in the second special figure hold lamp 220 are turned off. Further, in this effect example, a variable icon display area 284 is provided at the lower center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a hold display area of FIG. 1 is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area 284. In the hold display area, the hold icon is displayed in the default display form in any of the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14. In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 165 (a), the effect button 136 is continuously pressed before the start of the symbol variation display.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 165 (b), the symbol variation display based on the suspension of the first variation display in the special figure 1 is started. That is, the first special figure display device 212 starts the variable display of the special figure 1 and, in response, the decorative symbol display apparatus 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol. Variation display is also started at t1. At this time, the hold icon displayed in the first special figure 1 hold display h11 is moved to the change icon display area 284, and then changed to a change icon h00 having a hexagonal star shape as a notice display mode. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icons respectively displayed on the second special figure 1 hold display h12 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 are displayed on the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to third. An animation moving to the special figure 1 hold display h13 is performed. The fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 displays a hold icon that is not held.

  Thereafter, after the reach effect is started as shown in FIG. 165 (c), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “ “Long press to save the meter” is displayed in the center of the screen, and a remaining time meter MT is displayed below the effect button image BT. At this time, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light indicating that the effect button 136 is in the operation acceptance state. A long press meter NO is displayed on the left side of the fluctuation icon display area 284. In this effect example, since the effect button 136 has been continuously pressed before the start of the long press effect, the operation of the effect button 136 is not accepted, and the gauge of the long press meter NO does not increase. In order to accept the operation, it is necessary to once cancel the press of the effect button 136 and to operate (long press) the effect button 136 again.

  As shown in FIGS. 165 (e), (f),..., After the effect button 136 continues to be pressed during the operation reception period of the effect button 136, the timing shown in FIG. When the operation reception period (for example, 5 seconds) of the effect button 136 elapses, the display mode of the gauge of the remaining time meter MT becomes the remaining 0 seconds. At this time, it is indicated that the long press meter NO is zero. At this time, since the operation reception period of the effect button 136 has elapsed, the effect button lamp 138 is turned off. Then, as shown in FIG. 165 (h), since the gauge of the long press meter NO did not become full, the decorative symbol display device 208 assumed that the production failed and “unfortunately…” Display is performed.

  In the above-described effect example, when the long press effect is started in a state where the effect button 136 is continuously pressed, the operation of the effect button 136 is not handled effectively. Even when the long press effect is started while being continuously pressed, the operation of the effect button 136 may be handled effectively.

  Further, in the above-described effect example, the long press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled, but the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be enabled. In this case, for example, when the effect button 136 is pressed for a long time during the long press effect, the continuous hit operation may be performed in a pseudo manner by the long press automatic continuous hit function.

  FIG. 166 is a diagram illustrating a state in which a continuous hitting operation is performed in the effect by the long press operation of the effect button. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 166 shows a state where an effect is produced by a long press operation of the effect button 136 in the reach effect.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 166 (a), “decoration 3”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 1”, which is a combination of out-of-order decorative symbols, is fixedly displayed. It should be noted that the first special figure display device 212 is confirmed and displayed with the display result of the deviation, and the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol t1 also display the deviation corresponding to the display result of the first special figure display device 212. The final result is displayed. The second special figure display device 214 is also confirmed and displayed with the display result of deviation, and the special figure 2 and the fourth symbol t2 are also displayed with a deviation display result corresponding to the display result of the second special figure display device 214. Confirmed display. In FIG. 166 (a), the effect button lamp 138 is turned off, indicating that the effect button 136 is not in the operation acceptance state.

  Further, in FIG. 166 (a), since the number of hold of the variable display of the special figure 1 is four, the four hold lamps in the first special figure hold lamp 218 are lit, and the fluctuation display of the special figure 2 is displayed. Since the number of holds is 0, all the hold lamps in the second special figure hold lamp 220 are turned off. Further, in this effect example, a variable icon display area 284 is provided at the lower center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a hold display area of FIG. 1 is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area 284. In the hold display area, the hold icon is displayed in the default display form in any of the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 166 (b), the symbol variation display based on the suspension of the first variation display in FIG. 1 is started. That is, the first special figure display device 212 starts the variable display of the special figure 1 and, in response, the decorative symbol display apparatus 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol. Variation display is also started at t1. At this time, the hold icon displayed in the first special figure 1 hold display h11 is moved to the change icon display area 284, and then changed to a change icon h00 having a hexagonal star shape as a notice display mode. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icons respectively displayed on the second special figure 1 hold display h12 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 are displayed on the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to third. An animation moving to the special figure 1 hold display h13 is performed. The fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 displays a hold icon that is not held.

  Then, after the reach effect is started as shown in FIG. 166 (c), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays “ “Long press to save the meter” is displayed in the center of the screen, and a remaining time meter MT is displayed below the effect button image BT. At this time, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light indicating that the effect button 136 is in the operation acceptance state. A long press meter NO is displayed on the left side of the fluctuation icon display area 284.

  In this effect example, as shown in FIGS. 166 (e) to (g), the player performs a continuous hitting operation instead of a long press operation with the effect button 136. Even when such a continuous hitting operation is performed, the gauge of the long press meter NO increases in accordance with the time during which the effect button 136 is actually pressed. In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 164, since the time during which the effect button 136 is actually pressed is shorter than when the long press operation is performed, the increase amount of the gauge of the long press meter NO is small. The effect button lamp 138 remains illuminated in red during the operation reception period of the effect button 136 regardless of whether or not the effect button 136 is operated.

  Then, when the operation reception period (for example, 5 seconds) of the effect button 136 elapses at the timing of FIG. At this time, it is shown that the long press meter NO is not full and increased to 3/6. At this time, since the operation reception period of the effect button 136 has elapsed, the effect button lamp 138 is turned off. Then, as shown in FIG. 166 (h), the gauge of the long press meter NO did not become full. Display is performed.

  In the production example described above, an example of performing a continuous hit operation with the production button 136 in the long press production, and as a result, a display indicating that the production has failed is shown. However, the gauge of the long press meter NO is full. In such a case, it may be determined that the production has been successful, and a notice display such as a cut-in image or a notice that a big hit will be announced may be performed.

  FIG. 167 is a diagram illustrating an example of a specific effect in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. The following diagram shows how the production progresses in numerical order in parentheses. FIG. 167 (a-1) to FIG. 167 (a-4) show a state in which a conversation notice effect is executed by operating the effect button 136. FIG. 167 (b-1) to FIG. b-2) shows a state in which a hold change notice is made in which the display mode of the hold icon is changed by the operation of the effect button 136. Here, the conversation notice effect is, for example, a notice effect based on the conversation contents of the character.

  As shown in FIG. 167 (a-1), in the first special symbol display device 212, the symbol variation display of the special symbol 1 is started, and the decorative symbol display device 208 correspondingly displays the left symbol display region. The decorative symbols are variably displayed in 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. The decorative symbol is displayed in the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol t1 are displayed. In the special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol t1, the variable display is performed as described above corresponding to the symbol variable display of the first special symbol display device 212. Also, a special figure 2 and a 4th symbol t2 are displayed below the 4th symbol t1 of the special figure 1, and the final display result corresponding to the display result of the second special figure display device 214 is confirmed and displayed. Yes. In addition, a variation icon display area 284 is provided at the lower center of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this variation icon display area 284, a variation icon h00 having a hexagonal star shape as a notice display mode is displayed. .

  In FIG. 167 (a-1), since the number of hold of the variable display of the special figure 1 is 3, the three hold lamps in the first special figure hold lamp 218 are turned on, Since the number of holds is 0, all the hold lamps in the second special figure hold lamp 220 are turned off. On the other hand, in the hold display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the first special figure 1 hold display h11 among the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 correspondingly. The second special figure 1 hold display h12 and the third special figure 1 hold display h13 are displayed in a default display mode, and the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 is displayed in a non-held state. Has been.

  In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 167 (a-1), an effect button image BT that prompts the user to press the effect button 136 is displayed in the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, since the effect button 136 is in an operation acceptance state, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light. In this example, the remaining time meter is not displayed.

  Thereafter, when the depressing button 136 is pressed once, as shown in FIG. 167 (a-2), the decorative symbol display device 208, along with the character image CH of Princess Chibi, “A reach is expected to develop. A balloon FD1 including the characters “yo” is displayed. That is, the first stage conversation notice is executed. At this time, a confirmation sound for notifying that the effect button 136 has been pressed is output from the speaker 120. Note that the confirmation sound may be output simultaneously with the display of the Chibi princess character image CH and the balloon FD1 (the display timing and the audio output timing may vary depending on the display control, audio output control, and signal transmission / reception timing, etc.). May be output at a timing before the display of the Chibi princess character image CH and the balloon FD1, or may be output at a timing after the display of the Chibi princess character image CH and the balloon FD1. May be. Further, the confirmation sound may not be output. In this example, the princess Chibi character image CH and the balloon FD1 are displayed simultaneously. However, the balloon FD1 may be displayed after the princess Chibi character image CH is displayed.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 167 (a-3), the effect button image BT is continuously displayed even after the Chibi princess character image CH and the balloon FD1 are displayed. Thereby, the player may be able to recognize that an effect is further performed by operating the effect button 136.

  Then, when the pressing operation is further performed once by the effect button 136, as shown in FIG. 167 (a-4), the decorative symbol display device 208, along with the character image GY of the spider, "Is displayed. That is, the second stage conversation notice is executed. At this time, a confirmation sound for notifying that the effect button 136 has been pressed is output from the speaker 120. The confirmation sound may be output simultaneously with the display of the character image GY and the balloon FD2, or may be output at a timing before the display of the character image GY and the balloon FD2. It may be output at a later timing than the display of the character image GY and the balloon FD2. In this example, the character image GY of the frog and the balloon FD2 are displayed simultaneously. However, the balloon FD2 may be displayed after the character image GY of the frog is displayed. Then, when the second stage conversation notice is executed, the effect button image BT is deleted.

  Needless to say, the contents of the character image and the speech balloon that appear in the conversation announcement effect are not limited to those described above, and various kinds can be adopted. In addition, the number of conversation notices executed in one conversation notice effect is not limited to two, but may be executed only once, or may be executed three or more times.

  Further, in the above-described effect example, the result of the operation is displayed by a single press operation (single operation) with the effect button 136. For example, a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) or more by the effect button 136 is displayed. The result of the operation may be displayed by performing a long press operation. Further, for example, the result of the operation may be displayed by performing a continuous hitting operation with the effect button 136. In the above-described example of the production, the production of the production button 136 by a single operation is performed a plurality of times. However, the production of a plurality of times is performed by using two of the production by a single operation, the production by a long press operation, and the production by a continuous hitting operation. You may comprise by the above combination. Further, in the above-described effect example, the long-press auto-strike function may be enabled, and when the effect button 136 is continuously pressed, the effect accompanying the pressing operation by the effect button 136 is simulated. You may make it carry out sequentially according to a continuous striking operation. That is, conversation notices may be executed one after another at intervals of pseudo continuous hitting operations. Further, when the conversation advance notice is executed by the long press automatic continuous hitting function, the confirmation sound described above may not be output. Further, the deviation width between the timing at which the character image and the speech balloon are displayed in the conversation announcement effect and the timing at which the confirmation sound is output may be increased.

  In the above-described production example, the character image and the speech balloon are added and displayed every time the conversation notice is executed, but only the characters included in the speech balloon are added without adding the character image and the speech balloon. May be changed. For example, the first operation button 136 displays the character image CH of Princess Chibi and the balloon FD1 including the characters “A reach is expected to develop”, and then the second operation button 136 is operated. Thus, the character displayed in the balloon FD1 may be changed to “Let's get a chance when the bag appears”.

  In this production example, when the long press automatic continuous hitting function is in an effective state, the second stage conversation notice is performed when the first operation is performed by the operating means in the first operation mode. It can be said to be an example of the first effect that can be started and can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode. That is, in this effect example, it can be said that the result of the operation is displayed even when the effect button 136 is repeatedly hit, and the result of the same operation is also displayed when the effect button 136 is pressed for a long time.

  Also, in this production example, when the long-press auto-strike function is in an invalid state, the second stage conversation notice is more than when the operation means is operated once by the operation means in the second operation mode. Also, it can be said that it is an example of the second effect that is easier to start when the operation is performed the second number of times by the operation means in the first operation mode. Moreover, it can also be said to be an example of a second effect that does not start when only one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode.

  Further, in this effect example, when the long press automatic repeated hitting function is enabled, the conversation notice executed as a result of the continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136 is performed by the operating means in the first operation mode. It can be said to be an example of the first effect that can be started when the number of operations is performed and can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode.

  On the other hand, in FIG. 167 (b-1), the state during the symbol variation display of special figure 1 is shown. At this time, since the number of hold of the variable display in FIG. 1 is 4, the four hold lamps in the first special figure hold lamp 218 are lit, and the number of hold of the variable display in FIG. Therefore, all the holding lamps in the second special figure holding lamp 220 are turned off. On the other hand, the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 are all displayed in a default display mode. At this time, the effect button image BTH is displayed small so as to overlap the upper end portion of the hold icon in the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14. Further, in the upper right corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol t1 are displayed. In the special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol t1, the variable display is performed as described above corresponding to the symbol variable display of the first special symbol display device 212. Also, a special figure 2 and a 4th symbol t2 are displayed below the 4th symbol t1 of the special figure 1, and the final display result corresponding to the display result of the second special figure display device 214 is confirmed and displayed. Yes. In addition, a variation icon display area 284 is provided at the lower center of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this variation icon display area 284, a variation icon h00 having a hexagonal star shape as a notice display mode is displayed. . In this effect example, the effect button 136 is in an operation acceptance state, but the effect button lamp 138 is turned off. The effect button lamp 138 may be lit in red, for example.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 167 (b-1), when a single pressing operation is performed by the effect button 136, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs the fourth operation at the timing shown in FIG. 167 (b-2). The special figure 1 hold display h14 changes to a hold icon in a notice display mode imitating the face of Tono-sama. At this time, the effect button image BTH may be kept displayed.

  FIG. 168 is a diagram illustrating an example of a specific effect in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. The following diagram shows how the production progresses in numerical order in parentheses. In FIGS. 168 (a-1) to (a-4) and 168 (b-1) to (b-4), there is an effect of operating the effect button 136 while the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner. It shows how multiple events are performed at the same time.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 168 (a-1), “decoration 3”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 1”, which is a combination of outlying decorative symbols, is fixedly displayed. It should be noted that the first special figure display device 212 is confirmed and displayed with the display result of the deviation, and the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol t1 also display the deviation corresponding to the display result of the first special figure display device 212. The final result is displayed. The second special figure display device 214 is also confirmed and displayed with the display result of deviation, and the special figure 2 and the fourth symbol t2 are also displayed with a deviation display result corresponding to the display result of the second special figure display device 214. Confirmed display. In FIG. 168 (a-1), the effect button lamp 138 is turned off, indicating that the effect button 136 is not in the operation acceptance state.

  Further, in FIG. 168 (a-1), since the number of hold of the variable display of special figure 1 is four, the four hold lamps in first special figure hold lamp 218 are lit, and the fluctuation of special figure 2 Since the display hold number is 0, all the hold lamps in the second special figure hold lamp 220 are turned off. Further, in this effect example, a variable icon display area 284 is provided at the lower center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a hold display area of FIG. 1 is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area 284. In the hold display area, the hold icon is displayed in the default display form in any of the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14. In this effect example, the effect button 136 is continuously pressed before the start of the symbol variation display.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 168 (a-2), the symbol variation display based on the suspension of the first variation display in FIG. 1 is started. That is, the first special figure display device 212 starts the variable display of the special figure 1 and, in response, the decorative symbol display apparatus 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol. Variation display is also started at t1. At this time, the hold icon displayed in the first special figure 1 hold display h11 is moved to the change icon display area 284, and then changed to a change icon h00 having a hexagonal star shape as a notice display mode. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icons respectively displayed on the second special figure 1 hold display h12 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 are displayed on the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to third. An animation moving to the special figure 1 hold display h13 is performed. The fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 displays a hold icon that is not held.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 168 (a-3), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the effect button image BT related to the first effect button effect and the effect button image BTH related to the second effect button effect. Thus, it is shown that the first effect button effect and the second effect button effect are executed at the same time. At this time, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light indicating that the effect button 136 is in the operation acceptance state. Here, the first effect button effect is, for example, an effect in which a conversation notice effect is executed, and the second effect button effect is, for example, an effect in which a hold change notice is executed. Moreover, in this example of production, since the production button 136 is continuously pressed before the start of the first production button production and the second production button production, the operation of the production button 136 is not treated as being effective. As shown to 168 (a-4), the result of operation is not produced about any production | presentation button production. The first effect button effect may be started at a timing before the start of the second effect button effect, or may be started at the same timing as the start of the second effect button effect. And it may be started at a timing later than the start of the second effect button effect.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 168 (b-1), “decoration 3”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 1”, which is a combination of outlier decorative symbols, is fixedly displayed. It should be noted that the first special figure display device 212 is confirmed and displayed with the display result of the deviation, and the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol t1 also display the deviation corresponding to the display result of the first special figure display device 212. The final result is displayed. The second special figure display device 214 is also confirmed and displayed with the display result of deviation, and the special figure 2 and the fourth symbol t2 are also displayed with a deviation display result corresponding to the display result of the second special figure display device 214. Confirmed display. In FIG. 168 (b-1), the effect button lamp 138 is turned off, indicating that the effect button 136 is not in the operation acceptance state.

  Further, in FIG. 168 (b-1), since the number of holdings of the variable display in FIG. Since the display hold number is 0, all the hold lamps in the second special figure hold lamp 220 are turned off. Further, in this effect example, a variable icon display area 284 is provided at the lower center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a hold display area of FIG. 1 is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area 284. In the hold display area, the hold icon is displayed in the default display form in any of the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14. In this effect example, the effect button 136 is continuously pressed before the start of the symbol variation display. Further, in this effect example, the long press automatic continuous hitting function is in an effective state.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 168 (b-2), the symbol variation display based on the suspension of the first variation display in FIG. 1 is started. That is, the first special figure display device 212 starts the variable display of the special figure 1 and, in response, the decorative symbol display apparatus 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol. Variation display is also started at t1. At this time, the hold icon displayed in the first special figure 1 hold display h11 is moved to the change icon display area 284, and then changed to a change icon h00 having a hexagonal star shape as a notice display mode. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icons respectively displayed on the second special figure 1 hold display h12 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 are displayed on the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to third. An animation moving to the special figure 1 hold display h13 is performed. The fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 displays a hold icon that is not held.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 168 (b-3), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the effect button image BT related to the first effect button effect and the effect button image BTH related to the second effect button effect. Thus, it is shown that the first effect button effect and the second effect button effect are executed at the same time. At this time, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light indicating that the effect button 136 is in the operation acceptance state. In this effect example, the effect button 136 is continuously pressed before the start of the first effect button effect and the second effect button effect, but the long press auto-strike function is in an active state. As shown in FIG. 168 (b-4), only the result of the operation of the effect button 136 related to the first effect button effect is displayed among the first effect button effect and the second effect button effect. Of the first effect button effect and the second effect button effect, only the result of the operation of the effect button 136 related to the second effect button effect may be displayed. The result of the operation of the effect button 136 related to which effect button effect is displayed, for example, may be performed only for the effect that started earlier, or an effect that is preferentially executed is determined in advance. It may be.

  FIG. 169 is a diagram illustrating an example of a specific effect in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 169 shows a state in which another effect of operating the effect button 136 is started while the effect of operating the effect button 136 is being executed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 169 (a), “decoration 3”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 1”, which is a combination of outlying decorative symbols, is fixedly displayed. It should be noted that the first special figure display device 212 is confirmed and displayed with the display result of the deviation, and the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol t1 also display the deviation corresponding to the display result of the first special figure display device 212. The final result is displayed. The second special figure display device 214 is also confirmed and displayed with the display result of deviation, and the special figure 2 and the fourth symbol t2 are also displayed with a deviation display result corresponding to the display result of the second special figure display device 214. Confirmed display. In FIG. 169 (a), the effect button lamp 138 is turned off, indicating that the effect button 136 is not in the operation acceptance state.

  In FIG. 169 (a), since the number of hold of the variable display of the special figure 1 is four, the four hold lamps in the first special figure hold lamp 218 are lit, and the fluctuation display of the special figure 2 is displayed. Since the number of holds is 0, all the hold lamps in the second special figure hold lamp 220 are turned off. Further, in this effect example, a variable icon display area 284 is provided at the lower center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a hold display area of FIG. 1 is provided on the right side of the variable icon display area 284. In the hold display area, the hold icon is displayed in the default display form in any of the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14. In this effect example, the effect button 136 is continuously pressed before the start of the symbol variation display. Further, in this effect example, the long press automatic continuous hitting function is in an effective state.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 169 (b), the symbol variation display based on the suspension of the first variation display in FIG. 1 is started. That is, the first special figure display device 212 starts the variable display of the special figure 1 and, in response, the decorative symbol display apparatus 208 starts the variable display of the decorative symbol. Variation display is also started at t1. At this time, the hold icon displayed in the first special figure 1 hold display h11 is moved to the change icon display area 284, and then changed to a change icon h00 having a hexagonal star shape as a notice display mode. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icons respectively displayed on the second special figure 1 hold display h12 to the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 are displayed on the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to third. An animation moving to the special figure 1 hold display h13 is performed. The fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 displays a hold icon that is not held.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 169 (c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol moves to the upper left corner of the display screen, and the effect button image BT is displayed at the center of the display screen. At this time, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light indicating that the effect button 136 is in the operation acceptance state.

  Then, when the long press operation with the effect button 136 is started, it is assumed that there is one press operation with the effect button 136, and as shown in FIG. In the device 208, a balloon FD1 including characters “A reach is expected to develop” is displayed together with the character image CH of Princess Chibi. That is, the first stage conversation notice is executed.

  Thereafter, when a game ball enters the first special figure starting port 230, as shown in FIG. 169 (e), the number of hold of the variable display of the special figure 1 increases to 4, and the first special figure hold lamp 218 Four hold lamps light up. Then, in the reserved display area at the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208, the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14 is displayed with a hold icon in the default display mode correspondingly. At this time, the effect button image BTH is displayed small so as to overlap the upper end portion of the hold icon in the fourth special figure 1 hold display h14. The display of the effect button image BTH is an example of a second effect button effect. However, in this effect example, since the second effect button effect is an effect started after the first effect button effect, when the long press operation of the effect button 136 is continued, this effect The result of the operation of the effect button 136 relating to the button image BTH is not displayed.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the balloon FD2 including the characters “Let's appear and chances are up” is displayed together with the character image GY of the spider at the timing of FIG. 169 (f) by the long press automatic continuous hitting function. . That is, the second stage conversation notice is executed. Then, when the second stage conversation notice is executed, the effect button image BT is deleted.

  In this effect example, only the conversation notice effect is executed and not the hold change notice. However, the hold change notice is continuously executed after the conversation notice effect is ended by the long press auto-strike function. Alternatively, the hold change notice may be executed by once releasing the pressing operation of the effect button 136 and then pressing the button again after the conversation notice effect is finished.

  FIG. 170 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect in which an effect button is operated in accordance with a rhythm. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 170 shows a state in which the effect of operating the effect button 136 in accordance with the rhythm is executed in the super reach.

  As shown in FIG. 170 (a), the first special symbol display device 212 executes the symbol variation display of the special symbol 1, and the decorative symbol display device 208 correspondingly displays the variation variation of the decorative symbol. Has been done. As shown in FIG. 170 (a), the decorative symbol shown in the left symbol display area 208a and the decorative symbol shown in the right symbol display area 208c are stopped and displayed with the same symbol “7”. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the decorative symbol variation display is still performed and the reach state is reached. FIG. 170 (a) shows a state in which the state is shifted to super reach after reaching the reach state. In the decorative symbol display device 208, “Princess Dance SP Reach” indicating the type of the super reach that has been transferred, and “Press the flowing button at the right timing” to explain the contents of the effect are displayed. In the lower left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208, “Mode 3” indicating the difficulty level of this effect is displayed. There are a plurality of difficulty levels. For example, the difficulty level is changed according to the degree of expectation for the big hit.

  In FIG. 170 (a), since the number of hold of the variable display of the special figure 1 is two, the two hold lamps in the first special figure hold lamp 218 are lit, and the fluctuation display of the special figure 2 is displayed. Since the number of holds is 0, all the hold lamps in the second special figure hold lamp 220 are turned off. In this production example, the long press automatic continuous hitting function is valid.

  After the “princess dance SP reach” is started, as shown in FIG. 170 (b), on the decorative symbol display device 208, the character image HM of the princess dances to music on the left side of the display screen. The animation is displayed. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, on the right side of the display screen, the timing image TM including the characters “CHANCE” is displayed to move from the upper side to the lower side of the display screen, and on the moving path of the timing image TM. The hit image HT is displayed on the screen. The timing image TM is moved and displayed at a timing overlapping with the hit image HT according to music.

  As shown in FIG. 170 (c), when the player depresses the effect button 136 at a position where the timing image TM overlaps the hit image HT, the timing image TM is displayed in the effect button as shown in FIG. 170 (d). The result display RS is changed according to the operation timing 136. The result display RS is displayed in a manner including a character display of “PERFECT”, for example, when the pressing operation of the effect button 136 is accepted at a timing when the timing image TM completely matches the hit image HT, and is slightly shifted. When the press operation of the effect button 136 is accepted at a timing that is displayed, it is displayed in a form including the character display of “GOOD”, and when the press operation of the effect button 136 is received at a time greatly deviated, A mode including the character display is displayed. In this effect example, points are added or subtracted according to the timing of the pressing operation of the effect button 136, and a notice effect according to the final point is executed. If the operation with the effect button 136 is not performed at the timing when the timing image TM overlaps with the hit image HT, the result image is not scrolled to the result display RS but is scrolled down to the lower side of the display screen.

  In this effect example, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function may be effective. In this case, regardless of the timing at which the timing image TM overlaps the hit image HT, the pseudo effect button 136 may be repeatedly operated at regular intervals. Other than the timing at which the timing image TM overlaps the hit image HT When the pseudo effect button 136 is operated at the timing, the points may be subtracted to reduce the possibility of executing the notice effect. Thus, the player can be incentive to operate the effect button 136 at the player's own timing without relying on the long-press automatic continuous hitting function, and the effect can be improved. In addition, by the long press automatic continuous hitting function, only when the timing image TM completely coincides with the hit image HT (timing that becomes “PERFECT”) or slightly shifted (timing that becomes “GOOD”), The effect button 136 may be configured to be operated in a pseudo manner.

  FIG. 171 is a diagram illustrating an example of a specific effect in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. The following diagram shows how the production progresses in numerical order in parentheses. FIGS. 171 (a-1) to (a-4) show how the auto button function is released, and FIG. 171 (b) shows how the auto button function is set. 171 (c) shows a state in which a preferable timing of the operation of the effect button 136 is notified, and FIGS. 171 (d-1) to (d-3) show that the auto button function is effective. In this state, the back button effect is being executed. Here, the back button effect does not notify that the operation of the effect button 136 or the operation key unit 137 is valid, but is performed when the effect button 136 or the operation key unit 137 is operated during the period. A specific production. The player may be able to know the existence of such a back button effect on a strategy magazine or the Internet. The back button effect is often used mainly as a notice effect, but is not limited to this. Here, the mode for notifying that the operation is valid is, for example, that the effect button lamp 138 emits light, or the light emission mode indicating that the effect button lamp 138 is effective, One or a combination of two or more of outputting a predetermined sound (for example, a sound “press the button”) or displaying a predetermined image (for example, a character display “press”) That means. On the other hand, the mode that does not notify that the operation is valid is, for example, the light emission of the effect button lamp 138 or the light emission mode indicating that the light emission mode of the effect button lamp 138 is valid, That is, at least one or all of outputting a sound and displaying a predetermined image is not performed. In addition, the aspect of not notifying that the operation is valid may be that at least a predetermined image is not displayed. In the case where N notification means notifies that the operation is valid, an aspect where the notification is not notified by the N notification means may be an aspect where the operation is not valid. Good.

  As shown in FIG. 171 (a-1), the first special figure display device 212 is confirmed and displayed with the display result of losing, and the special figure 1 fourth symbol t 1 is also displayed in the first special figure display device 212. In correspondence with the display result of, the display result of the deviation (for example, a white circle) is confirmed and displayed. In addition, since the number of hold of the variable display of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are both 0, the hold lamp in the first special figure hold lamp 218 and the hold lamp in the second special figure hold lamp 220 are both turned off. Yes. That is, FIG. 171 (a-1) represents a standby state in which symbol variation is not performed. The effect button lamp 138 is turned off. That is, the effect button lamp 138 is turned off, indicating that the effect button 136 is not in the operation acceptance state. In this production example, for example, the auto button setting is performed in the manner described above with reference to FIG. 149, and the auto button function is enabled by simultaneously pressing the left button 137c and the right button 137d in the standby state. Can be set to state.

  When the auto button function is enabled, the effect button lamp 138 emits green light as shown in FIG. 171 (a-2).

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 171 (a-3), for example, when a button (for example, the left button 137c) other than the effect button 136 is operated while the auto button function is enabled, As shown at 171 (a-4), the auto button function is canceled. That is, the auto button function is disabled. The auto button function may be canceled by operating the effect button 136 in a state where the auto button function is valid, or the left button 137c and the right button 137d are pressed simultaneously. Thus, the auto button function may be canceled. Further, the auto button function may be canceled even when “no assistance” or “long press auto-strike” is set as described above with reference to FIG.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 171 (b), when the auto button function is enabled, for example, the decoration symbol display device 208 displays “auto button is being set” to indicate to the player the auto button function. You may make it alert | report easily that it recognizes that a button function is an effective state.

  The operation when the auto button function is in effect is as described above. For example, as shown in FIG. 171 (c), when the effect related to the effect button 136 is being executed, the auto button When the production button 136e is operated at this timing, an advantageous timing for operating the production button 136 is notified rather than when the production button 136 is operated in a pseudo manner by the function. An effect different from the effect executed by operating the effect button 136 in a pseudo manner may be executed.

  In this embodiment, when an effect is performed by pressing the effect button 136, an image prompting the operation of the effect button 136 is displayed. For example, an image prompting the operation of the effect button 136 is displayed. Without performing this, the back effect may be executed when the operation of the effect button 136 is performed.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 171 (d-1), “decoration 3” — “decoration 4” — “decoration 1”, which is a combination of the decorative symbols out of place, is fixedly displayed. It should be noted that the first special figure display device 212 is confirmed and displayed with the display result of the deviation, and the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol t1 also display the deviation corresponding to the display result of the first special figure display device 212. The final result is displayed. The second special figure display device 214 is also confirmed and displayed with the display result of the deviation. In FIG. 171 (d-1), since the number of the variable display hold in the special figure 1 is 1, one hold lamp in the first special figure hold lamp 218 is lit, and the fluctuation in the special figure 2 Since the display hold number is 0, all the hold lamps in the second special figure hold lamp 220 are turned off. Note that in FIG. 171 (d-1), the effect button lamp 138 emits green light, indicating that the auto button function is active.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 171 (d-2), the symbol variation display based on the suspension of the first variation display of the special diagram 1 is started, and in response to this, the decorative symbol display device 208 The decorative display of the decorative design is started, and the display of the special design 1 and the fourth design t1 is also started. At this time, the decorative symbol is displayed in the upper left corner of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this effect example, no display prompting the user to operate the effect button 136 is performed. However, when the effect button 136 is operated, the back button effect is executable. Note that the back button effect can be executed on the condition that, for example, whether or not to execute the back button effect is determined based on the result of the symbol variation display.

  Thereafter, when the predetermined auto button function is activated, a single operation by the effect button 136 is performed in a pseudo manner by the auto button function.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 171 (d-3), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the cut-in image CI6 as a back button effect.

  The effect example described above indicates that the display prompting the operation of the effect button 136 is performed even when the auto button function is enabled.

  In the example of production described above, the back button effect is executed by a single operation with the effect button 136. For example, when a long press operation with the effect button 136 is performed, the back button effect is performed. Also good. Further, for example, the back button effect may be executed by performing a continuous hitting operation with the effect button 136. Further, in the above-described effect example, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be enabled or disabled. In addition, when the effect button 136 is continuously pressed before the effect related to the operation of the effect button 136 is started, the operation of the effect button 136 may not be accepted in the effect. In some cases, it is possible to see an effect that prompts the user to operate the effect button 136. On the other hand, when the effect button 136 is continuously pressed down before the effect related to the operation of the effect button 136 is started, the operation of the effect button 136 may be accepted in the effect. In some cases, it is not possible to see the effect of prompting the operation of the effect button 136.

  Further, in the above-described effect example, the effect contents (display of the cut-in image CI6) executed when the effect button 136 is pseudo-operated by the auto button function is a single operation by the effect button 136. The effect content executed when the effect button 136 is simulated by the auto button function may be the same as the effect content executed when the effect button 136 is operated. It may be different from the contents of the performance executed when it is interrupted.

  FIG. 172 is a diagram illustrating an example of a specific effect using two effect buttons. The following diagram shows how the production progresses in numerical order in parentheses. In the effect example shown in FIG. 172, a first effect button 136A and a second effect button 136B are provided as effect buttons, and an effect related to the effect button is executed in accordance with these operations. It is configured. Here, FIGS. 172 (a-1) to (a-7), 172 (b-1) to (b-4), and 172 (c-1) to (c-6). Shows a state in which an effect is generated by a single operation of the first effect button 136A or the second effect button 136B during the decorative symbol variation display. In this example, the first effect button 136A and the second effect button 136B have different button shapes, but they may have the same shape.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 172 (a-1), the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner at the upper left corner of the display screen. The first special symbol display device 121 is changing the symbol, and the special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol t1 are also variably displayed corresponding to the symbol variation display of the first special symbol display device 212. Further, in the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, characters “PUSH” are displayed together with the effect button image BT, and a remaining time meter MT is displayed below the effect button image BT.

  In FIG. 172 (a-1), since the number of hold of the variable display in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is both 0, the hold lamp in the first special figure hold lamp 218 and the second special figure hold lamp 220. All of the hold lamps in are off. Note that in this effect example, the hold display is not performed on the decorative symbol display device 208, but the hold display may be performed as described above. The effect button lamp of the first effect button 136A and the effect button lamp of the second effect button 136B are turned off.

  Thereafter, for example, when 1 second has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 172 (a-2), the remaining time meter MT indicates that 1 second has elapsed, that is, the gauge has decreased by 1 second. Displayed in a manner.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 172 (a-3), the first presentation button 136A is pressed once, but as shown in FIG. 172 (a-4), the result of the operation is not displayed. The effect button image BT and the remaining time meter MT are continuously displayed. In other words, in this effect example, the first effect button 136A is operated so that an effect related to the effect button is not executed. In FIG. 172 (a-3), since the effect button lamp of the first effect button 136A and the effect button lamp of the second effect button 136B are turned off, the result of the operation is displayed by any effect button. In some cases, the player can be given a sense of expectation about whether or not, and the production effect can be improved.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 172 (a-5), the effect button lamp of the second effect button 136B emits red light. Thereby, the player may recognize that the result of the operation is displayed by operating the second effect button 136B.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 172 (a-6), when a single pressing operation is performed with the second effect button 136B, as shown in FIG. 172 (a-7), the decorative symbol display device 208 A cut-in image CI7 is displayed.

  In the above-described effect example, the result of the operation is displayed by a single pressing operation (single operation) by the second effect button 136B. For example, a long press operation by the second effect button 136B is performed. As a result, the result of the operation may be displayed. Further, for example, the result of the operation may be displayed by performing a continuous hitting operation using the second effect button 136B.

  Further, in the above-described effect example, the long press auto-strike function may be enabled or disabled for one or both of the first effect button 136A and the second effect button 136B. In the case where the long press automatic continuous hitting function is enabled, for example, the second effect button 136B is continuously pressed before the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 172 (a-1) is executed. If the effect is continuously performed, after the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 172 (a-1) is started, the second effect button 136B is operated in a pseudo manner by the long press automatic continuous hitting function. The result may be displayed. That is, the result of the operation may be displayed when the second effect button 136B is continuously hit, and the result of the same operation may be displayed even when the button is pressed for a long time. For example, when the second effect button 136B is continuously pressed from before the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 172 (a-1) is executed, FIG. Even if the effect related to the effect button shown in -1) is started, the operation of the pseudo second effect button 136B by the long press automatic continuous hitting function may not be accepted. In this case, the effect button After the production related to is started, the second production button 136B may be released once and the second production button 136B may be pushed again.

  Further, for example, when the first effect button 136A and the second effect button 136B are continuously pressed before the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 172 (a-1) is executed. 172 (a-1), after the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 172 (a-1) is started, the second effect button 136B is operated in a pseudo manner by the long press automatic continuous hitting function, and the operation result is displayed. You may do it. Further, for example, when the first effect button 136A and the second effect button 136B are continuously pressed before the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 172 (a-1) is executed. In this case, even if the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 172 (a-1) is started, the operation of the first effect button 136A and the second effect button 136B may not be accepted. After the production of the production button is started, the first production button 136A and the second production button 136B are once released and the second production button 136B needs to be pressed again. Also good.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 172 (b-1), the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner at the upper left corner of the display screen. The first special symbol display device 212 is changing the symbol, and the special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol t1 are also variably displayed corresponding to the symbol variation display of the first special symbol display device 212. Further, in the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, characters “PUSH” are displayed together with the effect button image BT, and a remaining time meter MT is displayed below the effect button image BT.

  In FIG. 172 (b-1), since the number of hold of the variable display in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is both 0, the hold lamp in the first special figure hold lamp 218 and the second special figure hold lamp 220. All of the hold lamps in are off. Note that in this effect example, the hold display is not performed on the decorative symbol display device 208, but the hold display may be performed as described above. In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 172 (b-2), the effect button lamp of the first effect button 136A emits red light, and the effect button lamp of the second effect button 136B is turned off. ing.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 172 (b-3), when a single pressing operation is performed with the second effect button 136B where the effect button lamp is not emitting light, as shown in FIG. 172 (b-3), as shown in FIG. 172 (b-4). In the decorative symbol display device 208, the cut-in image CI7 is displayed. In this way, in this effect example, the effect button lamp of the effect button whose operation result is to be displayed is turned off, and the effect button lamp of the effect button whose result is not displayed even if operated is emitted. In some cases, the player can have an unexpected performance, and the effect can be improved.

  In the above-described effect example, the result of the operation is displayed by a single pressing operation (single operation) by the second effect button 136B. For example, a long press operation by the second effect button 136B is performed. As a result, the result of the operation may be displayed. Further, for example, the result of the operation may be displayed by performing a continuous hitting operation using the second effect button 136B.

  Further, in the above-described effect example, the long press auto-strike function may be enabled or disabled for one or both of the first effect button 136A and the second effect button 136B. In the case where the long press auto-strike function is enabled, for example, the second effect button 136B is continuously pressed before the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 172 (b-1) is executed. In the case where the effect is continuously performed, after the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 172 (b-1) is started, the second effect button 136B is operated in a pseudo manner by the long press automatic continuous hitting function. The result may be displayed. That is, the result of the operation may be displayed when the second effect button 136B is continuously hit, and the result of the same operation may be displayed even when the button is pressed for a long time. For example, when the second effect button 136B is continuously pressed from before the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 172 (b-1) is executed, FIG. 172 (b) Even if the effect related to the effect button shown in -1) is started, the operation of the pseudo second effect button 136B by the long press automatic continuous hitting function may not be accepted. In this case, the effect button After the production related to is started, the second production button 136B may be released once and the second production button 136B may be pushed again.

  Further, for example, when the first effect button 136A and the second effect button 136B are continuously pressed before the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 172 (b-1) is executed. 172 (b-1), after the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 172 (b-1) is started, the second effect button 136B is operated in a pseudo manner by the long press automatic continuous hitting function, and the result of the operation is displayed. You may do it. Further, for example, when the first effect button 136A and the second effect button 136B are continuously pressed before the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 172 (b-1) is executed. In this case, even if the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 172 (b-1) is started, the operation of the first effect button 136A and the second effect button 136B may not be accepted. After the production of the production button is started, the first production button 136A and the second production button 136B are once released and the second production button 136B needs to be pressed again. Also good.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 172 (c-1), the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner at the upper left corner of the display screen. The first special symbol display device 212 is changing the symbol, and the special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol t1 are also variably displayed corresponding to the symbol variation display of the first special symbol display device 212. Further, in the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, characters “PUSH” are displayed together with the effect button image BT, and a remaining time meter MT is displayed below the effect button image BT.

  In FIG. 172 (c-1), since the number of hold of the variable display in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is both 0, the hold lamp and the second special figure hold lamp 220 in the first special figure hold lamp 218. All of the hold lamps in are off. Note that in this effect example, the hold display is not performed on the decorative symbol display device 208, but the hold display may be performed as described above. The effect button lamp of the first effect button 136A and the effect button lamp of the second effect button 136B are turned off.

  Thereafter, for example, when 1 second has passed, as shown in FIG. 172 (c-2), the remaining time meter MT indicates that 1 second has passed, that is, the gauge has decreased by 1 second. Displayed in a manner.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 172 (c-3), the first presentation button 136A is pressed once, but the operation result is not displayed as shown in FIG. 172 (a-4). The effect button image BT and the remaining time meter MT are continuously displayed. In other words, in this effect example, the first effect button 136A is operated so that an effect related to the effect button is not executed. In FIG. 172 (c-3), since the effect button lamp of the first effect button 136A and the effect button lamp of the second effect button 136B are turned off, the result of the operation is displayed by any effect button. In some cases, the player can be given a sense of expectation about whether or not, and the production effect can be improved.

  As shown in FIG. 172 (c-5), in this effect example, both effect button lamps of the first effect button 136A and the second effect button 136B remain off.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 172 (c-5), when the pressing operation is performed once by the second effect button 136B, as shown in FIG. 172 (c-6), the decorative symbol display device 208 A cut-in image CI7 is displayed.

  In the above-described effect example, the result of the operation is displayed by a single pressing operation (single operation) by the second effect button 136B. For example, a long press operation by the second effect button 136B is performed. As a result, the result of the operation may be displayed. Further, for example, the result of the operation may be displayed by performing a continuous hitting operation using the second effect button 136B.

  Further, in the above-described effect example, the long press auto-strike function may be enabled or disabled for one or both of the first effect button 136A and the second effect button 136B. In the case where the long press auto-strike function is enabled, for example, the second effect button 136B is continuously pressed before the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 172 (c-1) is executed. In the case where the effect is continuously performed, after the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 172 (c-1) is started, the second effect button 136B is operated in a pseudo manner by the long press automatic continuous hitting function. The result may be displayed. That is, the result of the operation may be displayed when the second effect button 136B is continuously hit, and the result of the same operation may be displayed even when the button is pressed for a long time. For example, when the second effect button 136B is continuously pressed from before the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 172 (c-1) is executed, FIG. 172 (c) Even if the effect related to the effect button shown in -1) is started, the operation of the pseudo second effect button 136B by the long press automatic continuous hitting function may not be accepted. In this case, the effect button After the production related to is started, the second production button 136B may be released once and the second production button 136B may be pushed again.

  In addition, for example, when the first effect button 136A and the second effect button 136B are continuously pressed before the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 172 (c-1) is executed. 172 (c-1), after the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 172 (c-1) is started, the second effect button 136B is operated in a pseudo manner by the long press automatic continuous hitting function, and the result of the operation is displayed. You may do it. In addition, for example, when the first effect button 136A and the second effect button 136B are continuously pressed before the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 172 (c-1) is executed. 172 (c-1), even if the effect related to the effect button shown in FIG. 172 (c-1) is started, the operation of the first effect button 136A and the second effect button 136B may not be accepted. After the production of the production button is started, the first production button 136A and the second production button 136B are once released and the second production button 136B needs to be pressed again. Also good.

  FIG. 173 is a diagram illustrating an example of a character selection effect. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 173 shows, for example, how a character selection effect performed during a big hit game is performed. The character selection effect is, for example, an effect of selecting a character that appears after the end of the big hit game.

  As shown in FIG. 173 (a), when the character selection effect is started, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the Tono-sama character image Y is displayed brightly in the center of the display screen, and the princess character image H is displayed on the display screen. The character image G of the heel is displayed slightly dark on the right side, and is slightly dark on the left side of the display screen. The Tonosama character image Y is arranged in front of the princess character image H and the samurai character image G, and it is notified that the Tonosama character image Y is in a selectable state. For example, when the performance button 136 is operated when the character image Y of Tono-sama is selectable, the character appearing after the end of the jackpot game is determined as the character of Ton- sama, and the character image H of the princess is selected. When the production button 136 is operated when it becomes possible, the character that appears after the end of the jackpot game is determined as the princess character, and when the character image G of the samurai is selectable, When the effect button 136 is operated, the character that appears after the end of the big hit game is determined to be a samurai character. Below these character images, icons of the left button 137c and the right button 137d are arranged side by side, and a balloon including a character display “Select a character by pressing the button” is displayed. The effect button lamp 138 is turned off. That is, the effect button lamp 138 is in the second state.

  Then, when a single pressing operation with the right button 137d is performed at the timing shown in FIG. 173 (b), as shown in FIG. 173 (c), the Tono-sama character image Y, the princess character image H, and Display that rotates counterclockwise so that the character image G draws a circle is started. At this time, the Tono-sama character image Y is displayed slightly dark, the heel character image G is displayed brightly, and it is notified that the heel character image G is in a selectable state. Thereafter, the character images are rotated and displayed as shown in FIGS. 173 (c) to (f). As shown in FIG. 173 (f), the character image G of the heel is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. When the center of the display screen is reached, the rotation display ends. Making the princess character image H selectable can be realized by further pressing once with the right button 137d in the state shown in FIG. 173 (f). In other words, in this effect example, the princess character image H is displayed in the first operation mode as compared with the case where the operation unit performs one operation in the second operation mode during execution of the first selection display. Thus, it can be said that the case where the second number of operations is performed by the operation means is an example of the first image that is more easily selected. It can also be said that the princess character image H is an image that is not selected only by one operation by the operation means in the second operation mode. When the left button 137c is pressed once, the Tono-sama character image Y, the princess character image H, and the samurai character image G are displayed to rotate clockwise so as to draw a circle.

  In this production example, if the left button 137c or the right button 137d is operated while each character image is being rotated, only the character image remains at the position where the character image is displayed at the time of the operation. The character selection cancel display can be performed. The character selection cancel display may not be performed. Further, if the left button 137c or the right button 137d is operated during the rotation display of each character image, the rotation display animation is omitted, and the character image that is in a selectable state is displayed at the position on the front of the display screen. For example, when a single pressing operation with the right button 137d is performed at the timing shown in FIG. 173 (c), FIGS. 173 (d) to 173 (e) are displayed. ) May be omitted and the display shown in FIG. 173 (f) may be displayed.

  In this effect example, when the long-press auto-strike function is in an invalid state, the character selection effect is the first one that can select one of a plurality of types of images according to the operation of the operation means. It can be said to be an example of selection display.

  In addition, in this production example, the production by the princess character that appears after the end of the big hit game is an example of the fourth production that can be started when the first image is selected in the first selection display. it can.

  Further, in this effect example, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is in an invalid state, and even if a long-press operation is performed, only one character image that can be selected is transferred, so the first selection display During execution of the operation means, even if the operation means is operated for more than the first time, the operation means is configured to be operated once. be able to.

  FIG. 174 is a diagram illustrating an example of a character selection effect. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 174 shows a state in which, for example, a character selection effect performed during a big hit game is performed. The character selection effect is, for example, an effect of selecting a character that appears after the end of the big hit game.

  As shown in FIG. 174 (a), when the character selection effect is started, on the decorative symbol display device 208, the Tono-sama character image Y is displayed brightly in the center of the display screen, and the princess character image H is displayed on the display screen. The character image G of the heel is displayed slightly dark on the right side, and is slightly dark on the left side of the display screen. The Tonosama character image Y is arranged in front of the princess character image H and the samurai character image G, and it is notified that the Tonosama character image Y is in a selectable state. Below these character images, icons of the left button 137c and the right button 137d are arranged side by side, and a balloon including a character display “Select a character by pressing the button” is displayed. The effect button lamp 138 is turned off. In this effect example, the long press automatic continuous hitting function is in an effective state, and the player continues to press the right button 137d before the start of the character selection effect.

  After that, as shown in FIG. 174 (b), on the decorative symbol display device 208, a display in which the character image Y of the lord, the character image H of the princess, and the character image G of the spear rotate counterclockwise so as to draw a circle is displayed. Be started. At this time, the Tono-sama character image Y is displayed in a slightly dark state, the character image G of the heel is displayed brightly, and it is notified that the character image G of the heel is selectable.

  In this effect example, since the right button 137d is continuously pressed, the continuous operation of the right button 137d is performed in a pseudo manner by the long press automatic continuous hitting function. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 174 (b) to (e), the character selection cancel display described above is performed every time the pseudo right button 137d is operated (for example, every 200 ms). That is, for example, when the character selection cancel display is performed at the timing shown in FIG. 174 (b), the display positions of the Tono-sama character image Y, the princess character image H, and the spear character image G are maintained. As shown in FIG. 174 (c), a spear character image G is displayed at the position where the lord's character image Y is displayed, and a lord's character image Y is displayed at the position where the princess's character image H is displayed. The princess character image H is displayed at the position where the frog character image G was displayed. Then, the character image in the selectable state is changed from the frog character image G to the princess character image H, and the princess character image H is displayed brightly. That is, in this effect example, it can be said that the princess character image H is selected even when the right button 137d is continuously hit, and the princess character image H is selected even when the right button is pressed for a long time.

  In this effect example, even if the long-press auto-strike function is valid, if the left button 137c or the right button 137d is kept pressed before the start of the character selection effect, the long-press auto-strike function In the case of performing the pseudo continuous hit operation by the long press automatic continuous hit function, the left button 137c or the right button 137d is pressed after the character selection effect is started. It may be necessary to press it again. Further, in the character selection effect, the long press automatic repeated hitting function may be limited. As described above, in the present embodiment, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be effective for each button constituting the operation key unit 137 in addition to the effect button 136.

  In this effect example, when the long-press auto-strike function is in an effective state, the character selection effect is the second that can select one of a plurality of types of images according to the operation of the operation means. It can be said to be an example of selection display.

  In this production example, the princess character image H can be selected when the second number of operations are performed by the operation means in the first operation mode during the execution of the second selection display. It can be said that it is an example of a second image that can be selected when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode during execution of the second selection display.

  In addition, in this effect example, the effect by the princess character appearing after the end of the big hit game is an example of the fifth effect that can be started when the second image is selected in the second selection display. it can.

  FIG. 175 is a diagram illustrating an example of a character selection effect. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 175 illustrates a state in which a character selection effect performed during, for example, a big hit game is performed. The character selection effect is, for example, an effect of selecting a character that appears after the end of the big hit game.

  As shown in FIG. 175 (a), when the character selection effect is started, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the Tono-sama character image Y is displayed brightly in the center of the display screen, and the princess character image H is displayed on the display screen. The character image G of the heel is displayed slightly dark on the right side, and is slightly dark on the left side of the display screen. The Tonosama character image Y is arranged in front of the princess character image H and the samurai character image G, and it is notified that the Tonosama character image Y is in a selectable state. Below these character images, icons of the left button 137c and the right button 137d are arranged side by side, and a balloon including a character display “Select a character by pressing the button” is displayed. In this effect example, the auto button function is enabled, and the effect button lamp 138 emits green light.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 175 (b), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a display in which the Tono-sama character image Y, the princess character image H, and the spear character image G rotate counterclockwise so as to draw a circle. Be started. At this time, the Tono-sama character image Y is displayed in a slightly dark state, the character image G of the heel is displayed brightly, and it is notified that the character image G of the heel is selectable.

  In this production example, the auto button function is enabled, and the continuous operation of the right button 137d is performed in a pseudo manner. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 175 (b) to (e), the character selection cancel display described above is performed every time the pseudo right button 137d is operated (for example, every 200 ms). When the auto button function is enabled, the left button 137c may be operated in a pseudo manner.

  FIG. 176 is a diagram illustrating an example of a character selection effect. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 176 shows a state where, for example, a character selection effect performed at the start of a big hit is performed. This character selection effect is, for example, an effect of selecting a character that appears during a big hit game.

  As shown in FIG. 176 (a), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a character display “Select a character” is performed, and an explanation display in a character selection effect is performed. Also, Tono-sama character image Y is displayed brightly in the center of the display screen, Princess character image H is displayed slightly dark on the right side of the display screen, and Samurai character image G is displayed slightly darkly on the left side of the display screen. . The Tonosama character image Y is arranged in front of the princess character image H and the samurai character image G, and it is notified that the Tonosama character image Y is in a selectable state. These character images are displayed in a state in which a part is covered by the character display described above. In this production example, the character that can be selected by the operation of the production button 136 can be changed, and the character that can be selected at the end timing of the character selection production (a character corresponding to a brightly displayed character image) ) Is determined as a character appearing in the big hit game.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 176 (b), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the characters “START” and then starts a character selection effect as shown in FIG. 176 (c). In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 176 (c), the characters “PUSH” are displayed in the lower left corner of the display screen along with the effect button image BT prompting the user to press the effect button image 136e below these character images. A remaining time meter MT is displayed below the effect button image BT. In addition, a balloon including a character display “Press the button to select a character” is displayed on the right side of the effect button image BT and the remaining time meter MT.

  After that, for example, when 1 second has passed, as shown in FIG. 176 (d), the remaining time meter MT shows that 1 second has passed, that is, the gauge is reduced by 1 second. Is displayed.

  Then, when a single pressing operation with the effect button 136 is performed at the timing shown in FIG. 176 (e), as shown in FIG. The display of rotating in a counterclockwise direction so that the character image G of the character draws a circle is started. At this time, the Tono-sama character image Y is displayed in a slightly dark state, the character image G of the heel is displayed brightly, and it is notified that the character image G of the heel is selectable. Thereafter, each character image is rotated and displayed as shown in FIGS. 176 (f) to (i). As shown in FIG. 176 (i), the character image G of the heel is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. When the center of the display screen is reached, the rotation display ends. This operation is executed every time the depressing operation by the effect button 136 is performed.

  In this effect example, when the effect button 136 is operated during the rotation display of each character image, the character selection in which only the character image is replaced without changing the position where each character image is displayed at the time of the operation is performed. Cancel display can be performed. The character selection cancel display may not be performed.

  In the case where the character selection cancel display can be executed, the long press automatic repeated hitting function may be enabled. For example, when the long press operation of the effect button 136 is performed after the character selection effect is started, the continuous operation of the effect button 136 is performed in a pseudo manner by the long press automatic continuous hit function, and as a result, the pseudo effect button is displayed. The character selection cancel display described above may be performed every 136 operations (for example, every 200 ms). Further, in the character selection effect, the long press automatic repeated hitting function may be disabled.

  Further, in this effect example, when the character selection effect is started, the remaining time meter MT does not stop the gauge update display until the character selection effect ends (the decrease in the remaining time of the character selection effect is not stopped). However, while the rotation of the character image is being performed, the gauge update display may be stopped (the decrease in the remaining time of the character selection effect is stopped). That is, the gauge may be updated and displayed only while any of the character image Y of Tonosama character image Y, princess character image H, and spear character image G is stopped and displayed in front.

  Further, while the long press operation by the effect button 136 is being performed, the gauge update display of the remaining time meter MT may be stopped. According to this, it may be possible to suppress the operation of the useless effect button 136 by the player.

  Moreover, in this production example, the present invention is applied to the selection of a character appearing in a big hit game. For example, a selection of a piece of music to be output in a big hit game or a normal game state from a plurality of types of music, The present invention can also be applied to selecting a story to be executed during a big hit game from a story.

  FIG. 177 is a diagram illustrating an example of a selection effect executed during symbol variation display. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 177 is an example of the selection effect executed during the decorative symbol variation display, and the effect of selecting one of the treasure chests by operating the left button 137c and the right button 137d (the treasure chest selection effect) is executed. It shows how it is.

  As shown in FIG. 177 (a), when the treasure chest selection effect is started, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the right treasure chest image BG1 and the left treasure chest image BG2 at the left and right centers of the display screen, respectively. The icons of the left button 137c and the right button 137d are displayed side by side between the right treasure chest image BG1 and the left treasure chest image BG2, and the remaining time meter MT is displayed below the left treasure chest image BG2. The right treasure chest image BG1 and the left treasure chest image BG2 are represented by, for example, light blue, and the icons of the left button 137c and the right button 137d are represented by, for example, white. Then, on the upper part of the display screen, a character display “Select a treasure box that can be opened with a direction key” is performed, and it is notified that a treasure box selection effect has been started. In the upper right corner of the display screen, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In this treasure chest selection effect, the left treasure chest image BG1 or the left treasure chest image BG2 is selected by operating the left button 137c and the right button 137d until the operation acceptance period elapses, and the treasure chest selected when the operation acceptance period elapses. An effect in which an item may appear from the image is executed.

  After that, for example, when 1 second has passed, as shown in FIG. 177 (b), the display shows that the remaining time meter MT has passed 1 second, that is, the gauge is reduced by 1 second. Is done. At this time, the operation using the left button 137c and the right button 137d has not been performed yet.

  When the pressing operation is performed once by the left button 137c, as shown in FIG. 177 (c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the color of the icon indicating the left button 137c changes from white to red, The color of the left treasure box image BG2 changes from light blue to red. That is, it is notified that the left treasure chest image BG2 is being selected. At this time, a confirmation sound is output once to notify that the button has been operated. The audio output timing may be the same as the display change timing, the timing after the display change timing, or the timing before the display change timing. Also good. Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 177 (c), for example, 3 seconds have elapsed since the operation reception period started.

  After that, when the operation acceptance period has elapsed, as shown in FIG. 177 (d), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the remaining time meter MT in a mode where the remaining gauge is 0 seconds, and the left treasure chest image BG2 is displayed. It is displayed in red to notify that the left treasure box image BG2 has been selected.

  Thereafter, in the decorative symbol display device 208, after the left treasure box image BG2 is enlarged and displayed at the timing shown in FIG. . Note that the items appearing in the left treasure chest image BG2 are not limited to the booklet described above, and various items such as a princess character HM as shown in FIG. 177 (e1) can also appear. In addition, as shown in FIG. 177 (e2), the treasure box image is selected, but the lid may not open and the item may not appear. The same item may appear when the left treasure chest image BG2 is selected and when the right treasure chest image BG1 is selected, or different items may appear.

  In the production example described above, one of the left treasure chest image BG2 and the right treasure chest image BG1 can be selected by one press operation of the left button 137c or the right button 137d. For example, the selection target is a loop. It may be. Specifically, for example, when the left button 137c is pressed once in the state shown in FIG. 177 (c), the selection target is a loop, and the right treasure chest image In the state where BG1 is selected and the left button 137c is further pressed once, the left treasure chest image BG2 may be selected. Further, in this case, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function may be in an effective state. When the left button 137c or the right button 137d is continuously pressed, the selection target is matched with the pseudo continuous hitting operation. These treasure chests may be changed sequentially. At this time, the interval between the pseudo consecutive hit operations may be set to an interval (for example, 0.5 seconds) at which the player can easily recognize that the treasure chest as a selection target has been changed. Alternatively, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be disabled, and the treasure chests to be selected may be sequentially changed only for each pressing operation of the left button 137c and the right button 137d. Further, in the case where the long press automatic continuous hitting function is in an effective state, if the left button 137c or the right button 137d is continuously pressed before the treasure box selection effect is started, a pseudo continuous hitting operation is performed. Instead, it may be configured such that a pseudo consecutive hit operation is performed by pressing the left button 137c or the right button 137d after the treasure box selection effect is started.

  Also, the selection target does not have to be a loop. For example, when the left button 137c is pressed once in the state shown in FIG. 177 (c), the selection target is left. It may be configured not to change from the treasure box image BG2. In this case, only a confirmation sound by a single pressing operation of the left button 137c may be output. Further, in this case, the long press automatic repeated hitting function may be in an effective state. If the left button 137c or the right button 137d is continuously pressed, a pseudo repeated hit operation is performed. The treasure chest image that is the target of the above may be configured not to change. Furthermore, in this case, only a confirmation sound may be output for each pseudo continuous hit operation.

  FIG. 178 is a diagram for explaining an example of the effect produced by the repeated operation of the effect button. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. Here, in the effect example shown in FIG. 178, in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208, the left image display device 209L and the front of the right end portion of the decorative symbol display device 208 are positioned in front of the left end portion of the decorative symbol display device 208. The right image display device 209R is disposed at a position overlapping with the right image display device 209R. The left image display device 209L and the right image display device 209R each function as fourth rendering means (second image display means). The left image display device 209L and the right image display device 209R are connected to, for example, a slide drive motor (not shown) via link members, and are close to each other along the display surface of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is possible to move on. In addition, the left image display device 209L and the right image display device 209R are connected to a rotation driving motor (not shown) via a link member, for example, and when the positions are close to each other, the decorative image display device 208 It is possible to rotate along the display surface. Furthermore, the left image display device 209L is provided with a light emitting unit LL in which full-color LEDs are arranged on the outer periphery thereof, and the right image display device 209R is provided with a light emitting unit LR in which LEDs are arranged on an outer periphery thereof. ing. In the present embodiment, the light emitting units LL and LR function as an example of second rendering means. Further, the means for moving the left image display device 109L and the right image display device 209R provided with the light emitting portions LL, LR functions as an example of third rendering means (movable means). In addition, the transparent plate member 118 (see FIG. 138) is provided with a predetermined lens cut in the transmission region, and a light emitter is provided at an appropriate position near the side end of the transparent plate member 118. The light is reflected toward the front by the lens cut portion, so that the transmissive region can appear to emit light with a predetermined pattern. In addition, the light-emitting body which comprises the light emission parts LL and LR is not restricted to LED, For example, a lamp may be sufficient and other light-emitting devices, such as EL, may be applied. In the example of production shown in FIG. 178, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, and the second special figure reservation lamp 220 are shown for convenience of explanation. Omitted. Further, even if the long press automatic continuous hitting function is set to be valid, the long press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled in the production example shown in FIG. That is, the effect by the repeated operation of the effect button shown in FIG. 178 can be said to be an example of the second effect. It should be noted that the long-press auto-strike function may be validated in the effect by the repetitive operation of the effect button shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 178 (a), the decorative symbols are displayed in the lower part of the display screen of the right image display device 209R. Then, the continuous hitting effect by the effect button 136 is started. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an effect button image BT prompting the user to press the effect button 136 and a remaining time meter MT below the effect button image BT. It should be noted that at the timing shown in FIG. 178 (a), before the operation valid period starts, even if the effect button 136 is operated, it is treated as invalid. Further, the effect button lamp 138 is turned off. In addition, all the LEDs of the light emitting units LL and LR are turned off. In the present embodiment, the light emitting units LL and LR are all turned off in the normal state. However, the light emitting units LL and LR may emit light in a predetermined manner. You may make it blink. In the present embodiment, a mode in which all LEDs in the light emitting units LL and LR are turned off is also included in one mode of the light emitting mode.

  Thereafter, on the decorative symbol display device 208, at the timing shown in FIG. 178 (b), the characters “Please hit repeatedly” are displayed on the top of the effect button image BT, and the effect button lamp 138 emits red light. It is notified that the effective period has started. Then, the player who sees this starts a continuous hitting operation by the effect button 136.

  When the player continuously performs the striking operation of the effect button 136, the light emitting units LL and LR gradually increase the number of LEDs that emit light from the lower portion according to the number of operations of the effect button 136. In the timing shown in FIG. 178 (c), a state is shown in which the LED emits yellow light from the lower end of the light emitting portions LL and LR to a height of about 1/4. In the present embodiment, such a light emission mode is an example of the second light emission mode. In the decorative symbol display device 208, a display in which the gauge of the remaining time meter MT decreases according to the elapsed time is performed. In the present embodiment, the light emitting unit LL and the light emitting unit LR simultaneously emit the same number of LEDs. However, for example, the light emitting unit LL emits light first, and all the LEDs of the light emitting unit LL emit light. Later, the light emitting unit LR may start to emit light, or the light emitting unit LR may emit light first, and after all the LEDs of the light emitting unit LR emit light, the light emitting unit LL starts to emit light. May be. Further, the number of LEDs that emit light by the light emitting unit LL and the light emitting unit LR may be alternately increased.

  After that, the player continuously performs the striking operation of the effect button 136, and when the timing shown in FIG. 178 (d) is reached, the LED emits green light from the lower end of the light emitting portions LL and LR to a height of about 2/3. In the present embodiment, such a light emission mode is an example of the second light emission mode. In the decorative symbol display device 208, a green effect image is displayed in a region along the light emitting portions LL and LR, and an effect display is performed as if the light from the LED has an influence on the image. As described above, the light emitting portions LL and LR change the light emission color according to the number of light emission of the LEDs, that is, the number of operations of the effect button 136. Note that only the number of LEDs emitted may be changed, and the emission color may not be changed. Further, only the emission color of the LED may be changed, and the number of light emission may not be changed. The timing at which the effect image is displayed may be the same as the timing at which the LED color of the light emitting units LL and LR changes, or the LED color may change after the effect image is displayed. The effect image may be displayed after the color of the LED changes. In the present embodiment, the display color of the effect image is the same as the light emission color of the LEDs of the light emitting units LL and LR, but may be different. In this case, the emission color of the LED and the display color of the effect image may be associated with each other or may not be associated.

  Thereafter, the player continuously performs the continuous operation of the effect button 136, and when the timing shown in FIG. In the present embodiment, such a light emission mode is an example of the second light emission mode. Further, in the decorative symbol display device 208, a red effect image is displayed in a region along the light emitting portions LL and LR, and an effect display is performed as if light from the LED has an influence on the image.

  After that, when the player continues to perform the repeated operation of the effect button 136, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the princess character at the timing shown in FIG. 178 (f), indicating that the effect by the repeated operation is successful. A mode in which the light emission color changes for all LEDs of the light emitting units LL and LR so that the light emitting units LL and LR appear to emit light in rainbow colors (hereinafter referred to as “rainbow color light emitting mode”). It may light up. In response to this, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an effect image that is a display mode that is visible in a rainbow color in a region along the light emitting portions LL and LR. The timing at which the princess character is displayed may be the same as the timing at which the effect image is displayed such that the effect image is visually recognized in rainbow colors, or the princess character is displayed. The timing may be earlier or the timing when the princess character is displayed may be later.

  After that, at the timing shown in FIG. 178 (g), the left image display device 209L and the right image display device 209R move in a direction in which they are close to each other, and left at a position that overlaps the front of the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The image display device 209L and the right image display device 209R are the closest positions. In addition, as for the light emission parts LL and LR, all LED continues lighting in the rainbow color light emission aspect.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 178 (h), after the left image display device 209L and the right image display device 209R are integrally rotated 90 degrees clockwise along the display surface of the decorative symbol display device 208, At the timing shown in FIG. 178 (i), a “celebration” character congratulating that it is a big hit is displayed across the left image display device 209L and the right image display device 209R. At this time, the decorative design during the variable display is displayed in the lower left part of the right image display device 209R according to the orientation of the right image display device 209R.

  Thereafter, at a timing shown in FIG. 178 (j), the light emitters disposed near the side end portions of the transmission plate member 118 emit light, and a predetermined pattern is formed in the transmission region of the transmission plate member 118. Thereby, there may be a case where the left image display device 209L, the right image display device 209R, and the pattern formed on the transmissive plate member 118 can provide a deep effect. It should be noted that the effect that a predetermined pattern is formed in the transmission region of the transmission plate member 118 may not be performed.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, when the continuous hitting operation is performed, as shown in FIGS. 178 (b) to (f), the light emission mode of the light emitting units LL and LR is set to the number of operations of the effect button 136. You can see effects and effect images that change accordingly, but for example, if the player does not perform the continuous hit operation after the start by the continuous hit operation, these effects are not performed, As shown in FIG. 178 (g), the left image display device 209L and the right image display device 209R move at the timing when the operation effective period elapses. That is, the player can visually recognize the effects shown in FIGS. 178 (g) to (j) without performing the continuous hitting operation, but the light emission modes of the light emitting units LL and LR change. Since the effect and the effect image cannot be visually recognized, the continuous hitting of the effect button 136 may contribute as an incentive to enjoy such an effect.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, for example, the effect that the light emitting units LL and LR are lit in the manner shown in FIGS. 178 (c) to (e) corresponds to the effect button 136 being operated a plurality of times. It can be said that the effect is not started when the effect button 136 is pressed for a long time.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, it can also be said that the continuous hit operation effect shown in FIG. 178 (c) to FIG.

  In the present embodiment, the light emission mode (light emission color) of the light emitting units LL and LR when the left image display device 209L and the right image display device 209R are close to each other corresponds to the repeated operation of the effect button 136. It may be related to the light emission mode (light emission color) of the light emitting portions LL and LR that have changed, or may not be related. In addition, when the left image display device 209L and the right image display device 209R are positioned close to each other, the light emission mode (light emission color) of the light emitting units LL and LR is successfully achieved by the repetitive operation, and the repetitive operation is performed. It may be different from the case where it is not performed or may be the same.

  Moreover, you may provide the light emission means from which a position changes according to the content of production other than the light emission parts LL and LR mentioned above. In this case, the light emission mode may be changed in relation to the effect by the continuous hit operation shown in FIG. The aspect may be changed. Moreover, you may not provide the light emission means from which a position changes according to the content of production other than the light emission parts LL and LR mentioned above.

  In addition, the light emitting units LL and LR also perform a predetermined light emission mode (first light emission mode) during execution of an effect other than the effect by the continuous hit operation shown in FIG. 178 (for example, an effect during symbol variation display or a big hit game). ), But may be configured to be lit only during the execution of the effect by the continuous hit operation shown in FIG. In the present embodiment, the first light emission mode is different from the second light emission mode, but may be the same light emission mode.

  In the example of production shown in FIG. 178, a shielding device 246 (see FIG. 140) that does not include an image display device may be applied instead of the left image display device 209L and the right image display device 209R. It is good also as an aspect which provided the light emission parts LL and LR in the left door 246a and the right door 246b of the shielding apparatus 246, respectively.

  In the present embodiment, the left image display device 209L and the right image display device 209R are configured to be rotatable together, but may be configured not to rotate. The left image display device 209L and the right image display device 209R are configured to be movable along the display surface of the decorative symbol display device 208, but may be configured not to move.

  In this embodiment, two image display devices (the left image display device 209L and the right image display device 209R) are applied as the second image display means. However, the second image display device may be configured by one image display device. You may be comprised by three or more image display apparatuses.

  In the present embodiment, the light emitting units LL and LR are provided in the effect device 206 of the game board 200. However, the light emitting units LL and LR may be provided in addition to the effect device 206 of the game board 200. Instead, the front frame door 106 may be provided. For example, an effect button lamp 138 may be applied instead of the light emitting units LL and LR. In this case, for example, the effect button lamp 138 may have a configuration in which light emitting elements such as LEDs are arranged in a matrix, and the display mode may be changed in accordance with the continuous hitting operation. Moreover, the structure provided in both the game board 200 and the front frame door 106 may be sufficient as the light emission parts LL and LR. In this case, for example, if the light emission control is performed so that the light emission unit provided on the game board 200 is linked to the light emission unit provided on the front frame door 106, the effect effect may be improved. In addition, any of the light emitting units in these modes may be movable by a movable unit or may not be movable. In addition, when the light emitting unit provided in the movable means and the light emitting part that is not movable are provided, the light emitting part that is not movable is first caused to emit light, and then the step-up is performed to emit the light emitting part provided in the movable means. The light emission may be controlled so that Further, instead of the light emitting portions LL and LR, the light emitting body provided at the side end portion of the transparent plate member 118 described above with reference to FIG. You may make it implement | achieve by changing an aspect.

  FIG. 179 is a diagram illustrating an example of the back button effect. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. Here, in the effect example shown in FIG. 179, in addition to the decorative symbol display device 208, effect lamps SL1 to SL4 functioning as second effect means are provided below the decorative symbol display device 208, and each lights up. It is comprised so that control can be performed. The effect lamps SL1 to SL4 each have a built-in full color LED as a light emitting means and are covered with a lens cover. On the lens cover of the effect lamp SL1, the letter “eight” is drawn. On the lens cover of the effect lamp SL2, the letter “Yo” is drawn. On the lens cover of the effect lamp SL3, “ The characters “General” are drawn, and the characters “Military” are drawn on the lens cover of the effect lamp SL4. In addition, the transparent plate member 118 (see FIG. 138) is provided with a predetermined lens cut in the transmission region, and a light emitter is provided at an appropriate position near the side end of the transparent plate member 118. The light is reflected toward the front by the lens cut portion, so that the transmissive region can appear to emit light with a predetermined pattern. In addition, as a light emission means which comprises effect lamp SL1-SL4, not only LED but a lamp | ramp may be used, for example, and other light-emitting devices, such as EL, may be applied. In the example of production shown in FIG. 179, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the first special figure hold lamp 218, and the second special figure hold lamp 220 are shown for convenience of explanation. Omitted. Further, even if the long press automatic continuous hitting function is set to be valid, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be enabled in the example of the effect shown in FIG. In the present embodiment, during the period in which the back button effect can be executed (the operation reception period for performing the back button effect), it is not notified that the operation of the effect button 136 or the operation key unit 137 is valid. For example, you may perform a tutorial display that suggests the existence of a back button effect such as “If you operate the button at the time of ...”, and this tutorial display may cause the back button effect to happen. It may be displayed during a feasible period or may be intentionally displayed. When such a tutorial display suggests a back button effect, the effect performed by operating the effect button 136 or the like may be referred to as a back button effect, and is not included in the back button effect. There may be.

  As shown in FIG. 179 (a), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner in the upper left corner of the display screen. In the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, a reach title TT “Find a family crest” is displayed in a square frame to notify that a super reach effect is started. For example, a green color scheme is provided in the frame of the reach title TT. In addition, the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 and the effect button lamp 138 are all turned off. Here, the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 may be turned off in a normal state, or may be caused to emit light in a predetermined light emission mode (for example, a white color).

  Thereafter, when a player who knows the existence of the back button effect is pressed once at the timing shown in FIG. 179 (b), as shown in FIG. 179 (c), the frame of the reach title TT is displayed. The inner color changes from green to red. That is, the operation of the effect button 136 is not notified, but the operation of the effect button 136 is valid during the period (second period) in which the reach title TT is displayed. By operating 136, a back button effect is performed. Note that the change in the color scheme within the reach title TT frame may be performed by a single pressing operation of the effect button 136 or may be performed when there are a plurality of operations. Alternatively, it may be performed when a long press operation is performed for a predetermined time. Further, when the production button 136 is operated, the color scheme in the frame of the reach title TT is changed as a back button production. For example, the color of the character is changed, the background color and the display mode are changed. It may be changed. Further, as the back button effect, the display mode of the reach title TT may be changed only once, or the display mode of the reach title TT may be changed every time the effect button 136 is pressed. Further, by operating the effect button 136 while the reach title TT is displayed, the back button effect may or may not be performed. For example, the effect button 136 may be operated. A lottery may be performed each time the game is performed, and a back button effect may be performed when the winning is made. In the example shown in FIG. 179 (c), when the effect button 136 is operated, a predetermined sound effect may be output in addition to the change in the color scheme within the reach title TT. In the example shown in FIG. 179 (c), the color scheme in the reach title TT frame may change from green to red even when the effect button 136 is not operated during the operation reception period. In addition, when the effect button 136 is not operated during the operation reception period, the color may change to a color other than red. In this case, when the effect button 136 is further pressed, the color scheme in the reach title TT frame may be further changed (for example, green> yellow> red).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 179 (d), the super-reach effect is started in the decorative symbol display device 208. When the super reach production is started, the character display “Development by dropping the family crest” is performed on the left end of the display screen of the decorative design display device 208, and the production movable body 225 imitating the family crest is displayed above the decorative design display device 208. It is notified that the development effect with higher reliability of the big hit is started by falling from.

  After the super reach production is started, as shown in FIG. 179 (d), the player who knows the existence of the back button production (back button repeated production) starts the continuous operation with the production button 136, and the predetermined number of times. As shown in FIG. 179 (e), the effect lamp SL1 is lit in green. That is, the operation of the effect button 136 is not notified, but the operation of the effect button 136 is valid during the period when the super reach effect is performed (second period). By repeatedly operating 136, the back button continuous striking effect is performed. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, as the effect lamp SL1 lights in green, a green effect image is displayed in an area along the lower edge of the display screen, and the light from the effect lamp SL1 affects the image. The effect is displayed as if it were. The timing at which the effect image is displayed may be the same as the timing at which the effect lamp SL1 is lit in green, or the effect lamp SL1 may be lit after the effect image is displayed. The effect image may be displayed after the effect lamp SL1 is turned on. In the present embodiment, the display color of the effect image is the same as the emission color of the effect lamp SL1, but it may be different. In this case, the emission color of the LED and the display color of the effect image may be associated with each other or may not be associated. Further, the effect image may not be displayed. In the present embodiment, the effect lamp SL1 is turned on by the continuous operation of the effect button 136, and the effect image is displayed along with it. However, the effect image is displayed by the operation of the effect button 136. The effect lamp SL1 may be lit in association with it.

  Thereafter, when the player continuously performs the striking operation of the effect button 136, the lighting of the effect lamp SL1, the effect lamp SL2, the effect lamp SL3, and the effect lamp SL4 is lit in green in accordance with the number of operations of the effect button 136. To start. FIG. 179 (f) shows a state where all the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 are lit in green. The effect image display mode is not changed, but may be changed. For example, the display area of the effect image may be increased according to the number of lighting of the effect lamps. The lighting order of the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 is not limited to that described above, and can be set as appropriate. Furthermore, you may make it perform a big hit notice by changing the lighting order of effect lamp SL1-SL4 from the normal case.

  After that, when the player continues to perform the continuous operation of the effect button 136 and the timing shown in FIG. 179 (g) is reached, the effect lamp SL1 changes its light emission mode from green to red. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the display color of the effect image changes from green to red, and the display area also expands upward.

  Thereafter, when the player continuously performs the continuous operation of the effect button 136, the effect lamp SL1, the effect lamp SL2, the effect lamp SL3, and the effect lamp SL4 are changed in order of green according to the number of operations of the effect button 136. The light emission mode changes to red. FIG. 179 (h) shows a state in which the lighting modes of all the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 are changed from green to red. In the present embodiment, in the back button continuous striking effect, the long press automatic repetitive striking function is disabled, so that the lighting of the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 is not started when the effect button 136 is operated for a long time. In this way, in the back button repeated striking effect, the effect in which the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 are lit and the effect image are displayed can be considered as an example of a second effect. In addition, the effect image in the back button repeated striking effect can be said to be an example of the second display. In addition, in the back button repeated striking effect, a mode in which at least one of the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 is lit can be said to be an example of a second light emitting mode.

  Thereafter, when a predetermined production time elapses after the start of the super reach production, as shown in FIG. 179 (i), the production movable body 225 arranged above the decoration design display device 208 is lowered, and the decoration design is displayed. The display device 208 moves to a position overlapping the front in the center. At this time, all of the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 are in the rainbow light emission mode. The descending operation of the effect movable body 225 is not an effect of the back button effect but an effect executed in the super reach effect. Moreover, the rainbow-colored light emission mode by the production lamps SL1 to SL4 is a light emission mode accompanying the movement of the production movable body 225, and is separate from the back button production. It should be noted that the timing at which lighting of the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 in the rainbow light emission mode is started may be simultaneous with the completion of the descent operation of the effect movable body 225 or before the completion of the descent operation of the effect movable body 225. The timing may be later, or may be later than the completion of the descent operation of the effect movable body 225.

  Thereafter, at a timing shown in FIG. 179 (j), the light emitters arranged near the side end portions of the transmission plate member 118 emit light, and a predetermined pattern is formed in the transmission region of the transmission plate member 118. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the background image changes, and the pattern formed on the transmissive plate member 118 is emphasized. Thereby, there may be a case where an effect with a depth can be performed by the effect movable body 225 and the pattern formed on the transmission plate member 118. It should be noted that the effect that a predetermined pattern is formed in the transmission region of the transmission plate member 118 may not be performed.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, when the continuous hitting operation is performed, as shown in FIGS. 179 (e) to (h), the lighting modes of the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 are used as back button continuous hitting effects. Although the effects and effect images that change according to the number of operations of the effect button 136 can be seen, if the player does not perform the continuous hitting operation, these effects are not performed and the operation valid period elapses. At the timing, the descent operation of the effect movable body 225 is performed as shown in FIG. 179 (i). That is, the player can visually recognize the effects shown in FIGS. 179 (i) to (j) without performing the continuous hitting operation as the back button operation, but visually recognizes the above-described back button effect. Since it is not possible, repeated hitting of the effect button 136 may contribute as an incentive to enjoy such an effect.

  Moreover, you may provide the light emission means from which the light emission aspect changes according to the content of production other than production lamp SL1-SL4 mentioned above. In this case, the light emission mode may change or may not change in relation to the effect by the continuous hit operation shown in FIG. The aspect may be changed. Moreover, you may not provide the light emission means from which the light emission aspect changes according to the content of production other than production lamp SL1-SL4 mentioned above. Moreover, the structure which the effect lamps SL1-SL4 move according to the effect content may be sufficient.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 are provided in the effect device 206 of the game board 200, but may be provided in a configuration other than the effect device 206 of the game board 200, or the game board 200. Instead, the front frame door 106 may be provided. Moreover, the structure by which production lamp SL1-SL4 was provided in both the game board 200 and the front frame door 106 may be sufficient. In this case, for example, if the light emission control is performed so that the effect light provided on the game board 200 is linked to the effect lamp provided on the front frame door 106, the effect effect may be improved. In addition, any of the effect lamps in these modes may be movable by a movable means, or may not be movable. In addition, when an effect lamp provided on the movable means and an effect lamp not movable are provided, the effect lamp that is not movable is first caused to emit light, and then the step-up is performed to emit the effect lamp provided on the movable means. The light emission may be controlled so that Further, instead of the effect lamps SL1 to SL4, the light emitting body provided at the side end portion of the transparent plate member 118 described above with reference to FIG. 179 (j) is applied, and the light emission in the pattern formed in the transmission region is performed. You may make it implement | achieve by changing an aspect.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the lighting of the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 in the back button repeated striking effect may be executed in response to the effect button 136 being operated a plurality of times (operating in the first operation mode). It is a certain effect, and it can be said that the light of the effect lamps SL <b> 1 to SL <b> 4 is not started when the effect button 136 is operated for a long time (operated in the second operation mode).

  Further, in the present embodiment, the display of the effect image in the back button repeated striking effect is a display that may be executed in response to the effect button 136 being operated a plurality of times (operating in the first operation mode), It can be said that the display of the effect image is not started when the effect button 136 is pressed and operated (in the second operation mode).

  Moreover, in this embodiment, it can be said that the effect that the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 are turned on and the effect image is displayed in the back button repeated hitting effect is an effect that may be started during the display of the symbol variation display. .

  FIG. 180 is a diagram illustrating an example of an effect produced by a long press operation of an effect button. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. Here, in the effect example shown in FIG. 180, an effect button unit 1360 is provided instead of the effect button 136. The effect button unit 1360 includes a button part 136P and a jog dial part 136J. The button part 136P can be projected upward by an actuator such as a motor, for example, and the position thereof is displaced according to the contents of the effect. The jog dial part 136J is formed in an annular shape so as to surround the outer side of the button part 136P. The jog dial portion 136J can be rotated in the forward / reverse direction along the circumferential direction by the player, and a signal corresponding to the operation amount is sent to the sensor circuit 428 of the first sub-control portion 400 (see FIG. 141). Is input. 180, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the first special figure hold lamp 218, and the second special figure hold lamp 220 are shown for convenience of explanation. Omitted. The special symbol 1 and the 4th symbol t1 are displayed in a variable manner corresponding to the variation display of the symbol on the first special symbol display device 212, and the special symbol 2 and the 4th symbol t2 are the display results of the second special symbol display device 214. In response to, the display is stopped with a display result of deviation.

  As shown in FIG. 180 (a), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen, the reach state is formed by “decoration 3”, and super reach (swordsman reach) is achieved. Production is being performed. In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 180 (a), an animation of a duel scene between the protagonist and the enemy swordsman is displayed, and at the timing shown in FIG. 180 (a), the game will be decided. Is shown. In addition, in order to easily recognize the contents of the effect, what is the effect result that is a big hit may be displayed (for example, a character such as “big hit if you win the swordsman” is displayed). Then, in the center of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a character “PUSH” is displayed together with the effect button image BT simulating the effect button unit 1360 over the animation of the duel scene. A remaining time meter MT is displayed below, and a notification that prompts the user to operate the button unit 136P is provided. Further, the effect button lamp 138 provided inside the button portion 136P emits red light. Note that FIG. 180 (a) shows a state in which a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed since the operation effective period started. Then, when the player presses the button portion 136P, the decorative symbol display device 208 performs a display indicating that the main character has been defeated by the swordsman, as shown in FIG. 180 (b).

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 180 (c), the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the revival effect, and the effect button image BT is displayed along with the characters “Rotate the jog to rewind time” and the jog dial 136J. Informs that it is rotated.

  As shown in FIG. 180 (d), when the player rotates the jog dial 136J in accordance with the display of the decorative symbol display device 208, a display is performed in which the animation is rewound until the duel scene display in the swordsman reach production. There is a case. Here, in accordance with the rotation operation of the jog dial 136J, a predetermined effect such as an effect image or lamp emission may be performed.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 180 (e), the decorative symbol display device 208 starts the duel scene animation again, and displays a big button image LBT, which is a large image imitating the effect button unit 1360, A remaining time meter MT is displayed below the deca button image LBT to notify that the button portion 136P is pressed. In addition, the production button unit 1360 produces the fact that the button portion 136P protrudes and the degree of expectation for the big hit is high. At this time, the effect button lamp 138 emits red light. The timing at which the button part 136P protrudes may be the same as the timing at which the display of the big button image LBT is started, may be after the display of the big button image LBT is started, or the display of the big button image LBT is started. It may be before. In this embodiment, when the display of the big button image LBT is started, the operation effective period of the button part 136P is started. However, when the button part 136P protrudes, the operation effective period of the button part 136P is increased. It may be started. In FIG. 180 (e), the effect button image BT may be displayed instead of the display of the big button image LBT. In this case, the button part 136P may not protrude.

  FIG. 180 (f) shows a state in which a predetermined time (for example, 1 second) has elapsed since the display of the big button image LBT was started. When the player presses down the button portion 136P as shown in FIG. 180 (f), the effect movable body 225 disposed above the decorative symbol display device 208 is lowered as shown in FIG. 180 (g). Then, the decorative symbol display device 208 moves to a position overlapping the front in the center. At this time, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a predetermined effect image in order to enhance the fact that the effect movable body 225 has been lowered.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 180 (h), the left decorative member 225L and the right decorative member 225R, which are disposed on the left and right sides of the decorative symbol display device 208, move to positions close to each other, and the effect movable body 225 is moved. It will be a form that surrounds both the left and right sides. The left decorative member 225L and the right decorative member 225R are formed by cutting out a part of a semicircular plate-like member in an arc shape, and have a shape that substantially follows the outer periphery of the effect movable body 225. In the present embodiment, the fact that the effect movable body 225 is operated is informed that the game will be a big hit, and the player may be able to recognize that it will be a big hit by looking at this effect. 180 (g) to FIG. 180 (h) are not necessarily performed. For example, even if the button unit 136P is operated, the effect movable body 225 does not descend, and the effect does not occur. The result may be displayed.

  Thereafter, when the left decorative member 225L and the right decorative member 225R are retracted to the left and right sides of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the effect movable body 225 is retracted above the decorative symbol display device 208, as shown in FIG. In the decorative symbol display device 208, a display showing that the main character has won the swordsman is performed.

  Further, in this embodiment, in the swordsman reach production, the long press automatic continuous hitting function is effective, and after the production shown in FIG. 180 (c) is performed, the jog dial 136J is not rotated and As shown in FIG. 180 (d), as shown in FIG. 180 (e), the jog dial 136J may be rotated by pressing and holding the button portion 136P.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, by performing a long press operation with the button portion 136P, it is configured to start a predetermined effect even if the rotation operation of the jog dial 136J is performed. That is, in this embodiment, it can be said that the predetermined operation by the operation device other than the effect button is replaced by the long press operation of the effect button. Examples of operation devices other than the effect buttons include a touch panel and a touch sensor. For example, in the case of a touch sensor, when performing an operation such as rubbing a hand on the sensor and performing an effect requesting repeated detection / non-detection of the sensor multiple times, this operation is pressed and held for a long time. You may make it substitute by operation.

  Further, instead of the long press operation of the effect button, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be enabled by a long press operation by an operation device other than the effect button. You may comprise so that a long press automatic continuous hitting function may be exhibited by long-time detection of a sensor.

  FIG. 181 is a diagram illustrating an example of a specific effect in the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. In the example of production shown in FIG. 181, for convenience of explanation, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, and the second special figure reservation lamp 220 are illustrated. Omitted. FIGS. 181 (a1) to (e1) show a state in which the effect of operating the effect button 136 in accordance with the rhythm is executed in the super reach. In this super reach, when the long press automatic continuous hitting function is set, the long press automatic continuous hitting function is enabled, but the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be disabled.

  As shown in FIG. 181 (a1), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a variation of the decorative symbol at the upper left corner of the display screen, and a reach state is formed by “decoration 3”. SP Reach) is being performed. In the lower left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, “Step 1” indicating the difficulty level of this effect is displayed. There are a plurality of levels of difficulty, and for example, the degree of difficulty is configured to change according to the degree of expectation for the big hit and the degree of success of the performance in this princess dance SP reach.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 181 (a1), the timing image TM including the characters “CHANCE” on the right side of the display screen is displayed moving from the top to the bottom of the display screen. A hit image HT is displayed on the moving path of the timing image TM. The timing image TM is moved and displayed at a timing overlapping with the hit image HT according to music. The effect button lamp 138 emits red light to notify that the operation is being accepted.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 181 (b1), the player starts a long press operation of the effect button 136. Then, the long press automatic continuous hitting function is activated, and the pseudo effect button 136 is repeatedly operated at regular intervals regardless of the timing at which the timing image TM overlaps the hit image HT. Note that during the operation of the long press automatic continuous hitting function, the pseudo effect button 136 may be operated only at the timing when the timing image TM overlaps the hit image HT. On the other hand, an experienced player does not perform a game for beginners such as operating the long press automatic continuous hitting function by operating the long press on the effect button 136, and the effect button at a position where the timing image TM overlaps the hit image HT. A high score can be aimed at by playing a game of operating 136. The playing method of this “princess dance SP reach” is the same as that shown in FIG. 170 and described above.

  Thereafter, the game of the first turn in the princess dance SP reach is completed, and the result of the game in the first turn is determined. If the determination result is a level-up determination result, as shown in FIG. 181 (c1), the characters “NICE” are displayed, and it is notified that the difficulty level shifts to “Step 2”. . Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 181 (c1), since the operation is not valid, the effect button lamp 138 is turned off.

  Thereafter, a game with a difficulty level of “Step 2” is started. FIG. 181 (d1) shows a state in which a game with a difficulty level “step 2” is being performed. Thereafter, when the player starts the long press operation of the effect button 136 at the timing shown in FIG. 181 (e1), the long press automatic continuous hit function is activated again, and the pseudo hit operation of the pseudo effect button 136 is resumed. .

  In the present embodiment, the period during which the long press automatic continuous hitting function is enabled is repeatedly performed. The second period (for example, the long press automatic continuous hitting function is valid across the interval period (for example, the period shown in FIG. 181 (c1)) in which the long press automatic continuous hitting function is invalidated from the period shown in b1). 181 (d1) to the period (e1) shown in FIG. 181 (e1)), when the long press operation of the effect button 136 is performed, the second after the long press automatic continuous hitting function is once invalidated In this period, the long press automatic continuous hitting function is not effective unless the effect button 136 is pressed again. When the long press operation of the effect button 136 is performed from the first period to the second period across the interval period, the long press auto is performed in the second period without pressing the effect button 136 again. The continuous hitting function may be enabled.

  181 (a2) to (d2) show an example of the operation when the premium up mode is selected on the effect customization setting screen as described above with reference to FIG. 148.

  FIG. 181 (a2) shows a state in which the premium up mode is set as shown in FIG. 148 (h1) and described above.

  As described above, when the continuous hit operation effect is started after the premier up mode is set, as shown in FIG. Along with the BT, a character “Let's hit repeatedly” is displayed in the center of the screen, and a remaining time meter MT is displayed below the effect button image BT. In this continuous hitting operation effect, when the long press automatic continuous hitting function is set, the long press automatic continuous hitting function is validated. When the player recognizes that the continuous hit operation effect has been started, the player starts the continuous hit operation using the effect button 136.

  Thereafter, when the operation is performed a plurality of times by the continuous operation of the effect button 136, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a cut-in image composed of the character of Tono-sama and the characters “iron plate” as shown in FIG. 181 (c2). There may be a premier notice that is displayed and informs that the jackpot is confirmed. In this embodiment, since the premier up mode is set, this premier notice is likely to occur. When the non-premier up mode is set on the effect customization setting screen, a notice other than the premier notice is given. Is likely to occur.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 181 (d2), the decoration symbol display device 208 performs a definite display of “decoration 5” — “decoration 5” — “decoration 5”, which is a combination of the jackpot decoration symbols. In addition, in the lower right corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, a mission achievement display indicating mission achievement is displayed. The mission accomplishment display is like a history of the effect occurrence display that has been displayed so far (here, the effect occurrence display that is displayed as “NO92: I saw the iron plate notice”). Note that an effect occurrence display corresponding to an effect with a high expectation may be displayed for a longer time. On the other hand, the effect occurrence display corresponding to the effect with low expectation disappears immediately, and when the effect is executed from the next to the next, it may be overwritten from the next to the next. Furthermore, the effect generation display may be provided with a display indicating the degree of expectation or the appearance frequency of the effect, for example, a rank display of rank A to rank C may be attached. Further, this mission completion display may be a display for opening a hidden effect for the membership service. That is, for example, when the premiere notice shown in FIG. 181 (c2) is performed, a specific hidden effect (for example, a specific character can be selected) can be executed, and the mission is achieved. You may make it display by display.

  As described above, in this embodiment, setting the premier up mode makes it easy for a premier notice to occur. In some cases, missions can be easier to accomplish.

  In the present embodiment, on the menu screen described above with reference to FIGS. 148 to 149, each button constituting the operation key unit 137 is pressed once to move the cursor CL, and the setting screen changes. And premiere notice (premier production) is easily generated as a benefit of labor such as setting to premier up mode.

  Moreover, in this embodiment, it can be said that the result set in the menu screen mentioned above is reflected in the effect that the long press automatic continuous hitting function is effective.

  FIG. 182 is a diagram illustrating an example of the chance eye effect. The following figure shows how the production progresses in alphabetical order in parentheses. FIG. 182 shows a state of transition to super reach after an effect of operating the effect button 136 a plurality of times in the chance eye effect. In the example of production shown in FIG. 181, for convenience of explanation, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the first special figure reservation lamp 218, and the second special figure reservation lamp 220 are illustrated. Omitted. Further, in this chance effect, even when the long press automatic continuous hitting function is set, the long press automatic continuous hitting function is invalidated, but the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be enabled.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 182 (a1), after the decorative symbol is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c, the left symbol display region 208a is displayed. The chance symbol “A” constituting a part of the chance eye is stopped and displayed, the chance symbol “B” constituting a part of the chance eye is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the chance symbol “B” is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. The chance symbol “C” constituting a part of the symbol is stopped and displayed with a combination of the decorative symbols that are chances. Then, the word “PUSH” is displayed together with the effect button image BT1 that prompts the user to press the effect button 136e so as to overlap the chance symbol “A” stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. The remaining time meter MT1 representing the remaining time is displayed below the effect button image BT1. In addition, the word “PUSH” is displayed together with the effect button image BT2 that prompts the user to press the effect button 136e so as to overlap the chance symbol “B” that is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the reception period of the effect button press is displayed. The remaining time meter MT2 representing the remaining time is displayed below the effect button image BT2. In addition, the word “PUSH” is displayed together with the effect button image BT3 prompting the user to press the effect button 136e so as to overlap the chance symbol “C” stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. The remaining time meter MT3 representing the remaining time is displayed below the effect button image BT3. As described above, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 182 (a1), it may be possible to recognize that the effect button 136 should be pressed three times. In other words, in the present embodiment, it may be possible to recognize the number of times that the effect button 136 should be pressed from the start of the chance eye effect. In the present embodiment, the long-press auto-strike function is disabled for an effect that allows the player to recognize in advance the number of times that the effect button 136 should be pressed. When the effect button 136 is operated a plurality of times by the player who has visually recognized the effect display shown in FIG. 182 (a1), the Tono-sama symbols YM1 to YM3 are displayed in this order instead of the chance symbols. There is a case. FIG. 182 (b1) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed in a manner in which three patterns YM1 to YM3 are arranged. In the present embodiment, it can be said that the display in the form in which the three patterns YM1 to YM3 are arranged in this way is an example of the second display (second effect). On the other hand, displayed in the middle of a plurality of operations, for example, a display in the form of Tono-sama design YM1 only, or a display in which the Tono-sama design YM1 and Tono-sama design YM2 are displayed together, and the Tosama design YM3 is not represented. Is a display other than the second display. That is, for each operation of the effect button 136, some effect (output of sound effects, etc.) is performed, and the second display (second effect) is displayed (or executed) after being performed a plurality of times. It can be said.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 182 (c1), after the cut-in effect including the character display of “heat” is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208, the super reach effect is performed at the timing shown in FIG. 182 (d1). Be started. In the chance eye effect, when the operation valid period has passed without pressing the effect button 136 three times, the display in a form in which the three patterns YM1 to YM3 shown in FIG. 182 (b1) are arranged. Or, the super reach production shown in FIG. 182 (d1) is started without the cut-in production shown in FIG. 182 (c1). Further, in the chance eye effect, when the operation valid period has passed without pressing the effect button 136 three times, the display in a mode in which the three patterns YM1 to YM3 shown in FIG. 182 (b1) are arranged. Without performing the above, after the cut-in effect shown in FIG. 182 (c1) is performed, the super reach effect shown in FIG. 182 (d1) may be started.

  In this way, in the chance eye effects shown in FIGS. 182 (a1) to (d1), by operating the effect button 136 a plurality of times, the Tono-like symbols YM1 to YM3 as shown in FIG. 182 (b1) are obtained. In some cases, the display in the form of three is visible. In other words, when the operation valid period has elapsed without operating the effect button 136, it is impossible to visually recognize the display in the form in which the three patterns YM1 to YM3 are arranged. The same applies to the cut-in effect shown in FIG. 182 (c1).

  Further, for example, in the chance eye effect, when the operation valid period has passed without pressing the effect button 136 three times, the three patterns YM1 to YM3 shown in FIG. 182 (b1) are arranged. May be displayed. In this case, for example, in an effect in which the long press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled, an advanced user can quickly view the effect more quickly than the beginner by operating the effect button 136 a plurality of times. So there may be a sense of achievement.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 182 (a2), the decorative symbol display is performed in the left symbol display region 208a, after the decorative symbol is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c. The chance symbol “A” constituting a part of the chance eye is stopped and displayed, the chance symbol “B” constituting a part of the chance eye is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the chance symbol “B” is displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. The chance symbol “C” constituting a part of the symbol is stopped and displayed with a combination of the decorative symbols that are chances. Then, the word “PUSH” is displayed together with the effect button image BT1 that prompts the user to press the effect button 136e so as to overlap the chance symbol “A” stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. The remaining time meter MT1 representing the remaining time is displayed below the effect button image BT1. In addition, the word “PUSH” is displayed together with the effect button image BT2 that prompts the user to press the effect button 136e so as to overlap the chance symbol “B” that is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the reception period of the effect button press is displayed. The remaining time meter MT2 representing the remaining time is displayed below the effect button image BT2. In addition, the word “PUSH” is displayed together with the effect button image BT3 prompting the user to press the effect button 136e so as to overlap the chance symbol “C” stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. The remaining time meter MT3 representing the remaining time is displayed below the effect button image BT3. As described above, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 182 (a2), it may be possible to recognize that the presentation button 136 should be pressed three times. In other words, in the present embodiment, it may be possible to recognize the number of times that the effect button 136 should be pressed from the start of the chance eye effect. In the present embodiment, the long-press auto-strike function is disabled for an effect that allows the player to recognize in advance the number of times that the effect button 136 should be pressed. When the effect button 136 is operated a plurality of times by the player who has visually recognized the effect display shown in FIG. 182 (a2), the Tono-like symbols YM1 to YM3 are displayed in this order instead of the chance symbols. There is a case. FIG. 182 (b2) shows a state in which three decorative patterns YM1 to YM3 are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  However, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 182 (c2-1), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the remaining time meter MT is displayed together with the effect button image BT, and the effect button 136 is pressed once more. A button operation additional effect is urged. Furthermore, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 182 (c2-1), the characters “Push and press” are displayed above the display in a mode in which the three patterns YM1 to YM3 are arranged. A predetermined effect image is displayed. The effect button lamp 138 emits red light to notify that the operation effective period has started.

  Then, when the player presses the effect button 136 once at the timing shown in FIG. 182 (c2-2), as shown in FIG. 182 (d2), the super reach effect is started in the decorative symbol display measure 208. However, at this time, a character display of “Katsuatsu” is added to indicate that the reliability of the super reach effect is big. In the chance eye effect, when the operation valid period has passed without pressing the effect button 136 three times, the display in a mode in which the three patterns YM1 to YM3 shown in FIG. 182 (b2) are arranged. Alternatively, the super reach effect shown in FIG. 182 (d2) starts without the button operation addition effect shown in FIG. 182 (c2-1) to FIG. In this case, for example, it is not necessary to add the character display of “Gekiatsu”.

  In this way, in the chance eye effects shown in FIGS. 182 (a2) to (d2), by operating the effect button 136 a plurality of times, the Tono-like symbols YM1 to YM3 as shown in FIG. 182 (b2) are obtained. In some cases, the display in the form of three is visible. In other words, when the operation valid period has elapsed without operating the effect button 136, it is impossible to visually recognize the display in the form in which the three patterns YM1 to YM3 are arranged. The same can be said for the button operation addition effects shown in FIGS. 182 (c2-1) to (c2-2).

  Further, for example, in the chance eye effect, when the operation valid period has passed without pressing the effect button 136 three times, the three patterns YM1 to YM3 shown in FIG. 182 (b2) are arranged. May be displayed. In this case, for example, in an effect in which the long press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled, an advanced user can quickly view the effect more quickly than the beginner by operating the effect button 136 a plurality of times. So there may be a sense of achievement.

  Further, in this production example, after the number of operations of the production button 136 is notified in advance so as to be recognizable, the production button 136 is further produced and the production button 136 is operated, so the number of times that the production button 136 should be operated is clear from the beginning. In some cases, the player may have a higher expectation for the player.

  FIG. 183 is a diagram illustrating another display example of the menu screen. FIG. 183 shows how various settings are made on a menu screen that can be executed in a standby state in which symbol variation display is not performed, for example.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 183 (a), “decoration 3”-“decoration 4”-“decoration 1”, which is a combination of outlier decorative symbols, is stopped and displayed. Although not shown in the figure, the first special figure display device 212 is stopped and displayed with a display result of detachment, and the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol t1 are also displayed on the first special figure display device 212. In response to, the display is stopped with a display result of deviation. Moreover, since the number of hold of the variable display of special figure 1 is 0, the first special figure 1 hold display h11 to the fourth special figure hold display h14 are displayed in a state where none is held. Furthermore, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 183 (a), a special figure 1 hold number display unit 281A that represents the number of hold of the variable display of the special figure 1 in numbers is displayed at the upper right corner of the display screen. In the special figure 1 hold number display section 281A, “0” indicating that the hold number is 0 is displayed. That is, in the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 183 (a), an effect display in the standby state is performed.

  Further, at the top of the display screen, an icon representing the effect button 136 is displayed together with a character “display menu screen”, and it is notified that the screen can be shifted to the menu screen by operating the effect button 136. ing.

  Then, when the pressing operation is performed once by the effect button 136, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a menu screen as shown in FIG. 183 (b). Specifically, on the menu screen, “volume light intensity adjustment” for adjusting volume and light intensity, “member registration” for registering a player's game history by entering a password, and player's game history are acquired. Three menus of “game history” to be selected are displayed so as to be selectable. Below these menus, the characters “Selected” are displayed together with the icons of the left button 137c and the right button 137d, and the characters “Determined” are displayed together with the icons of the effect buttons 136 on the right side thereof. It is reported that the menu indicated by the cursor CL can be executed by moving the cursor CL by operating the left button 137c and the right button 137d and operating the effect button 136. In this production example, the “game history” menu is a display that can be selected by operating the right button 137d twice. When the long press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled, the first game During execution of the selection display, when the second number of operations are performed by the operation means in the first operation mode, compared to when the first operation mode is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode. It can be said that it is an example of a first image that is easily selected. Further, in this effect example, the menu screen can be said to be an example of a first selection display capable of selecting one of a plurality of types of images in accordance with the operation of the operation means.

  In this menu screen, the long-press auto-strike function may be enabled. When the left button 137c or the right button 137d is continuously pressed, the cursor CL is moved in accordance with the pseudo-strike operation. You may make it move. At this time, the interval between the pseudo consecutive hit operations may be set to an interval (for example, 0.5 seconds) at which the player can easily recognize that the menu to be selected has been changed. Alternatively, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be disabled, and the menu to be selected may be sequentially changed only for each pressing operation of the left button 137c and the right button 137d. Further, in the case where the long press automatic continuous hitting function is in an effective state, if the left button 137c or the right button 137d is kept pressed before the transition to the menu screen, the pseudo continuous hitting operation is not performed. In addition, it may be configured such that a pseudo continuous hitting operation is performed by pressing the left button 137c or the right button 137d again after shifting to the menu screen.

  When “volume light intensity adjustment” is selected as described above, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays an adjustment screen as shown in FIG. 183 (c). That is, an “adjustment screen” is displayed at the top of the display screen to the effect that the volume and light amount can be adjusted, and below that, 11 levels of gauges 0-10 indicating the volume, 11 levels of 0 to 10 gauges indicating the brightness of the display screen in the decorative symbol display device 208 and the light amount of the game board lamp 532 and the game table frame lamp 542 are displayed. Below these gauges, the characters “changed” are displayed together with the icons of the left button 137c and the right button 137d, and the characters “determined” are displayed together with the icons of the effect buttons 136 on the right side thereof. By operating the left button 137c and the right button 137d, the setting for the item (volume and light amount) indicated by the cursor CL can be changed. By operating the effect button 136, the volume setting after the change is made. In addition, it is informed that the adjustment screen can be terminated while determining that the effect is executed by the light amount setting. In this adjustment screen, the cursor CL can be moved to the volume or the light amount by operating the upper button 137a and the lower button 137b, and the cursor CL can be moved to the volume or the light amount by operating the upper button 137a and the lower button 137b. After that, every time the left button 137c is pressed, the setting can be changed in the direction of decreasing the volume or the amount of light, and every time the right button 137d is pressed, the setting is changed in the direction of increasing the volume or the amount of light. be able to.

  In this adjustment screen, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function may be enabled. When the left button 137c or the right button 137d is continuously pressed down, the volume and light amount are adjusted in accordance with the pseudo continuous hitting operation. The setting may be changed. Alternatively, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be disabled, and the volume and light quantity settings may be changed only for each pressing operation of the left button 137c and the right button 137d. Further, in the case where the long press automatic continuous hitting function is in an effective state, if the left button 137c or the right button 137d is kept pressed before the shift to the adjustment screen, the pseudo continuous hitting operation is not performed. In addition, after the transition to the adjustment screen, a pseudo continuous hitting operation may be performed by pressing the left button 137c or the right button 137d again. Similarly, the upper button 137a and the lower button 137b may be in a valid state or an invalid state in the long press automatic continuous hitting function.

  In this production example, when the long press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled, the display for setting the volume can select one of a plurality of types of images according to the operation of the operating means. It can be said that it is an example of the first selection display. For example, when the setting is “0” in the volume setting, the display mode of the setting “10” is set to one time by the operating means in the second operation mode during the execution of the first selection display. It can be said that it is an example of the first image that is easier to select when the operation is performed the second number of times by the operation means in the first operation mode than when the operation is performed, and the volume setting The audio output executed when “10” is “10” can be said to be an example of the fourth effect that can be started when the first image is selected in the first selection display. The same applies to the light amount setting.

  When “member registration” is selected on the menu screen, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a password input screen as shown in FIG. 183 (d). In other words, at the top of the display screen, the message “Please enter your password” is displayed to indicate that you can enter your password, and below that is a 4-digit input that displays the entered characters. A character display area is provided. Then, below the input character display area, alphabets A to Z and a cursor UB which is an underline display mode are displayed. The cursor UB indicates only one of the alphabets A to Z, and “S” is indicated on the display screen shown in FIG. 183 (d). In this password input screen, the cursor UB moves when the up button 137a, the down button 137b, the left button 137c, and the right button 137d are pressed, and the cursor UB indicates when the effect button 136 is pressed. The alphabet is displayed in the input character display area with the alphabet as an input target character. If the input password is correct as a result of the alphabet being input to the 4-digit input character display area, the game history corresponding to the input password is input. Note that the password input screen can be terminated by, for example, pressing the cancel button 136f.

  In this password input screen, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be enabled, and if the upper button 137a, the lower button 137b, the left button 137c, or the right button 137d is continuously pressed, It may be possible to move the cursor UB in accordance with a repeated hitting operation. Alternatively, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be disabled, and the cursor UB can be moved only for each pressing operation of the upper button 137a, the lower button 137b, the left button 137c, and the right button 137d. May be. In the case where the long press automatic hitting function is enabled, when the upper button 137a, the lower button 137b, the left button 137c, or the right button 137d continues to be pressed before shifting to the password input screen. The pseudo continuous hit operation is performed by pressing the up button 137a, the down button 137b, the left button 137c, or the right button 137d after shifting to the password input screen without performing the pseudo continuous hit operation. May be.

  In this production example, when the long-press auto-strike function is disabled, the password input screen is a first one that can select one of a plurality of types of images according to the operation of the operation means. It can be said to be an example of selection display. For example, when the alphabet pointed to by the cursor UB is “S”, the display mode in which the cursor UB indicates the alphabet “K” is the second operation mode during execution of the first selection display. In the first operation mode, when the second operation is performed by the operation unit in the first operation mode, the first image is more easily selected than when the operation unit performs one operation by the operation unit. Can do.

  Further, in this effect example, when the long-press auto-strike function is enabled, the password input screen can select one of a plurality of types of images according to the operation of the operation means. It can be said to be an example of the second selection display. For example, when the alphabet pointed to by the cursor UB is “S”, the display mode in which the cursor UB indicates the alphabet “K” is the first operation mode during execution of the second selection display. Can be selected when the operation unit performs the third number of operations, and when the second operation mode is performed and the operation unit performs one operation in the second operation mode. It can be said to be an example of a selectable second image. In other words, the display mode indicating the alphabet “K” is displayed even when the left button 137c is repeatedly hit, and the display mode indicating the alphabet “K” is also displayed when the button is pressed for a long time.

  When “game history” is selected on the menu screen, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a code issue screen as shown in FIG. 183 (e). That is, on the upper part of the display screen, a “code issuance screen” is displayed indicating that a game history can be acquired by reading a two-dimensional code with a mobile terminal or the like equipped with an imaging means, and below that The two-dimensional code CD in which the game history of the player is coded is displayed, and the text “Please read” for prompting the reading of the two-dimensional code CD is displayed. In this effect example, the code issue screen can be said to be an example of an effect that can be started when the first image is selected in the first selection display.

  The menus that can be selected on the menu screen described above are not limited to those described above, and various menus can be set. For example, as shown in FIG. 183 (f), a favorite selection screen for selecting a character to appear during a big hit or in a normal gaming state may be displayed. That is, on the favorite selection screen, a “favorite selection screen” indicating that a character can be selected is displayed at the top of the display screen, and below that “character A” for causing character A to appear. , “Character B” for causing character B to appear and “Character C” for causing character C to appear are selectable. Below these selection items, the characters “Select” are displayed together with the icons of the left button 137c and the right button 137d, and the characters “Determine” are displayed together with the icon of the effect button 136 on the right side thereof. It is reported that the character indicated by the cursor CL can appear by moving the cursor CL by operating the left button 137c and the right button 137d and operating the effect button 136.

  In this favorite selection screen, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function may be enabled. When the left button 137c or the right button 137d is continuously pressed down, the cursor CL is synchronized with the pseudo continuous hitting operation. May be moved. At this time, the interval between the pseudo consecutive hit operations may be set to an interval (for example, 0.5 seconds) at which the player can easily recognize that the selection item to be selected has been changed. Alternatively, the long-pressing automatic continuous hitting function may be disabled, and the selection items to be selected may be sequentially changed only for each pressing operation of the left button 137c and the right button 137d. Further, in the case where the long press automatic continuous hitting function is in an effective state, if the left button 137c or the right button 137d is kept pressed before the transition to the favorite selection screen, a pseudo continuous hitting operation is performed. Instead, it may be configured such that a pseudo continuous hit operation is performed by pressing the left button 137c or the right button 137d again after shifting to the favorite selection screen.

  In this production example, when the long press automatic continuous hitting function is in an invalid state, the favorite selection screen is a first one that can select one of a plurality of types of images according to the operation of the operating means. It can be said to be an example of selection display. Then, the selection item of “Character C” is the operation means in the first operation mode than when the operation unit is operated once in the second operation mode during the execution of the first selection display. Thus, it can be said that the case where the second number of operations is performed is an example of the first image that is more easily selected. Then, the effect by the character C appearing with “Character C” selected can be said to be an example of a fourth effect that can be started when the first image is selected in the first selection display.

  Further, in this effect example, when the long press automatic continuous hitting function is enabled, the favorite selection screen can select one of a plurality of types of images according to the operation of the operating means. It can be said to be an example of the second selection display. Then, the selection item of “Character C” can be selected when the third operation is performed by the operation means in the first operation mode during execution of the second selection display. It can be said that it is an example of a second image that can be selected when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode during execution of the selection display. The effect by the character C appearing with “Character C” selected can be said to be an example of a fifth effect that can be started when the second image is selected in the second selection display.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 183 (g), a song selection screen for selecting a song to be output during a big hit or in a normal gaming state may be displayed. That is, on the song selection screen, “Song A” for outputting song A, “Song B” for outputting song B, and “Song C” for outputting song C can be selected from three selection items. Is displayed. Below these selection items, the characters “Select” are displayed together with the icons of the left button 137c and the right button 137d, and the characters “Determine” are displayed together with the icon of the effect button 136 on the right side thereof. It is reported that the music indicated by the cursor CL can be output by moving the cursor CL by operating the left button 137c and the right button 137d and operating the effect button 136.

  In this music selection screen, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be enabled, and when the left button 137c or the right button 137d is continuously pressed, the cursor CL is synchronized with the pseudo continuous hit operation. You may make it move. At this time, the interval between the pseudo consecutive hit operations may be set to an interval (for example, 0.5 seconds) at which the player can easily recognize that the selection item to be selected has been changed. Alternatively, the long-pressing automatic continuous hitting function may be disabled, and the selection items to be selected may be sequentially changed only for each pressing operation of the left button 137c and the right button 137d. Further, in the case where the long press automatic continuous hitting function is in an effective state, if the left button 137c or the right button 137d is kept pressed before the transition to the song selection screen, a pseudo continuous hitting operation is performed. Instead, it may be configured such that a pseudo continuous hit operation is performed by pressing the left button 137c or the right button 137d again after shifting to the music selection screen.

  Note that the song selection screen shown in FIG. 183 (g) may be executed, for example, in a big hit start effect.

  In this production example, when the long press automatic continuous hitting function is in an invalid state, the music selection screen is a first one that can select one of a plurality of types of images according to the operation of the operating means. It can be said to be an example of selection display. Then, the selection item of “Song C” is the operation means in the first operation mode than in the case where one operation is performed by the operation unit in the second operation mode during execution of the first selection display. Thus, it can be said that the case where the second number of operations is performed is an example of the first image that is easier to select. Then, the song C output when the “song C” is selected can be said to be an example of the fourth effect that can be started when the first image is selected in the first selection display.

  Further, in this effect example, when the long press automatic continuous hitting function is in a valid state, the song selection screen can select one of a plurality of types of images according to the operation of the operating means. It can be said to be an example of the second selection display. The selection item of “Song C” can be selected when the operation is performed a third number of times by the operation means in the first operation mode during execution of the second selection display. It can be said that it is an example of a second image that can be selected when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode during execution of the selection display. Then, the song C that is output when the “song C” is selected can be said to be an example of the fifth effect that can be started when the second image is selected in the second selection display.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 183 (h), a customization screen for individually setting various settings in the game may be displayed. That is, at the top of the display screen, a “customization screen” is displayed indicating that various settings in the game can be individually set, and below that, function 1, function 2, and function 3 are displayed. ... And setting contents for each setting item are displayed. Below these displays, the characters “Selected” are displayed together with the icons of the upper button 137a and the lower button 137b, and “changed” together with the icons of the left button 137c and the right button 137d are displayed on the right side thereof. Is displayed, the function for changing the setting can be selected by pressing the upper button 137a and the lower button 137b, and the setting for the function selected by the left button 137c and the right button 137d can be changed. Informed. The selected function is surrounded by a thick frame.

  On this customization screen, the long-press auto-strike function may be enabled, and when the upper button 137a or the lower button 137b is continuously pressed, a thick frame is added to match the pseudo-strike operation. You may make it move. At this time, the interval between the pseudo consecutive hit operations may be set to an interval (for example, 0.5 seconds) at which the player can easily recognize that the function to be selected has been changed. Alternatively, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function may be disabled, and the function to be selected may be sequentially changed only for each pressing operation of the upper button 137a and the lower button 137b. Further, in the case where the long press automatic continuous hitting is enabled, when the upper button 137a or the lower button 137b is kept pressed before the transition to the customization screen, the pseudo repeated hitting operation is not performed. It may be configured such that a pseudo continuous hitting operation is performed by pressing the upper button 137a or the lower button 137b again after shifting to the customization screen.

  In addition, when the left button 137c or the right button 137d is continuously pressed in a state where the long press automatic continuous hitting function is enabled, the setting can be changed according to the pseudo continuous hitting operation. May be. Alternatively, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be disabled, and the function may be changed only for each pressing operation of the left button 137c and the right button 137d. Further, in the case where the long-press auto-strike is enabled, when the left button 137c or the right button 137d is continuously pressed from before the transition to the customization screen, the pseudo-strike operation is not performed. It may be configured such that a pseudo continuous hitting operation is performed by pressing the left button 137c or the right button 137d again after shifting to the customization screen.

  When various setting screens shown in FIGS. 183 (b) to (h) are displayed, the upper button 137a, the lower button 137b, the left button 137c, the right button 137d, or the effect button 136 is pressed and held. In the state where the decorative symbol variation display is started and the effect related to the operation of the above-described effect button 136 or the like is started, the long-press auto-strike function is enabled and the operation is performed. You may make it perform the pseudo | simulation continuous hit operation of a button, and you may make it perform the pseudo | simulation continuous strike operation by a long press auto-continuous strike function on the condition that the button is pushed again after the said production | presentation is started. Then, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be disabled.

  Also, the various setting screens shown in FIGS. 183 (b) to (h) are configured to be displayed in the full display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. For example, FIG. 183 (b) to FIG. The various setting screens shown in FIG. (H) may be made smaller than the entire display screen so as to be superimposed on the effect display in the standby state shown in FIG. 183 (a).

  Further, in the effect display in the standby state shown in FIG. 183 (a), when a single pressing operation with the effect button 136 is performed, the menu screen display shown in FIG. 183 (b) is not passed, For example, various setting screens as shown in FIGS. 183 (c) to (h) may be directly displayed.

  In the present embodiment, it may be possible to set in advance whether or not to enable the long press automatic continuous hitting function. For example, on the menu screen shown in FIG. 183 (b), an ON / OFF setting menu for the long press automatic continuous hitting function is provided. On this setting menu, the effect button When long-pressing 136, the long-pressing automatic continuous hitting function is enabled. When the long-pressing automatic continuous hitting function is turned off, the long-pressing automatic continuous hitting function is not enabled even when the production button 136 is pressed long. You may do it. Further, ON / OFF of the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be set by a predetermined operation by the operation key unit 137.

  Further, in the production examples described so far, when executing the continuous hit operation production, if the production button 136 is repeatedly hit, a video in which the production button image is also hit in accordance with this may be displayed. Further, when the long press operation effect is executed, if the effect button 136 is pressed and held, a moving image as if the effect button image is also pressed for a long time may be displayed. In addition, when the long-press auto-strike function is enabled and a long-pressing operation is performed with the effect button 136, a pseudo-strike operation is performed. You may make it display the moving image which is doing, and may display the moving image as if long-pressed. The moving image display according to such an operation is not limited to the effect button 136, and may be applied to, for example, the icons of the left button 137c and the right button 137d shown in FIG. 183, and the upper button 137a and the lower button 137b. It may be applied to the icon.

  FIG. 184 is a diagram illustrating a state in which the initial setting of the effect movable object is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 184 (a), the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 184 is provided with the effect movable object GM1 on the game board 200, and in the same figure, the position indicated by the chain line (of the decorative symbol display device 208). It is configured to be able to move from a position above the position that does not overlap the decorative symbol display device 208) to a position indicated by a solid line (a position that overlaps the decorative symbol display device 208). As shown in FIG. 184 (c), the effect movable member GM2 is provided at the lower left of the front frame door 106, and the effect movable member GM3 is provided at the upper right of the front frame door 106. The effect movable member GM2 is rotatably attached to the front side with the rotation axis side of the front frame door 106 as a support axis, and the effect movable member GM3 is supported along the upper end side of the front frame door 106. A shaft is provided, and is attached to the support shaft so as to be pivotable upward. These effect movable members GM1, GM2, GM3 are driven by, for example, a stepping motor.

  These effect movable members GM1, GM2, and GM3 need to perform an initial operation and recognize an initial position in order to operate normally. However, the effect movable members GM2 and GM3 provided on the front frame door 106 may collide with the game store clerk when operated at an unintended timing of the game store clerk performing the store opening work, for example. These production movable members GM2 and GM3 need to be initially operated at the timing intended by the game clerk.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, when the power is turned on, first, as shown in FIG. 184 (a), the initial operation of the effect movable member GM1 provided in the game board 200 that is unlikely to hit the game shop clerk. Is done. Thereafter, for example, as shown in FIG. 184 (b), when a long press operation with the effect button 136 is performed within 1 minute after the power is turned on, as shown in FIG. 184 (c), The initial operations of the effect movable members GM2, GM3 are performed. Thereby, during the opening of the game shop clerk, the possibility that the game shop clerk may collide with the effect movable member performing the initial operation may be reduced.

  Here, in order to perform the initial operation of the effect movable members GM2 and GM3, a long press operation of the effect button 136 is performed, and the decorative symbol variation display starts in a state where the effect button 136 is continuously pressed. Then, when the production related to the operation of the production button 136 described above is started, the pseudo-continuous operation of the production button 136 may be performed with the long-press automatic continuous stroke function enabled. On the condition that the effect button 136 is pressed again after the effect is started, a pseudo continuous operation by the long press automatic continuous hit function may be performed, or the long press automatic continuous hit function is disabled. Good.

  The initial operation of the effect movable members GM2 and GM3 is started by a long press operation with the effect button 136, but the initial operation of the effect movable members GM2 and GM3 by a single press operation (single operation) with the effect button 136. May be started, or the initial operations of the effect movable members GM2 and GM3 may be started by a continuous hitting operation with the effect button 136.

  FIG. 185 is a front view of a sealed pachinko machine to which the present invention is applicable.

  In a sealed pachinko machine 1000 shown in FIG. 185, a predetermined number of game media (for example, game balls) are circulated inside the game table. That is, the game medium launched from the launching unit 1001 to the game area 1002 is discharged from the game area 1002 and can be supplied to the launching unit 1001 again. In addition, a display means 1003 for displaying information on the number of game media (award balls, rental balls, total number of balls, etc.) and other information is disposed below the game area 1002 on the front of the game table. The upper plate 126 and the lower plate 128 shown in 138 are not provided.

  It should be noted that a mode in which the display unit 1003 described above is further provided on the upper plate 126 of the pachinko machine 100 described above with reference to FIG. 138 may be adopted, and a touch panel is provided on the display unit 1003. May be. That is, the touch panel provided on the display unit 1003 can function as an operation unit. Then, an effect related to the operation of the effect button 136 may be executed by one touch operation, continuous hitting operation, or long press operation on the touch panel, and when the long press automatic continuous hitting function is enabled, the touch panel In such a state that the touch panel continues to be touched, a pseudo continuous hit operation on the touch panel may be performed. Further, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may not be enabled. Further, in some effects, the long press auto-strike function may be enabled. In other words, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function may be activated on the touch panel, may not be activated, may be configured to have a large number of effects to be activated, or may be configured to be small. . In addition, there are a plurality of effects due to the continuous operation on the touch panel, and when the operation is performed on the touch panel, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may not be in an effective state in many cases. .

  As described above, the pachinko machine 1000 shown in FIG. 185 encloses a sphere and circulates the enclosed sphere in the pachinko machine and uses the enclosed sphere as a launch sphere. May be executed by credit.

  It should be noted that the long-pressing automatic repeated hitting function may be validated for only a part of the selection effects described so far, or the long-pressing automatic repeated hitting function may be validated for all of them. Further, only a part of the selection effects described so far may not be enabled for the long press automatic repeated hit function, or may not be enabled for all of the long press automatic repeated hit functions.

  In addition, when the front button 106 is operated a predetermined number of times while the front frame door 106 is opened, a specific menu for setting by the game clerk may be executable. In this case, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be disabled or may be enabled.

  In addition, the long-pressing automatic continuous hitting function described above may be in an effective state over a plurality of symbol variations, or in an invalid state when a symbol is stopped and displayed, and straddles a plurality of symbol variations. May not function.

  In addition, in the case where a plurality of effect buttons are provided, when one effect button is repeatedly pressed with a pseudo effect button by the long press automatic repeat function, an operation for the other effect button is not accepted. Alternatively, reception of an operation for one effect button may be temporarily stopped, and an operation for the other effect button may be resumed after receiving an operation for the other effect button.

  Further, for example, in addition to the effect button 136, an effect lever, a touch sensor, and the like may be provided, and the long press auto-strike function and the auto button function may be enabled for the effect lever and the touch sensor.

  In addition, for example, it may be possible to give regularity to an effect in which the long press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled. For example, after the start of the super reach production, an effect in which the long press automatic continuous hitting function is enabled is not performed. It may be. Further, after the start of the super reach production, the continuous hit production may be performed.

  In addition, among the executable repetitive striking effects, there may be more or fewer effects in which the long press auto repetitive strike function is disabled than effects in which the long press automatic repetitive strike function is enabled. May be.

  In addition, the expectation for the big hit may be higher or lower in the effect in which the long-press auto continuous hit function is disabled than in the effect in which the long press automatic continuous hit function is enabled.

  In addition to the second effect, the Nth effect may be an effect in which the long press automatic repetitive strike function is disabled.

  In addition to the first effect, the M-th effect may be an effect in which the long press automatic continuous hitting function is enabled.

  In addition, the second effect may be the effect in which the long press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled.

  In addition, the first effect may be the effect in which the long press automatic continuous hitting function is valid.

  Further, for example, what is displayed as a result of the operation may be made effective by the long press automatic hitting function.

  Further, the long-press auto-strike function may be validated in the effect in which the character display of “continuous hit” is performed.

  In addition, the long-pressing automatic repetitive function may be validated for a repetitive hitting operation effect (or a multi-operation effect) regarding whether or not the big hit is successful.

  In the embodiment described so far, for example, an effect or the like may be performed in accordance with the pseudo continuous operation of the effect button 136 by the long press automatic continuous hitting function. It can be said that the production is different from the first production in the invention. In other words, it can be said that the first effect is an effect that is displayed as a result of the pseudo continuous operation of the effect button 136 by the long press automatic continuous hitting function.

  In addition, in the continuous hit operation effect in which the long press automatic continuous hit function is disabled, for example, an effect effect may be performed in accordance with the continuous hit operation (multiple operations) of the effect button 136 by the player. Can be said to be an effect different from the second effect in the present invention. In other words, it can be said that the second effect is an effect displayed as a result of the repeated operation (multiple operations) of the effect button 136 being performed.

  In addition, the long press auto-tapping function is made effective for a repetitive operation (multiple operation) effect whose execution is determined mainly by a control means (for example, the main control unit 300) for determining whether or not it is correct. Alternatively, the long press automatic continuous hitting function may be disabled.

  Further, the execution is determined mainly by the control means (for example, the first sub-control section 400 and the second sub-control section 500) other than the control means (for example, the main control section 300) for determining whether or not it is correct. The long-pressing automatic continuous hitting function may be enabled or the long-pressing automatic continuous hitting function may be disabled with respect to the repeated hitting operation (multiple operations) effect.

  Further, including the embodiments described so far, the relationship between the effect button 136 and the effect (button effect) related to the effect button 136 is illustrated as follows.

  (1) After a button effect (single operation effect) for executing a single pressing operation (single operation) by the effect button 136 is started, when a single operation is performed, an effect related to the result of the operation is executed. The

  (2) In the case where a single operation effect is executed a plurality of times in succession, if a long press operation with the effect button 136 is performed, only the effect related to the result of the operation related to the first button effect is executed. Alternatively, effects related to the results of operations related to all button effects are executed.

  (3) After a button effect (sequential hit operation effect) for executing a plurality of pressing operations (sequential hit operation) by the effect button 136 is started, if a continuous hit operation is performed, an effect related to the result of the operation is executed. The When a long press operation by the effect button 136 is performed after the continuous hit operation effect is started, an effect related to the result of the operation is executed when the long press automatic continuous hit function is valid.

  (4) When a continuous hitting operation is performed after the long press operation effect is started, for example, an effect corresponding to the accumulated press time of the effect button 136 may be executed. . When a long press operation is performed after the long press operation effect is started, an effect related to the result of the operation is executed. In this case, for example, when the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is effective, the pseudo-continuous hitting operation may be performed, so that the presentation may proceed as it is, or it is assumed that the presentation button 136 has been pressed for a long time. May be accepted.

  (5) If the single operation effect is started in the state where the effect button 136 is continuously pressed (continuous pressed state), the operation by the effect button 136 is accepted as long as the continuous press state is maintained. Absent.

  (6) When the continuous hitting operation effect is started in the continuous pressing state, when the long press automatic continuous hitting function is effective, the pseudo-continuous hitting operation is performed, and the effect regarding the result of the operation is executed. The In this case, the pseudo continuous hit operation is performed from the time when the continuous hit operation effect is started. In addition, when the continuous hit operation effect is started in the continuous pressing state, the pseudo continuous hit operation is performed after a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds) after the pseudo single shot operation is performed. May be. Further, when the continuous hit operation effect is started in the continuous press state, the operation by the effect button 136 is not accepted as long as the continuous press state is maintained.

  (7) When the long press operation effect is started in the continuous pressing state, the operation by the effect button 136 is not accepted as long as the continuous pressing state is maintained.

  (8) In the continuous pressing state, when the single operation effect is started and then the single operation effect is started, the effect related to the result of the operation for these single operation effects is executed. Or only the effect regarding the result of operation about the single operation effect started previously is performed. Or only the effect regarding the result of operation about the single operation effect started later is performed. Or only the effect regarding the result of operation about the single operation effect with a high priority determined beforehand is performed. Alternatively, as long as the continuous pressing state is maintained, any effect is not executed.

  (9) In the continuous pressing state, when a single operation effect is started and then a continuous operation effect is started, an effect related to the operation result for the single operation effect and an effect related to the operation result for the continuous operation effect are executed. Is done. Or only the effect regarding the result of operation about a single operation effect is performed. Or only the effect regarding the result of the operation about a continuous hit operation effect is performed. Alternatively, as long as the continuous pressing state is maintained, any effect is not executed.

  (10) In the continuous pressing state, when the single operation effect is started and then the long press operation effect is started, the effect related to the result of the operation for the single operation effect and the effect related to the result of the operation for the long press operation effect Is executed. Or only the effect regarding the result of operation about a single operation effect is performed. Or only the effect regarding the result of operation about a long press operation effect is performed. Alternatively, as long as the continuous pressing state is maintained, any effect is not executed.

  (11) When a continuous operation effect is started in a continuously pressed state, and then a single operation effect is started, an effect related to the operation result for the single operation effect and an effect related to the operation result for the continuous operation effect are executed. Is done. Or only the effect regarding the result of operation about a single operation effect is performed. Or only the effect regarding the result of the operation about a continuous hit operation effect is performed. Alternatively, as long as the continuous pressing state is maintained, any effect is not executed.

  (12) When the continuous hit operation effect is started in the continuous pressing state, and then the continuous hit operation effect is started, effects related to the results of the operations for these consecutive hit operation effects are executed. Or only the effect regarding the result of the operation about the continuous hit operation effect started previously is performed. Or only the effect regarding the result of the operation about the continuous hit operation effect started later is performed. Or only the effect regarding the result of the operation about the continuous hit operation effect with a predetermined high priority is performed. Alternatively, as long as the continuous pressing state is maintained, any effect is not executed.

  (13) In the continuous pressing state, when the continuous hit operation effect is started and then the long press operation effect is started, the effect related to the operation result for the continuous hit operation effect and the effect related to the operation result for the long press operation effect Is executed. Or only the effect regarding the result of the operation about a continuous hit operation effect is performed. Or only the effect regarding the result of operation about a long press operation effect is performed. Alternatively, as long as the continuous pressing state is maintained, any effect is not executed.

  (14) In the continuous pressing state, when the long press operation effect is started and then the single operation effect is started, the effect related to the result of the operation for the long press operation effect and the effect related to the result of the operation for the single operation effect Is executed. Or only the effect regarding the result of operation about a long press operation effect is performed. Or only the effect regarding the result of operation about a single operation effect is performed. Alternatively, as long as the continuous pressing state is maintained, any effect is not executed.

  (15) In the continuous pressing state, when the long press operation effect is started and then the continuous hit operation effect is started, the effect related to the operation result about the long press operation effect and the effect related to the operation result about the continuous hit operation effect Is executed. Or only the effect regarding the result of operation about a long press operation effect is performed. Or only the effect regarding the result of the operation about a continuous hit operation effect is performed. Alternatively, as long as the continuous pressing state is maintained, any effect is not executed.

  (16) When the long press operation effect is started in the continuous pressing state, and then the long press operation effect is started, the effect related to the result of the operation for the long press operation effect is executed. Or only the effect regarding the result of operation about the long press operation effect started previously is performed. Or only the effect regarding the result of operation about the long press operation effect started later is performed. Or only the effect regarding the result of operation about the long press operation effect with a predetermined high priority is performed. Alternatively, as long as the continuous pressing state is maintained, any effect is not executed.

  (17) After the long press operation effect is started, when the long press operation is performed and the single operation effect is started in that state, only the effect related to the result of the operation for the long press operation effect is executed, As long as the long press operation is not canceled once, the effect related to the result of the operation for the single operation effect is not executed. Or both the effect regarding the result of operation about long press operation effect and the effect regarding the result of operation about single operation effect are performed. In addition, after the long press operation effect is started, when the continuous hit operation is performed and the single operation effect is started in that state, the long press operation effect is determined according to, for example, the accumulated press time of the effect button 136. The production may proceed as it is, such as when the production is performed, and the production relating to the result of the operation for the single operation production is executed.

  (18) After the long press operation effect is started, when the long press operation is performed and the continuous hit operation effect is started in that state, only the effect related to the result of the operation for the long press operation effect is executed, As long as the long press operation is not canceled once, the effect related to the result of the operation for the continuous hit operation effect is not executed. Or both the effect regarding the result of the operation about the long press operation effect and the effect regarding the result of the operation regarding the continuous hit operation effect are executed. Further, after the long press operation effect is started, when the continuous hit operation effect is performed and the continuous hit operation effect is started in that state, the long press operation effect is, for example, in accordance with the accumulated press time of the effect button 136. The production may proceed as it is, such as when the production is performed, and the production related to the result of the operation for the continuous hitting operation production is executed.

  (19) When the long press operation effect is started after the long press operation effect is started and the long press operation effect is started in this state, the result of the operation on the long press operation effect started first is related to As long as the effect is executed and the long press operation is not canceled once, the effect related to the result of the operation for the long press operation effect started later is not executed. Alternatively, an effect relating to the result of the operation for any long-press operation effect is executed. In addition, when the long press operation effect is started after the long press operation effect is started, and the long press operation effect is started in that state, for example, the effect button 136 For example, an effect corresponding to the accumulated press time of the effect button 136 is also executed for a long press operation effect that is started later. There are cases where the production proceeds as it is.

  (20) After a continuous hit operation effect is started, when a long press operation is performed and a single operation effect is started in that state, the long press automatic repeat function is enabled, and the operation for the continuous hit operation effect is performed. Only the effect related to the result is executed, and unless the long press operation is once released, the effect related to the operation result related to the single operation effect is not executed. Or both the effect regarding the result of operation about a continuous operation effect and the effect regarding the result of operation about a single operation effect are performed. In addition, after the continuous hit operation effect is started, when the continuous hit operation is performed, and the single operation effect is started in that state, the result regarding the operation result for the continuous operation effect and the result of the operation for the single operation effect Both productions are performed.

  (21) After the continuous hitting operation effect is started, when the long press operation is performed and the continuous hitting operation effect is started in that state, the long press automatic continuous hitting function is enabled and the continuous hitting started first. Only the effect related to the operation result for the operation effect is executed, and unless the long press operation is once released, the effect related to the result of the operation for the operation effect started later is not executed. Alternatively, an effect related to the result of the operation for any continuous operation effect is executed. In addition, after the continuous hit operation effect is started, when the continuous hit operation effect is started and the continuous hit operation effect is started in that state, the effect related to the result of the operation for any of the continuous hit operation effects is also executed.

  (22) When the long press operation effect is started after the continuous hit operation effect is started and the long press operation effect is started in that state, the long press automatic continuous hit function is enabled, Only the effect related to the result of the operation is executed, and the effect related to the result of the operation related to the long press operation effect is not executed unless the long press operation is once canceled. Or both the effect regarding the result of operation about a continuous hit operation effect and the effect regarding the result of operation about a long press operation effect are performed. In addition, after the continuous hit operation effect is started, when the long hit operation effect is started and the long press operation effect is started in that state, an effect related to the operation result of the continuous hit operation effect is executed, and the long press operation effect is performed. For example, for example, an effect corresponding to the cumulative time of pressing the effect button 136 may be executed.

In the above description,
"Image display means [for example, decorative design display device 208],
Symbol display means capable of executing symbol variation display [for example, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]
A notice means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, speaker 120, shielding device 246, effect movable body 224, various lamps 418, game board lamp 532, game stand frame lamp 542, etc.] capable of executing a plurality of types of notices ,
A game machine equipped with
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a hold display [for example, a hold icon or the like]
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice icons,
The hold display is a display displayed in a hold display area in the image display means [for example, the hold icon display area 281 in FIG. 1, the hold icon display area in FIG. 2, the variable icon display area 280, etc.]
The on-hold display is a display corresponding to the number of operations of the symbol fluctuation display on-hold (hereinafter referred to as “the number of on-hold”) [for example, in the on-hold icon display area 281 of FIG. , The number of hold icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display of Special Figure 1 is held, etc.]
The symbol variation display is a display that can be started when the hold is digested,
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a notice icon display area [for example, notice icon display area 285] in the image display means,
The notice icon is different from the hold display,
The notice icon display area is an area different from the hold display area,
The notice icon display area is an area in which one or a plurality of notice icons can be displayed. [For example, the notice icon display area 285 includes a notice icon first display area YA1 to a notice icon sixth display area YA6. , Each area has its own notification icon]
The notice means is means capable of executing the notice corresponding to the kind of the notice icon digested when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested [for example, When the hat notice icon I6 is digested, a pseudo-continuous effect may be executed, and when the thousand carton notice icon I9 is digested, a reach transition effect may be executed. ,
During the period in which the symbol variation display is performed once, the first number of the plurality of types of notice icons [for example, the hat notice icon I6, etc.] is the first number [for example, two, etc. The second number larger than the first number [for example, 3 etc.] is digested more easily than the first number.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  According to the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the image display means, but according to this game stand, it is possible to provide a game stand having a feature in the image display means.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, the variation of production may be able to be increased.

  In addition, according to this game table, since the notice icon is displayed, it becomes easy to recognize that there is a change that may cause the notice icon to be digested, so the player pays attention to the display on hold. In some cases, it is possible to prevent a notice display corresponding to the notice icon from being missed.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, the player may be able to improve the interest of the game by paying attention to the increase and digestion of the notice icons.

  Here, the symbol display means may be capable of executing only symbol variation display, or may be capable of executing other than symbol variation display. Further, the symbol display means may always execute symbol variation display or may not perform symbol variation display.

  The notice means may be capable of executing only a plurality of kinds of notices, or may be executable in addition to a plurality of kinds of notices. The notice means may always execute a plurality of kinds of notices or may not execute a plurality of kinds of notices.

  Further, the image display means may be capable of displaying only the hold display or may be capable of displaying other than the hold display. Further, the image display means may always display the hold display, or may not display the hold display.

  Further, the image display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of notice icons, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of notice icons. The image display means may always display a plurality of types of notice icons or may not display a plurality of types of notice icons.

  Further, the hold display may be displayed only in the hold display area in the image display means, or may be displayed in a place other than the hold display area in the image display means.

  Further, the hold display may be a hold icon or may not be a hold icon, and may be represented by letters, numbers, or symbols, for example.

  Further, the hold display may display only the hold number or may display other than the hold number.

  Further, the symbol variation display may be started only when the hold is digested, or may be started other than when the hold is digested. In addition, the symbol variation display may be always started when the hold is digested, or may not be started when the hold is digested.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only in the notice icon display area in the image display means, or may be displayed in a place other than the notice icon display area in the image display means. The notice icon may be displayed in the notice icon display area in the image display means or may not be displayed in the notice icon display area in the image display means.

  Further, the notice icon display area may be capable of displaying only one or a plurality of notice icons, or may be capable of displaying other than the one or more notice icons. The notice icon display area may always display one or a plurality of notice icons, or may not display one or a plurality of notice icons.

  The notice means may be capable of executing only the kind of notice corresponding to the kind of the notice icon that has been digested when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. When one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, a notice other than the kind of notice corresponding to the kind of digested notice icon may be executable. Further, the notice means may execute a kind of notice corresponding to the kind of the notice icon digested when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, When one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, the kind of notice corresponding to the kind of digested notice icon may not be executed.

In addition, “the notice icon is configured to display a number corresponding to the number of times the notice is likely to be executed [for example, the number of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285. For example, a notice corresponding to the displayed notice icon may be executed]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, it is possible to expect the number of notices displayed from the change in which the notice icon is displayed to the change to be digested, so that the game can be played so that the player does not miss the notice display. There is a case that can be made.

  Here, only the number corresponding to the number of times that the notice may be executed may be displayed as the notice icon, or other than the number corresponding to the number of times that the notice may be executed. Things may also be displayed. In addition, the notice icon may always display the number corresponding to the number of times that the notice is likely to be executed, or if the number corresponding to the number of times that the notice is likely to be executed is not displayed. There may be.

In addition, “the notice means may provide a fake notice [for example, pseudo-continuous effect or reach transition effect, etc.] that is the same as the aspect of the notice [for example, pseudo-continuous effect or reach transition effect or the like that is a big hit]]. A viable means,
The notice means, when one of the notice icons [for example, a hat notice icon I6, a thousand box notice icon I9, etc.] displayed in the notice icon display area has been digested, Is a means capable of executing the fake notice of the type corresponding to [for example, a pseudo-announcement that leads to a loss or a reach transition effect, etc.]
After the false notice is executed, the symbol variation display result is configured to be off.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, there is a case where the player can be kept nervous until the notice icon is digested and the notice is executed.

  Here, the notice means may be capable of executing only a fake notice having the same form as the notice form, or may be capable of executing anything other than the fake notice having the same form as the notice form. May be. Further, the notice means may always execute a fake notice in the same form as the notice form, or may not execute a fake notice in the same form as the notice form.

  The notice means may execute only a fake notice of a type corresponding to the kind of the notice icon digested when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. In addition, when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, it may be possible to execute anything other than the fake notice of the type corresponding to the kind of digested notice icon. . The notice means may always execute a fake notice of a type corresponding to the kind of the notice icon that has been digested when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. However, when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, a fake notice corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon may not be executed.

  In addition, after the fake notice is executed, the design variation display result may be out of sync, or after the fake notice is executed, the design change display result may be a big hit. There may be.

  In addition, after a false notice is executed, there may be a case where a notice that is highly likely to display a jackpot symbol on the symbol display means may be executed.

Further, “in the period in which the one-time symbol variation display is being executed, the number of the notice icons to be displayed in the notice icon display area is more than the third number [for example, one]. The fourth number [for example, 3] that is larger than the number of 3 is configured to be a big hit.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game machine, it may be possible to pay attention to the number of notice icons displayed in the symbol variation display.

In addition, “holding display means [for example, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the production hold lamp 286, etc.] capable of executing display according to the number of holds,
The hold display means is a display means different from the image display means.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, there is a case where the hold display and the notice icon display can be clearly distinguished.

  Here, the hold display means may be capable of executing only display according to the number of holds, or may be capable of executing other than display according to the number of holds. Moreover, the hold display means may always execute display according to the number of holds, or may not execute display according to the number of holds.

In addition, “the hold display unit is a display unit including a light emitting unit [for example, a lamp, an LED, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to this game table, there is a case where the hold display can be clearly recognized.

  Here, the hold display means may be constituted only by the light emitting means, or may be constituted including other than the light emitting means (for example, image display means).

  The light emitting means may be configured to include a plurality of LEDs. Further, the light emitting means may be composed of LEDs of a plurality of colors, for example, a plurality of LEDs may be included in one package like a full color LED and required. Moreover, what was comprised by monochrome LED may be sufficient.

  In addition to the hold display means, the firing operation notifying means for notifying the operation of the fourth symbol display means, the normal symbol display means, and the firing operation means may be realized by the light emitting means.

“Prefetching notice means capable of performing prefetching notice [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, speaker 120, shielding device 246, effect movable body 224, various lamps 418, game board lamp 532, game stand frame lamp 540, etc. ],
The prefetch notice means is a means capable of executing the prefetch notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, a notice icon may be displayed, so that a sense of expectation for a big hit may be increased.

  Here, the prefetching notice means may be capable of executing only the prefetching notice, or may be capable of executing things other than the prefetching notice. Further, the prefetching notice unit may always execute the prefetching notice, or may not execute the prefetching notice.

  The prefetching notice means may be capable of executing a prefetching notice only by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area, or by means other than displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area. The pre-reading notice may be executable. Further, the prefetch notice means may always execute the prefetch notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area, or does not execute the prefetch notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area. There may be cases.

Further, “the symbol variation display to be prefetched (hereinafter referred to as“ second symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display based on the third hold that is the prefetch target shown in FIG. 19 (2)] ”) ).), The notice icon may be digested by a fifth number [e.g., three, etc.]
The symbol variation display executed before the second symbol variation display is executed (hereinafter referred to as “first symbol variation display [for example, three pre-reading objects shown in FIG. 19 (2)”). In the period during which the symbol change display based on the hold held before the eye hold] is executed, the notice icon may be digested by a sixth number [for example, 1]. Yes,
The sixth number is different from the fifth number;
The hold display is a display for notifying that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed [for example, in FIG. The hold icon h12 corresponding to the second hold that is the prefetch target is displayed in the period in which the symbol variation display based on the hold that is held before the second hold that is the prefetch target to be displayed is executed. And the like, which are displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1]. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, the number of notice icons used differs depending on whether the symbol variation display to be prefetched is being displayed or the symbol variation display to be executed before the symbol variation display to be prefetched. Therefore, there is a case where the symbol variation display that the player should pay attention to can be easily understood.

  Here, in the period in which the second symbol variation display is being executed, the notice icon may be configured to be digested only by the fifth number, or the period in which the second symbol variation display is being performed. The notice icon may be digested differently from the fifth number. Further, in the period in which the second symbol variation display is being executed, the notice icon may be necessarily digested with the fifth number, or in the period in which the second symbol variation display is being performed. The notice icon may not be digested with the fifth number.

  Further, the notice icon may be configured to be digested only by the sixth number during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed, or during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being performed. The notice icon may be digested differently from the sixth number. Further, in the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed, the notice icon may be necessarily digested with the sixth number, or in the period in which the first symbol variation display is being performed. The notice icon may not be digested with the sixth number.

  Further, the hold display may be capable of notifying only that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed. During the period in which the symbol variation display is being executed, it may be possible to notify other than that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended. In addition, the hold display may always notify that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being performed. There may be a case where it is not notified that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period in which the variation display is performed.

In addition, “the notice icon may start to be displayed during the period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as“ fourth symbol variation display ”) in which the notice icon is digested [for example, As shown in FIG. 28 (C), the digest display of the hat notice icon I6, the hat notice icon I6, the thousand box notice icon I9, and the fan notice icon I10 are increased and displayed in one symbol variation display. Etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, the notice icon may increase even in the symbol variation display in which the notice icon is digested, so that the player may be expected until all the notice icons are digested.

  Here, the notice icon may be always displayed during the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being executed, or the notice icon may be displayed in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being executed. The display may not start. In addition, the notice icon may start to be displayed only during the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being performed, or the notice icon may be displayed in a period other than the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being performed. May be displayed.

  It should be noted that the notice icon may be configured not to increase in the symbol variation display that the notice icon digests.

In addition, during the period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “third symbol variation display”) executed before the fourth symbol variation display is performed, the fourth symbol variation display is performed. The notice icon to be digested may be displayed during the period in which the symbol variation display is executed [For example, the hat notice icon I6 digested at the timing shown in FIG. 28C is the symbol variation display. Etc., during the execution of the symbol variation display executed before the time]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, only in the period in which the third symbol variation display is being executed, the notice icon digested in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being executed may be configured to start displaying, Even in a period other than the period in which the third symbol variation display is being executed, the notice icon that is consumed in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being executed may be displayed. In addition, in the period in which the third symbol variation display is being performed, the notice icon that is consumed in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being performed may be displayed without fail. In the period in which the third symbol variation display is executed, the notice icon that is consumed in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being executed may not be displayed.

  Note that the notice icon digested in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being executed may not start to be displayed in the period in which the third symbol variation display is being performed.

In addition, “the hold display area is an area that can display the hold display up to a seventh number [for example, four or eight, etc.]
The notice icon display area is an area where the notice icon can be displayed up to an eighth number [for example, six, etc.]
The seventh number is different from the eighth number;
It is characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, the displayable number of the hold display and the displayable number of the notice icon are different, and therefore the display of the notice icon may be clearly distinguished.

  Here, the hold display area may display the hold display up to the seventh number, or may not display the hold display up to the seventh number.

  In addition, the notice icon display area may display the notice icon up to the eighth number, or may not display the notice icon up to the eighth number.

  It should be noted that the maximum number of displayable hold displays and the maximum number of displayable notice icons may be the same.

  Further, the maximum displayable number of notice icons may be greater than, or at least the same as, the maximum displayable number of hold display in FIG.

  Further, the maximum displayable number of notice icons may be greater than, or at least the same as, the maximum displayable number of hold display in FIG.

  Also, the maximum number of displayable notice icons may be greater than, or at least the same as, the total displayable maximum number of hold display of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2.

In addition, "production means capable of executing a plurality of types of effects [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, speaker 210, shielding device 246, effect movable body 224, various lamps 418, game board lamp 532, game table frame lamp 542" Etc.]
One of the plurality of types of notices is a first notice [for example, the reach transition effect shown in FIG. 22 (49) to FIG. 50 (50), FIG. 34 (49), etc.]
One of the plural types of notices is a second notice [for example, stage change effects shown in FIG. 29 (Ac) and FIG. 29 (Bb)],
The first notice is a notice different from the second notice,
One of the multiple types of effects is a first effect [for example, the strong reach shown in FIG. 22 (51) to FIG. 57 (57) or FIG. 34 (50-1) to FIG. Production etc.]
One of the multiple types of effects is a second effect [for example, display of the moon background, etc.]
The first effect is an effect different from the second effect,
The first notice is a notice that informs that the first effect will be executed,
The second notice is a notice that informs that the second effect will be executed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, the contents of the effect to be executed can be known in advance, so that the player may have a sense of expectation.

  Here, the effect means may be capable of executing only a plurality of kinds of effects, or may be capable of executing things other than a plurality of kinds of effects. Further, the production means may always execute a plurality of types of effects, or may not execute a plurality of types of effects.

  Further, the notice means may be capable of executing only the first notice and the second notice, or may be able to execute notices other than the first notice and the second notice. Further, the notice means may always execute the first notice and the second notice, or may not execute the first notice and the second notice.

  Further, the effect means may be capable of executing only the first effect and the second effect, or may be capable of executing effects other than the first effect and the second effect. . Further, the production means may always execute the first production and the second production, or may not execute the first production and the second production.

  Further, the first notice may notify only that the first effect is executed, or may notify that an effect other than the first effect is executed. . In addition, the first notice may necessarily notify that the first effect is executed, or may not notify that the first effect is executed.

  Further, the second notice may notify only that the second effect is executed, or may notify that an effect other than the second effect is executed. . In addition, the second notice may necessarily notify that the second effect is executed, or may not notify that the second effect is executed.

In addition, “the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is configured to be digested [for example, FIG. 19 (1) to FIG. 23 (66), FIG. 31 (1) to FIG. As shown in FIG. 35 (66), the increased notice icons are all digested, etc.]. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, the notice corresponding to the notice icon displayed by the notice icon being displayed is always executed, so that the player's expectation may be improved.

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [eg, pachinko machine 100, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
“First display means capable of executing symbol variation display [for example, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, etc.]
A second display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, or a combination of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the first special figure hold lamp 218 and the second special figure hold lamp 220 or the production hold lamp 286);
A game machine equipped with
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice icons,
The second display means is capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice display [eg, pseudo-continuous effect, freeze effect, stop symbol notice, stage change effect, reach transition effect, premier notice effect, re-variable effect, etc.] And
The second display means displays a display corresponding to the number of operations of the symbol variation display being held (hereinafter referred to as “holding number”) [for example, the holding icon display region 281 of FIG. , A holding icon display area in FIG. 2, a variable icon display area 280, a holding display area in the effect holding lamp 286, etc.] [for example, the holding icon display area 281 in FIG. The number of hold icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display of special figure 1 is held is displayed]
The symbol variation display is a display that starts when the hold is consumed,
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a notice icon display area [for example, notice icon display area 285 or the like] in the second display means,
The notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of holds depending on the number displayed,
The notice icon display area is an area different from the hold display area,
The notice icon display area is an area in which one or a plurality of notice icons can be displayed. [For example, the notice icon display area 285 includes a notice icon first display area YA1 to a notice icon sixth display area YA6. , Each area has its own notification icon]
The second display means is a display capable of displaying the notice display of a kind corresponding to the kind of the notice icon digested when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. [For example, when the hat notice icon I6 is digested, a pseudo-continuous effect may be executed. When the thousand car box notice icon I9 is digested, a reach transition effect is executed. Etc.],
During a period in which the symbol variation display is performed once, a second number [for example, three, etc.] that is larger than the first number is consumed compared to when the notice icon is digested by the first number. It is configured to be a big hit if you are
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  According to the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the image display means, but according to this game stand, it is possible to provide a game stand having a feature in the image display means.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, the variation of production may be able to be increased.

  In addition, according to this game table, since the notice icon is displayed, it becomes easy to recognize that there is a change that may cause the notice icon to be digested, so the player pays attention to the display on hold. In some cases, it is possible to prevent a notice display corresponding to the notice icon from being missed.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, the player may be able to improve the interest of the game by paying attention to the increase and digestion of the notice icons.

  Here, the first display means may be capable of executing only symbol variation display, or may be capable of being executed other than symbol variation display. Further, the first display means may always execute the symbol variation display, or may not execute the symbol variation display.

  The second display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of notice icons, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of kinds of notice icons. The second display means may always display a plurality of types of notice icons, or may not display a plurality of types of notice icons.

  The second display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of notice display, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of notice display. Further, the second display means may necessarily display a plurality of types of notice display, or may not display a plurality of types of notice display.

  In addition, the second display means may be capable of displaying a display corresponding to the number of holds only in the hold display area, or a display corresponding to the number of holds other than the hold display area. There may be. Still, the second display means may always display a display according to the number of holds in the hold display area, or may not display a display according to the number of holds in the hold display area. .

  Further, the symbol variation display may be started only when the hold is digested, or may be started even when the hold is digested. Further, the symbol variation display may be started whenever the hold is digested, or may not be started even when the hold is digested.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only in the notice icon display area in the second display means, or may be displayed outside the notice icon display area in the second display means. Good. The notice icon may be displayed in the notice icon display area in the second display means, or may not be displayed in the notice icon display area in the second display means.

  Further, the notice icon display area may be capable of displaying only one or a plurality of notice icons, or may be capable of displaying other than the one or more notice icons. The notice icon display area may always display one or a plurality of notice icons, or may not display one or a plurality of notice icons.

  In addition, the second display means is capable of displaying only the notice display of the type corresponding to the kind of the digested notice icon when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. Alternatively, when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, a notice display other than the kind of notice icon corresponding to the kind of digested notice icon can be displayed. Also good. In addition, the second display means always displays a notice display of a type corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. Alternatively, when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, a kind of notice display corresponding to the type of digested notice icon may not be displayed.

In addition, “the notice icon is configured to display a number corresponding to the number of times the notice display may be displayed [for example, the number of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285. Only the notice icon corresponding to the displayed notice icon may be displayed]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, the number of times of displaying the notice display displayed from the change in which the notice icon is displayed to the change to be digested can be expected. You may be able to let

  Here, the notice icon may be displayed only in the number corresponding to the number of times that the notice display may be displayed, or the number corresponding to the number of times that the notice display may be displayed. Other than that may be displayed. In addition, the notice icon may always display the number corresponding to the number of times that the notice display may be displayed, or the number corresponding to the number of times that the notice display may be displayed. You may not.

In addition, “the second display means may be a false notice display in the same form as the notice display form [for example, a pseudo-continuous effect or reach transition effect such as a big hit] [for example, a pseudo-continuous effect or reach that is lost. Display means capable of displaying a transition effect etc.,
The second display means, when one of the notice icons [for example, a hat notice icon I6, a thousand box notice icon I9, etc.] displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, A display means capable of displaying the fake notice display of a type corresponding to the type of icon [for example, a false continuous notice or a reach transition effect, etc.
After the false notice display is displayed, the symbol variation display result is configured to be out of sync.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, there is a case where the player can be kept nervous until the notice icon is digested and the notice display is displayed.

  Here, the second display means may be capable of displaying only a fake notice display having the same form as the notice display form, or other than the fake notice display having the same form as the notice display form. Can also be displayed. Further, the second display means may always display a fake notice display having the same form as the notice display form, or may not display a fake notice display having the same form as the notice display form. There may be.

  The second display means is capable of displaying only a fake notice display of a type corresponding to the kind of digested notice icon when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. It is also possible that when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, other than the false notice display of the type corresponding to the type of digested notice icon can be displayed. It may be. The second display means always displays a fake notice display of a type corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. There may be a case where when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, a fake notice display of a type corresponding to the kind of digested notice icon may not be displayed. .

  Further, it may be configured such that the result of the symbol variation display is always out of place after the false notice display is displayed, or the result of the symbol variation display becomes a big hit after the false notice display is displayed. There may be cases.

  In addition, after the false notice display is displayed, there may be a case where a notice display that is highly likely to display the big hit symbol is displayed on the symbol display means.

Further, “in the period in which the one-time symbol variation display is being executed, the number of the notice icons to be displayed in the notice icon display area is more than the third number [for example, one]. The fourth number [for example, 3] that is larger than the number of 3 is configured to be a big hit.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game machine, it may be possible to pay attention to the number of notice icons displayed in the symbol variation display.

Further, “the second display means is a display means constituted by a plurality of display means,
One display means of the plurality of display means is an image display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like]
One display means among the plurality of display means is a hold display means [for example, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the production hold lamp 286, etc.]
The hold display means is a display means configured to include the hold display area,
The hold display means is a display means capable of displaying a display according to the number of holds in the hold display area [for example, lighting a number of hold lamps according to the number of holds, etc.]
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a variation display of a decorative design,
The hold display means is a display means different from the image display means.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, there is a case where the hold display and the notice icon display can be clearly distinguished.

  Here, the second display means may be constituted by two display means, or may be constituted by three or more display means.

  Further, the second display means may be configured by only the image display means and the hold display means, or may include other than the image display means and the hold display means. Further, the second display means may be configured such that the image display means and the hold display means are configured, or at least one of the image display means and the hold display means may not be configured.

  Further, the hold display means may be configured to include only the hold display area, or may be configured to include other than the hold display area. Further, the hold display means may be configured to always include the hold display area, or may not include the hold display area.

  Further, the hold display means may be capable of displaying a display corresponding to the number of holds only in the hold display area, or a display corresponding to the number of holds other than the hold display area. Also good. Further, the hold display means may always display a display according to the number of holds in the hold display area, or may not display a display according to the number of holds in the hold display area.

  Further, the image display means may be capable of displaying only the decorative symbol variation display, or may be capable of displaying other than the decorative symbol variation display. Further, the image display means may necessarily display a decorative symbol variation display or may not display the decorative symbol display device.

In addition, “the hold display unit is a display unit including a light emitting unit [for example, a lamp, an LED, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, there is a case where the hold display can be clearly recognized.

  Here, the hold display means may be constituted only by the light emitting means, or may be constituted including other than the light emitting means (for example, image display means).

  The light emitting means may be configured to include a plurality of LEDs. Further, the light emitting means may be composed of LEDs of a plurality of colors, for example, a plurality of LEDs may be included in one package like a full color LED and required. Moreover, what was comprised by monochrome LED may be sufficient.

  In addition to the hold display means, the firing operation notifying means for notifying the operation of the fourth symbol display means, the normal symbol display means, and the firing operation means may be realized by the light emitting means.

Further, “the second display means is an image display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like],
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a variation display of a decorative design,
A hold icon is displayed in the hold display area according to the number of holds.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, the decorative symbol variation display and the hold icon are displayed on the same image display means, so that it may be possible to easily confirm the number of holds while visually recognizing the decoration symbol variation display.

  Here, the image display means may be capable of displaying only the decorative symbol variation display, or may be capable of displaying other than the decorative symbol variation display. Further, the image display means may always display the decorative symbol variation display, or may not display the decorative symbol variation display.

“Prefetching notice means capable of performing prefetching notice [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, speaker 120, shielding device 246, effect movable body 224, various lamps 418, game board lamp 532, game stand frame lamp 540, etc. ],
The prefetch notice means is a means capable of executing the prefetch notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, a notice icon may be displayed, so that a sense of expectation for a big hit may be increased.

  Here, the prefetching notice means may be capable of executing only the prefetching notice, or may be capable of executing things other than the prefetching notice. Further, the prefetching notice unit may always execute the prefetching notice, or may not execute the prefetching notice.

  The prefetching notice means may be capable of executing a prefetching notice only by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area, or by means other than displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area. The pre-reading notice may be executable. Further, the prefetch notice means may always execute the prefetch notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area, or does not execute the prefetch notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area. There may be cases.

Further, “the symbol variation display to be prefetched (hereinafter referred to as“ second symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display based on the third hold that is the prefetch target shown in FIG. 19 (2)] ”) ).), The notice icon may be digested by a fifth number [e.g., three, etc.]
The symbol variation display executed before the second symbol variation display is executed (hereinafter referred to as “first symbol variation display [for example, three pre-reading objects shown in FIG. 19 (2)”). In the period during which the symbol change display based on the hold held before the eye hold] is executed, the notice icon may be digested by a sixth number [for example, 1]. Yes,
The sixth number is different from the fifth number;
The display corresponding to the number of holdings is a display for notifying that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed [for example, FIG. Corresponds to the second hold that is the target of prefetching in the period in which the symbol variation display based on the hold held before the second hold that is the target of prefetching shown in (4) is executed. The hold icon h12 is displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1 and the like]. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, the number of notice icons used differs depending on whether the symbol variation display to be prefetched is being displayed or the symbol variation display to be executed before the symbol variation display to be prefetched. Therefore, there is a case where the symbol variation display that the player should pay attention to can be easily understood.

  Here, in the period in which the second symbol variation display is being executed, the notice icon may be configured to be digested only by the fifth number, or the period in which the second symbol variation display is being performed. The notice icon may be digested differently from the fifth number. Further, in the period in which the second symbol variation display is being executed, the notice icon may be necessarily digested with the fifth number, or in the period in which the second symbol variation display is being performed. The notice icon may not be digested with the fifth number.

  Further, the notice icon may be configured to be digested only by the sixth number during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed, or during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being performed. The notice icon may be digested differently from the sixth number. Further, in the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed, the notice icon may be necessarily digested with the sixth number, or in the period in which the first symbol variation display is being performed. The notice icon may not be digested with the sixth number.

  Moreover, the display according to the number of holdings may be capable of notifying only that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed. In addition, during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed, notifications other than that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended may be possible. In addition, the display according to the number of holds may be a notification that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed, There may be a case where it is not notified that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed.

In addition, “the notice icon may start to be displayed during the period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as“ fourth symbol variation display ”) in which the notice icon is digested [for example, As shown in FIG. 28 (C), the digest display of the hat notice icon I6, the hat notice icon I6, the thousand box notice icon I9, and the fan notice icon I10 are increased and displayed in one symbol variation display. Etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, the notice icon may increase even in the symbol variation display in which the notice icon is digested, so that the player may be expected until all the notice icons are digested.

  Here, the notice icon may be always displayed during the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being executed, or the notice icon may be displayed in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being executed. The display may not start. In addition, the notice icon may start to be displayed only during the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being performed, or the notice icon may be displayed in a period other than the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being performed. May be displayed.

  It should be noted that the notice icon may be configured not to increase in the symbol variation display that the notice icon digests.

In addition, during the period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “third symbol variation display”) executed before the fourth symbol variation display is performed, the fourth symbol variation display is performed. The notice icon to be digested may be displayed during the period in which the symbol variation display is executed [For example, the hat notice icon I6 digested at the timing shown in FIG. 28C is the symbol variation display. Etc., during the execution of the symbol variation display executed before the time]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, only in the period in which the third symbol variation display is being executed, the notice icon digested in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being executed may be configured to start displaying, Even in a period other than the period in which the third symbol variation display is being executed, the notice icon that is consumed in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being executed may be displayed. In addition, in the period in which the third symbol variation display is being performed, the notice icon that is consumed in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being performed may be displayed without fail. In the period in which the third symbol variation display is executed, the notice icon that is consumed in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being executed may not be displayed.

  Note that the notice icon digested in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is being executed may not start to be displayed in the period in which the third symbol variation display is being performed.

In addition, “the hold display area is an area that can display a display corresponding to the hold number up to a seventh number [eg, 4 or 8],
The notice icon display area is an area where the notice icon can be displayed up to an eighth number [for example, six, etc.]
The seventh number is different from the eighth number;
It is characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, since the displayable number of displays according to the number of holds differs from the displayable number of notice icons, it may be possible to clearly distinguish the notice icon display.

  Here, the hold display area may always display up to the seventh number according to the number of holds, or may not display up to the seventh number according to the number of holds. Good.

  In addition, the notice icon display area may display the notice icon up to the eighth number, or may not display the notice icon up to the eighth number.

  Note that the maximum displayable number of displays according to the number of holds may be the same as the maximum displayable number of notice icons.

  Further, the maximum displayable number of notice icons may be greater than, or at least the same as, the maximum displayable number of displays corresponding to the number of holds in FIG.

  Further, the maximum displayable number of notice icons may be greater than, or at least the same as, the maximum displayable number of displays corresponding to the number of holds in FIG.

  Also, the maximum number of displayable notice icons may be greater than the total of the maximum displayable number of displays according to the number of holds in the special maps 1 and 2, or at least the same or the same. Good.

In addition, "production means capable of executing a plurality of types of effects [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, speaker 210, shielding device 246, effect movable body 224, various lamps 418, game board lamp 532, game table frame lamp 542" Etc.]
One of the plurality of types of notice displays is a first notice display [for example, reach transition effects shown in FIG. 22 (49) to FIG. 50 (50), FIG. 34 (49), etc.]
One of the plurality of types of notice display is a second notice display [for example, stage change effects shown in FIG. 29 (Ac) and FIG. 29 (Bb)],
The first notice display is a notice display different from the second notice display,
One of the multiple types of effects is a first effect [for example, the strong reach shown in FIG. 22 (51) to FIG. 57 (57) or FIG. 34 (50-1) to FIG. Production etc.]
One of the multiple types of effects is a second effect [for example, display of the moon background, etc.]
The first effect is an effect different from the second effect,
The first notice display is a notice display informing that the first effect is executed,
The gaming table, wherein the second notice display is a notice display informing that the second effect is executed. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, the contents of the effect to be executed can be known in advance, so that the player may have a sense of expectation.

  Here, the effect means may be capable of executing only a plurality of kinds of effects, or may be capable of executing things other than a plurality of kinds of effects. Further, the production means may always execute a plurality of types of effects, or may not execute a plurality of types of effects.

  Further, the second display means may be capable of displaying only the first notice display and the second notice display, and also displays a notice display other than the first notice display and the second notice display. It may be possible. In addition, the second display means may always display the first notice display and the second notice display, or may not display the first notice display and the second notice display. Also good.

  Further, the effect means may be capable of executing only the first effect and the second effect, or may be capable of executing effects other than the first effect and the second effect. . Further, the production means may always execute the first production and the second production, or may not execute the first production and the second production.

  Further, the first notice display may notify only that the first effect is executed, or may notify that an effect other than the first effect is executed. Good. In addition, the first notice display may necessarily notify that the first effect is executed, or may not notify that the first effect is executed.

  Further, the second notice display may notify only that the second effect is executed, or may notify that an effect other than the second effect is executed. Good. Further, the second notice display may necessarily notify that the second effect is executed, or may not notify that the second effect is executed.

In addition, “the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is configured to be digested [for example, FIG. 19 (1) to FIG. 23 (66), FIG. 31 (1) to FIG. As shown in FIG. 35 (66), the increased notice icons are all digested, etc.]. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, the notice corresponding to the notice icon displayed by the notice icon being displayed is always executed, so that the player's expectation may be improved.

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [eg, pachinko machine 100, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that.

  In the embodiment described above, the notice icon functions as a prefetch notice, but may be displayed separately from the prefetch notice. Alternatively, the display of the notice icon may be different from that displayed in the prefetch mode. For example, the notice icon may increase or digest even in normal background display, and the notice icon may increase or digest even during the execution of a special background mode for prefetching. Also good.

  Further, for example, when the notice icon A is displayed, the notice display a is always displayed, when the notice icon B is displayed, the notice display b or the notice display c is displayed, and when the notice icon C is displayed, When the notice display b, the notice display c, or the notice display d is displayed, and the notice icon D is displayed, the notice icon A is digested when the notice c is always displayed. This is a display that is displayed when the other notice icons (B, C, D) are digested, and is not displayed, and the symbol “the notice display b, the notice display c, or the notice display d is displayed” is displayed. It may be configured such that the jackpot symbol is more easily displayed when the “symbol variation display with the notice display a” is performed than when the “variation display” is performed. The notice display b is a display that is displayed when the notice icon B or the notice icon C is digested, and the notice display c is displayed when the notice icon B, the notice icon C, or the notice icon D is digested. It is easier to display the big hit symbol when the “symbol change display with the notice display b” is executed than when the “symbol change display with the notice display c” is executed. It may be configured. The notice display d is a display that is displayed when the notice icon C is displayed, and is a notice display that is not displayed even if other notice icons (A, B, D) are digested. When digested, either the notice display b, the notice display c, or the notice display d is displayed. The jackpot symbol is confirmed and displayed when the “symbol change display in which the notice icon A, the notice icon B or the notice icon D is digested” is executed rather than the “symbol change display in which the notice icon C is digested” is executed. You may be comprised so that it may become easy. In addition, when the “symbol change display in which the notice display a, the notice display b or the notice display c is displayed” is executed, the jackpot symbol is more effective than the “symbol change display in which the notice display d is displayed”. You may be comprised so that a fixed display may become easy.

In the above description,
“First display means [for example, first special figure display device 212, second special figure display device 214, etc.] capable of executing symbol variation display;
A second display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, or a combination of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the first special figure hold lamp 218 and the second special figure hold lamp 220 or the production hold lamp 286);
A game machine equipped with
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a notice icon,
The second display means is capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice display [eg, pseudo-continuous effect, freeze effect, stop symbol notice, stage change effect, reach transition effect, premier notice effect, re-variable effect, etc.] And
The second display means displays a display corresponding to the number of operations of the symbol variation display being held (hereinafter referred to as “holding number”) [for example, the holding icon display region 281 of FIG. , A holding icon display area in FIG. 2, a variable icon display area 280, a holding display area in the effect holding lamp 286, etc.] [for example, the holding icon display area 281 in FIG. The number of hold icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display of special figure 1 is held is displayed]
The symbol variation display is a display that starts when the hold is consumed,
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a notice icon display area [for example, notice icon display area 285 or the like] in the second display means,
The notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of holds depending on the number displayed,
The notice icon display area is an area different from the hold display area,
The notice icon display area is an area where a plurality of notice icons can be displayed. [For example, the notice icon display area 285 includes a notice icon first display area YA1 to a notice icon sixth display area YA6. Each area is configured to display a notice icon],
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying the notice display of a type corresponding to the kind of the notice icon digested when the notice icon in the notice icon display area is digested [for example, When the hat notice icon I6 is digested, a pseudo-continuous effect may be executed, and when the thousand carton notice icon I9 is digested, a reach transition effect may be executed, etc.] ,
In the period in which the symbol variation display is performed once, the second number larger than the first number than when the notice icon is digested by the first number [for example, one, etc.] [ For example, 3 etc.] is configured to be a big hit if digested,
The second display means is based on the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “second symbol variation display [for example, the third hold that is the target of prefetching shown in FIG. 19 (2)]. It is a display means that can display the notice icon in the notice icon display area as a pre-read notice display before the start of “design variation display etc.”).
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

Further, “the notice icon is configured to display a number corresponding to the number of times the notice display may be displayed [for example, the number of notice icons displayed in the notice icon display area 285. Only the notice icon corresponding to the displayed notice icon may be displayed]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, the second display means may include a fake notice display in the same form as the notice display form [for example, a pseudo-continuous effect or reach transition effect such as a big hit] Display means capable of displaying a transition effect etc.,
The second display means, when one of the notice icons [for example, a hat notice icon I6, a thousand box notice icon I9, etc.] displayed in the notice icon display area is digested, A display means capable of displaying the fake notice display of a type corresponding to the type of icon [for example, a false continuous notice or a reach transition effect, etc.
After the false notice display is displayed, the symbol variation display result is configured to be out of sync.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the second display means includes a plurality of display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special figure holding lamp 218, a second special figure holding lamp 220, an effect holding lamp 286, etc.]. Display means,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “one display means of the plurality of display means is an image display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like]
One display means among the plurality of display means is a hold display means [for example, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the production hold lamp 286, etc.]
The hold display means is a display means configured to include the hold display area,
The hold display means is a display means capable of displaying a display according to the number of holds in the hold display area [for example, lighting a number of hold lamps according to the number of holds, etc.]
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a variation display of a decorative design,
The image display means is display means capable of displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area [for example, as shown in FIGS. 19 (9) to 20 (20), the notice icon is displayed as a prefetch notice. Is performed by the decorative symbol display device 208],
The hold display means is a display means different from the image display means.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Further, “the hold display unit is a display unit including a light emitting unit [for example, a lamp, an LED, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Further, “the second display means is an image display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like]
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a variation display of a decorative design,
A hold icon is displayed in the hold display area according to the number of holds.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, during the period in which “the second symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display based on the third hold that is the prefetch target shown in FIG. A fifth number [eg 3 etc.] may be digested,
The symbol variation display executed before the second symbol variation display is executed (hereinafter referred to as “first symbol variation display [for example, three pre-reading objects shown in FIG. 19 (2)”). In the period during which the symbol change display based on the hold held before the eye hold] is executed, the notice icon may be digested by a sixth number [for example, 1]. Yes,
The sixth number is different from the fifth number;
The display corresponding to the number of holdings is a display for notifying that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed [for example, FIG. Corresponds to the second hold that is the target of prefetching in the period in which the symbol variation display based on the hold held before the second hold that is the target of prefetching shown in (4) is executed. The hold icon h12 is displayed in the hold icon display area 281 of FIG. 1 and the like]. ]
Also explained.

Further, “the notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is configured to be digested before the end of the symbol variation display to be prefetched [for example, FIG. 19 (1) As shown in FIG. 23 (66) and FIG. 31 (1) to FIG. 35 (66), the increased notice icon is completely digested until the end of the symbol variation display to be prefetched. Etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, the notice icon may start to be displayed during a period in which the symbol change display (hereinafter referred to as “fourth symbol change display”) in which the notice icon is digested [for example, As shown in FIG. 28 (C), the digest display of the hat notice icon I6, and the hat notice icon I6, the thousand box notice icon I9, and the fan notice icon I10 are increased and displayed in one pattern change display. Etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

In addition, “in the period in which the symbol variation display is performed before the fourth symbol variation display is performed, it is digested in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is performed. The notice icon may start to be displayed. [For example, the hat notice icon I6 digested at the timing shown in FIG. 28C is displayed during the symbol variation display executed before the symbol variation display. Increased display etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the hold display area is an area that can display a display corresponding to the hold number up to a seventh number [for example, four or eight, etc.]
The notice icon display area is an area where the notice icon can be displayed up to an eighth number [for example, six, etc.]
The seventh number is different from the eighth number;
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “production means capable of executing a plurality of types of effects [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, speaker 210, shielding device 246, effect movable body 224, various lamps 418, game board lamp 532, game table frame lamp 542” Etc.]
As the notice icon, a first notice icon [e.g., a thousand box notice icon I9 shown in FIG. 22 (47) or FIG. 33 (47)] can be displayed.
As the notice icon, a second notice icon [for example, a ribbon notice icon I8 shown in FIG. 29 (Ab)] can be displayed.
The first notice icon is a notice icon different from the second notice icon,
One of the plurality of types of notice displays is a first notice display [for example, reach transition effects shown in FIG. 22 (49) to FIG. 50 (50), FIG. 34 (49), etc.]
One of the plurality of types of notice display is a second notice display [for example, stage change effects shown in FIG. 29 (Ac) and FIG. 29 (Bb)],
The first notice display is a notice display different from the second notice display,
The first notice display is configured to be displayed when the first notice icon is digested,
The second notice icon is configured to be displayed when the second notice icon is digested,
One of the multiple types of effects is a first effect [for example, the strong reach shown in FIG. 22 (51) to FIG. 57 (57) or FIG. 34 (50-1) to FIG. Production etc.]
One of the multiple types of effects is a second effect [for example, display of the moon background, etc.]
The first effect is an effect different from the second effect,
The first notice display is a notice display informing that the first effect is executed,
The gaming table, wherein the second notice display is a notice display informing that the second effect is executed. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “main control means [for example, main control unit 300 etc.],
Production control means [for example, a combination of the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500, etc.]
With
The main control means is means capable of transmitting a command to the effect control means,
The production control means is means capable of executing control according to the command from the main control means,
The main control means is means capable of executing control of the first display means [for example, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, etc.]
The effect control means is means capable of executing control of the second display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
“A game machine provided with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]
One of the plurality of types of display is a notice icon,
During the display of the first symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display based on the hold held before the third hold, which is the prefetch target shown in FIG. 19 (2)], the notice icon In some cases, the display of the first notice icon [for example, the hat notice icon I6 etc.] may start [for example, as shown in FIG. 19 (9), the hat notice icon I6 is displayed in the notice icon display area 285. Etc.]
In some cases, the first notice icon that is displayed during the display of the first symbol variation display is not digested during the display of the first symbol variation display [for example, FIGS. 19 (9) to 20]. As shown in (14), the notice icon I6 of the hat that has started display at the timing shown in FIG. 19 (9) is not digested even if the next symbol variation display is started at the timing shown in FIG. 20 (14), etc. ],
The symbol variation display displayed after the first symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “the second symbol variation display [for example, the symbol based on the third hold that is the target of prefetching shown in FIG. 19 (2)”) The first notice icon that has not been digested during the display of the first symbol variation display is sometimes digested [for example, FIG. 19 ( 9) to FIG. 20 (25), the hat notice icon I6 that has started to be displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 19 (9) is the symbol variation display that is the object of prefetching as shown in FIG. 20 (23). Digested in, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

In addition, “the first notice icon that is started during the display of the first symbol variation display may be digested during the display of the first symbol variation display [for example, the notice icon of the hat The notice icon I6 of this hat is digested by the symbol variation display in which the display of I6 is started, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  In addition, as the pre-reading notice of the second symbol variation display, the first notice icon may be displayed while the first symbol variation display is being displayed [for example, FIG. 19 (9) to FIG. As shown in FIG. 20 (25), the symbol change which is the object of prefetching is such that the notice icon I6 of the hat started to be displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 19 (9) is digested at the timing shown in FIG. A hat stand icon I6 is displayed as a pre-reading notice of display, etc.]. ”Was also explained.

In addition, “a second number [e.g., three, etc.] than when the first number [e.g., one, etc.] of the first notice icon is digested during the display of the one time symbol variation display. ] Is more likely to be a big hit if the first notice icon is digested,
The second number is a number greater than the first number.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Further, “a second notice icon [for example, a fan notice icon I10 etc.] can be displayed as the notice icon,
The second notice icon is configured to be a big hit in the displayed symbol variation display [For example, as shown in FIGS. 23 (60) to (66), the fan notice icon I10 is digested. Then, the result of the symbol variation display will be a big hit, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a notice display [for example, pseudo-continuous effect, freeze effect, stop symbol notice, stage change effect, reach transition effect, premier notice effect, re-variable effect, etc.] ,
When the first notice icon [for example, the hat notice icon I6, etc.] is digested, a first notice display [for example, the pseudo shown in FIG. 21 (28) to FIG. May be displayed],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a fake notice display [for example, pseudo-continuous effect or reach transition effect, etc.,
When the first notice icon [e.g. hat notice icon I6] is digested, a first fake notice table [e.g. false pseudo-relation effect etc.] is displayed as the fake notice display. There is a case,
The display form of the first false notice display is the same display form as the display form of the first notice display,
The symbol fluctuating display in which the first false notice display is displayed is configured to be out of place,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a pre-reading effect display [for example, a pre-reading mode effect that is an effect of shifting to a special stage shown in FIG. 18B, etc.]
A third notice icon [e.g., a ribbon notice icon I8] can be displayed as the notice icon.
When the third notice icon is digested, the pre-reading effect display may be started. [For example, when one ribbon notice icon I8 is digested, if the reliability of the jackpot is strong, For example, the background is shifted to the prefetch mode)
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Further, “the display means includes a plurality of display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first special figure holding lamp 218, a second special figure holding lamp 220, an effect holding lamp 286, etc.]. Is,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a decorative symbol variation display [for example, as illustrated in FIG. 19 (1), a decorative symbol variation display is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208, etc.] Is,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Further, “the first notice icon started during the display of the first symbol variation display [for example, based on the hold three times before the hold that is the target of the prefetch shown in FIG. 19 (9). The notice icon I6 of the hat that has been displayed during the symbol variation display is configured to be digested by the end of the display of the second symbol variation display [for example, the hold that is the target of prefetching Etc. The notice icon I6 of the hat is digested during the symbol variation display based on
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Further, “the notice icon is an icon displayed in a notice icon display area [for example, notice icon display area 285] in the display means,
The notice icon display area is an area in which a plurality of notice icons can be displayed. [For example, the notice icon display area 285 includes a notice icon first display area YA1 to a notice icon sixth display area YA6. Each area is configured to display a notice icon],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Further, it includes “production control means [for example, a combination of the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500, etc.]
The effect control means is means capable of executing control of the display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 or the like].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “main control means [for example, main control unit 300 etc.],
A symbol display means [for example, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, etc.] capable of displaying a symbol variation display;
With
The main control means is means capable of transmitting a command to the effect control means,
The production control means is means capable of executing control according to the command from the main control means,
The main control means is means capable of executing control of the symbol display means.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, in the above description, “a game machine equipped with a display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208 etc.] capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One of the plurality of types of display includes a notice icon [e.g., each notice icon shown in FIG. 18 (a) and FIG. 18 (b), "house" notice icon I21, and "mon" notice icon I22. , A notice icon I31 for "Tono", a notice icon I32 for "Princess", a notice icon I33 for "Tsubaki", etc.]
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a display mode according to the type,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice display,
The jackpot symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching (hereinafter, “second symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display that is a jackpot based on the second hold that is the target of prefetching shown in FIG. 41 (1), etc.]” ")" Is suspended, and display of a plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter referred to as "plural notice icons") is started in a period from the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. [For example, as shown in FIG. 41 to FIG. 42, “house” is displayed in the notice icon display area 285 in the period from when the symbol variation display to be prefetched is suspended until the symbol variation display ends. The notice icon I21 and the notice icon I22 of “Crest” are displayed],
One of the plurality of types of display is an effect display,
When the notice icon is digested, the effect display corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon may be displayed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 20 (23) to 21 (32), a hat When the previous notice icon I6 is digested, a pseudo-ream may be performed. As shown in FIGS. 22 (46) to (57), when the 1,000-box notice icon I9 is digested, a strong reach effect is produced. May start, etc.]
The first combination of the displayed notice icons (for example, the combination of the “house” notice icon I21 and the “mon” notice icon I22 shown in FIG. 41, etc.) is a single symbol variation. By being digested in the display, a first effect display [for example, an effect image or the like displayed in the family crest drop effect shown in FIG. 42 (21)] is displayed as the effect display. ,
A game stand characterized by that.

  In the conventional game machine, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game machine, it is possible to realize a game machine characterized by the display means.

  In addition, according to this gaming machine, there may be a case where the expectation that the first effect display may be displayed can be continued until the notice icon of the first combination is digested.

  Also, according to this game stand, a plurality of notice icons can be displayed during the symbol variation display prior to the start of the symbol variation display to be prefetched, and it is possible to have a sense of expectation for a big hit. There are cases where it is possible.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the notice icon or may be capable of displaying other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may always display the notice icon or may not display the notice icon.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the effect display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the effect display. Further, the display means may always display the effect display, or may not display the effect display.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only as a prefetch notice display, or may be other than the prefetch notice display. Further, the notice icon may be displayed as a prefetch notice display or may not be displayed as a prefetch notice display.

  In addition, during the period from when the second symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the second symbol variation display ends, only the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started, In the period from when the second symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the second symbol variation display is ended, display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. In addition, during the period from when the second symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the second symbol variation display is ended, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be surely started. The display of a plurality of notice icons may not be started in the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends.

  Also, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started only during the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends. The display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in a period other than the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the second symbol variation display is ended.

  In addition, when the notice icon is digested, only an effect display corresponding to the kind of digested notice icon may be displayed. When the notice icon is digested, the kind of digested notice icon is displayed. Display other than the effect display corresponding to may be displayed. In addition, when the notice icon is digested, an effect display corresponding to the kind of digested notice icon may be displayed. When the notice icon is digested, the kind of digested notice icon is displayed. There may be a case where an effect display corresponding to is not displayed.

  Moreover, even if it is comprised so that only the 1st effect display may be displayed as an effect display by digesting the 1st combination of the displayed several notice icons in one time of symbol fluctuation display. In addition, the first combination of the plurality of displayed notice icons is digested in a single symbol variation display, and a display other than the first effect display is also displayed as an effect display. May be. Moreover, even if it is comprised so that the 1st effect display may be necessarily displayed as an effect display by digesting the 1st combination of the displayed some notice icons in one time of symbol fluctuation display. Alternatively, the first effect display may not be displayed as the effect display by digesting the first combination of the plurality of displayed notice icons in one symbol variation display.

  Further, the first effect display may be displayed as the effect display only when the first combination of the displayed plurality of notice icons is digested in one symbol variation display. The first effect display may be displayed as the effect display even if the first combination of the displayed plurality of notice icons is not digested in one symbol variation display. May be.

In addition, “the first combination is a combination of the first number [eg, two, etc.] of the notice icons.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, the first effect display is performed after the first notice icon of the first combination of the first number of notice icons is displayed until the first number of notice icons is consumed. May continue to have an expectation that it may be displayed.

“The first combination is a combination including a first notice icon [for example, a“ home ”notice icon I21, etc.] and a second notice icon [for example, a“ print ”notice icon I22, etc.]. ,
The first notice icon and the second notice icon are different notice icons.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, the first notice icon and the second notice icon are visually different, so that there may be a case where the production effect can be enhanced.

  Here, the first combination may be a combination of only the first notice icon and the second notice icon, or a combination including a notice icon other than the first notice icon and the second notice icon. May be. The first combination may be a combination that always includes the first notice icon and the second notice icon, or a combination that does not include at least one of the first notice icon and the second notice icon. It may be.

In addition, after the second symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display that is a big hit based on the second suspension that is the prefetch target shown in FIG. In the period until the display of the symbol variation display is finished, the plurality of notice icons may be consumed [for example, as shown in FIG. 42 (19), the symbol variation display to be prefetched is suspended. During the period from when the symbol change display ends until the “house” notice icon I21 and the “monkey” notice icon I22 displayed in the notice icon display area 285 are digested, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, a plurality of notice icons are digested during the period from when the second symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the second symbol variation display is completed. Since there are cases where a plurality of effects are performed, the effect of the effects may be improved.

  Here, in the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display is finished, only a plurality of notice icons may be consumed. In addition to a plurality of notice icons, there may be items that are digested in a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the second symbol variation display is ended. In addition, in the period from when the second symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the second symbol variation display is finished, a plurality of notice icons may be necessarily consumed. A plurality of notice icons may not be digested during the period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends.

  In addition, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed only during a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends. A plurality of notice icons may be consumed even during a period other than the period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends.

In addition, in the one-time symbol variation display, the first effect display is not displayed even if only some of the notice icons of the first combination are digested [for example, The effect image shown in FIG. 42 (21) is not displayed even if only one of the “house” notice icon I21 and the “mon” notice icon I22 is digested], etc. Stand. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, the first effect display is not displayed unless the notice icon including the first notice icon and the second notice icon is digested in one symbol variation display. It may be possible to give a sense of superiority to a player who can see the game.

  Here, in one symbol variation display, even if only some of the notice icons in the first combination are digested, only the first effect display may not be displayed. In the symbol fluctuation display, even if only some of the notice icons in the first combination are digested, a display other than the first effect display may not be displayed. Further, in a single symbol variation display, even if only some of the notice icons of the first combination are digested, the first effect display may not be displayed, In the symbol variation display, the first effect display may be displayed even if only some of the notice icons of the first combination are digested.

  Further, only in one symbol variation display, even if only some of the notice icons of the first combination are digested, the first effect display may not be displayed. Even in the symbol variation display other than the symbol variation display, the first effect display may not be displayed even if only some of the notice icons in the first combination are digested.

In addition, when the third notice icon [for example, the hat notice icon I6 shown in FIG. 20 or the like shown in FIG. 20] is digested as the notice icon, the third effect display [for example, FIG. ) Shown in FIG. 6), the display of the head-length character BC displayed in correspondence with the digestion of the hat notice icon I6 is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, the variation of production may be increased and the production effect may be enhanced.

  Here, only the third effect display may be displayed by digesting the third notice icon, or the third notice icon may be digested, A display other than the effect display may also be displayed. Moreover, it may be configured such that the third effect display is always displayed by digesting the third notice icon, or the third effect is displayed by digesting the third notice icon. You may be comprised so that a display may not be displayed.

  Further, the third presentation icon may be configured to be displayed only by digesting the third notice icon, or the third notice icon may be displayed other than digesting the third notice icon. Three effect displays may be displayed.

In addition, “Lack of symbol variation display to be prefetched (hereinafter referred to as“ fourth symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display shown in FIG. 20 (21) to FIG. 23 (66), The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started during a period from when the display of the fourth symbol variation display is ended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends (for example, FIG. 19). As shown in (2) to FIG. 23 (66), four notice icons are stocked from when the symbol variation display that is a prefetch target is suspended until the symbol variation display that is a prefetch target ends. ],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game machine, even if the notice icon is displayed, it is not always a big hit, and there is a case where it can be enjoyed until the symbol variation display to be prefetched is finished.

  Here, only the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is completed. In the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is ended, display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. In addition, in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be surely started, The display of a plurality of notice icons may not be started in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is completed.

  In addition, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started only during the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends. The display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in a period other than the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends.

In addition, after the fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIG. 20 (21) to FIG. In the period until the end of the display of the four symbol variation displays, the plurality of notice icons may be digested [for example, as shown in FIGS. For example, four notice icons are digested from the time a symbol variation display is suspended until the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is completed]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, even if the notice icon is digested, it is not necessarily a big hit, and there is a case where it can be enjoyed until the symbol variation display to be prefetched is finished.

  Here, only a plurality of notice icons may be digested during the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends. In the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is finished, there may be cases where other than the plurality of notice icons are digested. In addition, in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is completed, a plurality of notice icons may be necessarily consumed. A plurality of notice icons may not be digested during a period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends.

  In addition, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed only during a period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends. A plurality of notice icons may be consumed even in a period other than the period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends.

In addition, “hold display means [for example, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]
The hold display means is a means capable of displaying the number of displays corresponding to the number of the start of the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “hold number”) [for example, the hold icon shown in FIG. In the display area 281, the number of hold icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display in FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the hold display means may be capable of displaying only the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds. . In addition, the hold display means may always display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds, or may not display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds.

Further, “the notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of holdings depending on the number displayed. [For example, the notice icon shown in FIG. The icon I22 etc. is not an icon indicating the number of the operation of the symbol variation display of the special figure 1 is suspended],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, there is a case where it is possible to perform an effect regardless of the number of holds.

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
“First display means [for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208A shown in FIG. 46, the first decorative symbol display device 208C shown in FIG. 49, etc.]
Second display means [for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208B shown in FIG. 46, the second decorative symbol display device 208D shown in FIG. 49, etc.];
A game machine equipped with
The first display means displays a notice icon [for example, a display that the hat notice icon I6 shown in FIG. 46 (10) to FIG. 47 (13) digests, or FIG. 47 (16) to FIG. ) Shown in FIG. 49 (c1) to (c5), or display of the hat notice icon I6 shown in FIG. 49 (c1) to FIG. 49 (c5). Etc.] is a means capable of displaying,
The second display means displays the notification icon [for example, the notification icon display area 285A shown in FIGS. 46 (2) to 47 (13) and the display of the notification icon shown in FIGS. 46 (5) to (9). A display of the notification icon I6 of the hat to be displayed, or a display etc. of the notification icon I6 of the hat shown in FIG. 49 (c6)],
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a prefetch notice display [for example, the notice icon shown in FIG. 18 may function as a prefetch notice display],
Jackpot symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching (hereinafter, “second symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display that is a jackpot based on the second hold that is the target of prefetching shown in FIG. 49 (c1), etc.]” ")" Is suspended, and display of a plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter referred to as "plural notice icons") is started in a period from the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. [For example, as shown in FIG. 49 (c1) to FIG. 49 (c9), a notice icon is displayed during a period from when the symbol variation display to be pre-read is suspended until the symbol variation display ends. In the area 285B, two hat notice icons I6 and one shuriken notice icon I7 are displayed.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  In the conventional game machine, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game machine, it is possible to realize a game machine characterized by the display means.

  Also, according to this gaming table, there may be a case where a display related to the notice icon may be displayed on a plurality of display means, so that the line of sight of the player who sees the display about the notice icon is not concentrated on one display means, It may be possible to entertain the player.

  Here, the display means may comprise only the first display means and the second display means, or may include a display means other than the first display means and the second display means. . Further, the display means may necessarily include the first display means and the second display means, or may not include the first display means and the second display means.

  Further, the first display means may be capable of displaying only a display related to the notice icon, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the display related to the notice icon. Further, the first display means may always display a display related to the notice icon, or may not display a display related to the notice icon.

  In addition, the second display unit may be capable of displaying only a display relating to the notice icon, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the notice icon. Further, the second display means may always display a display related to the notice icon, or may not display a display related to the notice icon.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only as a prefetch notice display, or may be displayed as other than the prefetch notice display. Further, the notice icon may be displayed as a prefetch notice display or may not be displayed as a prefetch notice display.

  In addition, during the period from when the second symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the second symbol variation display ends, only the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started, In the period from when the second symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the second symbol variation display is ended, display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. In addition, during the period from when the second symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the second symbol variation display is ended, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be surely started. The display of a plurality of notice icons may not be started in the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends.

  Also, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started only during the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends. The display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in a period other than the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the second symbol variation display is ended.

In addition, after the second symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display that becomes a big hit based on the second suspension that is the prefetch target shown in FIG. 49 (c1)] is suspended, In the period until the display of the symbol variation display is completed, the plurality of notice icons may be consumed [for example, as shown in FIG. 49 (c1) to FIG. In the period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the symbol variation display ends, the shuriken notice icon I7 and the two hat notice icons I6 are digested, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, a plurality of notice icons are digested during the period from when the second symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the second symbol variation display is completed. Since there are cases where a plurality of effects are performed, the effect of the effects may be improved.

  Here, in the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display is finished, only a plurality of notice icons may be consumed. In addition to a plurality of notice icons, there may be items that are digested in a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the second symbol variation display is ended. In addition, in the period from when the second symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the second symbol variation display is finished, a plurality of notice icons may be necessarily consumed. A plurality of notice icons may not be digested during the period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends.

  In addition, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed only during a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends. A plurality of notice icons may be consumed even during a period other than the period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends.

Further, the notice icon is displayed on the second display means [for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208B shown in FIG. 46, the second decorative symbol display device 208D shown in FIG. 49, etc.]. [For example, as shown in FIG. 46 (5), a hat notice icon I6 is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208B, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, since the display means for performing the stock effect is determined, it may be possible not to miss the stock notice icon.

  Here, the second display means may be configured to display only the notice icon, or the second display means may be configured to display other than the notice icon. Good. Further, the second display unit may be configured such that the notice icon is always displayed, or the second display unit may be configured such that the notice icon may not be displayed.

  The notice icon may be displayed only on the second display means, or the notice icon may be displayed on display means other than the second display means. Also good.

Further, the notice icon is displayed on the first display means [for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208A shown in FIG. 46, the first decorative symbol display device 208C shown in FIG. 49, etc.]. There is a case where a notice is displayed [For example, as shown in FIGS. 46 (2) to (5), a notice that the hat notice icon I6 is displayed in the notice icon display area 285A (Mr. Production) is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208A, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, since there is a possibility that a notice icon may be displayed, there is a case where the player can be noticed on the display means so that the player does not miss the notice icon display. is there.

  Here, in the first display means, there may be a case where only the notice for displaying the notice icon is displayed, or in the first display means, the notice for displaying that the notice icon is displayed. There may be a case where other displays are also performed. In addition, there may be a case where the first display means always displays a notice that the notice icon is displayed, or the first display means displays a notice that the notice icon is displayed. There may be cases where this is not done.

  In addition, there may be a case in which a notice that the notice icon is displayed is displayed only on the first display means, and the notice icon may be displayed on a display means other than the first display means. There may be a case where a notice is given to notify the user.

In addition, the first display means has a first display area [for example, the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208A shown in FIG. 46, the first decorative symbol display device 208C shown in FIG. Means provided,
The second display means is provided with a second display area [for example, the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208B shown in FIG. 46, the second decorative symbol display device 208D shown in FIG. 49, etc.]. Means,
The notice icon may be displayed across the first display area and the second display area [For example, as shown in FIG. 46 (4) and FIG. 1 decorative symbol display device 208A and second decorative symbol display device 208B, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, it is possible to produce a notice icon with an impact and to entertain the player.

  Here, the first display means may be provided with only the first display area, or may be provided with a display area other than the first display area. Further, the first display means may be provided with the first display area without fail, or the first display area may not be provided.

  In addition, the second display unit may be provided with only the second display area, or may be provided with a display area other than the second display area. Further, the second display means may be provided with the second display area without fail, or the second display area may not be provided.

  In addition, the notice icon may be displayed over only the first display area and the second display area, or the notice icon may be displayed other than the first display area and the second display area. It may be displayed over the area. In addition, the notice icon may be displayed over the first display area and the second display area, or the notice icon may be displayed over the first display area and the second display area. It may not be displayed.

  Further, only the notice icon may be displayed over the first display area and the second display area, and other than the notice icon may be displayed in the first display area and the second display area. It may be displayed over the range.

In addition, the first display means has a first display area [for example, the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208A shown in FIG. 46, the first decorative symbol display device 208C shown in FIG. Means provided,
The second display means is provided with a second display area [for example, the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208B shown in FIG. 46, the second decorative symbol display device 208D shown in FIG. 49, etc.]. Means,
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a display mode according to the type [for example, a plurality of kinds of notice icons according to the type of effect shown in FIG.
When the notice icon is digested, an effect display corresponding to the type of digested notice icon may be displayed across the first display area and the second display area [for example, FIG. 47 (16) to (18), when the hat notice icon I6 is digested, the enlarged character BC2 is displayed from the first decorative symbol display device 208A to the second decorative symbol display device. In the effect display in which 208 is displayed over the screen, and the number BC character pushes up the right symbol, the right symbol is displayed across the first decorative symbol display device 208A and the second decorative symbol display device 208B, and the pseudo-continuous symbol is the second. Displayed from the decorative symbol display device 208B to the first decorative symbol display device 208A],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, it is possible to produce a notice icon with an impact and to entertain the player.

  Here, the first display means may be provided with only the first display area, or may be provided with a display area other than the first display area. Further, the first display means may be provided with the first display area without fail, or the first display area may not be provided.

  In addition, the second display unit may be provided with only the second display area, or may be provided with a display area other than the second display area. Further, the second display means may be provided with the second display area without fail, or the second display area may not be provided.

  The notice icon may be displayed only in a display mode corresponding to the type, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the display mode corresponding to the type. The notice icon may be displayed in a display manner corresponding to the type, or may not be displayed in a display manner corresponding to the type.

  Further, when the notice icon is digested, an effect display corresponding to the digested notice icon type may be displayed over only the first display area and the second display area. When the notice icon is digested, an effect display corresponding to the type of digested notice icon may be displayed over the display area other than the first display area and the second display area. Also good. Further, when the notice icon is digested, an effect display corresponding to the type of the notice icon that has been digested may be displayed over the first display area and the second display area. When the notice icon is digested, an effect display corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon may not be displayed across the first display area and the second display area.

  In addition, when the notice icon is digested, only the effect display corresponding to the digested notice icon type may be displayed across the first display area and the second display area. When the notice icon is digested, an effect display other than the effect display corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon may be displayed across the first display area and the second display area. Good.

In addition, “Lack of symbol variation display to be prefetched (hereinafter referred to as“ fourth symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display shown in FIG. 20 (21) to FIG. 23 (66), The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started during a period from when the display of the fourth symbol variation display is ended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends (for example, FIG. 19). As shown in (2) to FIG. 23 (66), four notice icons are stocked from when the symbol variation display that is a prefetch target is suspended until the symbol variation display that is a prefetch target ends. ],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game machine, even if the notice icon is displayed, it is not always a big hit, and there is a case where it can be enjoyed until the symbol variation display to be prefetched is finished.

  Here, only the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is completed. In the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is ended, display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. In addition, in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be surely started, The display of a plurality of notice icons may not be started in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is completed.

  In addition, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started only during the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends. The display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in a period other than the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends.

In addition, after the fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIG. 20 (21) to FIG. In the period until the end of the display of the four symbol variation displays, the plurality of notice icons may be digested [for example, as shown in FIGS. For example, four notice icons are digested from the time a symbol variation display is suspended until the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is completed]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, even if the notice icon is digested, it is not necessarily a big hit, and there is a case where it can be enjoyed until the symbol variation display to be prefetched is finished.

  Here, only a plurality of notice icons may be digested during the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends. In the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is finished, there may be cases where other than the plurality of notice icons are digested. In addition, in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is completed, a plurality of notice icons may be necessarily consumed. A plurality of notice icons may not be digested during a period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends.

  In addition, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed only during a period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends. A plurality of notice icons may be consumed even in a period other than the period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends.

In addition, “hold display means [for example, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]
The on-hold display means is a means capable of displaying a number of displays corresponding to the number on which the start of the symbol variation display is on-hold (hereinafter referred to as “the number of on-hold”) [for example, the on-hold icon shown in FIG. In the display area 281, the number of hold icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display in FIG.
A game stand characterized by that.

  Here, the hold display means may be capable of displaying only the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds. . In addition, the hold display means may always display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds, or may not display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds.

In addition, “the notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of holdings depending on the number displayed. [For example, the notice icon shown in FIG. 46 (the hat notice icon I6, etc.) It ’s not an icon that shows the number of symbols that are suspended, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, there is a case where it is possible to perform an effect regardless of the number of holds.

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
“Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display [for example, decorative symbol display device 208];
First movable means [for example, an actuator for displacing the position of the effect button 136 shown in FIG. 52 (12), a family crest member 224B shown in FIG. 44 (d4-2)],
A game machine equipped with
One of the plurality of types of display includes a notice icon [e.g., each notice icon shown in FIG. 18 (a) and FIG. 18 (b), "house" notice icon I21, and "mon" notice icon I22. , Drink notice icon I31 etc.]
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a display mode according to the type,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice display,
Jackpot symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching (hereinafter referred to as “second symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display that becomes a jackpot based on the third hold that is the target of prefetching shown in FIG. 19 (2), etc.]] ")" Is suspended, and display of a plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter referred to as "plural notice icons") is started in a period from the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. [For example, as shown in FIG. 19 (2) to FIG. 23 (66) and FIG. 52, in the period from when the symbol variation display to be pre-read is suspended until the symbol variation display ends. The notice icon display area 285 includes two hat notice icons I6, a thousand box notice icon I9, and a drink notice icon I31.]
The first movable means provides a first movable effect [for example, a movable effect that displaces the effect button 136 from the default position to the protruding position as shown in FIGS. 52 (12) to (17)]. A viable means,
When the fourth notice icon [for example, drink notice icon I31 etc.] of the displayed notice icons is digested, the first movable effect may be executed. ,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  In the conventional game machine, there was room for improvement in the movable means. According to this game machine, it is possible to realize a game machine characterized by the movable means.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, when the fourth notice icon is digested on the display means, the first movable effect may be performed by the first movable means, so that the variation of the effect can be increased. There is a case.

  Further, according to this game table, the player's line of sight can be focused not only on the display means but also on the movable means, and the effect can be enhanced.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the notice icon or may be capable of displaying other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may always display the notice icon or may not display the notice icon.

  The notice icon may be displayed only in a display mode corresponding to the type, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the display mode corresponding to the type. The notice icon may be displayed in a display manner corresponding to the type, or may not be displayed in a display manner corresponding to the type.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only as a prefetch notice display, or may be other than the prefetch notice display. Further, the notice icon may be displayed as a prefetch notice display or may not be displayed as a prefetch notice display.

  In addition, during the period from when the second symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the second symbol variation display ends, only the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started, In the period from when the second symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the second symbol variation display is ended, display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. In addition, during the period from when the second symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the second symbol variation display is ended, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be surely started. The display of a plurality of notice icons may not be started in the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends.

  Also, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started only during the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends. The display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in a period other than the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the second symbol variation display is ended.

  Further, the first movable means may be capable of executing only the first movable effect, or may be capable of executing a movable effect other than the first movable effect. Further, the first movable means may always execute the first movable effect, or may not execute the first movable effect.

  Further, when the fourth notice icon of the displayed notice icons is digested, only the first movable effect may be executed, or the displayed notice icon may be displayed. When the fourth notice icon is digested, a movable effect other than the first movable effect may also be executed. In addition, when the fourth notice icon of the displayed notice icons is digested, the first movable effect may be always executed. If the fourth notice icon is digested, the first movable effect may not be executed.

  In addition, the first movable effect may be executed only when the fourth of the displayed notice icons is digested, or the displayed notice icon may be displayed. It may be configured such that the first movable effect may be executed even when the fourth notice icon is not digested.

In addition, after the second symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display that is a big hit based on the third suspension that is the target of prefetching shown in FIG. In the period until the display of the symbol variation display is completed, the plurality of notice icons may be consumed [For example, as shown in FIGS. 19 (2) to 23 (66) and FIG. In the period from when the target symbol variation display is suspended until the symbol variation display ends, two hat notice icons I6, a thousand box notice icon I9, and a drink notice icon I31 are digested, etc.] ,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, a plurality of notice icons are digested during the period from when the second symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the second symbol variation display is completed. Since there are cases where a plurality of effects are performed, the effect of the effects may be improved.

  Here, in the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display is finished, only a plurality of notice icons may be consumed. In addition to a plurality of notice icons, there may be items that are digested in a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the second symbol variation display is ended. In addition, in the period from when the second symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the second symbol variation display is finished, a plurality of notice icons may be necessarily consumed. A plurality of notice icons may not be digested during the period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends.

  In addition, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed only during a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends. A plurality of notice icons may be consumed even during a period other than the period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends.

In addition, when the fifth notice icon [for example, the notice icon shown in FIG. 18 or the notice icon I21 for “house”, etc.] of the displayed notice icons is digested, the first movable icon It is configured so that the production is not executed,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, when the fifth notice icon of the displayed notice icons is digested, it may be configured such that only the first movable effect is not executed, or among the displayed notice icons. When the fifth notice icon is digested, a movable effect other than the first movable effect may not be executed. In addition, when the fifth notice icon of the displayed notice icons is digested, the first movable effect may be configured not to be executed, or the first notice icon displayed. It may be configured such that the first movable effect may be executed when the five notice icons are digested.

  In addition, the first movable effect may be configured not to be executed only when the fifth notice icon of the displayed notice icons is digested, or the fifth notice icon displayed. Even when the five notice icons are not digested, the first movable effect may be configured not to be executed.

In addition, “the operation means [for example, the production button 136 etc.] that can be operated by the player,
The first movable means is means for moving the operating means,
The first movable effect refers to the mode of the operation means from the first mode [for example, the default position shown in FIG. 52 (12)] to the second mode [for example, FIG. 52 (17). It is an effect that changes to a projecting position etc.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, there is a case where the change of the operation means is notified by the notice icon, so that the operation means may be noted.

  Here, the operation means may be operable only by the player, or may be operable by other than the player. Further, it may be operated by the player, or may not be operated by the player.

  Further, the first movable means may be movable only the operation means, or may be movable other than the operation means. Further, the first movable means may necessarily move the operating means or may not move the operating means.

In addition, it includes “second movable means [for example, a family crest member shown in FIG. 44 (d4-2)],
The second movable means is a means capable of executing a second movable effect [for example, a family crest drop effect shown in FIG. 44 (d4-2)],
The second movable effect may be executed when a sixth notice icon [for example, notice icon I21 for “house”, etc.] of the displayed notice icons is digested. ing,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, the variety of effects by the movable means becomes abundant, and the interest may be improved.

  Here, the second movable means may be capable of executing only the second movable effect, or may be capable of executing a movable effect other than the second movable effect. Further, the second movable means may necessarily execute the second movable effect, or may not execute the second movable effect.

  Further, when the sixth notice icon among the displayed notice icons is digested, only the second movable effect may be executed, or the displayed notice icon may be displayed. When the sixth notice icon is digested, a movable effect other than the second movable effect may also be executed. Further, when the sixth notice icon of the displayed notice icons is digested, the second movable effect may be configured to be executed without fail. Of the displayed notice icons, When the sixth notice icon is digested, the second movable effect may not be executed.

  Further, the second movable effect may be executed only when the sixth notice icon of the displayed notice icons is digested, or the displayed notice icon is displayed. Of these, the second movable effect may be executed even when the sixth notice icon is not digested.

In addition, “Lack of symbol variation display to be prefetched (hereinafter referred to as“ fourth symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display shown in FIG. 20 (21) to FIG. 23 (66), The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started during a period from when the display of the fourth symbol variation display is ended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends (for example, FIG. 19). As shown in (2) to FIG. 23 (66), four notice icons are stocked from when the symbol variation display that is a prefetch target is suspended until the symbol variation display that is a prefetch target ends. ],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game machine, even if the notice icon is displayed, it is not always a big hit, and there is a case where it can be enjoyed until the symbol variation display to be prefetched is finished.

  Here, only the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is completed. In the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is ended, display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. In addition, in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be surely started, The display of a plurality of notice icons may not be started in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is completed.

  In addition, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started only during the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends. The display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in a period other than the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends.

In addition, after the fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIG. 20 (21) to FIG. In the period until the end of the display of the four symbol variation displays, the plurality of notice icons may be digested [for example, as shown in FIGS. For example, four notice icons are digested from the time a symbol variation display is suspended until the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is completed]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, even if the notice icon is digested, it is not necessarily a big hit, and there is a case where it can be enjoyed until the symbol variation display to be prefetched is finished.

  Here, only a plurality of notice icons may be digested during the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends. In the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is finished, there may be cases where other than the plurality of notice icons are digested. In addition, in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is completed, a plurality of notice icons may be necessarily consumed. A plurality of notice icons may not be digested during a period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends.

  In addition, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed only during a period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends. A plurality of notice icons may be consumed even in a period other than the period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends.

In addition, “hold display means [for example, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]
The hold display means is a means capable of displaying the number of displays corresponding to the number of the start of the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “hold number”) [for example, the hold icon shown in FIG. In the display area 281, the number of hold icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display in FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the hold display means may be capable of displaying only the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds. . In addition, the hold display means may always display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds, or may not display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds.

In addition, “the notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of holds depending on the number displayed [for example, the notice icon shown in FIG. 52 (the notice icon I9 for a thousand boxes, the notice icon I31 for a drink, etc.) Is not an icon indicating the number of operations for which the symbol variation display of Special Figure 1 is suspended],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, there is a case where it is possible to perform an effect regardless of the number of holds.

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
“A game machine provided with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]
One of the plural types of displays is a notice icon [for example, each notice icon shown in FIG. 18 (a), FIG. 18 (b), etc.]
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a display mode according to the type,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice display,
Jackpot symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching (hereinafter, “second symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display that is a jackpot based on the second hold that is the target of prefetching shown in FIG. 54 (1), etc.]” ")" Is suspended, and display of a plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter referred to as "plural notice icons") is started in a period from the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. [For example, as shown in FIG. 19 (2) to FIG. 23 (66), a notice icon is displayed in a period from when the symbol variation display to be prefetched is suspended until the symbol variation display ends. In the area 285, two hat notice icons I6, a thousand car box notice icon I9, and a fan notice icon I10 are displayed.]
One of the plural types of displays is a notice icon display suggestion display [For example, as shown in FIG. 54 (2) to FIG. ],
The notice icon display suggestion display is a display that suggests that display of the notice icon may be started.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  In the conventional game machine, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game machine, it is possible to realize a game machine characterized by the display means.

  Also, according to this game machine, there is a case where it is suggested in advance that the display of the notice icon may be started, so that the process until the notice icon is displayed may be enjoyed.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the notice icon or may be capable of displaying other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may always display the notice icon or may not display the notice icon.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the notice icon display suggestion display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the notice icon display suggestion display. In addition, the display means may always display the notice icon display suggestion display, or may not display the notice icon display suggestion display.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only as a prefetch notice display, or may be other than the prefetch notice display. Further, the notice icon may be displayed as a prefetch notice display or may not be displayed as a prefetch notice display.

  In addition, during the period from when the second symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the second symbol variation display ends, only the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started, In the period from when the second symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the second symbol variation display is ended, display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. In addition, during the period from when the second symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the second symbol variation display is ended, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be surely started. The display of a plurality of notice icons may not be started in the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends.

  Also, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started only during the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends. The display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in a period other than the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the second symbol variation display is ended.

  In addition, the notice icon display suggestion display may be capable of suggesting that the display of the notice icon may be started, or other than the notice icon display may be started. It may be suggestable. In addition, the notice icon display suggestion display may always suggest that the display of the notice icon may be started, or may not suggest that the display of the notice icon may be started. There may be.

In addition, after the second symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display that becomes a big hit based on the second suspension that is the prefetch target shown in FIG. 54 (1)] is suspended, In the period until the display of the symbol variation display is completed, the plurality of notice icons may be digested [for example, as shown in FIGS. 19 (2) to 23 (66), it is a target of prefetching. During the period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the symbol variation display is finished, the two hat announcement icons I6, the thousand box announcement icon I9 and the fan announcement icon displayed in the announcement icon display area 285 are digested. Etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, a plurality of notice icons are digested during the period from when the second symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the second symbol variation display is completed. Since there are cases where a plurality of effects are performed, the effect of the effects may be improved.

  Here, in the period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display is finished, only a plurality of notice icons may be consumed. In addition to a plurality of notice icons, there may be items that are digested in a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the second symbol variation display is ended. In addition, in the period from when the second symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the second symbol variation display is finished, a plurality of notice icons may be necessarily consumed. A plurality of notice icons may not be digested during the period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends.

  In addition, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed only during a period from when the second symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends. A plurality of notice icons may be consumed even during a period other than the period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the second symbol variation display ends.

In addition, “the notice icon display suggestion display is a display that may be displayed over a plurality of symbol variation displays [for example, as shown in FIG. 54 (2) to FIG. Etc., a notice that the notice icon will be displayed by Tono-sama over the symbol change display of
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, the notice icon display suggestion display may be displayed over a plurality of symbol variation displays, and thus the process until the notice icon is displayed may be enjoyed.

  Here, the notice icon display suggestion display may be displayed only over a plurality of symbol variation displays, or may be displayed over a symbol variation display other than a plurality of symbol variation displays. It may be a thing which may be. Further, the notice icon display suggestion display may be always displayed over a plurality of symbol variation displays, or may not be displayed over a plurality of symbol variation displays.

Further, the display of the notice icon display suggestion display is ended during the display of the symbol variation display displayed before the second symbol variation display [for example, FIG. 54 (2). ~ As shown in Fig. 5 (5), the notice that the notice icon by Tono-sama will be displayed ends before the symbol change display that is the target of prefetching is started, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, the notice icon display suggestion display ends before the symbol variation display to be prefetched starts, so there is a case where it is possible to concentrate on the symbol variation to be prefetched.

  Here, during the display of the symbol variation display that is displayed before the second symbol variation display, only the display of the notice icon display suggestion display may be configured to end, or the second symbol variation may be configured. During the display of the symbol fluctuation display displayed before the display, the display other than the display of the notice icon display suggestion display may be terminated. Further, the display of the notice icon display suggestion display may always be ended during the display of the symbol variation display displayed before the second symbol variation display, or the second symbol variation display may be configured. The display of the notice icon display suggestion display may not end during the display of the symbol variation display that is displayed before.

  Further, the display of the notice icon display suggestion display may be terminated only during the display of the symbol variation display displayed before the second symbol variation display, or the second symbol variation display may be configured. The display of the notice icon display suggestion display may be terminated even when the symbol variation display that is displayed before is not being displayed.

In addition, “the notice icon display suggestion display is a display that may suggest that display of at least one of the third number [for example, three, etc.] of the notice icons may be started. [For example, as shown in FIG. 56 (a1-4), in the Amida production, display of at least one of the hat notice icon I6, the fan notice icon I10, and the thousand box notice icon I9 may be started. Etc.)
The third number is a number of 2 or more.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, since at least one of the previously suggested notice icons may be displayed, the player can grasp which notice icon may be displayed. There is a case where it is possible to entertain the symbol variation in which the notice icon is displayed.

  Here, the notice icon display suggestion display may indicate only that the display of at least one of the third number of notice icons may be started, or the third icon There may be a case where the display may indicate other than the display of at least one of the number of notice icons. Further, the notice icon display suggestion display may necessarily indicate that display of at least one of the third number of notice icons may be started, or the third number of notice icons may be started. There may be cases where it does not indicate that display of at least one of the cases may start.

In addition, the display of at least one of the third number of the notice icons suggested to be displayed by the notice icon display suggestion display may be started [for example, FIG. 56 (a1-1) to (a-6) in the figure, as a result of the Amida production, the hat's notice icon I6 is displayed in the notice icon display area 285, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, only the display of at least one of the third number of notice icons suggested to be displayed by the notice icon display suggestion display may be started. A display other than the display of at least one of the third number of notice icons suggested that the display may be started by the icon display suggestion display may be started. In addition, it may be configured such that display of at least one of the third number of notice icons indicated that the notice may be started by the notice icon display suggestion display is surely started. There may be a case where display of at least one of the third number of notice icons indicated that display may be started by the icon display suggestion display may not be started.

In addition, “Lack of symbol variation display to be prefetched (hereinafter referred to as“ fourth symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display shown in FIG. 20 (21) to FIG. 23 (66), The display of the plurality of notice icons may be started during a period from when the display of the fourth symbol variation display is ended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends (for example, FIG. 19). As shown in (2) to FIG. 23 (66), four notice icons are stocked from when the symbol variation display that is a prefetch target is suspended until the symbol variation display that is a prefetch target ends. ],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game machine, even if the notice icon is displayed, it is not always a big hit, and there is a case where it can be enjoyed until the symbol variation display to be prefetched is finished.

  Here, only the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is completed. In the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is ended, display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started. In addition, in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be surely started, The display of a plurality of notice icons may not be started in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is completed.

  In addition, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started only during the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends. The display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in a period other than the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends.

In addition, after the fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIG. 20 (21) to FIG. In the period until the end of the display of the four symbol variation displays, the plurality of notice icons may be digested [for example, as shown in FIGS. For example, four notice icons are digested from the time a symbol variation display is suspended until the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is completed]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, even if the notice icon is digested, it is not necessarily a big hit, and there is a case where it can be enjoyed until the symbol variation display to be prefetched is finished.

  Here, only a plurality of notice icons may be digested during the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends. In the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is finished, there may be cases where other than the plurality of notice icons are digested. In addition, in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is completed, a plurality of notice icons may be necessarily consumed. A plurality of notice icons may not be digested during a period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends.

  In addition, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed only during a period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends. A plurality of notice icons may be consumed even in a period other than the period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends.

In addition, “hold display means [for example, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]
The hold display means is a means capable of displaying the number of displays corresponding to the number of the start of the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “hold number”) [for example, the hold icon shown in FIG. In the display area 281, the number of hold icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display in FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the hold display means may be capable of displaying only the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds. . In addition, the hold display means may always display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds, or may not display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds.

In addition, “the notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of holds depending on the number displayed. [For example, the notice icon shown in FIG. 54 (the hat notice icon I6, etc.) It ’s not an icon that shows the number of symbols that are suspended, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, there is a case where it is possible to perform an effect regardless of the number of holds.

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
“A game machine provided with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]
One of the plural types of displays is a notice icon [for example, each notice icon shown in FIG. 18 (a), FIG. 18 (b), etc.]
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a display mode according to the type,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a first look-ahead notice display,
Jackpot symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching (hereinafter referred to as “second symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display that becomes jackpot based on the third hold that is the target of prefetching shown in FIG. 57 (2), etc.]] ”) Is suspended, the display of symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as“ first symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display shown in FIG. 57 (4) to FIG. 13 (13)] ”). May start,
A plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter referred to as “plural notice icons”) are displayed in a period from the start of the display of the first symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. The display may start [for example, as shown in FIG. 19 (4) to FIG. 23 (66), the symbol variation display that starts after the symbol variation display that is a big hit as a prefetch target is suspended. Two hat notice icons I6, a thousand box notice icon I9, and a fan notice icon I10 are displayed from the start of the display until the end of the symbol variation display that is the target of the prefetching. etc],
The first symbol variation display is a symbol variation display that is displayed next to the symbol variation display that is displayed when the second symbol variation display is suspended.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  In the conventional game machine, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game machine, it is possible to realize a game machine characterized by the display means.

  In addition, according to this gaming machine, the symbol variation display that is displayed when the hold display related to the second symbol variation display to be prefetched is displayed can be enjoyed to the end, but is started thereafter. In some cases, the display of the notice icon can be enjoyed as a pre-reading notice display related to the second design fluctuation display to be prefetched from the displayed symbol fluctuation display.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the notice icon or may be capable of displaying other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may always display the notice icon or may not display the notice icon.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only as the first prefetch notice display, or may be other than the first prefetch notice display. The notice icon may be displayed as the first prefetch notice display or may not be displayed as the first prefetch notice display.

  In addition, only the first symbol variation display may be started after the second symbol variation display is suspended, or the first symbol variation display is suspended after the second symbol variation display is suspended. There may be a case where the symbol variation display other than the display display is also started. In addition, the display of the first symbol variation display may always be started after the second symbol variation display is suspended, or the first symbol variation display is displayed after the second symbol variation display is suspended. It may not start.

  In addition, only the display of the first symbol variation display may be started only after the second symbol variation display is suspended, or the second symbol variation display may be started other than after the second symbol variation display is suspended. There may be a case where only the display of one symbol variation display is started.

  Further, only the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in the period from the start of the display of the first symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. The display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started in the period from the start of the display of one symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. In addition, the display of a plurality of notice icons may always be started during the period from the start of the display of the first symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, or the first symbol variation display. There may be a case where the display of the plurality of notice icons is not started in the period from the start of the display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display.

  In addition, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started only in the period from the start of the display of the first symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. The display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in a period other than the period from the start of the display of one symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display.

In addition, in the period from the start of the display of the first symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, the plurality of notice icons may be digested [for example, As shown in FIG. 19 (4) to FIG. 23 (66), the pre-reading target is displayed after the display of the symbol variation display that is started after the symbol variation display that is the target of prefetching is suspended. Until the end of the symbol variation display that is a big hit, the two hat notice icon I6, the thousand car box notice icon I9, and the fan notice icon I10 are digested, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game machine, while the on-hold display related to the second symbol variation display to be prefetched is displayed, the symbol variation display that is displayed can be enjoyed to the end, but is started thereafter. In some cases, it is possible to enjoy digestion of the notice icon as a pre-reading notice display related to the second design change display to be pre-read from the symbol change display.

  Here, only a plurality of notice icons may be consumed in the period from the start of the display of the first symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display. In the period from the start of the display of one symbol variation display to the end of the display of the second symbol variation display, there may be cases where other than the plurality of notice icons are digested. Also, during the period from when the first symbol variation display is started until the second symbol variation display is terminated, a plurality of notice icons may be necessarily digested, or the first symbol variation display A plurality of notice icons may not be digested during the period from the start of display until the end of the display of the second symbol variation display.

  In addition, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed only during a period from the start of the first symbol variation display to the end of the second symbol variation display. A plurality of notice icons may be consumed even in a period other than the period from the start of the display of the symbol variation display until the end of the display of the second symbol variation display.

In addition, “hold display means [for example, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]
The hold display means is a means capable of displaying the number of displays corresponding to the number of the start of the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “hold number”) [for example, the hold icon shown in FIG. In the display area 281, the number of hold icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display in FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the hold display means may be capable of displaying only the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds. . In addition, the hold display means may always display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds, or may not display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds.

In addition, “the notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of holdings depending on the number displayed. [For example, the notice icon shown in FIG. 57 (the hat notice icon I6, etc.) It ’s not an icon that shows the number of symbols that are suspended, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, there is a case where it is possible to perform an effect regardless of the number of holds.

In addition, when the second symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display that is a big hit based on the third suspension that is the target of prefetching shown in FIG. 57 (2)] is suspended, Display of the hold display [for example, display of the third hold icon h13 shown in FIG. 57 (2), etc.] is started.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, it may be recognized that the second symbol variation display is suspended.

  Here, the display of the second hold display may be started only when the second symbol variation display is suspended, and the second symbol variation display may be started even when the second symbol variation display is not suspended. Display of the hold display may be started. In addition, when the second symbol variation display is held, the display of the second hold display may be started without fail, and when the second symbol variation display is held, the second hold display is displayed. It does not have to be started.

In addition, as the second pre-reading notice display, the second hold display is displayed in the second pre-reading display form [for example, the pre-reading notice display form (savohani display form) shown in FIG. 57 (2)]. May be
In the symbol variation display displayed when the second symbol variation display is suspended, the second suspension display may be displayed in the second prefetch display mode [for example, FIG. ), The third hold icon h13 is displayed in the pre-reading notice display mode (savohani display mode) when the symbol variation display that is a big hit based on the third hold that is the target of pre-reading is put on hold. Display etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, variations of the pre-reading notice display increase and the interest may be improved.

  Here, as the second prefetch notice display, the second hold display may be displayed only in the second prefetch display form, or as the second prefetch notice display, the second hold display may be displayed. It may be displayed in display modes other than the second prefetch display mode. In addition, as the second prefetch notice display, the second hold display may be always displayed in the second prefetch display form, and as the second prefetch notice display, the second hold display is the second prefetch display. It may not be displayed in a mode.

  In addition, in the symbol variation display that is displayed when the second symbol variation display is suspended, the second suspension display may be displayed only in the second prefetch display mode. In the symbol variation display that is displayed when the symbol variation display is held, the second hold display may be displayed in a display mode other than the second prefetch display mode. In addition, in the symbol variation display that is displayed when the second symbol variation display is suspended, the second suspended display may be always displayed in the second look-ahead display mode, or the second symbol variation display. In the symbol variation display displayed when is held, the second hold display may not be displayed in the second prefetch display mode.

  In addition, only in the symbol variation display that is displayed when the second symbol variation display is suspended, the second pending display may be displayed in the second prefetch display mode. Even in the symbol variation display other than the symbol variation display displayed when the symbol variation display is held, the second hold display may be displayed in the second look-ahead display mode.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of displays is a third prefetch notice display [for example, preproduction mode display shown in FIGS. 58 (b2) to (b3), etc.],
The third pre-reading notice display is a display that may be displayed after the second symbol variation display is suspended [for example, as shown in FIG. 58 (b1) to FIG. 58 (b3). Thus, the pre-reading mode effect display is started after the symbol variation display that becomes a big hit based on the third hold that is the target of pre-reading is suspended],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, since the variation of the pre-reading notice display increases, the interest may be improved.

  Here, the third look-ahead notice display may be displayed only after the second symbol variation display is suspended, or after the second symbol variation display is suspended. In addition to the above, display may be started. In addition, the third pre-reading notice display may always be started after the second symbol variation display is put on hold, or the display is not started after the second symbol change display is put on hold. There may be cases.

In addition, the “symbol change display that is the target of pre-reading (hereinafter referred to as“ fourth symbol change display [for example, the symbol change that is lost based on the third hold that is the pre-read target shown in FIG. ")" Is suspended, and the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as "third symbol variation display [for example, symbol variation display shown in Fig. 57 (4) to Fig. 13 (13)]". ) May start,
In the period from the start of the display of the third symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, the display of the plurality of notice icons may start [for example, As shown in FIGS. 19 (4) to 23 (66), the display of the symbol variation display that is started after the symbol variation display that is the target of the prefetching is suspended is started. By the time the symbol change display that causes a certain loss ends, two hat notice icons I6, a thousand box notice icon I9, and a fan notice icon I10 are displayed.
The third symbol variation display is a symbol variation display that is displayed next to the symbol variation display that is displayed when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game machine, even if the notice icon is displayed, it is not always a big hit, and there is a case where it can be enjoyed until the symbol variation display to be prefetched is finished.

  In addition, only the third symbol variation display may be started after the fourth symbol variation display is suspended, or the third symbol variation display may be started after the fourth symbol variation display is suspended. There may be a case where the symbol variation display other than the display display is also started. In addition, the display of the third symbol variation display may be started after the fourth symbol variation display is suspended, or the third symbol variation display is displayed after the fourth symbol variation display is suspended. It may not start.

  In addition, only the display of the third symbol variation display may be started only after the fourth symbol variation display is put on hold. Only the display of the third symbol variation display may be started.

  Further, only the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in the period from the start of the display of the third symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display. Display other than the display of the plurality of notice icons may be started in a period from the start of the display of the third symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display. In addition, the display of a plurality of notice icons may always be started during the period from the start of the display of the third symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display, or the third symbol variation display. There may be a case where the display of the plurality of notice icons is not started during the period from the start of the display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display.

  In addition, the display of a plurality of notice icons may be started only during the period from the start of the display of the third symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display. The display of a plurality of notice icons may be started in a period other than the period from the start of the display of the third symbol variation display to the end of the display of the fourth symbol variation display.

In addition, after the fourth symbol variation display [for example, the symbol variation display shown in FIG. 20 (21) to FIG. In the period until the end of the display of the four symbol variation displays, the plurality of notice icons may be digested [for example, as shown in FIGS. A game stand characterized in that, for example, four notice icons are digested after a symbol variation display is suspended until the symbol variation display to be prefetched is terminated. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, even if the notice icon is digested, it is not necessarily a big hit, and there is a case where it can be enjoyed until the symbol variation display to be prefetched is finished.

  Here, only a plurality of notice icons may be digested during the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends. In the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is put on hold until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is finished, there may be cases where other than the plurality of notice icons are digested. In addition, in the period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display is completed, a plurality of notice icons may be necessarily consumed. A plurality of notice icons may not be digested during a period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends.

  In addition, a plurality of notice icons may be consumed only during a period from when the fourth symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends. A plurality of notice icons may be consumed even in a period other than the period from when the symbol variation display is suspended until the display of the fourth symbol variation display ends.

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
“A game machine equipped with display means [for example, a first decorative symbol display device 208L, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.]
The display means is means capable of displaying a notice icon [for example, each notice icon shown in FIG. 18 (a), FIG. 18 (b), each notice icon shown in FIG. 72 (d), etc.]
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice display,
The notice icon is an icon different from a hold icon [for example, hold icons h11, h12, h13, etc. displayed in the hold icon display area shown in FIG. 69]
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One of the plural types of displays is a first display [for example, a character display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4 shown in FIG. 69],
The first display is an explanation display [for example, a display of “with notice icon digestion ...” displayed in the tutorial display section TT4 shown in FIG. 69 (a1), a tutorial display shown in FIG. 62 (a). The display of “Tosama is a general of Yatsushiro” displayed in the part TT1, “Panda is the master of Tosama” displayed in the tutorial display part TT1 shown in FIG.
The first display is a display displayed in a first display area [for example, the tutorial display unit TT4 shown in FIG. 69] in the display means,
When the notice icon is displayed, it is an icon displayed in the first display area [For example, as shown in FIG. 69 (a7), the tutorial display unit TT4 includes a swordsman notice icon I62. And a chance up notice icon I63 is displayed (stocked)],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  In the conventional game machine, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game machine, it is possible to realize a game machine characterized by the display means.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the notice icon, or may be capable of displaying other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may always display the notice icon or may not display the notice icon.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only as a prefetch notice display, or may be other than the prefetch notice display. Further, the notice icon may be displayed as a prefetch notice display or may not be displayed as a prefetch notice display.

  Moreover, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  The first display may be displayable only in the first display area of the display means, or may be displayed in a display area other than the first display area of the display means. Also good. In addition, the first display may be always displayed in the first display area of the display unit, or may not be displayed in the first display area of the display unit.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only in the first display area when displayed, or may be displayed in a display area other than the first display area when displayed. It may be a thing. In addition, the notice icon may be displayed in the first display area when it is displayed, or may not be displayed in the first display area when displayed. .

In the state where the notice icon is displayed, the first display is not displayed. [For example, as shown in FIG. 69 (a7), in the state where the notice icon is displayed on the tutorial display portion TT4, No explanation is displayed in the tutorial display section TT4]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first display may not be displayed only in a state where the notice icon is displayed, or may be displayed in a state other than the state where the notice icon is displayed. Further, the first display may not necessarily be displayed when the notice icon is displayed, or may be displayed with the notice icon displayed.

In addition, when the notice icon is digested, the display of the first display may resume [for example, among the notice icons shown in FIG. When all the notice icons are exhausted, the explanation display resumes]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, when the notice icon is digested, only the display of the first display may be resumed. When the notice icon is digested, the display other than the display of the first display is resumed. There may be. Further, when the notice icon is digested, the display of the first display may be always resumed, and when the notice icon is digested, the display of the first display may not be resumed.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a second display [for example, a character display of“ extreme heat ”in the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 68 (d), etc.]
The second display is a notice display,
The second display is a display that is displayed in the first display area when displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 68 (d), the tutorial display unit TT1 displays “high heat”. Text display etc.],
The explanation display is an explanation display relating to the notice icon [for example, a character display such as “Digest notice icon ...” in the tutorial display section TT4 shown in FIG. 69 (a1)].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the second display may be displayed only in the first display area when displayed, or may be displayed in a display area other than the first display area when displayed. It may be displayable. In addition, the second display may be displayed in the first display area when it is displayed, or may not be displayed in the first display area when displayed. Also good.

  Further, the explanation display may include only the explanation display regarding the notice icon, or may include a display other than the explanation display concerning the notice icon. The explanation display may necessarily include an explanation display regarding the notice icon, or may not include an explanation display concerning the notice icon.

The display means is a means constituted by a plurality of display means,
One of the plurality of display means is a first display means [for example, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, etc.]
One of the plurality of display means is a second display means [for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, etc.]
One of the plurality of display means is a third display means [for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.]
The first display means is means capable of displaying a symbol variation display,
The second display means is a means capable of displaying an effect display [e.g., a decorative pattern variation display shown in FIG. 66, etc.]
The third display means displays the display in accordance with the display of the second display means [for example, the bomb icon I61 pops out from the treasure box image TR shown in FIGS. 66 (a2) to (a4) and the swordsman notices. Display that icon I62 is stocked, etc.]
The first display area is a display area provided in at least a part of the third display means [For example, as shown in FIG. 66 (a1), the tutorial display unit TT1 has a third decoration. It is arranged below the symbol display device 208N],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the display means may include only the first display means, the second display means, and the third display means, or the first display means, the second display means, and the third display means. You may comprise including display means other than a display means. The display means may include a first display means, a second display means, and a third display means, or the first display means, the second display means, and the third display means. There may be a case in which at least one of the means is not included.

  The first display means may be capable of displaying only the symbol variation display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the symbol variation display. Further, the first display means may always display the symbol variation display, or may not display the symbol variation display.

  In addition, the second display unit may be capable of displaying only the effect display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the effect display. Further, the second display means may always display the effect display, or may not display the effect display.

  Further, the third display means may be capable of displaying only a display that matches the display of the second display means, and can display a display other than the display that matches the display of the second display means. It may be anything. Further, the third display means may always display a display that matches the display of the second display means, or may not display a display that matches the display of the second display means. Also good.

  In addition, the first display area may be provided in a part of the area of the third display means, or may be provided in the entire area of the third display means. .

  In addition, the first display area may be provided only in at least a part of the third display unit, or may be provided in an area other than at least a part of the third display unit. It may be what was made. The first display area may be provided in at least a part of the third display unit, or may not be provided in at least a part of the third display unit. There may be.

In addition, “one of the plural types of displays is a third display [for example, a character display displayed on the stage name display unit ST2 shown in FIG. 69],
The third display is an explanatory display [for example, a display of “castle town stage” displayed in the stage name display section ST2 shown in FIG. 69 (a1), and a stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 63 (c). Display “swordsman reach”, etc.]
The third display is a display displayed in a second display area [for example, the stage name display unit ST2 shown in FIG. 69 (a1)] in the display means,
The notice icon is an icon that may also be displayed in the second display area [For example, as shown in FIG. 69 (a7), the stage name display section ST2 includes a princess notice icon I64. 2 pseudo-announce notice icons I65 are displayed (stock) etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the third display may be displayable only in the second display area of the display means, or may be displayed in a display area other than the second display area of the display means. May be. Further, the third display may be always displayed in the second display area in the display means, or may not be displayed in the second display area in the display means.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only in the second display area, or may be displayed in a display area other than the second display area. Good. Further, the notice icon may be displayed in the second display area without fail, or may not be displayed in the second display area.

In the state where the notice icon is displayed in the second display area, the third display is not displayed. [For example, as shown in FIG. 69 (a7), the notice icon is displayed on the stage name display section ST2. In a state where is displayed, the stage name display is not performed in the stage name display unit ST2, etc.]. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the third display may be one in which the notice icon is displayed only in the second display area and not displayed, or other than the state in which the notice icon is displayed in the second display area. Even in this state, it may not be displayed. In addition, the third display may not be displayed when the notice icon is displayed in the second display area, or may be displayed when the notice icon is displayed in the second display area. It may be done.

In addition, “the first display area is a display area partitioned by a line [for example, as shown in FIG. 69 (a1), the tutorial display unit TT4 is partitioned by a line in a square shape, etc.] ,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first display area may be partitioned only by a line, or may be partitioned including a line other than the line. In addition, the first display area may be necessarily partitioned by a line or may not be partitioned by a line.

In addition, “hold display means [for example, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]
The hold display means is a means capable of displaying a number of displays corresponding to the number of the start of the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “hold number”) [for example, the hold icon shown in FIG. In the display area, the number of hold icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display of Special Figure 1 is held is displayed],
The notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of holds depending on the number displayed (for example, the notice icon (princess notice icon I64, princess notice icon I65, princess notice icon shown in FIG. 69 (a7), The swordsman notice icon I62, the chance up notice icon I63, etc.) are not icons indicating the number of symbol change display operations in FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the hold display means may be capable of displaying only the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds. . In addition, the hold display means may always display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds, or may not display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds.

  According to this game stand, there is a case where it is possible to perform an effect regardless of the number of holds.

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
“A game machine equipped with display means [for example, a first decorative symbol display device 208L, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.]
The display means is means capable of displaying a notice icon [for example, each notice icon shown in FIG. 18 (a), FIG. 18 (b), each notice icon shown in FIG. 72 (d), etc.]
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice display,
The display area [for example, tutorial display section TT4, stage name display section ST2 shown in FIG. 69] in which the notice icon is displayed is displayed in the hold icon [for example, hold icon display area shown in FIG. 69]. A display area different from a display area [for example, the hold icon display area shown in FIG. 69] in which the hold icons h11, h12, h13, etc. are displayed,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One of the plural types of displays is a first display [for example, a character display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4 shown in FIG. 69],
The first display is an explanation display [for example, a display of “with notice icon digestion ...” displayed in the tutorial display section TT4 shown in FIG. 69 (a1), a tutorial display shown in FIG. 62 (a). The display of “Tosama is a general of Yatsushiro” displayed in the part TT1, “Panda is the master of Tosama” displayed in the tutorial display part TT1 shown in FIG.
The first display is a display displayed in the first display area [for example, the tutorial display section TT4 shown in FIG.
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed in the first display area [For example, as shown in FIG. 69 (a9), the tutorial display section TT4 has a chance to increase with the swordsman notice icon I62. The notice icon I63 is displayed (stock) etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  In the conventional game machine, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game machine, it is possible to realize a game machine characterized by the display means.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the notice icon, or may be capable of displaying other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may always display the notice icon or may not display the notice icon.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only as a prefetch notice display, or may be other than the prefetch notice display. Further, the notice icon may be displayed as a prefetch notice display or may not be displayed as a prefetch notice display.

  Moreover, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  Further, the first display may be displayed only in the first display area in the display means when displayed, or in the case of being displayed, other than the first display area in the display means. It may also be displayed in the display area. The first display may be displayed in the first display area of the display means when displayed, or in the first display area of the display means when displayed. It may not be displayed.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only in the first display area, or may be displayed in a display area other than the first display area. Further, the notice icon may be displayed in the first display area, or may not be displayed in the first display area.

In addition, in the state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, the first display is not displayed [For example, as shown in FIG. In the displayed state, the explanation display is not performed in the tutorial display section TT4]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, in the state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, only the first display may not be displayed. In the state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, the first icon is not displayed. No display other than the display may be displayed. In addition, the first display may not be displayed in the state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, and the first icon is not displayed in the state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area. A display may be displayed.

  In addition, the first display may not be displayed only in the state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, or in a state other than the state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, Only the first display may not be displayed.

In addition, when the notice icon is digested, the display of the first display may be resumed. [For example, among the notice icons shown in FIG. When all the notice icons are digested, the explanation display resumes]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, when the notice icon is digested, only the display of the first display may be resumed. When the notice icon is digested, the display other than the display of the first display is resumed. There may be cases. In addition, when the notice icon is digested, the display of the first display may be resumed, and when the notice icon is digested, the display of the first display may not be resumed.

  Further, for example, when the first display is an explanation of the first character, a tenth display that is an explanation display different from the first display may be displayed.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a second display [for example, a character display of“ extreme heat ”in the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. 68 (d), etc.]
The second display is a notice display,
The second display is a display that is displayed in the first display area when displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 68 (d), the tutorial display unit TT1 displays “high heat”. Text display etc.],
The explanation display is an explanation display relating to the notice icon [for example, a character display such as “Digest notice icon ...” in the tutorial display section TT4 shown in FIG. 69 (a1)].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the second display may be displayed only in the first display area when displayed, or may be displayed in a display area other than the first display area when displayed. It may be displayable. In addition, the second display may be displayed in the first display area when it is displayed, or may not be displayed in the first display area when displayed. Also good.

  Further, the explanation display may include only the explanation display regarding the notice icon, or may include a display other than the explanation display concerning the notice icon. The explanation display may necessarily include an explanation display regarding the notice icon, or may not include an explanation display concerning the notice icon.

  The notice display in this description may be one of many notice displays.

  The notice display may be a notice display by displaying characters. On the other hand, the other notice display may be a display by displaying an image.

“One of the plural types of displays is a third display [for example, a character display of“ Gold is hotter than red ”in the balloon portion TT2 shown in FIG. 68 (a1), (A6), a character display of “swordsman reach is hot” in the balloon part TT2, a character display of “when panda intrudes” in the balloon part TT3, etc.]
The third display is an explanatory display,
The display content of the third display is display content different from the display content of the first display,
The third display is a display that is displayed in the second display area of the display means when displayed [for example, the balloon part TT2 and the balloon part TT3 shown in FIG. 68 (a6)]. ,
The second display area is a display area different from the first display area.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the display content of the third display may be partially different from the display content of the first display, or all may be different.

  Further, the third display may be displayed only in the second display area in the display means when displayed, or in the case of being displayed, other than the second display area in the display means. It may also be displayed in the display area. Further, the third display may be displayed in the second display area of the display means when displayed, or in the second display area of the display means when displayed. It may not be displayed.

  Further, the second display area may be partially different from the first display area, or may be entirely different.

In addition, “the third display may be displayed even when the notice icon is displayed in the first display area [for example, as shown in FIG. 68 (a10), Even when the notice icon I62 of the swordsman is displayed on the tutorial display part TT4, the character display “swordsman reach is hot” is displayed on the balloon display part TT2, and “when panda intrudes” is displayed on the balloon display part TT3. Text display etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, even if the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, only the third display may be displayed, or the notice icon is displayed in the first display area. Even if it is in the state, a display other than the third display may be displayed. Even if the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, the third display may be displayed without fail, or the notice icon is displayed in the first display area. However, the third display may not be displayed.

  In addition, the third display may be displayed only when the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, or other than the state in which the notice icon is displayed in the first display area. Even in this state, the third display may be displayed.

  The introduction animation of the notice icon may be displayed in the second display area, and the stock display of the notice icon may not be displayed in the second display area.

  Further, a notice display (second notice display) different from the first notice display may be performed in the second display area. In addition, a notice display and an explanation display may be alternatively displayed.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a fourth display [for example, a character display displayed on the stage name display unit ST2 illustrated in FIG. 69],
The fourth display is an explanatory display [for example, a display of “castle town stage” displayed on the stage name display section ST2 shown in FIG. 69 (a1), and a stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 63 (c). Display “swordsman reach”, etc.]
The display content of the fourth display is display content different from the display content of the first display,
The fourth display is a display displayed in a third display area [for example, the stage name display portion ST2 shown in FIG. 69 (a1)] in the display means,
The third display area is a display area different from the first display area,
In a state where the first number [for example, three, etc.] of the notice icons are displayed in the first display area, the new notice icon may be displayed in the third display area. [For example, when three notice icons are displayed on the tutorial display section TT4 shown in FIG. 69, a new notice icon is displayed on the stage name display section ST2],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the display content of the fourth display may be partially different from the display content of the first display, or all may be different.

  The fourth display may be capable of being displayed only in the third display area of the display means, or may be displayed in a display area other than the third display area of the display means. Also good. Further, the fourth display may be always displayed in the third display area in the display means, or may not be displayed in the third display area in the display means.

  Further, the third display area may be partially different from the first display area, or may be entirely different.

  In the state where the first number of notice icons are displayed in the first display area, a new notice icon may be displayed only in the third display area. In a state where a number of notice icons are displayed in the first display area, a new notice icon may be displayed in a display area other than the third display area. In addition, in a state where the first number of notice icons are displayed in the first display area, a new notice icon may be always displayed in the third display area. In a state where a number of notice icons are displayed in the first display area, a new notice icon may not be displayed in the third display area.

  In addition, a new notice icon may be displayed in the third display area only when the first number of notice icons are displayed in the first display area. Even in a state other than the state where the previous notice icon is displayed in the first display area, the new notice icon may be displayed only in the third display area.

  Here, a type in which a stage name or the like is displayed by a plurality of display means is also included.

In the state where the notice icon is displayed in the third display area, the fourth display is not displayed. [For example, as shown in FIG. 69 (a9), the notice icon is displayed on the stage name display portion ST2. In the state where is displayed, the stage name display is not performed in the stage name display section ST2, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the fourth display may be a state where the notice icon is displayed only in the third display area and not displayed, or other than the state where the notice icon is displayed in the third display area. Even in this state, it may not be displayed. In addition, the fourth display may not necessarily be displayed when the notice icon is displayed in the third display area, or may be displayed when the notice icon is displayed in the third display area. It may be done.

The display means is a means constituted by a plurality of display means,
One of the plurality of display means is a first display means [for example, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, etc.]
One of the plurality of display means is a second display means [for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, etc.]
One of the plurality of display means is a third display means [for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.]
The first display means is means capable of displaying a symbol variation display,
The second display means is a means capable of displaying an effect display [e.g., a decorative pattern variation display shown in FIG. 66, etc.]
The third display means is a display linked with the second display means [for example, a bomb icon I61 pops out from the treasure box image TR shown in FIGS. Is a means that can be displayed, etc.,
The first display area is a display area provided in at least a part of the third display means [For example, as shown in FIG. 66 (a1), the tutorial display unit TT1 has a third decoration. It is arranged below the symbol display device 208N],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the display means may include only the first display means, the second display means, and the third display means, or the first display means, the second display means, and the third display means. You may comprise including display means other than a display means. The display means may include a first display means, a second display means, and a third display means, or the first display means, the second display means, and the third display means. There may be a case in which at least one of the means is not included.

  The first display means may be capable of displaying only the symbol variation display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the symbol variation display. Further, the first display means may always display the symbol variation display, or may not display the symbol variation display.

  In addition, the second display unit may be capable of displaying only the effect display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the effect display. Further, the second display means may always display the effect display, or may not display the effect display.

  Further, the third display means may be capable of displaying only the display linked with the display of the second display means, or can display a display other than the display linked with the display of the second display means. It may be anything. Further, the third display means may always display a display linked with the display of the second display means, or may not display a display linked with the display of the second display means. Also good.

  In addition, the first display area may be provided in a part of the area of the third display means, or may be provided in the entire area of the third display means. .

  In addition, the first display area may be provided only in at least a part of the third display unit, or may be provided in an area other than at least a part of the third display unit. It may be what was made. The first display area may be provided in at least a part of the third display unit, or may not be provided in at least a part of the third display unit. There may be.

In addition, “the first display area is a display area partitioned by a line [for example, as shown in FIG. 69 (a1), the tutorial display unit TT4 is partitioned by a line in a square shape, etc.] ,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first display area may be partitioned only by a line, or may be partitioned including a line other than the line. In addition, the first display area may be necessarily partitioned by a line or may not be partitioned by a line.

  Also, the second display area may be partitioned by a line, and the third display area may also be partitioned by a line.

In addition, “hold display means [for example, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, the decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]
The hold display means is a means capable of displaying a number of displays corresponding to the number of the start of the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “hold number”) [for example, the hold icon shown in FIG. In the display area, the number of hold icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display of Special Figure 1 is held is displayed],
The notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of holds depending on the number displayed. [For example, the notice icon shown in FIG. 69 (a9) (the princess notice icon I64, the pseudo-announce notice icon I65, The swordsman notice icon I62, the chance up notice icon I63, etc.) are not icons indicating the number of symbol change display operations in FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the hold display means may be capable of displaying only the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds. . In addition, the hold display means may always display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds, or may not display the number of displays corresponding to the number of holds.

  Note that there may be a case where the number of holdings and the number of notice icons coincide.

  Further, the maximum hold number and the maximum stock number of the notice icon may be the same or different.

  According to this game stand, there is a case where it is possible to perform an effect regardless of the number of holds.

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
A game machine comprising display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first decorative symbol display device 208L, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.]
The display means is means capable of displaying a notice icon [for example, each notice icon shown in FIG. 18 (a), FIG. 18 (b), each notice icon shown in FIG. 72 (d), etc.]
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice display,
The notice icon is an icon different from a hold icon [for example, hold icons h11, h12, h13 etc. displayed in the hold icon display area shown in FIG. 74]
The notice icon is configured to be displayed in multiple types of display modes,
One of the plurality of types of display modes is a first display mode [for example, a display mode of the swordsman notice icon I62 displayed in the notice icon display area shown in FIG. 74 (l)]. ,
One of the plurality of types of display modes is a second display mode [for example, display of the enlarged swordsman notice icon I62 displayed in the notice icon display frame YF shown in FIG. 74 (i). Aspect etc.],
The size of the notice icon is larger in the second display form than in the first display form [for example, from the swordsman notice icon I62 displayed in the notice icon display area shown in FIG. 74 (l). In addition, the swordsman notice icon I62 displayed in the notice icon display frame YF shown in FIG. 74 (i) is larger in size, etc.]
The notice icon is an icon displayed in the second display mode when stocked [For example, as shown in FIG. 74 (i), when the swordsman notice icon I62 is stocked, The notice icon I62 of the swordsman is enlarged, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  According to the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game stand, it is possible to provide a game stand having a feature in the display means.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the notice icon, or may be capable of displaying other than the notice icon. Further, the display means may always display the notice icon or may not display the notice icon.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only as a prefetch notice display, or may be displayed as other than the prefetch notice display. Further, the notice icon may be displayed as a prefetch notice display or may not be displayed as a prefetch notice display.

  In addition, the notice icon may be displayed only in a plurality of types of display modes, or may be displayed in other than a plurality of types of display modes. In addition, the notice icon may be displayed in a plurality of types of display modes, or may not be displayed in a plurality of types of display modes.

  In addition, the size of the notice icon may necessarily be larger in the second display form than the first display form, and the notice icon may be larger in the second display form than in the first display form. There may be no cases.

  The notice icon may be displayed only in the second display mode when stocked, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the second display mode when stocked. May be. Further, the notice icon may be displayed in the second display mode when stocked, or may not be displayed in the second display mode when stocked.

Further, “the notice icon is an icon that may be displayed in the first display mode after being displayed in the second display mode [for example, the swordsman icon I62 is shown in FIG. ), And is displayed in a normal display mode as shown in FIG. 74 (l)].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the notice icon may be displayed only in the first display mode after being displayed in the second display mode, or after being displayed in the second display mode. Thus, it may be displayed in a display mode other than the first display mode. The notice icon may be displayed in the first display mode after being displayed in the second display mode, or may be displayed in the second display mode. The display mode may not be displayed.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed in the first display mode only after being displayed in the second display mode, or other than after being displayed in the second display mode. In addition, it may be displayed in the first display mode. The notice icon may be displayed in the first display mode after being displayed in the second display mode, or may be displayed in the second display mode. It may be displayed in the display mode.

The display means is a means capable of displaying a decorative symbol variation display. [For example, as shown in FIG. 74 (a), the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays a decorative symbol variation display. etc],
The notice icon is an icon that does not overlap with the decorative symbol variation display in the first display form [for example, a normal display form displayed in the notice icon display area as shown in FIG. The pseudo-announcement icon I65 and the swordsman notice icon I62 are not overlapped with the decorative pattern being displayed in a variable manner, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the decorative symbol variation display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the decorative symbol variation display. Further, the display means may always display the decorative symbol variation display, or may not display the decorative symbol variation display.

  Further, the notice icon may not be overlapped with the decorative symbol variation display only in the first display mode, or may be not overlapped with the decorative symbol variation display in any display mode other than the first display mode. May be. Further, the notice icon may not necessarily overlap with the decorative symbol variation display in the first display mode, or may overlap with the decorative symbol variation display in the first display mode. .

Further, “the decorative symbol variation display is a display that does not overlap the notification icon of the first display mode [for example, as shown in FIG. It is not overlapped with the pseudo-recurring notice icon I65 or the swordsman notice icon I62 in the normal display mode displayed in the display area]
The decorative symbol variation display is a display that may be overlapped with the notification icon in the second display mode [for example, as shown in FIG. Etc., which are overlapped with the pseudo-continuous notice icon I65 and the swordsman notice icon I62 of the enlarged display mode displayed in the icon display frame YF],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the decorative symbol variation display may not be overlapped only with the notice icon of the first display form, or may be non-overlapped other than the notice icon of the first display form. . In addition, the decorative symbol variation display may not necessarily overlap with the notice icon of the first display mode, or may overlap with the notice icon of the first display mode.

  In addition, the decorative symbol variation display may be overlapped only with the notice icon of the second display mode, or may be overlapped with other than the notice icon of the second display form. There may be something. Further, the decorative symbol variation display may be always overlapped with the notice icon of the second display mode, or may not be overlapped with the notice icon of the second display mode.

In addition, “the notice icon is an icon displayed in the second display mode even when digested,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the notice icon may be displayed in the second display mode only when digested, or may be displayed in the second display mode other than when digested. There may be. Further, the notice icon may be displayed in the second display mode when digested, or may not be displayed in the second display mode when digested.

Further, “the display means is a means capable of displaying the notice icon in a hold display area [for example, a notice icon display area in the UI unit UI1 shown in FIG. 74 (a)].
The notice icon is an icon displayed in the first display mode when displayed in the hold display area [For example, as shown in FIG. 74 (l), the notice icon is displayed in the notice icon display area. The pseudo-continuous notice icon I65 and the swordsman notice icon I62 are displayed in a normal display mode, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying the notice icon only in the hold display area, or may be capable of displaying the notice icon in an area other than the hold display area. Further, the display means may always display the notice icon in the hold display area, or may not display the notice icon in the hold display area.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed only in the first display mode when displayed in the hold display area, and other than the first display mode when displayed in the hold display area. The display mode may be displayed. The notice icon may be displayed in the first display mode when displayed in the hold display area, or in the first display mode when displayed in the hold display area. It may not be displayed.

  The notice icon may be displayed in the first display mode only when displayed in the hold display area, or the first display mode may be displayed in a case other than when displayed in the hold display area. May be displayed.

Further, “when the notice icon is newly stocked, at least a part of the notice icon displayed in the hold display area is displayed in the second display mode [for example, FIG. 74 (i) As shown in FIG. 4, when the swordsman notice icon I62 is stocked, a part of the pseudo-continuous notice icon I65 displayed in the notice icon display area is displayed in an enlarged display mode, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, when the notice icon is newly stocked, only a part of the notice icon displayed in the hold display area may be displayed in the second display mode, or the notice icon is newly stocked. In this case, all the notice icons displayed in the hold display area may be displayed in the second display mode. Further, when a notice icon is newly stocked, at least a part of the notice icon displayed in the hold display area may be displayed in the second display mode, or the notice icon is newly stocked. In some cases, at least a part of the notice icon displayed in the hold display area may not be displayed in the second display mode.

In addition, the second display mode is a display mode in which the preview icon of the first display mode is enlarged [for example, the swordsman's preview icon I62 of the enlarged display mode shown in FIG. 74A is an enlarged display of the notice icon I62 of the swordsman in the normal display mode shown in FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the second display mode may be a display mode in which only the notice icon in the first display mode is enlarged, or a display mode in which other than the notice icon in the first display mode is also enlarged. Also good. The second display mode may be a display mode in which the notice icon in the first display mode is necessarily enlarged, or may be a display form in which the notice icon in the first display mode is not enlarged.

The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice display [eg, pseudo-continuous effect, freeze effect, stop symbol notice, stage change effect, reach transition effect, premier notice effect, re-variable effect, etc.] Yes,
The display means can display a plurality of types of the notice icons [for example, each notice icon shown in FIG. 18A, FIG. 18B, each notice icon shown in FIG. 72D, etc.]. And
When the notice icon is digested, the notice display of a type corresponding to the kind of the digested notice icon may be displayed [for example, as shown in FIGS. 20 (23) to (25). In addition, when the hat notice icon I6 is digested, the pseudo-continuous effects shown in FIG. 21 (28) to FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of notice displays, or may be capable of displaying a display other than a plurality of kinds of notice displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of notice display, or may not display a plurality of types of notice display.

  In addition, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of notice icons, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of kinds of notice icons. The display means may always display a plurality of types of notice icons, or may not display a plurality of types of notice icons.

  In addition, when the notice icon is digested, only a notice display corresponding to the kind of digested notice icon may be displayed, or when the notice icon is digested, the notice icon is digested. There may be a case where a notice display other than the type corresponding to the kind of the notice icon is displayed. In addition, when the notice icon is digested, the kind of notice notice corresponding to the kind of the digested notice icon may be displayed, or when the notice icon is digested, the kind of the notice icon that is digested. There may be cases where the type of notice display corresponding to is not displayed.

  Also, only when the notice icon is digested, a notice display of a type corresponding to the kind of digested notice icon may be displayed, or in cases other than when the notice icon is digested A type of notice display corresponding to the type of digested notice icon may be displayed.

“The display means is means capable of displaying the number of the hold icons corresponding to the number of the start of the symbol variation display being held (hereinafter referred to as“ hold number ”) [for example, FIG. In the hold icon display area in the UI unit UI1 shown in a), the number of hold icons for which the operation of the symbol variation display in FIG.
The notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of holds depending on the number displayed (for example, the notice icon (two pseudo-continuous notice icons I65) shown in FIG. It ’s not an icon that shows the number of symbols that have been suspended for]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the number of hold icons corresponding to the number of holds, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the number of hold icons corresponding to the number of holds. Good. Further, the display means may always display the number of hold icons corresponding to the number of holds, or may not display the number of hold icons corresponding to the number of holds.

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
"Game table provided with display means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.] capable of displaying a plurality of types of display Because
One display of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
The first display is a display including an icon display frame [for example, a hold display frame FL1 shown in FIG. 77 (a), etc.]
Among the icon display frames, an icon related to symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “icon”) can be displayed in a region inside the frame (hereinafter referred to as “in-frame region”) [for example, As shown in FIG. 77 (a), the change icon h0 is accommodated in the hold display frame FL1, etc.]
The icon display frame is a display frame that can be displayed in a plurality of types of display modes,
One display mode among the plurality of types of display modes is a first display mode [for example, a default display mode of the hold display frame FL1 shown in FIG. 77 (a), etc.]
One display mode among the plurality of types of display modes is a second display mode [for example, an extended display mode of the hold display frame FL1 shown in FIG. 77 (i), etc.]
The second display mode is a display mode in which at least a part of the first display mode is expanded [for example, the expanded display mode of the hold display frame FL1 shown in FIG. 77 (i) is shown in FIG. The hold display frame FL1 of the default display mode shown in (a) is a display mode expanded upward, etc.]
The second display is a decorative symbol variation display [for example, the first decorative symbol variation display in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 77 (b) and the second decorative symbol display device 208M in the second decoration. Design variation display etc.]
The first display displayed in the first display mode is a display that is not overlapped with the second display [for example, the default display mode shown in FIG. The hold display frame FL1 is displayed at a position that does not overlap with the variable display of the first decorative symbol on the first decorative symbol display device 208L or the variable display of the second decorative symbol on the second decorative symbol display device 208M.] so,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  According to the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game stand, it is possible to provide a game stand having a feature in the display means.

  In addition, according to this game stand, the icon display frame that is displayed with priority is expanded, and the player is aware that the effect is being performed by performing an effect such as a notice or a pre-read notice in the expanded part. There is a case that can be made. In recent game machines, a plurality of various effect displays are performed at the same time, so there is a tendency that they are complicated and difficult to visually recognize. By expanding the icon display frame for displaying “”, it is possible to distinguish and distinguish from other effect displays, and the effect can be enhanced.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying displays other than a plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the first display and the second display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the first display and the second display. . Further, the display means may always display the first display and the second display, or may not display the first display and the second display.

  The first display may include only an icon display frame. That is, the first display may be an icon display frame. Further, the first display may include other than the icon display frame. Further, the first display may necessarily include an icon display frame, or may not include an icon display frame.

  Here, the “icon display frame” may be referred to as “hold display frame”, “hold frame”, “UI”, “hold icon display area”, or the like. The “icon display frame” is a display that may be overlapped with at least a part of a hold icon, a variable icon, or the like. Further, since the “icon display frame” is displayed near the end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device, it may not be disturbed by other effect displays. In addition, the “icon display frame” may be a frame in which one variable icon or a hold icon is displayed. Further, the “icon display frame” is a display frame that does not overlap with the decorative pattern after the stop, and can also be said to be a display frame that is overlapped by at least a part of the hold icon or the like. Further, the “icon display frame” is a background display displayed on the back side of the hold icon or the like, and can be said to be a background display different from the background display of the decorative design.

  Here, the “icon display frame” is a part that can be recognized by the player as the part where the icon is displayed without being caught by the word “frame”. This is an example and is not bound by this.

  Further, only the icon may be displayed in the in-frame area of the icon display frame, or other than the icon may be displayed in the in-frame area of the icon display frame. Further, the icon display frame may be configured such that the icon is always displayed in the frame inner area, or the icon display frame may be configured such that the icon may not be displayed in the frame inner area. Good.

  Here, the in-frame region constitutes an icon display frame, and is therefore a concept included in the first display.

  Further, the icon display frame may be displayed only in a plurality of types of display modes, or may be displayed in a display mode other than the plurality of types of display modes. The icon display frame may be displayed in a plurality of types of display modes, or may not be displayed in a plurality of types of display modes.

  The icon display frame may be displayed only in the first display mode and the second display mode, or a display mode other than the first display mode and the second display mode may be displayed. It may be a thing. Further, the icon display frame may necessarily display the first display mode and the second display mode, or may not display the first display mode and the second display mode. Also good.

  In addition, the second display mode may be a part in which only a part of the first display mode is expanded, or a part in which all of the first display mode is expanded.

  Here, the “display mode in which at least a part of the first display mode is expanded” may be referred to as a second icon display frame.

  Here, “expansion” can be said to be a display of “icon display frame” in a broad sense, or an area of an image or a region can be increased.

  Further, the first display displayed in the first display mode may not be overlapped only with the second display, and may be displayed in a display mode other than the second display mode. It may not be overlapped. Further, the first display displayed in the first display mode may not necessarily overlap the second display, or may overlap the second display. There may be.

  Here, the “decorative symbol variation display” may include a stop display of the ornamental symbol, a display in a state where the symbol can be identified at the start of variation, or, for example, during a high-speed variation, And display in a state that is difficult to identify than the display state at the start of change and the display state at the start of change (for example, translucent display during high-speed change) It may include a variable display of symbols.

In addition, 'one of the plurality of types of display is a third display,
The third display is an effect display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 77 (g) to (l), the ninja character NJ1 throws the shuriken SH1 to change the display mode of the second hold icon h12. Production display etc.],
Of the second display mode, a portion extended from the first display mode (hereinafter referred to as “expanded part [for example, an extended part in the hold display frame FL1 in the extended display mode shown in FIG. 77 (i), etc. The third display is configured to be able to be displayed in an overlapping manner [for example, as shown in FIGS. 77 (g) to (l), the second hold icon h12 is displayed. In the effect display that changes the display mode of the ninja character NJ1 is displayed on the extended portion in the hold display frame FL1, etc.]
The extended portion is a portion that is not overlapped with the second display. [For example, as shown in FIG. 77 (f), the hold display frame FL1 in the extended display mode has a variable display. 1 and the second decorative pattern are not overlapped]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, the icon display frame is expanded and displayed at least in preference to the variation display of the decorative pattern indicating whether or not the variation is appropriate, and the expanded portion is displayed as a notice or a pre-read notice. The effect may be improved.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the third display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the third display. Further, the display means may always display the third display or may not display the third display.

  Here, “effect display” includes an effect display in which the display mode of the hold icon and the variation icon changes, an effect display in which the display mode of the hold icon and the change icon is changed, and the like.

  Further, only the third display may be configured to be able to be displayed by being overlapped with the extended portion, or the display other than the third display may be configured to be able to be displayed being overlapped with the extended portion. Further, the third display may be displayed so as to always overlap the extended portion, or the third display may be displayed so as not to overlap the extended portion. Good.

  Here, the “extended portion” may be a difference from the portion before expansion, or may refer to itself when only a part of the icon display frame before expansion is expanded (or enlarged). .

  The extended portion may not be overlapped only by the second display, or may be not overlapped by a display other than the second display. Further, the extended portion may not necessarily overlap the second display, or may be overlapped with the second display.

Further, “the effect display is a display of a pre-reading notice [for example, an effect display that changes the display mode of the second hold icon h12 shown in FIG. 77 (g) to FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

“The effect display is a display that changes the display mode of the icon [for example, as shown in FIGS. 77 (g) to (l), the display mode of the second hold icon h12 blinks in white. Effect display to change from a display mode to a display mode that lights up in green]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, the second display is a display that may be overlapped with the extended portion. [For example, as shown in FIG. 77 (f), the decorative symbol during the variable display is held in the extended display mode. Etc., which are overlapped with the display frame FL1, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the second display may be overlapped only in the extended portion, or may be overlapped in portions other than the extended portion. Further, the second display may necessarily be overlapped with the extended portion, or may be not overlapped with the extended portion.

In addition, 'one of the plurality of types of display is a fourth display,
The fourth display is a display of lines [for example, display of lines by the princess Chibi character CH1 in the balloon TT2, display of lines by the frog character GY1 in the balloon TT3, etc. shown in FIG. 77 (i)]. Yes,
The fourth display is a display that does not overlap the icon display frame of the first display mode [for example, as shown in FIG. Frame FL1 does not overlap with balloon TT2 or balloon TT3, etc.]
The fourth display is a display that may be overlapped with the extended portion [For example, as shown in FIG. 77 (i), the hold display frame FL1 in the extended display mode is displayed in the balloon TT2. Etc., which overlaps the display of lines by Princess Chibi's character CH1],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the fourth display, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the fourth display. Further, the display means may always display the fourth display, or may not display the fourth display.

  Here, the “line display” may be referred to as “line advance notice” or “conversation advance notice”, and may include, for example, a change notice, a prefetch notice, a tutorial display, and the like.

  The fourth display may not be overlapped only with the icon display frame of the first display mode, and may be overlapped with other than the icon display frame of the first display mode. There may be things that do not happen. The fourth display may not necessarily overlap the icon display frame of the first display mode, or may be overlapped with the icon display frame of the first display mode. There may be.

  Here, “the fourth display is a display that does not overlap the icon display frame of the first display mode” does not overlap the display position. It is a concept that includes what is configured.

  In addition, the fourth display may be overlapped only in the extended portion, or may be overlapped in portions other than the extended portion. Further, the fourth display may necessarily be overlapped with the extended portion, or may be not overlapped with the extended portion.

  The “line display” includes a display of the first line and a display of the second line, and the display of the first line may be overlapped with the extended portion. The display of the second line may be a display that does not overlap the extended portion.

In addition, 'one of the plurality of types of display is a fifth display,
The fifth display is a notice display [for example, an effect display that changes the display mode of the notice icon BX of the treasure box shown in FIGS. 82 (c-1) to (c-6), and FIG. 84 (c). -1) to (c-4) shown in the same figure, such as an effect display that changes the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0]
In the expanded portion, the fifth display is configured to be able to be displayed in an overlapping manner [for example, the treasure box notice icon BX shown in FIGS. 82 (c-1) to (c-6). In the effect display that changes the display mode and the effect display that changes the display mode of the variation icon h0 shown in FIGS. 84 (c-1) to (c-4), the ninja character NJ1 is in the extended display mode. Etc., which overlaps the extended part of the hold icon display area FL1]
The third display and the fifth display are partly the same display [for example, the effect of changing the display mode of the second hold icon h12 shown in FIGS. 77 (g) to (l) As for the display, the effect display which changes the display mode of the notice icon BX of the treasure box shown in FIGS. 82 (c-1) to (c-6) is also shown in FIGS. 84 (c-1) to (c−). As for the effect display which changes the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 shown in 4), the ninja character NJ1 is displayed in the extended portion of the hold icon display area FL1 in the extended display mode.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, for example, instead of making it difficult to confirm whether or not the change is appropriate with a decorative design, an icon display frame is displayed by displaying both the third display and the fifth display with an expanded icon display frame. You may be able to see both displays without missing them. In addition, if the third display and the fifth display are all different, it may be clear whether the change should be expected or whether it should be expected for the subsequent symbol change display. By making a part of the display and the part of the fifth display the same mode, it may be possible to increase the expectation until it can be recognized which of the expected symbol variation displays is.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the fifth display, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the fifth display. Further, the display means may always display the fifth display, or may not display the fifth display.

  Further, in the expanded portion, only the fifth display may be configured to be displayed in an overlapping manner, or in the expanded portion, a display other than the fifth display may be displayed in an overlapping manner. It may be what was done. Further, the fifth display may be configured to be displayed in an overlapping manner in the extended portion, or the fifth display may not be displayed in the extended portion in an overlapping manner. It may be configured as follows.

  In addition, the fifth display may be configured so that the fifth display overlaps only in the extended portion, and the fifth display overlaps and can be displayed in portions other than the extended portion. It may be configured.

  Here, the “notice display” may be a change effect of a variation icon, a stop of a special symbol such as a pseudo-continuous symbol, or the like.

  Further, “the third display and the fifth display are partially the same display” is a concept including, for example, the same animation until the character appears.

In addition, “the area in the frame in the first display mode (hereinafter referred to as“ the area in the first frame [for example, the area in the hold display frame FL1 in the default display mode shown in FIG. 77 (a) ”). Etc.] ”)) is the first area,
The in-frame area in the second display mode (hereinafter referred to as “second in-frame area [for example, the area in the frame of the hold display frame FL1 in the extended display mode shown in FIG. 77 (i)]”. .) Area is the second area,
The second area is an area larger than the first area,
The extended portion is a portion of a difference area between the second in-frame region and the first in-frame region.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the second frame region is a region including the first frame region [for example, as shown in FIG. 77 (i), the hold display frame FL1 of the extended display mode The area within the frame is configured to include the area within the frame of the hold display frame FL1 in the default display mode, etc.]. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the second in-frame region may be configured to include a part of the first in-frame region, or may be configured to include all of the first in-frame region. There may be.

In addition, “the display mode in which at least a part of the first display mode is expanded” according to claim 1 is “the area of the in-frame region in the first display mode is increased. [For example, as shown in FIG. 77 (i), the hold display frame FL1 in the extended display mode has a larger area in the frame of the hold display frame FL1 in the default display mode. Display mode etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “Even if the icon is not displayed, the icon display frame is configured to be able to be displayed in the first display mode [for example, there is no hold and symbol variation display is not performed. The hold display frame FL1 is displayed even when neither the fluctuation icon h0 nor the hold icons h11 to h14 are displayed]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the icon display frame may be configured to be displayed only in the first display mode even when the icon is not displayed, or the icon display frame may be displayed even when the icon is not displayed. It may be configured to be able to display in a display mode other than the first display mode. The icon display frame may be configured to be always displayed in the first display mode even when the icon is not displayed, or the icon display frame may be displayed even when the icon is not displayed. May not be displayed in the first display mode.

  The icon display frame may be displayed in a state where the icon is not displayed, and the icon may be displayed in a region other than the icon display frame.

“The icon that can be displayed in the frame area is a variable icon [For example, as shown in FIG. 77 (i), a variable icon h0 is displayed in the hold display frame FL1 in the extended display mode. Etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the icon that can be displayed in the frame area may be a hold icon.

The display means is a means capable of displaying a hold icon [for example, the first hold icon h11 to the fourth hold icon h14 displayed in the hold icon display area] as the icon,
The display means is a means capable of displaying the number of the hold icons corresponding to the number of the start of the symbol variation display is held.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only the hold icon as the icon, or may be capable of displaying other than the hold icon as the icon. The display means may always display a hold icon as an icon, or may not display a hold icon as an icon.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the number of hold icons corresponding to the number of the start of the symbol variation display being suspended, or corresponding to the number of the symbol variation display starting being suspended. A hold icon other than the number of hold icons to be displayed may be displayed. In addition, the number of hold icons corresponding to the number of the start of the symbol variation display may be always displayed, or the number of hold icons corresponding to the number of the start of the symbol variation display being suspended. May not be displayed.

In addition, “the first display displayed in the second display mode is a display that does not overlap the second display [for example, FIG. 77 (f) to FIG. The extended display mode hold display frame FL1 shown in FIG. 4 is overlapped with the first decorative symbol variation display on the first decorative symbol display device 208L and the second decorative symbol variation display on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first display displayed in the second display mode may not be overlapped only with the second display, or may be a display mode other than the second display mode. May not be overlapped. Further, the first display displayed in the second display mode may not necessarily be overlapped with the second display mode, or may be overlapped with the second display mode. There may be cases.

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
“Operation means that can be operated by the player [for example, the operation unit 136];
Production means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208] capable of performing a plurality of types of production;
A game machine equipped with
One of the multiple types of effects is a first effect [for example, an effect executed when the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD shown in FIG. 160 becomes full]
One of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect [for example, an effect button generated after the second time shown in FIG. 150 when the long press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled. Production display by a pseudo-run performed as a result of the operation of 136],
The second effect is an effect different from the first effect,
The first effect is the first operation mode [for example, one press operation by the effect button 136 (single operation)], and the operation means performs the first number of operations [for example, 20 times]. It is a production that can be started in case
The first effect is an effect that can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode [for example, a long press operation by the effect button 136],
The second operation mode is an operation mode having a longer period of operation than the first operation mode,
The first number is a number exceeding 1,
The second effect is that the operation unit performs the second number of operations in the first operation mode than when the operation unit performs one operation in the second operation mode. [For example, when the long-press auto-strike function is disabled, execution is performed as a result of the operation of the effect button 136 generated after the second time shown in FIG. 150. The effect display by the pseudo ream is not started by the long press operation with the effect button 136],
The second number is a number exceeding 1.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the production means, but according to this game machine, it is possible to provide a game machine characterized by the production means.

  Here, the effect means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of effects, or may be capable of executing other than a plurality of types of effects. Further, the production means may always execute a plurality of types of effects, or may not execute a plurality of types of effects.

  Further, the effect means may be capable of executing only the first effect and the second effect, or may be capable of executing effects other than the first effect and the second effect. Further, the production means may always execute the first production and the second production, or may not execute the first production and the second production.

  Here, for example, the first effect may be an effect corresponding to “Le” in “Doremi”, and the second effect is, for example, “I” in “A”. It can be said that it can be said to be a corresponding production.

  In addition, the first effect is started only when the first number of operations are performed by the operation means in the first operation mode and when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode. It may be possible, other than when the first number of operations are performed by the operation means in the first operation mode and when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode. It may also be possible to start. In addition, the first performance always starts when the first number of operations are performed by the operation means in the first operation mode and when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode. Or when the first number of operations are performed by the operation means in the first operation mode and when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode. You may not.

In addition, “the symbol display means [for example, the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214] capable of executing the symbol variation display,
One effect of the plurality of types of effects is a third effect [for example, a continuous hit operation effect shown in FIG. 160 (d) to FIG.
The third effect is an effect that can be started during execution of the symbol variation display,
The third effect is an effect that prompts the operation means to be operated continuously in the first operation mode [for example, an effect button image as shown in FIGS. 160 (d) to (g). It is an effect in which the letters “Let's hit repeatedly” are displayed together with BT]
The first effect is an effect that can be started when the first number of operations are performed by the operation means in the first operation mode during execution of the third effect,
The first effect is an effect that can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode during the execution of the third effect.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the symbol display means may be capable of executing only symbol variation display, or may be capable of performing display other than symbol variation display. Further, the symbol display means may always execute symbol variation display or may not perform symbol variation display.

  Further, the third effect may be started only during the execution of the symbol variation display, or may be started other than during the symbol variation display. In addition, the third effect may be always started during the execution of the symbol variation display, or may not be started during the execution of the symbol variation display.

  In addition, the first effect is performed when the first number of operations is performed by the operating means in the first operation mode during execution of the third effect, and during execution of the third effect. It may be possible to start only when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode, or the first operation mode by the operation means in the first operation mode during execution of the third effect. If the number of operations is performed, and during the execution of the third effect, the operation can be started other than when the operation unit performs one operation in the second operation mode. Good. In addition, the first effect is performed when the first number of operations is performed by the operating means in the first operation mode during execution of the third effect, and during execution of the third effect. It may always start when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode, or the first operation mode by the operation means in the first operation mode during execution of the third effect. There may be a case where the operation is not started when the operation is performed a number of times, and when the operation unit performs one operation in the second operation mode during execution of the third effect.

In addition, “the second operation mode is an operation mode in which the state where the operation unit is operated is maintained for a first time [for example, a state where the production button 136 is pressed. Operation mode maintained for 0.5 seconds or more],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Further, “when the state in which the operation unit is operated is maintained for a second time [eg, 4 seconds], the operation unit is operated in the first operation mode in the first number of times in a pseudo manner. The first production is configured so that it can be started,
The second time is a time equal to or longer than the first time.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first effect is that the operation means is operated in the first operation mode in the first operation mode only in the first operation mode only when the operation means is operated for the second time. It may be possible to start the operation means, or the operation means is operated in the first operation mode in the first operation mode for the first number of times except when the operation means is being operated for the second time. It may be possible to start as a thing. In addition, the first effect always starts when the operation means is operated for the first time in the first operation mode in a pseudo manner when the operation means is operated for the second time. There may be cases where the operation means is not started even when the state where the operation means is operated is maintained for the second time.

In addition, “the second effect is an effect that does not start when only one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the second effect may be able to be started when the operation unit performs two or more operations in the second operation mode.

In addition, “light emitting means [for example, production button lamp 138] is provided,
The light emitting unit is a unit that is in a first state [for example, a state in which light is emitted in red] in a state in which an operation for starting the first effect by the operation unit can be received.
The light emitting means is a means that is in a second state [for example, a light-off state or a blue light-emitting state] in a state in which an operation for starting the second effect by the operation means can be accepted. Yes,
The second state is a state different from the first state.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the first state is a light emitting state,
The second state is a state where no light is emitted.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the first state is a state in which light is emitted in the first aspect,
The second state is a state where light is emitted in the second mode.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first mode and the second mode are modes in which at least one of a light emitting color, a lighting / extinguishing / flashing pattern, a location of a light emitting element, and luminance is different.

In addition, “the first aspect is a first color [for example, red],
The second aspect is a second color [eg, blue].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Further, “the light emitting means is a means capable of irradiating light from the inside of the operation means.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the light emitting means may be capable of irradiating light only from the inside of the operating means, or may be capable of irradiating light from other than the inside of the operating means. Further, the light emitting means may irradiate light from the inside of the operation means, or may not irradiate light from the inside of the operation means.

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above explanation,
“Operation means that can be operated by the player [for example, the operation unit 136];
Production means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208] capable of performing a plurality of types of production;
Display means [for example, decorative design display device 208] capable of executing a plurality of types of display;
A game machine equipped with
One of the multiple types of effects is a first effect [for example, an effect executed when the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD shown in FIG. 160 becomes full]
The first effect is the first operation mode [for example, one press operation by the effect button 136 (single operation)], and the operation means performs the first number of operations [for example, 20 times]. It is a production that can be started in case
The first effect is an effect that can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode [for example, a long press operation by the effect button 136],
The second operation mode is an operation mode having a longer period of operation than the first operation mode,
The first number is a number exceeding 1,
One of the plurality of types of display is a first selection display [for example, a character selection effect shown in FIG. 173]
The first selection display is a display capable of selecting one of a plurality of types of images according to the operation of the operation means,
One image of the plurality of types of images is a first image [eg, the princess character image H shown in FIG. 173],
The first image is displayed in the first operation mode more than when the first operation mode is performed by the operation unit in the second operation mode during execution of the first selection display. When the second number of operations is performed by the means, the image is easier to be selected [for example, when the long-press auto-strike function is disabled, the princess character image shown in FIG. 173 H is not selected by the long press operation with the production button 136],
The second number is a number exceeding 1.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  According to the conventional game table, there is room for improvement in the production means, but according to this game machine, it is possible to provide a game machine characterized by the production means.

  Here, the effect means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of effects, or may be capable of executing other than a plurality of types of effects. Further, the production means may always execute a plurality of types of effects, or may not execute a plurality of types of effects.

  The effect means may be capable of executing only the first effect, or may be capable of executing effects other than the first effect. Further, the production means may always execute the first production, or may not execute the first production.

  Further, the display means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of display, or may be capable of executing other than a plurality of types of display. The display means may always execute a plurality of types of display or may not execute a plurality of types of display.

  In addition, the first effect is started only when the first number of operations are performed by the operation means in the first operation mode and when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode. It may be possible, other than when the first number of operations are performed by the operation means in the first operation mode and when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode. It may also be possible to start. In addition, the first performance always starts when the first number of operations are performed by the operation means in the first operation mode and when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode. Or when the first number of operations are performed by the operation means in the first operation mode and when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode. You may not.

  Moreover, the display means may be capable of executing only the first selection display, or may be capable of executing display other than the first selection display. The display means may always execute the first selection display or may not execute the first selection display.

  Further, the first selection display may be capable of selecting only one image among a plurality of types of images according to the operation of the operation unit, or a plurality of types of images according to the operation of the operation unit. Other than one of the images may be selectable. Further, the first selection display may always select one of the plurality of types of images according to the operation of the operation unit, or the plurality of types of images may be selected according to the operation of the operation unit. One of the images may not be selected.

In addition, “One of the plural types of effects is a fourth effect [for example, an effect by a princess character that appears after the end of the big hit game]
The fourth effect is an effect different from the first effect [for example, an effect executed when the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD is full as shown in FIG. 160]
The fourth effect is when the first image is selected in the first selection display [for example, when the princess character image H is selected in the character selection effect shown in FIG. 173]. It is a production that can be started,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the fourth effect may be one that can be started only when the first image is selected in the first selection display, or the first image is displayed in the first selection display. It may be possible to start other than when it is selected. Further, the fourth effect may be started when the first image is selected in the first selection display, or the first image is selected in the first selection display. In some cases, it may not start.

In addition, “the symbol display means [for example, the first special figure display device 212 and the second special figure display device 214] capable of executing the symbol variation display,
One effect of the plurality of types of effects is a third effect [for example, a continuous hit operation effect shown in FIG. 160 (d) to FIG.
The third effect is an effect that can be started during execution of the symbol variation display,
The third effect is an effect that prompts the operation means to be operated continuously in the first operation mode [for example, an effect button image as shown in FIGS. 160 (d) to (g). It is an effect in which the letters “Let's hit repeatedly” are displayed together with BT]
The first effect is an effect that can be started when the first number of operations are performed by the operation means in the first operation mode during execution of the third effect,
The first effect is an effect that can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode during the execution of the third effect.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the symbol display means may be capable of executing only symbol variation display, or may be capable of performing display other than symbol variation display. Further, the symbol display means may always execute symbol variation display or may not perform symbol variation display.

  Further, the third effect may be started only during the execution of the symbol variation display, or may be started other than during the symbol variation display. In addition, the third effect may be always started during the execution of the symbol variation display, or may not be started during the execution of the symbol variation display.

  In addition, the first effect is performed when the first number of operations is performed by the operating means in the first operation mode during execution of the third effect, and during execution of the third effect. It may be possible to start only when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode, or the first operation mode by the operation means in the first operation mode during execution of the third effect. If the number of operations is performed, and during the execution of the third effect, the operation can be started other than when the operation unit performs one operation in the second operation mode. Good. In addition, the first effect is performed when the first number of operations is performed by the operating means in the first operation mode during execution of the third effect, and during execution of the third effect. It may always start when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode, or the first operation mode by the operation means in the first operation mode during execution of the third effect. There may be a case where the operation is not started when the operation is performed a number of times, and when the operation unit performs one operation in the second operation mode during execution of the third effect.

In addition, “the second operation mode is an operation mode in which the operation unit is operated for the first time period [for example, the state in which the effect button 136 is pressed is 0.5 seconds. The operation mode maintained above]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Further, “when the state in which the operation unit is operated is maintained for a second time [eg, 4 seconds], the operation unit is operated in the first operation mode in the first number of times in a pseudo manner. The first production is configured so that it can be started,
The second time is a time equal to or longer than the first time.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first effect is that the operation means is operated in the first operation mode in the first operation mode only in the first operation mode only when the operation means is operated for the second time. It may be possible to start the operation means, or the operation means is operated in the first operation mode in the first operation mode for the first number of times except when the operation means is being operated for the second time. It may be possible to start as a thing. In addition, the first effect always starts when the operation means is operated for the first time in the first operation mode in a pseudo manner when the operation means is operated for the second time. There may be cases where the operation means is not started even when the state where the operation means is operated is maintained for the second time.

In addition, “during the execution of the first selection display, even if the operation means is being operated for more than the first time, one operation is performed by the operation means. Configured to be
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the first image is an image that is not selected only by one operation by the operation means in the second operation mode.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first image may be selectable when two or more operations are performed by the operation means in the second operation mode.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a second selection display [for example, a favorite selection screen shown in FIG. 183 (f)],
The second selection display is a selection display capable of selecting one of a plurality of types of images according to the operation of the operation means,
The second selection display is a selection display different from the first selection display,
One image of the plurality of types of images is a second image [for example, a selection item of “Character C”],
The second image can be selected when the operation unit performs a third number of operations [for example, twice] in the first operation mode during execution of the second selection display. Image
The second image is an image that can be selected when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode during execution of the second selection display,
The third number is a number exceeding 1.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the second selection display may be one in which only one image among a plurality of types of images can be selected according to the operation of the operation unit, An image other than one of the images may be selectable. In addition, the second selection display may always select one of the plurality of types of images according to the operation of the operation unit, or may display a plurality of types of images according to the operation of the operation unit. One of the images may not be selected.

  Further, the second image is displayed when the second selection display is performed, when the operation unit performs the third number of operations in the first operation mode, and during the execution of the second selection display. , It may be selectable only when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode, or the operation means in the first operation mode during execution of the second selection display. Can be selected other than when the third number of operations are performed and when the second selection display is performed and the operation means is operated once by the operation means during the second selection display. It may be. In addition, the first production is performed when the third selection operation is performed by the operation means in the first operation mode during execution of the second selection display, and during execution of the second selection display. In the second operation mode, the selection may be made when one operation is performed by the operation unit, or during the execution of the second selection display, the operation unit in the first operation mode. Even if the third number of operations is performed, and during the execution of the second selection display, even if there is a case where the selection is not performed when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode. Good.

In addition, “One of the plural types of effects is a fifth effect,
The fifth effect is an effect that can be started when the second image is selected in the second selection display.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the fifth effect may be one that can be started only when the second image is selected in the second selection display, or the second image is displayed in the second selection display. It may be possible to start even in cases other than the case where it is selected. In addition, the fifth effect may be started when the second image is selected in the second selection display, or the second image is selected in the second selection display. In some cases, it may not start.

In addition, “light emitting means [for example, production button lamp 138] is provided,
The light emitting unit is a unit that is in a first state [for example, a state in which light is emitted in red] in a state in which an operation for starting the first effect by the operation unit can be received.
The light emitting means is a means that is in a second state [for example, a light-off state or a blue light-emitting state] during execution of the first selection display.
The second state is a state different from the first state.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the first state is a light emitting state,
The second state is a state where no light is emitted.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the first state is a state in which light is emitted in the first aspect,
The second state is a state where light is emitted in the second mode.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first mode and the second mode are modes in which at least one of a light emitting color, a lighting / extinguishing / flashing pattern, a location of a light emitting element, and luminance is different.

In addition, “the first aspect is a first color [for example, red],
The second aspect is a second color [eg, blue].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Further, “the light emitting means is a means capable of irradiating light from the inside of the operation means.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the light emitting means may be capable of irradiating light only from the inside of the operating means, or may be capable of irradiating light from other than the inside of the operating means. Further, the light emitting means may irradiate light from the inside of the operation means, or may not irradiate light from the inside of the operation means.

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
“Operation means that can be operated by the player [for example, the operation unit 136];
Display means [for example, decorative design display device 208] capable of executing a plurality of types of display;
A game machine equipped with
One of the plurality of types of display is the display in the first display mode (hereinafter referred to as “first display [for example, when the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD shown in FIG. 160 is full” It is said that the performance is performed on
One display of the plurality of types of display is a display in a second display mode (hereinafter referred to as “second display [for example, in the case where the long-press auto-strike function is disabled, FIG. Indication display by a pseudo-run that is executed as a result of the operation of the effect button 136 generated after the second time shown in FIG.
The second display is a display different from the first display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a display that prompts the player to repeatedly hit the operation means (hereinafter referred to as “third display [for example, shown in FIG. 160 (d) to FIG. 160 (g)”). Is called a continuous hit operation effect] ”),
The third display is a display displayed in a state where the operation of the operation means for starting the first display can be accepted (hereinafter referred to as “first state”) [for example, FIG. d)-as shown in (g) in the same drawing, the effect that the letters “Please hit repeatedly” are displayed together with the effect button image BT]
The first display is a display that can be started when the operation means is repeatedly hit after the third display is started,
The first display is a display that can be started even when the operation means is pressed for a long time,
The second display is a display that is easier to start when the operation means is repeatedly hit than when the operation means is pressed for a long time,
The third display is a display that is not displayed in a state where the operation of the operation means for starting the second display can be accepted (hereinafter referred to as “second state”) [for example, FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 5, the characters “Let's hit repeatedly” are not displayed together with the effect button image BT]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  According to the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game stand, it is possible to provide a game stand having a feature in the display means.

Here, the display means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of display, or may be capable of executing other than a plurality of types of display. The display means may always execute a plurality of types of display, or may not execute a plurality of types of display. The display means may include a first display and a second display. Further, only the third display may be executable, or a display other than the first display, the second display, and the third display may be executable. The display means may always execute the first display, the second display, and the third display, or one of the first display, the second display, and the third display. Some or all may not be executed.

  Further, the third display may be displayed only in a state where the operation of the operation means for starting the first display can be accepted, or the operation means for starting the first display It may be executable even in a state other than the state in which the operation can be accepted. Further, the third display may be always displayed in a state where the operation of the operation means for starting the first display can be accepted, or the operation means for starting the first display There may be a case where the operation is not displayed in a state where the operation can be accepted.

  Further, the first display may be started only when the operation means is repeatedly hit after the third display is started and when the operation means is long pressed. It may be possible to start other than when the is repeatedly hit and when the operation means is pressed for a long time. The first display may always start when the operation means is repeatedly hit or when the operation means is long-pressed, or when the operation means is repeatedly hit or when the operation means is long-pressed. In some cases, it may not start.

In addition, “light emitting means [for example, production button lamp 138] is provided,
The light emitting means is a means capable of irradiating light from the inside of the operation means,
In the first state, the light emitting means is a means that becomes a first light emitting state [for example, a state in which red light is emitted]
In the second state, the light emitting unit is a unit that is in a second light emitting state [for example, a light emitting state or a blue light emitting state].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the light emitting means may be capable of irradiating light only from the inside of the operating means, or may be capable of irradiating light from other than the inside of the operating means. Further, the light emitting means may irradiate light from the inside of the operation means, or may not irradiate light from the inside of the operation means.

  Further, the light emitting means may be in the first light emitting state only in the first state, or may be in the first light emitting state in a state other than the first state.

  Further, the light emitting means may be in the second light emitting state only in the second state, or may be in the second light emitting state in a state other than the second state.

In addition, “the first light emission state is a lighting state,
The second light emission state is an off state,
When the light emitting means is turned on, it indicates that the operation means is ready to be operated [for example, as shown in FIGS. 153 (a-3) and (a-4)] In the state of accepting the operation of the operation means, the effect button lamp 138 is in a lighting state]
When the light emitting means is turned off, it indicates that the operation means is not accepted [for example, as shown in FIGS. 153 (a-1) and (a-2). In addition, when the operation of the operating means is not accepted, the effect button lamp 138 is turned off]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the first light emitting state is a state of emitting light in the first light emitting mode [for example, emitting light in red]
The second light emission state is a state in which light is emitted in the second light emission mode [for example, light is emitted in blue].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a symbol variation display,
The first display is a display that can be started during the display of the symbol variation display [for example, a display relating to the result of the operation is performed during the variation display of the special diagram 1 and the decorative symbol],
The second display is a display that can be started during the display of the symbol variation display [for example, a display relating to the operation result is performed during the variation display of the special diagram 1 and the decorative symbol]
The third display is a display that can be started during the display of the symbol variation display [For example, as shown in FIGS. 159 (d) to (g), the variation of the special symbol 1 and the decorative symbol is being displayed. Will be repeatedly operated]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first display may be capable of starting display only during display of the symbol variation display, or may be capable of starting display other than during display of the symbol variation display. The first display may always start during the display of the symbol variation display, or may not start during the display of the symbol variation display.

  The second display may be capable of starting display only during display of the symbol variation display, or may be capable of starting display other than during display of the symbol variation display. In addition, the second display may always start during the display of the symbol variation display, or may not start the display during the display of the symbol variation display.

  The third display may be capable of starting display only during display of the symbol variation display, or may be capable of starting display other than during display of the symbol variation display. Further, the third display may always start display during the display of the symbol variation display, or may not start the display during the display of the symbol variation display.

In addition, “the second display is a display that does not start only by a long press of the operation means. [For example, the display shown in FIG. In the case where the effect button 136 is not operated twice, it is not displayed]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the second display may be a display that is not started other than when the operation means is pressed and held down.

Further, “when the operation means is pressed for a long time [for example, when the effect button 136 is operated for 4 seconds], the first display can be started as if the operation means was repeatedly hit. [For example, as shown in FIG. 160, when the effect button 136 is operated for 4 seconds, the operation means is displayed as a pseudo 20-time operation (a preview display such as a cut-in image, Notifications to notify you of a big hit)
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, only when the operation means is pressed for a long time, the first display may be started as if the operation means has been repeatedly hit. It may be possible to start the first display as being repeatedly hit. In addition, when the operation means is pressed for a long time, the first display may be always started as if the operation means is repeatedly hit, or when the operation means is pressed for a long time, the operation means is repeatedly hit. The first display may not be started.

Further, “the long press is that the state in which the operation means is operated is maintained for a predetermined time [for example, 4 seconds].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the game machine is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
“Operation means that can be operated by the player [for example, the operation unit 136];
Display means [for example, decorative design display device 208] capable of executing a plurality of types of display;
A game machine equipped with
One of the plurality of types of display is the display in the first display mode (hereinafter referred to as “first display [for example, when the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD shown in FIG. 160 is full” It is said that the performance is performed on
One of the plural types of displays is a display in a fourth display mode (hereinafter referred to as “fourth display [for example, a character selection effect shown in FIG. 173]”).
The fourth display is a display different from the first display,
The first display is an effect display,
The fourth display is a selection display;
The fourth display is a display that is displayed when one image of a plurality of types of images is selected according to the operation of the operation means,
One image of the plurality of types of images is a first image [eg, the princess character image H shown in FIG. 173],
The first display is a display that can be started when the operation means is repeatedly hit,
The first display is a display that can be started even when the operation means is pressed for a long time,
The first image is an image that is more easily selected when the operation unit is operated a plurality of times than when the operation unit is pressed for a long time [for example, a state where the long press auto-strike function is disabled , The princess character image H shown in FIG. 173 is not selected by the long press operation with the effect button 136],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  According to the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game stand, it is possible to provide a game stand having a feature in the display means.

  Here, the display means may be capable of executing only a plurality of types of display, or may be capable of executing other than a plurality of types of display. The display means may always execute a plurality of types of display or may not execute a plurality of types of display.

  The display means may be capable of executing only the first display and the fourth display, or may be capable of executing a display other than the first display and the fourth display. Further, the display means may always execute the first display and the fourth display, or may not execute the first display and the fourth display.

  Further, the first display may be started only when the operation means is continuously hit and when the operation means is pressed for a long time, or when the operation means is continuously hit by the operation means and when the operation means is pressed and held long It may be possible to start other than the case where it is done. The first display may always start when the operation means is continuously hit or when the operation means is pressed for a long time, or when the operation means is repeatedly hit or when the operation means is pressed for a long time. In some cases, it may not start.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a fifth display [for example, an effect by a princess character appearing after the end of the jackpot game]
The fifth display is a display different from the first display [for example, an effect executed when the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD is full as shown in FIG. 160]
The fifth display is a display that can be started when the first image [for example, the princess character image H shown in FIG. 173] is selected during the execution of the fourth display.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the fifth display may be started only when the first image is selected during the execution of the fourth display, or the fifth display may be performed during the execution of the fourth display. It may be possible to start other than when one image is selected. Further, the fifth display may always start when the first image is selected during execution of the fourth display, or the first display may be performed during execution of the fourth display. It may not start when an image is selected.

“One of the plurality of types of display is a display that prompts the player to repeatedly hit the operation means (hereinafter referred to as“ third display [for example, FIG. 160 (d) to FIG. 160 (g) ), Which is a continuous hit operation effect shown in FIG.
The third display is a display displayed in a state where the operation of the operation means for starting the first display can be accepted (hereinafter referred to as “first state”) [for example, FIG. d)-as shown in (g) in the same drawing, the effect that the letters “Please hit repeatedly” are displayed together with the effect button image BT]
The first display is a display that can be started when the operation means is repeatedly hit after the third display is started.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Further, the third display may be displayed only in a state where the operation of the operation means for starting the first display can be accepted, or the operation means for starting the first display It may be executable even in a state other than the state in which the operation can be accepted. Further, the third display may be always displayed in a state where the operation of the operation means for starting the first display can be accepted, or the operation means for starting the first display There may be a case where the operation is not displayed in a state where the operation can be accepted.

  The first display may be started only when the operation means is repeatedly hit after the third display is started, or may be started other than when the operation means is repeatedly hit. It may be possible. Further, the first display may always start when the operation means is repeatedly hit, or may not start when the operation means is repeatedly hit.

In addition, “light emitting means [for example, production button lamp 138] is provided,
The light emitting means is a means capable of irradiating light from the inside of the operation means,
In the first state, the light emitting unit is a unit that is turned on.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the light emitting means may be capable of irradiating light only from the inside of the operating means, or may be capable of irradiating light from other than the inside of the operating means. Further, the light emitting means may irradiate light from the inside of the operation means, or may not irradiate light from the inside of the operation means.

  Further, the light emitting means may be in the first light emitting state only in the first state, or may be in the first light emitting state in a state other than the first state.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a symbol variation display,
The first display is a display that can be started during the display of the symbol variation display [for example, a display relating to the operation result is performed during the variation display of the special symbol 1 and the decorative symbol],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first display may be capable of starting display only during display of the symbol variation display, or may be capable of starting display other than during display of the symbol variation display. The first display may always start during the display of the symbol variation display, or may not start during the display of the symbol variation display.

In addition, “the first image is an image that is not selected only by long-pressing the operation means [for example, in the display shown in FIG. 173, the long-press auto-strike function is disabled. In some cases, the princess character image H is not displayed unless the production button 136 is operated twice]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first image may be an image that is not selected other than when the operation means is pressed for a long time.

Further, “when the operation means is pressed for a long time [for example, when the effect button 136 is operated for 4 seconds], the first display can be started as if the operation means was repeatedly hit. [For example, as shown in FIG. 160, when the effect button 136 is operated for 4 seconds, the operation means is displayed as a pseudo 20-time operation (a preview display such as a cut-in image, Notifications to notify you of a big hit)
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, only when the operation means is pressed for a long time, the first display may be started as if the operation means has been repeatedly hit. It may be possible to start the first display as being repeatedly hit. In addition, when the operation means is pressed for a long time, the first display may be always started as if the operation means is repeatedly hit, or when the operation means is pressed for a long time, the operation means is repeatedly hit. The first display may not be started.

Further, “the long press is that the state in which the operation means is operated is maintained for a predetermined time [for example, 4 seconds].
A game stand characterized by that. ]

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the game machine is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
“A symbol display means capable of displaying a symbol variation display [for example, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]
Operation means that can be operated by the player [for example, the operation unit 136];
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, decorative symbol display device 208];
A game machine equipped with
One of the plurality of types of display is the display in the first display mode (hereinafter referred to as “first display [for example, when the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD shown in FIG. 160 is full” Etc.] ”), and
One display among the plurality of types of display is a display in a second display mode (hereinafter referred to as “second display [for example, in the case where the long-press auto-strike function is disabled, FIG. In the chance eye production shown in Fig. 3, the display of the three Tono-sama symbols YM1 to YM3]] ”
The second display is a display different from the first display,
The first display is a display that may start during the display of the symbol variation display,
The second display is a display that may be displayed during the display of the symbol variation display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a display that prompts the player to repeatedly hit the operation means (hereinafter referred to as “third display [for example, shown in FIG. 160 (d) to FIG. 160 (g)”). , Etc. "
The first display is a display in which the display may be started when the operation means is repeatedly hit after the display of the third display is started,
The first display is a display that may be displayed even when the operation means is pressed and held after the display of the third display is started,
One of the plurality of types of display is a display that prompts the player to operate the operation means (hereinafter referred to as “fourth display [for example, shown in FIGS. 151 (b) to 151 (h)). , Chance eyes production etc.] "),
The fourth display is a display different from the third display,
The second display is a display that may start when the operation means is operated two or more times (for example, three times, etc.) after the display of the fourth display is started. And
The second display is a display that does not start when the operation means is pressed and held only once after the display of the fourth display is started [for example, in FIG. 151 (i) The display in the form in which three Tono-sama symbols YM1 to YM3 are displayed is not displayed unless the production button 136 is operated three times.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

In addition, “including light emitting means that can emit light in a plurality of types of light emitting states [for example, an effect button lamp 138, etc.]
The light emitting means is a means capable of irradiating light from the inside of the operation means,
One light emission state among the plurality of types of light emission states is a first light emission state [for example, a state in which light is emitted in red, etc.]
The light emitting unit is a unit that is in the first light emitting state in a state of accepting an operation of the operation unit.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Further, “one of the plurality of types of light emission states is a second light emission state [for example, a state in which the light is turned off or a state in which light is emitted in blue, etc.]
The first light emission state is a lighting state,
The second light emission state is an off state,
When the light emitting means is turned on, it indicates that the operation means is ready to be operated [for example, as shown in FIGS. 153 (a-3) and (a-4)] In the state where the operation of the operation means is accepted, the effect button lamp 138 is in a lighting state, etc.]
When the light emitting means is turned off, it indicates that the operation means is not accepted [for example, as shown in FIGS. 153 (a-1) and (a-2). In addition, when the operation means operation is not accepted, the effect button lamp 138 is turned off, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Further, “one of the plurality of types of light emission states is a second light emission state [for example, a state in which the light is turned off or a state in which light is emitted in blue, etc.]
The first light emitting state is a state in which light is emitted in the first light emitting mode [for example, light is emitted in red, etc.]
The second light emission state is a state in which light is emitted in the second light emission mode [for example, blue light emission].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the first display is a notice display [e.g., a notice display such as a cut-in image or a notification for notifying that a big hit will be made]
The second display is a notice display [e.g., as shown in FIG. 151 (i), forewarning that the transition to super reach is made by gathering three Tono-sama symbols YM1 to YM3, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “one display among the plurality of types of display is a display instructing to select one option from a plurality of options (hereinafter referred to as“ selection display [for example, a character selection effect shown in FIG. Or a display when the volume is indicated by the cursor CL on the adjustment screen shown in FIG. 183 (c), or a display when the light quantity is indicated by the cursor CL, etc.].
One of the plurality of types of display is a first option of the plurality of options [for example, the princess character image H shown in FIG. 173, the volume “10” setting, or the light intensity “10”. Displayed on the display screen (hereinafter referred to as “fifth display [for example, a display in which the princess character image H shown in FIG. 173 is displayed brightly in the center of the display screen, Display in a display mode with a setting of “10” or display in a display mode with a light intensity setting of “10”, etc.] ”).
The fifth display may be started when the operation means is operated two or more times [for example, twice or five times] after the selection display is started. Display,
The fifth display is a display that does not start when the operation means is pressed and held only once after the selection display is displayed [for example, the long-press automatic continuous hitting function is invalid. In the case of the state, the princess character image H shown in FIG. 173 is not selected only by the long press operation by the effect button 136, and the long press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled. The display in the display mode in which the volume setting shown in FIG. 183 (c) is “10” is not selected only by the long press operation with the right button 137d, or the long press automatic continuous hitting function is disabled. In such a case, the display in the display mode in which the light amount setting shown in FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

Further, “the fifth display starts when the number of operations of the operation means is the first number [for example, 2 times, 5 times, etc.] after the display of the selection display is started. Display,
The first number of times is two or more times.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “when the operation unit is pressed for a long time after the display of the third display is started [for example, when the effect button 136 is operated for 4 seconds, etc.], the operation unit is repeatedly hit. The display of the first display may be started as a thing [For example, as shown in FIG. 160, when the effect button 136 is operated for 4 seconds, the operation means is simulated. Display regarding the result of the operation as if it has been operated 20 times (such as a notice display such as a cut-in image or a notice that a big hit will be announced, etc.)],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “long press” means that the state in which the operation means is operated is maintained for a predetermined time [for example, 4 seconds, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “one of the plurality of states for accepting the operation of the operation means is a first state,
One state of the plurality of states that accept the operation of the operation means is a second state,
The second state is a state different from the first state,
The third display is a display displayed in the first state [for example, as shown in FIG. 160 (d) to FIG. Etc.]
The fourth display is a display displayed in the second state [for example, the characters “PUSH” are displayed on each of the effect button images BT1 to BT3 shown in FIGS. 151 (b) to (h). Displayed display etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the first state is a state of accepting an operation for starting display of the first display [in other words, the first state is a state of accepting an operation of the operation means. In the first state, the display of the first display may be started when the operation means is repeatedly hit. ],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the second state is a state in which an operation for starting display of the second display is received [in other words, the second state is a state in which an operation of the operation unit is received. In the second state, the display of the second display may be started when the operation means is operated two or more times. ],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the first state is a state that ends when a predetermined time [for example, 5 seconds or the like] has elapsed since the first state was reached.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the second state is a state that ends when a predetermined time [for example, the remaining time shown in the remaining time meters MT1 to MT3 shown in FIG. 151] has elapsed since the second state was reached. Is,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the second display includes a second number of times of operation of the operation means after the display of the fourth display is started [for example, three times, and the first number ( Display is started when the number of times is different from 2 or 5)
The second number of times is two or more times.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the third display is a display including the first image,
The first image includes an image [for example, an effect button image BT shown in FIG. 160 (d)] showing an appearance of the operation means [for example, an effect as shown in FIG. 160 (d). The image including the characters “Let's hit repeatedly” together with the button image BT]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the fourth display is a display including a plurality of second images,
The second image is an image [for example, an effect button image BT1, BT2, BT3, etc. shown in FIG. 151 (b)] showing an appearance of the operation means [for example, shown in FIG. 151 (b). Thus, the image including the characters “PUSH” together with the effect button image BT1, the image including the characters “PUSH” together with the effect button image BT2, and the image including the images including the characters “PUSH” together with the effect button image BT3]. is there,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the second image is an image having a display mode different from that of the first image.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
“A game machine equipped with a first operation means [eg, a production button 136, etc.]
It is configured to be able to perform multiple types of productions,
One of the plurality of types of effects is a first effect [for example, an effect that is executed when the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD is full as shown in FIG. 159 or 160, etc.]
One of the multiple types of effects is a second effect [for example, an effect in which the light emitting units LL and LR are lit in the repeated operation effects shown in FIGS. 178 (c) to (e)). Yes,
The first operation means is operated in the first operation mode [for example, repeated operation or multiple operations (the operation mode by the continuous operation and the operation mode by the multiple operation include the same operation modes; the same applies hereinafter). Etc.], the first effect may be started [for example, as shown in FIG. 159, when the effect button 136 is operated repeatedly and the gauge of the continuous impact meter RD becomes full. As a result of success, there may be a notice display such as a cut-in image or a notice that a big hit will be announced]
When the first operation means is operated in the first operation mode [for example, operated multiple times], the second effect may be started [for example, as shown in FIG. 178 (e) When the player performs a continuous hitting operation on the effect button 136, all LEDs of the light emitting units LL and LR may emit red light.
When the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode [for example, a long press operation or the like], the first effect may be started [for example, as shown in FIG. When a long press operation by 136 is performed, the continuous hit operation is simulated by the long press automatic continuous hitting function, and as a result, if the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD is full, the cut-in image Etc., and notices may be given to announce that it will be a big hit]
When the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the second effect is not started. [For example, in the continuous hit operation effect shown in FIG. 178, the long press automatic continuous hit function is disabled. Therefore, when the effect button 136 is operated for a long time, all the LEDs of the light emitting units LL and LR do not emit red light, etc.]
The second effect is an effect executed by a second effect means [for example, the light emitting units LL, LR, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  In the conventional game machine, there is room for improvement in production, but according to the present invention, it is possible to provide a game machine characterized by production.

  Here, the first performance may be executed only in response to the first operation means being operated in the first operation mode, or the first operation means may be the first operation means. It may be executed depending on a thing other than being operated in one operation mode. In addition, the first performance may be always executed in response to the first operation means being operated in the first operation mode, or the first operation means is the first operation mode. There may be cases where it is not executed in response to the operation performed at.

  In addition, the second effect may be executed only in response to the first operation means being operated in the first operation mode, or the first operation means may be the first operation means. It may be executed depending on other than the operation in the operation mode. In addition, the second performance may be always executed in response to the first operation means being operated in the first operation mode, or the first operation means is the first operation mode. There may be cases where it is not executed in response to the operation performed at.

  Further, the first effect may be executed only when the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, or the first operation means may be the second operation. It may be executed in cases other than the case of being operated in a mode. In addition, the first performance may be always executed when the first operation unit is operated in the second operation mode, or the first operation unit is operated in the second operation mode. If it is done, it may not be executed.

  In addition, the second effect may not start even if the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, or the first operation means is in the second operation mode. The operation may not always start when operated in step 1, or may be started when the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode.

  The second effect may be executed only by the second effect means, or may be executed other than the second effect means. In addition, the second effect may be always executed by the second effect means, or may not be executed by the second effect means.

  Further, the second effect may be an effect that is executed including at least the second effect means, and may be an effect that is executed only by the second effect means. The effect may be executed including the effect means other than the second effect means. When the second effect is executed by a plurality of effect means, the second effect may be an effect in which the second effect means and the effect means other than the second effect means are executed simultaneously. Good. The effect is a concept included in the production (hereinafter the same).

In addition, the second rendering means is a light emitting means,
“The effect performed by the second effect means” means “the second effect means is the second light emission mode [for example, approximately 1/2 from the lower end of the light emitting portions LL, LR shown in FIG. 178 (c)”. A mode in which the LED emits yellow light up to a height of 4, a mode in which the LED emits green light up to a height of about 2/3 from the lower end of the light emitting portions LL and LR shown in FIG. ), An effect executed by emitting light in a manner in which all LEDs of the light emitting units LL and LR emit light in red, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, the “second rendering means is a means capable of emitting light in a first light emission mode [for example, a predetermined light emission mode during a symbol variation display or a big hit game, etc.]
The first light-emitting mode is a light-emitting mode different from the second light-emitting mode [for example, the light-emitting modes of the light-emitting portions LL and LR shown in FIG. 178 (c) to FIG. Etc., which is different from the light emission mode during the display or during the big hit game]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the second rendering means may be capable of emitting light only in the first light emitting mode, or may be capable of emitting light in modes other than the first light emitting mode. Further, the second rendering means may necessarily emit light in the first light emission mode, or may not emit light in the first light emission mode.

  In addition, the first light emission mode may be partially different from the second light emission mode, or all may be different.

In addition, “first rendering means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208 etc.],
The first rendering means is first image display means,
The first effect is an effect executed by the first effect means [for example, as shown in FIG. 159, the repetitive operation by the effect button 136 is performed, and the gauge of the repetitive hitting meter RD becomes full. In such a case, a notice display such as a cut-in image, which is executed as if the production was successful, and a notice that a big hit is made is performed by the decorative symbol display device 208],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first effect may be executed only by the first effect means, or may be executed by an effect means other than the first effect means. In addition, the first effect may be always executed by the first effect means, or may not be executed by the first effect means.

  Further, the first effect may be an effect that is executed including at least the first effect means, and may be an effect that is executed only by the first effect means. An effect that is executed including effect means other than the first effect means may also be used. When the first effect is executed by a plurality of effect means, the first effect may be an effect in which the first effect means and the effect means other than the first effect means are executed simultaneously. Good.

In addition, “
The third rendering means is a movable means,
The second effect means is a means provided in the third effect means [for example, as shown in FIG. 178, the left image display device 209L provided with the light emitting portions LL and LR and the right image display The device 209R is a means that can be moved by a slide drive motor, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the third rendering means may be composed only of movable means, or may include means other than the movable means. Further, the third rendering means may necessarily include movable means, or may not include movable means.

  Further, the second effect means may be provided only in the third effect means, or may be provided in addition to the third effect means. Further, the second effect means may be always provided in the third effect means, or may not be provided in the third effect means.

In addition, “fourth effect means [for example, the left image display device 209L and the right image display device 209R shown in FIG. 178, etc.]
The fourth rendering means is a second image display means,
The fourth effect means is means provided in the third effect means [For example, as shown in FIG. 178, the left image display device 209L and the right image display device 209R are driven by a slide drive motor. Movable means, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the fourth effect means may consist of only the second image display means, or may include means other than the second image display means. Further, the fourth effect means may necessarily include the second image display means, or may not include the second image display means.

  Further, the fourth effect means may be provided only in the third effect means, or may be provided in addition to the third effect means. Further, the fourth effect means may be always provided in the third effect means, or may not be provided in the third effect means.

In addition, it is provided with a symbol display means [for example, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a decorative symbol display device 208, etc.] capable of displaying a symbol variation display,
The first effect is an effect that may be started during the display of the symbol variation display [for example, executed when the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD shown in FIGS. 159 and 160 is full. The production will start during the symbol variation display, etc.]
The second effect is an effect that may be started during display of the symbol variation display [for example, in the repeated operation effects shown in FIGS. 178 (c) to (e), the light emitting units LL, The effect that the LR lights up is started during the symbol variation display, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the symbol display means may be capable of displaying only the symbol variation display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the symbol variation display. The symbol display means may always display the symbol variation display or may not display the symbol variation display.

  The first effect may be started only during the display of the symbol variation display, or may be started other than during the display of the symbol variation display. Good. In addition, the first effect may be always started while the symbol variation display is being displayed, or may not be started while the symbol variation display is being displayed.

  In addition, the second effect may be started only during the display of the symbol variation display, or may be started other than during the display of the symbol variation display. Good. Further, the second effect may be always started during the display of the symbol variation display, or may not be started during the display of the symbol variation display.

In addition, when the first operation unit is operated in the second operation mode [for example, when the production button 136 is operated for 4 seconds, etc.], the first operation unit is operated in the first operation mode. In some cases, the first effect is started [for example, as shown in FIG. 160, when the effect button 136 is operated for 4 seconds, the operation means is operated pseudo 20 times. Display related to the result of the operation (such as a notice display such as a cut-in image or a notice that a big hit will be announced)],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, when the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, only the first effect may be started as the first operation means is operated in the first operation mode. Alternatively, when the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, an effect other than the first effect is also started as if the first operation means was operated in the first operation mode. There may be. In addition, when the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the first effect may be surely started assuming that the first operation means is operated in the first operation mode, When one operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the first effect may not be started as the first operation means is operated in the first operation mode.

In addition, ““ operation in the first operation mode ”means“ multiple operations ”.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In other words, “operation in the first operation mode” in “the first operation may be started when the first operation means is operated in the first operation mode” It is a continuous hitting operation,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
It can be said.

Further, in other words, “when the first operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first effect may be started” “operation in the first operation mode” Means multiple operations,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
It can also be said.

In addition, ““ operation in the second operation mode ”means“ long press operation ”.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the long press operation is an operation in which the operated state is maintained for a predetermined time [eg, 4 seconds],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, the production mode of the second production is a production mode different from the production mode of the first production.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the effect aspect of the second effect may be partially different from the effect aspect of the first effect, or may be entirely different.

In addition, “The game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, the game table is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
“A game machine equipped with a first operation means [eg, a production button 136, etc.]
It is configured to be able to perform multiple types of productions,
One of the plurality of types of effects is a first effect [for example, an effect that is executed when the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD is full as shown in FIG. 159 or 160, etc.]
One of the plurality of types of effects is a second effect [for example, in the back button repeated striking effects shown in FIG. 179 (e) to FIG. And the effect that the effect image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]
The first operation means is operated in the first operation mode [for example, repeated operation or multiple operations (the operation mode by the continuous operation and the operation mode by the multiple operation include the same operation modes; the same applies hereinafter). Etc.], the first effect may be started [for example, as shown in FIG. 159, when the effect button 136 is operated repeatedly and the gauge of the continuous impact meter RD becomes full. As a result of the successful performance, a notice display such as a cut-in image or a notice that a big hit will be announced]
When the first operation means is operated in the first operation mode [for example, operated multiple times], the second effect may be started [for example, FIG. 179 (e) to FIG. h) When the player repeatedly operates the effect button 136 in the back button repeated effect shown in h), the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 emit green or red, or an effect image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Etc.],
The production mode of the second production is a production mode different from the production mode of the first production,
When the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode [for example, a long press operation or the like], the first effect may be started [for example, as shown in FIG. When a long press operation by 136 is performed, the continuous hit operation is simulated by the long press automatic continuous hitting function, and as a result, if the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD is full, the cut-in image Etc., and notices to announce that it will be a big hit]
When the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the second effect is not started. [For example, in the back-button repeated hitting effect shown in FIG. Therefore, when the effect button 136 is operated for a long time, the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 do not emit green or red, and the effect image is not displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208].
The second production is a back button production,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  In the conventional game machine, there is room for improvement in production, but according to the present invention, it is possible to provide a game machine characterized by production.

  Here, the first performance may be executed only in response to the first operation means being operated in the first operation mode, or the first operation means may be the first operation means. It may be executed depending on a thing other than being operated in one operation mode. In addition, the first performance may be always executed in response to the first operation means being operated in the first operation mode, or the first operation means is the first operation mode. There may be cases where it is not executed in response to the operation performed at.

  In addition, the second effect may be executed only in response to the first operation means being operated in the first operation mode, or the first operation means may be the first operation means. It may be executed depending on other than the operation in the operation mode. In addition, the second performance may be always executed in response to the first operation means being operated in the first operation mode, or the first operation means is the first operation mode. There may be cases where it is not executed in response to the operation performed at.

  In addition, the production mode of the second production may be partly different from the production mode of the first production, or may be entirely different.

  Further, the first effect may be executed only when the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, or the first operation means may be the second operation. It may be executed in cases other than the case of being operated in a mode. In addition, the first performance may be always executed when the first operation unit is operated in the second operation mode, or the first operation unit is operated in the second operation mode. If it is done, it may not be executed.

  In addition, the second effect may not start even if the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, or the first operation means is in the second operation mode. The operation may not always start when operated in step 1, or may be started when the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode.

In addition, “first rendering means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208 etc.],
The first rendering means is an image display means,
The first effect is an effect executed by the first effect means [for example, as shown in FIG. 159, the repetitive operation by the effect button 136 is performed, and the gauge of the repetitive hitting meter RD becomes full. In such a case, a notice display such as a cut-in image, which is executed as if the production was successful, and a notice that a big hit is made is performed by the decorative symbol display device 208],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first effect may be executed only by the first effect means, or may be executed by an effect means other than the first effect means. In addition, the first effect may be always executed by the first effect means, or may not be executed by the first effect means.

  Further, the first effect may be an effect that is executed including at least the first effect means, and may be an effect that is executed only by the first effect means. An effect that is executed including effect means other than the first effect means may also be used. When the first effect is executed by a plurality of effect means, the first effect may be an effect in which the first effect means and the effect means other than the first effect means are executed simultaneously. Good. The effect is a concept included in the production (hereinafter the same).

In addition, “the first effect is an effect executed by the first effect means” means that “the first effect is the first display by the first effect means [for example, As shown in FIG. 159, when a continuous hitting operation is performed by the effect button 136 and the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD becomes full, a notice display such as a cut-in image, which is executed when the effect is successful, is a big hit. It is an effect that is executed by displaying a notification etc. for notifying that ”.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the second effect is an effect executed by the first effect means [for example, the decorative symbol display device 208 in the back button repeated effect shown in FIGS. 179 (e) to (h)”. Effect images displayed on the
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the second effect may be executed only by the first effect means, or may be executed by an effect means other than the first effect means. The second effect may be always executed by the first effect means, or may not be executed by the first effect means.

  Further, the second effect is an effect that is executed including at least the first effect means, and may be an effect that is executed only by the first effect means. An effect that is executed including effect means other than the first effect means may also be used. In addition, when the second effect is executed by a plurality of effect means, the second effect may be an effect in which the first effect means and the effect means other than the first effect means are simultaneously executed. Good.

In addition, ““ the second effect is an effect executed by the first effect means ”means that“ the second effect is the second display [for example, 179 (e) to (h) are effects produced by displaying an effect image or the like displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in the back button repeated strike effect shown in FIG. 179 (e) ”.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, it includes “second effect means [for example, effect lamps SL1 to SL4, etc.]
The second rendering means is a light emitting means,
The second effect is an effect executed by the second effect means [for example, an effect on the decorative symbol display device 208 in the back button repeated effect shown in FIGS. Etc.)
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the second effect may be executed only by the second effect means, or may be executed by an effect means other than the second effect means. In addition, the second effect may be always executed by the second effect means, or may not be executed by the second effect means.

  Further, the second effect may be an effect that is executed including at least the second effect means, and may be an effect that is executed only by the second effect means. The effect may be executed including the effect means other than the second effect means. When the second effect is executed by a plurality of effect means, the second effect may be an effect in which the second effect means and the effect means other than the second effect means are executed simultaneously. Good.

In addition, ““ the second effect is an effect executed by the second effect means ”means“ the second effect is that the second effect means is the second light emitting mode [for example, 179 (e) to (h) in the back button repeated striking effect, the effect lamps SL1 to SL4 are effects executed by emitting light in a green or red light emission mode. Is,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “notification means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, effect button lamp 138, etc.]
The notification means is a notification that prompts the first operation means to perform an operation (hereinafter referred to as “operation notification [for example, an effect button that prompts the user to press the effect button 136 by the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 159 (d)”. The display of the image BT, the display of the character “Let's hit repeatedly,” the display of the remaining time meter MT, and the red light emission by the effect button lamp 138].
The back button effect is the second time period during which the operation notification is not performed [for example, the operation reception period related to the back button repeated effect shown in FIGS. 179 (d) to (h)]. It is an effect that may be started in response to one operating means being operated in the first operating mode [for example, continuous hitting operation, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the notification means may perform only notification for prompting an operation for the first operation means, or may perform notification for prompting an operation other than the operation for the first operation means. Further, the notification means may always perform notification that prompts an operation to the first operation means, or may not perform notification that prompts an operation to the first operation means.

  In addition, the back button effect may be started only in response to the first operation means being operated in the first operation mode in the second period when the operation notification is not performed. Alternatively, in the second period in which the operation notification is not performed, the first operation unit may be started in response to operations other than the operation in the first operation mode. Further, in the second period in which the operation notification is not performed, the first operation unit may be surely started in response to the operation in the first operation mode, and the operation notification is not performed. In the second period, the first operation means may not be started in response to being operated in the first operation mode.

Further, in the first period during which the operation notification is performed [for example, the operation reception period related to the repeated operation effect shown in FIGS. 159 (d) to (g), etc.], The first performance may be started in response to being operated in one operation mode [for example, continuous hitting operation, etc.]
In the first period, when the first operation means is operated in a second operation mode [for example, a long press operation or the like], the first effect may be started.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first effect may be started only in response to the first operation means being operated in the first operation mode in the first period in which the operation notification is performed. Alternatively, in the first period in which the operation notification is performed, there may be a case where the first operation means may be started in response to something other than being operated in the first operation mode. . In addition, the first effect may be always started in response to the first operation means being operated in the first operation mode in the first period in which the operation notification is performed, In the first period in which the operation notification is performed, there may be a case where the first operation unit is not started in response to the operation in the first operation mode.

  In addition, the first effect may be started only when the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode in the first period, or the first period The first operating means may be started in cases other than when operated in the second operation mode. In addition, the first effect may be always started when the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode in the first period. In the first period, There may be a case where the operation is not started in response to the first operation means being operated in the second operation mode.

In addition, it is provided with a symbol display means [for example, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a decorative symbol display device 208, etc.] capable of displaying a symbol variation display,
The first effect is an effect that may be started during the display of the symbol variation display [for example, executed when the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD shown in FIGS. 159 and 160 is full. The production will start during the symbol variation display, etc.]
The second effect is an effect that may be started during the display of the symbol variation display [for example, the effect lamps SL1 to SL1 in the back button repeated effect shown in FIGS. 179 (e) to (h). An effect in which SL4 emits light in green or red, and an effect in which an effect image is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 are started during symbol variation display, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the symbol display means may be capable of displaying only the symbol variation display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the symbol variation display. The symbol display means may always display the symbol variation display or may not display the symbol variation display.

  The first effect may be started only during the display of the symbol variation display, or may be started other than during the display of the symbol variation display. Good. In addition, the first effect may be always started while the symbol variation display is being displayed, or may not be started while the symbol variation display is being displayed.

  In addition, the second effect may be started only during the display of the symbol variation display, or may be started other than during the display of the symbol variation display. Good. Further, the second effect may be always started during the display of the symbol variation display, or may not be started during the display of the symbol variation display.

In addition, when the first operation unit is operated in the second operation mode [for example, when the production button 136 is operated for 4 seconds, etc.], the first operation unit is operated in the first operation mode. In some cases, the first effect is started [for example, as shown in FIG. 160, when the effect button 136 is operated for 4 seconds, the operation means is operated pseudo 20 times. Display related to the result of the operation (such as a notice display such as a cut-in image or a notice that a big hit will be announced)],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, when the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, only the first effect may be started as the first operation means is operated in the first operation mode. Alternatively, when the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, an effect other than the first effect is also started as if the first operation means was operated in the first operation mode. There may be. In addition, when the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the first effect may be surely started assuming that the first operation means is operated in the first operation mode, When one operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the first effect may not be started as the first operation means is operated in the first operation mode.

In addition, ““ operation in the first operation mode ”means“ multiple operations ”.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In other words, “operation in the first operation mode” in “the first operation may be started when the first operation means is operated in the first operation mode” It is a continuous hitting operation,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
It can be said.

Further, in other words, “when the first operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the first effect may be started” “operation in the first operation mode” Means multiple operations,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
It can also be said.

In addition, ““ operation in the second operation mode ”means“ long press operation ”.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the long press operation is an operation in which the operated state is maintained for a predetermined time [for example, 4 seconds or the like,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “The game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, the game table is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
In the above description,
“First operation means [eg, production button 136, etc.]
A second operation means (for example, an upper button 137a, a lower button 137b, a left button 137c, a right button 137d, an OK button 137e, a clear button 137f, etc.);
A game machine equipped with
It is configured to display multiple types of display,
One of the plurality of types of displays is a first display [for example, a display displayed when the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD is full as shown in FIGS. 159 and 160, etc.]
One of the plurality of types of display is a second display [for example, a display indicating that “production customization” is selected with the cursor CL shown in FIG. 148 (e), FIG. , Etc., indicating that “Premier Up Mode” is selected with the cursor CL]
The first operation means is operated in the first operation mode [for example, repeated operation or multiple operations (the operation mode by the continuous operation and the operation mode by the multiple operation include the same operation modes; the same applies hereinafter). Etc.], the display of the first display may be started [for example, as shown in FIG. 159, the continuous operation by the effect button 136 is performed, and the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD becomes full. If the presentation is successful in some cases, a notice display such as a cut-in image or a notice that a big hit will be announced]
When the second operation means is operated in the first operation mode [for example, continuous hitting operation or multiple times operation], the display of the second display may be started [for example, FIG. ) To (e), in the case where “volume light intensity adjustment” is selected with the cursor CL on the menu screen, the display indicating that “production customization” is selected with the cursor CL is as follows: When the button 137b is operated twice, and “notification mode” is selected with the cursor CL on the effect customization setting screen as shown in FIGS. 148 (f) and (g1), “Premier” The display indicating that the “up mode” is selected with the cursor CL is displayed by operating the down button 137b twice, etc.],
The display mode of the second display is a display mode different from the display mode of the first display,
When the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode [for example, long press operation etc.], the display of the first display may be started [for example, as shown in FIG. 160, When a long press operation with the effect button 136 is performed, a continuous hit operation is simulated by the long press automatic continuous hitting function, and as a result, when the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD is full, the cutting is successful. In-image notifications, notifications to notify you of a big hit, etc.]
When the second operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the display of the second display is not started [For example, as shown in FIG. 148 (b) to FIG. When “volume light amount adjustment” is selected with the cursor CL, the display indicating that “production customization” is selected with the cursor CL is not displayed when the down button 137b is operated for a long time. As shown in FIGS. 148 (f) and (g1), when the “notification mode” is selected with the cursor CL on the effect customization setting screen, the “premier up mode” is selected with the cursor CL. Is not displayed when the lower button 137b is operated for a long time, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  In the conventional game machine, there is room for improvement in display, but according to the present invention, a game machine having a display characteristic can be provided.

  Here, the first display may be displayed only in response to the first operation means being operated in the first operation mode, or the first operation means may be the first operation means. It may be displayed in response to things other than being operated in one operation mode. Further, the first display may be always displayed in response to the first operation means being operated in the first operation mode, or the first operation means is the first operation mode. It may not be displayed in response to an operation performed at.

  The second display may be displayed only in response to the second operation means being operated in the first operation mode, or the second operation means may be the first operation means. It may be displayed in response to things other than being operated in the operation mode. Further, the second display may be always displayed in response to the second operation means being operated in the first operation mode, or the second operation means is the first operation mode. It may not be displayed in response to an operation performed at.

  The display mode of the second display may be partially different from the display mode of the first display, or may be entirely different.

  The first display may be started only when the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, or the first operation means may be the second operation mode. The display may be started in cases other than the case of being operated in the operation mode. The first display may be started when the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, or the first operation means is in the second operation mode. There may be a case where the display is not started when operated.

The second display may be a display that may not start even if the second operation means is operated in the second operation mode, or the second operation means may be the second operation means. It may be that the display is not always started when operated in the mode, or the display may be started when the second operation means is operated in the second operation mode.
The effect is a concept included in the production (hereinafter the same).

In addition, the second display is a display when one of a plurality of options is selected [for example, “volume light amount adjustment” in the menu screen shown in FIG. 148 (e), Display when “Production customization” of “Member registration”, “Production customization” and “Operation assistance settings” is selected with the cursor CL, “Normal” on the production customization setting screen shown in FIG. Mode "," single announcement mode "," premier up mode "of" premier up mode "is displayed when the cursor CL is selected, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the second display is a display displayed on a setting screen [for example, the menu screen shown in FIG. 148, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the second display may be displayed only on the setting screen, or may be displayed on a screen other than the setting screen. The second display may be displayed on the setting screen without fail, or may not be displayed on the setting screen.

In addition, “the setting screen is a screen including a display for instructing to select one option from among a plurality of options [for example, the menu screen shown in FIG. Includes a display to instruct you to select one option from “Registration”, “Production customization”, and “Operation assistance settings”, and select one option from “Normal mode”, “One notification mode”, and “Premier up mode” Including a display to instruct you to select],
One of the plurality of types of display is a third display,
The third display is a display that is displayed when the first option of the plurality of options is selected [for example, “volume light amount adjustment”, “on the menu screen shown in FIG. Display when “Volume light intensity adjustment” of “member registration”, “production customization”, “operation assistance setting” is selected with the cursor CL, or in the production customization setting screen shown in FIG. [Display when the “normal mode” of the “normal mode”, “single notification mode”, and “premier up mode” is selected with the cursor CL]
The second display is a display that is displayed when a second option of the plurality of options is selected [for example, “volume light amount adjustment”, “on the menu screen shown in FIG. The display when “Production customization” of “Member registration”, “Production customization” and “Operation assistance setting” is selected with the cursor CL, or “Production customization setting” screen shown in FIG. Display when the cursor CL is selected as the “premier up mode” among the “normal mode”, “single notification mode”, and “premier up mode”
If the second operation means is operated in the first operation mode when the third display is displayed, the display of the second display may be started [for example, FIG. As shown in (b) to (e) in the same figure, when “volume light intensity adjustment” is selected with the cursor CL on the menu screen, when the down button 137b is operated twice, “production customization” is displayed as the cursor. When the display indicating that the item is selected by CL is started and “notification mode” is selected by the cursor CL on the effect customization setting screen, as shown in FIGS. 148 (f) and (g1), When the down button 137b is operated twice, a display indicating that “Premier Up Mode” is selected with the cursor CL is started, etc.],
If the second operation means is operated in the second operation mode when the third display is displayed, the display of the second display is not started [for example, FIG. 148 (b). As shown in FIG. 5E, when “volume light intensity adjustment” is selected with the cursor CL on the menu screen, if the down button 137b is operated for a long time, “effect customization” is set with the cursor CL. When the display indicating that it is selected is not started, and “notification mode” is selected with the cursor CL on the effect customization setting screen, as shown in FIGS. 148 (f) and (g1), When the lower button 137b is operated for a long time, the display indicating that the “Premier Up Mode” is selected with the cursor CL is not displayed, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the setting screen may include only a display for instructing to select one option from a plurality of options, or an instruction to select one option from the plurality of options. Display other than the display to be included may be included. In addition, the setting screen may necessarily include a display for instructing to select one option from among a plurality of options, or instructing to select one option from among a plurality of options. There may be no indication.

  Further, the third display may be displayed only when the first option of the plurality of options is selected, or the first option of the plurality of options is selected. It may be displayed other than the case. Further, the third display may be displayed when the first option of the plurality of options is selected, or the first option of the plurality of options is selected. It may not be displayed.

  The second display may be displayed only when the second option of the plurality of options is selected, or the second option of the plurality of options is selected. It may be displayed other than the case. Further, the second display may be displayed when the second option of the plurality of options is selected, or the second option of the plurality of options is selected. It may not be displayed.

  The second display may start only when the second operation means is operated in the first operation mode when the third display is displayed. Alternatively, when the third display is displayed, the display may be started even when the second operation means is operated in the first operation mode. Further, the second display may be a display that is surely started when the second operation means is operated in the first operation mode when the third display is displayed, When the third display is displayed, the display may not be started when the second operation means is operated in the first operation mode.

  Further, the second display may be one in which the display is not started other than when the second operation means is operated in the second operation mode when the third display is displayed, When the third display is displayed, the display may not always start when the second operation means is operated in the second operation mode, or the third display is displayed. In some cases, the display may be started when the second operation means is operated in the second operation mode.

In addition, the second display is performed when the second display is operated N times (N ≧ 2 [for example, twice, etc.]) when the third display is displayed. [For example, in the menu screen shown in FIGS. 148 (b) to (e), the display indicating that “production customization” is selected with the cursor CL is “volume”. When the display indicating that “light amount adjustment” is selected with the cursor CL is displayed, the display is started when the down button 137b is pressed twice, or on the effect customization setting screen, The display indicating that “Premier Up Mode” is selected with the cursor CL is displayed when the display indicating that “Notification Mode” is selected with the cursor CL is displayed. 7b will start the display when there are two pressing operations, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the second display may be a display that may be started only when the second operation means performs N operations when the third display is displayed. In addition, when the third display is displayed, the display may be started even in a case other than the case where the second meeting is operated by the second operation unit. The second display may always be started when the third display is displayed and the second operation means has been operated N times. May be displayed when the N operation is performed by the second operation means.

In addition, “image display means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208 etc.],
The first display is a display that is displayed by the image display means [For example, as shown in FIG. 159, a notice display such as a cut-in image or the like in a repetitive strike operation effect, or a notice that a big hit is announced. , Displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, etc.]
The second display is a display displayed by the image display means [for example, “production customization” on the menu screen shown in FIGS. 148 (b) to (e) is selected with the cursor CL. 148 (f) and (g1), the display indicating that “Premier Up Mode” on the effect customization setting screen is selected with the cursor CL is a decorative symbol display device. 208, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first display may be displayed only by the image display means, or may be displayed by other than the image display means. In addition, the first display may be displayed by the image display unit without fail, or may not be displayed by the image display unit.

  Further, the second display may be displayed only by the image display means, or may be displayed by other than the image display means. In addition, the second display may be displayed by the image display unit without fail, or may not be displayed by the image display unit.

In addition, it is provided with a symbol display means [for example, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a decorative symbol display device 208, etc.] capable of displaying a symbol variation display,
The first display is a display that may be started during the display of the symbol variation display [for example, executed when the gauge of the continuous hitting meter RD shown in FIGS. 159 and 160 is full. The production will start during the symbol variation display, etc.]
The second display is a display that does not start during the display of the symbol variation display [for example, “production customization” on the menu screen shown in FIGS. 148 (b) to (e) is selected with the cursor CL. 148 (f) and (g1) shown in FIG. 148 (g1) indicate that “Premier Up Mode” on the effect customization setting screen is selected with the cursor CL. It will not start while it is displayed]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the symbol display means may be capable of displaying only the symbol variation display, or may be capable of displaying a display other than the symbol variation display. The symbol display means may always display the symbol variation display or may not display the symbol variation display.

  In addition, the first display may start only during the display of the symbol variation display, or may start the display other than during the display of the symbol variation display. May be. In addition, the first display may always be started during the display of the symbol variation display, or may not be started during the display of the symbol variation display.

  Further, the second display may be one that does not start displaying only during the display of the symbol variation display, or may be one that does not start displaying other than during the display of the symbol variation display. In addition, the second display may not always start during the display of the symbol variation display, or may be started during the display of the symbol variation display.

In addition, when the first operation unit is operated in the second operation mode [for example, when the production button 136 is operated for 4 seconds, etc.], the first operation unit is operated in the first operation mode. In some cases, the first display is started [for example, as shown in FIG. 160, when the effect button 136 is operated for 4 seconds, the operation means is operated pseudo 20 times. Display related to the result of the operation (such as a notice display such as a cut-in image or a notice that a big hit will be announced)],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, when the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, only the first display may be started as the first operation means is operated in the first operation mode. Alternatively, when the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the display other than the first display is started as if the first operation means was operated in the first operation mode. There may be cases. Further, when the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the first display may be surely started as if the first operation means was operated in the first operation mode, When the first operation unit is operated in the second operation mode, the first display may not be displayed as the first operation unit is operated in the first operation mode.

In addition, ““ operation in the first operation mode ”means“ multiple operations ”.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In other words, “when the first operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the display of the first display may be started” as “operation in the first operation mode”. Is a continuous operation,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
It can be said.

Further, in other words, “When the first operation means is operated in the first operation mode, the display of the first display may be started”. “Operation” means multiple operations.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
It can also be said.

In addition, ““ operation in the second operation mode ”means“ long press operation ”.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the long press operation is an operation in which the operated state is maintained for a predetermined time [eg, 4 seconds],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “The game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, the game table is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
“Operating means provided at a position where the player can operate [for example, an effect button 136, an operation key unit 137, etc.]
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect displays [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first decorative symbol display device 208L, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.];
A game machine equipped with
The game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like]
One of the plurality of types of effect display is a first effect display,
One of the plurality of types of effect display is a second effect display,
The first effect display is an effect display related to the decorative symbol variation display [for example, the change icon change effect shown in FIGS. 98 (c) to (n), FIG. 109 (g) to FIG. i) Button notice effect, etc.
The second effect display is a mini game effect display [for example, the mini game shown in FIGS. 98 (d) to (k) or the button notice shown in FIGS. 108 (m) to 109 (f). Production etc.]
The first effect display is a first operation promotion display [for example, the button hold icon display shown in FIG. 98 (c) to FIG. 98 (j), and FIG. 109 (g) to FIG. And a button image 136a that is rotating and a display of “Push”, etc.]
The second effect display is a second operation promotion display [for example, the display of the button image 136a shown in FIG. 98 (e) to FIG. 98 (f) or the display of FIG. 108 (r) to FIG. Button image 136a and display of “continuous hit” etc.]
The first operation promotion display is a display prompting the operation of the operation means,
The second operation promotion display is a display prompting the operation of the operation means,
The first operation promotion display and the second operation promotion display are different operation promotion displays,
The first effect display is a jackpot notice (hereinafter referred to as “first notice [for example, as shown in FIG. 98 (k)], the hold icon is displayed in a pre-read notice display form (circular and blue display form). For example, a pre-reading advance notice or a notice by displaying the strong cut-in image CI1a shown in FIG. 109 (i) or the weak cut-in image CI1b shown in FIG. 109 (i ′)]. It is a certain production display,
The second effect display is a notice related to the first notice (hereinafter, “second notice [for example, as shown in FIG. 98 (h) to FIG. , A notice that the reliability of the look-ahead notice in the hold icon is increased by one level, or a display of “Daiyoshi” as shown in FIG. Notice announcement etc.] ”)).
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  According to the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game stand, it is possible to provide a game stand having a feature in the display means.

  Conventionally, a game table for performing a mini game has been provided in order to enhance the interest of the game. However, there is room for improvement in mini-games. According to this game machine, a game machine having a feature of a mini game can be provided.

  In addition, according to this game stand, there is a case where it is possible to focus on the second notice that affects the first notice.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, there are cases where the operation means can be actively operated in order to reach the first notice.

  Here, the operation means may be provided only at a position where the player can operate, or may be provided at a position other than the position where the player can operate. Further, the operation means may be always provided at a position where the player can operate, or may not be provided at a position where the player can operate.

  Further, the operation means may be provided at a position where only the player can operate, or may be provided at a position where a person other than the player can operate. Further, the operating means may be provided at a position where the player can always operate, or may be provided at a position where the player cannot operate.

  In addition, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of effect display, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the plurality of types of effect display. The display means may always display a plurality of types of effect displays, or may not display a plurality of types of effect displays.

  Further, the plurality of types of effect display may be only the first effect display and the second effect display, or may include effect display other than the first effect display and the second effect display.

  The first effect display may be related only to the decorative symbol variation display, or may be related to other than the decorative symbol variation display. The first effect display may always be related to the decorative symbol variation display, or may not be related to the decorative symbol variation display.

  Further, the first effect display may include only the first operation promotion display, or may include displays other than the first operation promotion display. Further, the first effect display may necessarily include the first operation promotion display, or may not include the first operation promotion display.

  The second effect display may include only the second operation promotion display, or may include displays other than the second operation promotion display. Further, the second effect display may necessarily include the second operation promotion display, or may not include the second operation promotion display.

  In addition, the first effect display may be executed only in the first notice or may be executed in addition to the first notice. Further, the first effect display may be one in which the first notice is always executed, or the first notice may not be executed.

  In addition, the second effect display may be such that only the notice related to the first notice may be derived, or other than the notice related to the first notice may be derived. There may be something. In addition, the second effect display may be such that a notice related to the first notice is always derived, or a notice related to the first notice may not be derived.

Further, “a state in which both the first effect display and the second effect display are displayed (hereinafter referred to as“ first state [for example, as shown in FIG. 98 (d) to FIG. 98 (k)]. The state where both the change effect of the hold icon and the mini game are displayed, or the state where both the button notice effect and the mini game are displayed as shown in FIGS. 110 (c) to (o). Etc.] ”)).
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, there is a case where the player can be informed that the first notice and the second notice are related.

  Here, there may be only the first state, there may be cases other than the first state, it may be the first state, or the first state. It may not be possible.

In addition, when the operation means is operated in the first state, the second notice of the first notice and the second notice is executed [for example, As shown in FIG. 98 (f), when the effect button 136 is operated in a state where both the change effect of the hold icon and the mini game are displayed, the result of the mini game is derived, or FIG. g) to the same figure (l), if the effect button 136 is operated repeatedly in a state where both the button notice effect and the mini game are displayed, the result of the mini game is derived, etc.]
When the operation means is operated after the second notice is started, the first notice corresponding to the second notice is executed [for example, FIG. As shown in (), when the effect button 136 is operated after the mini-game result is derived, as shown in FIG. When the effect button 136 is operated after the mini game result is derived as shown in FIG. 110 (n), as shown in FIG. 110 (n), as shown in FIG. Depending on the result, the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, there is a case where it is possible to focus attention on the second notice that affects the first notice. Therefore, there are cases where the operation means can be actively operated with respect to the mini game.

  Here, when the operation means is operated in the first state, only the second notice of the first notice and the second notice may be executed. When the operation means is operated in this state, a notice other than the second notice of the first notice and the second notice may be executed. In addition, when the operation means is operated in the first state, the second notice of the first notice and the second notice may be executed without fail. If the operation means is operated in the state, the second notice of the first notice and the second notice may not be executed.

  In addition, the configuration may be such that the second notice of the first notice and the second notice is executed only when the operation means is operated in the first condition. In the case where the operation means is operated in step 2, the second notice of the first notice and the second notice may be executed.

  Further, when the operation means is operated after the start of the second notice, only the first notice corresponding to the second notice may be executed. When the operation means is operated after the notice is started, a notice other than the first notice corresponding to the second notice may also be executed. In addition, when the operation means is operated after the second notice is started, the first notice corresponding to the second notice may be executed without fail. When the operation means is operated after the advance notice is started, the first advance notice corresponding to the second advance notice may not be executed.

  Further, the first notice corresponding to the second notice may be executed only when the operation means is operated after the second notice is started, or the second notice may be executed. Even in a case other than when the operation means is operated after the operation is started, only the first notice corresponding to the second notice may be executed.

Further, “in the first state, when the operation means is operated, at least the first notice of the first notice and the second notice is executed [for example, As shown in FIG. 102 (f), when the effect button 136 is operated in a state where both the change effect of the hold icon and the mini game are displayed, the display mode of the hold icon is changed and the result of the mini game is displayed. Or when the effect button 136 is operated in a state where both the change effect of the hold icon and the mini game are displayed, as shown in FIG. 105 (g), the display mode of the hold icon changes. But the mini-game results are not derived, etc.]
After the second notice is executed, the first notice executed in response to the second notice may change [for example, FIG. 102 (g) to FIG. 102 (j), As shown in FIG. 105 (h) to FIG. 105 (m), after the result of the mini game is derived and “hold 1UP” is displayed, the hold icon in the blue display mode changes to the green display mode. etc],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, when the operation means is operated in the first state, only the first notice of the first notice and the second notice may be executed. When the operation means is operated in this state, only the first notice and the second notice of the first notice and the second notice may be executed. When the operation means is operated in the state of, a configuration other than the first notice of the first notice and the second notice may be executed, or in the first state When the operation means is operated, the first notice and the second notice other than the first notice and the second notice may be executed.

  Further, when the operation means is operated in the first state, at least the first notice of the first notice and the second notice may be executed without fail. When the operation means is operated in this state, at least the first notice of the first notice and the second notice may not be executed.

  Further, it may be configured such that at least the first notice of the first notice and the second notice is executed only when the operation means is operated in the first state. Even when the operation means is not operated in the state, at least the first notice of the first notice and the second notice may be executed.

  In addition, after the second notice is executed, only the first notice executed in response to the second notice may change, or after the second notice is executed, A notice other than the first notice executed in response to the second notice may also change. In addition, after the second notice is executed, the first notice executed in response to the second notice may be changed, or after the second notice is executed, the second notice is changed. The first notice executed in response to the notice may not change.

  In addition, the first notice executed in response to the second notice may change only after the second notice is executed, or even after the second notice is executed. The first notice executed in response to the second notice may change.

In the first state, the first effect display is overlapped with the second effect display [For example, as shown in FIGS. 103 (e) to (i), the first decoration is displayed. The change effect of the hold icon performed on the symbol display device 208L is overlapped with the mini game performed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, attention may be paid to the effect display on the mini game side, which is the notice of the first notice, and the expectation for the first notice may be increased.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, there is a case where the mini game side can be prioritized in time series.

  In addition, according to this game table, a notice that affects a notice that may occur in the future is displayed with priority, so that it may be easy to understand even if operation means overlap.

  Here, in the first state, the first effect display may be overlapped only with the second effect display. In the first state, the first effect display is an effect other than the second effect display. The display may be overlapped. Further, in the first state, the first effect display may be necessarily overlapped with the second effect display, and in the first state, the first effect display is not overlapped with the second effect display. There may be cases.

  In addition, the first effect display may be overlapped with the second effect display only in the first state, and the first effect display is also the second effect display in a state other than the first state. May overlap.

In addition, “second valid period [for example, the operation reception period of the effect button 136 in the mini game, etc. shown in FIGS. 98 (e) to (f), FIG. 112 (e) to (g), etc.) ], When the operation means is operated, the second notice is started.
The second effect display is a second effective period display [for example, the button reception time meter MT shown in FIGS. 98 (e) to (f), 112 (e) to (g), etc. ] Is a production display including
The second effective period display is a display whose display mode changes as the second effective period elapses [for example, FIG. 98 (e) to FIG. 98 (f) and FIG. 112 (e) to FIG. As shown in the figure (g) etc., the button reception time meter MT has a display mode that is changed in such a manner that the gauge decreases according to the time since the operation reception time has started],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, by displaying the second effective period, it is possible to prompt the player to derive the result of the mini game early, and thus it may be possible to focus attention on the first notice. .

  Here, when the operation means is operated in the second effective period, only the second notice may be started, or when the operation means is operated in the second effective period, A configuration in which a notice other than the second notice is also started may be used. Further, the second notice may be surely started when the operating means is operated during the second effective period, or when the operating means is operated during the second effective period, The second notice may not be started.

  In addition, the configuration may be such that the second notice is started only when the operation means is operated during the second effective period, or when the operation means is operated during the second effective period. Alternatively, the second notice may be started.

  Further, the second effect display may include only the second effective period display, or may include displays other than the second effective period display. Further, the second effect display may necessarily include the second effective period display, or may not include the second effective period display.

In addition, “the first notice is a notice that can be executed in a plurality of modes,
One of the plurality of modes is the first mode [for example, the hold icon in the blue display mode shown in FIG. 98 (k), the weak cut-in image CI1b shown in FIG. 110 (o), etc.] And
One of the plurality of modes is the second mode [for example, the hold icon in the green display mode shown in FIG. 98 (m), the strong cut-in image CI1a shown in FIG. 109 (i), etc.] And
The first aspect and the second aspect are different aspects,
In the event that the first notice is executed in the second mode, the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the first notice is executed in the first mode. Configured,
When the second effect display is started, the first notice is more easily executed in the second mode than when the second effect display is not started.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, there is a case where the first notice can be expected by starting the mini game.

  Here, the first notice may be executable only in a plurality of modes, or may be executable in a mode other than the plurality of modes. Further, the first notice may be necessarily executed in a plurality of modes, or may not be executed in a plurality of modes.

  The first notice may be executable only in the first mode and the second mode, or may be performed in modes other than the first mode and the second mode. Also good. Moreover, the first notice may be necessarily executed in the first mode and the second mode, or may not be executed in the first mode and the second mode.

  Further, when the first notice is executed in the first mode, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is not finally displayed and the first notice is executed in the second mode. In such a case, the jackpot symbol may be displayed in a definitive manner in the end.

  Further, when the second effect display is not started, the first notice may not be executed in the second mode. When the second effect display is started, the second mode is displayed. The first notice may be executed without fail.

In addition, “the second notice is a notice that can be executed in a plurality of modes,
One of the plurality of aspects is a third aspect [for example, display of “Koyoshi” shown in FIG. 114 (l), etc.]
One of the plurality of modes is a fourth mode [for example, display of “Daichi” shown in FIG. 113 (l), etc.]
When the second notice is executed in the fourth mode, the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed.
When the first notice is executed in the second mode [for example, “Mission accomplished” shown in FIG. 113 (n), etc.], the second notice is executed in the fourth mode. Configured to be
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, since it becomes the second mode in the first notice, the jackpot symbol will be finally displayed, so that the expectation of the derived result for the second notice is further improved. There are cases where it is possible.

  Here, the second notice may be executed only in a plurality of modes, or may be executed in a mode other than the plurality of modes. In addition, the second notice may be necessarily executed in a plurality of modes, or may not be executed in a plurality of modes.

  The second notice may be executable only in the third mode and the fourth mode, or may be performed in modes other than the third mode and the fourth mode. Also good. Further, the second notice may be necessarily executed in the third mode and the fourth mode, or may not be executed in the third mode and the fourth mode.

In addition, the first notice is a pre-read notice [for example, the hold icon in the blue display mode shown in FIG. 98 (k) or the green display form in FIG. 98 (m). Icon display etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “the number of the hold icons corresponding to the number of the start of the symbol variation display can be displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. The three hold icons h11, h12, h13 are displayed, etc.
The first notice is a notice made by changing the display mode of the hold icon [For example, as shown in FIGS. 98 (k) and (m), the display form of the hold icon is changed to blue. Pre-reading notice is given by changing to the display mode or green display mode]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
"Game table provided with display means [for example, decorative symbol display device 208, first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.] capable of executing decorative symbol variation display Because
The game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like]
It is configured to run multiple types of mini-games,
One of the plurality of types of mini games is a first mini game [for example, a dice game shown in FIG. 122 (g) to FIG.
One of the plurality of types of mini-games is a second mini-game [for example, the fortune game shown in FIG. 122 (g ′) to FIG. 122 (l ′)],
The first mini-game is a mini-game displayed using a certain display area [for example, the multi-function display area MF1 shown in FIG. 122 (a)]
The second mini game is a mini game displayed using the certain display area,
The first mini game and the second mini game are different mini games.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  According to the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game stand, it is possible to provide a game stand having a feature in the display means.

  Conventionally, a game table for performing a mini game has been provided in order to enhance the interest of the game. However, there is room for improvement in mini-games. According to this game machine, a game machine having a feature of a mini game can be provided.

  In addition, according to this game stand, the display area of the mini game is fixed to “a certain display area”, so that the player may be easy to understand.

  Here, the display means may be capable of executing only the decorative symbol variation display, or may be capable of performing a display other than the decorative symbol variation display. Further, the display means may always execute the decorative symbol variation display, or may not execute the decorative symbol variation display.

  Further, the display means may be constituted by one display means or may be constituted by two or more display means. Further, in the case where the display is composed of two or more display means, the decorative symbol variation display may be performed only on a part of the display means, or the decorative symbol variation display is performed on all the display means. May be used.

  Further, it may be configured such that only a plurality of types of mini games can be executed, or a game other than a plurality of types of mini games can be executed. Further, a plurality of types of mini-games may be executed without fail, or a plurality of types of mini-games may not be executed.

  Further, only the first mini game and the second mini game may be configured to be executable, or a mini game other than the first mini game and the second mini game may be configured to be executable. In addition, the first mini game and the second mini game may be executed without fail, or the first mini game and the second mini game may not be executed. .

  In addition, the first mini game may be displayed using only a certain display area, or may be displayed using an area other than the certain display area. The first mini game may be displayed without using a certain display area, or may be displayed without using a certain display area.

  Further, the second mini game may be displayed using only a certain display area, or may be displayed using an area other than the certain display area. The second mini game may be displayed without using a certain display area, or may be displayed without using a certain display area.

In addition, it includes “notification means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first decorative symbol display device 208L, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.] capable of executing a plurality of preliminary notifications,
One of the plurality of notices is a first notice [e.g., a look-ahead notice according to a blue display mode of a hold icon shown in FIG. 122 (l) or (l ′)],
The first mini-game is referred to as a result (hereinafter referred to as “first result [for example,“ 1UP confirmed ”shown in FIG. 122 (k)]” indicating that the first notice is performed. ) Is a mini-game that can be derived,
The second mini game is a mini game capable of deriving the first result [for example, “1UP confirmed” shown in FIG. 122 (k ′), etc.].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, there is a case where the relationship such as the notice can be easily understood while the variation of the mini game is enjoyed.

  Here, the notice means may be capable of executing only a plurality of notices, or may be capable of executing things other than a plurality of notices. Further, the notice means may always execute a plurality of notices or may not execute a plurality of notices.

  Further, the notice means may be capable of executing only the first notice, or may be capable of executing notices other than the first notice. Further, the notice means may always execute the first notice or may not execute the first notice.

  In addition, the first mini game may be capable of deriving only the first result, or may be capable of deriving results other than the first result. Further, the first mini game may always derive the first result, or may not derive the first result.

  In addition, the second mini game may be capable of deriving only the first result, or may be capable of deriving results other than the first result. The second mini game may always derive the first result, or may not derive the first result.

In addition, “one of the plurality of notices is a second notice [e.g., a pre-read notice by a red display mode of a hold icon shown in FIG. 123 (l) or FIG. ,
The case where the second notice is made rather than the case where the first notice is made is configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily,
The first mini game is referred to as a result (hereinafter referred to as “second result [for example, display of“ 3UP confirmed ”shown in FIG. 123 (k)]” indicating that the second notice is performed. ) Is also a derivable mini-game,
The second mini game is a mini game from which the second result [for example, “3UP confirmed” shown in FIG. 123 (k ′), etc.] can be derived,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, there is a case where it is possible to improve a sense of expectation that a result suggesting that the second notice is performed by the mini game is derived.

  Here, the notice means may be capable of executing only the second notice, or may be capable of executing notices other than the second notice. Further, the notice means may always execute the second notice or may not execute the second notice.

  In addition, the first mini game may be capable of deriving only the second result, or may be capable of deriving results other than the second result. In addition, the first mini game may always derive the second result, or may not derive the second result.

  In addition, the second mini game may be capable of deriving only the second result, or may be capable of deriving results other than the second result. The second mini game may always derive the second result, or may not derive the second result.

In addition, “the first mini game is a mini game in which a first character [for example, a face image BCH of a face length shown in FIG. 122 (g), etc.] may be displayed.
The second mini game is a mini game in which the first character [e.g., a face image BCH of a face length shown in FIG. 122 (g ′)] may be displayed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, even if the type of mini-game is different, the same notice may be given, so that the player may have various expectations.

  Here, the first mini game may be one in which only the first character is displayed, or may be one in which characters other than the first character are also displayed. . In the first mini game, the first character may be displayed without fail, or the first character may not be displayed.

  In addition, the second mini game may be one in which only the first character is displayed, or may be one in which characters other than the first character are also displayed. In the second mini game, the first character may be displayed without fail, or the first character may not be displayed.

In addition, “the first mini game is a mini game in which a first character [for example, a face image BCH of a face length shown in FIG. 122 (g), etc.] may be displayed.
The second mini game is a mini game in which the first character [e.g., a face image BCH or the like shown in FIG. 122 (g ′)] may be displayed.
The first mini game is a mini game in which a second character [for example, a savohani character SBH shown in FIG. 126 (A1)] may be displayed.
The second mini game is a mini game in which a third character [for example, the princess character HM2 shown in FIG. 126 (B1)] may be displayed.
The first character and the second character are different characters,
The first character and the third character are different characters,
The second character and the third character are different characters,
The first mini game is a mini game in which the second result is more easily derived when the second character is displayed than when the first character is displayed.
The second mini game is a mini game in which the second result is more easily derived when the third character is displayed than when the first character is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, there is a case where the expectation for the second result can be given depending on the type of characters appearing in each mini game.

  Here, the first mini game may be one in which only the first character is displayed, or may be one in which characters other than the first character are also displayed. . In the first mini game, the first character may be displayed without fail, or the first character may not be displayed.

  In addition, the second mini game may be one in which only the first character is displayed, or may be one in which characters other than the first character are also displayed. In the second mini game, the first character may be displayed without fail, or the first character may not be displayed.

  In addition, the first mini game may be one in which only the second character is displayed, or may be one in which a character other than the second character is also displayed. In the first mini game, the second character may be displayed without fail, or the second character may not be displayed.

  In addition, the second mini game may be one in which only the third character is displayed, or may be one in which characters other than the third character are also displayed. In the second mini game, the third character may be displayed without fail, or the third character may not be displayed.

  Note that the third character and the fourth character may be the same character or different characters.

  Further, the first mini game may be one in which the second result is not derived when the first character is displayed, or the second mini game when the second character is displayed. The result may be always derived.

  In addition, the second mini-game may be one in which the second result is not derived when the first character is displayed, or the second mini-game when the third character is displayed. The result may be always derived.

The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect display,
One of the plurality of types of effect display is a first effect display [for example, the heel mode shown in FIG. 124 (A1) to FIG. 124 (A6)],
One of the plurality of types of effect display is a second effect display [for example, the princess mode shown in FIG. 124 (B1) to FIG. 124 (B6), etc.]
The first effect display is an effect display that may be displayed during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display [For example, as shown in FIGS. 124A1 to A6, the heel mode is a decoration. Displayed during execution of symbol variation display],
The second effect display is an effect display that may be displayed during execution of the decorative symbol variation display [for example, as shown in FIGS. 124 (B1) to (B6), the princess mode is a decoration. Displayed during execution of symbol variation display],
The first effect display and the second effect display are different effect displays,
The first mini game [e.g., a dice game] is a mini game that is more easily executed during the display of the first effect display than during the display of the second effect display,
The second mini game [for example, a fortune game, etc.] is a mini game that is more easily executed during display of the second effect display than during display of the first effect display.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, there is a case where the main effect and the mini game can be associated with each other.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of effect display, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the plurality of types of effect display. The display means may always display a plurality of types of effect displays, or may not display a plurality of types of effect displays.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the first effect display and the second effect display, or capable of displaying an effect display other than the first effect display and the second effect display. It may be. The display means may always display the first effect display and the second effect display, or may not display the first effect display and the second effect display.

  The first effect display may be displayed only during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display, or may be displayed other than during the execution of the decoration symbol variation display. There may be. In addition, the first effect display may be always displayed during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display, or may be not displayed during the execution of the decoration symbol variation display.

  Further, the second effect display may be displayed only during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display, or may be displayed other than during the execution of the decoration symbol variation display. There may be. Further, the second effect display may be always displayed during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display, or may be not displayed during the execution of the decoration symbol variation display.

  Further, the first mini game may not be executed during the display of the second effect display, or may be executed without fail during the display of the first effect display.

  In addition, the second mini game may not be executed during the display of the first effect display, or may be always executed during the display of the second effect display.

In addition, “It is configured to be able to transition to multiple types of gaming state,
One of the plurality of types of gaming states is a first gaming state [e.g., a normal gaming state (such as a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state)],
One of the plurality of types of gaming states is a second gaming state [e.g., probability variation state (special figure high probability normal figure high probability state) etc.],
The first gaming state and the second gaming state are gaming states in which the second gaming state is more advantageous,
The first gaming state and the second gaming state have different probabilities of executing the plurality of types of mini games.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, since the execution probability of the mini game differs depending on the gaming state, the expectation for the mini game to be executed may be changed depending on the gaming state.

  Here, it may be configured to be able to transition only to a plurality of types of gaming states, or may be configured to be able to transition to a state other than a plurality of gaming states. Moreover, it may be configured to always shift to a plurality of types of gaming states, or may not shift to a plurality of gaming states.

  Further, it may be configured to be able to transition only to the first gaming state and the second gaming state, or may be configured to be able to transition to a gaming state other than the first gaming state and the second gaming state. . Moreover, it may be configured to make a transition to the first gaming state and the second gaming state without fail, and there may be cases where the transition to the first gaming state and the second gaming state does not occur.

  In the first gaming state and the second gaming state, the first gaming state may have a higher probability of executing a plurality of types of mini-games, or the second gaming state may The probability of executing a plurality of types of mini games may be high.

  In addition, special figure low probability normal figure low probability state is the first gaming state, while special figure high probability normal figure low probability state (including latent probability change, the same applies below), special figure low probability normal figure low probability At least one of the state and special figure high probability general figure high probability state may be the second gaming state, while the special figure high probability state common figure low probability state is the first gaming state The special figure high probability state may be the second gaming state, while the special figure low probability normal figure high probability state is the first gaming state, whereas the special figure high probability state The high probability state in the figure may be the second gaming state. Further, regardless of the probability state of the special figure, the normal low probability state may be the first gaming state, whereas the normal high probability state may be the second gaming state. Further, regardless of the normal probability state, the special figure low probability state may be the first gaming state, whereas the special figure high probability state may be the second gaming state.

  Moreover, it may be configured not to execute a plurality of types of mini games in the first gaming state, or may be configured not to execute a plurality of types of mini games in the second gaming state.

In addition, the probability of executing the plurality of types of notice differs between the first gaming state and the second gaming state.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
It is good.

In addition, the probability of executing the first mini game is different between the first gaming state and the second gaming state.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
It is good.

In addition, the probability of executing the second mini game is different between the first gaming state and the second gaming state.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
It is good.

In addition, the probability of executing the second notice differs between the first gaming state and the second gaming state.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
It is good.

In addition, the probability of executing the second notice differs between the first gaming state and the second gaming state.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
It is good.

In addition, “It is configured to be able to transition to multiple types of gaming state,
One of the plurality of types of gaming states is a first gaming state [e.g., a normal gaming state (such as a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state)],
One of the plurality of types of gaming states is a second gaming state [e.g., probability variation state (special figure high probability normal figure high probability state) etc.],
The first gaming state and the second gaming state are gaming states in which the second gaming state is more advantageous,
The first mini game [for example, a dice game] is a mini game that is easier to execute in the first gaming state than in the second gaming state [for example, FIG. As shown in (A1) to (A6) in the same figure, the dice game is more easily executed in the normal gaming state than the probability variation state, etc.],
The second mini game [e.g., fortune game] is a mini game that is easier to execute in the second gaming state than in the first gaming state [e.g., FIG. 127. As shown in (B1) to (B6) in the figure, the fortune game is more easily executed in the probability variation state than in the normal game state, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming table, there are cases where the gaming state and the type of mini-game can be associated with each other.

  Here, it may be configured to be able to transition only to a plurality of types of gaming states, or may be configured to be able to transition to a state other than a plurality of gaming states. Moreover, it may be configured to always shift to a plurality of types of gaming states, or may not shift to a plurality of gaming states.

  Further, it may be configured to be able to transition only to the first gaming state and the second gaming state, or may be configured to be able to transition to a gaming state other than the first gaming state and the second gaming state. . Moreover, it may be configured to make a transition to the first gaming state and the second gaming state without fail, and there may be cases where the transition to the first gaming state and the second gaming state does not occur.

  In addition, special figure low probability normal figure low probability state is the first gaming state, while special figure high probability normal figure low probability state, special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, special figure high probability normal figure high At least one of the probability states may be the second gaming state, and the special figure high probability state ordinary figure low probability state is the first gaming state, while the special figure high probability state ordinary figure high The probability state may be the second gaming state, while the special figure low probability ordinary figure high probability state is the first gaming state, while the special figure high probability ordinary figure high probability state is the second gaming state. It may be in a state. Further, regardless of the probability state of the special figure, the normal low probability state may be the first gaming state, whereas the normal high probability state may be the second gaming state. Further, regardless of the normal probability state, the special figure low probability state may be the first gaming state, whereas the special figure high probability state may be the second gaming state.

  Further, the first mini game may not be executed when in the second gaming state, or may be always executed when in the first gaming state. Good.

  Further, the second mini game may not be executed when in the first gaming state, or may be always executed when in the first gaming state. Good.

“The first gaming state [for example, normal gaming state (special figure low probability ordinary figure low probability state) etc.] and the second gaming state [for example, probability variation state (special figure high probability ordinary figure high probability state) etc. ] And the probability of executing the plurality of types of mini-games is different.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, since the execution probability of the mini game differs depending on the gaming state, the expectation for the mini game to be executed may be changed depending on the gaming state.

  Here, in the first gaming state and the second gaming state, the first gaming state may have a higher probability of executing a plurality of types of mini-games, or the second gaming state The probability of executing a plurality of types of mini-games may be high.

In addition, “the first gaming state is a non-electric support state [for example, a normal low probability state, etc.]
The second gaming state is a power support state [for example, a normal high probability state, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the non-electric support state may be a special figure high probability state or a special figure low probability state.

  Further, the power support state may be a special figure high probability state or a special figure low probability state.

In addition, in the certain display area [for example, the multi-function display area MF1 shown in FIG. 122A, etc.] when none of the plurality of types of mini games is displayed, the non-mini game effect is displayed in the certain display area. Display [for example, a tutorial display “mini-game starts at various timings” shown in FIG. 122 (c), a tutorial display “Yoshimune is an 8th general” shown in FIG. 122 (f), etc.] May be
The non-mini game effect display is an effect display different from the plurality of types of mini games,
When any one of the plurality of types of mini games starts to be displayed in the certain display area, the displayed non-mini game effect display is erased [for example, FIG. 122 (f) to FIG. As shown, when the mini-game starts when “Yoshimune is an 8th general”, the display of “Yoshimune is an 8th general” is erased]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, since a non-mini game effect display can be performed using a display area from the normal time, there are cases where the player is likely to pay attention.

  Here, a non-mini-game effect display may be displayed only in a certain display area when none of the multiple types of mini-games are displayed in a certain display area. The non-mini game effect display may be displayed in an area other than the display area where none of the mini games are displayed. Further, when none of a plurality of types of mini-games is displayed in a certain display area, a non-mini-game effect display may always be displayed in a certain display area, or any of a plurality of types of mini-games may be displayed in a certain display area. The non-mini game effect display may not be displayed in a display area that is not displayed.

  In addition, a non-mini game effect display may be displayed in a display area only when none of a plurality of types of mini games are displayed in a display area, or a plurality of types of mini games may be displayed in a display area. There may be a case where a non-mini game effect display is displayed in a display area other than when no game is displayed.

  Further, when any one of a plurality of types of mini-games is started to be displayed in a certain display area, only the non-mini-game effect display being displayed may be erased, or any one of a plurality of types of mini-games may be displayed in a certain display area. When one of them starts to be displayed, the display other than the non-mini game effect display being displayed may be deleted. Further, when any one of a plurality of types of mini-games starts to be displayed in a certain display area, the displayed non-mini-game effect display may be necessarily deleted, and any one of the plurality of types of mini-games may be displayed in a certain display area. When one of them starts to be displayed, the displayed non-mini game effect display may not be erased.

  In addition, the non-mini-game effect display that is being displayed may be deleted only when any one of a plurality of types of mini-games starts to be displayed in a certain display area. The non-mini-game effect display being displayed may be deleted even in cases other than when one of the displays is started.

  In addition, as a display applicable to the non-mini game effect display, an appropriate display such as a tutorial display, an original mode parameter display (LV display, etc.), a display of the remaining time until the start of RTC, etc. is adopted. Is possible.

In addition, the certain display area is a frame [for example, the liquid crystal frame of the second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 98 (d), the outer frame of the mini game display area MN1 shown in FIG. , An outer frame of the multi-function display area MF1 shown in FIG. 112 (a)],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, a certain display area may be partitioned only by a frame, or may be partitioned by other than the frame.

In addition, “the display area is an area formed at a predetermined position [for example, as shown in FIG. 122 (a), the multi-function display area MF1 is an Etc. formed in the right half of the lower end portion]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the certain display area may be formed only at a predetermined position, or may be formed at a position other than the predetermined position.

In addition, “the display area is an area expanded in association with the start of the first mini game [for example, as shown in FIG. 128 (A2), the multi-function display area MF1 is the start of the dice game. Etc. are expanded in relation to
The certain display area is an area that expands in relation to the start of the second mini game.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, there is a case where a player can focus attention on the mini game by expanding and displaying a certain display area.

  Here, a certain display area may be expanded only in relation to the start of the first mini game, or may be expanded in relation to other than the start of the first mini game. Good. Further, a certain display area may be necessarily expanded in relation to the start of the first mini game, or may not be expanded in relation to the start of the first mini game.

  Also, a certain display area may be expanded only in relation to the start of the second mini game, or may be expanded in relation to other than the start of the second mini game. . Further, a certain display area may be necessarily expanded in relation to the start of the second mini game, or may not be expanded in relation to the start of the second mini game.

  In addition, a certain display area may be expanded only in connection with the start of the first mini game, and may not be expanded in connection with the start of the second mini game. The expansion may be performed only in connection with the start of the mini game, and may be configured not to be expanded in connection with the start of the first mini game.

Further, “the certain display area is an area formed in the display area of the display means [for example, the multi-function display area MF1 shown in FIG. 122 (a) is on the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, since the mini game is executed on the display means on which the decorative symbol variation display is executed, the mini game may be more focused.

  Here, a certain display area may be formed only in the display area of the display means, or may be formed in an area other than the display area of the display means.

In addition, “display means different from the display means [for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 98 (a)] (hereinafter referred to as“ second display means [for example, FIG. 98 (a) 2nd decorative symbol display device 208M etc. shown]]),
The certain display area is an area formed in the display area of the second display means.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, a certain display area may be formed only in the display area of the second display means, or may be formed in an area other than the display area of the second display means.

In the above description,
“A notice means capable of executing a plurality of notices (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208);
Display means capable of displaying the display of the mini game [for example, the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.];
A game machine equipped with
The game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like]
One of the plurality of notices is a first notice [for example, display of the weak cut-in image CI1b shown in FIG. 112 (i ′), etc.]
One of the plurality of notices is a second notice [for example, display of the strong cut-in image CI1a shown in FIG. 112 (i), etc.]
In the event that the second notice is made rather than the case where the first notice is made, the jackpot symbol is configured so that it is easier to be finally displayed.
The mini game is a game capable of deriving a plurality of results,
One of the plurality of results is a first result [e.g., display of “Koyoshi” shown in FIG. 112 (h ′), etc.]
One of the plurality of results is a second result [for example, a display of “Daichi” shown in FIG. 112 (h), etc.]
The second notice is more easily performed when the second result is derived than when the first result is derived.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  According to the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the notice means, but according to this game stand, it is possible to provide a game stand having a feature in the notice means.

  Conventionally, a game table for performing a mini game has been provided in order to enhance the interest of the game. However, there is room for improvement in mini-games. According to this game machine, a game machine having a feature of a mini game can be provided.

  In addition, according to this game table, the player may participate (attention) in the mini game so as to derive the second result.

  Here, the notice means may be capable of executing only a plurality of notices, or may be capable of executing things other than a plurality of notices. Further, the notice means may always execute a plurality of notices or may not execute a plurality of notices.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the mini game display, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the mini game display. Further, the display means may always display the mini game display, or may not display the mini game display.

  The notice means may be capable of executing only the first notice and the second notice, or may be capable of executing notices other than the first notice and the second notice. . Further, the notice means may always execute the first notice and the second notice, or may not execute the first notice and the second notice.

  In addition, when the first notice is made, the jackpot symbol may not be finally displayed, and when the second notice is made, the jackpot symbol will always be confirmed and displayed. You may be comprised so that.

In addition, at least it is suggested that the second notice is likely to be performed when the result of the mini-game becomes the second result before the result of the mini-game is derived. [For example, as shown in FIG. 112 (c), when the mini game is started, the message “strong cut-in at Daikichi” is displayed in the mini game display area MN1 etc.] ,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, there is a case where attention can be paid to the trend of mini-games toward the occurrence of an advantageous notice.

  In addition, by incorporating a so-called mission effect into the mini-game, there are cases where it is possible to increase the number of scenes where the player can feel a sense of achievement.

  Here, before the result of the mini game is derived, it is configured to at least suggest that only the second notice is likely to be performed by the result of the mini game being the second result. At least, it is suggested that the derivation result of the mini game becomes the second result before the mini game result is derived, so that a notice other than the second notice is likely to be performed. It may be configured. In addition, before the mini game result is derived, it may be configured to at least suggest that the second notice is always performed when the mini game derivation result becomes the second result. However, before the result of the mini-game is derived, the result of the derivation of the mini-game becomes the second result, so that at least it may be suggested that the second notice is not performed. May be.

  In addition, before the mini game result is derived, the second game may be configured to be notified in advance that the second notice is likely to be performed when the mini game derivation result becomes the second result. .

  The suggested mode is, for example, a mode in which at least the effect of mission achievement is suggested, such as “If successful”, “Take out”, or “When ... stops”. Any embodiment can be applied.

The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect display,
One of the plurality of types of effect displays is a first effect display [for example, mission effects shown in FIG. 113 (c) to FIG. 113 (n)],
The first effect display is an effect display that may be displayed during execution of the decorative symbol variation display [for example, the mission effects shown in FIGS. 113 (c) to (n) are decorative symbols. Etc. during the change display of
The first effect display is an effect display from which a plurality of effect results can be derived,
One of the plurality of effect results is a first effect result [for example, a display of “mission failure” shown in FIG. 114 (n), etc.]
One of the plurality of effect results is a second effect result [for example, “Mission Achievement” display shown in FIG. 113 (n), etc.]
Before the result of the first effect display is derived, it is at least suggested that the effect result of the first effect display is likely to be a big hit by becoming the second effect result. [For example, as shown in FIG. 113 (c), when the mission effect is started, the contents of the mission such as “put out cut-in” and “big hit if you go out” are displayed, etc.]
The second effect result [for example, in the first effect display than in the case where the second result [for example, display of “Daiyoshi” shown in FIG. In the case where the “Mission Achievement Display” shown in FIG. 113 (n)] is derived, the jackpot symbol is configured to be more easily finalized and displayed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, there are cases where it is possible to increase the number of scenes where the player can feel a sense of accomplishment by incorporating a so-called mission effect in addition to the mini game.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, there may be a case where variations in mission effects can be increased by providing a difference in the mission results.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, the difference between the mission of the main effect and the mission of the mini game may be clarified.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of effect display, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of effect display. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of effect displays, or may not display a plurality of effect displays.

  The display means may be capable of displaying only the first effect display, or may be capable of displaying effect display other than the first effect display. Further, the display means may always display the first effect display, or may not display the first effect display.

  The first effect display may be displayed only during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display, or may be displayed other than during the execution of the decoration symbol variation display. There may be. Further, the first effect display may be always displayed during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display, or may not be displayed during the execution of the decoration symbol variation display.

  In addition, the first effect display may be capable of deriving only a plurality of effect results, or may be able to derive results other than the plurality of effect results. Further, the first effect display may necessarily derive a plurality of effect results, or may not derive a plurality of effect results.

  Further, the first effect display may be such that only the first effect result and the second effect result can be derived, or an effect result other than the first effect result and the second effect result is also derived. It may be possible. In addition, the first effect display may necessarily derive the first effect result and the second effect result, or the first effect result and the second effect result may not be derived. Also good.

  Further, before the result of the first effect display is derived, the fact that the effect result of the first effect display becomes the second effect result is easily notified in advance. May be.

  Further, when the second result is derived in the mini game, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is not finally displayed and the second effect result is derived in the first effect display. May be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed in a definite manner. In addition, when the second result is derived in the mini game, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed and the second effect result is derived in the first effect display. In such a case, the jackpot symbol may not be finally displayed.

In addition, “when the second effect result is derived, it is configured so that the big hit symbol is finally displayed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, there is a case where the mission effect can be clearly identified.

  Here, only when the second effect result is derived, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed, and also in cases other than when the second effect result is derived. The jackpot symbol may be finalized and displayed.

In addition, “a state where both the mini-game and the first effect display are displayed (hereinafter referred to as“ first state [for example, as shown in FIG. 113 (g) to FIG. It may be said that both the production and the mini-game are displayed].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, the player may be able to hold that the result of the mini game and the result of the first effect display are related.

  Here, there may be only the first state, there may be cases other than the first state, it may be the first state, or the first state. It may not be possible.

In addition, “the mini game is started earlier than the first effect display,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, there is a case where the player can easily recognize that there is a relationship between the mini game and the first effect display.

In addition, “equipped with operation means [for example, a production button 136, an operation key unit 137, etc.] provided at a position operable by the player,
When the operation means is operated in the mini game, the result of the mini game is derived [for example, FIG. 113 (g) to FIG. 11 (l) and FIG. 114 (g). As shown in (l) of the figure, when the production button 136 is operated repeatedly in a mini game, “Daiichi” or “Koyoshi” is derived, etc.]
When the operation means is not operated in the mini game, the result of the mini game is not derived,
If the result of the mini-game is not derived, the first notice [for example, FIG. 114 (m)] than the second notice [for example, the strong cut-in image CI1a shown in FIG. 113 (m)]. The weak cut-in image CI1b shown in FIG.
When the result of the mini-game is derived, the second notice is more easily performed than the first notice.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, the result of the mini game may affect the notice, so the player may be able to actively operate the operation means in order to derive the result of the mini game. .

  Here, the operation means may be provided only at a position where the player can operate, or may be provided at a position other than the position where the player can operate. Further, the operation means may be always provided at a position where the player can operate, or may not be provided at a position where the player can operate.

  Further, the operation means may be provided at a position where only the player can operate, or may be provided at a position where a person other than the player can operate. Further, the operating means may be provided at a position where the player can always operate, or may be provided at a position where the player cannot operate.

  Further, it may be configured such that the result of the mini game is derived only when the operation means is operated in the mini game, and even when the operation means is operated in the mini game, the mini game may be derived. The result may be derived. Further, the configuration may be such that the result of the mini game is always derived when the operation means is operated in the mini game, or the result of the mini game is derived when the operation means is operated in the mini game. It may not be done.

  Further, it may be configured such that the result of the mini game is not derived only when the operation means is not operated in the mini game. The game result may not be derived. Further, it may be configured so that the result of the mini game is not always derived when the operation means is not operated in the mini game, or the result of the mini game is obtained when the operation means is not operated in the mini game. It may be configured to be derived.

  Also, it may be configured such that the first notice is easier to perform than the second notice only when the result of the mini game is not derived, or the result of the mini game is not derived In other cases, the first notice may be more easily performed than the second notice. Further, when the result of the mini game is not derived, the first notice may be more easily performed than the second notice, or the result of the mini game is not derived. In some cases, the first notice may be less likely to be performed than the second notice.

  In addition, when the result of the mini game is not derived, the second notice may not be performed. When the result of the mini game is not derived, the first notice is always performed. May be configured.

  Further, it may be configured such that the second notice is easier to be performed than the first notice only when the result of the mini game is derived, or other than when the result of the mini game is derived. In this case, the second notice may be easier to be performed than the first notice. In addition, when the result of the mini game is derived, it may be configured so that the second notice is more easily performed than the first notice, or when the result of the mini game is derived, It may be configured such that the second notice is less likely to be performed than the first notice.

  In addition, when the result of the mini game is derived, the first notice may not be performed. When the result of the mini game is derived, the second notice is always performed. May be configured.

Further, even if “the second notice is scheduled to be performed (hereinafter referred to as“ first case ”), if the result of the mini-game is not derived, the first notice is given. [For example, if it is determined that “Daiyoshi” can be derived as a result of the mini game, but the result of the mini game is not derived, as shown in FIG. 115 (m), a strong cut is performed. The weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed instead of the in-image CI1a]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, the result of the mini game may affect the notice, so the player may be able to actively operate the operation means in order to derive the result of the mini game. .

  In addition, according to this gaming machine, since the notice does not affect the judgment of the success / failure, even if a notice different from the schedule is generated, the result of the judgment of the success / failure is not affected, and the notice that is forcibly scheduled is displayed. There is no need to do it. Therefore, in some cases, it is possible to participate in a mini game in order to make a better notice appear.

  Here, even in the first case, the first notice may be performed only when the result of the mini game is not derived. It may be configured such that the first notice is performed even when the result of the game is not derived. Further, even in the first case, it may be configured such that the first notice is always made when the result of the mini game is not derived. If the result is not derived, the first notice may not be performed.

In addition, it includes “hold icon display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first decorative symbol display device 208L, etc.] capable of displaying a plurality of types of hold icons,
One of the plurality of types of hold icons is a first hold icon [for example, a hold icon in a blue display mode shown in FIG. 98 (k), etc.]
One of the plurality of types of hold icons is a second hold icon [for example, a hold icon in a green display mode shown in FIG. 98 (m), etc.]
The first notice is a notice made when the first hold icon is displayed [for example, a prefetch notice is made by displaying the hold icon in a blue display mode shown in FIG. 98 (k). Etc.],
The second notice is a notice made by displaying the second hold icon [For example, a pre-read notice is made by displaying the hold icon in the green display mode shown in FIG. 98 (m). Etc.],
The mini game may be started during execution of a certain symbol variation display in a state where the first hold icon is displayed,
In the first case, if the result of the mini-game is not derived, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon,
In the first case, when the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon changes to the second hold icon.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, there is a case where a change in the display mode of the hold icon can be expected while enjoying the mini game. For example, the button hold icon is displayed and the effect that the display mode is changed by the operation of the operation means is monotonous only in the conventional effect, but according to this game stand, the display mode of the hold icon has changed. Later, since there may be a further change, there is a case where the expectation in the change display of the hold icon can be further increased.

  Here, the hold icon display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of hold icons, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of hold icons. Further, the hold icon display means may always display a plurality of types of hold icons, or may not display a plurality of types of hold icons.

  Further, the hold icon display means may be capable of displaying only the first hold icon and the second hold icon, or can display hold icons other than the first hold icon and the second hold icon. It may be anything. Further, the hold icon display means may always display the first hold icon and the second hold icon, or may not display the first hold icon and the second hold icon. Good.

  In addition, the first notice may be performed only when the first hold icon is displayed, or may be performed other than when the first hold icon is displayed. May be. In addition, the first notice may be necessarily performed when the first hold icon is displayed, or may not be performed when the first hold icon is displayed. .

  Further, the second notice may be performed only by displaying the second hold icon, or may be performed by other than displaying the second hold icon. May be. In addition, the second notice may be necessarily performed when the second hold icon is displayed, or may not be performed when the second hold icon is displayed. .

  In addition, the mini game may be configured to start only during execution of a certain symbol variation display in a state where the first hold icon is displayed, or the first hold icon is displayed. It may be configured so that it may be started other than during the execution of a certain symbol variation display in the state of being performed. Further, the mini game may be configured to always start during execution of a certain symbol variation display in a state where the first hold icon is displayed, or the first hold icon is displayed. In the state, it may be configured not to start during execution of a certain symbol variation display.

  Further, the mini game may be configured to start during execution of a certain symbol variation display only when the first hold icon is displayed, or the first hold icon is displayed. Even in a state other than the current state, it may be configured to start during execution of a certain symbol variation display.

  In the first case, when the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon may be configured not to change only to the second hold icon. In the first case, When the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon may be configured not to change to a hold icon other than the second hold icon. In the first case, if the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon may not be changed to the second hold icon. In the first case, When the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon may be changed to the second hold icon.

  In the first case, the first hold icon may not be changed to the second hold icon only when the result of the mini game is not derived. In the first case, Even when the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon may not be changed to the second hold icon. Further, only in the first case, when the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon may be configured not to be changed to the second hold icon. In this case, the first hold icon may not be changed to the second hold icon when the mini game result is not derived.

  In the first case, when the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon may be configured to change only to the second hold icon. When the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon may be changed to a hold icon other than the second hold icon. In the first case, when the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon may be changed to the second hold icon, or the first case If the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon may not be changed to the second hold icon.

  In the first case, the first hold icon may be changed to the second hold icon only when the second result is derived in the mini game. In the case where the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon may be changed to the second hold icon. Further, only in the first case, when the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon may be changed to the second hold icon. In other cases, when the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon may be changed to the second hold icon.

In addition, it includes “hold icon display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first decorative symbol display device 208L, etc.] capable of displaying a plurality of types of hold icons,
One of the plurality of types of hold icons is a first hold icon [for example, a hold icon in a blue display mode shown in FIG. 98 (k), etc.]
One of the plurality of types of hold icons is a second hold icon [for example, a hold icon in a green display mode shown in FIG. 98 (m), etc.]
The first notice is a notice made when the first hold icon is displayed [for example, a prefetch notice is made by displaying the hold icon in a blue display mode shown in FIG. 98 (k). Etc.],
The second notice is a notice made by displaying the second hold icon [For example, a pre-read notice is made by displaying the hold icon in the green display mode shown in FIG. 98 (m). Etc.],
The mini game may be started during execution of a certain symbol variation display in a state where the first hold icon is displayed,
In the first case, when the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon changes to the second hold icon during execution of the certain symbol variation display,
In the first case, when the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during execution of the certain symbol variation display, and the certain symbol is not changed. The first hold icon changes to the second hold icon during the execution of the symbol change display that starts after the change display.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, there is a case where the change timing of the display mode of the hold icon can be changed depending on the participation situation of the mini game.

  Also, according to this game table, there is a case where the relationship between the notice and the reliability can be maintained even if the mini-game is not finally joined.

  Here, the hold icon display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of hold icons, or may be capable of displaying other than a plurality of types of hold icons. Further, the hold icon display means may always display a plurality of types of hold icons, or may not display a plurality of types of hold icons.

  Further, the hold icon display means may be capable of displaying only the first hold icon and the second hold icon, or can display hold icons other than the first hold icon and the second hold icon. It may be anything. Further, the hold icon display means may always display the first hold icon and the second hold icon, or may not display the first hold icon and the second hold icon. Good.

  In addition, the first notice may be performed only when the first hold icon is displayed, or may be performed other than when the first hold icon is displayed. May be. In addition, the first notice may be necessarily performed when the first hold icon is displayed, or may not be performed when the first hold icon is displayed. .

  Further, the second notice may be performed only by displaying the second hold icon, or may be performed by other than displaying the second hold icon. May be. In addition, the second notice may be necessarily performed when the second hold icon is displayed, or may not be performed when the second hold icon is displayed. .

  In addition, the mini game may be configured to start only during execution of a certain symbol variation display in a state where the first hold icon is displayed, or the first hold icon is displayed. It may be configured so that it may be started other than during the execution of a certain symbol variation display in the state of being performed. Further, the mini game may be configured to always start during execution of a certain symbol variation display in a state where the first hold icon is displayed, or the first hold icon is displayed. In the state, it may be configured not to start during execution of a certain symbol variation display.

  Further, the mini game may be configured to start during execution of a certain symbol variation display only when the first hold icon is displayed, or the first hold icon is displayed. Even in a state other than the current state, it may be configured to start during execution of a certain symbol variation display.

  In the first case, when the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon is changed to only the second hold icon during execution of a certain symbol variation display. In the first case, if the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon changes to a hold icon other than the second hold icon during execution of a certain symbol variation display. It may be configured to. In the first case, when the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon is surely changed to the second hold icon during execution of a certain symbol variation display. In the first case, if the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon may not change to the second hold icon during execution of a certain symbol variation display. May be configured.

  In the first case, the first hold icon is changed to the second hold icon during execution of a certain symbol variation display only when the second result is derived in the mini game. In the first case, the first hold icon changes to the second hold icon during execution of a certain symbol variation display even when the second result is not derived in the mini game. It may be configured as follows. Also, only in the first case, when the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon is changed to the second hold icon during execution of a certain symbol variation display. Even in cases other than the first case, when the second result is derived in the mini game, the first hold icon changes to the second hold icon during execution of a certain symbol variation display. It may be configured as follows.

  In the first case, if the result of the mini-game is not derived, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during execution of a certain symbol variation display, rather than a certain symbol variation display. It may be configured to change only from the first hold icon to the second hold icon during execution of the symbol variation display started later, and in the first case, the result of the mini game is not derived. The first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during execution of a certain symbol variation display, and the first hold icon is displayed during execution of a symbol variation display that starts after a certain symbol variation display. The icon may be changed to a hold icon other than the second hold icon. In the first case, if the result of the mini-game is not derived, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during execution of a certain symbol variation display, rather than a certain symbol variation display. It may be configured to always change from the first hold icon to the second hold icon during execution of the symbol variation display started later, and in the first case, the result of the mini game is not derived. The first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during execution of a certain symbol variation display, and the first hold icon is displayed during execution of a symbol variation display that starts after a certain symbol variation display. It may be configured such that the icon may not change to the second hold icon.

  In the first case, if the result of the mini-game is not derived, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during execution of a certain symbol variation display, rather than a certain symbol variation display. It may be configured to change from the first hold icon to the second hold icon only during the execution of the symbol variation display started later. In the first case, the result of the mini game is not derived. The first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during execution of a certain symbol variation display, and the first variation icon other than during the symbol variation display started after a certain symbol variation display is performed. The hold icon may be changed to a second hold icon. In the first case, if the result of the mini-game is not derived, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during execution of a certain symbol variation display, rather than a certain symbol variation display. It may be configured to always change from the first hold icon to the second hold icon during the execution of the symbol variation display started later.

  In the first case, if the result of the mini-game is not derived, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon only during execution of a certain symbol variation display. May be configured to change from the first hold icon to the second hold icon during execution of the symbol variation display that is started later, and in the first case, the result of the mini game is not derived. If the symbol change display is not executed, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon, and the first change icon is displayed after the symbol change display is started. The hold icon may be changed to a second hold icon. In the first case, if the result of the mini-game is not derived, the first hold icon does not always change to the second hold icon during execution of a certain symbol variation display, and a certain symbol variation display Alternatively, the first hold icon may be changed to the second hold icon during the execution of the symbol variation display started later.

  Also, in the first case, only when the result of the mini-game is not derived, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during execution of a certain symbol variation display, May be configured to change from the first hold icon to the second hold icon during execution of the symbol variation display that is started later, and in the first case, the result of the mini game is not derived. In other cases, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during execution of a certain symbol variation display, and during symbol variation display that is started after a certain symbol variation display. It may be configured to change from the first hold icon to the second hold icon. In addition, only in the first case, when the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during execution of a certain symbol variation display, May be configured to change from the first hold icon to the second hold icon during the execution of the symbol variation display that is started later, and in the case other than the first case, the result of the mini game Is not derived, the first hold icon does not change to the second hold icon during execution of a certain symbol variation display, and during symbol variation display that is started after a certain symbol variation display It may be configured to change from the first hold icon to the second hold icon.

In addition, “equipped with operation means [for example, a production button 136, an operation key unit 137, etc.] provided at a position where the player can operate,
The derivation result of the mini-game may differ depending on the operation status of the operation means [for example, as shown in FIGS. 113 (i) to (l), the effect button 136 is operated repeatedly, and the number of operations is When the condition is satisfied, “Daiyoshi” is derived. However, as shown in FIGS. 115 (i) to (l), when the number of operations of the effect button 136 does not satisfy the condition, Etc.),
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, there are cases where the operation of the operation means can be enjoyed.

  Here, the operation means may be provided only at a position where the player can operate, or may be provided at a position other than the position where the player can operate. Further, the operation means may be always provided at a position where the player can operate, or may not be provided at a position where the player can operate.

  Further, the operation means may be provided at a position where only the player can operate, or may be provided at a position where a person other than the player can operate. Further, the operating means may be provided at a position where the player can always operate, or may be provided at a position where the player cannot operate.

  In addition, only the mini game derivation result may differ depending on the operation status of the operation means, and other than the mini game derivation result may differ depending on the operation status of the operation means. . Further, the derivation result of the mini game may be different depending on the operation state of the operation means, and the derivation result of the mini game may not be different depending on the operation state of the operation means.

In addition, “equipped with operation means [for example, a production button 136, an operation key unit 137, etc.] provided at a position where the player can operate,
In the mini game, the same result may be derived when the operation means is operated and when the operation means is not operated [for example, as shown in FIGS. 114 (i) to (l). In this way, when it is determined in advance that “Nakayoshi” is derived, “Kokichi” is derived even if the production button 136 is operated continuously or not, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the operation means may be provided only at a position where the player can operate, or may be provided at a position other than the position where the player can operate. Further, the operation means may be always provided at a position where the player can operate, or may not be provided at a position where the player can operate.

  Further, the operation means may be provided at a position where only the player can operate, or may be provided at a position where a person other than the player can operate. Further, the operating means may be provided at a position where the player can always operate, or may be provided at a position where the player cannot operate.

  In the mini game, only the same result may be derived when the operating means is operated and when the operating means is not operated, or when the operating means is operated in the mini game. There may be a case where a result other than the same result is derived when the operation means is not operated. In the mini game, the same result may be always derived when the operating means is operated and when the operating means is not operated. In the mini game, the operating means is operated when the operating means is operated. There may be a case where the same result is not derived in the case where there is no case.

  In addition, only in the mini game, the same result may be derived when the operation means is operated and when the operation means is not operated, or the operation means is operated in other than the mini game. In some cases, the same result may be derived when the operation means is not operated.

In addition, the display means includes first display means [for example, first decorative symbol display device 208L and the like] and second display means [for example, second decorative symbol display device 208M, third decorative symbol display device 208N, and the like. And means configured to include:
The first display means and the second display means are separate display means.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the display means may include only the first display means and the second display means, or may include display means other than the first display means and the second display means. It may be configured by. The display means may be configured to include the first display means and the second display means, or may be configured not to include the first display means and the second display means. It may be a thing.

In the above description,
“Operating means provided at a position where the player can operate [for example, an effect button 136, an operation key unit 137, etc.]
Display means [for example, a decorative symbol display device 208, a first decorative symbol display device 208L, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.];
A game machine equipped with
The game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like]
The display means displays a display of a mini game [for example, the mini game shown in FIG. 130 (g) to FIG. 130 (m) or the mini game shown in FIG. 132 (j) to FIG. 132 (o)]. Possible means,
The mini game is a game capable of deriving a plurality of types of results,
The result of the mini-game is derived by operating the operation means [for example, as shown in FIGS. 130 (g) to (k), a treasure box is opened with the operation key unit 137. When the selection is made and the treasure box selected by the effect button 136 is determined, a samurai character BA appears from the treasure box, and “Komikichi” is displayed as a result of fortune telling, or FIG. 133 (A1) to FIG. As shown in (A6), when the directing button 136 is operated repeatedly, it is shown that the clothes worn by the bancho character are broken, and “banchou awakening” and “today is in great condition” are displayed. ,
One of the plurality of types of results is derived in accordance with the operation status of the operation means [for example, as shown in FIG. 131 (A1) to FIG. 131 (A6), When the lower left treasure box BX2 is selected by the key unit 137 and the effect button 136 is selected, the princess character HM3 appears and “Daiyoshi” is displayed as a result of the fortune telling, but FIG. 131 (B1) As shown in FIG. 6B6, when the treasure box BX3 on the upper right is selected by the operation key unit 137 and determined by the effect button 136, the character BA of the frog appears and “Komikichi as a result of fortune telling” ”Is displayed, or as shown in FIGS. 133 (A1) to (A6), when the effect button 136 is operated repeatedly and the condition of the number of operations is satisfied, The appearance of the clothes worn by the long character is shown, “Banchou Awakening” and “Today is in great condition” are displayed, and the production button 136 is operated repeatedly, but the condition of the number of operations is not satisfied In such a case, as shown in FIG. 134 (C7), the clothes of the Bancho character are not torn and the “Banchou Awakening Game” is completed]
One of the plurality of types of results is a third result [for example, the display of the character BA and “Koyoshi” of the samurai shown in FIG. 130 (k), or the number length shown in FIG. 134 (C7). The display that the clothes worn by the character of the character are not torn]
The third result is a result that does not at least suggest a result of the success / failure determination [for example, at least one of the determination of whether or not the special figure is appropriate or not]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  According to the conventional game stand, there is room for improvement in the display means. According to this game stand, it is possible to provide a game stand having a feature in the display means.

  Conventionally, a game table for performing a mini game has been provided in order to enhance the interest of the game. However, there is room for improvement in mini-games. According to this game machine, a game machine having a feature of a mini game can be provided.

  In addition, according to this game table, there are cases where a player can be entertained in addition to a pure game.

  Here, the operation means may be provided only at a position where the player can operate, or may be provided at a position other than the position where the player can operate. Further, the operation means may be always provided at a position where the player can operate, or may not be provided at a position where the player can operate.

  Further, the operation means may be provided at a position where only the player can operate, or may be provided at a position where a person other than the player can operate. Further, the operating means may be provided at a position where the player can always operate, or may be provided at a position where the player cannot operate.

  Further, the display means may be capable of displaying only the mini game display, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the mini game display. Further, the display means may always display the mini game display or may not display the mini game display.

  Further, the mini game may be capable of deriving only a plurality of types of results, or may be other than the plurality of types of results. The mini game may always derive a plurality of types of results, or may not derive a plurality of types of results.

  Further, only the mini game result may be derived by operating the operation means, or other than the mini game result may be derived by operating the operation means. May be. Further, the result of the mini game may be always derived by operating the operating means, or the result of the mini game may not be derived by operating the operating means. May be.

  Further, it may be configured such that only one of a plurality of types of results is derived according to the operation status of the operation means, or of the plurality of types of results according to the operation status of the operation means. It may be configured such that anything other than any one is derived. Moreover, it may be configured such that any one of a plurality of types of results is always derived according to the operation status of the operation means, or any one of the plurality of types of results according to the operation status of the operation means One of them may not be derived.

  Further, the mini game may be capable of deriving only the third result, or may be capable of deriving results other than the third result. The mini game may always derive the third result, or may not derive the third result.

  In addition, the third result does not suggest the result of the determination, and is not intended to notify.

In addition, “the mini game is a game for deriving a result from the plurality of types of results [for example, the mini game shown in FIG. 131 (A1) to FIG. The mission is to select the treasure chest of the contents]
The certain result can be derived according to the operation status of the operation means [For example, in the case shown in FIGS. 131 (A1) to (A6), the operation key unit 137 selects the lower left treasure box BX2, If the effect button 136 is selected, the princess character HM3 appears and “Daiyoshi” is displayed as a result of fortune telling etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, there is a case where it is possible to concentrate on the operation of the operation means for the mini game.

  Here, there may be only one result, or two or more results.

  Further, only a certain result may be derived depending on the operation status of the operation means, or a result other than the certain result may be derived depending on the operation status of the operation means. Further, it may be configured such that a certain result is always derived depending on the operation status of the operation means, or may be configured such that a certain result may not be derived depending on the operation status of the operation means.

Further, “decorative symbol display means capable of executing decorative symbol variation display [for example, the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.] Prepared,
The mini-game is started in a first period [for example, a period in a standby state (including a state in which a customer waiting demonstration display is displayed) in which no special figure is displayed) (hereinafter, Is called "the first case")
The first period is a period in which the start of the decorative symbol variation display is not suspended [for example, a period in which both of the suspensions of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 are 0],
The first period is a period during which the decorative symbol variation display is not executed [for example, a period during which the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, there is a case where it is possible to entertain in a mini game during the first period.

  Further, according to this game table, there is a case where the operation means can be actively operated even during the original game by prompting the operation means to operate in the mini game.

  Here, the decorative symbol display means may be capable of executing only the decorative symbol variation display, or may be capable of executing a display other than the decorative symbol variation display. The decorative symbol display means may always execute the decorative symbol variation display, or may not execute the decorative symbol variation display.

  Further, the mini game may be started only during the first period, or may be started during a period other than the first period. In addition, the mini game may be always started in the first period, or may not be started in the first period.

  In addition, the first period may be a period in which only the start of the decorative symbol variation display is not suspended, or there is a period in which the start is not suspended other than the start of the decorative symbol variation display. Also good.

  Further, the first period may be a period in which only the decorative symbol variation display is not performed, or other than the decorative symbol variation display (for example, the first special symbol display device 212, the second special symbol display device). 214 etc.) may be a period in which there is something that has not been executed.

In addition, “automatic operation of the operation means [for example, long press auto, full auto, etc.] is configured to be executable,
In the first case, the mini game is configured such that the automatic operation cannot be performed [for example, as shown in FIG. 132 (g) and FIG. 132 (j) to FIG. Even if the auto button mode is set to ON, the production button 136 is not automatically operated in the Banchou awakening game, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, in the first case, since it is a mini game that is not related to the determination of success or failure, the automatic operation cannot be executed, and the player can actively operate the operation means. There is.

  Here, only the automatic operation of the operation means may be configured to be executable, or an operation other than the automatic operation of the operation means may be configured to be executable. Further, the automatic operation of the operation means may be always executed, or the automatic operation of the operation means may not be executed.

  Further, in the first case, the mini game may be configured such that only the auto operation cannot be performed, or may be configured such that operations other than the auto operation cannot be performed. In the first case, the mini game may be configured such that the automatic operation cannot be performed, or may be configured such that the automatic operation may not be performed.

  Further, the mini game may be configured so that the automatic operation cannot be executed only in the first case, or configured so that the automatic operation cannot be executed in cases other than the first case. Also good.

“The mini game is a game that may be started in the second period (hereinafter referred to as“ second case ”) [for example, as shown in FIG. 98 (d) to FIG. The mini game shown in FIG. 108 (m) to FIG. 109 (f) and the mini game shown in FIG. 122 (g) to FIG. 122 (k) are started during the variation display of the decorative symbols. 137 (e) to (i) are started during the execution of the jackpot game, etc.]
The second period is a period that does not overlap with the first period;
The second period is a period including at least one of the execution of the decorative symbol variation display and the execution of the jackpot game,
The first result is more easily derived in the mini-game than in the second case,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, there is a case where it is possible to entertain with a mini-game during the game.

  Here, the mini game may be started only in the second period, or may be started in a period other than the second period. In addition, the mini game may be always started in the second period, or may not be started in the second period.

  In the first case, the third result may be always derived in the mini game, and in the second case, the third result may not be derived in the mini game. Also good.

Further, “the type of the mini game started in the first case and the second case is configured to be different [for example, today's fortune shown in FIGS. 130 (g) to (m). Fortune-telling and the Banchou awakening game shown in FIGS. 132 (j) to (o) are mini-games that are started in a standby state, and are dice games and diagrams shown in FIGS. The fortune game shown in 122 (g ′) to (l ′) in FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, it may be easy to identify whether it is a notice or a simple game depending on the type of mini-game.

  Here, the first case and the second case may be configured so that only the type of the mini game started is different, or the mini game started in the first case and the second case. You may be comprised so that there may be different things besides a kind. In addition, the types of mini games started in the first case and the second case may be configured to be different from each other. The types of mini games started in the first case and the second case may be configured. May be configured so that they may not differ.

In addition, in the mini game started in the first case, a first valid period display [for example, a button reception time meter MT displayed in the Banchou awakening game shown in FIG. 132 (k)] is displayed. Configured to be
In the mini game started in the second case, a second effective period display [for example, a button reception time meter MT displayed in the mini game shown in FIG. 113 (i)] is displayed. Configured,
The first effective period display is a meter display in which the display mode changes according to the elapse of a period during which the operation of the operation means is effective [for example, as shown in FIGS. 132 (k) to (n). As described above, the button reception time meter MT changes the display mode according to the time since the operation reception period of the effect button 136 is started],
The second effective period display is a meter display in which the display mode changes according to the elapse of the period during which the operation of the operation means is effective [for example, as shown in FIGS. 113 (i) to (k). As described above, the button reception time meter MT changes the display mode according to the time since the operation reception period of the effect button 136 is started],
The speed at which the display mode changes is different between the first effective period display and the second effective period display.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, there are cases where the type of mini-game can be distinguished by looking at the validity period display.

  Here, in the mini game started in the first case, only the first effective period display may be displayed. In the mini game started in the first case, the first An effective period display other than the effective period display may also be displayed. Further, in the mini game started in the first case, the first valid period display may be always displayed, or in the mini game started in the first case, the first valid period display is displayed. You may be comprised so that a period display may not be displayed.

  Further, the first valid period display may be displayed only in the mini game started in the first case, or in a mini game other than the mini game started in the first case. The first validity period display may be displayed.

  Further, in the mini game started in the second case, only the second valid period display may be displayed. In the mini game started in the second case, the second valid period display may be displayed. An effective period display other than the period display may also be displayed. Further, in the mini game started in the second case, the second valid period display may be always displayed. In the mini game started in the second case, the second valid period display may be displayed. You may be comprised so that a period display may not be displayed.

  In addition, the second validity period display may be displayed only in the mini game started in the second case, or in a mini game other than the mini game started in the second case. The second effective period display may be displayed.

  The first effective period display may be such that the display mode changes only in accordance with the elapse of the period for which the operation of the operation means is effective, or other than the elapse of the period for which the operation of the operation means is effective. Further, the display mode may be changed according to the above. The first effective period display may be such that the display mode is always changed according to the elapse of the period during which the operation of the operation unit is enabled, or the elapse of the period during which the operation of the operation unit is enabled. Accordingly, the display mode may not change.

  Further, the second effective period display may be such that the display mode changes only in accordance with the elapse of the period during which the operation of the operation means is effective, or other than the elapse of the period during which the operation of the operation means is effective. Further, the display mode may be changed according to the above. In addition, the display of the second effective period may be one in which the display mode always changes according to the elapse of the period during which the operation of the operation unit is enabled, or the elapse of the period during which the operation of the operation unit is enabled Accordingly, the display mode may not change.

  Further, either the first effective period display or the second effective period display may not be displayed.

  In the first effective period display and the second effective period display, the first effective period display may be faster in the display mode change, or the second effective period display is the display mode. The speed of change may be fast.

  In addition, the first effective period display and the second effective period display may be different display modes or the same display mode. In the first effective period display and the second effective period display, the first effective period display may be larger, or the second effective period display may be larger. The size may be the same between the first effective period display and the second effective period display.

In the mini-game started in the first case, the first operation promotion display [for example, the button image 136a displayed in the Banchou awakening game shown in FIG. Etc.] are displayed,
In the mini game started in the second case, a second operation promotion display [for example, a button image 136a displayed in the mini game shown in FIG. Configured to be
The first operation promotion display is a display prompting the operation of the operation means,
The second operation promotion display is a display prompting the operation of the operation means,
The first operation promotion display is a display that can be displayed in a first number [for example, one, etc.] of a display pattern [for example, a default display mode, etc.]
The second operation promotion display is a display that can be displayed in a second number [for example, two, etc.] of display patterns [for example, a default display mode and a display mode that vibrates and rotates, etc.]
In the first number and the second number, the second number is larger.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, in a mini game started in the second case, there is a case where a sense of expectation for a big hit can be increased by a variation of the display pattern of the operation promotion display.

  Here, in the mini game started in the first case, only the first operation promotion display may be displayed. In the mini game started in the first case, the first An operation promotion display other than the operation promotion display may also be displayed. Further, in the mini game started in the first case, the first operation promotion display may be always displayed. In the mini game started in the first case, the first operation is displayed. You may be comprised so that a promotion display may not be displayed.

  In addition, the first operation promotion display may be displayed only in the mini game started in the first case, or in a mini game other than the mini game started in the first case. The first operation promotion display may be displayed.

  In the mini game started in the second case, only the second operation promotion display may be displayed. In the mini game started in the second case, the second operation An operation promotion display other than the promotion display may also be displayed. In the mini game started in the second case, the second operation promotion display may be displayed without fail. In the mini game started in the second case, the second operation is displayed. You may be comprised so that a promotion display may not be displayed.

  In addition, the second operation promotion display may be displayed only in the mini game started in the second case, or in a mini game other than the mini game started in the second case. The second operation promotion display may be displayed.

  Further, the first operation promotion display may be a display prompting only the operation of the operation means, or may be a display prompting other than the operation of the operation means. Further, the first operation promotion display may be a display that always prompts the operation of the operation unit, or may be a display that may not prompt the operation of the operation unit.

  Further, the second operation promotion display may be a display that prompts only the operation of the operation means, or may be a display that prompts other operations than the operation means. Further, the second operation promotion display may be a display that always prompts the operation of the operation means, or may be a display that may not prompt the operation of the operation means.

  Further, the first operation promotion display may be capable of being displayed only with the first number of display patterns, or may be capable of being displayed with a display pattern other than the first number of display patterns. Good. Further, the first operation promotion display may always be displayed with the first number of display patterns, or may not be displayed with the first number of display patterns.

  Further, the second operation promotion display may be capable of being displayed only with the second number of display patterns, or may be capable of being displayed with a display pattern other than the second number of display patterns. Good. Further, the second operation promotion display may always be displayed with the second number of display patterns, or may not be displayed with the second number of display patterns.

  Further, the first number may be 1 or a number of 2 or more.

  Further, the first operation promotion display and the second operation promotion display may be larger in size, and the second operation promotion display may be larger in size. Alternatively, the first operation promotion display and the second operation promotion display may have the same size.

  Further, the first operation promotion display and the second operation promotion display may have different display modes, or at least some of the display modes may be the same.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of results is a first result [for example, display of“ Koyoshi ”shown in FIG. 114 (l), etc.],
The first result is a result that at least suggests the result of the determination as to whether or not the result is correct [for example, the display of “Koyoshi” shown in FIG. At least suggest indications, etc.]
The first result is more easily derived in the mini-game than in the first case,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the mini game may be capable of deriving only the first result, or may be capable of deriving results other than the first result. Further, the mini game may always derive the first result, or may not derive the first result.

  In addition, the first result may at least suggest only the result of the determination, or may also indicate at least other than the result of the determination. In addition, the first result may necessarily at least suggest the result of the success / failure determination, or may not at least suggest the result of the determination.

  In addition, the first result may indicate a result of the determination of success or failure, or may notify the result of the determination of success or failure.

  In the first case, the first result may not be derived in the mini game, and in the second case, the first result may be necessarily derived in the mini game.

Further, the first result derived when the mini-game is started during execution of the decorative symbol variation display is a notice or a pre-read notice [for example, FIG. 117 (a) to FIG. As shown in the above, in the mini-game that is performed while the decorative symbols are being displayed, a notice or look-ahead notice is given when the hero's character YSM appears from the treasure box.
The first result derived when the mini game is started during execution of the jackpot game is a pre-reading notice,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, there is a case where the mini game can be functioned as a notice.

The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect display,
One of the plurality of types of effect display is a first effect display,
The first effect display is an effect display [for example, button operation effects shown in FIG. 110 (c) to FIG. 110 (o)] related to the decorative symbol variation display,
The first effect display is an effect display in which a jackpot notice (hereinafter referred to as “first notice [for example, display of the weak cut-in image CI1b shown in FIG. 110 (o), etc.]”) may be executed. And
A notice related to the first notice may be executed as the first result derived when the mini-game is started during execution of the decorative symbol variation display [for example, FIG. 110 ( c) to (l), the display of “Nakayoshi” derived in the mini-game that is started during the display of the variation of the decorative symbol is foreseeing the display of the weak cut-in image CI1b, etc. ],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, it may be possible to focus on the first result that affects the first notice.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of effect display, or may be capable of displaying displays other than the plurality of types of effect display. The display means may always display a plurality of types of effect displays, or may not display a plurality of types of effect displays.

  The first effect display may be related only to the decorative symbol variation display, or may be related to other than the decorative symbol variation display. The first effect display may always be related to the decorative symbol variation display, or may not be related to the decorative symbol variation display.

  In addition, the first effect display may be executed only in the first notice or may be executed in addition to the first notice. Further, the first effect display may be one in which the first notice is always executed, or the first notice may not be executed.

  In addition, as a first result derived when the mini-game is started while the decorative symbol variation display is being executed, only the notice related to the first notice may be executed, or the decorative symbol may be executed. As a first result derived when the mini game is started during the execution of the variable display, a notice other than the notice related to the first notice may also be executed. In addition, as a first result derived when the mini game is started during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display, a notice related to the first notice may be always executed, or the decoration symbol variation display is executed. As a first result derived when the mini game is started, a notice related to the first notice may not be executed.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of results is a second result [for example,“ daikichi ”displayed in FIG. 113 (l)”]
The second result is a result that at least suggests the result of the determination as to whether or not it is a success / failure [for example, the display of “Daiyoshi” shown in FIG. 113 (l) shows the strong cut-in image CI1a shown in FIG. At least suggest indications, etc.]
The second result is more easily derived in the mini-game than the first case,
If the second result is derived rather than the first result is derived as a result of the mini game, the jackpot symbol is easier to be finally displayed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the plurality of types of results may be only the first result and the second result, or may include results other than the first result and the second result.

  Further, the second result may be a result suggesting the result of the success / failure determination, or may be a result of informing the result of the success / failure determination in advance.

  In the first case, the second result may not be derived in the mini game. In the second case, the second result may be necessarily derived in the mini game. Good.

  Further, when the first result is derived, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is not finally displayed. When the second result is derived, the jackpot symbol is always finalized. It may be configured to be displayed.

In addition, in the first case, the mini-game only has the third result [for example, the result of the mini-game shown in FIG. 130 (k), FIG. 130 (k1) to FIG. A game to derive,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

“One of the plural types of results is a fourth result [for example, the display of the princess character HM3 and“ Daiyoshi ”shown in FIG. 130 (k1), or the display of FIG. 133 (A6)”. The display of the state that the clothes of the Bancho character were torn, etc.]
The fourth result is a result that does not at least suggest a result of the success / failure determination [for example, at least one of the determination of whether or not the special figure is appropriate or not]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, there may be a case where variations can be given to the result of the mini game.

  Further, the mini game may be capable of deriving only the third result and the fourth result, or may be capable of deriving results other than the third result and the fourth result. . The mini game may always derive the third result and the fourth result, or may not derive the third result and the fourth result.

Further, the fourth result does not suggest the result of the determination of success / failure, nor is it intended to notify.
In the above description,
“Operating means provided at a position where the player can operate [for example, an effect button 136, an operation key unit 137, etc.]
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect displays [for example, the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.]
A game machine equipped with
The game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like]
One of the plurality of types of effect display is a first effect display,
One of the plurality of types of effect display is a second effect display,
The first effect display is an effect display related to the decorative symbol variation display [for example, the change icon change effect shown in FIGS. 98 (c) to (n), FIG. 109 (g) to FIG. i) Button notice effect, etc.
The second effect display is a mini game effect display [for example, the mini game shown in FIGS. 98 (d) to (k) or the button notice shown in FIGS. 108 (m) to 109 (f). Production etc.]
The first effect display is a first operation promotion display [for example, the button hold icon display shown in FIG. 98 (c) to FIG. 98 (j), and FIG. 109 (g) to FIG. And a button image 136a that is rotating and a display of “Push”, etc.]
The second effect display is a second operation promotion display [for example, the display of the button image 136a shown in FIG. 98 (e) to FIG. 98 (f) or the display of FIG. 108 (r) to FIG. Button image 136a and display of “continuous hit” etc.]
The first operation promotion display is a display prompting the operation of the operation means,
The second operation promotion display is a display prompting the operation of the operation means,
The first operation promotion display and the second operation promotion display are different operation promotion displays,
The first effect display is a jackpot notice (hereinafter referred to as “first notice [for example, as shown in FIG. 98 (k)], the hold icon is displayed in a pre-read notice display form (circular and blue display form). For example, a pre-reading advance notice or a notice by displaying the strong cut-in image CI1a shown in FIG. 109 (i) or the weak cut-in image CI1b shown in FIG. 109 (i ′)]. It is a certain production display,
The second effect display is a notice related to the first effect display (hereinafter referred to as “second notice [for example, as shown in FIG. 98 (h) to FIG. 98 (k),“ hold 1UP ””). Depending on the display, a notice that the reliability of the pre-reading notice in the hold icon will be increased by one level, or a display of “Daikichi” as shown in FIG. ”, Etc.”))) may be derived,
The first notice is a notice that can be executed in a plurality of modes.
One of the plurality of modes is the first mode [for example, the hold icon in the blue display mode shown in FIG. 98 (k), the weak cut-in image CI1b shown in FIG. 110 (o), etc.] And
One of the plurality of modes is the second mode [for example, the hold icon in the green display mode shown in FIG. 98 (m), the strong cut-in image CI1a shown in FIG. 109 (i), etc.] And
The first aspect and the second aspect are different aspects,
In the event that the first notice is executed in the second aspect, the jackpot symbol is finally more easily confirmed and displayed than in the case where the first notice is executed in the first aspect. Configured,
The case where the first effect display is performed after the second effect display is performed rather than the case where the first effect display is performed without the second effect display, It is configured so that the first notice according to the second aspect is easily performed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.
Further, “a state in which both the first effect display and the second effect display are displayed (hereinafter referred to as“ first state [for example, as shown in FIG. 98 (d) to FIG. 98 (k)]. The state where both the change effect of the hold icon and the mini game are displayed, or the state where both the button notice effect and the mini game are displayed as shown in FIGS. 110 (c) to (o). Etc.] ”)).
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
In addition, when the operation means is operated in the first state, the second notice of the first notice and the second notice is executed [for example, As shown in FIG. 98 (f), when the effect button 136 is operated in a state where both the change effect of the hold icon and the mini game are displayed, the result of the mini game is derived, or FIG. g) to the same figure (l), if the effect button 136 is operated repeatedly in a state where both the button notice effect and the mini game are displayed, the result of the mini game is derived, etc.]
When the operation means is operated after the second notice is started, the first notice corresponding to the second notice is executed [for example, FIG. As shown in (), when the effect button 136 is operated after the mini-game result is derived, as shown in FIG. When the effect button 136 is operated after the mini game result is derived as shown in FIG. 110 (n), as shown in FIG. 110 (n), as shown in FIG. Depending on the result, the weak cut-in image CI1b is displayed, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Further, “in the first state, when the operation means is operated, at least the first notice of the first notice and the second notice is executed [for example, As shown in FIG. 102 (f), when the effect button 136 is operated in a state where both the change effect of the hold icon and the mini game are displayed, the display mode of the hold icon is changed and the result of the mini game is displayed. Or when the effect button 136 is operated in a state where both the change effect of the hold icon and the mini game are displayed, as shown in FIG. 105 (g), the display mode of the hold icon changes. But the mini-game results are not derived, etc.]
After the second notice is executed, the first notice executed in response to the second notice may change [for example, FIG. 102 (g) to FIG. 102 (j), As shown in FIG. 105 (h) to FIG. 105 (m), after the result of the mini game is derived and “hold 1UP” is displayed, the hold icon in the blue display mode changes to the green display mode. etc],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
In the first state, the first effect display is overlapped with the second effect display [For example, as shown in FIGS. 103 (e) to (i), the first decoration is displayed. The change effect of the hold icon performed on the symbol display device 208L is overlapped with the mini game performed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
In addition, “second valid period [for example, the operation reception period of the effect button 136 in the mini game, etc. shown in FIGS. 98 (e) to (f), FIG. 112 (e) to (g), etc.) ], When the operation means is operated, the second notice is started.
The second effect display is a second effective period display [for example, the button reception time meter MT shown in FIGS. 98 (e) to (f), 112 (e) to (g), etc. ] Is a production display including
The second effective period display is a display whose display mode changes as the second effective period elapses [for example, FIG. 98 (e) to FIG. 98 (f) and FIG. 112 (e) to FIG. As shown in the figure (g) etc., the button reception time meter MT has a display mode that is changed in such a manner that the gauge decreases according to the time since the operation reception time has started],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
In addition, “the second notice is a notice that can be executed in a plurality of modes,
One of the plurality of aspects is a third aspect [for example, display of “Koyoshi” shown in FIG. 114 (l), etc.]
One of the plurality of modes is a fourth mode [for example, display of “Daichi” shown in FIG. 113 (l), etc.]
When the second notice is executed in the fourth mode, the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed.
The case where the second notice according to the fourth aspect is made is more effective than the case where the second notice according to the third aspect is made [for example, FIG. 113 (n Etc.) is configured so that the first notice is easily made.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
In addition, the first notice is a pre-read notice [for example, the hold icon in the blue display mode shown in FIG. 98 (k) or the green display form in FIG. 98 (m). Icon display etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
In addition, “the number of the hold icons corresponding to the number of the start of the symbol variation display can be displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. The three hold icons h11, h12, h13 are displayed, etc.
The first notice is a notice made by changing the display mode of the hold icon [For example, as shown in FIGS. 98 (k) and (m), the display form of the hold icon is changed to blue. Pre-reading notice is given by changing to the display mode or green display mode]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
In the above description,
“Operating means provided at a position where the player can operate [for example, an effect button 136, an operation key unit 137, etc.]
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect displays [for example, the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.]
A game machine equipped with
The game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like]
One of the plurality of types of effect display is a first effect display,
One of the plurality of types of effect display is a second effect display,
The first effect display is an effect display related to the decorative symbol variation display [for example, a change effect of the hold icon shown in FIG. 98 (c) to FIG.
The second effect display is a mini game effect display [for example, the mini game shown in FIG. 98 (d) to FIG. 98 (k)],
The first effect display is an effect display including a first operation promotion display [for example, display of a button hold icon shown in FIG. 98 (c) to FIG. 98 (j)],
The second effect display is an effect display including a second operation promotion display [for example, display of the button image 136a shown in FIG. 98 (e) to FIG. 98 (f)],
The first operation promotion display is a display prompting the operation of the operation means,
The second operation promotion display is a display prompting the operation of the operation means,
The first operation promotion display and the second operation promotion display are different operation promotion displays,
The first effect display is a jackpot notice (hereinafter referred to as “first notice [for example, as shown in FIG. 98 (k)], the hold icon is displayed in a pre-read notice display form (circular and blue display form). Is a presentation display that may be executed,
The second effect display is a second advance notice [for example, as shown in FIG. 98 (h) to FIG. Is a presentation display that may be executed,
The first notice is a notice that can be executed in a plurality of modes.
When the first operation promotion display is displayed, the first notice is executed in response to the operation of the operation means [for example, as shown in FIGS. 98 (e) to (h). As described above, when the button image 136a is displayed together with the button reception time meter, when the effect button 136 is operated, the character of “pending 1UP” is displayed after the dice symbol is stopped and displayed]
When the second operation promotion display is displayed, the second notice is executed in response to the operation means being operated [for example, as shown in FIGS. 98 (c) to (k). In this way, when the button hold icon is displayed, when the effect button 136 is operated, the display mode of the button hold icon changes to a circular and blue display mode, etc.]
The first notice aspect is configured to be notified by the executed second notice aspect,
A state in which both the first operation promotion display and the second operation promotion display are displayed (hereinafter referred to as “first state [eg, FIG. 98 (e) to FIG. 98 (f), FIG. e) to (f) in the same figure, and as shown in FIGS. 105 (f) to (g), the button reception time meter and the state where both the button image 136a and the button hold icon are displayed. .)
In the first state, when the operation means is operated, at least one of the first notice and the second notice is executed [for example, FIG. ) To (g), when the effect button 136 is operated in a state where both the change effect of the hold icon and the mini game are displayed, the display mode of the hold icon changes and the mini game is displayed. When the result is also derived, or as shown in FIGS. 105 (g) to 105 (h), when the effect button 136 is operated in a state where both the change icon change effect and the mini game are displayed, Although the display mode of the hold icon changes, the result of the mini game is not derived, or both the change effect of the hold icon and the mini game are displayed as shown in FIGS. 98 (g) to (h). When the production in Thailand button 136 is operated, such as the results of the mini-game is derived that the display aspect of the pending icon does not change],
The mode of the first notice may change depending on the form of the second notice [for example, FIG. 98 (g) to FIG. (M) or FIG. 102 (g) to FIG. 102 (j). Or, as shown in FIG. 105 (h) to FIG. 105 (m), when the result of the mini game is “hold 1UP”, the hold icon in the blue display mode changes to the green display mode, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.
In addition, when the operation means is operated in the first state, at least the first notice of the first notice and the second notice is executed [for example, As shown in FIG. 102 (f), when the effect button 136 is operated in a state where both the change effect of the hold icon and the mini game are displayed, the display mode of the hold icon is changed and the result of the mini game is displayed. Or when the effect button 136 is operated in a state where both the change effect of the hold icon and the mini game are displayed as shown in FIG. 105 (g), the display mode of the hold icon changes. But the mini-game results are not derived, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
In addition, “the second notice is a notice that may be executed in the third mode [for example, display of“ pending 1 UP ”shown in FIG.
The second notice is a notice that may be executed in the fourth mode [for example, display of “sorry” shown in FIG. 106 (h), etc.]
The third aspect and the fourth aspect are different aspects,
The fourth aspect is an aspect suggesting that the first aspect changes [for example, in FIGS. 102 (g) to (j) and FIGS. 105 (h) to (m). As shown, it is suggested that the result of the mini-game is derived and “hold 1UP” is displayed, so that the display mode of the hold icon displayed in the blue display mode is changed],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
In addition, the “first notice is a notice that may be executed in a first form [for example, a form in which a hold icon is displayed in a blue display form as shown in FIG. 98 (k)],
The first notice is a notice that may be executed in a second form [for example, a form in which a hold icon is displayed in a green display form as shown in FIG. 98 (m), etc.]
The first aspect and the second aspect are different aspects,
The case where the second notice is executed in the fourth aspect is more effective than the case where the second notice is executed in the third aspect. Is likely to be changed to the second mode [For example, as shown in FIGS. 102 (g) to (j) and FIGS. 105 (h) to (m), the result of the mini game is derived. When “Hold 1UP” is displayed, the blue hold icon changes to a green display mode]
When the first notice changes from the first aspect to the second aspect than when the first notice does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect, Eventually the jackpot symbol is easy to be confirmed and displayed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
In addition, the “first notice is a notice that may be executed in a fifth form [for example, a form in which a hold icon is displayed in a red display form as shown in FIG. 101 (m), etc.]
The second notice is a notice that may be executed in the sixth aspect,
The first embodiment and the fifth embodiment are different embodiments,
The second aspect and the fifth aspect are different aspects,
The third aspect and the sixth aspect are different aspects,
The fourth aspect and the sixth aspect are different aspects,
When the first notice is executed in the first aspect and the second notice is executed in the third aspect, the aspect of the first notice does not change,
When the first notice is executed in the first aspect and the second notice is executed in the fourth aspect, the first notice is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 102 (g) to (j) and FIGS. 105 (h) to (m), the result of the mini-game is derived and “hold 1 UP” is When displayed, the blue display mode changes to a green display mode, etc.]
When the first notice is executed in the first aspect and the second notice is executed in the sixth aspect, the first notice is changed from the first aspect to the fifth. Changes to
The case where the first notice changes from the first aspect to the fifth aspect is more final than the case where the first notice changes from the first aspect to the second aspect. The big hit symbol is easy to be confirmed and displayed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
The display means is a means constituted by a plurality of display means,
One of the plurality of display means is a first display means [for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, etc.]
One of the plurality of display means is a second display means [for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the like]
The first effect display is an effect display displayed on the first display means [for example, as shown in FIG. 98 (c) to FIG. 98 (k), the change effect of the hold icon is the first decorative symbol. Displayed on the display device 208L, etc.]
The second effect display is an effect display displayed on the second display means [for example, as shown in FIG. 98 (d) to FIG. 98 (h), the mini game is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
In addition, the second display means includes a first position [for example, an initial position of the second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 105 (a)] and a second position [for example, FIG. 105 (d). The position of the second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG.
The second position is a position where the second display means may overlap the first effect display [for example, as shown in FIG. 105 (d), the second decorative symbol display device 208M Button overlap icon etc.],
The first position is a position where the second display means does not overlap the first effect display [For example, as shown in FIG. 105 (c), the second decorative symbol display device 208M is in the initial position. Button overlap icon etc.],
When the second effect display is displayed, the second display means moves to the second position [for example, a mini game is displayed as shown in FIGS. 105 (d) to 105 (e). When the second decorative symbol display device 208M is moved from the initial position, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
In addition, when the operation means is not operated while the second effect display is displayed, the second notice is not executed [for example, FIG. 107 (e) to FIG. 107 (h). As shown in the above, when the production button 136 is not operated in the mini game, the result of the mini game is not derived, etc.]
When the second notice is not executed, the form of the first notice being executed is not changed [for example, a result in a mini game as shown in FIGS. 107 (h) to (k). Is not derived, the blue display hold icon does not change, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
In addition, when the operation means is operated in the second effective period [for example, the operation reception period of the effect button 136 in the mini game shown in FIG. 98 (e) to FIG. 98 (f), etc.] The second notice is started,
The second effect display is an effect display including a second effective period display [for example, the button reception time meter MT shown in FIG. 98 (e) to FIG. 98 (f), etc.]
The second effective period display is a display whose display mode changes as the second effective period elapses [for example, as shown in FIG. 98 (e) to FIG. The time meter MT changes the display mode in such a manner that the gauge decreases according to the time since the operation reception time has started]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
In addition, the first notice is a pre-read notice [for example, the hold icon in the blue display mode shown in FIG. 98 (k) or the green display form in FIG. 98 (m). Icon display etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
In addition, “the number of the hold icons corresponding to the number of the start of the symbol variation display can be displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. The three hold icons h11, h12, h13 are displayed, etc.
The first notice is a notice made by changing the display mode of the hold icon [For example, as shown in FIGS. 98 (k) and (m), the display form of the hold icon is changed to blue. Pre-reading notice is given by changing to the display mode or green display mode]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
In the above description,
“Operating means provided at a position where the player can operate [for example, an effect button 136, an operation key unit 137, etc.]
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect displays [for example, the decorative symbol display device 208, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.]
A game machine equipped with
The game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, a pachinko machine 100 or the like]
One of the plurality of types of effect display is a first effect display,
One of the plurality of types of effect display is a second effect display,
The first effect display is an effect display related to the decorative symbol variation display [for example, a change effect of the hold icon shown in FIG. 98 (c) to FIG.
The second effect display is a mini game effect display [for example, the mini game shown in FIG. 98 (d) to FIG. 98 (k)],
The first effect display is an effect display including a first operation promotion display [for example, display of a button hold icon shown in FIG. 98 (c) to FIG. 98 (j)],
The second effect display is an effect display including a second operation promotion display [for example, display of the button image 136a shown in FIG. 98 (e) to FIG. 98 (f)],
The first operation promotion display is a display prompting the operation of the operation means,
The second operation promotion display is a display prompting the operation of the operation means,
The first operation promotion display and the second operation promotion display are different operation promotion displays,
The first effect display is a jackpot notice [for example, as shown in FIG. 98 (k), a look-ahead notice by displaying a hold icon in a pre-read notice display form (circular and blue display form)]. It is a production display that may be
The second effect display is a second advance notice [for example, as shown in FIG. 98 (h) to FIG. Is a presentation display that may be executed,
When the first operation promotion display is displayed, the jackpot notice (hereinafter referred to as “first notice”) is displayed in response to the operation means being operated [for example, FIG. e) to the same figure (h), when the button image 136a is displayed together with the button reception time meter, when the effect button 136 is operated, after the design of the dice is stopped and displayed, "hold 1UP" , Etc. are displayed],
When the second operation promotion display is displayed, the second notice is displayed in response to the operation means being operated [for example, as shown in FIGS. 98 (c) to (k). In this way, when the button hold icon is displayed, when the effect button 136 is operated, the display mode of the button hold icon changes to a circular and blue display mode, etc.]
The first notice is a notice that can be displayed in a plurality of modes (hereinafter referred to as “a plurality of first notice modes”),
One of the plurality of first notice modes is a first mode [for example, a mode in which a hold icon is displayed in a blue display mode as shown in FIG. 98 (k), etc.]
One of the plurality of first notice modes is a second mode [for example, a mode in which a hold icon is displayed in a green display mode as shown in FIG. 98 (m), etc.]
The second notice is a notice that can be displayed in a plurality of modes (hereinafter referred to as “a plurality of second notice modes”),
One of the plurality of second notice modes is a third mode [for example, display of “sorry” shown in FIG. 106 (h), etc.]
One of the plurality of second notice modes is a fourth mode [for example, display of “pending 1 UP” shown in FIG. 98 (h), etc.],
The second notice of the fourth aspect is a notice suggesting that the aspect of the first notice changes,
A state in which both the first operation promotion display and the second operation promotion display are displayed (hereinafter referred to as “first state [eg, FIG. 98 (e) to FIG. 98 (f), FIG. e) to (f) in the same figure, and as shown in FIGS. 105 (f) to (g), the button reception time meter and the state where both the button image 136a and the button hold icon are displayed. .)
In the first state, when the operation means is operated, at least one of the first notice and the second notice is executed [for example, FIG. ) To (g), when the effect button 136 is operated in a state where both the change effect of the hold icon and the mini game are displayed, the display mode of the hold icon changes and the mini game is displayed. When the result is also derived, or as shown in FIGS. 105 (g) to 105 (h), when the effect button 136 is operated in a state where both the change icon change effect and the mini game are displayed, Although the display mode of the hold icon changes, the result of the mini game is not derived, or both the change effect of the hold icon and the mini game are displayed as shown in FIGS. 98 (g) to (h). When the production in Thailand button 136 is operated, such as the results of the mini-game is derived that the display aspect of the pending icon does not change],
In the first state, depending on the operation means being operated, the first state may be changed to the second state,
The second state is a state in which the first operation promotion display is displayed, and a state in which the second notice is displayed in the fourth mode [for example, as shown in FIG. 98 (h) , The button hold icon is displayed, and the display of “hold 1 UP” is displayed, etc.]
In the second state, depending on the operation means being operated, the second state may be changed to the third state,
The third state is a state in which the second notice of the fourth aspect is displayed, and a state in which the first notice is displayed in the first aspect [for example, FIG. 98 (k) As shown in FIG. 4, the hold icon in the blue display mode is displayed and the display of “hold 1 UP” is displayed].
In the third state, the first notice of the first aspect changes to the second aspect in connection with the display of the second notice of the fourth aspect [for example, As shown in FIG. 98 (k) to FIG. 98 (m), the hold icon in the blue display mode changes to the green display mode in response to the display of “hold 1UP” displayed, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.
In addition, the case where the second notice is displayed in the fourth mode is displayed in the first form than the case where the second notice is displayed in the third form. The first notice is easily changed to the second mode [For example, as shown in FIGS. 102 (g) to (j) and FIGS. 105 (h) to (m), When the result is derived and “hold 1 UP” is displayed, the hold icon in the blue display mode changes to the green display mode, etc.],
When the first notice changes from the first aspect to the second aspect than when the first notice does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect, Eventually the jackpot symbol is easy to be confirmed and displayed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
In addition, “one of the plurality of first notice modes is a fifth mode [for example, a mode in which a hold icon is displayed in a red display mode as illustrated in FIG. 101 (m)]. Yes,
One of the plurality of second notice modes is a sixth mode,
The first aspect and the fifth aspect are different aspects,
The second aspect and the fifth aspect are different aspects,
The third aspect and the sixth aspect are different aspects,
The fourth aspect and the sixth aspect are different aspects,
When the first notice is displayed in the first aspect and the second notice is displayed in the third aspect, the aspect of the first notice does not change,
When the first notice is displayed in the first aspect and the second notice is displayed in the fourth aspect, the first notice is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. [For example, as shown in FIGS. 102 (g) to (j) and FIGS. 105 (h) to (m), the result of the mini-game is derived and “hold 1 UP” is When displayed, the blue display mode changes to a green display mode, etc.]
When the first notice is displayed in the first aspect and the second notice is displayed in the sixth aspect, the first notice is changed from the first aspect to the fifth aspect. Changes to
The case where the first notice changes from the first aspect to the fifth aspect is more final than the case where the first notice changes from the first aspect to the second aspect. The big hit symbol is easy to be confirmed and displayed.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
The display means is a means constituted by a plurality of display means,
One of the plurality of display means is a first display means [for example, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, etc.]
One of the plurality of display means is a second display means [for example, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the like]
The first effect display is an effect table displayed on the first display means [for example, as shown in FIG. 98 (c) to FIG. 98 (k), the change effect of the hold icon is the first decorative symbol display device. Etc. displayed on 208L], and
The second effect display is an effect display displayed on the second display means [for example, as shown in FIG. 98 (d) to FIG. 98 (h), the mini game is displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M. Etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
In addition, the second display means includes a first position [for example, an initial position of the second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG. 105 (a)] and a second position [for example, FIG. 105 (d). The position of the second decorative symbol display device 208M shown in FIG.
The second position is a position where the second display means may overlap the first effect display [for example, as shown in FIG. 105 (d), the second decorative symbol display device 208M Button overlap icon etc.],
The first position is a position where the second display means does not overlap the first effect display [For example, as shown in FIG. 105 (c), the second decorative symbol display device 208M is in the initial position. Button overlap icon etc.],
When the second effect display is displayed, the second display means moves to the second position [for example, a mini game is displayed as shown in FIGS. 105 (d) to 105 (e). When the second decorative symbol display device 208M is moved from the initial position, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
Further, when the operation means is not operated while the second operation promotion display is displayed, the second notice is not displayed [for example, FIG. 107 (e) to FIG. ), If the effect button 136 is not operated in the mini game, the result of the mini game is not derived.
When the second notice is not displayed, the displayed first notice form does not change [for example, a result in a mini game as shown in FIGS. 107 (h) to (k). Is not derived, the blue display hold icon does not change, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
In addition, when the operation means is operated in the second effective period [for example, the operation reception period of the effect button 136 in the mini game shown in FIG. 98 (e) to FIG. 98 (f), etc.] The display of the second notice starts,
The second effect display is an effect display including a second effective period display [for example, the button reception time meter MT shown in FIG. 98 (e) to FIG. 98 (f), etc.]
The second effective period display is a display whose display mode changes as the second effective period elapses [for example, as shown in FIG. 98 (e) to FIG. The time meter MT changes the display mode in such a manner that the gauge decreases according to the time since the operation reception time has started]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
In addition, the first notice is a pre-read notice [for example, the hold icon in the blue display mode shown in FIG. 98 (k) or the green display form in FIG. 98 (m). Icon display etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.
In addition, “the number of the hold icons corresponding to the number of the start of the symbol variation display can be displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. If it is, three hold icons h11, h12, h13 are displayed, etc.]
The first notice is a notice made by changing the display mode of the hold icon [For example, as shown in FIGS. 98 (k) and (m), the display form of the hold icon is changed to blue. Pre-reading notice is given by changing to the display mode or green display mode]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  In the following, a description will be made including what has been described so far.

(Appendix 1)
Image display means;
A symbol display means capable of executing symbol variation display;
A notice means capable of executing multiple kinds of notices;
A game machine equipped with
The image display means is display means capable of displaying a hold display,
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice icons,
The hold display is a display displayed in a hold display area in the image display means,
The on-hold display is a display according to the number of operations of the symbol variation display on-hold (hereinafter referred to as “the number of on-hold”).
The symbol variation display is a display that can be started when the hold is digested,
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a notice icon display area in the image display means,
The notice icon is different from the hold display,
The notice icon display area is an area different from the hold display area,
The notice icon display area is an area where one or a plurality of the notice icons can be displayed,
The notice means is means capable of executing the notice corresponding to the type of the notice icon digested when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested,
In a period in which the symbol variation display is performed once, the first number larger than the first number than the case where the first number of the plurality of types of notice icons is consumed by the first number. It is configured so that it is easier to win if the number of two is digested,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 2)
The game machine according to appendix 1,
The notice icon is configured to display a number corresponding to the number of times that the notice may be executed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 3)
The game stand according to appendix 1 or 2,
The notice means is a means capable of executing a fake notice in the same form as the notice form,
The notice means is a means capable of executing the fake notice corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. ,
After the false notice is executed, the symbol variation display result is configured to be off.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 4)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 3,
A fourth number in which the number of the notice icons started to be displayed in the notice icon display area is larger than the third number during the period in which the one time symbol variation display is executed. It is configured so that is more likely to be a big hit,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 5)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 4,
A holding display means capable of executing display according to the holding number;
The hold display means is a display means different from the image display means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 6)
A game machine according to appendix 5,
The holding display means is a display means including a light emitting means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 7)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 6,
Pre-fetch notice means that can perform pre-read notice,
The prefetch notice means is a means capable of executing the prefetch notice by displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 8)
The game stand according to appendix 7,
In a period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “second symbol variation display”) to be prefetched is being executed, the notice icon may be digested to the fifth number.
During the period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “first symbol variation display”) executed before the second symbol variation display is performed, the notice icon is displayed as a sixth icon. May be digested,
The sixth number is different from the fifth number;
The hold display is a display for notifying that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 9)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 8,
The notice icon may start to be displayed during the period when the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “fourth symbol variation display”) in which the notice icon is digested is executed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 10)
A gaming machine according to appendix 9, wherein
During the period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “third symbol variation display”) executed before the fourth symbol variation display is performed, the fourth symbol variation display is performed. The notice icon that is digested in the period during which the display is being executed may start to be displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 11)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 10,
The hold display area is an area that can display the hold display up to a seventh number;
The notice icon display area is an area capable of displaying the notice icon up to an eighth number,
The seventh number is different from the eighth number;
It is characterized by that.

(Appendix 12)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 11,
Providing production means that can perform multiple types of production,
One of the multiple types of notices is a first notice,
One of the multiple types of notices is a second notice,
The first notice is a notice different from the second notice,
One of the multiple types of effects is a first effect,
One of the multiple types of effects is a second effect,
The first effect is an effect different from the second effect,
The first notice is a notice that informs that the first effect will be executed,
The second notice is a notice that informs that the second effect will be executed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 13)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 12,
The notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is configured to be digested without fail.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 14)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1 to 13,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 15)
A game machine having a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a notice icon,
During the display of the first symbol variation display, the display of the first notice icon may start as the notice icon,
The first notice icon that has been displayed during the display of the first symbol variation display may not be digested during the display of the first symbol variation display,
In the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “second symbol variation display”) displayed after the first symbol variation display, the first symbol that has not been digested during the display of the first symbol variation display. The notice icon is configured to be digested,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 16)
The gaming machine according to appendix 15,
The first notice icon started to be displayed during the display of the first symbol variation display may be digested during the display of the first symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 17)
The game stand according to appendix 15 or 16,
As the pre-reading notice of the second symbol variation display, the first notice icon may be displayed during the display of the first symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 18)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 15 to 17,
During a single symbol variation display, the second number of the first notice icons is digested rather than the first number of the first notice icons being digested. Easy to become,
The second number is a number greater than the first number.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 19)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 15 to 18,
A second notice icon can be displayed as the notice icon,
The second notice icon is configured to be a big hit with the digested symbol variation display,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 20)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 15 to 19,
One of the plurality of types of display is a notice display,
When the first notice icon is digested, the first notice display may be displayed as the notice display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 21)
The gaming machine according to appendix 20, wherein
One of the plurality of types of display is a fake notice display,
When the first notice icon is digested, the first fake notice display may be displayed as the fake notice display,
The display form of the first false notice display is the same display form as the display form of the first notice display,
The symbol fluctuating display in which the first false notice display is displayed is configured to be out of place,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 22)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 15 to 21,
One of the plurality of types of display is a pre-reading effect display,
A third notice icon can be displayed as the notice icon,
When the third notice icon is digested, the prefetch effect display may be started.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 23)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 15 to 22,
The display means is a means constituted by a plurality of display means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 24)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 15 to 23,
One of the plurality of types of display is a decorative symbol variation display,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 25)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 15 to 24,
The first notice icon started to be displayed during the display of the first symbol variation display is configured to be digested by the end of the display of the second symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 26)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 15 to 25,
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a notice icon display area in the display means,
The notice icon display area is an area where a plurality of the notice icons can be displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 27)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 15 to 26,
Providing production control means,
The production control means is means capable of executing control of the display means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 28)
The game stand according to appendix 27,
Main control means;
A symbol display means capable of displaying a symbol variation display;
With
The main control means is means capable of transmitting a command to the effect control means,
The production control means is means capable of executing control according to the command from the main control means,
The main control means is means capable of executing control of the symbol display means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 29)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 15 to 28,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 30)
A first display means capable of executing symbol variation display;
A second display means;
A game machine equipped with
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a notice icon,
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of notice display,
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying in the hold display area a display corresponding to the number of operations of the symbol variation display being held (hereinafter referred to as “hold number”).
The symbol variation display is a display that starts when the hold is consumed,
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a notice icon display area in the second display means,
The notice icon is an icon that does not display the number of holds depending on the number displayed,
The notice icon display area is an area different from the hold display area,
The notice icon display area is an area where a plurality of the notice icons can be displayed,
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying the notice display of a type corresponding to the type of the digested notice icon when the notice icon in the notice icon display area is digested,
In the period in which the symbol variation display is performed once, the big hit is when the second number digest is larger than the first number than when the notice icon is digested by the first number. It is configured to be easy to become,
The second display means displays in the notice icon display area as a look-ahead notice display before the symbol change display (hereinafter referred to as “second figure change display”), which is a target of prefetching, is started. Display means capable of displaying the notice icon;
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 31)
The gaming machine according to attachment 30, wherein
The notice icon is configured to display a number corresponding to the number of times that the notice display may be displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 32)
The game stand according to appendix 30 or 31,
The second display means is a display means capable of displaying a fake notice display in the same form as the notice display form,
The second display means can display the fake notice display of the type corresponding to the kind of the notice icon digested when one notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is digested. Display means,
After the false notice display is displayed, the symbol variation display result is configured to be out of sync.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 33)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 30 to 32,
The second display means is a display means constituted by a plurality of display means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 34)
A gaming machine according to attachment 33,
One display means of the plurality of display means is an image display means,
One of the plurality of display means is a holding display means,
The hold display means is a display means configured to include the hold display area,
The hold display means is a display means capable of displaying a display corresponding to the hold number in the hold display area,
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a variation display of a decorative design,
The image display means is display means capable of displaying the notice icon in the notice icon display area,
The game stand, wherein the hold display means is a display means different from the image display means.

(Appendix 35)
A gaming machine according to appendix 34,
The holding display means is a display means including a light emitting means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 36)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 30 to 32,
The second display means is an image display means,
The image display means is a display means capable of displaying a variation display of a decorative design,
A hold icon is displayed in the hold display area according to the number of holds.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 37)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 30 to 36,
In the period when the second symbol variation display is being executed, the notice icon may be consumed by the fifth number,
During the period in which the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “first symbol variation display”) executed before the second symbol variation display is performed, the notice icon is displayed as a sixth icon. May be digested,
The sixth number is different from the fifth number;
The display according to the number of suspensions is a display for notifying that the operation of the second symbol variation display is suspended during the period in which the first symbol variation display is being executed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 38)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 30 to 36,
The notice icon displayed in the notice icon display area is configured to be digested before the end of the symbol variation display to be prefetched.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 39)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 30 to 38,
The notice icon may start to be displayed during the period when the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “fourth symbol variation display”) in which the notice icon is digested is executed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 40)
A gaming machine according to appendix 39,
The notice icon digested in the period in which the fourth symbol variation display is executed in the period in which the symbol variation display is executed before the fourth symbol variation display is executed. May start displaying,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 41)
The game stand according to any one of supplementary notes 30 to 40,
The hold display area is an area that can display up to a seventh number according to the number of holds,
The notice icon display area is an area capable of displaying the notice icon up to an eighth number,
The seventh number is different from the eighth number;
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 42)
The game stand according to any one of supplementary notes 30 to 41,
Providing production means that can perform multiple types of production,
As the notice icon, the first notice icon can be displayed,
As the notice icon, a second notice icon can be displayed,
The first notice icon is a notice icon different from the second notice icon,
One of the plurality of types of notice display is a first notice display,
One of the plurality of types of notice display is a second notice display,
The first notice display is a notice display different from the second notice display,
The first notice display is configured to be displayed when the first notice icon is digested,
The second notice icon is configured to be displayed when the second notice icon is digested,
One of the multiple types of effects is a first effect,
One of the multiple types of effects is a second effect,
The first effect is an effect different from the second effect,
The first notice display is a notice display informing that the first effect is executed,
The gaming table, wherein the second notice display is a notice display informing that the second effect is executed.

(Appendix 43)
The game stand according to any one of supplementary notes 30 to 42,
Main control means;
Production control means;
With
The main control means is means capable of transmitting a command to the effect control means,
The production control means is means capable of executing control according to the command from the main control means,
The main control means is means capable of executing control of the first display means,
The production control means is means capable of executing control of the second display means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 44)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 30 to 43,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 45)
A gaming machine equipped with a display means,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a notice icon,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice display,
When the jackpot symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “second symbol variation display”) to be read ahead is suspended, the second symbol variation display is started after the first symbol variation display is started. A plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter referred to as “multiple notice icons”) may be digested until the end,
In the case where the second symbol variation display is suspended, the plurality of notice icons are newly added between the start of the first symbol variation display and the end of the second symbol variation display. May be displayed,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is an effect display,
When the notice icon is digested, the effect display corresponding to the digested notice icon may be displayed.
One notice icon of the plurality of notice icons is a first notice icon,
One notice icon of the plurality of notice icons is a second notice icon,
In a single symbol variation display, the first number of the notice icons (hereinafter referred to as “first number of notice icons”) is digested, so that the first effect display is displayed as the effect display. Configured to
The first number of notice icons is a notice icon including the first notice icon,
The gaming machine characterized in that the first number of notice icons are notice icons including the second notice icon.

  According to this gaming machine, it is possible to realize a gaming machine with display characteristics.

  Moreover, according to this game stand, there is a possibility that the first effect display is displayed from when one of the first number of icons is displayed until the first number of icons is consumed. In some cases, you can continue to have a sense of expectation.

  In addition, according to this game stand, there is a case where it is possible to give a sense of expectation to the big hit by showing the number of the notice icons as the symbol fluctuation before the reservation to be prefetched.

  Here, the plurality of notice icons may be two notice icons or may be three or more notice icons.

  Further, when the first notice icon is digested, an effect display A corresponding to the first notice icon may be performed, and when the second notice icon is digested, the second notice icon is displayed. The corresponding presentation display B may be performed, or the presentation display C corresponding to the first notice icon and the second notice icon when the first notice icon and the second notice icon are digested. May be performed.

  In addition, only one of the first notice icon and the second notice icon may be digested, or only one notice icon of the first notice icon and the second notice icon is newly added. May be displayed.

(Appendix 46)
The gaming machine according to appendix 45,
Even if a second number of the notice icons (hereinafter referred to as “second number of notice icons”) is digested in one symbol variation display, the first effect display is not displayed. And
The first number and the second number are different numbers;
The second number of notice icons is a notice icon including one notice icon of the first notice icon and the second notice icon,
The second number of notice icons are notice icons that do not include the other notice icon of the first notice icon and the second notice icon.
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to this gaming machine, a notice icon including a first notice icon and a second notice icon is displayed, and a notice icon including a first notice icon and a second notice icon in one symbol variation display. If the first effect display is not displayed, there may be a case where a player who can see the first effect display can be given a sense of superiority.

  Here, the second number may be smaller than the first number, or the second number may be larger than the first number.

  Further, the first number may be one, and in this case, the second number may be two or more. Further, the first number may be two or more, and in this case, the second number may be larger than the first number.

  Further, there may be an effect display that is displayed when the second number of notice icons are digested.

  Moreover, even if the second number of notice icons are digested, a part of the first effect display may be displayed, or the entire first effect display may be displayed.

  Further, the reliability of the jackpot for the first effect display may be changed according to the number of digested notice icons, or the reliability of the jackpot for the first effect display may be the same.

  Further, when the notice icon including the first notice icon and the second notice icon is displayed, the first number of notice icons may be digested without fail.

  In addition, even if a notice icon including the first notice icon and the second notice icon is displayed, the first number of notice icons are not digested and the second number of notice icons are digested. It may be configured such that both the first notice icon and the second notice icon are not erased.

(Appendix 47)
The game stand according to appendix 45 or 46,
One notice icon of the plurality of notice icons is a third notice icon,
When the third notice icon is digested, a third effect display is displayed as the effect display.
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to this game table, there are cases where the variation of the production can be increased and the production effect can be enhanced.

  Note that the third notice icon may be one of the first notice icon and the second notice icon.

  In addition, the third notice icon may be a notice icon different from both the first notice icon and the second notice icon.

(Appendix 48)
48. A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 45 to 47,
In the case where the loss symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “fourth symbol variation display”), which is a prefetch target, is suspended, the fourth symbol variation display is started after the third symbol variation display is started. In some cases, the plurality of notice icons may be consumed before the end.
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to this game stand, even if the notice icon is displayed, it is not necessarily a big hit, and there is a case where it can be enjoyed until the change of the hold to be prefetched ends.

  In addition, depending on whether the result of the symbol variation display of the prefetch target is a big hit or a case of loss, it is digested from the first symbol variation display or the third symbol variation display to the symbol variation display of the prefetch target. The maximum number of notice icons may be the same or different.

  In addition, depending on whether the result of the symbol variation display of the prefetch target is a big hit or the case of the loss, it is digested from the first symbol variation display or the third symbol variation display to the symbol variation display of the prefetch target. The minimum number of notice icons may be the same or different.

  In addition, in the state where the symbol variation display subject to prefetching is suspended, the symbol variation that is performed once before the symbol variation display (second symbol variation display, fourth symbol variation display) subject to prefetching The maximum number of notice icons to be digested in the variation display (for example, the first symbol variation display, the third symbol variation display) is the case where the result of the symbol variation display to be prefetched is a big hit or a case of loss. It may be the same or different.

  In addition, in the state where the symbol variation display subject to prefetching is suspended, the symbol variation that is performed once before the symbol variation display (second symbol variation display, fourth symbol variation display) subject to prefetching The minimum number of notice icons to be digested in the fluctuation display (for example, the first symbol fluctuation display, the third symbol fluctuation display) is the case where the result of the symbol fluctuation display of the pre-read target is a big hit or a case of a loss. It may be the same or different.

  In addition, the maximum number of notice icons digested in the symbol variation display (second symbol variation display, fourth symbol variation display) subject to prefetching in the state where the symbol variation display subject to prefetching is suspended is The result of the symbol variation display of the prefetch target may be the same or different in the case of the big hit and the loss.

  In addition, the minimum number of notice icons digested in the symbol variation display (second symbol variation display, fourth symbol variation display) subject to prefetching in a state where the symbol variation display subject to prefetching is suspended is The result of the symbol variation display of the prefetch target may be the same or different in the case of the big hit and the loss.

(Appendix 49)
The gaming machine according to appendix 48, wherein
In the case where the fourth symbol variation display is suspended, the plurality of notice icons are displayed between the start of the third symbol variation display and the end of the fourth symbol variation display. Sometimes
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to this game machine, even if a notice icon is displayed, it is not always a big hit. Therefore, there is a case where it is possible to entertain until the change of the hold to be prefetched ends.

(Appendix 50)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 45 to 49,
With hold display means,
The on-hold display means is a means capable of displaying the number of on-hold displays corresponding to the number on which the start of the symbol variation display is on hold (hereinafter referred to as “hold number”).
A game stand characterized by that.

  The on-hold display means may be an image display means such as a liquid crystal display device, a light emitting means such as an LED, or a movable means.

(Appendix 51)
The gaming machine according to appendix 50,
It is configured not to display the number of holdings depending on the number of the notice icons displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to this game stand, there is a case where it is possible to perform an effect regardless of the number of holds.

(Appendix 52)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 45 to 51,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 53)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 45 to 51,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 54)
A gaming machine having a plurality of display means,
One display means of the plurality of display means is a first display means,
One display means of the plurality of display means is a second display means,
The first display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
The second display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One type of display among a plurality of types of display that can be displayed on the first display means is a display related to the notice icon,
One type of display among a plurality of types of display that can be displayed on the second display means is a display related to the notice icon.
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice display,
When the jackpot symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “second symbol variation display”) to be read ahead is suspended, the second symbol variation display is started after the first symbol variation display is started. In the meantime, a plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter referred to as “a plurality of notice icons”) may be consumed,
In the case where the second symbol variation display is suspended, the plurality of notice icons are newly added between the start of the first symbol variation display and the end of the second symbol variation display. May be displayed,
A game stand characterized by that.

  The display means may be an image display means such as a liquid crystal display device, or may be one in which a pattern appears by applying a lens cut to the light guide plate and irradiating with a light source from the side. , May be constituted by light emitting means such as LED, or may be constituted by 7 segments.

  In addition, the display related to the notice icon may be a display related to the notice icon being stocked, a display related to the notice icon being digested, or a notice of the notice icon stock. It may be a display or an effect display that is executed when the notice icon is digested.

  Further, the second display means may be larger than the first display means, or the second display means may be smaller than the first display means. Further, the display area of the second display means may be larger than the display area of the first display means, and the display area of the second display means is larger than the display area of the first display means. It may be small.

(Appendix 55)
The gaming machine according to appendix 54,
In the second display means, the plurality of notice icons may be newly displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

  One notice icon may be newly displayed.

  Moreover, you may make it perform the effect that a notice icon is digested with a 2nd display means.

(Appendix 56)
The game stand according to appendix 54 or 55,
In the first display means, there may be a display suggesting that the notice icon may be displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

  Note that the “display indicating that the notice icon may be displayed” may be performed in the symbol change display performed before the symbol change display in which the notice icon is displayed, or the notice icon is displayed. It may be performed in the symbol variation display.

(Appendix 57)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 54 to 56,
The first display means is a means provided with a first display area,
The second display means is a means provided with a second display area,
The notice icon may be displayed across the first display area and the second display area,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 58)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 54 to 56,
The first display means is a means provided with a first display area,
The second display means is a means provided with a second display area,
An effect display corresponding to the notice icon may be displayed across the first display area and the second display area.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 59)
Display means;
Movable means;
A game machine equipped with
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a notice icon,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice display,
When the jackpot symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “second symbol variation display”) to be read ahead is suspended, the second symbol variation display is started after the first symbol variation display is started. In the meantime, a plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter referred to as “a plurality of notice icons”) may be consumed,
In the case where the second symbol variation display is suspended, the plurality of notice icons are newly added between the start of the first symbol variation display and the end of the second symbol variation display. May be displayed,
When the notice icon is digested, an effect corresponding to the digested notice icon (hereinafter referred to as “notice icon digest effect”) is performed.
As the notice icon digest effect, an effect by the movable means (hereinafter referred to as “first movable means effect”) may be performed.
A game stand characterized by that.

  The effect by the movable means may be performed only for the first movable means effect, but a movable means effect different from the first movable means effect may also be performed. In this case, a notice icon corresponding to each movable means effect may be displayed, or a notice icon corresponding to the movable means where the effect is performed may be displayed.

(Appendix 60)
The gaming machine according to appendix 59,
When the 21st notice icon is digested as the notice icon, the first movable means effect may be performed.
A game stand characterized by that.

  In addition, even if the 21st notice icon is digested, there may be cases where the first movable means effect is not performed. Means effect may be performed.

  In addition, when the 21st notice icon is digested, there may be an effect different from the first movable means effect (an effect with a different operation).

  Further, when the twenty-first notice icon is digested, an effect may be given by a movable means different from the first movable means, or the twenty-first notice icon is digested. Then, the production by the first movable means may always be performed.

(Appendix 61)
The game stand according to appendix 59 or 60,
When the 22nd notice icon is digested as the notice icon, the first movable means effect is not performed.
A game stand characterized by that.

  In addition, even if the 22nd notice icon is digested, the first movable means effect may be performed. When the 22nd notice icon is digested, another effect (or effect display) may be performed. May be performed.

(Appendix 62)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 59 to 61,
With operating means,
The movable means is the operating means,
The first movable means effect is an effect in which the aspect of the operation means changes from the first aspect to the second aspect.
A game stand characterized by that.

  Here, “change” means to include deformation, displacement, movement, and motion.

(Appendix 63)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 59 to 62,
Comprising a second movable means;
The movable means is a first movable means,
As the notice icon digest effect, an effect by the second movable means (hereinafter referred to as “second movable means effect”) may be performed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 64)
A gaming machine equipped with a display means,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a notice icon,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice display,
When the jackpot symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “second symbol variation display”) to be read ahead is suspended, the second symbol variation display is started after the first symbol variation display is started. In the meantime, a plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter referred to as “a plurality of notice icons”) may be consumed,
In the case where the second symbol variation display is suspended, the plurality of notice icons are newly added between the start of the first symbol variation display and the end of the second symbol variation display. May be displayed,
One type of display of the plurality of types of display is a notice icon increase suggestion display,
The notice icon increase suggestion display is a display suggesting that the notice icon may be displayed,
The notice icon increase suggestion display is a display that may be displayed over a plurality of symbol variation displays.
A game stand characterized by that.

  Note that even if the notice icon increase suggestion display is displayed, the notice icon may not be displayed. When the notice icon increase suggestion display is displayed, the notice icon may be displayed without fail.

  Further, the notice icon increase suggestion display may be displayed only with one symbol variation display, or the notice icon increase suggestion display may be displayed with only one symbol variation display.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed even if the notice icon increase suggestion display is not displayed, or the notice icon may not be displayed unless the notice icon increase suggestion display is displayed.

(Appendix 65)
The gaming machine according to appendix 64,
In the symbol variation display performed before the second symbol variation display, the notice icon increase suggestion display is configured to end.
A game stand characterized by that.

  Note that the change at which the display of the notice icon increase suggestion display ends may be the second symbol change display. In this way, it may be possible to expect that a notice icon may be displayed until the end.

(Appendix 66)
The game stand according to appendix 64 or 65,
One icon of the eleventh number of the notice icons suggested by the notice icon increase suggestion display may be displayed as the notice icon.
A game stand characterized by that.

  The notice icon increase suggestion display may be a display suggesting that the notice icon increases by one.

  Further, the notice icon displayed in the notice icon increase suggestion display may not increase.

  Further, the notice icon increase suggestion display may be a notice of gasses in which the notice icon does not increase.

  The notice icon increase suggestion display may be a display suggesting that a plurality of notice icons increase. In this case, for example, when the number of notice icons suggested by the notice icon increase suggestion display is three, only two may be increased.

  Further, notice icons other than the notice icon suggested by the notice icon increase suggestion display may be increased.

(Appendix 67)
The game stand according to appendix 64 or 65,
Of the eleventh number of the notice icons indicated by the notice icon increase suggestion display, the twelfth number of the notice icons may be displayed as the notice icon. Stand.

(Appendix 68)
Display means;
Hold indication means,
A game machine equipped with
The hold display means is a means capable of displaying a number of hold displays corresponding to the number of holds.
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One type of display among the plurality of types of display is a notice icon,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice display,
When the hold display (hereinafter referred to as “second hold display”) of the jackpot symbol change display (hereinafter referred to as “second pattern change display”) to be read ahead is displayed, A plurality of the notice icons (hereinafter referred to as “a plurality of notice icons”) may be digested between the start of the symbol variation display and the end of the second symbol variation display.
In the case where the second hold display is displayed, the plurality of notice icons are newly displayed between the start of the first symbol variation display and the end of the second symbol variation display. May be
The first symbol variation display is a symbol variation display next to the symbol variation display in which the second hold display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 69)
The gaming machine according to appendix 68,
The second hold display is a display that may be displayed in a pre-read display mode,
In the symbol variation display in which the second hold display is displayed, the second hold display may be displayed in the prefetch display mode.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 70)
The game stand according to appendix 68 or 69,
In the case where the hold display (hereinafter referred to as “fourth hold display”) of the loss symbol change display (hereinafter referred to as “fourth pattern change display”), which is the target of prefetching, is displayed. The plurality of notice icons may be digested between the start of the symbol variation display and the end of the fourth symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 71)
A gaming machine equipped with a display means,
The display means is means capable of displaying a notice icon,
The notice icon is an icon different from the hold icon,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
The second display is an explanatory display,
The first display is a display displayed in the first display area when displayed,
The second display is a display that is displayed in the second display area when displayed.
The notice icon is an icon displayed in a display area closer to the second display area than the first display area when displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

  The first display may be an explanation display different from the second display, or may be a non-explanation display.

  Further, the second display may be a display showing the current situation such as a tutorial display or a stage name, or may be a display of an effect mode name of a selectable effect mode. Here, in the effect mode, for example, a mode for changing the frequency of change of the display mode of the hold icon, a mode for changing the operation frequency of the effect movable body, and the frequency of occurrence of one notification effect are changed. There are modes to make it happen.

  In addition, the display position of the notice icon may be closer to the second display area than the start position of the appearing animation performed when the notice icon is displayed, or the notice position may be displayed in advance of the animation display position in the middle. The icon display position may be closer to the second display area.

  Here, the “notice icon” may be only one notice icon, may be only some of the notice icons, or may be all of the notice icons. The notice icon may be used. Further, the “notice icon” may be only a notice icon displayed first among a plurality of notice icons, or a part of notice icons including a notice icon displayed first among a plurality of notice icons. It may be an icon.

  Further, the display period of the first display and the display period of the second display may completely match, or a part of the display period of the first display overlaps with the display period of the second display. Alternatively, a part of the display period of the second display may overlap with the display period of the first display. The display period of the first display and the display period of the second display may not overlap.

  Further, the notice icon may be displayed during the display period of the first display, or may not be displayed. The notice icon may be displayed during the display period of the second display, or may not be displayed.

  Further, the second display and the notice icon need not be displayed at the same time.

  Further, the display frequency may be different between the first display and the second display. For example, when the display frequency of the second display is higher than the display frequency of the first display, the line-of-sight guidance of the notice icon May be easier. In addition, the first display area and the second display area may have different sizes, and the first display area and the second display area may have different roles. For example, the notice display is not performed in the first display area, but the notice display may be performed in the second display area.

(Appendix 72)
The gaming machine according to appendix 71, wherein
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 73)
The game stand according to appendix 71 or 72,
The first display is a display of a fluctuation icon,
The explanation display is an explanation display regarding the notice icon,
The notice icon may be displayed overlapping at least a part of the second display (hereinafter referred to as “first part”),
When the notice icon is digested, the overlap of the second display with the first portion is eliminated.
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to this game stand, the knowledge about the notice icon is deepened by displaying it in the second display area where the explanation of the notice icon related to the current and next symbol change display is performed rather than the change icon. At the same time, even if the result of the symbol variation display is lost, it may be possible to give a new expectation to the symbol variation display in which the notice icon displayed as the pre-reading notice display is digested.

  Note that the entire second display may be displayed by eliminating the overlap with the first portion.

  Further, during the period in which the variation icon is displayed, the variation icon may be capable of at least suggesting a sense of expectation for the big hit in the symbol variation display.

  The notice icon may be displayed as a prefetch notice display or may be digested in the symbol variation display that is a prefetch target.

  Further, the notice icon may be necessarily digested in the symbol variation display that is a prefetch target, or the notice icon may not be digested in the symbol variation display that is the prefetch target.

  Further, the notice icon may be configured to be displayed only by a single icon, or may be configured to be able to display a plurality of icons. Here, in the case where a plurality of notice icons are displayed, the notice icons may be displayed up to a predetermined upper limit number, or the notice icon may be displayed indefinitely without setting the upper limit number. Good.

(Appendix 74)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 71 to 73,
In the state where the notice icon is displayed, the display of the second display may be started,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 75)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 71 to 73,
The gaming machine is characterized in that the second display is not started in a state where the notice icon is displayed.

(Appendix 76)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 71 to 75,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a third display,
The third display is a notice display,
When the third display is displayed, the third display is displayed in the second display area.

(Appendix 77)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices 71 to 76,
The second display area is an area partitioned by lines.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 78)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 71 to 77,
“The notice icon is an icon displayed in a display area closer to the second display area than the first display area when displayed” as described in Supplementary Note 71. Is displayed in the second display area when displayed. "
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 79)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 71 to 78,
The number of the notice icons is consumed more in the symbol variation display that is a big hit than the symbol variation display that is lost,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 80)
A gaming machine equipped with a display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying an explanation display of a notice icon,
The notice icon is an icon different from the hold icon,
One explanation display of the plurality of kinds of explanation displays is a first explanation display,
The first explanation display is an explanation display regarding the notice icon,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice display,
The big hit fluctuation is more digested than the loss fluctuation,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 81)
The gaming machine according to appendix 80, wherein
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed in a display area where the first explanation display is displayed (hereinafter referred to as “first display area”).
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 82)
The game stand according to appendix 81,
In a state where the notice icon is displayed in the first display area, the first explanation display is not displayed in the first explanation display area.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 83)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 80 to 82,
One explanation display of the plurality of kinds of explanation displays is a second explanation display,
The second explanation display is a display showing the current stage of production,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed in a display area where the second explanation display is displayed (hereinafter referred to as “second display area”).
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 84)
The game stand according to appendix 83, wherein
Even if the notice icon is displayed in the second display area, the stage is changed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 85)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 80 to 84,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of icons (hereinafter referred to as “multiple types of notification icons”) as the notification icon.
One icon of the plurality of types of notice icons is a first notice icon,
One of the plurality of types of notice icons is a second notice icon,
The first notice icon is an icon that may be displayed before the start of the first performance,
The second notice icon is an icon that may be displayed before the start of the second effect,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 86)
A gaming machine equipped with a display means,
The display means is means capable of displaying a notice icon,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice display,
The notice icon is a different icon from the hold icon,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
The first display is an explanatory display;
The first display is a display displayed in a first display area in the display means,
The game table, wherein the notice icon is an icon displayed in the first display area when displayed.

(Appendix 87)
The game stand according to appendix 86,
In the state where the notice icon is displayed, the first display is not displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 88)
The gaming machine according to appendix 87,
When the notice icon is digested, the display of the first display may resume.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 89)
The game stand according to any one of supplementary notes 86 to 88,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
The second display is a notice display,
The second display is a display displayed in the first display area when displayed.
The explanation display is an explanation display relating to the notice icon.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 90)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 86 to 89,
The display means is a means constituted by a plurality of display means,
One of the plurality of display means is a first display means,
One of the plurality of display means is a second display means,
One of the plurality of display means is a third display means,
The first display means is means capable of displaying a symbol variation display,
The second display means is means capable of displaying an effect display,
The third display means is a means capable of displaying a display in accordance with the display of the second display means,
The first display area is a display area provided in at least a part of the third display means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 91)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 86 to 90,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a third display,
The third display is an explanatory display,
The third display is a display displayed in a second display area in the display means,
The game table, wherein the notice icon is an icon that may be displayed in the second display area.

(Appendix 92)
The gaming machine according to appendix 91, wherein
In the state where the notice icon is displayed in the second display area, the third display is not displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

  In the above description, the first tutorial display may be a display including a display for explaining a character displayed on the second display means.

  The first tutorial display may be a display that does not include a display related to the effect display being executed.

  Further, the first tutorial display may be a display that does not include a display indicating the probability of expected change.

  In addition, the first tutorial display may be a display that does not include a display related to the expectation degree of reach for the reach.

  Further, the first tutorial display may be a display that does not include a display relating to the character's jackpot expectation.

  The first tutorial display may be a display configured not to be displayed simultaneously with the first notice display.

(Appendix 93)
A gaming machine equipped with a display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of notice icons,
The notice icon is an icon that may be displayed as a pre-read notice display,
The display area where the notice icon is displayed is a display area different from the display area where the hold icon is displayed,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
The first display is a display including one of the plurality of notice icons (hereinafter referred to as “first notice icon”),
The second display is a display including a display representing the first notice icon in a large size,
The first display may be made after the second display is made.
A game stand characterized by that.

  Here, the notice icon included in the second display may be an enlarged display of the first notice icon, or may be a notice icon different from the first notice icon.

(Appendix 94)
The gaming machine according to appendix 93,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a third display,
The third display is a variable display of decorative symbols,
The first display is a display indicating that the first notice icon is stocked,
The first display is a display that does not overlap the third display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 95)
The game stand according to appendix 93 or 94,
The third display is a display that does not overlap the first display,
The third display is a display that may be overlapped with the second display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 96)
The game stand according to any one of supplementary notes 93 to 95,
The first display is a display displayed in a hold display frame.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 97)
The game stand according to any one of supplementary notes 93 to 96,
The second display is a display performed when the first notice icon is acquired.
(Appendix 98)
A gaming machine according to appendix 97,
The second display is a display also performed when the first notice icon is digested.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 99)
The game stand according to appendix 97 or 98,
When the notice icon is acquired, the notice icon acquired together with at least a part of the already obtained notice icon is enlarged and displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 100)
A gaming machine equipped with a display means,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a third display,
The first display is a display of a hold display frame,
The second display is a display of an aspect in which at least a part of the first display is expanded,
The third display is a decorative design display,
The first display is a display that does not overlap the third display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 101)
A gaming machine according to attachment 100,
The display of the position among the plurality of types of display is a fourth display,
The fourth display is an effect display,
In the portion expanded from the first display of the second display (hereinafter referred to as “expanded portion”), the fourth display can be displayed.
The extended portion is a portion that is not overlapped with the third display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 102)
A gaming machine according to appendix 101,
The effect display is a prefetch notice display,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 103)
A gaming machine according to appendix 101 or appendix 102,
One of the plurality of types of display is a sixth display,
The sixth display is a notice display,
In the extended portion, the sixth display is configured to be displayable,
The fourth display and the fifth display are partially the same display,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 104)
The game stand according to any one of supplementary notes 100 to 103,
One of the plurality of types of display is a fifth display,
The fifth display is a display of a serif notice,
The fifth display is a display that does not overlap the first display,
The fifth display is a display that may be overlapped with the second display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 105)
A game machine having a display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a third display,
The first display is a display including an icon display frame,
The icon display frame is a display frame capable of displaying an icon related to symbol variation display,
The second display is a display of an aspect in which at least a part of the first display is expanded,
The third display is a decorative design variation display,
The first display is a display that does not overlap the third display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 106)
The game stand according to appendix 105,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a fourth display,
The fourth display is an effect display,
In the portion of the second display expanded from the first display (hereinafter referred to as “extended portion”), the fourth display is configured to be able to be displayed in an overlapping manner,
The extended portion is a portion that is not overlapped with the third display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 107)
The game stand according to appendix 106,
The effect display is a display of a pre-read notice,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 108)
The game stand according to appendix 106 or appendix 107,
The effect display is a display that changes a display mode of the icon.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 109)
A gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes 106 to 108,
The third display is a display that may be overlapped with the extended portion.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 110)
The game stand according to any one of supplementary notes 106 to 109,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a fifth display,
The fifth display is a display of lines,
The fifth display is a display that does not overlap the first display,
The fifth display is a display that may be overlapped with the extended portion.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 111)
The game stand according to any one of Supplementary Notes 106 to 110,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a sixth display,
The sixth display is a notice display,
In the extended portion, the sixth display is configured to be able to be displayed in an overlapping manner,
The fourth display and the sixth display are partially the same display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 112)
A gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes 105 to 111,
The icon is a hold icon,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 113)
A gaming machine according to attachment 112, wherein
The display means is a means capable of displaying the number of the hold icons corresponding to the number of the start of the symbol variation display is held.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 114)
A gaming machine according to any one of Supplementary Notes 105 to 114,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a1)
Operation means;
The first area,
A game machine equipped with
The first area is an area into which a game ball can enter,
The number of times of accepting the operation of the operation means in the first button effect (hereinafter referred to as “the number of times of acceptance”) can be increased or decreased.
When a game ball enters the first area, the number of receptions may increase.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a2)
A game machine according to appendix a1,
A display means,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a notice display (hereinafter referred to as “first display”),
In the first button effect, the first display may be displayed when the operation means is operated when the number of times of reception is one or more.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a3)
A game machine according to appendix a2,
One of the plurality of types of display is a notice display (hereinafter referred to as “second display”),
The display mode of the second display is a display mode different from the display mode of the first display,
When the operation means is operated in the second button effect, the second display may be displayed,
Even if the number of receptions is 0, the second display may be displayed.
The second display and the first display can be displayed in parallel.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a4)
A gaming machine according to appendix a3,
The first button effect and the second button effect can be executed in parallel.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a5)
The game stand according to appendix a3 or a4,
In the first button effect, the display means can display an image imitating the operation means (hereinafter referred to as “third display”),
The display means can display an image imitating the operation means (hereinafter referred to as “fourth display”) in the second button effect.
The size of the third display is different from the size of the fourth display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a6)
The game stand according to any one of appendices a1 to a5,
When the operation means is operated, the number of receptions may be reduced.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a7)
The game stand according to any one of appendices a1 to a6,
When a plurality of game balls enter the first area, the number of receptions may increase.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a8)
The game stand according to any one of appendices a1 to a7,
The first area is a general winning opening,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a9)
The game stand according to any one of appendices a1 to a8,
With a second region,
The second area is an area through which a game ball can pass,
A game ball that has passed through the second area may enter the first area,
When a game ball enters the second area, the number of receptions may increase.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix a10)
The game stand according to any one of appendices a1 to a9,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix b1)
The first area,
Display means;
A game machine equipped with
The first area is an area into which a game ball can enter,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a notice display (hereinafter referred to as “first display”),
When a game ball enters the first area, the first display may be displayed,
The first display does not overlap with the fluctuating decorative design,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix b2)
A game machine according to appendix b1,
One of the plurality of types of display is a notice display (hereinafter referred to as “second display”),
The display mode of the second display is a display mode different from the display mode of the first display,
The display means is means capable of displaying a wipe display,
The wipe display does not overlap the second display,
The first display is the wipe display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix b3)
The game stand according to appendix b2,
The wipe display is displayed in a partial area of the display area of the display means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix b4)
The game stand according to any one of appendices b1 to b3,
One of the plurality of types of display is a notice display (hereinafter referred to as “third display”),
The display mode of the third display is a display mode different from the display mode of the first display,
The first display is displayed as a display for changing the display mode of the third display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix b5)
The game stand according to appendix b4,
The third display is a hold icon.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix b6)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices b1 to b5,
The display of the first display is not started during execution of the stop display of the decorative design,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix b7)
The game stand according to any one of appendices b1 to b6,
When a game ball enters the first area during the display of the first display, the first display is continuously displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix b8)
The game stand according to any one of appendices b1 to b7,
The first area is a general winning opening,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix b9)
The game stand according to any one of appendices b1 to b8,
With a second region,
The second area is an area through which a game ball can pass,
A game ball that has passed through the second area may enter the first area,
When the game ball enters the second area, the first display may be displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix b10)
The game stand according to any one of appendices b1 to b9,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix c1)
A gaming machine equipped with a display means,
The display means is a means capable of displaying the next symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “second symbol variation display”) after the symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “first symbol variation display”). Yes,
In the first symbol variation display, a variation icon corresponding to the first symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as “first variation icon”) can be displayed.
The icon displayed as the first variation icon is configured to be displayed as a notice icon in the second symbol variation display,
The area where the notice icon is displayed is an area different from the area where the first variation icon is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix c2)
The game stand according to appendix c1,
In the second symbol variation display, a variation icon corresponding to the second symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “second variation icon”) can be displayed.
Both the second variation icon and the notice icon are configured to be displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix c3)
The game stand according to appendix c1 or c2,
The icon that was displayed as the hold icon can be displayed as a variable icon,
The notice icon can be changed to one of a plurality of display modes,
One display mode of the plurality of types of display modes is a first display mode,
The notice icon of the first display mode is an icon related to a change in the display mode of the hold icon.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix c4)
A game machine according to appendix c3,
The notice icon in the first display mode is an icon related to a change in the display mode of the variation icon.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix c5)
A gaming table according to appendix c3 or c4,
One display mode among the plurality of types of display modes is a second display mode,
The notice icon of the second display mode is an icon related to a change in the display mode of the hold icon,
The notice icon in the second display mode is an icon related to a change in the display mode of the variation icon.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix c6)
The game stand according to any one of appendices c1 to c5,
The display mode of the notice icon is different from the display mode of the fluctuation icon.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix c7)
The game stand according to any one of appendices c1 to c6,
An animation including movement of the notice icon can be displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix c8)
The game stand according to any one of appendices c1 to c7,
The display means includes an image display device.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix c9)
The game stand according to any one of appendices c1 to c8,
In the non-electric support state, the icon displayed as the first variation icon is displayed as the notice icon in the second symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix c10)
The game stand according to any one of appendices c1 to c9,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d1)
Operation means that can be operated by a player;
Display means capable of performing multiple types of display;
A game machine equipped with
One display of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
The second display is a display different from the first display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a display that prompts the player to repeatedly hit the operation means (hereinafter referred to as “third display”).
The third display is a display that is displayed in a state where the operation of the operation means for starting the first display can be accepted (hereinafter referred to as “first state”),
The first display is a display that can be started when the operation means is repeatedly hit after the third display is started,
The first display is a display that can be started even when the operation means is pressed for a long time,
The second display is a display that is easier to start when the operation means is repeatedly hit than when the operation means is pressed for a long time,
The third display is a display that is not displayed in a state where the operation of the operation means for starting the second display can be accepted (hereinafter referred to as “second state”).
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d2)
A game machine according to appendix d1,
With light emitting means,
The light emitting means is a means capable of irradiating light from the inside of the operation means,
In the first state, the light emitting unit is a unit that is turned on,
In the second state, the light emitting unit is a unit that is turned off.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d3)
A game machine according to appendix d1,
With light emitting means,
The light emitting means is a means capable of irradiating light from the inside of the operation means,
In the first state, the light emitting means is a means for emitting light in the first light emitting mode,
In the second state, the light emitting unit is a unit that emits light in a second light emitting mode.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d4)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d1 to d3,
Provided with a symbol display means capable of executing symbol variation display,
The first display is a display that can be started during execution of the symbol variation display,
The second display is a display that can be started during execution of the symbol variation display,
The third display is a display that can be started during execution of the symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d5)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d1 to d4,
The second display is a display that does not start only by a long press of the operation means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d6)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d1 to d5,
The first display is configured so that the first display can be started as the operation means is repeatedly hit when the operation means is pressed for a long time.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d7)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d1 to d6,
The long press means that the state in which the operation means is operated is maintained for a predetermined time.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d8)
Operation means that can be operated by a player;
Display means capable of performing multiple types of display;
A game machine equipped with
One of the plural types of displays is a display in a first display mode (hereinafter referred to as “first display”),
One of the plurality of types of display is a display in a second display mode (hereinafter referred to as “second display”).
The second display is a display different from the first display,
The first display is a display that can be started when the operation unit performs the first number of operations in the first operation mode.
The first display is a display that can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode,
In the second display, a second number of operations are performed by the operation unit in the first operation mode, compared to a case where one operation is performed by the operation unit in the second operation mode. The display is easier to start,
The second operation mode is an operation mode having a longer period of operation than the first operation mode,
The first number is a number exceeding 1,
The second number is a number exceeding 1,
One of the plural types of displays is a display in a third display mode (hereinafter referred to as “third display”).
The third display mode is a display mode that prompts the operation means to be operated continuously in the first operation mode,
The third display is a display that is displayed in a state where the operation of the operation means for starting the first display can be accepted (hereinafter referred to as “first state”),
The third display is a display that is not displayed in a state where the operation of the operation means for starting the second display can be accepted (hereinafter referred to as “second state”).
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d9)
A game machine according to appendix d8,
With light emitting means,
In the first state, the light emitting means is a means that enters a light emitting state,
In the second state, the light emitting means is a means that enters a non-light emitting state.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d10)
A game machine according to appendix d8,
With light emitting means,
In the first state, the light emitting means is in a state of emitting light in the first light emitting mode,
In the second state, the light emitting means emits light in the second light emitting mode,
The second light emission mode is a light emission mode different from the first light emission mode.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d11)
A gaming machine according to appendix d9 or d10,
The light emitting means is means capable of irradiating light from the inside of the operation means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d12)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d8 to d11,
One of the plurality of types of display is a symbol variation display,
The first display is a display that can be started during the display of the symbol variation display,
The second display is a display that can be started during the display of the symbol variation display,
The third display is a display that can be started during the display of the symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d13)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d8 to d12,
The second display is a display that does not start when only one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d14)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d8 to d13,
The second operation mode is an operation mode in which the state in which the operation unit is operated is maintained for a first time.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d15)
A game machine according to appendix d14,
When the state in which the operating means is operated is maintained for a second time, it is assumed that the operating means has been operated in the first number of times in the first operating mode in a pseudo manner. Is configured to be able to start,
The second time is a time equal to or longer than the first time.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d16)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d8 to d15,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d17)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d8 to d16,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d18)
Operation means that can be operated by a player;
Production means capable of performing multiple types of production,
A game machine equipped with
One of the multiple types of effects is a first effect,
One effect of the plurality of effects is a second effect,
The second effect is an effect different from the first effect,
The first effect is an effect that can be started when the first number of operations are performed by the operation means in the first operation mode,
The first effect is an effect that can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode,
The second operation mode is an operation mode having a longer period of operation than the first operation mode,
The first number is a number exceeding 1,
The second effect is that the operation unit performs the second number of operations in the first operation mode than when the operation unit performs one operation in the second operation mode. It is a production that is easier to start,
The second number is a number exceeding 1.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d19)
A game machine according to appendix d18,
Provided with a symbol display means capable of executing symbol variation display,
One effect of the plurality of effects is a third effect,
The third effect is an effect that can be started during execution of the symbol variation display,
The third effect is an effect that prompts the operation means to be operated continuously in the first operation mode,
The first effect is an effect that can be started when the first number of operations are performed by the operation means in the first operation mode during execution of the third effect,
The first effect is an effect that can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode during the execution of the third effect.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d20)
A gaming machine according to appendix d18 or d19,
The second operation mode is an operation mode in which the state in which the operation unit is operated is maintained for a first time.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d21)
A gaming machine according to appendix d20,
When the state in which the operating means is operated is maintained for a second time, the first effect is assumed as if the operating means was operated in the first operation mode in the first operation mode. Configured to start,
The second time is a time equal to or longer than the first time.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d22)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d18 to d21,
The second effect is an effect that does not start when only one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d23)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d18 to d22,
With light emitting means,
The light emitting unit is a unit that is in a first state in a state in which an operation for starting the first effect by the operation unit can be received.
The light emitting means is a means to be in a second state in a state where an operation for starting the second effect by the operating means can be accepted.
The second state is a state different from the first state.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d24)
A game machine according to appendix d23,
The first state is a light emitting state,
The second state is a state where no light is emitted.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d25)
A game machine according to appendix d23,
The first state is a state in which light is emitted in the first aspect,
The second state is a state where light is emitted in the second mode.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d26)
A game machine according to appendix d25,
The first aspect is a first color;
The second aspect is a second color.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d27)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d23 to d26,
The light emitting means is means capable of irradiating light from the inside of the operation means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d28)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d18 to d27,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d29)
Operation means that can be operated by a player;
Display means capable of performing multiple types of display;
A game machine equipped with
One of the plurality of types of display is a display of a first display mode (hereinafter referred to as “first display”),
One of the plural types of displays is a display of a fourth display mode (hereinafter referred to as “fourth display”),
The fourth display is a display different from the first display,
The first display is a display that can be started when the first number of operations by the operation means is performed in the first operation mode,
The first display is a display that can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode,
The first display is an effect display,
The fourth display is a selection display;
The fourth display is a display that is displayed when one image of a plurality of types of images is selected according to the operation of the operation means,
One image of the plurality of types of images is a first image,
The first image is displayed in the first operation mode in the first operation mode more than when the operation unit is operated once in the second operation mode during execution of the fourth display. Is the image that is easier to select when the second number of operations is performed,
The second operation mode is an operation mode having a longer period of operation than the first operation mode,
The first number is a number exceeding 1,
The second number is a number exceeding 1.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d30)
A game machine according to appendix d29,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a fifth display,
The fifth display is a display different from the first display,
The fifth display is a display that can be started when the first image is selected during execution of the fourth display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d31)
A gaming machine according to appendix d29 or d30,
One of the plurality of types of display is a display of a third display mode (hereinafter referred to as “third display”).
The third display mode is a display mode that prompts the operation means to be operated continuously in the first operation mode,
The third display is a display displayed in a state where the operation of the operation means for starting the first display can be accepted (hereinafter referred to as “first state”).
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d32)
A gaming machine according to appendix d31,
With light emitting means,
In the first state, the light emitting unit is a unit that enters a light emitting state.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d33)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d29 to d32,
One of the plurality of types of display is a symbol variation display,
The first display is a display that can be started during the display of the symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d34)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d29 to d33,
The first image is an image that is not selected only by one operation by the operation means in the second operation mode.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d35)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d29 to d34,
The second operation mode is an operation mode in which the state in which the operation unit is operated is maintained for a first time.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d36)
In the game stand described in appendix d35,
When the state in which the operation means is operated is maintained for a second time, the operation means is assumed to have been operated the first number of times in the first operation mode in a pseudo manner. One display is configured to start,
The second time is a time equal to or longer than the first time.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d37)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d29 to d36,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d38)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d29 to d36,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d39)
Operation means that can be operated by a player;
Production means capable of performing multiple types of production,
Display means capable of performing multiple types of display;
A game machine equipped with
One of the multiple types of effects is a first effect,
The first effect is an effect that can be started when the first number of operations are performed by the operation means in the first operation mode,
The first effect is an effect that can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode,
The second operation mode is an operation mode having a longer period of operation than the first operation mode,
The first number is a number exceeding 1,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a first selection display,
The first selection display is a display capable of selecting one of a plurality of types of images according to the operation of the operation means,
One image of the plurality of types of images is a first image,
The first image is displayed in the first operation mode more than when the first operation mode is performed by the operation unit in the second operation mode during execution of the first selection display. It is an image that is easier to select when the second number of operations is performed by means,
The second number is a number exceeding 1.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d40)
A game machine according to appendix d39,
One of the multiple types of effects is a fourth effect,
The fourth effect is an effect different from the first effect,
The fourth effect is an effect that can be started when the first image is selected in the first selection display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d41)
A game machine according to appendix d39 or d40,
Provided with a symbol display means capable of executing symbol variation display,
One effect of the plurality of effects is a third effect,
The third effect is an effect that can be started during execution of the symbol variation display,
The third effect is an effect that prompts the operation means to be operated continuously in the first operation mode,
The first effect is an effect that can be started when the first number of operations are performed by the operation means in the first operation mode during execution of the third effect,
The first effect is an effect that can be started even when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode during the execution of the third effect.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d42)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d39 to d41,
The second operation mode is an operation mode in which the state in which the operation unit is operated is maintained for a first time.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d43)
A game machine according to appendix d42,
When the state in which the operating means is operated is maintained for a second time, the first effect is assumed as if the operating means was operated in the first operation mode in the first operation mode. Configured to start,
The second time is a time equal to or longer than the first time.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d44)
The game stand according to appendix d42 or d43,
During the execution of the first selection display, even if the state in which the operation means is being operated is maintained for the first time or longer, the operation means has been operated once. Configured to be
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d45)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices d39 to d44,
The first image is an image that is not selected only by one operation by the operation means in the second operation mode.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d46)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d39 to d45,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a second selection display,
The second selection display is a selection display capable of selecting one of a plurality of types of images according to the operation of the operation means,
The second selection display is a selection display different from the first selection display,
One image of the plurality of types of images is a second image,
The second image is an image that can be selected when the operation unit performs the third number of operations in the first operation mode during execution of the second selection display,
The second image is an image that can be selected when one operation is performed by the operation means in the second operation mode during execution of the second selection display,
The third number is a number exceeding 1.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d47)
A game machine according to appendix d46,
One of the multiple types of effects is a fifth effect,
The fifth effect is an effect that can be started when the second image is selected in the second selection display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d48)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d39 to d47,
With light emitting means,
The light emitting unit is a unit that is in a first state in a state in which an operation for starting the first effect by the operation unit can be received.
The light emitting unit is a unit that is in a second state during execution of the first selection display,
The second state is a state different from the first state.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d49)
A game machine according to appendix d48,
The first state is a light emitting state,
The second state is a state where no light is emitted.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d50)
A game machine according to appendix d48,
The first state is a state in which light is emitted in the first aspect,
The second state is a state where light is emitted in the second mode.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d51)
A gaming machine according to appendix d50,
The first aspect is a first color;
The second aspect is a second color.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d52)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d39 to d51,
The light emitting means is means capable of irradiating light from the inside of the operation means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d53)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d39 to d51,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d54)
A symbol display means capable of displaying a symbol variation display;
Operation means that can be operated by a player;
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display;
A game machine equipped with
One of the plural types of displays is a display in a first display mode (hereinafter referred to as “first display”),
One of the plurality of types of display is a display in a second display mode (hereinafter referred to as “second display”).
The second display is a display different from the first display,
The first display is a display that may start during the display of the symbol variation display,
The second display is a display that may be displayed during the display of the symbol variation display,
One of the plurality of types of display is a display that prompts the player to repeatedly hit the operation means (hereinafter referred to as “third display”).
The first display is a display in which the display may be started when the operation means is repeatedly hit after the display of the third display is started,
The first display is a display that may be displayed even when the operation means is pressed and held after the display of the third display is started,
One of the plurality of types of display is a display that prompts the player to operate the operation means (hereinafter referred to as “fourth display”).
The fourth display is a display different from the third display,
The second display is a display that may start when the operation means is operated two or more times after the display of the fourth display is started,
The second display is a display in which the display is not started only by pressing and holding the operation means once after the display of the fourth display is started.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d55)
A game machine according to appendix d54,
Equipped with light emitting means that can emit light in multiple types of light emission states
The light emitting means is a means capable of irradiating light from the inside of the operation means,
One of the plurality of types of light emission states is a first light emission state,
The light emitting unit is a unit that is in the first light emitting state in a state of accepting an operation of the operation unit.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d56)
A game machine according to appendix d55,
One light emission state of the plurality of types of light emission states is a second light emission state,
The first light emission state is a lighting state,
The second light emission state is an off state,
The light emitting means is in the lighting state, indicating that it is in a state of accepting operation of the operating means,
The light emitting means is in the extinguished state, and represents that the operation means is not accepted.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d57)
A game machine according to appendix d55,
One light emission state of the plurality of types of light emission states is a second light emission state,
The first light emission state is a state in which light is emitted in the first light emission mode,
The second light emission state is a state in which light is emitted in the second light emission mode.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d58)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d54 to d57,
The first display is a notice display,
The second display is a notice display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d59)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices d54 to d58,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a display (hereinafter referred to as “selection display”) instructing to select one option from the plurality of options.
One display of the plurality of types of display is a display (hereinafter referred to as “fifth display”) displayed when a first option of the plurality of options is selected.
The fifth display is a display that may be displayed when the operation means is operated two or more times after the display of the selection display is started,
The fifth display is a display in which the display is not started only by pressing and holding the operating means once after the display of the selection display is started.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d60)
A game machine according to appendix d59,
The fifth display is a display that is started when the number of operations of the operation means is a first number after the display of the selection display is started,
The first number of times is two or more times.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d61)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices d54 to d60,
When the operation means is pressed for a long time after the display of the third display is started, the display of the first display may be started assuming that the operation means is repeatedly hit. It is configured,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d62)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices d54 to d61,
Long press means that the state in which the operating means is operated is maintained for a predetermined time.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d63)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices d54 to d62,
One state of the plurality of states that accept the operation of the operation means is a first state,
One state of the plurality of states that accept the operation of the operation means is a second state,
The second state is a state different from the first state,
The third display is a display displayed in the first state,
The fourth display is a display displayed in the second state.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d64)
A game machine according to appendix d63,
The first state is a state in which an operation for starting display of the first display is received.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d65)
A gaming machine according to appendix d63 or d64,
The second state is a state of receiving an operation for starting display of the second display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d66)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d63 to d65,
The first state is a state that ends when a predetermined time has elapsed since becoming the first state.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d67)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices d63 to d66,
The second state is a state that ends when a predetermined time has elapsed since becoming the second state.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d68)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d54 to d67,
The second display is a display that is started when the number of operations of the operation means is a second number after the display of the fourth display is started,
The second number of times is two or more times.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d69)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices d54 to d68,
The third display is a display including a first image,
The first image is an image including an image showing an appearance of the operation means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d70)
A game machine according to appendix d69,
The fourth display is a display including a plurality of second images,
The second image is an image including an image showing an appearance of the operation means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d71)
A game machine according to appendix d70,
The second image is an image having a display mode different from that of the first image.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d72)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d54 to d71,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d73)
A first operating means;
A second directing means;
A game machine equipped with
It is configured to be able to perform multiple types of productions,
One of the multiple types of effects is a first effect,
One effect of the plurality of effects is a second effect,
The first effect is an effect that may be executed in response to the first operation means being operated in the first operation mode.
The second effect is an effect that may be executed in response to the first operation means being operated in the first operation mode.
The production mode of the second production is a production mode different from the production mode of the first production,
When the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the first effect may be started.
When the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the second effect is not started,
The second rendering means is a light emitting means,
The second effect is an effect executed by the second effect means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d74)
A gaming machine according to appendix d73,
The “effects executed by the second effect means” described in the supplementary note d73 is “effects executed when the second effect means emits light in the second light emission mode”.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d75)
A gaming machine according to appendix d73 or d74,
With the first production means,
The first rendering means is an image display means,
The first effect is an effect executed by the first effect means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d76)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices d73 to d75,
With a third stage,
The third rendering means is a movable means,
The second rendering means is a means provided in the third rendering means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d77)
A game machine according to appendix d76,
The third rendering means is an image display means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d78)
A gaming machine according to appendices d73 to d77,
The second rendering means is means capable of emitting light in the first light emission mode.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d79)
A gaming machine with a first operating means,
It is configured to be able to perform multiple types of productions,
One of the multiple types of effects is a first effect,
One of the multiple types of effects is a second effect,
The first effect is an effect that may be executed in response to the first operation means being operated in the first operation mode.
The second effect is an effect that may be executed in response to the first operation means being operated in the first operation mode.
The production mode of the second production is a production mode different from the production mode of the first production,
When the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the first effect may be started.
When the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the second effect is not started,
The second effect is an effect executed by the second effect means,
The second rendering means is a light emitting means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d80)
A game machine according to appendix d79,
The “effects executed by the second effect means” described in the supplementary note d79 is “effects executed by the second effect means emitting light in the second light emission mode”.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d81)
A gaming machine according to appendix d81,
The second rendering means is means capable of emitting light in the first light emitting mode,
The first light emission mode is a light emission mode different from the second light emission mode.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d82)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d79 to d81,
With the first production means,
The first rendering means is first image display means,
The first effect is an effect executed by the first effect means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d83)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d79 to d82,
With a third stage,
The third rendering means is a movable means,
The second rendering means is a means provided in the third rendering means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d84)
A game machine according to appendix d83,
With a fourth directing means,
The fourth rendering means is a second image display means,
The fourth presentation means is a means provided in the third presentation means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 85)
The game stand according to any one of appendices 79 to 84,
Provided with a symbol display means capable of displaying a symbol variation display,
The first effect is an effect that may start during display of the symbol variation display,
The second effect is an effect that may be started during the display of the symbol variation display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d86)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d79 to d85,
When the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the first effect may be started as the first operation means is operated in the first operation mode.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d87)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices d79 to d86,
The “operation in the first operation mode” described in the appendix d79 is “multiple operation”.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d88)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices d79 to d87,
The “operation in the second operation mode” described in the appendix d79 is a “long press operation”.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d89)
A game machine according to appendix d88,
The long press operation is an operation in which the operated state is maintained for a predetermined time.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d79)
A gaming machine with a first operating means,
It is configured to be able to perform multiple types of productions,
One of the multiple types of effects is a first effect,
One effect of the plurality of effects is a second effect,
The first effect is an effect that may be executed in response to the first operation means being operated in the first operation mode.
The second effect is an effect that may be executed in response to the first operation means being operated in the first operation mode.
The production mode of the second production is a production mode different from the production mode of the first production,
When the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the first effect may be started.
When the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the second effect is not started,
The second production is a back button production,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d80)
A game machine according to appendix d79,
With the first production means,
The first rendering means is an image display means,
The first effect is an effect executed by the first effect means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d81)
A game machine according to appendix d80,
“The effect executed by the first effect means” described in the supplementary note d80 is “the effect executed by the first effect means displaying the first display”.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d82)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d79 to d81,
The second effect is an effect executed by the first effect means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d83)
The game stand according to appendix 82,
“The effect executed by the first effect means” described in the supplementary note 82 is “the effect executed by the first effect means displaying the second display”.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d84)
The game stand according to any one of appendices d79 to d81,
A second directing means,
The second rendering means is a light emitting means,
The second effect is an effect executed by the second effect means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d85)
A game machine according to appendix d84,
The “effects executed by the second effect means” described in the supplementary note d84 is “effects executed when the second effect means emits light in the second light emission mode”.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d86)
A first operating means;
A second operating means;
A game machine equipped with
It is configured to execute multiple types of display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a first display,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a second display,
The first display is a display that may be displayed in response to the first operation means being operated in the first operation mode,
The second display is a display that may be displayed in response to the second operation means being operated in the first operation mode,
The display mode of the second display is a display mode different from the display mode of the first display,
When the first operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the first display may be started,
When the second operation means is operated in the second operation mode, the second display is not started.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d87)
A gaming machine according to appendix d86,
The second display is a display displayed on the setting screen.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix d88)
A gaming table according to appendix d86 or d87,
The second display is a display that is displayed when one of a plurality of options is selected.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e1)
Operation means provided at a position where the player can operate;
Display means capable of displaying mini-games;
A game machine equipped with
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
The effect display related to the decorative symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “first effect display”) includes a display prompting an operation of the operation means (hereinafter referred to as “first operation promotion display”). And
The effect display related to the mini game (hereinafter referred to as “second effect display”) is a display including a display prompting an operation of the operation means (hereinafter referred to as “second operation promotion display”). ,
The first effect display is a display that may be displayed in the first period,
The second effect display is a display that may be displayed in the second period,
The first display and the second display are periods in which at least a part overlaps (hereinafter referred to as “third period”);
The result of the first effect display is performed as a notice (hereinafter referred to as “first notice”),
The result of the second effect display is performed as a notice related to the first notice (hereinafter referred to as “second notice”).
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e2)
A gaming machine according to appendix e1,
If the operation means is operated during the third period, the first notice corresponding to the second notice is made after the second notice is made,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e3)
A gaming machine according to appendix e1,
If there is an operation of the operating means in the third period, at least the first notice of the first notice and the second notice is performed,
The first notice may change according to the second notice after the second notice has been made,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e4)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices e1 to e3,
In the third period, the first effect display is overlapped with the second effect display,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e5)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices e1 to e4,
The second effect display is a display including a display of an effective period of the operation means related to the mini game.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e6)
The game stand according to any one of appendices e1 to e5,
The first notice is a notice that can be executed in a plurality of modes.
One of the plurality of aspects is a first aspect,
One of the plurality of aspects is a second aspect,
In the case where the first notice is performed in the second aspect rather than in the first aspect, the jackpot symbol is configured to be easily displayed in a final manner.
When the mini-game is started, the first notice is more easily performed in the second aspect than in the first aspect.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e7)
The game stand according to appendix e6,
The second notice is an executable notice in a plurality of modes,
One of the plurality of aspects is a third aspect,
One of the plurality of aspects is a fourth aspect,
When the second notice is executed in the fourth mode, the jackpot symbol is finally confirmed and displayed.
The second notice is configured to be executed in the fourth aspect when the first notice is executed in the second aspect.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e8)
The game stand according to appendix e6,
The second notice is an executable notice in a plurality of modes,
One of the plurality of aspects is a third aspect,
One of the plurality of aspects is a fourth aspect,
When the second notice is executed in the fourth aspect rather than in the third aspect, it is configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally easily displayed.
The first case is configured to make it easier for the jackpot symbol to be finalized and displayed in the first case than the second case,
The second case is configured to make it easier for the jackpot symbol to be finally displayed in the second case than the third case,
The third case is configured to make it easier for the jackpot symbol to be finally displayed in the third case than the fourth case.
The first case is a case where the first notice is executed in the second aspect and the second notice is executed in the fourth aspect.
The second case is a case where the first notice is executed in the second aspect, and the second notice is executed in the third aspect.
The third case is a case where the first notice is executed in the first aspect and the second notice is executed in the fourth aspect.
The fourth case is a case where the first notice is executed in the first aspect and the second notice is executed in the third aspect.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e9)
The game stand according to appendix e6,
The second notice is an executable notice in a plurality of modes,
One of the plurality of aspects is a third aspect,
One of the plurality of aspects is a fourth aspect,
When the second notice is executed in the fourth aspect rather than in the third aspect, it is configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally easily displayed.
In the first case and the second case, the probability that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed is the same, or the first case is configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally finally displayed more easily. Has been
In the second case and the third case, the probability that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed is the same, or the second case is configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally finally displayed. Has been
In the third case and the fourth case, the probability that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed is the same, or the third case is configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily. Has been
The first case is a case where the first notice is executed in the second aspect and the second notice is executed in the fourth aspect.
The second case is a case where the first notice is executed in the second aspect, and the second notice is executed in the third aspect.
The third case is a case where the first notice is executed in the first aspect and the second notice is executed in the fourth aspect.
The fourth case is a case where the first notice is executed in the first aspect and the second notice is executed in the third aspect.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e10)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices e1 to e9,
The number of times that the operation means required for the result of the first effect display is performed and the number of times the operation means required for the result of the second effect display are operated Is different,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e11)
The game stand according to any one of appendices e1 to e10,
In the event that the mini-game is performed and the first notice is performed, the jackpot symbol is likely to be finalized more easily than the case where the first notice is performed without the mini-game. Configured to,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e12)
A game machine equipped with a display means capable of performing decorative symbol variation display,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
Multiple types of mini-games are configured to be executable,
One of the plurality of types of mini games is a first mini game,
One of the plurality of types of mini games is a second mini game,
The first mini game is a mini game displayed using a certain display area,
The second mini game is a mini game displayed using the certain display area,
The first mini game and the second mini game are different mini games.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e13)
A gaming machine according to appendix e12,
Provide notice means that can execute multiple notices,
One of the plurality of notices is a first notice,
One of the plurality of notices is a second notice,
The case where the second notice is made rather than the case where the first notice is made is configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily,
One of the results of the first mini-game is a result (hereinafter referred to as “second result”) indicating that the second notice is to be performed.
One of the results of the second mini-game is the second result.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e14)
A gaming table according to appendix e12 or e13,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effects during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display,
One of the multiple types of effects is a first effect,
One of the multiple types of effects is a second effect,
When the first mini game is performed, the first production is configured more easily than the second production,
When the second mini game is performed, the second effect is configured more easily than the first effect.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e15)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices e12 to e14,
The appearance rate of the plurality of types of mini-games differs between the non-electric support state and the electric support state.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e16)
The game stand according to any one of appendices e12 to e15,
The first mini game is a mini game performed with the first character appearing,
The second mini game is a mini game performed with the first character appearing,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e17)
A gaming machine as set forth in appendix e13,
The first mini game is a game that may be performed with the first character appearing,
The second mini game is a mini game that may be performed with the first character appearing,
The first mini game is a mini game that may be performed with the appearance of a third character,
The second mini game is a mini game that may be performed with the appearance of a fourth character,
In the first mini game, the second result is more easily derived when the third character appears than when the first character appears,
In the second mini game, the second result is more easily derived when the fourth character appears than when the first character appears.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e18)
The game stand according to any one of appendices e12 to e17,
In the certain display area, when the mini game is not displayed, another effect display (hereinafter referred to as “third effect display”) is performed.
When the mini game is started, the third effect display is erased.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e19)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices e12 to e18,
The certain display area is partitioned by a frame,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e20)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices e12 to e19,
The certain display area is a preset display area.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e21)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices e12 to e20,
The certain display area is formed by enlarging a display area preset in connection with the start of the mini game.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e22)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices e12 to e21,
The certain display area is an area provided in the display means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e23)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices e12 to e21,
Provided with a display means (hereinafter referred to as “second display means”) different from the display means,
The certain display area is an area provided in the second display means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e24)
A notice means capable of executing a plurality of notices;
Display means capable of displaying mini-games;
A game machine equipped with
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
One of the plurality of notices is a first notice,
One of the plurality of notices is a second notice,
The case where the second notice is performed rather than the first notice is configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed and confirmed easily.
The mini game is a game in which a plurality of results are prepared,
One of the plurality of results is a first result;
One of the plurality of results is a second result;
The notice is a notice executed according to the result of the mini-game,
The second notice is more easily performed when the second result is derived than when the first result is derived.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e25)
A gaming machine as set forth in appendix e24,
Before the result of the mini game is derived, the result of the mini game becomes the second result, which suggests that the second notice is likely to be performed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e26)
A game machine according to appendix e24 or e25,
Providing directing means that can execute the first directing,
The effect means is a display means,
The first effect is an effect performed in relation to the decorative symbol variation display,
The first effect is an effect in which a plurality of effect results are prepared,
One of the plurality of performance results is a first performance result,
One of the plurality of performance results is a second performance result,
Before the result of the first effect is derived, it is suggested that the result of the first effect becomes an advantageous development by becoming the second effect result,
Benefits that are more advantageous to the player than the second result is more likely to be given to the player,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e27)
A game machine according to appendix e26,
When the second performance result is derived, a big hit is given,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e28)
The game stand according to appendix e26 or e27,
The mini game is a game that can be executed in the first period,
The first effect is an effect that can be executed in the second period,
The first period and the second period are periods in which at least a part overlaps,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e29)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices e26 to e28,
In one decorative symbol variation display, the mini game is started before the first effect.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e30)
The game stand according to any one of appendices e24 to e29,
Provided with operating means provided at a position where the player can operate,
When the operation means is operated in the mini game, the result of the mini game is derived,
When the operation means is not operated in the mini game, the result of the mini game is not derived,
If the result of the mini-game is not derived, the first notice is easier to perform than the second notice,
When the result of the mini-game is derived, the second notice is more easily performed than the first notice.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e31)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices e24 to e30,
Even if the second notice is scheduled to be executed (hereinafter referred to as “first case”), if the result of the mini game is not derived, the first notice is executed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e32)
A gaming machine according to appendix e31,
There is a hold icon display means that can display multiple types of hold icons,
One of the plurality of types of hold icons is a first hold icon,
One of the plurality of types of hold icons is a second hold icon,
The first notice is a notice that the first hold icon is displayed,
The second notice is a notice that the second hold icon is displayed,
The mini game is started during execution of a certain symbol variation display in a state where the first hold icon is displayed,
In the first case, if the result of the mini game is not derived, the first hold icon is not changed to the second hold icon,
In the first case, when the result of the mini game is derived, the first hold icon is changed to the second hold icon.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e33)
A gaming machine according to appendix e31,
There is a hold icon display means that can display multiple types of hold icons,
One of the plurality of types of hold icons is a first hold icon,
One of the plurality of types of hold icons is a second hold icon,
The first notice is a notice that the first hold icon is displayed,
The second notice is a notice that the second hold icon is displayed,
The mini game is started during execution of a certain symbol variation display in a state where the first hold icon is displayed,
In the first case, when the result of the mini game is derived, the first hold icon is changed to the second hold icon during execution of the certain symbol variation display,
In the first case, when the result of the mini-game is not derived, the first hold icon is not changed to the second hold icon during execution of the certain symbol variation display, and the certain symbol is not changed. Changing from the first hold icon to the second hold icon during execution of the symbol change display starting after the change display;
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e34)
The game stand according to any one of appendices e24 to e29,
Provided with operating means provided at a position where the player can operate,
In the mini game, the same result is derived when the operation means is operated and when the operation means is not operated.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e35)
The game stand according to any one of appendices e24 to e34,
The mini-game starts before reaching,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e36)
Operation means provided at a position where the player can operate;
Display means;
A game machine equipped with
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
The display means is means capable of displaying a mini game,
The result of the mini game is derived by operating the operation means,
The mini game results change depending on the operation status of the operation means,
The result of the mini-game may include a result (hereinafter referred to as “first result”) that is not related to the result of the determination of success or failure.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e37)
A gaming machine according to appendix e36,
The mini-game is a game aimed at achieving a certain problem,
Whether or not the certain problem is achieved depends on the operation status of the operation means.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e38)
The game stand according to appendix e36 or e37,
Decorative symbol display means capable of executing decorative symbol variation display,
The mini-game is a game that may be started in a first period (hereinafter referred to as “first case”),
The first period is a period in which the start of the decorative symbol variation display is not suspended,
The first period is a period in which the decorative symbol variation display is not executed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e39)
A gaming machine according to appendix e38,
An automatic operation of the operation means is configured to be executable,
In the mini game in the first case, the auto operation is configured to be impossible to execute,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e40)
The game stand according to appendix e38 or e39,
The mini game may be started in a second period (hereinafter referred to as “second case”),
The second period is a period including the execution of the decorative symbol variation display and the execution of the jackpot game,
In the first case, the first result is more easily derived as a result of the mini-game than in the second case.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e41)
The game stand according to appendix e40,
The second period is a period not including the first period.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e42)
The game stand according to appendix e40 or e41,
In the second case, a result related to the result of the decorative symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “second result”) is more easily derived as a result of the mini-game than in the first case.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e43)
A gaming machine according to appendix e42,
The second result when the mini-game is started during the execution of the decorative symbol variation display is a notice or a pre-read notice,
The second result in the case where the mini game is started during the execution of the jackpot game is a pre-reading notice,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e44)
The game stand according to any one of appendices e40 to e43,
The type of mini game is different between the first case and the second case.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e45)
A gaming machine according to any one of appendices e40 to e44,
In the mini game in the first case, an effective period display (hereinafter referred to as “first effective period display”) of the operating means is configured to be displayed.
In the mini game in the second case, an effective period display of the operation means (hereinafter referred to as “second effective period display”) is displayed.
The first effective period display is a meter display,
The second effective period display is a meter display,
The speed at which the meter decreases is different between the first effective period display and the second effective period display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e46)
The game stand according to any one of appendices e40 to e45,
In the mini game in the first case, a display that prompts the operation of the operation means (hereinafter referred to as “first operation promotion display”) is displayed.
In the mini game in the second case, a display for urging the operation of the operation means (hereinafter referred to as “second operation promotion display”) is displayed.
The first operation promotion display includes a first number of display patterns,
The second operation promotion display includes a second number of display patterns,
In the first number and the second number, the second number is larger.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e47)
The game stand according to any one of appendices e38 to e46,
In the first case, only the first result is derived as a result of the mini game.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e48)
Operation means provided at a position where the player can operate;
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect display;
A game machine equipped with
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
One of the plurality of types of effect display is a first effect display,
One of the plurality of types of effect display is a second effect display,
The first effect display is an effect display related to the decorative symbol variation display,
The second effect display is a mini game effect display,
The first effect display is an effect display in which a jackpot notice (hereinafter referred to as “first notice”) may be executed,
The second effect display is an effect display in which a notice related to the first notice (hereinafter referred to as “second notice”) may be derived.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e49)
A game machine according to appendix e48,
The first notice is a notice by pseudo-repetition display,
The pseudo continuous display is a display that displays a temporary stop display of a decorative symbol a plurality of times in a single decorative symbol variation display,
The second notice is a notice that the number of temporary stop displays of the decorative symbols in the pseudo-continuous display will increase.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e50)
A game machine according to appendix e48,
The first notice is a notice by pseudo-repetition display,
The pseudo continuous display is a display that displays a temporary stop display of a decorative symbol a plurality of times in a single decorative symbol variation display,
The second notice is a notice that the pseudo continuous display is started.
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix e51)
A game machine according to appendix e48,
The first notice is a notice by pseudo-repetition display,
The pseudo continuous display is a display that displays a temporary stop display of a decorative symbol a plurality of times in a single decorative symbol variation display,
The second notice is a notice of the number of temporary stop displays of the decorative symbols in the pseudo-continuous display.
A game stand characterized by that.

  It should be noted that the term “notice icon” described so far is named for the sake of convenience, and does not narrow the interpretation. For example, the notice icon is named for convenience by the display mode (motif), and may be called a notice item when the notice icon is a tool, and called a notice character when the notice icon is a character. In some cases, when the notice icon is a display indicating a skill, it may be called a notice skill, and when the notice icon is a box, it may be called a notice box. , A notice medal). In addition, the term “notice” in the notice icon is also named for convenience only, and does not narrow the interpretation. For example, it may be called as a charge item or a stock item for indicating that it is to be stored.

  Moreover, what has been referred to as a lamp or illumination so far is an example of a light emitting means, and the lamp can be replaced if it emits light such as an LED or a cold cathode tube.

  For example, the above embodiment can also be applied to an enclosed game machine that circulates and uses game balls enclosed in a game machine. For example, the pachinko machine may be an enclosed pachinko machine that encloses a sphere and circulates the enclosed sphere in the pachinko machine, and this enclosed pachinko machine uses the enclosed sphere as a launch ball, The ball payout may be executed by electronic display.

  Note that the items described in the above detailed description can be combined.

  Further, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention only list the most preferable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what was done. In addition, even if it is the structural requirement contained only in each description of embodiment described above, a modification, or an additional remark, you may apply the structural requirement to another embodiment, a modified example, or an additional remark.

  In the above embodiment, a pachinko machine is used as an example of a game table, but the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention is also applicable to a slot machine 1000 as shown in FIG.

  The game table according to the present invention corresponds to each reel shown in FIG. 186, “a plurality of types of symbols 1002 and a plurality of reels 1002 that are rotationally driven, a start lever 1004 for instructing the rotation of the reels. A stop button 1006 for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, lottery means (lottery prize internal lottery) for determining whether or not internal winning of a plurality of types of winning combinations is successful, and a lottery result of the lottery means The combination of symbols displayed by the reel stop control means (reel stop control processing) that performs stop control for stopping the rotation of the reels and the reels stopped based on the lottery result of the lottery means corresponds to the winning combination. And determining means (winning determination process) for determining whether or not the symbol combination is predetermined, and when the symbol stop mode is a predetermined winning mode, In addition to payout control means (medal payout process 1008) for performing game medium payout processing for paying out game media to be played, the effect means 1010 for executing effects based on the lottery result of the lottery means, A launching device 1014 that launches a ball into the game area 1012, a winning opening 1016 configured to be able to enter a ball launched from the launching device, a detection means 1018 that detects a ball that has entered the winning opening 1016, A payout means 1020 for paying out a ball when the detection means 1018 detects a ball, a variable display device 1022 for variably displaying a predetermined symbol (identification information), and a shutter 1024 movable to a position for shielding the variable display device 1022 And a movable body 1026 that operates in a predetermined operation mode, and the variable display device 1022 is designed to receive a game ball in the winning opening. And the stopped displayed after varied is also suitable to the slot machine 1000 "is a rendering device 1010, such as to produce a game.

  The game machine according to the present invention is shown in FIG. 187 (a). “Insert a bill into the bill insertion slot 2002, execute a lottery based on the bet 2004 and start 2006 operation, and display the lottery result on the lottery result display device 2008. Then, at the time of winning, the number of bonus coins is added to the remaining credit number, and when cashout 2009 is selected, the casino machine 2000 issues a receipt from the receipt issuing machine 2010 with a code corresponding to the remaining credit number. It may be.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 5B, the cellular phone 3000 having a storage unit for storing the electronic data for realizing the present invention, and the electronic data for realizing the present invention as shown in FIG. The present invention may be applied to a portable game machine 4000 having a storage unit for storing the video data and a home video game machine 5000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention.

  More specifically, the mobile phone 3000 in FIG. 5B includes an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit that acquires data related to the game through a mobile phone line, and acquired data about the game (this book And a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

  The portable game machine 4000 in FIG. 6C includes an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit that acquires data related to the game from a predetermined storage medium (DVD or the like), and acquired data related to the game (the present invention). And a control unit for controlling the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit. The home video game machine 5000 in FIG. 6D includes an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit that acquires data related to a game from a predetermined storage medium (DVD or the like), and acquired data ( And a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 5E, the present invention may be applied to a data server 6000 that stores electronic data for realizing the present invention. In some cases, the electronic data for realizing the present invention is downloaded from the data server 6000 to the home video game machine 5000 shown in FIG.

  In addition, a game can be executed by applying the present invention to a game program that simulates the operation of a real machine such as a pachinko machine for a home game machine. In that case, a DVD-ROM, CD-ROM, FD (flexible disk), or any other recording medium can be used as a recording medium for recording the game program.

  Furthermore, the present invention has been described by taking a pachinko machine and a slot machine as examples of game machines, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and may be applied to an arrangement ball game machine, a ball ball game machine, a smart ball, and the like.

  In the embodiment described above, the pachinko machine 100 has been described as an example. For example, a game ball is enclosed in a main body frame of the pachinko machine, and the enclosed ball is used by being circulated in the main body of the pachinko machine. The present invention can also be applied to an expression pachinko machine, and the enclosed pachinko machine may use an enclosed ball as a launch ball, and the payout of the ball may be executed by credit.

  Further, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention only list the most preferable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what was done. In addition, even if it is the structural requirement contained only in each description of embodiment described above, a modification, or an additional remark, you may apply the structural requirement to another embodiment, a modified example, or an additional remark.

100 Pachinko machine 120 Speaker 136 Production button 137 Operation key unit 137a Up button 137b Down button 137c Left button 137d Right button 137e OK button 138 Production button lamp 208 Decorative symbol display device 212 First special figure display device 214 Second special figure display device 224 Production movable body 230 1st special figure starting port 232 2nd special figure starting port 234 Variable winning opening 246 Shielding device 281 Special icon 1 hold icon display area 285 Notice icon display area 286 Produce hold lamp 300 Main control section 304 CPU
306 ROM
308 RAM
400 First sub-control unit 404 CPU
406 ROM
408 RAM
418 Various lamps 500 Second sub-control unit 504 CPU
506 ROM
508 RAM
532 Gaming board lamp 542 Gaming table frame lamp 600 Dispensing control unit 800 First display device 802 Second display device 804 Third display device 806 Production movable body 808 Production movable body 810 Production movable body

Claims (9)

Operation means provided at a position where the player can operate;
Display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of effect display;
A game machine equipped with
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
One of the plurality of types of effect display is a first effect display,
One of the plurality of types of effect display is a second effect display,
The first effect display is an effect display related to the decorative symbol variation display,
The second effect display is a mini game effect display,
The first effect display is an effect display including a first operation promotion display,
The second effect display is an effect display including a second operation promotion display,
The first operation promotion display is a display prompting the operation of the operation means,
The second operation promotion display is a display prompting the operation of the operation means,
The first operation promotion display and the second operation promotion display are different operation promotion displays,
The first effect display is demonstration display that may jackpot notice is executed,
The second effect display is an effect display in which a second notice may be executed ,
If the previous SL first operation promoting display is displayed, the big hit notice in response to said operation means is operated (hereinafter, referred to as "first notice".) Is displayed,
When the second operation promotion display is displayed, the second notice is displayed in response to the operation means being operated,
The first notice is a notice that can be displayed in a plurality of modes (hereinafter referred to as “a plurality of first notice modes”),
One of the plurality of first notice modes is a first mode,
One of the plurality of first notice modes is a second mode,
The second notice is a notice that can be displayed in a plurality of modes (hereinafter referred to as “a plurality of second notice modes”),
One of the plurality of second notice modes is a third mode,
One of the plurality of second notice modes is a fourth mode,
The second notice of the fourth aspect is a notice suggesting that the aspect of the first notice changes,
In some cases, both the first operation promotion display and the second operation promotion display are displayed (hereinafter referred to as “first state”).
When the operation means is operated in the first state, at least one of the first notice and the second notice is executed,
In the first state, depending on the operation means being operated, the first state may be changed to the second state,
The second state is a state in which the first operation promotion display is displayed and the second notice is displayed in the fourth mode.
In the second state, depending on the operation means being operated, the second state may be changed to the third state,
The third state is a state in which the second notice of the fourth aspect is displayed and the first notice is displayed in the first aspect.
In the third state, the first notice of the first aspect changes to the second aspect in connection with the second notice of the fourth aspect being displayed.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 1,
  The case where the second notice is displayed in the fourth aspect is more likely to be displayed in the first aspect than in the case where the second notice is displayed in the third aspect. Is easily changed to the second aspect,
  When the first notice changes from the first aspect to the second aspect than when the first notice does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect, Eventually the jackpot symbol is easy to be confirmed and displayed.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 1 or 2,
  One of the plurality of first notice modes is a fifth mode,
  One of the plurality of second notice modes is a sixth mode,
  The first aspect and the fifth aspect are different aspects,
  The second aspect and the fifth aspect are different aspects,
  The third aspect and the sixth aspect are different aspects,
  The fourth aspect and the sixth aspect are different aspects,
  When the first notice is displayed in the first aspect and the second notice is displayed in the third aspect, the aspect of the first notice does not change,
  When the first notice is displayed in the first aspect and the second notice is displayed in the fourth aspect, the first notice is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. Changes to
  When the first notice is displayed in the first aspect and the second notice is displayed in the sixth aspect, the first notice is changed from the first aspect to the fifth aspect. Changes to
  The case where the first notice changes from the first aspect to the fifth aspect is more final than the case where the first notice changes from the first aspect to the second aspect. The big hit symbol is easy to be confirmed and displayed.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 3,
  The display means is a means constituted by a plurality of display means,
  One of the plurality of display means is a first display means,
  One of the plurality of display means is a second display means,
  The first effect display is an effect display displayed on the first display means,
  The second effect display is an effect display displayed on the second display means.
A game stand characterized by that. The game table according to claim 4,
  The second display means is a means that may move between a first position and a second position,
  The second position is a position where the second display means may overlap the first effect display,
  The first position is a position where the second display means does not overlap the first effect display,
  When the second effect display is displayed, the second display means moves to the second position;
A game stand characterized by that. A gaming table according to any one of claims 1 to 5,
  When the operation means is not operated in the state where the second operation promotion display is displayed, the second notice is not displayed,
  If the second notice is not displayed, the displayed aspect of the first notice does not change,
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 6,
  When the operation means is operated in the second effective period, the display of the second notice is started,
  The second effect display is an effect display including a second effective period display,
  The second effective period display is a display whose display mode changes according to the passage of the second effective period.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 1 thru | or 7,
  The first notice is a look-ahead notice,
A game stand characterized by that. A game stand according to any one of claims 1 to 8,
  You can display the number of hold icons corresponding to the number of the start of the symbol variation display is held,
  The first notice is a notice made by changing the display mode of the hold icon.
A game stand characterized by that.